Manual of 
Military Training 



BY 



> 



MAJOR JAMES Af MOSS 

UNITED STATES ARMY 



Intended, primarily, for use in connection with the 
instruction and training of Cadets in our military schools, 
and, of COMPANY officers of the Organized Militia, and, 
secondarily, as a guide to COMPANY officers of the 
Regular Army, the aim being to make efficient fighting 
COMPANIES and to qualify our Cadets and Militia 
officers for the duty and responsibilities of COMPANY 
officers of Volunteers. 



GENERAL AGENTS 

GEORGE BANTA PUBLISHING COMPANY 

Army and College Printers 
MENASHA - WISCONSIN 

^ .^ .^ V 



->:.' , : 3 



V 



16 



(f apV.^ 



Copyright 1914 

hy 

Major James A. Moss 



First impression (October, 1914), 10,000. 
Second impression (September, 1915), 10,000. 
Third impression (March, 1916), 10,000. 
Fourth impression (July, 1916), 10,000. 



■'7 



PRINTED AND BOUND BY 

GEORGE BANTA PUBLISHING GOMPANY 

ARMY AND COLLEGE PRINTERS 

MENASHA, WISCONSIN 



A 

^ PREFATORY 

?^ The COMPANY is tlie basic fighting tactical unit —it is the founda- 

V tion rock upon which an army is built— and the fighting efficiency of a COM- 
PANY is based on systematic and thorough training. 

This book is a presentation of MILITARY TRAINING as mani- 
fested in the training and instruction of a COMPANY. The book contains 
everything pertaining to the training and instruction of COMPANY officers, 
noncommissioned officers and privates, and the officer who masters its con- 
tents and who makes his COMPANY proficient in the subjects embodied 
herein, will be in every way qualified, without the assistance of a single 
other book, to command with credit and satisfaction, in peace and in war, 
a COMPANY that will be an efficient fi.ghting weapon. 

The book is divided as follows: 

PART I. Drills, Exercises, Guard Duty, Target Practice, 
Ceremoxies and Inspections. 

PART II. , Miscellaneous Subjects Pertaining to Company 
Training and Instruction. 

PART III. Company Field Training. 

A program of instruction and training covering a given period can 
readily be arranged by looking over the TABLE OF CONTENTS, and 
selecting therefrom such subjects as it is desired to use, the number and 
kind, and the time to be devoted to each, depending upon the time available, 
• and climatic and other conditions. It is suggested that, for the sake of 
variety, in drawing up a program of instruction and training, when prac- 
ticable, a part of each day or a part of each drill time, be devoted to theo- 
retical work and a part to practical work. For example, the theoretical work 
could be carried on in the forenoon and the practical work in the afternoon, 
or the theoretical work could be carried on from, say, 8 to 9:30 a.m., and 
the practical work from 9 or 9:30 to 10:30 or II a.m. 

Attention is invited to the completeness of the Index, whereby one 
is enabled to locate at once any point covered in the book. 



[3] 



INDEX 

(The minibcrs refer to paragraphs.) 



Par. No. 
A 

Abatis 707 

Addressing, form of 631 

Administration of company 411 

ADVANCE GUARD: 

(jcncial principles SH 

In the attack 657 

Orders of enlisted men 700 

Advance posts 666 

Advice to riflemen 404 

Ammunition, in attack 648 

APPLIED MINOR TACTICS: 

Art of war defined 446 

"Decision" 452 

Estimating the situation - -. - -^ 451 

General common sense principles 

445 isc 453 

Maneuvers 449 & 450 

Map problems 447 & 450 

"Mission" 451 

Noncommissioned officers, respon- 
sibilities in war 446 

Responsibilities of noncommissioned 

officers in war 446 

Situation, estimating 451 

Terrain exercises 447 & 450 

War K.Tnc 448 & 450 

ARTILLERY: 

Company supporting 658 

In the attack 645 & 646 

Art of war defined 446 

ATTACK. COMPANY IN: 

Advance guard 657 

Advantages 639 

Ammunition 648 

Charge, the 654 

Company, as support to artillery ..658 

Counter-attack 655 

Fifth stage 654 

Fire, not to be opened until neces- 
sary 640 

Fire positions, selection 649 

First stage 644 

Five stages 643 

I'ourth stage 652 

Hostile artillery 645 

Importance 638 

Meeting engagement 656 

Obstacles 650 & 653 

Our artillery 646 

Rules and principles 639 

Rushes, size of 641 

Rushes, to be made under cover- 
ing fire 642 

Second stage '. .647 

Stages: 

First 644 

Second 647 

Third 651 

Fourth 652 

Fifth 654 



B 



Far. No. 



[SJ 



BAYONETS: 

Exercises 354 

Nomenclature 354a 

Use in the defense 667 

Bite of rabid animal 571 

Books & records, company 423 

BRIDGES: 

Defense 673 

Fact.s to be obtained about, by pa- 
trols 492 

Reconnoitering of, by patrols 484 

Bruises, treatment 572 & 599 

Buildings, farm enclosures, etc., de- 
fense 669 

Buildings, reconnoitering of, by pa- 
trols 488 

Bunks, improvised 744 

Burning clothes 573 



CAMPING: 

Hunks 744 

Castrametation 736 

Construction of latrines 739 

Incinerators 742 & 743 

Kitchen pits 741 

Kitchens 740 

Making camp 738 

Sanitation and police 747 

Selection of site 737 

Water 746 

Wood 745 

Camps, abandoned 478 

Camp equipment, care of 629 

Camp noises 477 

Camp orders of enlisted men 704 

Canals, facts to be obtained about, 

by patrols .*........... 495 

Captain, duties and responsibilities 

410 & 413 

CARE OF: 

Camp equipment 629 

Clothing and equipment 627 

I'eet 565 

Health 564 

Ride 637 

Russet leather 628 

Shoes 630 

Castrametation 736 

Cat and mouse contest 687 

Cavalry, defense against 675 

Charge, the 654 

Cheerfulness, human clement 437 

Cheveaux de frise 710 

Chilblains, treatment 592 

Chills, treatment 577 

Cleanliness, personal 626 

Clearness in instructing 430 

CLOTHES: 

Burning .' 573 

Care of 627 



Par. No. 

Code signalling 395 

Colds, treatment 574 

Color sentinels 373 

Colors and standards, saluting .....621 

Commander of the guard 368 

Communication on firing line 731 

COMPANY: 

Administration .410 

Books and records 423 

Captain, duties and responsibilities 

410 & 413 

Contentment and harmony 416 

Defense 659 

Devolution of work and responsi- 
bility 411a 

Discipline 624 

Drunken men, control of 420 

Extra fatigue, forms of 419 

First Sergeant 414 

Government 410 

Harmony and contentment 416 

Inspections .421 

Lieutenant, duties ^nd responsi- 
bilities , 412 & 413 

Noncommissioned officers 415 

Obscene men, control of 420 

Patrolling and scouting 679 

Privileges and rewards 417 

Property responsibility 422 

Punishment, forms of 419 

Records and books 423 

Responsibilities of noncommis- 
sioned officers in war 446 

Rewards and privileges 417 

Saturday morning inspection 421 

Scouting and patrolling 679 

Treatment of men 413a 

Trials by court-martial 418 

Compass, determination of points of, 

by bark and moss on trees 682 

Complaints to the captain 633 

Complaints from guards 378 

Comradeship 439 

Concealment and dodging 685 

Constipation 575 

Contentment and harmony 416 

Contentment, human element 438 

Contours 542 & 548 

Conventional signs 544, 554 & 560 

Conventional signs 560 

Convulsions 576 

Cooking, individual 748 

Corporal of the guard 370 

Cossack posts 520 & 523 

Counter-attack 655 

Countersigns and paroles Zl^ 

Courtesy, military 615-624 

Cramps 577 

Cross roads, how reconnoitered by 

patrols 481 

D 

DEFENSE, COMPANY IN: 

Advance posts 666 

Advantages of defense 661 

Against cavalry 675 

At night 677 



Par. No. 
DEFENSE, COMPANY IN (Cont'd) 

Bayonet, use of 667 

Bridges 673 

Buildings, farm enclosures, etc. ..669 

Classes of defense 660 

Clearing field of fire 672 

Clearing in a wood 671 

Defiles 673 

Edge of a wood 670 

General rules and principles 659 

Necessity for defensive action ....659 

Night attack 668 

Requisites of good defensive posi- 
tions 662 

Salients 663 

Skyline, avoidance 664 

Trenches 665 

Types of defense 676 

Villages 674 

DEFILES: 

Defense 673 

Facts to be obtained about, by pa- 
trols 498 

Reconnoitering of, by patrols 483 

Deflection and elevation correction 

drills 399 

Demolitions 503 

Demonstration, occular 441 & 442 

Deportment, military 625 

Designation of targets 727 

Detached posts 530 

Determination and individual intelli- 
gence 432 

Devolution of work and responsibil- 
ity 411a 

Diagnosis tag 569 

Diarrhea 578 

Directions on map 540a & 554 

Discipline 424 

Dislocations, treatment 579 

Distribution of fire 724 

Division of work ^ 411 

DRILL REGULATIONS; 
About face: 

Company 202 

Individual 81 

About, in making, mounted officer 

turns to left 53 

Advance : 

By crawling 229 

By rushes 228 

By succession of thin lines 227 

Of company into an engagement 221 
Aiming point: 

Announced before or after sight 

setting 160 

Once announced need not be re- 
peated 161 

Alarm calls 334 

Alignment: 

Battalion 260 

Company 191 

Definition 1 

Of deployed lines 212 

Squad 136 

Ammunition : 

Distribution before deployment of 
company 232 



C<] 



Par. No. 
DRILL REGULATIONS (Cont'd) 
Issue by battalion Gotmmaadear ..278 

Arm signals • 69 

Assemble : 

Battalion 275 

By squad from skirmishers 153 

Company 220 

From distance formation 139 

From interval formation 137a 

From platoon of squad columns 226 

As skirmishers, deployment 150 

"As you were'* A4 

At ease: 

Battalion 274 

Company 206 

School of soldier 76 

Attack unit, the battalion 284 

Attention, position 6f 75 

Attention from parade rest 121 

Attention to be fixed at first motion 

of 60 

At will, firing 169 

Back step 91 

Band: 

Formation, etc 320 

Post, when attached to battalion 251 
Base: 

Base unit to march in quick 
time in successive move- 
ments in double time when 
not otherwise prescribed ....41 

Definition 2 

Designation of company in at- 
tack 277a 

Flank company in rushes 287 

Squad in deployment as skirmish- 
ers 209, 211 & 215 

Battalion: 

Assembling 275 

Combat principles 276 

Dismissing 259 

Execution of certain movements 
as explained in schools of 
the soldier and squad ..... .255 

Execution of loadings and firings 257 

How formed 258 

In column of squads changes 
direction by same command 

as for company 268 

Inspection 311 

Instruction 248 

Largest unit executing movement 
at command^ of execution of 

its commander 65 

Parade ^ 304 

Repetition of preparatory com- 
mands ^ 252 

Review 300 

Simultaneous movements by com- 
panies or platoons 256 

Tactical unit , 248 

The attack unit 284 

Battalion right 267 

Battle sight, definition 3 

Bayonets : 

By whom determined when fixed 289 
Not to be fixed except in bayonet 
exercise on guard or for com- 
bat ..7 100 



Par. No. 
DRILL REGULATIONS (Cont'd) 
Blank cartridges, firing prohibited 

at less than 100 yards 236 

Bugle calls 332 

Bugle signals 67 

"By the numbers" 105 

Cadence, marchings t4 

Calls, bugle 332 

Captain responsible for instruction 
of officers and non-commis- 
sioned officers 177 

Care of rifle 96 

Cease firing: 

Action when command is givea 

, 67 & 173 

Whistle signal not to be used by 

fraction of firing line 234 

Center, definition 4 

Ceremonies : ^ 

Consolidation into detachment 

of all mounted men SS 

Designed to teach precision, etc. 32 

General rules 294 

Change of direction, partial 47 

Change step 95 

Charge, the 290 

Charge bayonet 127 

Classes of firing 238 

Clip fire: 

Application 238 

How. executed 171 

Close on, first (fourth) company ..269 
Close order: 

Definition 20 

Firings in 232 

Formation, normally in double 

ranks 49 

Rules 184 

Color : 

Definition, where kept, etc 316 

Manual of 319 

Receiving, the 31t 

Saluted by reviewing officer and 

others 297 

Color guard 317 

Column : 

Definition 5 

Rectifying 261 

Column of: 

Companies from column of squads 264 

Files, formation of 208 

Platoons from column of sguads 205 
Platoons, formation from line ..193 
Squads and change of direction 

from line 199 

Squads, battalion in, changes 
direction by same commands 

as for company 268 

Squads from close column 272 

Squads from close line 273 

Squads from column of com- 
panies 265 

Squads from line 194 

Squads from line of platoons ..198 

Twos, formation of 207 

Column right: 

Battalion 266 

Company in column of platoons 196 
Company in column of squads ..If 7 



Par. No. 
DRILL REGULATIONS (Cont'd) 
Combat : 

Exercise, description and how 

conducted 35 

Orders 277 

Patrols in company acting alone 231 

Principles, battalion 276-291 

Principles, regiment 293 

Commands : 

Attention to be fixed at first 

word of 60 

Battalion largest unit executing 
movement at command of 
execution of its commander .65 

Definition 64 

During fire given by signals .... 234 
-. Facinpf towards troops when 

giving 66 

For certain skirmish line move- 
ments, same as in close or- 
der 213 

For firings when deployed . . . .233 
Given by commander of unit 
concerned when not other- 
wise prescribed 64 

How given 64 

Kinds 64 

Of execution 64 

Of "quick time" to precede 
command of execution if at 
halt or marching in quick 

time 40 

Prefaced by designation of com- 
pany in battalion drill ....252 
Preparatory, repetition and bat- 
talion drill 252 

Preparatory 64 

Repetition by commanders of 

battalions and larger units ..65 
Repetition by commanders of 

subdivisions 61 

Repetitions by platoon leaders 187 
Use in drills at attention and 

otherwise 58 

Commanding ^ officers accountable 
for training of their organi- 
zations 28 

Commence firing, action when sig- 
nal is given 67 

Common tents, pitching 326 

Company : 

Acting alone 231 

Advance into an engagement ..221 

Alignments 191 

Arranged from right to left ac- 
cording to rank, captains 

present 249 

Depleted, led as single platoon ..183 

Dismissing 190 

Division into platoons 179 

Execution of^ movements as ex- 
plained in Schools of the 
Soldier and the Squad ....182 
Flags, description and use 70 & 71 
Formation in single ranks ....189 

How formed 178 & 188 

Inspection 309 

Largest unit to execute extend- 
ed order drill 33 



Par. No* 
DRILL REGULATIONS (Cont'd) 
Largest unit to execute move- 
ments in extended order by 

prescribed commands 277 

Numerical designation from 

right to left 250 

Organization into squads 178 

Plate showing posts of officers 

and others 180 

Range finders 237 

School of 177 

Support 230 

Company front into line 204 

Company right 192 

Companies, line of, defined 48 

Conical wall tent 328 

Corporal is squad leader — posi- 
tion of in ranks 133 

Correction of errors, halting com- 
mand to make 43 

Counting off 135 & 178 

Cover, use of 174 

Covering fire in advance by 

rushes 246 

Crawling, advance by 229 

Cut-off kept "off'* except when 

cartridges are used 99 

Defense, battalion in 291 

Definitions 1 

Deployment : 

Definition 6 

In combat 279 

Of company in oblique direction 217 

Depth, definition 7 

Designation of companies 250 

Dismissing battalion 259 

Dismissing company 190 

Dismissing squad or company ....130 

Distance, definition 8 

Distances, to take 138 

Distribution of fire 240 

Double rank, company formed in ..178 
Double rank, normal close order 

formation 49 

Double time: 

Adding command after prepara- 
tory command 85 

Any movement not specially ex- 
cepted may be executed in.. 40 
Command given to hasten move- 
ments begun in quick time ..42 
Command of, to precede com- 
mand of execution if ^ at 
halt or marching in quick 

time 40 

From halt or quick time 87 

Position of disengaged hand ..104 
Dressing: 

. Batftlion 260 

Company 191 

Companies in battalion drill ...254 
Drill regulations furnished as guide 30 
Drill regulations, spirit to be 

sought in interpretation 30 

Drills executed at attention teach 

precision, etc 32 

Drills, explanation of movements 

by instructor 73 

Drum major, signals of 321 



[8] 



Par. No. 
DRILL REGULATIONS (Cont'd) 
Duties of officers and sergeants in 

battle 134 

Echelon, definition 26 

Elastic formation essential to cor- 
rect training for battle 29 

Element, definition 9 

Enemy, imaginary, outlined and 

represented, definition of 36 

Equipment, unslinging and sling- 
ing 310 

Errors, halting command when 

marching, to correct 43 

Escorts of honor 307 

Escort of the color 306 

Estimating distances, training in 176 

Estimating ranges 237 

Excellence of organization, judged 

by field training 28 

Extend on first (fourth) company 270 
Extended order : 

Company largest unit to ex- 
ecute movements by pre- 
scribed commands 277 

Definition 21 

Nature and object — executed at 
ease — company largest unit 

to execute 33 

Rules for deployment 209 

Eyes, important for soldiers to 

use in observing 175 

Eyes right (left) 79 

Eyes right not executed by troops 
except in ceremonies and sa- 
luting colors 315 

Facings 80 

Fall in, executed with piece order 101 

Falling in with hand on hip 49 

Fall out 76 

Field exercises, object and how 

conducted 34 

Field officers, habitually mounted ..52 
Field training, excellence of or- 
ganizations judged by 28 

File, definition 10 

File closers : 

Definition 11 

Do not execute loadings 185 

In taking intervals and dis- 
tances 186 

Posts in platoon movements ....194 

To rectify mistakes, etc 50 

Fire 232 

Fire attack 228 

Fire at will, application 238 

Fire at will, how executed 169 

Firing by volley 168 

Firing, classes of 238 

Fire control 242 & 282 

Fire direction 241 & 282 

Fire discipline 244 

Fire in battalion combat 283 

Fire unit, the platoon 242 

Firing: 

Always executed at halt 159 

Blank cartridges prohibited at 

less than 100 yards 236 

Execution by battalion 257 



Par. No. 
DRILL REGULATIONS (Cont'd) 

Faster or slower 170 

In close order 232 

Instruction in, to be preceded 

by command for loading ...159 
Not executed by file closers ....185 
Rear rank men do not fire, 
kneeling or lying down in 

double rank 159 

Firing line, battalion in combat 

279-281; 285 

Firing line, use of signals and 

means of intercommunication 234 
First sergeant never assigned as 

guide 181 

First sergeant, post of 181 

Fixed bayonet from order 125 

Fixed pivot, company movements 192 
Fixed pivot, used from line into 

column and reverse 46 

Flags, company, description and 

use 70 & 71 

Flag signals, 70 

Flank, definition 12 

Flank, march by 93 

Folding tents 330 

"Follow me" 149 

Formation, definition 13 

Formation calls 333 

Formations, falling in with hand 

on hip 49 

Formation of battalion . w. 258 

Forming of company 188 

Front, definition 14 

Front into line, battalion 263 

Front into line, company 204 

Full distance in column of sub- 
divisions 48 

Funeral escort 308 

General officers habitually mounted 52 
General rules for drills and for- 
mations 37 

Guide : 

Announcement in battalion drill, 253 
Assignment of Quartermaster 

sergeant 181 

Definition 15 

Designation in deployment ....209 
First sergeant never assigned as 181 

General rules for 45 

Of leading sub-division in col- 
umn charged with step 

and direction 48 

Right, squad 136 

Skirmishers, corporal 150 

Guides: 

Duties in close order 184 

Duties on firing line 243 

Execution of manual of arms 

in file closes 185 

In formation of platoon column 193 
In taking intervals and distances 186 

Posts in close order 184 

Half step 89 

Halt: 

Any movement can be executed 
from, unless otherwise pre- 
scribed 39 



[9] 



Par. No. 
DRILL REGULATIONS (Cont'd) 
If at, movements involving march- 
ing need not be prefaced 

by "forward" 39 

Marching forward from, in 

quick time 86 

Halting 92 

Halting, bringing rifle to order on 103 

Hand on hip when falling in 49 

Hand salute 82 

Head^ definition 16 

Imaginary enemy, defined 36 

"Incline to the right" (left) 47 

Inspection of arms before dismis- 
sal 130 

Inspection of arms from order .... 128 
Inspection of pieces when formed 
under arms and before dis- 
missal .98 

Inspections : 

Battalion 311 

Company 309 

Regimental 312 

Instruction of battalion 248 

Instruction of officers and non- 
commissioned officers 177 

Instruction without arms 75 

Interpretation of drill regulations, 

spirit to be grasped 30 

Interval : 

Between skirmishers 151 

Definition 17 

Hand on hip 49 

Increasing or decreasing be- 
tween skirmishers 152 

Taking 137 

Kneeling : 

From lying down 157 

From standing 154 

Position used in double rank for 

better utilization of cover ..158 
Leading unit to march in quick 
time in successive move- 
ments in double time, when 

not otherwise prescribed 41 

Left, definition 18 

Left shoulder arms from port ....118 
Left shoulder from order right 
shoulder or present and re- 
verse 119 

Line, definition 19 

Line from column of squads .... 194 

"Line of companies", defined 48 

"Line of platoons", defined 48 

Line of platoons from column of 

squads 198 

Line of platoons from line 200 

Loading : 

In line or skirmish line 164 

Of pieces before deployment of 

company 232 

Pieces once loaded, are kept 

loaded until further orders 160 
Position to be assumed at an- 
nouncement of sight setting 162 

Simulated 165 

Loadings and firings: 

Execution by battalions 257 

' [10] 



Par. No. 
DRILL REGULATIONS (Cont'd) 
Executed in line and skirmish 

line onlv 159 

Not executed by file closers ....185 

Lying down position 15S 

Lying down, position used in 
double rank for better utiliza- 
tion of cover 158 

Major's duties as battalion com- 

^ mander 248 

Major's duties in connection with 

deployment 279 

Manual of- arms: 

Execution by file closers 185 

Rules governing carrying of piece 97 

Rules governing execution 105 

Manual of tent pitching 323 

Manual of the bugle 332 

Manual of the color 319 

Manual of the saber 322 

March by the flank 93 

Marching, any movement can be 
executed when marching, un- 
less otherwise prescribed 39 

Marching forward in quick time 

from halt 86 

Marchings and steps 83 

Marchings from halt begin with 

left foot 83 

March to the rear 94 

Mark time 88 

Mass formations 269 

Minutiae, quibbling over, in inter- 
pretation of drill regulations ..30 
Mounted officer turns to left in 

making the about 54 

Mounted men, regiment or smaller 
unit, consolidated into detach- 
ment for ceremonies 55 

Movements : 

Any executed either from halt 
or when marching, unless 

otherwise prescribed 39 

Any not specially excepted may 

be executed in double time ..40 
Begun in quick time, hastened 

by command "Double time" 42 
Company, on moving pivot .... 195 
From halt, involving marching, 
need not be prefaced by 

"forward" 39 

On fixed pivot, company 192 

That may be executed toward 
cither flank, explained as 

toward one flank 38 

When marching, stayed by com- 
mand, 1. In place, 2. Halt ..43 
Moving pivot company movements 195 
Moving pivot, used in changing 

directions 46 

Musicians, post of 181 

Musicians to assist captain by 

observing enemy etc 235 

Muster 313 

Nomenclature of rifle 96 

Noncommissioned officers, duties 
commanding platoon or com- 
pany, post and position of piece 57 



Par. No. 
DRILL REGULATIONS (Cont'd) 
Noncommissioned officers, duties 

in battle 134 

Noncommissioned staff officers, 
posts for ceremonies and for- 
mations 56 

Numbering of companies 250 

Object of military training, suc- 
cess in battle '2^^ 

Oblique march 142 

Observation, importance of, to 

soldier 175 

Officers, duties in battle 134 

Officers, saluting 54 

On right (left) into line, battalion 262 

On right into line, company 203 

Order arms : 

Facings, alignments, etc., from 102 
Fall in executed with piece at... 101 

From inspection arms 129 

From present or port Ill 

From right shoulder 113 

From trail 123 

Standing position 106 

OrderMes, posts 52 & 56 

Orders : 

In combat 211 

Repetition by commanders of 

sub-divisions 61 

Use of 63 

Outlined enemy defined Z^ 

Pace, definition 22 

Packs, opening and closing 310 

Parades : 

Battalion 304 

General rules 303 

Regimental 305 

Parade rest 1(i & 77 

Parade rest from order 120 

Piece (see Rifle) 

Pitching tents 323 

Platoons : 

Assignment 180 

Column formed from line 193 

Column from column of squads .205 
Column right (left) from col- 
umn of squads 198 

Company divided into 179 

Deployed in same manner as 

company 214 

Designation ♦ 179 

Execution of movements as ex- 
plained in Schools of the 
Soldier and the Squad ....182 

Fire unit 242 

Guides, duties on firing line ....243 

Line of, defined 48 

Line of, from column of squads 198 

Line of, from line 200 

Repetition of commands by 

platoon leaders 187 

Platoon columns 221-226 

Platoon leaders: 

Action when target disappears 247 
Commands for firing when de- 
ployed 233 

Fire control 242 & 243 

Position when dressing company 191 

[11] 



Par. No. 
DRILL REGULATIONS (Cont'd) 

Point of rest, definition 23 

Port, arms from.: 

Inspection arms 129 

Left shoulder 119 

Order 108 

Present 109 

Right shoulder 115 

Position of attention 75 

Position of the soldier 75 

Posts of: 

Band and special units when at- 
tached to battalion 251 

File closers in platoon move- 
ments 194 

Guides in close order 184 

Musicians 181 

Noncomissioned staff officers at 
ceremonies and other for- 
mations 56 

Officers and others in company 180 
Officers, noncommissioned offi- 
cers, and special units 

shown in plates 50 

Orderlies 52 & 56 

Reviewing officer 296 

Special units 50 & $1 

Staff of an officer 52 

Those accompanying reviewing 

officer 296 

Precision to be exacted at drills 

and ceremonies 32 

Preparatory command: 

Elements of 37 

Repetition and battalion drill ..252 
Revocation of by command, "As 

you were," 44 

Present arms from: 
Not executed by troops, except 
in ceremonies and saluting 

colors 315 

Order 107 

Port 110 

Right shoulder 116 

Pyramidal tent foldnig 331 

Pyramidal tents, pitching 327 

Quartermaster sergeant, assign- 
ment as guide 181 

Quibbling over minutiae in inter- 
preting drill regulations 30 

Quick time: 
All steps and marching, exe- 
cuted in, etc 85 

Cadence 120 

Steps' 84 

From halt 86 

Movements begun in, hastened 

by command, "Double time" 42 

Range, command announcing 167 

Range finders, company 237 

Ranges, determination and classi- 
fication 237 

Rank, definition ,^ . . .24 

Rate of fire to be impressed upon 

men 245 

Reenforcemcnt of firing line 288 

Rear march to 94 



Par. No. 
DRILL REGULATIONS (Cont'd) 
Recruits to be grouped into 

squads according to efficiency 74 
Recruit to be taught use and nom- 
enclature of rifle 96 

Rectifying column 261 

Regiment, combat principles 293 

Regiment — composition, formation 

and movements 292 

Regimental inspection 312 

Regimental parade 305 

Regimental review 301 

Repetition of commands by com- 
manders of sub-divisions 61 

Represented enemv, defined 36 

Rests 76 

"1. Resume, 2. March," 43 

Reviewing officer: 

Riding around the troops 297 

Post of those accompanying ...296 

Post 296 & 299 

Reviews : 

Battalion 300 

General rules 296 

Of large commands 302 

Regimental 301 

Rifle; 

Care and nomenclature 96 

Not to be loaded unless specifi- 
cally ordered 97 

Once loaded rem.ains so until 

further orders 160 

Rules governing carrying of ....97 
When loaded habitually carried 
with safety lock turned to 

"safe" 97 

Rifle salute 124 

Right, definition 25 

Right half turn squad 144 

Right (left) by twos, company ...207 

Right (left) face 80 

Right (left) front into line, bat- 
talion 263 

Right (left) front into line, com- 
pany 204 

Right (left) front into line, from 

close column 271 

Right (left) half face 80 

Right (left) oblique 143 

Right shoulder from: 

Bringing piece to, at command 

March 102 

Inspection arms 129 

Order 112 

Port 114 

Present 117 

Right turn, company 195 

Right turn, squad 144 

Rising from kneeling or lying 

down 156 

Route step, battalion 274 

Route step, company 206 

Rules ^ governing carrying of the 

piece 97 

Rules governing the manual of 

arms 105 

Rushes: 

Advance by 228 

Begun by flank fraction 287 



Par. No. 
DRILL REGULATIONS (Cont'd) 
By fractions of decreased size ..286 
Fraction of firing line to avoid 

using long blast signal ....234 

Length of 287 

Use of covering fire 246 

Saber, manual of 322 

Saber, staff officers draw with chief. 52 
Safety lock habitually turned to 

"safe" in carrying loaded rifle 97 
Salutes: 

By staffs at ceremonies 295 

Color at reviews 297 

In passing in review, staff offi- 
cers salute with their chiefs. 298 
Returned by reviewing officer ..297 

Rifle 124 

With hand 82 

School of: 

Battalion 248 

Company 177 

Soldier 7Z 

Squad 131 

Sergeant major, post at ceremon- 
ies and other formations 56 

Service calls 335 

Shelter tents, pitching 323 

Shelter tents, striking 325 

Side step from halt or mark time ..90 
Sight setting: 

Command announcing 167 

May precede or follow an- 
nouncement of target 160 

Once announced need not be re- 
peated 161 

Signals : 

Arm 69 

Arm, made with saber, rifle, etc. 59 
Flags, description and use ..70 & 71 
For communication between fir- 
ing line and reserve 72 

Include preparatory qomniand 

and command of execution ..60 
Limited to use when voice can- 
not be heard 62 

Of drum major 321 

Special, agreed upon before or 

during battle 62 

To replace commands during fire 234 

Signal flags, description 70 

Signal flags, use of 71 

Simple movements essential to 

correct training for battle ....29 

Simulating load 165 

Simultaneous movements by com- 
panies or squads in battalion 

drill 256 

Single rank, formation of com- 
pany in 189 

Skirmish line: 

Company 209 

Company, duties of squad lead- 
ers 210 

Forming in oblique direction ..217 
Forming to the flank or rear ..218 
Movements by same commands 

as in close order 213 

Skirmishers : 

Advance by succession of thin 

lines 227 



Par. No. 
DRILL REGULATIONS (Cont'd) 

Assembling 220 

Column ot files 216 

Column of twos 216 

Deployment 150 

Face to front in halting 212 

Formation from column of 

squads 216 

Formation from line 215 

Intervals between, increased or 

decreased 219 

Intervals between, increasing or 

decreasing 152 

Normal interval between 151 

Platoon or squad columns .....225 
To march at ease, pieces at trail 150 

Sleeping bag 324 

Sling, use of, optional, when de- 
ployed 163 

Slinging equipment 310 

Smartness to be exacted at drills 

and ceremonies 32 

Special units: 

No fixed places except at cere- 
monies 51 

Post when attached to battalion 251 
Spirit of drill regulations to be 

sought in interpretation 30 

Squad: 

Company organized into 173 

Composition and formation 132 

Deployed, width of front 151 

Designation 179 

Executes halt, rests, facings, 
etc., as explained in School 

of Soldier 134 

Guide right (left) 136 

How formed 135 

Leaders, duties in forming skir- 
mish line 210 

Leaders, duties on firing line ...243 

Preservation of integrity 134 

Right 145 & 146 

Right about 147 & 148 

Right about, company 201 

Right (left) dress 136 

Right turn 144 

Soldiers grouped into 131 

Squad columns 221, 223, 225, 226 

Staff officers: 

Draw and return saber with 

chief 53 

Habitually mounted 53 

Posts 53 

Saluting at ceremonies 295 

Step: 

Change 95 

From halt begins with left foot ..83 

Length, etc 84 

Striking tents 329 

Success in battle ultimate object 

of all military training 27 

Successive movements in double 
time, leading or base unit to 
march in quick time when not 

otherwise prescribed 41 

Succession of thin lines 227 

Support, battalion, in combat ...280 
Support, company in 230 

f 



Par. No. 
DRILL REGULATIONS (Cont'd) 

Suspend firing 172 

Take arms 141 

Taking intervals and distances ..186 
Target : 

Allotment by captain 240 

Announced before or after sight 

setting 160 

Apportionment by major 282 

Assignment of, by major 239 

Change not to be made without 

excellent reasons 239 

Choice of — nearest hostile troops 239 

Distribution of fire 240 

Men to be practised in repeat- 
ing designations and in 

prompt location 176 

Once announced need not be re- 
peated 161 

Platoon leaders, action when 

target disappears 247 

Teamwork developed by thorough- 
ness and uniformity in training 28 

Tent pitching, manual of 323 

Tents, folding 330 

Thin lines, advance by succession 

of 227 

Thoroughness and uniformity in 
training indispensable to effi- 
ciency of the whole ,...^ 28 

Trail:. 

Execution of movements at, by 
prefacing command with 

"at trail" 102 

From order 122 

Pieces at, whejn deployed as 

skirmishers 150 

Turn on fixed pivot used from 

line into column and reverse ..46 
Turn on moving pivot used in 

changing direction 46 

Unfix bayonets from order 126 

Unload 166 

Unslinging equipment 310 

Use of cover 174 

Volley firing, application 238 

Volley firing, how executed 168 

Wall tents, pitching 326 

Warning calls 332 

WTiistle signals 68 

Whistles, those equipped with 61 

"Without the numbers'* 105 

Drowning 581 

Drunken men, control of 420 

Drunkenness, treatment of 584 

E 

Ear, foreign body in 585 

Earache 586 

Elevation and deflection correction 

drills 399 

Enclosures, reconnoitering of, by pa- 
trols 486 

ENTRENCHMENTS : 

Construction 705 

Outposts 528 

Equipment, care of 627 & 629 

Estimating distances 401 



131 



Par. No. 

•'Estimating the situation" .451 

Examining posts 531 

Exercises in field firing 735 

Extra fatigue, forms of 419 

Eye, foreign body in 588 

Eyes, inflamed, treatment 587 

Eyesight and nearing 681 

F 

Fainting, treatment 580 

Fatigue, treatment 590 

Fear, human eUment 434 

Feet, care of 565 

Fevers, treatment 591 

FIELD FIRING: 

Communication on firing line ....731 

Dcfmltion 716 

Designation of target 727 

Distribution of fire 724 

Exercises 735 

Finding range 723 

Finger system 730 

Fire control 719 

Fire direction 718 

Fire discipline 732 

Guides, duties 720 

Horizontal clockface system ....728 

Musicians, duties 722 

Object 717 

Overlapping method of fire dis- 
tribution 725 

Points to be borne in mind 734 

Procedure in certain field firing 

exercises 733 

Signals on firing line 731 

Scjuad leaders, duties 721 

Switch method of fire distribution 12G 

Vertical clock face system 729 

Field of fire, defense 672 

FIELD ORDERS OF ENLISTED 
MEN: 

Advance in rear guard 700 

Guides 694 

In camp 704 

Messages « 702 

Musicians 696 

Night operations 698 

On the march 703 

Outpost orders 699 

Pat rolling 701 

IMatoon leaders 693 

Privates 697 

S(ju:id leaders 695 

Finning way in strange country ....682 

Finger system 730 

Fire control in field firing 719 

Fire direction in field firing 718 

Fire discipline -.,1Z2 

Fire distribution and switch and 

overlapping methods 724, 725, & 726 
Fire, not to be opened until neces- 
sary 640 

Fire positions, selection 649 

First aid to sick and injured 566 

First BcrKcant 414 

Flag, saluting 620 

Flags, description, etc 386 

Flags of truce i 527 

Flag stealing contest 688 



Par. No. 

Flames and smoke, indication 479 

Fords, rcconnoitering of, by patrols 484 

Forms of speech 631 

Fractures, treatment 568 

Fraise 709 

Freezing, treatment 592 

G 

Gallery practice 400 & 407 

General orders for sentinelj^ 374 

Government of company 410 

GUARD DUTY: 

('lassification of interior guards ..364 

Color sentinels 373 

Commander of the guard 368 

Commanding oflicer 366 

Compliments from guards 378 

Corporal of the j?uard 370 

Countersigns and paroles 376 

Details, method of determining 

391 & 392 

Flags ^ 386 

Formal guard mountings 388 

General ordrrs for scntmels 374 

General rules concerning guard 

duty 379 

Guard mounting 388 

(Juard patrols 377 

(iuards, division and functions ...361 

Informal guard mounting 389 

Interior guards 364 

Military police 362 

Musicians of the guard 372 

Noncommissioned officer of the 

troop stable guard 384 

Officer of Ihe day 367 

Orderlies 373 

Orders for sentinels ^ 374 

J\'iiolcs and countersigns 376 

l*osting and relieving sentinels ...371 

IVisoners 380 & 381 

Privates 374 

Provost guards 363 

Relieving old guard 390 

Reveille and retreat gun 387 

Rosters and details 365 

Sentinels of the troop stable guard 385 

Sentinels, respect for 360 

Sergeant of the guard 369 

Special guards 364 

Special orders for sentinels at 

post of guard 375 

vStahie guards 382 

Troop stable guards . . .^. 383 

Guides, duties on firing line 720 

Guides, field orders : 694 

Gymnastic contests 358 

H 

Harmony and contentment 416 

Head, how to keep cool 593 

Health, care of 564 

HEIGHTS: 

Facts to be obtained about, by 

patrols 502 

Rcconnoitering of, by patrols ....482 
Horizontal clock system 728 



Par. No. 
Housei, reconnoitering of, by patrols 488 
Human element 433 



Incinerator! 742 & 743 

Indication! to be noticed by patrols 475 

Individual cooking 748 

Initiative 431 

Insect stings 594 

Inspections 421 

INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING. 
SEE 'TRAINING AND IN- 
STRUCTION" 

Instruction on the ground 440 

Intelligence, individual 432 

Interest in work 430 

Interior guards 364 

INTRENCHMENTS: 

Construction 705 

The defense 665 

Inundations mi obstacle! 714 

Ivy poisoned 595 

K 

Kitchens, camp 740 

Kitchen pits 741 

Known distance target practice 

402 & 408 



Landmarks 684 

Latrines, camp 739 

Lieutenant, duties and responsibili- 
ties 412 & 413 

Lightning, struck by, treatment ....596 

Limits of vision 480 

Loading wagons 562 

Lost, what to do 683 

M 

Maneuvers, definition 449 & 450 

MANUAL OF: 

Interior guard duty 359 

Physical training 355 

The bayonet 354 

Map making 556 

Map problems 447, 450 & 454 

MAP READING: 

Contours 542 8c 548 

Conventional signs 544 ft 554 

Directions on map 540a & 551 

General remarks 539 

Grades 550 

How to read a map 545 

Map distances 543 ft 549 

Meridians 54 1 ft 553 

Orientation 552 

Scale of map distances 543 

Scales 540 & 546 

Scaling distances 547 

Slopes 550 

Visibility 555 

MARCHES: 

General rules 563 

Orders of enlisted men 703 



Par. No. 
Marshes, facts to be obtained about, 

by patrol! 499 

Meeting engagement 656 

Meridians 541 & 553 

MESSAGES: 

Field 474 

From patrols 474 

Orders of enlisted men, regarding .702 
Practical instruction in deliver- 
ing 454 

Verbal, how delivered 635 

Method & progression in training & 

instruction 426 

MILITARY COURTESY: 

Civilian salute, origin and nature ..616 

Colors and standards 621 

How to salute * 623 

Importance 615 

Military salute, origin and naturo 617 

Miscellaneous 624 

The i\af^ 620 

The national air 619 

When to salute 622 

Wbom to salute 618 

Military deportment 625 

Military pits 713 

Military police 362 

Military salute, origin and nature ...617 
MILITARY SKETCHINQ: 

Conventional signs 560 

General remarks 556 

Outpost sketching 558 

Points for beginners to remember .,561 

Position sketching 557 

Road sketching 559 

Minor tactics. See "Applied Minor 
Tactics". 

"Mission" 451 

Mixed squads, practice in command- 
ing 443 ft 649a 

Model report! 508 

Morse code 395 

Mouse and cat contest 687 

Musicians, duties on firing line 722 

Musicians, field orders 696 

Musicians of the guard 372 

N 

National air, saluting 619 

NIGHT OPERATIONS: 

By patrols 470 

In the defense ....668 ft 677 

Night operations, instuction in ....689 
Orders of enlisted men 698 

Nomenclature of rifle 637 

Noncommissioned officer of the troojj 
stable guard .'384 

Noncommissioned officers, responsibil- 
ities in war 446 

Nose, foreign body in 597 

Nosebleed, treatment 598 



Obscene men, control of 420 

OBSTACLES: 

Abatis 707 

Chcveaux dc frise 710 



[IS] 



OBSTACLES (Cont'd) Par. No. 

Fraise 709 

In front of outguards 715 

Inundations 714 

Military pits 713 

Object and location 706 

Outpost .528 

Palisades 708 

Passing in attack 650 & 653 

Trous de loup 713 

Wire entanglement 71 1 

Wire fence 712 

Occular demonstration 441-442 

Office, how to enter 632 

Officer of the day 367 

Ointment for bruises, etc 599 

Orders for sentinels 374 

Organized Militia, target practice ...406 

Orientation on map 552 

OUTGUARDS: 

General principles 520 

Obstacles in front 715 

OUTPOST: 

At night 690 

Company on 678 

Obstacles 715 

Orders of sentinels 699 

Sketching 558 

See "Outposts" under "Service of 
Security". 
Overlapping method of fire distribu- 
tion 725 

P 

Paid, soldier, how 634 

Palisades 708 

Paroles and countersigns 376 

Patrolling, orders of enlisted men ...701 
Patr-oUing. See "Service of Informa- 
tion". 

Personal cleanliness 626 

Physical training 355 

Pickets . . .-. 520 & 521 

Piles 600 

Pistol and revolver practice ...405 & 409 

Pits, military 713 

Platoon leaders, field orders 693 

Platoon leaders. See "Platoon lead- 
ers", under "Field Firing". 
Points of compass, how determined ..682 

Poisoned wounds 570 

Poisoning, treatment .601 

Ponds, facts to be obtained about, by 

patrols 499 

Position and aiming drills 398 

Position sketching 557 

Positions, reconnoitering of, by pa- 
trols 487 

Poultices 602 

PRISONERS: 

Captured by patrols 476 

General provisions regarding 697 

Privates, field orders of 697 

Privileges and rewards 417 

PROBLEMS: 

Advance guard 512 

Map 554 

Outpost 509 & 538 

Patrolling 509 

fl6] 



Par. No. 
Program of training & instruction ...427 
Progression & method in training & 

instruction 426 

Property responsibility 422 

Provost guards 363 

Punishment, company, forms of ....419 

R 

RAILROADS: 

Demolition 505 

Facts to be obtained about, by 

patrols 491 

Range, finding 723 

Reality in training and instruction , .430 
REAR GUARD: 

General principles 513 

Orders of enlisted men 700 

Reconnaissance of positions 481 

Records and books, company 423 

Reports, patrols 507 & 508 

Requisites of a good scout 680 

Respect, human element 436 

Responsibility for training and in- 
struction 429 

Responsibilities of noncommissioned 

officers in war 446 

Reveille and retreat gun 387 

Rewards and privileges 417 

Rifle, care, description, and manage- 
ment 637 

Rifle exercises 357 

Rivers, facts to be obtained about, 

by patrols 493 

Road sketching 559 

Roads, facts to be obtained about, by 

patrols 490 

Rosters and details *365 

Rushes, size of, and under covering 

fire 641 & 642 

Russet leather, care of T . .628 

s 

Salients 663 

Saluting 615-624 

Salutes, See "Military Courtesy". 

Salves 603 

Saturday morning inspection 421 

Scalds, treatment 604 

Scales, map 540 & 546 

Scaling distances on map 547 

Self-respect 436 

SENTINELS: 

Challenging at night 690 

Firing at night 691 

Outposts 524 

Respect for 360 

Troop stable guard 385 

Sentry squad 520 & 522 

Sergeant of the guard 369 

SERVICE OF INFORMATION: 

Bridges, facts to be obtained about 492 

Bridges, reconnoitering of 484 

Buildings, reconnoitering of 488 

Camp noises .> 477 

Camps, abandoned 478 

Canals, facts to be obtained about .495 
Cross roads, how reconnoitered ...481 



Par. No. 

SERVICE OF INFORMATION (Cont'd) 

Defiles, facts to be obtained about .498 

Defiles, reconnoitering of 483 

Demolitions 503 » 

Enclosures, reconnoitering of 486 

Facts to be obtained about various 

objects 490 

Fords, reconnoitering of 484 

Heights, facts to be obtained about 502 

Heights, reconnoitering of 482 

Houses, reconnoitering of 488 

Indications to be noticed by patrols 475 

Limits of vision 480 

Marshes, facts to be obtained about 499 
Patrolling: 

Facts to be obtained about vari- 
ous objects by patrols 490 

Civilians 471 

Flames and smoke 479 

Messages 474 

Model reports 508 

Night work 470 

Patrol fighting 472 

Principles of patrolling 462 

Patrols : 

Action upon meeting hostile 

patrols 466 

By whom furnished 458 

Coordination before departure 461a 

Definition 455 

Formation 463 

Guarding against being cut off 469 

Halts 465 

Inspection before departure ...460 

Leaders 457 

Orders and instructions 459 

Preparation for starting 461 

Prisoners to be captured 476 

Rate of march 464 

Returning by different route ..468 

Scattered patrols 467 

Size 456 

Problems 509 

Report on return of patrol ...507 

Signals 473 

Ponds, facts to be obtained about 499 
Positions, reconnoitering of ....487 

Railroads, demolition 505 

Railroads, facts to be obtained 

about 491 

Reconnaissance of positions ....481 
Rivers, facts to be obtained about 493 
"^ Roads, facts to be obtained about 490 
Signs to be noticed by patrols ..475 
Springs, facts to be obtained 

about 500 

Streams, facts to be obtained 

about 493 

Suggestions for gaining informa- 
tion about the enemy 475 

Suggestions for reconnaissance 

of positions 481 

Telegraph line, demolition 504 

Telegraphs, facts to be obtained 

about 496 

Valleys, facts to be obtained 
about 501 

[17] 



Par. No. 
SERVICE OF INFORMATION (Cont'd) 
Villages, facts to be obtained 

about 497 

Villages, reconnoitering of 489 

Vision, limits of 480 

Wagon roads, demolition 506 

Woods, facts to be obtained 

about 494 

Woods, reconnoitering of 485 

SERVICE OF SECURITY: 

Advance guard, general principles 511 

Advance guard order 511a 

Advance guard problems 512 

General principles 510 

Outposts : 

Advance, cavalry 518 

Cavalry outpost 532 

Changes for the night 536 

Communication between sub-di- 
visions 535 

Composition 515 

Concealment 529 

Cossack post 520 & 523 

Definition and duties 514 

Detached posts 530 

Distances between subdivisions ..517 

Entrenchments 528 

Establishing the outpost ..533 & 534 

Examining posts 531 

Flags of truce 527 

Formation 516 

Intercommunication 535 

Obstacles 528 

Outguards 520 

Outpost order 534 

Patrols 526 

Pickets 520 & 521 

Problems 538 

Relieving outpost 537 

Reserves 525 

Sentinels 524 

Sentry squad 520 & 522 

Subdivisions 516 

Supports 519 

Problems, advance guard 512 

Rear guard, general principles ....513 

Setting up exercises 356 

Shock, treatment 605 

Shoes, care and preservation 630 

Sight setting 723 

Sighting drills 397 

Signalling 393 

SIGNALS: 

On firing line 731 

Used by patrols 473 

Signs to be noticed by patrols 475 

Situation, estimating 45 1 

Sketching 556 

Skin, protection of, in cold weather 606 
SKYLINE: 

Avoidance 664 

How to approach and leave 685 

SMALL ARMS FIRING MANUAL: 

Advice to riflemen 404 

Courses for organized militia 406 

Deflection and elevation correction 

drills 399 

Estimating distances 401 



Par. No. 
SMALL ARMS FIRING MANUAL 
(Cont'd) 

Gallery practice 400 & 407 

Known distance practice ..402 &: 408 
Pistol and revolver practice 405 & 409 

Position and aiming drills 398 

Sighting drills 397 

Special courses 403 

Smoke and flames, indication 479 

Snake bite, treatment 607 

Snow blindness, treatment 608 

Sore throat, treatment 609 

Special courses in target practice ...403 

Special guards 364 

Special orders for sentinels at post 

of guard 375 

Speech, forms of 631 

Sprains, treatment 610 

Springs, facts to be obtained about, 

by patrols 500 

SQUAD LEADERS: 

Duties on firing line 721 

Field orders 695 

Stable guards 382 

Standards and colors, saluting 621 

"Star Spangled Banner" 619 

Starving, treatment 589 

Stings, insect, treatment 594 

Streams, facts to be obtained about, 

by patrols 493 

Stunning, treatment 611 

Sun blindness, treatment 608 

Sunstroke, treatment .612 

Superiority of fire, what is meant by.6S0a 

Surprise, human element 435 

Switch method of fire distribution ...726 

T 

Tag, diagnosis 569 

Target, methods of designating 727 

Target practice .396 

Telegraph line, demolition 504 

Telegraphic code 395 

Telegraphs, facts to be obtained about, 

by patrols 496 

Terrain Exercises 447 & 450 

The "Star Spangled Banner" 619 

Thirst, how to quench 613 

Thoroughness in training and instruc- 
tion 430 

Toothache, treatment 614 

Tracking 686 

Training and instruction, general prin- 
ciples 425 

TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION: 

Clearness 430 

Demonstration, occular ....441 & 442 
Determination and individual in- 
telligence 432 

Human element: 

Cheerfulness 437 

Comradeship 439 

Contentment 438 



Par. No. 
TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION 
(Cont'd) 

Fear 434 

General remarks 433 

Respect 436 

Surprise 435 

Individual initiative 431 

Initiative 431 

Instruction on the ground 440 

Intelligence, individual 432 

Interest in 430 

Map problems 454 

Method and progression 426 

• Mixed squads, practice in command- 
ing 443 

Object 425 

Occular demonstration 441 & 442 

Operating against other troops ...444 

Program 427 

Reality 430 

Responsibility _. 429 

Simultaneous instruction and train- 
ing 428 

Thoroughness 430 

Variety 430 

Treatment of men 413a 

Trenches, defense 665 

Trials by court-martial 418 

Troop stable guards 383 

Trous de loup 713 

V 

Valleys, facts to be obtained about, 

by patrols 501 

Variety in training and instruction ..430 

Vertical clock system 729 

VILLAGES: 

Defense 674 

Facts to be obtained about, by 

patrols 497 

Reconnoitering of, by patrols 489 

Visibility in map reading 555 

Vision, limits of 480 

w 

Wagon roads, demolition 506 

Wagons, loading 562 

War game 448 & 450 

Water, in camps 746 

Wigwag 394 

Wire entanglement 711 

Wire fence as obstacle 712 

Witness, appearance before general 

court-martial 636 

WOODS: 

Clearing in 671 

Edge as fire position 670 

Facts to be obtained about, by 

patrols 494 

Fuel in camp 745 

Reconnoitering of, by patrols 485 

Wounds, treatment 567 & 570 



[It] 



TABLE OF CONTENTS 
PART I 

DRILLS, EXEECISES, GUARD DUTY, TARGET PRACTICE, CERE- 
MONIES AND INSPECTIONS 

Par. No. 

CHAPTER L INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS— 1-353 

Definitions — General Remarks — General 

Rules for Drills and Forniations — Orders 
Commands and Signals — School of the Sol- 
dier — School of the Squad — School of the 
Company — School of the Battalion — The 
Regiment — Ceremonies (Reviews, Parades 
and Escorts) — Inspections — Muster — Honors 
and Salutes — The Color — The Band — Manual 
of the Saber — Manual of Tent Pitching — 
Manual of the Bugle— Appendices A and B. 

CHAPTER II. MANUAL OF THE BAYONET— Nomen- 354 

clature and Description of the Bayonet — 
Instruction without the Rifle — Instruction 
with the Rifle — Instruction without the 
Bayonet — Combined Movements — Practical 
Bayonet Combat — Fencing Exercises — ^Fenc- 
ing at Will — Competitions. 

CHAPTER III. 3MANUAL OF PHYSICAL TRAINING— 355-358 
Methods — Commands — Setting-up Exercises 
—Hopping Exercises — Leaping Exercises — 
Walking and Marching — Steps — Double-tim- 
ing Exercises — Rifle Exercises — Gymnastic 
Contests. 

CHAPTER IV. MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD DUTY 359-392 

— Importance of Guard Duty — Respect for 
Sentinels — Introduction — Details and Rost- 
ers — The Commanding Officer — The Officer 
of the Day — The Commander of the Guard— 
The Sergeant of the Guard — The Corporal of 
the Guard — Musicians of the Guard-Orderlies 
and Color Sentinels — Privates of the Guard 
— Orders for Sentinels — Countersigns and 
Paroles — Guard Patrols — Watchmen — Com- 
pliments from Guards — Prisoners — Rules 
and Regulations for Government of General 
Prisoner s — Guarding Prisoners — Flags — 
Reveille and Retreat Gun — Guard Mounting. 
[19] 



Par. No. 
CHAPTEE V. SIGNALLING — Signals and Codes— Wig- 393-395 

wag — Sound Signals — Morse Code. 

CHAPTEE VI. SMALL ARMS — FIRING MANUAL— 396 409 

Sighting Drills — Position and Aiming 
Drills — Deflection and Elevation Correction 
Drills — Gallery Practice — Estimating Dis- 
tance Test — Special Course A — Advice to 
Riflemen — Pistol and Revolver Practice; 
Preliminary Drills; Position . and Aiming 
Drills — Course for Organized Militia. ^ 



PART II 

MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS PERTAINING TO COMPANY TRAIN- 
ING AND INSTRUCTION 



CHAPTER 



CHAPTER 



CHAPTER 



CHAPTER 



L THE GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRA- 410 423 
TION OF A COMPANY — Duties and 
Responsibilities of the Captain and the 
Lieutenants — Devolution of Work and Re- 
sponsibilit y — The First Sergeant — The 
Noncommissioned Officers — Contentment and 
Harmony — Rewards and Privileges — Prop- 
erty Responsibility — Books and Records. 

11. DISCIPLINE— Definition— Methods of at- 424 

taining Good Discipline — Importance — Sound 
System of Discipline — Punishment — General 
Principles. 

III. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF COMPANY 425 444 
TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION— Object 

of Training and Instruction — Method and 
Progression — Individual Initiative — The Hu- 
man Element — Art of Instruction on the 
Ground — Ocular Demonstration. 

IV. GENERAL COMMON SENSE PRIN- 445 453 
CIPLES OF APPLIED MINOR TACTICS— 

Art of War Defined — Responsibilities of Of- 
ficers and Noncommissioned Officers in 
War — General Rules and Principles of Map 
Problems, Terrain Exercises, the War Game, 
and Maneuvers — Estimating the Situation — 
Mission. 

[20] 



Par. No. 
CHAPTEE V. GENERAL PLAN OF INSTRUCTION IN 454 

MAP PROBLEMS FOR NONCOMMIS- 
SIONED OFFICERS AND PRIVATES- 
INSTRUCTION IN DELIVERING MES- 
SAGES. 

CHAPTER VI. THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION— 455-509 

General Principles of Patrolling — Sizes of 
Patrols — Patrol Leaders — Patrol Forma- 
tions — Messages and Eeports — Suggestions 
for Gaining Information about the Enemy — 
Suggestions for the Reconnaissance of Va- 
rious Positions and Localities — Demoli- 
tions — Problems in Patrolling. 

CHAPTER VII. THE SERVICE OF SECURITY— General 510-538 
Principles — Advance Guar d — A d v a n c e 
Guard Problems — ^Ilank Guards — Rear 
Guard — Outposts — Formation of Outposts — 
Outguards — Flags of Truce — Detached 
Posts — Examining Posts — Establishing the 
Outpost — Outpost Order — Intercommunica- 
tion — Outpost Problems. 

CHAPTER VIII. MAP READING— Scales— Meridians— Con- 539-555 
tours — Scale of Distances — Conventional 
Signs — How to Read a Map — Orientation — 
Visibility. 

IX. MILITARY SKETCHING— General 556-561 
Methods — Use of Sketching Case — Position 
of Sketching — Outpost Sketching — Road 
Sketching — Conventional Signs used in 
Sketching — Points for Beginners to Re- 
member. 

X. LOADING WAGONS— Proper Way to Load 562 

a Wagon. 

XI. MARCHES — General Principles — Rules to 563 

be Observed. 



CHAPTER 



CHAPTEE 
CHAPTEE 
CHAPTEE 



XIL CARE OF THE HEALTH AND FIRST AID 564-614 
TO THE SICK AND INJURED— Rules for 

Preservation of Health — Care of the Feet — 
Wound s — Fractur^js — Resuscitation from 
Drowning — Simple Remedies for Common 
Diseases and Accidents. 
[21] 



CHAPTER XIII. 



CHAPTER XIV. 



CHAPTER 



Par. No. 
MILITARy COURTESY— The Nature of 615-624 
Salutes and their Origin — Whom to Salute — 
Respect to the National Air, the Flag, and 
Colors and Standards — When to Salute — 
How to Salute — Miscellaneous. 

MHiITAEY DEPORTMENT AND AP- 625-636 
PEARANCE— PERSONAL CLEANLINESS 
AND CARE OF CLOTHING AND OTHER 
EQUIPMENT— CARE AND PRESERVA- 
TION OF SHOES— FORMS OF SPEECH- 
DELIVERY OF MESSAGES. 

XV. THE CARE, DESCRIPTION, AND MAN- 637 

AGEMENT OF THE RIFLE. 



PART III 

COMPANY FIELD TRAINING 

IN THE ATTACK, THE DEFENSE, THE SERVICE OF SECURITY, THE 

SERVICE OF INFORMATION, NIGHT OPERATIONS, INTRENCH- 

MENTS, OBSTACLES, FIELD FIRING, CAMPING, AND 

INDIVIDUAL COOKING 

CHAPTER L THE COMPANY IN ATTACK— Importance 638-643 

of the Attack — Rules and Principles of At- 
tack — Plan for Illustrating the Application 
of these Rules and Principles — The Five 
Stages of the Attack. 

CHAPTER IL THE COMPANY m ATTACK— The First 644-646 

Stage of the Attack — Advance of the 
Company under Hostile Artillery Fire, but 
not yet near enough to the Enemy to be sub- 
jected to his Infantry Fire — Object of this 
Stage of the Attack — Formations — Hostile 
Artillery — ^Localities to be Avoided. 

CHAPTER III. THE COMPANY IN ATTACK— The Sec- 647-650 
OND Stage of the Attack — The Advance of 
the Company under Artillery and Long- 
Range Infantry Fire — AmmTinition Supply — 
Object of this Stage of the Attack — Fire 
Positions — Pace of Advance — Passing Ob- 
stacles. 

CHAPTER IV. THE COMPANY IN ATTACK— The Third 651 

Stage op the Attack — The struggle for 
[22] 



CHAPTEE 



Par. No. 
Superiority of Fire — Object of this Stage of 
the Attack — How to Accomplish our Object 
— Eeenforcements. 

V. THE COMPANY IN ATTACK— The Fourth 652 653 
Stage of the Attack — The Advance, after 
Superiority of Fire has been gained, to a 
Position close enough to Charge — Object of 
this Stage of the Attack and how Accom- 
plished — Covering Fire — Formations — Artil- 
lery — Passing Obstacles. 



CHAPTER 



CHAPTER 



VI. THE COMPANY IN ATTACK— The Fifth 
Stage of the Attack — The Charge — Ob- 
ject of this Stage of the Attack and how 
Accomplished — When to Fix Bayonet — 
When to Charge — Conduct after the Charge 
— Artillery — Counter-attack. 

VII. THE COMPANY IN ATTACK— The Cotjx- 

ter-attack — Classes of Counter-attacks — 
Local Counter-attacks — When to Deliver 
the Counter-attack. 



654 



CHAPTER VIII. 



655 



656 



THE COMPANY IN ATTACK— Meetisto 

Ekgagemei^^t — The Company . exposed to 
both Artillery and Infantry Fire from the 
Beginning — Description of Engagement — 
Selection of Battlefield — Necessity to At- 
tack. 

CHAPTER IX. THE COMPANY IN ATTACK— Advance 657-658 
Guard Action — Action preceding Meeting 
Engagements — Company Forming Part of 
the Advance Guard Support — Company 
Forming Part of the Advance Guard Re- 
serve — Company as Support to Artillery. 

CHAPTER X. THE COMPANY IN DEFENSE— General 659-675 

Rules and Principles — Necessity for Defen- 
sive Action — Classes of Defense — Advan- 
tages — Disadvantages — Requisites of a Good 
Defensive Position — Best Form of Defensive 
Line — Salients — Avoidance of Skyline — 
Trenches — Woods — Clearing Field of Fire 
— Bridges, Villages, and Defiles — ^Defense 
against Cavalry. 
[23} 



CHAPTEE XI. 

CHAPTER XII. 
CHAPTER XIII. 



CHAPTER XIV. 



CHAPTER XV. 



CHAPTER XVI. 



CHAPTER XVII. 



CHAPTER XVIII. 



CHAPTER XIX. 



CHAPTER XX. 



\ Par. No. 

THE COMPANY IN DEFENSE— Usual 676 677 

Types of Defense — Defense at Night. 

THE COMPANY ON OUTPOST— Estab- 678 

lishing the Outpost: 

THE COMPANY IN SCOUTING AND 679 688 

PATROLLING— Requisites of a Good 
Scout — Eyesight and Hearing — Finding 
Way in Strange Country — What to do when 
Lost — Landmarks — Concealment and Dodg- 
ing — Tracking — The Mouse and Cat Con- 
test — Flag Stealing Contest. 

NIGHT OPERATIONS— Importance— Gen- 689 691 
eral Principles — Training of the Company — 
Individual Training — Collective Training — 
Outposts. 

THE FIELD ORDERS OF ENLISTED 692 704 

MEN — P 1 a t o n Leaders — Guides — Squad 
Leaders — Musicians — Privates. 

INTRENCHMENTS— Kinds of Trenches— 705 

Head and Overhead Cover — Lookouts — 
Location — Clearing Foreground — Obstacles. 

OBSTACLES— Object— Location— Kinds of 706-715 
Obstacles — Abatis — Palisade — ^Fraise — Chev- 
eaux de Frise — Wire Entanglements — Wire 
Fences — Military Pits or Trous de Loup — 
Miscellaneous Barricades — Innundations — 
Obstacles in Front of the Outguards. 

FIELD FIRING— Object— Fire Direction— 716-735 
Fire Control — Duties of Guides, Squad 
Leaders, Musicians, and Privates — Finding 
the Eange — ^Distribution of Fire — Designa- 
tion of Target — Horizonal Clock System — 
Vertical Clock System — '^ Finger'' Sys- 
tem — Communication — Signals — Fire Disci- 
pline — Exercises. 

CAMPING — Castrametation — Selection of 736-747 
Camp Sites — Making Camp — Construction 
of Latrines — Kitchens — Kitchen Pits — In- 
cinerators — Bunks — Wood — Water — Sanita- 
tion and Police of Camp. 

INDIVIDUAL COOKING— Eecipes— Bills 748 

of Fare. 

[24] 



PART I 



DRILLS, EXERCISES, GUARD DUTY, TAR- 
GET PRACTICE, CEREMONIES 
AND INSPECTIONS 



1-2-3-4 

CHAPTER I 
INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS 

(To include Changes No. 10, December 28, 1914.) 
DEFINITIONS 

(The numbers following the paragraphs are those of the Drill Regulations, and 
references in the text to certain paragraph numbers refer to these numbers and not 
to the numbers preceding the paragraphs.) 

(Note. — Company drills naturally become monotonous. The monotony, however, 
can be greatly reduced by repeating the drills under varying circumstances. In the 
manual of arms, for instance, the company may be brought to open ranks and the 
officers and sergeants directed to superintend the drill in the front and rear ranks. 
As the men make mistakes they are fallen out and drilled nearby by an officer or 
noncommissioned officer. Or, the company may be divided into squads, each squad 
leader drilling his squad, falling out the men as they make mistakes, the men thus 
fallen out reporting to a designated officer or noncommissioned officer for drill. The 
men who have drilled the longest in the different squads are then formed into one 
squad and drilled and fallen out in like manner. The variety thus introduced 
stimulates a spirit of interest and rivalry that robs the drill of much of its monotony. 

It is thought the instruction of a com^pany in drill is best attained by placing 
special stress on squad drill. The noncommissioned officers should be thoroughly 
instructed, practically and theoretically, by one of the company 9fficers and then be 
required to instruct their squads. The squads are then united and "drilled in the school 
of the company. — Author). 

DEFINITIONS 

1. Alignment: a straight line upon which several elements are 
formed, or are to be formed; or the dressing of several elements upon 
a straight line. 

P f 

A £>■ 

FIQ. 1 
NOTB. — The line A-B, on which a body of troops is formed or is to be formed, or 
the act of dressing a body of troops on the line, is called an alignment. — Author. 

2. Base: The element on which a movement is regulated. 

3. Battle sight: The position of the rear sight when the leaf is 
laid down. 

^ Tkont 1 • >• 



FIQ.S. 



C6NTER. ICOMCANVJ FLANK. (CO«t»Ar<ri 

I . gATTAUON ~ 

A11QN&P 



710.3 

4. Center: The middle point or element of a command. CSee Figs. 
2, 3 and 5.) 

126] 



5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12 

5. Column: A formation in wliich the elements are placed one be- 
hind another. (See Figs. 4, 5, 6.) 

6. Deploy: To extend the front. In general to cTiange from column 
to line, or from close order to extended order. 

7. Depth: The space from head to rear of any formation, including 
the leading and rear elements. The depth of a man is assumed to be 
12 inches. (See Figs. 4, 5, 6.) 

8. Distance: Space between elements in the direction of depth. 
Distance is measured from the back of the man in front to the breast 
of the man in rear. The distance between ranks is 40 inches in both 
line and column. (See Figs. 4, 5, 6.) 



CouownQf Fti.es- 



■ Head 

W, OlSTA.NC 
□ 

Q 


D 
D 
D 
D 



TIQ.4 



Column Or S<?uaos - 



CoLvnrc Of Tuktoohs 

a I 



1"T 



C6NTCR(S9UA0). 



9. Element: A file, squad, platoon, company, or larger body, foriu- 
ing part of a still larger body. 

10. File: Two men, the front-rank man and the corresponding man 
of the rear rank. The front-rank man is the file leader. A file which 
has no rear-rank man is a blank file. The term file applies also to a single 

■ man in a single-rank formation. 

11. File closers: Such officers and noncommissioned officers of a 
company as are posted in rear of the line. For convenience, all men 
posted in the line of file closers. 

12. Flank: The right or left of a command in line or in column; 
also the element on the right or left of the line. (See Figs. 2, 3 and 4.) 

[27] 



13-14-15-16-17-18-19-20-21-22-23-24-25-26 

13. Formation: Arrangement of the elements of a command. The 
placing of all fractions in their order in line, in column, or for battle. 

14. Front: The space, in width, occupied by an element, either in 
line or in column. The front of a man is assumed to be 22 inches. Front 
also denotes the direction of the enemy. (See Figs. 2, 3 and 5). 

15. Guide: An officer, noncommissioned officer, or private upon whom 
the command or elements thereof regulates its march. 

16. Head: The leading elem^ent of a column. (See Figs. 4, 5 and 6.) 

17. Interval: Space between elements of the same line. The interval 
between men in ranks is 4 inches and is measured from elbow to elbow. 
Between companies, squads, etc., it is measured from the left elbow of 
the left man or guide of the group on the right, to the right elbow of 
the right man or guide of the group on the left. (See Fig. 3.) 

18. Left: The left extremity or element of a body of troops. 

19. Line: A formation in which the different elements are abreast 
of each other. (See Figs. 2 and 3.) 

20. Order, close: The formation in which the units, in double rank, 
are arranged in line or in column with normal intervals and distances. 

21. Order, extended: The formation in which the units ai-e separated 
by intervals greater than in close order. 

22. Pace: Thirty inches; the length of the full step in quick time. 

23. Point of rest: The point at which a formation begins. Specifical- 
ly, the point toward which units are aligned in successive movements. 

24. Rank: A line of men placed side by side. 

25. Right: The right extremity or element of a body of troops. 

26. Note. In view of the fact that the word ''Echelon'' is a term 
of such common usage, the following definition is given: By echelon 
we mean a formation in which the subdivisions are placed one behind 
another, extending beyond and unmasking one another either wholly 
or in part. — Author 

BATTALIOK- IN ECrttLOK. 



COnP^NIE*. UNMA5K1NG WHOLLY 



'COnPANIES UNKASKlNCr m PART - 



[28] 



27-28-29-30-31-32-33 

mTRODUCTION 

(The numbers following the paragraphs are those of the Drill 
Kegulations. — Author.) 

27. Success in battle is the ultimate object of all military training; 
success may be looked for only when the training is intelligent and 
thorough. (1) 

28. Comuianding officers are accountable for the proper training 
of their respective organizations within the limits prescribed by regula- 
tions and orders. 

The excellence of an organization is judged by its field efficiency. 
The field efficiency of an organization depends primarily upon its effec- 
tiveness as a whole. Thoroughness and uniformity in the training of 
the units of an organization are indispensable to the efficiency of the 
whole; it is by such means alone that the requisite teamwork may be 
developed. (2) 

29. Simple movements and elastic formations are essential to correct 
training for battle. (3) 

30. The Drill Eegulations are furnished as a guide. They provide 
the principles for training and for increasing the probability of suc- 
cess in battle. 

In the interpretation of the regulations, the spirit must be sought. 
Quibbling over the minutiae of form is indicative of failure to grasp the 
spirit. (4) 

31. The principles of combat are considered in Part II of these 
regulations. They are treated in the various schools included in Part I, 
only to the extent necessary to indicate the functions of the various 
commanders and the division of responsibility between them. The am- 
plification necessary to a proper understanding of their application is 
to be sought in Part II. (5) 

32. The following important distinctions must be observed: 

(a) Drills executed at attention and the ceremonies are disciplinary 
exercises designed to teach precise and soldierly movement, and to in- 
culcate that prom.pt and subconscious obedience which is essential to 
proper m.ilitary control. To this end, smartness and precision should be 
exacted in the execution of every detail. Such drills should be frequent, 
but short. 

33. (b) The purpose of extended order drill is to teach the mecha- 
nism of deployment, of the firings, and, in general, of the employment 
of troops in combat. Such drills, are in the nature of disciplinary ex- 
ercises and should be frequent, thorough, and exact in order to habituate 
men to the firm control of their leaders. Extended order drill is executed 
at ease. The company is the largest unit which executes extended 
order drill. 

[29] 



34-35-36-37-38-89-40 

34. (c) Field exercises are for instruction in the duties incident to 
campaign. Assumed situations are employed. Each exercise should 
conclude with a discussion, on the ground, of the exercise and principles 
involved. 

35. (d) The combat exercise, a fonn of field exercise of the com- 
pany, battalion, and larger units, consists of the application of tactical 
principles to assumed situations, employing in the execution the ap 
propriate formations and movements of close and extended order. 

Combat exercises must simulate, as far as possible, the battle 
conditions assumed. In order to familiarize both officers and men with 
such conditions, companies and battalions will frequently be consolidated 
to provide war-strength organizations. Officers and noncommissioned 
officers not required to complete the full quota of the units participating 
are assigned as observers or umpires. 

The firing line can rarely be controlled by the voice alone; 
thorough training to insure the proper use of prescribed signals is 
necessary. 

The exercise should be followed by a, brief drill at attention in 
order to restore smartness and control. (6) 

36. In field exercises the enemy is said to be imaginary when his 
position and force are merely assumed; outlined when his position and 
force are' indicated by a few men; represented when a body of troops 
acts as such. (7) 

General Eules for Drills and Formations 

37. When the preparatory command consists of more than one part, 
its elements are arranged as follows: 

(1) For movements to be executed successively by the subdivisions 
or elements of an organization: (a) Description of the movement; (b) 
how executed, or on what element executed. 

(2) For movements to be executed simultaneously by the subdivi- 
sions of an organization: (a) The designation of the subdivisions; (b) 
the movement to be executed. (8) 

38. Movements that may be executed toward either flank are ex- 
plained as toward but one flank, it being necessary to substitute the 

. word '*left'' for ''right,'' and the reverse, to have the explanation of 
the corresponding movement toward the other flank. The commands 
are given for the execution of the movements toward either flank. The 
substitute word of the command is placed within parentheses. (9) 

39. Any movement may be executed either from the halt or when 
marching, unless otherwise prescribed. If at a halt, the command for 
movements involving marching need not be prefaced by forward, as 1. 
Column right (left), 2. MARCH. (10) 

40. Any movement not specially excepted may be executed in 
double time. 

[30] 



41-42-43-44-45-46-47 

If at a halt, or if marching in quick time, the command double 
time precedes the command of execution. (11) 

41. In successive movements executed in double time the leading 
or base unit marches in quick time when not otherwise prescribed; the 
other units march in double time to their places in the formation ordered 
and then conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. If marching 
in double time, the command double time is omitted. The leading or 
base unit marches in quick time; the other units continue at double time 
to their places in the formation ordered and then conform to the gait 
of the leading or base unit. (12) 

42. To hasten the execution of a movement begun in quick time, 
the command: 1. Double time, 2. MARCH, is given. The leading or 
base unit continues to march in quick time, or remains at halt if al- 
ready halted; the other units complete the execution of the movement 
in double time and then conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. 
(13) 

43. To stay the execution of a movement when marching, for the 
correction of errors, the command: 1. In place, 2. HALT, is given. All 
halt and stand fast, without changing the position of the pieces. To 
resume the movement the command: 1. Resume, 2. MARCH, is given. (14) 

44. To revoke a preparatory command, or, being at a halt, to begin 
anew a movement improperly begun, the command, as you were, is given, 
at which the movement ceases and the former position is resumed. (15) 

45. Unless otherwise announced the guide of a company or sub- 
division of a company in line is right; of a battalion in line or line of 
subdivisions or of a deployed line, center; of a rank in column oi 
squads, toward the side of the guide of the company. 

To march with guide other than as prescribed above, or to change 
the guide: Guide (right, left, or center). 

In successive formations into line, the guide is toward the point 
of rest; in platoons or larger subdivisions it is so announced. 

The announcement of the guide, when given in connection with 
a movement, follows the command of execution for that movement 
Excrjption: 1. As skirmishers, guide right (left or center), 2. MARCH. 
(16) 

46. The turn on the fixed pivot by subdivisions is used in all forma- 
tions from line into column and the reverse. 

The turn on the moving pivot is used by subdivisions of a 
column in executing changes of direction. (17) 

47. Partial changes of direction may be executed: 

By interpolating in the preparatory command the word half, 
as Column half right (left), or Right (left) half turn. A change of 
direction of 45*^ is executed. 

[31] 



48-49-50-51-52-53 

By the command: INOLrNE TO THE EIGHT (LEFT). The 

guide, or guiding element, moves in the indicated direction and the 
remainder of the command conforms. This movement eflPects sli^^ht 
changes of direction. (18) ^ 

48. The designations line of platoons, line of companies, line of 
battalions, etc., refer to the formations in which the platoons, com- 
panics, battalions, etc., each in column of squads, are in line. (19) 

49. Full distance in column of subdivisions is such that in forming 
line to the right or left the subdivisions will have their proper intervals. 

In column of subdivisions the guide of the leading subdivision 
is charged with the step and direction; the guides in rear preserve the 
trace, step, and distance. (20) 

50. In close order, all details, detachments, and other bodies of 
troops are habitually formed in double rank. 

To insure uniformity of interval between files when falling in, 
and in alignments, each man places the palm of the left hand upon the 
hip, fingers pointing downward. In the first case the hand is dropped 
by the side when the next man on the left has his interval; in the 
second case, at the command front. (21) 

51. The posts of officers, noncommissioned officers, special units 
(such as band or machine-gun company), etc., in the various formations 
of the company, battalion, or regiment, are shown in plates. 

In all changes from one formation to another involving a change 
of post on the part of any of these, posts are promptly taken by the 
most convenient route as soon as practicable after the command of 
execution for the movement; officers and noncommissioned officers who 
have prescribed duties in connection with the movement ordered, take 
their new posts when such duties are completed. 

As instructors, officers and noncommissioned officers go wherever 
their presence is necessary. As file closers it is their duty to rectify 
mistakes and insure steadiness and promptness in the ranks. (22) 

52. Except at ceremonies, the special utiits have no fixed places. 
They take places as directed; in the absence of directions, they con- 
form as nearly as practicable to the plates, and in subsequent movements 
maintain their relative positions with respect to the flank or end of 
the command on which they were originally posted. (23) 

53. General, field and staff officers are habitually mounted. The 
staff of an officer forms in single rank 3 paces in rear of him, the right 
of the rank extending 1 pace to the right of a point directly in rear 



I32:i 



64-55-56-57-68-59 

<yMCH.w.Tn3w» ^ of him. Members of the staff are arranged 

■ r:r* in order from right to left as follows: Gen- 

* eral staff officers, adjutant, aids, other staff 

riFi^F^^^Mnn officers, arranged in each classification in 

MlMHF.Sy.tL.« order of rank, the senior on the right. The 

' ^ flag of the general officer and the orderlies 

n n D n U ^.re 3 paces in rear of the staff, the flag on 

.0.0...... ^^^ right. When necessary to reduce the 

rws front of the staff and orderlies, each line 

executes twos right or fours right, as explained in the Cavalry Drill 
Regulations, and follows the commander. 

When not otherwise prescribed, staff officers draw and return 
saber with their chief. (24) 

54. In making the about, an officer, mounted, habitually turns 
to the left. 

When the commander faces to give comma,nds, the staff, flag, 
and orderlies do not change position. (25) 

55. For ceremonies, all mounted enlisted men of a regiment or 
smaller unit, except those belonging to the machine-gun organizations, 
are consolidated into a detachment; the senior present commands if no 
officer is in charge. The detachment is formed as a platoon or squad 
of cavalry in line or column of fours; noncommissioned staff officers are 
on the right or in the leading ranks. (27) 

56. For ceremonies, such of the noncommissioned staff officers as 
are dismounted are formed 5 paces in rear of the color, in order of 
rank from right to left. In column of squads they march as file closers. 
(28) 

Other than for ceremonies, noncommissioned staff officers and 
orderlies accompany their immediate chiefs unless otherwise directed. 
If mounted, the noncommissioned staff officers are ordinarily posted on 
the right or at the head of the orderlies. (29) 

57. In all formations and movements a noncommissioned officer com- 
manding a platoon or company carries his piece as the men do, if he is 
so armed, and takes the same post as an officer in like situation. When 
the command is formed in line for ceremonies, a noncommissioned officer 
commanding a company takes post on the right of the right guide after 
the company has been aligned. (30) 

ORDERS, COMMANDS, AND SIGNALS 

58. In drill at attention commands only are employed. Otherwise 
either a command, signal or order is employed, as best suits the occasion, 
or one may be used in conjunction with another. (31) 

59. Signals should be freely used in instruction, in order that of- 
ficers and men may readily know them. In making arm signals the 
saber, rifle, or headdress may be held in the hand. (32) 

[33] 



eO-61-62-63-64 

60. Officers and men ^x their attention at tire first word of command, 
the first note of the bugle or whistle, or the first motion of the signal. 
A signal includes both the preparatory command and the command of 
execution; the movement commences as soon as the signal is understood, 
unless otherwise prescribed. (33) 

61. Except in movements executed at attention, commanders or 
leaders of subdivisions repeat orders, commands, or signals whenever 
such repetition is deemed necessary to insure prompt and correct ex- 
ecution. 

Officers, platoon leaders, guides, and musicians are equipped 
with whistles. Guides and musicians assist by repeating signals when 
necessary. Battalion and Company Commanders will use a whistle of 
different tone from that of the whistle used by platoon leaders and 
musicians. (34) 

62. Prescribed signals are limited to such as are essential as a 
substitute for the voice under conditions which render the voice in- 
adequate. 

Before or during an ergagement special signals may be agreed 
upon to facilitate the solution of such special difficulties as the particular 
situation is likely to develop, but it must be remembered that simplicity 
and certainty iare indispensable qualities of a signal. (35) 

Orders 

63. In these regulations an order embraces instructions or direction* 
given orally or in writing in terms suited to the particular occasion and 
not prescribed herein. 

Orders are employed only when the commands prescribed herein 
do not sufficiently indicate the will of the commander. 

Orders are more fully described in paragraphs 378 to 383, in- 
clusive. (36) 

Commands 

64. In these regulations a command is the will of the commander 
expressed in the phraseology prescribed herein. (37) 

There are two kinds of commands: 

Th6 preparatory command, such as forward, indicates the move- 
ment that is to be executed. 

The command of execution, such as MAECH, HALT, or AEMS, 
causes the execution. 

Preparatory commands are distinguished by bold face, those of 
execution by CAPITALS. 

;<: Where it is not mentioned in the text who gives the commands 
prescribed, they are to be given by the commander of the unit concerned. 

The preparatory command should be given at such an interval 
of time before the command of execution as to admit of being properly 
understood; the command of execution should be given at the instant 
the movement is to commence. 

[34] 



e5-6e-67 

The tone of command ts animated, distinct, and of a loudness 
proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended. 

Each preparatory command is enunciated distinctly, with a rising 
inflection at the end, and in such manner that the command of execution 
may be more energetic. 

The command of execution is firm in tone and brief. (38) 

65. Majors and commanders of units larger than a battalion repeat 
such commands of their superiors as are to be executed by their units, 
facing their units for that purpose. The battalion is the largest unit 
that executes a movement at the command of execution of its com- 
mander. (39) 

66. When giving commands to troops it is usually best to face to- 
ward them. 

Indifference in giving commands must be avoided as it leads to 
laxity in execution. Commands should be given with spirit at all times. 
(40) 

Bugle Signals 

67. The authorized bugle signals are published in Part V of these 
regulations. 

The following bugle signals may be used off the battle field, 
when not likely to convey information to the enemy: 

Attention: Troops are brought to attention. 

Attention to orders: Troops fix their attention. 

Forward, MABCH: Used also to execute quick time from double 
time. 

Double time, MARCH. 

To the rear, MARCH: In close order, execute squads right about, 
HALT. 

Assemble, MARCH. 

The following bugle signals may be used on the battle field: 

Fix bayonets. 

Charge. 

Assemble, March. 

These signals are used only when intended for the en tiro liiiiig 
line: hence they can be authorized only by the commander of a unit 
(for example, a regiment or brigade) which occupies a distinct section 
of the battle field. Exception: Fix bayonet. (See par. 318.) 

The following bugle signals are used in exceptional cases on 
the battle field. Their principal uses are in field exercises and practice 
firing. 

Commence firing: Officers charged with fire direction and control 
open fire as soon as practicable. When given to a firing line, the signal 
is equivalent to fire at will. 

Cease firing: All parts of the line execute cease firing at once. 

These signals are not used by units smaller than a regiment, 
except when such unit is independent or detached from its regiment. 



68-69 

Whistle Signals 

68. Attention to orders. A short blast of the whistle. This signal 
is used on the march or in combat when necessary to fe the attention 
of troops, or of their commanders or leaders, preparatory to giving 
commands, orders, or signals. 

When the firing line is firing, each squad leader suspends firing 
and fixes his attention at a short blast of his platoon leader's whistle. 
The platoon leader's subsequent commands or signals are repeated and 
enforced by the squad leader. If a squad leader's attention is attracted 
by a whistle other than that of his platoon leader, or if there are no 
orders or commands to convey to his squad he resumes firing at once. 

Suspend firing. A long blast of the whistle. (42) 

Arm Signals 

69. The following arm signals are prescribed. In making signals 
either arm may be used. OflScers who receive signals on the firing 
line "repeat back" at once to prevent misunderstanding. 



vv; 



FORWAI?© 



TIG. 9 



Forward, MARCH. Carry the hand to the shoulder; 
straighten and hold the arm horizontally, thrusting it 
in direction of march. 

This signal is also used to execute quick time from 
double time. 



Halt - AKM HELD STATlONARy 



ARfl /Aoveo UP A 
6EV6RAU TlMta. 




Halt. Carry the hand to the 
shoulder; thrust the hand upward and 
hold the arm vertically. 

Double time, MARCH. Carry 
the hand to the shoulder; rapidly thrust 
the hand upward the full extent of the 
arm several times. 



Squads right, MARCH. Eaise the arm 

laterally until horizontal; carry it to a vertical 

A position above the head and swing it several 

J~j\ times between the vertical and horizontal posi- 



7 



tions. 



I 



riQ II 



[36) 



69 (cont.) 



5pUAOS LtFT. 




Squads left, MARCH. Kaise the arm 
laterally until horizontal; carry it downward 
to the side and swing it several times be- 
tween the downward and horizontal positions 



riG.ie 




5puADS Right About. 

To TME RtAR.. 



\» nQ.i3. 



Squads right about, MARCH (if in 
close order) or, To the rear, MARCH (if in 
skirmish line). Extend the arm vertically 
above the head; carry it laterally downward 
to the side and swing it several times be- 
tween the vertical and downward positions. 



Change Directiok 




rrcj 14 



Change direction or Column right 
(left), MARCH. The hand on the side to- 
ward which the change of direction is to be 
made is carried* across the body to the oppo- 
site shoulder, forearm horizontal; then swing 
in a horizontal plane, arm extended, pointing 
in the new direction. 



As 5KIR.MISHtR.3. 




FJ<i.l5. 



As skirmishers, MARCH. 

Raise both arms laterally until 
horizontal. 



[37] 



69 (contd.) 



A* 5KIRMI6HER.5, GuiOt CtNTtR.. 




As skirmishers, guide cen- 
ter, MARCH. Eaise both arms 
laterally until horizontal; swing 
both simultaneously upward until 
vertical and return to the hori- 
zontal; repeat several times. 



As 5KIR.M1SME-R.S, 

GuiPE Right. 




As skirmishers, guide right 
(left), MARCH. Eaise both arms 
laterally until horizontal; hold the 
arm on the side of the guide 
steadily in the horizontal position; 
swing the other upward until verti- 
cal and return it to the horizontal; 
repeat several times. 



JIG. 17. 




Assemble, March. Eaise the arm vertically 
to its full extent and describe hoii^izontal circles. 



Or Increase By 30o 



Range or Change elevation. To announce 
range, extend the arm toward the leaders or men 
for whom the signal is intended, fist closed; by 
keeping the fist closed battle sight is indicated; 



by opening and closing the fist, expose thumb and 
fingers to a number equal to the hundreds of yards; 



[38] 



TO 



Aoo 50 Yards. 




to add 50 yards describe a short horizontal line with 
forefinger. 




PecEEAse By oOO 



;>U5P6ND r>R.I."«Q - 

Cease FiRiKG- svyl/^^GAll^ 

POYVM SEVefZAC UM63 




To change elevation, indicate the amount of 
increase or decrease by fingers as above; point upward 
to indicate increase and downward to indicate decrease. 



Suspend firing. Eaise and hold the forearm 
steadily in a horizontal position in front of the 
forehead, palm of the hand to the front. 

Cease firing. Eaise the forearm as in sus- 
pend firing and swing it up and down several times 
in front of the face. 




Platoon. Extend the arm horizontally toward 
the platoon leader; describe small circles with the 
hand. (See par. 44.) 




^ Squad. Extend the arm horizontally toward 

the platoon leader; swing the hand up and down 
from the wrist. (See par. 44.) 

Same as double time. (43) 

The signals platoon and squad are intended primarily for com- 
munication between the captain and his platoon leaders. The signal 
platoon or squad indicates that the platoon commander is to cause the 
signal which follows to be executed by platoon or squad. (44) 

For additional arm signals, see Par. 731. 

Flag Signals 
70. The signal flags described below are carried by the company 
musicians in the field. 

In a regiment in which it is impracticable to make the perma- 
nent battalion division alphabetically, the flags of a battalion are as 

139J 



70 (cont.) 

shown; flags are assigned to the companies alphabetically, within their 
respective battalions, in the order given below. 
First battalion: 

Company A. Red field, white square. 

Company B. Red field, blue square. 

Company C. Red field, white diagonals. 

Company D. Red field, blue diagonals. 
Second battalion: 

Company E. White field, red square. 

Company F. White field, blue square. 

Company G. White field, red diagonals. 

Company H. White field, blue diagonals. 
Third battalion: 

Company I. Blue field, red square. 

Company K. Blue field, white square. 

Company L. Blue field, red diagonals. 

Company M. Blue field, white diagonals. (45) 

Note. — ^An analysis of the above system of signal flags will show: — 

1. The color of the field indicates the battalion, and the colors run in the order that 
is so natural to us all, viz: Red, White and Blue. Hence, red field indicates the first 
battalion; white field, the second; blue field, the third. 

2. The squares indicate the first two companies of each battalion, and the diagonals, 
the second two. Hence, 



Companies 


Indicated by 


A 

B 


E 
F 


I 1 

K 1 Squares 


C G 1 L 

D H 1 M Diagonals 



3. The colors of the squares and diagonals in combination with those of the 
fields, run in the order that is so natural to us all, viz: Red, White and Blue, the 
color of any given field being, of course, omitted from the squares and diagonals, as a 
white square for instance, would not show on a white field, nor would a blue diagonal 
show on a blue field. For example, with a red field we would have white and blue 
for the square and diagonal colors; with a white field, red and blue for square and 
diagonal colors; ^yith a blue field red and white for the square and diagonal colors. 

4. From what has been said, the following table explains itself: 



Battalion 


Field 


Co. 


Squares 


Diagonals 






A 


White 




First 


Red 


B 
C 
D 


Blue 


White 
Blue 


:■'■ ' " - ''■^'^};tK^v 




E 


Red 




Second 


White 


F 
G 
H 


Blue 


Red 
Blue 






I 


Red 




Third 


Blue 


K 
L 


White 


Red 






M 




White 



Note how the square and diagonal colors always follow in the natural order of 
red, white, and blue, with the color of the field omitted. — ^Author. 

[40] 



71-72-73-74-75 

71. In addition to their use in visual signaling, these flags serve 
to mark the assembly point of the company when disorganized by com- 
bat, and to mark the location of the company in bivouac and elsewhere, 
when such use is desirable. (46) 

72. For communication between the firing line and the reserve or 
commander in rear, the subjoined signals (Signal Corps codes) are 
prescribed and should be memorized. In transmission, their concealment 
from the enemy's view should be insured. In the absence of signal 
flags, the headdress or other substitute may be used. 



Letter of 
alphabet. 



AAA 
CCC 



CF .. 
DT .. 
F .... 
FB ... 

G 

HHH 

K 

L 

O 

P 

Q 

RN ... 
RT .. 

sss . 

SUF . 
T 



If signaled from the rear to the 
firing line. 



Ammunition going forward 

Charge (mandatory at all times) . 



Cease firing 

Double time or "rush" .. 

Commence firing 

Fix bayonets 

Move forward 

Halt 

Negative 

Left 

What is the (R. N., etc.)?. 

Affirmative 

What is the range ? 

Range 

Right 

Support going forward . . . 

Suspend firing 

Target 



If signaled from the firing line to 
the rear. 

Ammunition required. 
Am about to charge if no instruc- 
tions to the contrary. 
Cease firing. 
Double time or "rush." 



Preparing to move forward. 

Negative. 

Left. 

What is the.CR. N.. etc.)? 

Affirmative. 

What is the range? 

Range. 

Right. 

Support needed. 

Suspend firing. 

Target. (47) 



(For signalling, see Par. 393.) (C. /. D, R. No. 9, Nov, U, 1914,) 

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 

73. The instructor explains briefly each movement, first executing 
it himself if practicable. He requires the recruits to take the proper 
positions unassisted and does not touch them for the purpose of correct- 
ing them, except when they are unable to correct themselves. He avoids 
keeping them too long at the same movement, although each should be 
understood before passing to another. He exacts by degrees the desired 
precision and uniformity. (48) 

74. In order that all may advance as rapidly as their abilities per- 
mit, the recruits are grouped according to proficiency as instruction 
progresses. Those who lack aptitude and quickness are separated from 
the others and placed under experienced drill masters. (49) 

Instruction Without Arms 
For preliminary instruction a number of recruits, usually not 
exceeding three or four, are formed as a squad in single rank. (50) 
Position of the Soldier, or Attention 

75. Heels on the same line and as near each other as the conforma- 
tion of the man permits. 

Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45*. 
Knees straight without stiffness. 

[41] 



76-77-78-79 

Hips level and drawn back slightly; body erect and resting 
equally on hips; chest lifted and arched; shoulders square and falling 
equally. 

Arms and hands hanging naturally, thumb along the seam of 
the trousers. 

Head erect and squarely to the front, chin drawn in so that 
the axis of the head and neck is vertical; eyes straight to the front. 

Weight of the body resting equally upon the heels and balls of 
the feet. (51) 

The Rests 
76. Being at a halt, the commands are: FALL OUT; REST; AT 
EASE; and, 1. Parade, 2. REST. 

At the command fall out, the men may leave the ranks, but are 
required to remain in the immediate vicinity. They resume their former 
places, at attention, at the command fall in. 

At the command rest each man keeps one foot in place, but is 
not required to preserve silence or immobility. 

At the command at ease each man keeps one foot in place and 
is required to preserve silence but not immobility. (52) 




77. 1. Parade, 2. REST. Carry the right foot 6 inches 
straight to the rear, left knee slightly bent; clasp the 
hands, without constraint, in front of the center of the 
body, fingers joined, left hand uppermost, left thumb 
clasped by the thumb and forefinger of the right hand; 
preserve silence and steadiness of position. (53) 



78. To resume the attention: 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION. 
The men take the position of the soldier. (54) 
cyts j2t<anT Eyes Right or Left. 

79. 1. Eyes, 2. RIGHT (LEFT), 3. FRONT. 

At the command right, turn the head to the 

right oblique, eyes fixed on the line of eyes of the 

men in, or supposed to be in, the same rank. At the 

command front, turn the head and eyes to the front. 

.FlQ,26i (55) 

[42] 




80-81-82-83-84 
Facings 

80. To the flank: 1. Right (left), 2. FACE. 

Raise slightly the left heel and right toe; face to the right, 
turning on the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of 
the left foot; place the left foot by the side of the right. Left face is 
executed on the left heel in the corresponding manner. 

Right (left) half face is executed similarly, facirig 45°. 

^'To face in marching '' and advance, turn on the ball of either 
foot and step off with the other foot in the new line of direction; to 
face in marching without gaining ground in the new direction, turn on 
the ball of either foot and mark time. (56) 

81. To the rear: 1. About, 2. FACE. 

Carry the toe of the right foot about a half foot-length to the 
rear and slightly to the left of the left heel without changing the posi- 
tion of the left foot; face to the rear, turning to the right on the left heel 
nrid right toe; place the right heel by the side of the left. (57) 



Salute with the Hand 
82. 1. Hand, 2. SALUTE. 

Raise the right hand smartly till the tip of the 
forefinger touches the lower part of the headdress 
above the right eye, thumb and fingers extended and 
joined, palm to the left, forearm inclined at about 45°, 
hand and wrist straight; at the same time look toward 
the person saluted. (TWO) Drop the arm smartly by 
the side. 

For rules governing salutes, see *' Honors and 
Salutes,'' pars. 758-765. (58) 



Steps and Marchings 

83. All steps and marchings executed from a halt, except right step, 
begin with the left foot. ' (59) 

84. The length of the full step in quick time is 30 inches, measured 
from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120 steps per 
minute. 

The length of the full step in double time is 36 inches; the 
cadence is at the rate of 180 steps per minute. 

The instructor, when necessary, indicates the cadence of the step 
by calling one, two, three, four, or left, right, the instant the left and 
right foot, respectively, should be planted. (60) 

[43] 




85-86-87-88-89 

85. All steps and marchings and movements involving march are 
executed in quick time unless the squad be marching in double time, or 
double time be added to the command; in the latter case double time is 
added to the preparatory command. Example: 1. Squad right, double 
time, 2. MARCH (School of the Squad). (61) 

Quick Time 

86. Being at ^ halt, to march forward in quick time: 1. Forward, 
2. MARCH. 

At the command forward, shift the weight of the body to the 
right leg, left knee straight. 

At the command march, move the left foot smartly straight 
forward 30 inches from the right, sole near the ground, and plant it 
without shock; next in like manner, advance the right foot and plant 
it as above; continue the march. The arms swing naturally. (62) 

87. Being at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march in double 
time: 1. Double time, 2. MARCH. 

If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight of the body 
to the right leg. At the command march, raise the forearms, fingers 
closed, to a horizontal position along the waist line; take up an easy 
run with the step and cadence of double time, allowing a natural swing- 
ing motion to the arms. 

If marching in quick time, at the command march, given as 
either foot strikes the ground, take one step in quick time, and then 
step off in double time. (63) 

To resume the quick time: 1. Quick time, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, given as either foot strikes the ground, 
advance and plant the other foot in double time; resume the quick time, 
dropping the hands by the sides. (64) 

To Mark Time 

88. Being in march: 1. Mark time, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, given as either foot strikes the ground, 
advance and plant the other foot; bring up the foot in rear and continue 
the cadence by alternately raising each foot about 2 inches and planting 
it on line with the other. 

Being at a halt, at the command march, raise and plant the 
feet as described above. (65) 

The Half Step 

89. 1. Half step, 2. MARCH. 

Take steps of 15 inches in quick time, 18 inches in double time 
(66) 

Forward, half step, halt, and mark time may be executed one 
from the other in quick or double time. 

To resume the full step from half step or mark time: 1. Forward, 
2. MARCH. (67) 

[44] 



90-91-92-93-94-95 
Side Step 

90. Being at a halt or mark time: 1. Right (left) step, 2. MARCH. 
Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right; bring the 

left foot beside it and continue the movement in the cadence of quick 
time. 

The side step is used for short distances only and is not exe- 
cuted in double time. 

If at order arms, the side step is executed at trail without com- 
mand. (68) 

Back Step 

91. Being at a halt or mark time: 1. Backward, 2. MARCH. 
Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear. 

The back step is used for short distances only and is not exe- 
cuted in double time. 

If at order arms, the back step is executed at trail without com- 
mand. (69) 

To Halt 

92. To arrest the inarch in quick or double time: 1. Squad, 2. HALT. 

At the command halt, given as either foot strikes the ground, 
plant the other foot as in marching; raise and place the first foot by 
the side of the other. If in double time, drop the hands by the sides. 
(70) 

To March by the Flank 

93. Being in march: 1. By the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the ground, 
advance and plant the left foot, then face to the right in marching 
and step off in the new direction with the right foot. (71) 

To March to the Rear 

94. Being in march: 1. To the rear, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the 
ground, advance and plant the left foot; turn to the right about on the 
balls of both feet and immediately step off with the left foot. 

If marching in double time, turn to the right about, taking 
four steps in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off with the 
left foot. (72) 

Change Step 

95. Being in march: 1. Change step, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the 
ground, advance and plant the left foot; plant the toe of the right foot 
near the heel of the left and step off with the left foot. 

The change on the right foot is similarly executed, the com- 
mand march being given as the left foot strikes the ground. (73) 

[45] 



96-97-98-99-100-101-102-103-104-105 

Manual of Arms 

96. As soon as practicable the recruit is taught the use, nomenclature 
and care of his rifle; when fair progress has been made in the instruc- 
tion without arms, he is taught the manual of arms; instruction without 
arms and that with arms alternate. (74) 

97. The following rules govern the carrying of the piece: 

First. The piece is not carried with cartridges in either the 
chamber or the magazine except when specifically ordered. - When so 
Joaded, or supposed to be loaded, it is habitually carried locked; that 
is, with the safety lock turned to the ''safe.'' At all other times it is 
carried unlocked, with the trigger pulled. (See par. 336). 

98. Second. Whenever troops are formed under arms, pieces are im- 
mediately inspected at the commands: 1. Inspection, 2. ASMS; 3. Order 
(Right shoulder, port), 4. ARMS. 

A similar inspection is made immediately before dismissal. 
If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine they are 
leinoved and placed in the belt. 

99. Third. The cut-off is kept turned ''off'' except when cartridges 
are actually used. 

100. Fourth. The bayonet is not fixed except in bayonet exercise, 
on guard, or for combat. 

101. Fifth. Fall in is executed with the piece at the order arms. 
Fall out, rest, and at ease are executed as without arms. On resuming 
attention the position of order arms is taken. 

102. Sixth. If at the order, unless otherwise prescribed, the piece 
is brought to the right shoulder at the command march, the three 
motions corresponding with the first three steps. Movements may be 
executed at the trail by prefacing the preparatory command with the 
words at trail; as, 1. At trail, forward, 2. MARCH; the trail is taken 
at the command march. 

When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, taking inter- 
val or distance, and assemblings are executed from the order, raise the 
piece to the trail while in motion and resume the order on halting. 

103. Seventh. The piece is brought to the order on halting. The 
execution of the order begins when the halt is completed. 

104. Eighth. A disengaged hand in double time is held as when 
without arms. (75) 

105. The following rules govern the execution of the manual of 
arms: 

First. In all positions of the left hand at the balance (center 
of 'gravity, bayonet unfixed) the thumb clasps the piece; the sling is 
included in the grasp of the hand. 

[46] 



105 (cont.) 

Second. In all positions of the piece ''diagonally across the 
body'' the position of the piece, left arm and hand are the same as 
in port arms. 



Third. In resuming the order from any position 
in the manual, the motion next to the last concludes 
with the butt of the piece about 3 inches from the ground, 
barrel to the rear, the left hand above and near the 
right, steadying the piece, fingers extended and joined, 
forearm and wrist straight and inclining downward, all 
fingers of the right hand grasping the piece. To complete 
the order, lower the piece gently to the ground with the 
right hand, drop the left quickly by the side, and take 
the position of order arms. 

Allowing the piece to drop through the right hand 
to the ground, or other similar abuse of the rifle to pro- 
duce effect in executing the manual, is prohibited. 



Fourth. The cadence of the motions is thkt of quick time; the 
recruits are first required to give their whole attention to the details 
of the motions, the cadence being gradually acquired as they become 
accustomed to handling their pieces. - The instructor may require them 
to count aloud in cadence with the motions. 

Pifth. The manual is taught at a halt and the movements are 
for the purpose of instruction, divided into motions and executed in 
detail; in this case the command of execution determines the prompt 
execution of the first motion, and the commands, two, tliree, four, that 
of the other motions. 

To execute the movements in detail, the instructor first cautions: 
By the numbers; all movements divided into motions are then executed 
as above explained until he cautions: Without the numbers; or conimands 
movements other than those in the manual of arms. r" 

Sixth. Whenever circumstances require, the regular ^positions 
of the manual of arms and the firings may be ordered without regard 
to the previous position of the piece. 

Under exceptional conditions of weather or fatigue the Tifle may 
be carried in any manner directed. (76) 




[471 



106-107-108 




106. Position of order arms standing: The butt rests 
evenly on the ground, barrel to the rear, toe of the butt 
on a line with toe of, and touching, the right shoe, arms 
and hands hanging naturally, right hand holding the 
piece between the thumb and fingers. (77) 



rn-estNT J\K.t\» 



Fig. 30 



107. Being at order arms: 1. Present, 2. ABMS. 

With the right hand carry the piece in front of 
the center of the body, barrel to the rear and vertical, 
grasp it with the left hand at the balance, forearm hori- 
zontal and resting against the body. (TWO) Grasp the 
small of the stock with the right hand. (78) 





108. Being at order arms: 1. Port, 2. ABMS. 

With the right hand raise and throw the piece 
diagonally across the body, grasp it smartly with both 
hands; the right, palm down, at the small of the stock; 
the left, palm up, at the balance; barrel up, sloping to 
the left and crossing opposite the junction of the neck 
with the left shoulder; right forearm horizontal; left 
forearm resting against the body; the piece in a vertical 
plane parallel to the front. (79) 



£481 



109-110-111-112-113-114-115-116-117 

109. Being at present arms: 1. Port, 2. AEMS. 

Carry the piece diagonally across the body and take the position 
of port arms. (80) 

110. Being at port arms: 1. Present, 2. ARMS. 

Carry the piece to a vertical position in front of the center of 
the body and take the j)osition of present arms. (81) 

111. Being at present or port arms: 1. Order, 2. ARMS. 

Let go with the right hand; lower and carry the piece to the 
right with the left hand; regrasp it with the right hand just above the 
lower band; let go with the left hand, and take the next to the last 
position in coming to the order. (TWO) Complete the order. (82) 

112. Being at order arms: 1. Right 
shoulder, 2. ARMS. 

With the right hand raise and 
throw the piece diagonally across the 
body; carry the right hand quickly to the 
butt, embracing it, the heel between the 
first two fingers. (TWO) Without chang- 
ing the grasp of the right hand, place 
the piece on the right shoulder, barrel up 
and incHned at an angle of about 45° 
from the horizontal, trigger guard in the 
hollow of the shoulder, right elbow near 
the side, the piece in a vertical plane per- 
pendicular to the front; carry the left 
hand, thumb and fingers extended and 
joined, to the small of the stock, tip of 
the forefinger touching the cocking piece, 
wrist straight and elbow down. (THREE) 
Drop the left hand by the side. (83) 

113. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. Order, 2. ARMS. 

Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally 
across the body, the right hand retaining the grasp of the butt. (TWO), 
(THREE) Execute order arms as described from port arms. (84) 

114. Being at port arms: 1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS. 

Change the right hand to the butt. (TWO), (THREE) As in 
right shoulder arms from order arms. (85) 

115. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. Port, 2. ARMS. 

Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally 
across the body, the right hand retaining its grasp of the butt. (TWO) 
Change the right hand to the small of the stock. (86) 

116. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. Present, 2. ARMS. 
Execute port arms. (THREE) execute present arms. (87) 

117. Being at present arms: 1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS. 

[49J 




118-119-120-121-122 

Execute port arms. (TWO), (THREE), (FOUR) Execute right 
shoulder arms as from port arms. (88) 

118. Being at port arms: 1. Left shoulder, 2. ARMS. 
Carry the piece with the right hand and place it 

on the left shoulder, barrel up, trigger guard in the 
hollow of the shoulder; at the same time grasp the butt 
with the left hand, heel between first and second fingers, 
thumb and fingers closed on the stock. (TWO) Drop the 
right hand by the side. 

119. Being at left shoulder arms: 1. Port, 2. ARMS. 
Grasp the piece with the right hand at the small 

of the stock. (TWO) Carry the piece to the right with 
the right hand, regrasp it with the left, and take the 
position of port arms. 

Left shoulder arms may be ordered directly from 
the order, right shoulder or present, or the reverse. At 
the command arms execute port arms and continue in 
cadence to the position ordered. (89) 



120. Being at order arms: 1. Parade, 2. REST. 
Carry the right foot 6 inches -straight to the rear, 

left knee slightly bent; carry the muzzle in front of the 
center of the body, barrel to the left; grasp the piece 
with the left hand just below the stacking swivel, and 
with the right hand below and against the left. 

121. Being at parade rest: 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION. 
Eesume the order, the left hand quitting the piece 

opposite the right hip. (90) 





122. Being at order arms: 1. Trail, 2. ARMS. 

Eaise the piece, right arm slightly bent, and incline 
the muzzle forward so that the barrel makes an angle of 
about 30° with the vertical. 

When it can be done without danger or inconvenience 
to others, the piece may be grasped at the balance and the 
muzzle lowered until the piece is horizontal; a similar posi- 
tion in the left hand may be used. (91) 



[50] 



123-124-125-126 

123. Being at trail arms: 1. Order, 2. ARMS. 

Lower the piece with the right hand and resume the order. (92) 

Eifle Salute 
124. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. Rifle, 2. SALUTE. 
Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the 
stock, forearm horizontal, palm of hand down, thumb and 
fingers extended and joined, forefinger touching end of 
cocking piece; look toward the person saluted. (TWO) 
Drop left hand by the side; turn head and eyes to the 
front. (93) 





Being at order or trail arms: 1. Rifle, 2. SALUTE. 

Carry the left hand smartly to the right side, palm 
of the hand down, thumb and fingers extended and joined, 
forefinger against piece near the muzzle; look toward the 
person saluted. (TWO) Drop the left hand by the side; 
turn the head and eyes to the front. 

For rules governing salutes, see ''Honors and Sa- 
lutes'' (pars. 758-765). (94) 



The Bayonet 

125. Being at order arms: 1. Fix, 2. BAYONET. 

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade 
rest; grasp the bayonet with the right hand, back of hand toward the 
body; draw the bayonet from the scabbard and fix it on the barrel, 
glancing at the muzzle; resume the order. 

If the bayonet is carried on the haversack: Draw the bayonet 
.with the left hand and fix it in the most convenient manner. (95) 

126. Being at order arms: 1. Unfix, 2. BAYONET. 

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade 
rest; grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the right hand, pressing 
the spring with the forefinger of the right hand; raise the bayonet until 
the handle is about 12 inches above the muzzle of the piece; drop the 
point to the left, back of the hand toward the body, and, glancing at 
the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing between the left 
arm and the body; regrasp the piece with the right hand and resume the 
order. 

[51] 



127-128-129-130-131-132-133 

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the 
bayonet from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard 
in the most convenient manner. 

If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in 
the most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned 
to the original position. 

Fix and unfix bayonet are executed with promptness and regular ^ 
ity but not in cadence. (96) (For fixing bayonet with Krag rifle, see 
Par. 337.0 

127. CHARGE BAYONET. Whether executed at halt or in motion, 
the bayonet is held toward the opponent as in the position of guard in 
the Manual for Bayonet Exercise. 

Exercises for instruction in bayonet combat are prescribed in 
the Manual for Bayonet Exercise. (97) 

The Inspection 

128. Being at order arms: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS. 
At the second command take the position of port 

arms. (TWO) Seize the bolt handle with the thumb and 
forefinger of the right hand, turn the handle up, draw the 
bolt back, and glance at the chamber. Having found the 
chamber empty, or having emptied it, raise the head and 
eyes to the front. (98) (See Par. 338.) 

129. Being at inspection arms: 1. Order (Right shoulder, 
port), 2. ARMS. 

At the preparatory command push the bolt forward, 
turn the handle down, pull the trigger, and resume port 
arms. At the command arms, complete the movement 
ordered. (99) (See Par. 339.) 

To Dismiss the Squad 

130. Being at halt: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Port, 
4. ARMS, 5. DISMISSED. (100) 

SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 

131. Soldiers are grouped into squads for purposes of instruction, 
discipline, control, and order. (101) 

132. The squad proper consists of a corporal and seven privates. 
The movements in the School of the Squad are designed to 

make the squad a fixed unit and to jfacilitate the control and movement 
of the company. If the number of men grouped is more than 3 and 
less than 12, they are formed as a squad of 4 files, the excess above 8 
being posted as file closers. If the number grouped is greater than 
11, 2 or more squads are formed and the group is termed a platoon. 

For the instruction of recruits, these rules may be modified. (102) 

133. The corporal is the squad leader, and when absent is replaced 
by a designated private. If no private is designated, the senior in 
length of service acts as leader. 

[52] _ 




134-135-136 

The corporal, when in ranks, is posted as the left man in the 
front rank of the squad. 

When the corporal leaves the ranks to lead his squad, his rear 
rank man steps into the front rank, and the file remains blank until 
the corporal returns to his place in ranks, when his rear rank man 
steps back into the rear rank. (103) ^ 

134. In battle officers and sergeants endeavor to preserve the in- 
tegrity of squads; they designate new leaders to replace those disabled, 
organize new squads when necessary, and see that every man is placed 

in a squad. , . .^i. .i, a i 

Men are taught the necessity of remaining with the squad to 
which they belong and, in case it be broken up or they become separated 
therefrom, to attach themselves to the nearest squad and platoon leaders, 
whether these be of their own or of another organization. (104) 

The squad executes the halt, rests, facings, steps and marchings, 
and the manual of arms as explained in the School of the Soldier. (105) 

To Form the Squad 
135. To form the squad the instructor places himself 3 paces in 
front of where the center is to be and commands: FALL IN*. 

The men assemble at attention, pieces at the order, and are 
arranged by the corporal in double rank, as nearly as practicable in 
order of height from right to left, each man dropping his left hand as 
soon as the man on his left has his interval. The rear rank forms with 
distance of 40 inches. 

The instructor then commands: COUNT OFF. 
At this command all except the right file execute eyes right, 
and beginning on the right, the men in each rank count one, two, three, 
four; each man turns his head and eyes to the front as he counts. 
Pieces are then inspected. (106) 

Alignments 
136. To align the squad, the base file or files having been established : 
1. Eight (Left), 2. DRESS, 3. FRONT. 

At the command dress all men place the left hand upon the 
hip (whether dressing to the right or left); each man, except the base 
file when on or near the new line executes eyes right, and, taking steps 
of 2 or 3 inches, places himself so that his right arm rests lightly against 
the arm of the man on his right, and so that his eyes and shoulders 
are in line with those of the men on his right; the rear rank men 
cover in file. 

The instructor verifies the alignment of both ranks from tbe 
right flank and orders up or back such men as may be in rear, or in 
advance, of the line; only the men designated move. 

[53] 



136a-lS7 

At the command front, given when the ranks are aligned, each 
man turns his head and eyes to the front and drops his left hand by his 
side. "^ 

In the first drills the basis of the alignment is established on, 
or parallel to, the front of the squad; afterwards, in oblique directions. 

Whenever the position of the base file or files necessitates a 
considerable movement by the squad, such movement will be executed 
by marching to the front or oblique, to the flank or backward, as the 
case may be, without other command, and at the trail. (107) 

lS6a. To preserve the alignment when marching: GUIDE RIGHT 

The men preserve their intervals from the side of the guide, 
yielding to pressure from that side and resisting pressure from the op- 
posite direction; they recover intervals, if lost, by gradually opening 
out or closing in; they recover alignment by slightly lengthening -or 
shortening the step; the rear-rank men cover their file leaders at 40 
inches. 

In double rank, the front-rank man on the right, or designated 
flank, conducts the march; when marching faced to the flank, the lead- 
ing man of the front rank is the guide. (108) 

To Take Intervals and Distances 
137. Being in line at a halt: 1. Take interval, 2. To the right (left), 
3. MARCH, 4. Squad, 5. HALT. 

1 

Being m line at a halt. DDDn 

1. Take interval, 2. To the right (left) m J^s 

At the second command the rear-rank p.. ..,-,,_. 

men march backward 4 steps and halt; -j^-'LJLJ 

nana 

3. MARCH 

At the command march all face to the'^'^^S^Ci SK 
right and the leading man of each rank steps off; 
the other men step off in succession, each follow- 
ing the preceding man at 4 paces, rear-rank men □□DC": O 
marching abreast of iheir file leaders. 

t 

s s s s 

4. Squad, 5. HALT 
At the command halt, given when all have 
their intervals, all halt and face to the front. D D D D 
(109) 

[54] T1Q.40. 



137a.l38 



S 



D 



S S S 



D D a' 



riHTfRvALS) 137a. Being at intervals, to assemble 
the squad: 



„,a\ 






Dnnn 



(Asatmai^ 



1. Assemble, to the right (left), 2. 
MAECH. 

The front-rank man on the right 
stands fast, the rear-rank man on the 
right closes to 40 inches. The other 
men face to the right, close by the 
shortest line, and face to the front. 
(110) 



nG.4i 



Si 



Si^ 



D 



4 t\ '*-. "''^ ''\ 



138. Being in line at a halt and having counted 
off: 1. Take distance, 2. MARCH, 3. ScLuad, 4. HALT. 

At the command march No. 1 erf the front 
rank moves straight to the front; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 
of the front rank and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the 
rear rank, in the order named, move straight to the 
front, each stepping off so as to follow the preceding 
man at 4 paces. The command halt is given when all 
have their distances. 

In case more than one squad is in line, each 
squad executes the movement as above. The guide 
of each rank of numbers is right. (Ill) 



[55] 



139-140 






(At Distanc&5)| 



ri<i43, 



139. Being at distances, to assemble the squad: 
1. Assemble, 2. MARCH. 

No. 1 of the front rank stands fast; the 
other numbers move forward to their proper places 
in line. (112) 



To Stack and Take Arms 
140. Being in line at a halt: STACK ARMS. Each 
even number of the front rank grasps his piece with the 
left hand at the upper band 





and rests the butt between his feet, barrel 
to the front, muzzle inclined slightly to the 
front and opposite the center of the interval 
on his right, the thumb and forefinger rais- 
ing the stacking swivel; each even number 
of the rear rank then passes his piece, barrel 
to the rear, to his file leader, who grasps it 
between the bands with his right hand 



[56] 



140 (cont.) 




and throws the butt about 2 feet in advance 
of that of his own piece and opposite the 
right of the interval, the right hand slipping 
to the upper band, the thumb and forefinger 
raising the stacking swivel, which he engages 
with that of his own piece; 



each odd number of the front rank raises his piece with 
the right hand, carries it well forward, barrel to the front; 
the left hand, guiding the stacking swivel, 





engages the lower hook of the swivel of his 
own piece with the free hook of that of tht 
even number of the rear rank; he then turna 
the barrel outward into the angle formed bj 
the other two pieces and lowers the butt to 
the ground, to the right and against the ton 
of his right shoe. 



The stacks made, the loose pieces are laid on them by the even number* 
of the front rank. 



[57] 



141-142-143 

When each man has finished handling pieces, he takes the posi- 
tion of the soldier. (113.) 

141. Being in line behind the stacks: TAKE ARMS. 
(See preceding illustration.) 
The loose pieces are returned by the even numbers of the front rank; 
each even number of the front rank grasps his own piece with the left 
hand, the piece of his rear rank man with his right hand, grasping both 
between the bands; each odd number of the front rank grasps his piece 
in the same way with the right hand; disengages it by raising the butt 
from the ground and thQn turning the piece to the right, detaches it 
from the stack; each even number of the f^ront rank disengages and de- 
taches his piece by turning it to the left, 




^yf and, then passes the piece of his rear-rank man 
to him, 



and all resume the order. (114) 

Should any squad have Nos. 2 and 3 blank files. No. 1 rear rank 
takes the place of No. 2 rear rank in making and breaking the stack; 
the stacks made or broken, he resumes his post. 

Pieces not used in making the stacks are termed loose pieces. 

Pieces are never stacked with the bayonet fixed. (115) 

The Oblique March 

142. For the instruction of recruits, the squad being in column or 
correctly aligned, the instructor causes the squad to face half right or 
half left, points out to the men their relative positions, and explains 
that these are to be maintained in the oblique march. (116) 

143. I. Right (Left) oblictue, 2. MARCH. 

Each man steps oif in a direction 45° to the right of his original 

[58] -. 



144-145 

/ front. He preserves his relative position, keeping 

^,,,^ OOOO ^^^ shoulders parallel to those of the guide (the man 

<^^^«'""^'^ ^ on the right front of the line or column), and so 

regulates his steps that the ranks remain parallel 

J^^ ^^ to their original front. 

...... u J B6ro«6 ^^ |.j^Q command halt the men halt faced to 

rn TT TT rT Oeuguirxi . 

"-■ "^ '-^ "" front. 

nQ44^ To resume the original direction: 1. Forward, 

2. MARCH. 

The men half face to the left in marching and then move straight 
to the front. 

If at halfstep or mark time while obliquing, the oblique march 
is resumed by the commands: 1. Oblique, 2. MARCH. (117) 

To Turn on Moving Pivot 

144. Being in line: 1. Right (Left) turn, 2. MARCH. 

The movement is executed by each rank successively and on 

the same ground. At the second command, the 

^._-^„-_j-h>_n?u pivot man of the front rank faces to the right 

/ .. r>-(7V ^^ marching and takes the half step; the other 

/ / ._r-L.r7L. men of the rank oblique to the right until opposite 

^^f?[2K [Ih-0* their places in line, then execute a second right 

E5 fi 6 E5 oblique and take the half step on arriving abreast 

^-^'""'^"'^^ of the pivot man. All glance toward the march- 

ing flank while at half step and take the full step 
without command as the last man arrives on the 
line. 
Right (Left) half turn is executed in a similar manner. The 
pivot man makes a half change of direction to the right and the other 
men make quarter changes in obliquing. (118) 

To Turn on Fixed Pivot 

145. Being in line, to turn and march: 1. Squad right (left), 2. 
MARCH. 



(a) 



At the second command, the right flank man 

OAx^^^lTK ^^ ^^^ front rank faces to the right in marching and 

LJ /'' r— , marks tjme; the other front rank men oblicjjie to 

^yV~Y y^^^^-^ the right, place themselves r.breast of the pivot, 

i^i ffSj i^^j 0*" ^^d mark time. In the rear /ank the third man 

1 lJ from the right, followed in column by the second 

^^ ^1^ ^ and first, moves straight to the front. 



-I L J 



[59] 



1-147 




(b 


> 


Q 


<l^ 


d 


0- 


6 


0* 


d 


Eh 


(C) 


o' 


IZK 


Q 


0- 


O 


0- 


Q 


0* 



• until in rear of his front-rank maa, 



when all face to the right in marching and mark 
time; 



the other number of the rear rank moves straight 
^BE Ca) *® *^^ front four paces and places himself abreast 

of the man on his right. Men on the new line 
glance toward the marching flank while marldng 
TIQ.46. time and, as the last man arrives on the line, both 

ranks execute forward, MARCH, without command. 
(119) 

146. Being in line, to turn and halt: 1. Squad right (left), 2. MARCH, 
3. Squad, 4. HALT. 

The third command is given immediately after the second. The 
turn is executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph except that 
all men, on arriving on the new line, mark time until the fourth com- 
mand is given, when all halt. The fourth command should be given as 
the last man arrives on the line. (120) 

147. Being in line, to turn about and march: 1. Squad right (left) 
about, 2. MARCH. 

At the second command, the front rank twice executes squad 
right, initiating the second squad right when the man on the marching 
flank has arrived abreast of the rank. In the rear rank the third 
m|Ln from the right, followed by the second and first in column, moves 
straight to the front until on the prolongation of the line to be oc- 
cupied by the rear rank; changes direction .to the right; moves in the 
new direction until in rear of his front-rank man, when all face to 
the right in marching, mark time, and glance toward the marching 
flank. The fourth man marches on the left of the third to his new posi- 
tion; as he arrives on the line, both ranks execute forward, MARCH, 
without command. (121) 

-- [601 



148-149-150 

148. Being in line, to turn about and halt: 1. Squad right (left) about, 
2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT. 

The third command is given immediately after the second. The 
turn is executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph except that 
all men, on arriving on the new line, mark time until the fourth com- 
mand is given, when all halt. The fourth command should be given 
as the last man arrives on the line. (122) 

To Follow the Corporal 
149. Being assembled or de- 
ployed, to march the squad with- 
out unnecessary commands, the 
corporal places himself in front 
of it and commands: FOLLOW 
ME. 

If in line or skirmish line, 
No. 2 of the front rank follows 
in the trace of the corporal at 
about 3 paces; the other men con- 
form to the movements of No. 2, 
guiding on him and maintaining 
their relative positions. 



.f t 

/ 3pccesl 

[]nnn 


f 


?!"'" (As Skiem/sheesIj 


D S D S D s a 

4 3 3 a 2 1 I 


■ 

D t 
D 

n 

r-i (lNCoL\:rMhr) 


n 

D 
D 



If in column, the head of 
the column follows the corporal. 
(123) 



"FIQ.47. 



To Deploy as Skirmishers 



n 



s n f s 






150. Being in any for- 

'^ rDEPuoyEo ON ^nation, assembled: 1. As 



' , ' , '/a Pace 



(As5ENV8i-Et? IN Line ). 



J\. 



(In this diagram the corporal was in front of the 
squad before the movement began.) 

ten 



skirmishers, 2. MARCH. 
The corporal plac- 
es himself in front of the 
squad, if not already 
there. Moving at a run, 
the men place themselves 
abreast of the corporal at 
half -pace intervals, Nos. 1 



151-152-153 



nA-Q." IS p s p 



(deployed Om 






' f AssE^v&^-ED I" 
Column Of Files). 



D S, P S P , S P 



L J LM uH'i-^ , 
rSr^nr<' 

L J U_l L J 



(Assenibleo In Lime 
And Advancing) 



and 2 on his right, Nos. 
3 and 4 on his left, rear- 
rank men on the right of 
their file leaders, extra 
men on the left of No. 4; 
all then conform to the 
corporal ^s gait. 

When the squad is 
acting alone, skirmish line 
is similarly formed on No. 
2 of the front rank, who 
stands fast or continues 
the march, as the case 
may be; the corporal plac- 
es himself in front of the 
(DEPLoyEDON Ko.2).gq^g^^ ^j^gj^ advancing 

and in rear when halted. 

When deployed as 
sldrmishers, the men 
march at ease, pieces at 
the trail unless otherwise 
ordered. 

The corporal is 
the guide when in the 
line; otherwise No. 2 
front rank is the guide. 
(124) 

151. The normal interval between skirmishers is one-half pace, result- 
ing practically in oce man per yard of front. The front of a squad 
thus deployed as skirmishers is about 10 paces. (125) 

To Increase or Diminish Intervals 

152. If assembled, and it is desired to deploy at greater than the 
normal interval; or if deployed, and it is desired to increase or decrease 
the interval: 1. As skirmishers, (so many) paces, 2. MARCH. 

Intervals are taken at the indicated number of paces. If al- 
ready deployed, the men move by the flank toward or away from the 
guide. (126) 

The Assembly 

153. Being deployed: 1. Assemble. 2. MARCH. 

The men move toward the corporal and form in their proper 
places. 

If the corporal continues to advance, the men move in double 
time, form, and follow him. 

The assembly while marching to the rear is not executed. (127) 

[62] 



T1C!.4&. 



154-155 
Kneeling and Lsring Down 
154. If standing: KNEEL. 

Half face to the right; carry the right toe about 1 foot to the 
left rear of the left heel; 



kneel on right knee, sitting as nearly as possible on 
the right heel; left forearm across left thigh; piece 
remains in position of order arms, right hand grasp- 
ing it above lower band. (128) 




155. If standing '^n kneeling: LIE DOWN. 



Kneel, but with right knee against left heel: 





carry back the left foot and lie flat 
on the belly, inclining body about 
35° to the right 



piece horizontal, barrel up, 
muzzle off the ground and 
pointed to the front; elbows 
on the ground; left hand at 
the balance, right hand grasp- 
ing the small of the stock op- 
posite the neck. This is the 
position of order arms, lying 
down. (129) 



[63] 



156-157-158-159-160-160a-161-162-163-164 

156. If kneeling or lying down: EISE. 

If kneeling, stand up, faced to the front, on the ground marked 
by the left heel. 

If lying down, raise body on both knees; stand up, faced to 
the front, on the ground marked by the knees. (130) 

157. If lying down: KNEEL. 

Eaise the body on both knees; take the position of kneel. (131) 

158. In double rank, the positions of kneeling and lying down are 
ordinarily used only for the better utilization of cover. 

When deployed as skirmishers, a sitting position may be tak«n 
in lieu of the position kneeling. (132) 

Loadings and Firings 

159. The commands for loading and firing are the same whether stand- 
ing, kneeling, or lying down. The firings are always executed at a halt. 

When kneeling or lying down in double rank, the rear rank does 
not load, aim, or fire. 

The instruction in firing will be preceded by a command for load- 
ing. 

Loadings are executed in line and skirmish line only. (133) 

160. Pieces having been ordered loaded are kept loaded without 
command until the command unload, or inspection arms, fresh clips being 
inserted when the magazine is exhausted. (134) (See Par. 340.) 

160a. The aiming point or target is carefully pointed out. This may be 
done before or after announcing the sight setting. Both are indicated 
before giving the command for firing, but may be omitted when the target 
appears suddenly and is unmistakable; in such case battle sight is used 
if no sight setting is announced. (135) 

161. The target or aiming point having been designated and the sight 
setting announced, such designation or announcement need not be repeated 
until a change of either or both is necessary. 

Troops are trained to continue their fire upon the aiming point 
or target designated, and at the sight setting announced, until a change 
is ordered. (136) 

162. If the men are not already in the position of load, that position 
is taken at the announcement of the sight setting; if the announcement is 
omitted, the position is taken at the first command for firing. (137) 

163. When deployed, the use of the sling as an aid to accurate firing 
is discretionary with each man. (138) 

To Load 

164. Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 

1. With dummy (blank or ball) cartridges, 2. LOAD. 

[64] 



164 (cont.) 



At the command load each front-rank man or 
sldrmisher faces half right and carries the right foot to the 
right, about 1 foot, to such position as will insure the 
greatest firmness and steadiness of the body; raises, or 
lowers, the piece and drops it into the left hand at the 
balance, the left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle 
at the height of the breast, and turns the cut-off up. 



With the right hand he turns and draws the 
bolt back, 





takes a loaded clip and inserts the end in tte 
clip slots, places the thumb on the powder space 
of the top cartridge, the fingers extending around 
the piece and tips resting on the magazine floor 
plate; 



forces the cartridges into the magazine by pressing down with the 
thumb; without removing the clip, thrusts the bolt home, turning down 
the handle; turns tbe safety lock to the **safe," 

[65] 




and carries the hand to the small of the stock. 



Each rear rank man moves to the 
right front, takes a similar position opposite 
the interval to the right of his front rank 
man, muzzle of the piece extending be- 
yond the front rank and loads. 




A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held 
as nearly as practicable in the position of load. 



If kneeling or sitting, the position of the 
piece is similar; if kneeling, the left fore- 
arm rests on the left thigh; 




f66] 



165-166-167 




if sitting the elbows are supported by the 

knees. 



If lying down, the left 
hand steadies and sup- 
ports the piece at the 
balance, the toe of the 
butt resting on the 
ground, the muzzle off 
the ground. 
For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying 
down) are designated as that of load. (139). (See Par. 341.) 

165. For instruction in loading: 1. Simulate, 2. LOAD. 

Executed as above described except that the cut-off remains 
''off'^ and the handling of cartridges is simulated. 

The recruits are first taught to simulate loading and firing; 
after a few lessons dummy cartridges may be used. Later, blank 
cartridges may be used. (140) 

The rifle may be used as a single loader by turning the magazine 
''off. '^ The magazine may be filled in whole or in part while "off" or 
''on^' by pressing cartridges singly down and back until they are in 
the proper place. The use of the rifle as a single loader is, however, to 
be regarded as exceptional. (141) (See 342.) 

To Unload 

166. UNLOAD. 

Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and move bolt 
alternately back and forward until all the cartridges are ejected. After 
the last cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed by first thrusting the 
bolt slightly forward to free it from the stud holding it in place when 
the chamber is open, pressing the follower down and back to engage it 
under the bolt and then thrusting the bolt home; the trigger is pulled. 
The cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and returned to the belt 
and the piece is brought to the order. (142) (See 343.) 

To Set the Sight 

167. RANGE, ELEVEN HUNDRED (EIGHT-FIFTY, etc.), or BAT- 
TLE SIGHT. 

[67] 



168 

The sight is set at the elevation indicated. The instructor ex- 
plains and verifies sight settings. (143) 

To Fire by Volley 
168. 1. Ready, 2. AIM, 3. Sguad, 4. FIRE. 




At the command ready turn the safety 
lock to the ' ^ ready ^'; 



at the command aim raise the piece with 
both hands and support the butt firmly 
against the hoUow of the right shoulder, 
right thumb clasping the stock, barrel 
horizontal, left elbow well under the piece, 
right elbow as high as the shoulder; in- 
cline the head slightly forward and a 
little to the right, cheek against the stock, 





left eye closed, right eye looking through 'the notch of 
the rear sight so as to preceive the object aimed at, second 
joint of the forefinger resting lightly against the front 
of the trigger and taking up the slack; top of front sight 
is carefully raised into, and held in, the line of sight. 



[68] 



168 (cont.) 



-?i^=^- 



Each rear-rank man aims through the 
interval to the right of his file leader 
and leans slightly forward to advance 
the muzzle of his piece beyond the front 
rank. 





In aiming kneeling, the left elbow rests 
on the left knee, point of elbow in front 
of kneecap. 



In aiming sitting, the elbows are supported 
by the knees. 





In aiming, lying down, 
raise the piece with 
both hands; rest on 
both elbows and press 
the butt firmly against 
the right shoulder. 



I69J 



169-170-171-172-173 

At the command fire press the finger against the trigger; fire with- 
out deranging the aim and without lowering or turning the piece; lower 
the piece in the position of load and load. (144) 

To continue the firing: 1. AIM, 2. Squad, 3. FIRE. 

Each command is executed as previously explained. Load (from 
magazine) is executed by drawing back and thrusting home the bolt 
with the right hand, leaving the safety lock at the ** ready." (145) 

To Fire at Will 

169. FIRE AT WILL. 

Each man, independently of the others, comes to the ready, aims 
carefully and deliberately at the aiming point or target, fires, loads, and 
continues the firing until ordered to suspend or cease firing. (146) 

170. To increase (decrease) the rate of fire in progress the instructor 
shouts: FASTER (SLOWER). 

Men are trained to fire at the rate of about three shots per 
minute at effective r*anges and five or six at close ranges, devoting 
the minimum of time to loading and the maximum to deliberate aiming. 
To illustrate the necessity for deliberation, and to habituate men to 
combat conditions, small and comparatively indistinct targets are desig- 
nated. (147) 

To Fire by Clip 

171. CLIP FIRE. 

Executed in the same manner as fire at will, except that each 
man, after having exhausted the cartridges then in the piece, suspends 
firing. (148) (See par. 344.) 

To Suspend Firing 

172. The instructor blows a long blast of the whistle and repeats 
same, if necessary, or commands: SUSPEND FIRING. 

Firing stops; pieces are held, loaded and locked, in a position 
of readiness for instant resumption of firing, rear sights unchanged. 
The men continue to observe the target or aiming point, or the place 
at which the target disappeared, or at which it is expected to reappear. 

This whistle signal may be used as a preliminary to cease firing. 
(149) 

To Cease Firing 

173. CEASE FIRING. 

Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position 
of load; those not loaded, are loaded; sights are laid, pieces are locked 
and brought to the order. 

Cease firing is used for long pauses, to prepare for changes of 
position, or to steady the men. (150) (See par. 345.) . 

Commands for suspending or ceasing fire may be given at any 
time after the preparatory command for firing whether the firing has 
actually commenced or not. (151) 

[701 






' 174-176 

The Use Of Cover 

174. The recruit should be given careful instruction in the individual 
use of cover. 

It should be impressed upon him that, in taking advantage of 
natural cover, he must be able to fire easily and effectively upon the 
enemy; if advancing on an enemy, he must do so steadily and as rapidly 
as possible; he must conceal himself as much as possible while firing 
and while advancing. While setting his sight he should be under cover 
or lying prone. (152) 

To teach him to fire easily and effectively, at the same time 
concealing himself from the view of the enemy, he is practiced in simu- 
lated firing in the prone, sitting, kneeling, and crouching positions, from 
behind hillocks, trees, heaps of earth or rocks, from depressions, gullies, 
ditches, doorways, or windows. He is taught to fire around the right 
side of his concealment whenever possible, or, when this is not possible, 
to rise enough to fire over the top of his concealment. 

When these details are understood, he is required to select cover 
with reference to an assumed enemy and to place himself behind it 
in proper position for firing. (153) 

The evil of remaining too long in one place, however good the 
concealment, should be explained. He should be taught to advance from 
cover to cover, selecting cover in advance before leaving his conceal- 
ment. 

It should be impressed upon him that a man running rapidly 
toward an enemy furnishes a poor target. He should be trained in 
springing from a prone position behind concealment, running at top 
speed to cover and throwing himself behind it. He should also be prac- 
ticed in advancing from cover to cover by crawling, or by lying on the 
left side, rifle grasped in the right hand, and pushing himself forward 
with the right leg. (154) 

He should be taught that, when fired on while acting independ- 
ently, he should drop to the ground, seek cover, and then endeavor 
to locate his enemy. (155) 

The instruction of the recruit in the use of cover is continued 
in the combat exercises of the company, but he must then be taught that 
the proper advance of the platoon or company and the effectiveness of 
its fire is of greater importance than the question of cover for individuals. 
He should also be taught that he may not move about or shift his 
position in the firing line except the better to see the target. (156) 

' Observation 

176. The ability to use his eyes accurately is of great importance 
to the soldier. The recruit should be trained in observing his surround- 
ing from positions and when on the march. 

l71J 



176-177-178-179 

He should be practiced in pointing out and naming military 
features of the ground; in distinguishing between living beings; in 
counting distant groups of objects or beings; in recognizing colors and 
forms. (157) 

176. In the training of men in the mechanism of the firing line, they 
should be practiced in repeating to one another target and aiming point 
designations and in quickly locating and pointing out a designated target. 
They should be taught to distinguish, from a prone position, distant 
objects, particularly troops, both with the naked eye and with field 
glasses. Similarly, they should be trained in estimating distances. (158) 

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 

177. The captain is responsible for the theoretical and practical in- 
struction of his officers and noncommissioned officers, not only in the 
duties of their respective grades, but in those of the next higher grades. 
(159) 

178. The company in line is formed in double rank with the men 
arranged, as far as practicable, according to height from right to left, 
the tallest on the right. 

The original division into squads is effected by the command: 
COUNT OFF. The squads, successively from the right, count off as in 
the School of the Squad, corporals placing themselves as Nos. 4 of the 
front rank. If the left squad contains less than six men, it is either 
increased to that number by transfers from other squads or is broken 
up and its members assigned to other squads and posted in the line 
of file closers. These squad organizations are maintained, by transfers 
if necessary, until the company becomes so reduced in number's as to 
necessitate a new division into squads. No squad will contain less than 
six men. (160) 

179. The company is further divided into two, three or four platoons, 
each consisting of not less than two nor more than four squads. In 
garrison or ceremonies the strength of platoons may exceed four squads. 
(161) 

At the formation of the company the platoons or squads are 
numbered consecutively from right to left and these designations do 
not change. 

For convenience in giving commands and for reference, the desig- 
nations, right, center, left, when in line, and leading, center, rear, w'hen 
in column, are applied to platoons or squads. These designations apply 
to the actual right, left, center, head, or rear, in whatever direction the 
company may be facing. The center squad is the middle or right middle 
squad of the company. 

The designation *' So-and-so's'' squad or platoon may also be 
used. (162) 

172] 



180 

180. Platoons are assigned to the lieutenants and noncommissioned 
officers, in order of rank, as follows: 1, right; 2, left; 3, center (right 
center); 4, left center. 

LiNL (l^Sqcls.-APlaTs.) ~ 4 ] 

4~PLAT. 3*»PlAT ^ 2'«"PL&T (•'PLAT. 



& 



1 I I I I I I I 1 I I I i I I I ■ I I I I I I I r J I I I I I I I I I 'I ! I I I I I [ I 



ZEj 



Mill 



Z 



GD CD 



fi^ 



COLUMN or SQDS COLUMN 

:(&^ (I25qcis.- orPLATOONS 
! •^ ^ Plats) 



fi^^ 



i ^ I 1 M l 



ex 

EHEO 
I ! I I I 

1^ I I I 

Mill 
M 1 I ^ 
I 1 1 I M 
MM ) 

.□zr 



3 



laij 



I I I I I 



1/1 I I I 

I M I .1 



-T-rM 



^1 (lOSqds.- 
, ' 2 Plats) 









3 


iJ^PLAT. 




I H 1 













(i] CD 



I M ! I 1^ M l^ I 



I It 1 I r-n- 



1,1 I I I I rm 



Plate II. 
THE COMPANY 

CAPTAIN 
|S^ LIEUT 

i»^ SCIRGT. 

LEADER. 3"* PL AT 

GU'OE 

SQUAD LEADER 

MuSiCiAN 

OTHERS IN LINE 
OF FiLE-CLOSERS 



m 



CZ3 



LINEorPUaTOONS 



k1 I i I 



(11 Sqds.-^ Plats.) 



I I 1 II 

M 1 I H 



I I [ I I 
M I I H 



l/l 1 i I 
I II I I 



I I I I I 
M t 1 I'l 
I M M'l 
EEUm 

I I I II 



SKIRMISH Line -HALTED (l6 SqdS- - ^ Plats) 

t^'^LAT. ^^PlAT 2'*PlAT 



tsM 



y 



^m 



10 

The noncommissioned officers next in rank are assigned as guides, 
one to each platoon. If sergeants still remain, they are assigned to 
platoons as additional guides. When the platoon is deployed, its guide, 
or guides, accompany the platoon leader. 

[73] 



181-182-183-184 

During battle, these assignments are not changed; vacancies are 
filled by noncommissioned officers of the platoon, or by the nearest 
available officers or noncommissioned officers arriving with reenforcing 
troops. (163) 

181. The first sergeant is never assigned as a guide. When not com- 
manding a platoon, he is posted as a file closer opposite the third file 
from the outer flank of the first platoon; and when the company is de- 
ployed he accompanies the captain. 

The quartermaster sergeant, when present, is assigned accord- 
ing to his rank as a sergeant. 

Enlisted men below the grade of sergeant, armed with the rifle, 
are in ranks unless serving as guides; when not so armed, they are 
posted in the line of file closers. 

Musicians, when required to play, are at the head of the column. 
When the company is deployed, they accompany the captain. (164) 

182. The company executes the halt, rests, facings, steps and march- 
ings, manual of arms, loadings and firings, takes intervals and distances 
and assembles, increases and diminishes intervals, resumes attention, 
obliques, resumes the direct march, preserves alignments, kneels, lies 
down, rises, stacks and takes arms, as explained in the Schools of the 
Soldier and the Squad, substituting in the commands company for squad, 

The same rule applies to platoons, detachments, details, etc., sub 
stituting their designation for squad in the commands. In the same 
manner these execute the movements prescribed fer the company, when 
ever possible, substituting their designation for company in the com 
mands. (165) 

183. A company so depleted as to make division into platoons im- 
practicable is led by the captain as a single platoon, but retains the 
designation of company. The lieutenants and first sergeant assist in 
fire control; the other sergeants place themselves in the firing line as 
skirmishers. (166) 

CLOSE OEDEE 

Rules 

184. The guides of the right and left, or leading and rear, platoons, 
are the right and left, or leading and rear, guides, respectively, of the 
company when it is in line or in column of squads. Other guides are 
in the line of file closers. 

In platoon movements the post of the platoon guide is at the 
head of the platoon, if the platoon is in column, and on the guiding 
flank if in line. When a platoon has two guides their original assign- 
ment to flanks of the platoon does not change. (167) 

The guides of a column of squads place themselves on the flank 
opposite the file closers. To change the guides and file closers to the 
other flank, the captain commands: 1. File closers 6n left (right) flank; 

[74] 



185-186-187-188 

2. MARCH. The file closers dart through the column; the captain and 
guides change. 

In column of squads, each rank preserves the alignment toward 
the side of the guide. (168) 

185. Men in the line of file closers do not execute the loadings or 
firings. 

Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers execute the 
manual of arms during the drill unless specially excused, when they 
remain at the order. During ceremonies they execute all movements. 
(169) 

186. In taking intervals and distances, unless otherwise directed, the 
right and left guides, at the first command, place themselves in yie 
line of file closers, and, with them, tak« a distance of 4 paces from the 
rear rank. In taking intervals, at the command marcli, the file closers 
face to the flank and each steps off with the file nearest him. In 
assembling the guides and file closers resume their positions in line. 
(170) 

187. In movements executed simultaneously by platoons (as platoons 
right or platoons, column right), platoon leaders repeat the preparatory 
command (platoon right, etc.), applicable to their respective platoons. 
The command of execution is given by the captain only. (171) 

To Form the Company 

188. At the sounding of the assembly the first sergeant takes position 
6 paces in front of where the center of the company is to be, faces it, 
draws saber, and commands: FALL IN. 

The right guide of the com.pany places himself, facing to the 
front, where the right of the company is to rest, and at such point that 
the center of the company will be 6 paces from and opposite the first 
sergeant; the squads form in their proper places on the left of the right 
guide, superintended by the other sergeants, who then take their posts. 

The first sergeant commands; REPORT. Eemaining in position 
at the order, the squad leaders, in succession from the right, salute and 

report: All present; or. Private (s) absent. The first sergeant 

does not return the salutes of the squad leaders; he then com.mands: 
1. Lispection, 2. ARMS, 3. Order, 4. ARMS, faces about, salutes the 
captain, reports: Sir, all present or accounted for, or the names of the 
unauthorized absentees, and, without command, takes his post. 

If the company can not be formed by squads, the first sergeant 
commands: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Right shoulder, 4. ARMS, and 
calls the roll. Each man, as his name is called, answers here and executes 
order arms. The sergeant then effects the division into squads and re- 
ports the company as prescribed above. 

[75] 



189-190-191-192 

^ The captain places himself 12 paces in front of the center of, 
and facing, the company in time to receive the report of the first ser- 
geant, whose salute he returns, and then draws saber. 

The lieutenants take their posts when the first sergeant has 
reported and draw saber with the captain. The company, if not under 
arms, is formed in like manner omitting reference to arms. (172) 

189. For the instruction of platoon leaders and guides, the company, 
when small, may be formed in single rank. In this formation close order 
movements only are executed. The single rank executes all movements 
as explained for the front rank of a company. (173) 

To Dismiss the Company 

190. Being in line at a halt, the captain directs the first sergeant: 
Dismiss the company. The officers fall out; the first sergeant places 
himself faced to the front, 3 paces to the front and 2 paces from the 
nearest flank of the company, salutes, faces toward opposite flank of the 
company and commands: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Port, 4. ARMS, 
5. DISMISSED. (174) 

Alignments 

191. The alignments are executed as prescribed in the School of the 
Squad, the guide being established instead of the flank file. The rear- 
rank man of the flank file keeps his head and eyes to the front and 
covers his file leader. 

At each alignment the captain places himself in prolongation of 
the line, 2 paces from and facing the flank toward which the dress is 
made, verifies the alignment, and commands: FRONT. 

Platoon leaders take- a like position when required to , verify 
alignments. (175) 

Movements on the Fixed Pivot 

192. Being in line, to turn the company: 1. Company right (left), 
2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT; or, 3. Forv/ard, 4. MARCH. 

At the second command the right-flank 
man* in the front rank faces to the right in 
m_archirig and marks time; the other front-rank 
men oblique to the right, place themselves abreast 
of the pivot, and mark time; in the rear rank 
the third man from the right, followed in column 
by the second and first, moves straight to the 
front until in rear of his front-rank man, when 
all face to the right in marching and mark time; 
the remaining men of the rear rank move 
4 paces, oblique to the right, place themselves 
abreast of the third man, cover their file leaders, and mark time, the 
right guide steps back, takes post on the flank, and marks time. 



'I/ 



(Befckc-) 

nQ.49 

(For detail, see Fig. 46 
pages 59 and 60.) 
straight to the front 



* No. 1 of the first squad. 



[76] 



193-194-195 

The fourth command is given when the last man is 1 pace 
in rear of the new line. 

The command halt may be given at any time after the move- 
ment begins; only those halt who are in the new position. Each 
of the others halts upon arriving on the line, aligns himself to the 
right, and executes front without command. (176) 

193. Being in line, to form column of platoons, or 
fKo^^ L.«e to co.^MM Or p.AToo«a thc Tevorso I 1. Platoons right (left), 2. MARCH, 
3. Company, 4. HALT; or, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH. 
Executed by each platoon as described for the 
^company. 

Before forming line the captain sees that the 
guides on the flank toward which the movement is to 
be executed are covering. This is effected by previous* 
ly announcing the guide to that flank. (177) 



A /a 

r ' ' 



T-ROt^ Li/ME To Column Of S>>o/> 



.:B:B:B:B:B:0:l]:B- 



no. 51 



194. Being in line, to form column of 
squads, or the reverse; or, being in line of 
platoons, to form column of platoons, or the 
reverse: 1. Squads right (left), 2. MARCH; 
or, 1. Squads right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. Com- 
pany, 4. HALT. 



From. Line Of Platooi^s To Col-omn of "lai 



Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad. 

If the company or platoons be formed in line toward the side 
of the file closers, they dart through the column and take posts in rear 
of the company at the second command. If the column of squads be 
formed from line, the file closers take posts on the pivot flank, abreast 
of and 4 inches from the nearest rank. (178) 

Movements on the Moving Pivot 

195. Being in line, to change di- 
rection: 1. Right (Left) turn, 
-ouruNe- 2. MARCH, 3. Forward^ 4. MARCH. 

Executed as described in the 
School of the Squad, except that 
the men do not glance toward the 
marching flank and that all take 
the full step at the fourth com- 
mand. The right guide is the pivot 
of the front rank. Each rear-rank 
man obliques on the same ground 
as his file leader. (179) 



l6Ero«r) 



\yn 




^OOOD-- 



riQ.54. 



196-197-198-199-200 

196. Being in column of platoons, to 
change direction: 1. Column right (left). 
2. MARCH. 

At the first command the leader 
of the leading platoon commands: 
Right turn. At the command march 
the leading platoon turns to the right 
on moving pivot; its leader commands: 
TI0.53. 1. Forward, 2. MARCH, on completion 

of the turn. Rear platoons march squarely up to the turning point of 
the leading platoon and turn at command of their leaders. (180) 

197. Being in column of squads, to change direction: 
1. Column right (left), 2. MARCH. 

At the second command the front rank of the 
leading squad turns to the right on moving pivot as 
in the School of the Squad; the other ranks, without 
command, turn successively on the same ground and 
t in a similar manner. (181) 

198. Being in column of squads, to form a 
line of platoons or the reverse: 1. Platoons, 
column right (left), 2. MARCH. 

Executed by each platoon as de- 
scribed for the company. (182) 

199. Being in line, to form column of 
squads and change direction: 1. Squads 
right (left), column right (left), 
2. MARCH; or, 1. Right (Left) by squads, 

2. MARCH. 

In the first case the right squad 
initiates the column right as soon as it 
has completed the squad right. 

In the second case, at the command 
march, the right squad marches forward; 
the remainder of the company executes 
squads right, column left, and follows the 
right squad. The right guide, when he has 
posted himself in front of the right squad, takes four short steps, then 
resumes the full step; the right squad conforms. (183) 

200. Being in line, to form line of platoons: 1, Squads right (left), 

platoons, column right (left), 2. MARCH; 
or, 1. Platoons, right (left) by squads, 2. 

FIQ.57 MARCH. 

Executed by each platoon as de- 
scribed for the company in the preceding 
paragraph. (184) 



.;::dddi> 



>:r::DDDO 



ffion CoLurtM Of Squads 



riG 55 



^OOAOS R16MT, Co«,UMr^ Right 

1=3 

nQ.56 






■RlSHT By SpuAPS 







A 




cb 






C=3 




CD 






□ 


f 


a 


•X- 


■T 

.J. 


-.hi: 


1 


en 



Tkoh LiNt To Line Of Platoon*. 



[78] 



n 
i» 

•II- 

1 1 
IJ 



201-202-203 
Facing or Marching to the Rear 

201. Being in line, line of platoons, or in column of platoons or squads, 
to face or march to the rear: 1. Squads right (left) about, 2. MARCH; 
or, 1. Squads right (left) about, 2. MARCH; 3. Company, 4. HALT. 

Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad. 

If the company or platoons be in column of squads, the file closerg 
turn about toward the column, and take their posts; if in line, each 
darts through the nearest interval between squads. (185) 

202. To march to the rear for a few paces: 1. About, 2. FACE, 
3. Forward, 4. MARCH. 

If in line, the guides place themselves in the rear rank, now the 
front rank; the file closers, on facing about, maintain their relative 
positions. No other movement is executed until the line is faced to the 
original front. (186) 

On Right (Left) Into Line 

203. Being in column of platoons 
or squads, to form line on right or 
left: 1. On right (left) into line, 
2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT, 
5. FRONT. 

At the first command the 
leader of the leading unit commands: 
Right turn. The leaders of the other 
units command: Forward, if at a 
halt. At the second command the 
leading unit turns to the right on 
moving pivot. The command halt 
is given when the leading unit has 
advanced the desired distance in the 
new direction; it halts; its leader 
then commands: Right dress. 

The units in rear continue 
to march straight to the front; 
each, when opposite the right of its 
place in line, executes right turn at 
the command of its leader; each is 
halted on the line at the command 
of its leader, who then commands: 
Right dress. All dress on the first 
unit in line. 

If executed in double time, 
the leading squad marches in double 
time until halted. (187) 



n 

I I 
I I 



TromCouumn Of Platoons To line On RiaHr 



cfci 

CD 



f*ot\ CoLunN Or 6puAt>s T© Lini.On Kioht, 



no 57 



[79] 



J, I I 



□.-• y 


""r"" ' I ! 


d2/ , 


'''-^y / y , 


{±1/ ,- 


'V-'"V ,•' / 


■nny , 


' ^~ '-7 , ' ' 


ri..-'\ 


'1-cf^ 


□.-' . 




t±y 


Fl(j.!>5 


rf 




fKOfS COLU 


r>M 0^ Sv>uADS To ti 



204-205-206 

Front Into Line 
204. Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line to the front: 
1. Right (Left) front into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT, 
5. FRONT. 

At the first command the leaders of the units in rear of the 
leading one command: Right oblique. If at a halt, the leader of the 
leading unit commands: Forward. At the second command the leading 
unit moves straight forward; the rear units oblique as indicated. The 
com^mand halt is given when the leading unit has advanced the desired 
distance; it halts; its leader then commands: Left dress. Each of the 
\ear units, when opposite its place in line, resumes the original direction 
at the command of its leader; each is halted on the line at the command 
of its leader, who then commands: Left dress. All dress on the first 
unit in line. (188) 205. Being in column 

of squads to form col- 
^^ umn of platoons, or be- 

ing line of platoons, to 
form the company in 
line: 1. Platoons, right 
(left) front into line, 2. 
MARCH, 3. Company, 
4. HALT, 5. FRONT. 

Executed by 

each platoon as de- 
scribed for the company. 
.t TO r„s F«oNT. I^ forming the company 
in line, the dress is on 
the left squad of the 
left platoon. If forming 
column of platoons, pla- 
toon leaders verify the 
alignment before taking their posts; the captain comm^ands front when 
the alignments have been verified. 

When front into line is executed in double time the commands 
for halting and aligning are omitted and the guide is toward the side 
of the first unit in line. (189) 

At Ease and Route Step 
206. The column of squads is the habitual column of route, but route 
step and at ease are applicable to any marching formation. (190) 
To march at route step: ,1. Route step, 2. MARCH. 
Sabers are carried at will or in the scabbard; the men carry 
their pieces at will, keeping the muzzles elevated; they are not required 
to preserve silence, nor to keep the step. The ranks cover and preserve 
their distance. If halted from route step, the men stani^at rest. (191) 

[80] 



207-208 

To march at ease: 1. At ease, 2. MARCH. 

The company marches as in route step, except that silence is 
preserved; when halted, the men remain at ease. (192) 

Marching at route step or at ease: 1. Company, 2. ATTENTION. 

At the command attention the pieces are brought to the right 
shoulder and the cadenced step in quick time is resumed. (193) 

To Diminish The Front of A Column of Squads 

I^Aj 207. Being in column of squads: 1. Right (left) 

^^ by twos, 2. MARCH. 

^^ At the command march all files except the 

.^Yi ^^^^^ right files of the leading squad execute in place 

^<^.;Vy TIQ.59. halt; the two left files of the leading squad oblique 

];^\!^'|!'CX ^^ ^^® right when disengaged and follow the right 

'';'%""">:' V files at the shortest practicable distance. The re- 

O K^ I^T i^-i 

1.^ L « L^^i L^^ maining squads follow successively in like manner. 

!;][][][] (194) 

5 208. Being in column of squads or twos: 1. Right (left) 

6 by file, 2. MARCH. 

fi] At the command march, all files execute in place 

(2 halt except the right file of the leading two or squad. 

g) The left file or files of the leading two or squad oblique 

f] successively to the right when disengaged and each fol- 

/^ lows the file on its right at the shortest practicable dis- 

./,,;j^ tance. The remaining twos or squads follow successively 

f^i^^Kf^^p in like manner. (195) 

r<r<r<rS Beinff in column of files or twos, to form column 
^^^^^i,^»^ F1Q.60 of squads; or, being in column of files, to form column 

r^ |:^ r^ |:*-| of twos: 1. Squads (Twos), right (left) front into line, 

- - 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, the leading ^le or \ \^j^^^ \ \^ 

files halt. The rem.ainder of the squad, or two, ">!|>.li "^^ 

obliques to the right and halts on line with the y-^-'^ \^ 

leading file or files. The remaining squads or twos '■^'-^ 
close up and successively form in rear of the first 
in like manner. 



LJI.J LJ 

riQ.61. 

This diagram illustrates a squad executing LEFT front into line. 

The movement described in this paragraph will be ordered right 
or left, so as to restore the files to their normal relative positions in 
the two or squad. (196) 

The movements prescribed in the three preceding paragraphs 
are difiicult of execution at attention and have no value as disciplinary 
exercises. (197) ^gjj 



209-210-211-212-213-214 

Marching by twos or files can not be executed without serious 
delay and waste of road space. Every reasonable precaution will be 
taken to obviate the necessity for these formations. (198) 

EXTENDED OEDER 

Rules for Deployment 
209'. The command guide right (left or center) indicates the base squad 
for the deployment; if in line it designates the actual right (left or 
center) squad; if in column the command guide right (left) designates 
the leading squad, and the command guide center designates the center 
squad. After the deployment is completed, the guide is center without 
command, unless otherwise ordered. (199) 

210. At the preparatory command for forming sldrmish line, from 
either column of squads or line, each squad leader (except the leader of 
the base squad, when his squad does not advance), cautions his squad, 
follow me or by the right (left) flank, as the case may be; at the com- 
mand march, he steps in front of his squad and leads it to its place in 
line. (200) 

211. Having given the command for forming skirmish line, the cap- 
tain, if necessary, indicates to the corporal of the base squad the point 
on which the squad is to march; the corporal habitually looks to the 
captain for such directions. (201) 

The base squad is deployed as soon as it has sufficient interval. 
The other squads are deployed as they arrive on the general line; each 
corporal halts in his place in line and commands or signals, as skirmishers; 
the squad deploys and halts abreast of him. 

If tactical considerations demand it, the squad is deployed before 
arriving on the line. (202) 

212. Deployed lines preserve a general alignment toward the guide. 
Within their respective fronts, individuals or units march so as best 
to secure cover or to facilitate the advance, but the general and orderly 
progress of the whole is paramount. 

On halting, a deployed line faces to the front (direction of the 
enemy) in all cases and takes advantage of cover, the men lying down 
if necessary. (203) 

213. The company in sldrmish line advances, halts moves by the flank, 
or to the rear, obliques, resumes the direct march, passes from quick to 
double time and the reverse by the same commands and in a similar man- 
ner as in close order; if at a halt, the movement by the flank or to the 
rear is executed by the same commands as when marching. Company 
right (left, half right, half left) is executed as explained for the front 
rank, skirmish intervals being maintained. (204) 

214. A platoon or other part of the company is deployed and marched 
in the same manner as the company, substituting in the commands, 
platoon (detachment, etc.) for company. (205) 

[82] 



215-216 
Deployments 
215. Being in line, to form skirmish line to the front: 1. As skirmishers, 
guide right (left or center), 2. MARCH. 

If marching, the corporal of the base squad moves straight to 
the front; when that squad has advanced the desired distance, the 



t 



aoaaaDoaoaaaaaaaaaoQDDOooQQDaai 









'vy ^---r 



L 



X 



J_ 



n 



captain commands: 1. Company, 

2. HALT. If the guide be right 

(left), the other corporals move 

to the left (right) front, and, 

in succession from the base, 

place their squads on the line; 

if the guide be center, the other 

corporals move to the right or 

left front, according as they 

ri(j.62, are on the right or left of the 

center squad, and in succession from the center squad place their 

squads on the line. 

If at a halt, the base squad is deployed without advancing; the 
other squads may be conducted to their proper places by the flank; in- 
terior squads may be moved when squads more distant from the base 
have gained comfortable marching distance. (206) 

216. Being in column of squads, to form sldrmish line to the front: 
1. As skirmishers, guide right (left or center), 2. MARCH. 



t 



oaDaDaaDDDDqaaDaaDDDDDDDDaaDDDDna 



<y 



QaQqaDaDODDaQDQaanDDQDDDaaaDGaQo 



'^ 


1 1 




-1 1 


.r^-n 




1 ^ 1 



Quipt CCN 
(Karcmim< 



m.6d. 



If marching, the 
corporal of the base squad 
deploys it and moves 
straight to the front; if 
at a halt, he deploys his 
squad without advancing. 
If the guide be right 
(left), the other corporals 
move to the left (right) 
front, and, in succession 
from the base, place their 
squads on the line; if the 
guide be center, the cor- 
porals in front of the cen- 
ter squad move to the 
right (if at a halt, to the 
right rear), the corporals 



tW] 



"'X: 



( 



217-218-219-220-221 

in rear of the center squad 
move to the left front, and 

°°°°° 4- r7 < \ z T ^ ; A each, m succession from 

■>-. "/Y [ ^3 I "^^-i the base, places his squad 

''-A^:;i ,!---■• -" l"% ■] on the line. 

(AT A -HALT). , LJ 

The column of twos or files is deployed by the sam.e commands 
and in like manner. (207) 

217. The company in line or; in column of squads may be deployed in 
an oblique direction by the same commands. The captain points out 
the desired direction; the corporal of the base squad moves in the 
direction indicated; the other corporals conform. (208) 

218. To form skirmish line to the flank or rear the line or the column 
of squads is turned by squads to the flank or rear and then deployed as 
described. (209) 

219. The intervals between men are increased or decreased as de- 
scribed in the School of the Squad, adding to the preparatory command, 
guide right (left or center) if necessary. (210) 

The Assembly 

220. The captain takes his posf in front of, or designates, the element 
on which the company is to assemble and commands: 1. Assemble, 2. 
MAEOH. 

If in skirmish line the men move promptly toward the designated 
point and the company is re-formed in line. If assembled by platoons, 
these are conducted to the designated point by platoon leaders, and the 
company is re-formed in line. 

Platoons may be assembled by the command: 1. Platoons, as- 
semble, 2. MARCH. 

Executed by each platoon as described for the company. 

One or more platoons may be assembled by the command: 1. 
Such platoon (s), assemble, 2. MARCH. 

Executed by. the designated platoon or platoons as described 
for the company. (211) 

The Advance 
'221. The advance of a company into an engagement (whether for 
attack or defense) is conducted in close order, preferably column of 
squads, until the probability of encountering hostile fire makes it ad- 
visable to deploy. After deployment, and before opening fire, the 
advance of the company may be continued in skirmish line or other 
suitable formation, depending upon circum^stances. The advance may 
often be facilitated, or better advantage taken of cover, or losses re- 
duced by the employment of the platoon or squad columns or by the use 

[843 



222 

of a succession of thin lines. The selection of the method to be used is 
made by the captain or major, the choice depending upon conditions 
arising during the progress of the advance. If the dej)loyment is found 
to be premature, it will generally be best to assemble the company and 
proceed in close order. 

Patrols are used to provide the necessary security against sur- 
prise. (212) 

222. Being in sldrmish line: 1. Platoon columns, 2. MARCH. 

The platoon leaders move forward through the center of their 
respective platoons; men to the right of the platoon leader march to 
the left and follow him in file; those to the left march in like manner to 
the right; each platoon leader thus conducts the march of his platoon 
in double column of files; platoon guides follow in rear of their r'espec- 
tive platoons to insure prompt and orderly execution of the advance. 
(213) 



6:6 
6'6 

6,6 



6% 

6;6 
6:6 
6:6 
6:6 
6.6 
6:6 
66 






S° PLATOON 4f- ■ 



r fLAT.OON' 



TIQ.64. 



1851 



223-224-225-226 



1^ 
1^. 



223. Being in skirmish line: 1. 
^f*' Squad columns, 2. MARCH. 

z. Each squad leader moves to the 

front; the members of each squad oblique 
^ toward and follow their squad leader in 

^ single file at easy marching distances. 

(214) 



224, Platoon columns are profitably used 
A-t where the ground is so difficult or cover so 

M limited as to make it desirable to take ad- 

[J4 vantage of the few favorable routes; no 

,.'•';.: two platoons should march within the area, 

..''*'•''..[*•••".... of burst of a single shrapnel.^ Squad 

r^ ,-<'p4 p-J-, '^^■'^^"'^^ *..-, columns are of value principally in facili- 
\^ *-^ ^^ f^ ^£^ "Y* "-j^ ^-^-^ tating the advance over rough or brush- 
grown ground; they afford no material 
TIQ 6D advantage in securing cover. (215) 

225. To deploy platoon or squad columns: 1. As skirmishers, 2. MARCH. 
Skirmishers move to the right or left front and successively place 

themselves in their original positions on the line. (216) 

f 
DDDPPPODDDDDDDDDDDDDappDDDDDDDDD 

\\ vA \\jq: ;////."/ \\.\\ W \ -.q: ; •.•/.".•■/■ 

"'. \\\''' \yrcV'' •' ' ^'.''' *• '• *' • '* '• '^/^ •" •* '*-'.•' ' 

\*A\\ >< X:'.',-' .' •'/ *• ".\ • \'r< X'.' .'//'-■' 

. \ •. V'.\^ rt' •'/ •'/ "• *. \'\.r< A.'.\' .' / 

. ', • \f^ ,4/ • ' , ♦. •. . .*n .A.' • . • 

* , ' 'wj c* • • • . • . . t J CJ • . • 

'••••.^ l^.'V' • '-'i^I^-'/ 

X X i^ X 

kJ tj Ci bj 

t 

433CE2il 

npDDnnnDDDqpppDDD d.d DDDDDDPnp^Dqq 
'• \ \^'" .•' •' •' \ \ \k' : : :' a '• '• '^■' ' ' ' '' • ^ '^-- -' - - 
'• •. f- .' ' : •: \ X .' .;• ' 

•rS -d 

" m.66. 

226. Being in platoon or squad columns: 1. Assemble, 2. MARCH. 



•> A.' •' .' . 


• W'hi.. 


d .' .' •' 


» ' 'A^- 




H * . pj ^ 


'. X.' /' / 




^'6 ''/ 


\ '•^3^' 


• ^V* «' 


•. &v' 




\ fy 


^^5•l 


•.X 


•di 


X 





* Ordinarily about 20 yards wide. 

[861 



227 





,,, 


1 




n 


1 




D 






•i: ^ 


^ § / 








?• 


•^- / 


i 66 -• 










66 >i 


5 DQ ; 










DD •: 


•• Q a ;• 










QD :. 


■• p ; 










, DD :, 


'. o □ .' 










•. o D ; 


".od; 










■•.dd: 


•QOr' 










,D d;- 


OD 










aa 


A»»EK6UV 


Km 


t om e.« 


.T PLATOON. 




a* 


. w 




:> 


t 




< '-rr>- 


•1 ! 


1 \* 


±: 


1 1 



Of 






. As5E«Buy r^fcoi Of. e 



■•6 i 



i 6; 



The platoon or squad leaders sig- 
nal assemble. The men of each pla- 
toon or squad, as the case may be, ad- 
vance and, moving to the right and 
left, take their proper places in line, 
each unit assembling on the leading 
element of the column and re-form- 
ing in line. The platoon or squad 
leaders conduct their units toward 
the element or point indicated by 
the captain, and to theit places in 
line; the company is re-formed in 
line. (217) 



'fl^ 67 



227. Being in skirmish line, to advance by a succession of thin lines: 
1. (Such numbers), forward, 2. MARCH. 

The captain points out in advance the selected position in front 
of the line occupied. The designated number of each squad moves 
to the front; the line thus formed preserves the original intervals as 
nearly as practicable; when this line has advanced a suitable distance 
(generally from 100 to 250 yards, depending upon the terrain and the 
character of the hostile fire), a second is sent forward by similar com- 
mands, and so on at irregular distances until the whole line has ad- 
vanced. Upon arriving at the indicated position, the first line is 
halted. Successive lines, upon arriving, halt on line with the first and 
the men take their proper places in the skirmish line. 

Ordinarily each line is made up of one man per squad and 
the men of a squad are sent forward in order from right to left as 
deployed. The first line is led by the platoon leader of the right platoon, 
the second by the guide of the right platoon, and so on in order from 
right to left. 

The advance is conducted in quick time unless conditions de- 
mand a faster gait. 

The company having arrived at the indicated position, a further 
advance by the same means may be advisable. (218) 

The advance in a succession of thin lines is used to cross a wide 
stretch swept, or likely to be swept, by artillery fire or heavy, long- 
range rifle fire which can not profitably be returned. Its purpose is 
the building up of a strong skirmish line preparatory to engaging in a 
fire fight. This method of advancing results in serious (though tem- 



228-229 

porary) loss of control over the company. Its advantage lies in the 
fact that it offers a less definite target, hence is less likely to draw 
fire. (219) 

The above are suggestions. Other and better formations may 
be devised to fit particular cases. The best formation is the one which 
advances the line farthest with the least loss of m^en, time, and control. 
(220) 

The Fire Attack 

228. The principles governing the advance of the firing line in at- 
tack are considered in the School of the Battalion. 

When it becomes impracticable for the company to advance as 
a whole by ordinary means, it advances by rushes. (221) 

B^ng in skirmish line: 1. By platoon (two platoons, squad, four 
men, etc.), from the right (left), 2. RUSH. 

The platoon leader on the indicated flank carefully arranges the 
details for a prompt and vigorous execution of the rush and puts it 
into effect as soon as practicable. If necessary, he designates the 
leader for the indicated fraction. When about to rush, he causes the 
men of the fraction to cease firing and to hold themselves flat, but in 
readiness to spring forward instantly. The leader of the rush (at the 
signal of the platoon leader, if the latter be not the leader of the rush) 
commands: Follow me, and running at top speed, leads the fraction to 
the new line, where he halts it and causes it to open fire. The leader 
of the rush selects the new line if it has not been previously designated. 

The first fraction having established itself on the new line, the 
next like fraction is sent fprward by its platoon leader, without 'further 
command of the captain, and so on, successively, until the entire com- 
pany is on the line established by the first rush. 

If more than one platoon is to join in one rush, the junior 
platoon leader conforms to the action of the senior. 

A part of the line having advanced, the captain may increase or 
decrease the' size of the fractions to complete the movement. (222) 

When the company forms a part of the firing line, the rush of 
the company as a whole is conducted by the captain, as described for 
a platoon in the preceding paragraph. The captain leads the rush; 
platoon leaders lead their respective platoons; platoon guides follow 
the line to insure prompt and orderly execution of the advance. (223) 

229. When the foregoing method of rushing, by running, becomes im- 
practicable, any method of advance that brings the attack closer to 
the enemy, such as crawling, should be employed. 

For regulations governing the charge, see paragraphs 318 and 

319. (224) 

(All rushes should be made with life and ginger, and all the men should start 
•together. AH rushes should be made under covering fire, and when a unit rushes 

[8^1 



230-231 

forward the adjoining unit or units make up for the loss of fire thus caused by in- 
creasing the rate of their fire. 

A unit commander abc^ut to rush forward, will not do so until he sees tl*it 
the adjoining unit or units have started to give him the protection of their covering 
fire and, if necessary, he will call to them to do so. Each unit must be careful not 
to advance until the last unit that rushed forward has had time to take up an effective 
fire. When sights have to be adjusted at the conclusion of a rush, the men should 
do so in the prone position even though it be necessary for the men to kneel for firing. 
The same as the men who rush should start simultaneously from the prone position, 
so should they stop simultaneously, all men dropping down to the ground together, 
wherever they may be, at the command "Down", given by the unit commander when 
the leading men have reached the new position. The slower members who drop down 
in rear will crawl up to the line after the halt. So that the slower members may not 
be crowded out of the line, and also to prevent bunching, the faster men should leave 
room for them on the line. — Author.) 

The Company in Support 

(Being part of a battalion) 

230. To enable it to follow or reach the firing line, the support adopts 
suitable formations, following the principles explained in paragraphs 
212-218. 

The support should be kept assembled as long as practicable. 
If after deploying a favorable opportunity arises to hold it for some time 
in close formation, it should be reassembled. It is redeployed when 
necessary. (225) 

The movements of the support as a whole and the dispatch of 
reenforcements from it to the firing line are controlled by the major. 

A reenforcement of less than one platoon has little influence 
and will be*" avoided whenever practicable. 

The captain of a company in support is. constantly on the alert 
for the major ^s signals or commands. (226) 

A reenforcement sent to the firing line joins it deployed as 
skirmishers. The leader of the reenforcement places it in an interval in 
the line, if one exists, and commands it thereafter as a unit. If no 
such suitable interval exists, the reenforcement is advanced with in- 
creased intervals between skirmishers; each man occupies the nearest 
interval in the firing line, and each then obeys the orders of the nearest 
squad leader and platoon leader. (227) 

A reenforcement joins the firing line as quickly as possible with- 
out exhausting the men. (228) 

The original platoon division of the companies in the firing 
line should be maintained and shouid not be broken up by the mingling 
of reenforcements. 

Upon joining the firing line, officers and sergeants accompanying 
a reenforcement take over the duties of others of like grade who have 
been disabled, or distribute themselves so as best to exercise their 
normal functions. Conditions will vary and no rules can be prescribed. 
It is essential that all assist in mastering the increasing difficulties of 
control. (229) 

The Company Acting Alone 

231. In general, the company, when acting alone, is employed ac- 
cording to the principles applicable to the battalion acting alone; the 

[89] 



232-233-2S4-235-236-237 

captain employs platoons as the major employs companies, making due 
allowance for the difference in strength. • 

The support may be smaller in proportion or may be dispensed 
with. (230) 

The company must be well protected against surprise. Combat 
patrols on the flanks are specially important. Each leader of a flank 
platoon details a man to watch for the signals of the patrol or patrols 
on his flank. (231) 

FIEE 

232. Ordinarily pieces are loaded and extra ammunition is issued be- 
fore the company deploys for combat. 

In close order the company executes the firings at the command 
of the captain, who posts himself in rear of the center of the company. 

Usually the firings in close order consist of saluting volleys 
only. (232) 

233. When the company is deployed, the men execute the firings at 
the command of their platoon leaders; the latter give such commands as 
are necessary to carry out the captain's directions, and, from time to 
time, add such further commands as are necessary to continue, correct 
and control the fire ordered. (233) 

234. The voice is generally inadequate for giving commands during 
fire and must be replaced by signals of such character that proper fire 
direction and control is assured. To attract attention, signals must 
usually be preceded by the whistle signal (short blast). A fraction 
of the firing line about to rush should, if practicable, avoid using the 
long blast signal as an aid to cease firing. Officers and men behind 
the firing line can not ordinarily move freely along the line, but must 
depend on mutual watchfulness and the proper use of the prescribed 
signals. All should post themselves so as to see their immediate su- 
periors and subordinates. (234) 

235. The musicians assist the captain by observing the enemy, the 
target, and the fire-effect, by transmitting commands or signals, and 
by watching for signals. (235) 

236. Firing with blank cartridges at an outlined or represented 
enemy at distances less than 100 yards is prohibited. (236) 

The effect of fire and the influence of the ground in relation 
thereto, and the individual and collective instruction in marksman- 
ship, are treated in the Small-Arms Firing Manual, (237) 

Ranges 

237. For convenience of reference ranges are classified as follows: 
to 600 yards, close range. 

600 to 1,200 yards, effective range. 
1,200 to 2,000 yards, long range. 

[Ml 



238-239-240 

2,000 yards and over, distant range. (238) 

The distance to the target must be determined as accurately 
as possible and the sights set accordingly. Aside from training and 
morale, this is the most important single factor in securing effective 
fire at the longer ranges. (239) 

Except in a deliberately prepared defensive position, the most 
accurate and only practicable method of determining the range will 
generally be to take the mean of several estimates. 

Five or six officers or men, selected from the most accurate 
estimators in the company, are designated as range finders and are 
specially trained in estimating distances. 

Whenever necessary and practicable, the captain assembles the 
range finders, points out the target to them, and adopts the mean of 
their estimates. The range finders then take their customary posts. 
(240) 

Classes of Firing 

238. Volley firing has limited application. In defense it may be 
used in the early stages of the action if the enemy presents a large, 
compact target. It may be used by troops executing fire of position. 
When the ground near the target is such that the strike of bullets can 
be seen from the firing line, ranging volleys may be used to correct 
the sight setting. 

In combat, volley firing is executed habitually by platoon. (241) 
Fire at will is the class of fire normally employed in attack 
or defense. (242) 

Clip fire has limited application. It is principally used: 
1. In the early stages of combat, to steady the men by habituating them 
to brief pauses in firing. 2. To produce a short burst of fire. (243) 

The Target 

239. Ordinarily the major will assign to the company an objective 
in attack or sector in defense; the company's target will lie within the 
limits so assigned. In the choice of target, tactical considerations 
are paramount; the nearest hostile troops within the objective or sector 
will thus be the usual target. This will ordinarily be the hostile firing 
line; troops in rear are ordinarily proper targets for artillery, machine 
guns, or, at times, infantry employing fire of position. 

Change of target should not be made without excellent reasons 
therefor, such as the sudden appearance of hostile troops under con- 
ditions which make them more to be feared than the troops comprising 
the former target. (244) 

240. The distribution of fire over the entire target is of special im- 
portance. 

[91] 



241-242-243 

The captain allots a part of the target to each platoon, or each 
platoon leader takes as his target that part which corresponds to his 
position in the company. Men are so instructed that each fires on 
that part of the target which is ) directly opposite him. (245) 

All parts of the target are equally important. Care must be 
exercised that the men do not slight its less visible parts. A section of 
the target not covered by fire represents a number of the enemy per- 
mitted to fire coolly and effectively. (246) 

If the target can not be seen with the naked eye, platoon leaders 
select an object in front of or behind it, designate this as the aiming 
point, and direct a sight setting which will carry the cone of fire into 
the target. (247) 

Fire Direction* 

241. When the company is large enough to be divided into platoons, 
it is impracticable for the captain to command it directly in combat. 
His efficiency in managing the firing line is measured by his ability to 
enforce his will through the platoon leaders. Having indicated clearly 
what he desires them to do, he avoids interfering except to correct 
serious errors or omissions. (248) 

The captain directs the fire of the company or of designated 
platoons. He designates the target, and, when practicable, allots a 
part of the target to each platoon. Before beginning the fire action he 
determines the range, announces the sight setting, and indicates the 
class of fire to be employed and the time to open fire. Thereafter, he 
observes the fire effect, corrects material errors in sight setting, pre- 
vents exhaustion of the ammunition supply, and causes the distribution 
of such extra ammunition as may be received from the rear. (249) 

Fire Control 

242. In combat the platoon is the fire unit. From 20 to 35 rifles 
are as many as one leader can control effectively. (250) 

Each platoon leader puts into execution the commands or direc- 
tions of the captain, having first taken such precautions to insure cor- 
rect sight setting an^ clear description of the target or aiming point 
as the situation permits or requires; thereafter, he gives such additional 
commands or directions as are necessary to exact compliance with 
the captain's will. He corrects the sight setting when necessary. He 
designates , an aiming point when the target can not be seen with the 
naked eye. (251) 

243. In general, platoon leaders observe the target and the effect of 
their fire and are on the alert for the captain's commands or signals; 
they observe and regulate the rate of fire. The platoon guides watch 
the firing line and check every breech of fire discipline. Squad leaders 
transmit commands and signals when necessary, observe the conduct 



* By Fire Direction is- meant prescribing and generally directing the firing. 

'[92] 



244-245-246-247-248 

of their squads and abate excitement, assist in enforcing fire discipline 
and participate in the firing. (252) 

The best troops are those that submit longest to fire control. 
Loss of control is an evil which robs success of its greatest results. 
To avoid or delay such loss should be the constant aim of all. 

Fire control implies the ability to stop firing, change the sight 
setting and target, and resume a well directed fire. (253) 

Fire Discipline 

244. *^Fire discipline implies, besides a habit of obedience, a con- 
* trol of the rifle by the soldier, the result of training, which will enable 

him in action to make hits instead of misses. It embraces taldng ad- 
vantage of the ground; care in setting the sight and delivery of fire; 
constant attention to the orders of the leaders, and careful observation 
of the enemy; an increase of fire when the target is favorable, and 
a cessation of fire when the enemy disappears; economy of ammunition/' 
(Small-Arms Firing Manual.) 

In combat, shots which graze the enemy's trench or position 
and thus reduce the effectiveness of his fire have the approximate value 
of hits; such shots only, or actual hits, contribute toward fire superiority. 

Fire discipline implies that, in a firing line without leaders, 
each man retains his presence of mind and directs effective fire upon 
the proper target. (254) 

245. To create a correct appreciation of the requirements of fire 
discipline, men are taught that the rate of fire should be as rapid as is 
consistent with accurate aiming; that the rate will depend upon the 
visibility, proximity, and size of the target; and that the proper rate 
will ordinarily suggest itself to each trained man, usually rendering 
cautions or commands unnecessary. 

In attack the highest rate of fire is employed at the halt pre- 
ceding the assault, and in pursuing fire. (255) 

246. In an advance by rushes, leaders of troops in firing positions are 
responsible for the delivery of heavy fire to cover the advance of each 
rushing fraction. Troops are trained to change slightly the direction 
of fire so as not to endanger the flanks of advanced portions of the fir- 
ing line. (256) 

247. In defense, when the target disappears behind cover platoon 
leaders suspend fire, prepare their platoons to fire upon the point where 
it is expected to reappear, and greet its reappearance instantly with 
vigorous fire. (257) 

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION 

248. The battalion being purely a tactical unit, the major's duties 
are primarily those of an instructor in drill and tactics and of a tactical 

[93] 



249-250-251-252 - 

commander. He is responsible for the theoretical and practical train 
ing of the battalion. He supervises the training of the companies of 
the battalion with a view to insuring the thoroughness and uniformity 
of their instruction. 

In the instruction of the battalion as a whole, his efforts will be 
directed chiefly to the development of tactical efficiency, devoting only 
such time to -the mechanism of drill and- to the ceremonies as may be 
necessary in order to insure precision, smartness, and proper control. 
(258) 

The movements explained herein are on the basis of a battalion 
of four companies; they may be executed by a battalion of two or 
more companies, not exceeding six. (259) 

249. The companies are generally arranged from right to left ac- 
cording to the rank of the captains present at the formation. The ar- 
rangement of the companies may be' varied by the major or higher 
commander. 

After the battalion is formed, no cognizance is taken of the 
relative order of the companies. (260) 

250. In whatever direction the battalion faces, the companies are 
designated numerically from right to left in line, and from head to 
rear in column, first company, second company, etc. 

The terms right and left apply to actual right and left as the 
line faces; if the about by squads be executed when in line, the right 
company becomes the left company and the right center becomes the 
left center company. 

The designation center company indicates the right center or 
the actual center company according as the number of companies is 
even or odd. (261) 

251. The band and other special units, when attached to the battalion, 
take the same post with respect to it as if it were the nearest battalion 
shown in Plate IV. (262) 

CLOSE ORDER 
Rules 

252. Captains repeat such preparatory commands as are to be im- 
mediately executed by their companies, as forward, squads right, etc.; 
the men execute the commands march, halt, etc., if applying to their 
companies, when given by the major. In movements executed in route 
step or at ease the captains repeat the command of execution, if neces- 
sary. Captains do not repeat the major ^s commands in executing the 
manual of arms, nor those commands which are not essential to the ex- 
ecution of a movement by their companies, as column of squads, first 
company, squads right, etc. 

[941 



253-254 



LINE (Cos. in Line.) 




THE BATTALION. 
Plote III. MAJOR (with STArr I Tc)- ^ guide and direction-! THECOtOR-ifi 

MUrvieRALS ARE. Dl STAtSICELS OR IM-TELRVAl-S IM f=>AC^S. 

In giving commands or cautions captains may prefix the proper 
letter designations of»their companies, as A Company, HALT; B Com- 
pany, squads right, etc. (263) 

253. At the command guide center (right or left), captains command: 
Guide right or left, according to the positions of their companies. Guide 
center designates the left guide of the center company. (264) 

254. When the companies are to be dressed, captains place themselves 
on that flank toward which the dress is to be made, as follows: 

The battalion in line: Beside the guide (or the flank file of the 
front rank, if the guide is not in line) and facing to the front. 

The battalion in column of companies: Two paces from the 
guide, in prolongation of and facing down the line. 

Each captain, after dressing his company, commands: FRONT, 
and takes his post. 

The battalion being in line and unless otherwise prescribed, at 
the captain's command dress, or at the command halt, when it is pre- 
scribed that the company shall dress, the guide on the flank away from 
the point of rest, with his piece at right shoulder, dresses promptly on 
the captain and the companies beyond. During the dress he moves, 
if necessary, to the right and left only; the captain dresses the company 
on the line thus established. The guide takes the position of order 
arma at^ Xhe command front. (265) 

[95] 



255-258-257-258 

255. The battalion executes the halt, rests, facings, steps and march- 
ings, manual of arms, resumes attention, kneels, lies down, rises, stacks 
and takes arms, as explained in the Schools of the Soldier and Squad, 
substituting in the commands battalion for squad. 

The battalion executes squads right (left), squads right (left) 
about, route step and at ease, and obliques and resumes the direct march, 
as explained in the School of the Company. (266) 

The battalion in column of platoons, squads, twos, or files 
changes direction; in column of squads forms column of twos or files 
and re-forms columns of twos or squads, as explained in the School of 
the Company. (267) 

256. When the formation admits of the simultaneous execution by 
companies or platoons of movements in the School of the Company the 
major may cause such movement to be executed by prefixing, when 
necessary, companies (plat(fons) to the commands prescribed therein: 
as 1. Companies, right front into line, 2. MARCH. To complete such 
simultaneous movements, the commands halt or march, if prescribed, are 
given by the major. The command front, when prescribed, is given by 
the captains. (268) 

257. The battalion as a unit executes the loadings and firings only 
in firing saluting volleys. The commands are as for the company, 
substituting battalion for company. At the first command for loading, 
captains take post in rear of the center of their respective companies. 
At the conclusion of the firing, .the captains resume their posts in line. 

On other occasions, when firing in close order is necessary, it 
is executed by company or other subdivision under instructions from 
the n^jor. (269) 

To Form the Battalion 

258. For purposes other than ceremonies: The battalion is formed 
in column of squads. The companies having been formed, the adjutant 
posts himself so as to be facing the column, when formed, and 6 paces 
in front of the place to be occupied by the leading guide of the battalion; 
he draws saber; adjutant's call is sounded or the adjutant signals as- 
semble. 

The companies are formed, at attention, in column of squads 
in their proper order. Each captain, after halting his company, salutes 
the adjutant; the adjutant returns the salute and, when the last captain 
has saluted, faces the major and reports: Sir, the battalion is formed. 
He then joins the major. (270) 

For ceremonies or when directed: The battalion is formed 
in line. 

The companies having been formed, the adjutant posts himself 
so as to be 6 paces to the right of the right company when line is 

[96] 



259-260 

forrned, and faces in the direction in wMch the line is to extend. He 
draws saber; adjutant *s call is sounded; the band plays if present. 

The right company is conducted by its captain so as to arrive 
from the rear, parallel to the line; its right and left guides precede 
it on the line by about 20 paces, taldng post facing to the right at 
order arms, so that their elbows will be against the breasts of the 
right and left files of/ their company when it is dressed. The guides of 
the other companies successively prolong the line to the left in like 
manner and the companies approach their respective places in line as 
explained for the right company. The adjutant, from his post, causes 
the guides to cover. 

When about 1 pace in rear of the line, each company is halted 
and dressed to the right against the arms of the guides. 

The band, arriving from the rear, takes its place in line when 
the right company is halted; it ceases playing when the left company 
has halted. 

When the guides of the left company have been posted, the 
adjutant, moving by the shortest route, takes post facing the battalion 
midway between the post of the major and the center of the battalion. 

The major, staff, noncommissioned staff, and orderlies take their 
posts. 

When all parts of the line have been dressed, and officers and 
others have reached their posts, the adjutant commands: 1. Guides, 2. 
POSTS, 3. Present, 4. ARMS. At the second command guides take their 
places in the line. The adjutant then turns about and reports to the 
major: Sir, the battalion is formed; the major directs the adjutant: 
Take your post, Sir; draws saber and brings the battalion to the order. 
The adjutant takes his post, passing to the right of the major. (271) 

To Dismiss the Battalion 

259. DISMISS YOUR COMPANIES. 

Staff and noncommissioned staff officers fall out; each captain 
marches his company off and dismisses it. (272) 

To Rectify the Alignment 

260. Being in line at a halt, to align the battalion: 1. Center (right 
or left), 2. DRESS. 

The captains dresp their companies successively toward the cen- 
ter (right or left) guide of the battalion, each as soon as the captain 
next toward the indicated guide commands: Front. The captains of 
the center companies (if the dress is center) dress them without waiting 
for each other. (273) 

To give the battalion a new alignment: 1. Guides center (right 
or left) company on the line, 2. Guides on the line, 3. Center (right or 
left), 4. Dress, 5. Guides, 6. POSTS. 

[97] 



261-262 

At the first command, the designated guides places themselves 
on the line (par. 271) facing the center (right or left). The major 
establishes them in the direction he wishes to give the battalion. 

At the second command, the guides of the other companies take 
posts, facing the center (right or left), so as to prolong the line. 

At the command dress, each captain dresses his company to the 
flank toward which the guides of his company face. 

At the command posts, given when all companies have com- 
pleted the dress, the guides return to their posts. (274) 

To Rectify the Column 

261. Being in column of companies, or in close column, at a halt, if 
the guides do not cover or have not their proper distances, and it is 
desired to correct them, the major commands: 1. Right (left), 2. DRESS. 

Captains of companies in rear of the first place their right 
guides so as to cover at the proper distance; each captain aligns his 
company to the right and commands: -FRONT. (275) 

On Right (Left) into Line 

262. Being in column of squads or companies: 1. On right (left) into 
line, 2. MARCH, 3. Battalion, 4. HALT. 

Being in column of squads: At the first command, the captain 
of the leading company commands: Squads right. If at a halt eacjh 
captain in rear commands: Forward. At the second command the 
Jeading company marches in line to the right; the com.panies in rear 
continue to march to the front and form successively on the left, each, 
when opposite its place, being marched in line to the right. 

The fourth command is given when the first company has ad- 
vanced the desired distance in the new direction; it halts and is dressed 
to the right by its captain; the others complete the movement, each 
being halted 1 pace in rear of the line established by the first company, 
and then dressed to the right. 



[M] 



263 





n 

II 











f- 


LJ 


n 
II 

II 

11 














n 
II 






h" 






---^.|i->.- 
II 












u 


n 




a 

CD . 








'1! 




1 CZI 








1 1 > 












II 
Li 





ri 

II 

-Ik-. 



n 

h 
II 



D 

□ 
a 
ch 
o 

4 CD 



Tkoki Co\.jhn Or 59UAOS To Li«t Om Ricmt. 



reoM Column Of Co«PANit5 
To tlM£ On RianT 



riQ.ea. 



Being in coluiiin of conipanies: At the first command, the cap- 
tain of the first company commands: Right turn. If at a halt, each 
captain in rear commands: Forward. Each of the captains in rear of 
the leading company gives the command: 1. Right turn, in time to add, 
2. MARCH, when his company arrives opposite the right of its place in 
line. 

The fourth command is given and the movement completed as 
explained above. 

Whether executed from column of squads or column of companies,, 
each captain places himself so as to march beside the right guide after 
his company forms line or changes direction to the right. 

If executed in double time, the leading company marches in 
double time until halted. (276) 

Front into Line 
263. Being in column of squads or companies: 1. Right (left) front 
into line, 2. MARCH. 

Being in column of squads: At the first command, the captain 
of the leading company commands: Column right; the captains of the 
companies in^jear, column half right. At the second command the lead- 
ing company executes column right, and, as the last squad completes 
the change of direction, is formed in line to the left, halted, and dressed 
to the left. Each of the companies in rear is conducted by the most 



[5^1 



264 

convenient route to the rear of the right of the preceding company, 
thence to the right, parallel to and I pace in rear of the new line; when 
opposite its place, it is formed in line to the left, halted, and dressed to 
the left. 

t t 



^' HFa,ce 



I " I I ' d 



^ C^- 



FIQ 69 



fuoM CouvjMN Of 59UA05 To Line To The Front 



r • 3» 



raoiA Column Of Companies' To Line To The front. 

Being in column of companies: If marching, the captain of the 
leading company gives the necessary commands to halt his company 
at the second command; if at a halt the leading company stands fast. 
At the first command, the captain of each company in rear commands: 
Squads right, or Right by squads, and after the second command conducts 
his company by the most convenient route to its place in line, as described 
above. 

Whether executed from column of squads or column of com- 
panies, each captain halts when opposite or at the point where the left 
of his company is to rest. (277) 

To Form Column of Companies Successively to the Right or Left 

264. Being in column of squads: 
1. Column of companies, first com- 
pany, squads right (left) , 2. MARCH. 
The leading company ex- 
ecutes squads right and moves for- 
ward. The other companies move 
forward in column of squads and 
successively march in line to the 
right on the same ground as the 
leading company and hi such man- 
ner that the guide covers the guide 
of the preceding company. (278) 



ncj 70 



[100] 



•DDDD[h-DDDDD^ DDDDD- DDDDD- 



265-266-267-268 
To Form Column of Squads Successively to the Right or Left 

265. Being in column 
of companies: 1. Column 
of squads, first company, 
squads right (left), 2. 
MARCH. 

The leading com- 
pany executes squads right 
and moves forward. The 
other companies move for- 
ward in column of com- 
panies and successively 
march in column of squads 
to the right on the same 
ground as the leading 
company. (279) 



riQ.7i. 



. _t_- 



, ^__, 



FICi 72. 



To Change Direction 
266. Being in column of companies or close column: 1. Column right 
(left), 2. MARCH. 

^ The captain of the first company com- 

mands: Right turn. 

The leading company turns to the 
right on moving pivot, the captain adding: 1. 
Forward, 2. MARCH, upon its completion. 

The other companies march squarely 
up to the turning point; each changes direc- 
tion by the same commands and means as the 
first and in such manner that the guide covers 
the guide of the preceding company. (280) 
in line of companies or close line: 1. Battalion right 
(left), 2. MARCH, 3. Battalion, 4. HALT. 

The right company changes 
direction to the right; the other 
companies are conducted by the 
shortest line to their places abreast 
of the first. 

The fourth command is given 
when the right company has ad- 
vanced the desired distance in the 
new direction; that company halts; 
the others halt successively upon ar- 
riving on the line. (281) 



(Clos£ Column) 

267. Being 



■DDD.DO 
•DDDDCh 
■DDDDD- 



mii. 



268. Being in column of squads, the battalion changes direction by 
the same commands and in the manner prescribed for the company. 
(282) 

[101] 



269 



z.zy* 



. .t , 

4 2 3 2. 

CD CHZD CD 
CD CXD CD 
CD CXD CD 
:-» CD CXD CD 

}> CD CXD CD 

FKO^v Line. Of Companies 



CD 
CD 
CD 
CD 



{ 1,2,5.^-0^0 Line ^ 

12", 3',4'- N£w LiNt ) . 21 ^V 



Mass Formations 
269. Being in line, line of companies, coiinrm of companies or column 
of squads: 1. Close on first (fourth) company, 2. MARCH. 

If at a halt, the 
indicated company 

, — , , i — , , , , I ,, stands fast; if march- 

ing, it is halted; each 
of the other companies 
is conducted toward it 
and is halted in proper y i 
order in close column j^^ I 
tha.- indicated company 
be in line , or in cfose 
if the indicated 
company be in column 
of squads. 

If the battalion 
is in line, companies 
form successively in 
rear of the indicated 
company; if in column 
of squads, companies in 
rear of the leading com- 
pany form on the left 
of it. 

In close column 
formed from line on the 
first company, the left 
guides cover; formed on 
the fourth company, 
right guides cover. If 
formed on the leading 
Bompany, the guide re- 
mains as before the 
formation. In close line, the guides are halted abreast of the guide 
of the leading company. 

The battalion in column closes on the leading company only. (283) 



i! 



CD 
□ 



□ CD CD 

□ 07-C3 

□ □ □ 

□ □ CD 



I ; I i 

L ' 14 



li riQ.74 



■-i-^. 



TRom Column Of Squads ^ 



^ 



From CoLwnN Of Coavpanies 
(.1.2 5,4 Old fo»,xjMN 
t.Z". 3* 4' - Mtw Cac»\*» ) . 



lOJi 



270-271-272-273-274 
To Extend the Mass 
270. Being in close column or in close line: 1. Extend 
on first (fourth) company, 2. MARCH. 

Being in close line: If at a halt, the indicated com- 
pany stands fast; if marching, it halts; each of the other 
companies is conducted away from the indicated company 
and is halted in its proper order in line of companies. 

Being in close column, the extension is made on the 
fourth company only. If marching, the leading company 
continues to march; companies in rear are halted and suc- 
cessively resume the march in time to follow at full dis- 
tance. If at halt, the leading company marches; companies 
in rear successively march in time to follow at full distance. 
^^^•75. Close column is not extended in double time. (284) 

271. Being in close column: 1. Right (left) front into line, 2. MARCH. 
Executed as from column of companies. (285) 

272. Being in close column: 1. Column of squads, first (fourth) com- 
pany, squads right (left), 2. MARCH. 

The designated company marches in column of squads to the 

right. Each of the other companies executes the same movement in time 

to follow the preceding company in column. (286) 

da 
a 



(1,2.3,4- OLOCbuuMH 



a 273. Being in close line: 1. Column of squads, first 

ri(i.76 S (fourth) company, forward, 2. MARCH. 

"^ The designated company moves forward. The 

o other companies (halting if in march) successively take 

a up the march and follow in column. (287) 
a 



ZZ Z.Z C3 ZZ 
rton Cwst LiNt 



Route Step and At Ease 
274. The battalion marches in route step and at ease as prescribed 
in the School of the Company. When marching in column of com- 
panies or platoons, the guides maintain the trace and distance. 

[103] 



275-276-277-277a-278 

In route marches the major marches at the head of the column; 
when necessary,, the file closers may be directed to march at the head 
and rear of their companies. (288) 

Assembly 

275. The battalion being wholly or partially deployed, or the com- 
panies being separated: 1. Assemble, 2. MAEOH. 

The major places himself opposite to or designates the element 
or point on which the battalion is to assemble. Companies are assembled 
and marched to the indicated point. As the companies arrive the major 
or adjutant indicates the formation to be taken. (289) 

COMBAT PRINCIPLES 
Orders 

276. The following references to orders are applicable to attack or 
defense. (290) 

277. In extended order, the company is the largest unit to execute 
movements by prescribed commands or means. The major, assembling 
his captains if practicable, directs the disposition of the battalion by 
means of tactical orders. He controls its subsequent movements by 
such orders or commands as are suitable to the occasion. (291) 

277a. In every disposition of the battalion for combat the major's 
order should give subordinates sufficient information of the enemy, of 
the position of supporting and neighboring troops, and of the object 
sought to enable them to conform intelligently to the general plan. 

The order should then designate the companies which are to con- 
stitute the firing line and those which are to constitute the support. In 
attack, it should designate the direction or the objective, the order 
and front of the companies on the firing line, and should designate the 
right or left company as base company. In defense, it should describe the 
front of each company and, if necessary, the sector to be observed by 
each. (292) 

When the battalion is operating alone, the m.ajor provides for 
the reconnaissance and protection of his flanks; if part of a larger fjorce, 
the major m.akes similar provisions, when necessary, without orders 
from higher authority, unless such authority has specifically directed 
other suitable reconnaissance and protection. (293) 

278. When the battalion is deployed upon the initiative of the major, 
he will indicate whether extra ammunition shall be issued; if deployed 
in pursuance of orders of higher authority, the major will cause the 
issue of extra ammunition, unless such authority has given directions 
to the contrary. (294) 

[164] 



279-280-281 

Deployment 

279. The following principles of deployment are applicable to attack 
or defense. (295) 

A premature deployment involves a long, disorganizing and 
fatiguing advance of the sldrmish line, and should be avoided. A 
greater evil is to be caught by heavy fire when in dense column or other 
close order formation; hence advantage should be taken of cover in 
order to retain the battalion in close order formation until exposure 
to heavy hostile fire may reasonably be anticipated. (296) 

The major regulates the depth of the deployment and the ex- 
tent and density of the firing line, subject to such restrictions as a senior 
may have imposed. 

Companies or designated subdivisions and detachments are con- 
ducted b}^ their commanders in such manner as best to accomplish the 
mission assigned to them under the major ^s orders. Companies designated 
for the firing line march independently to the place of deployment, form 
skirmish line, and take up the advance. They conform, in general, to 
the base company. (297) 

280. The commander of a battalion, whether it is operating alone or as 
part of a larger force, should hold a part of his command out of the fir- 
ing line. By the judicious use of this force the major can exert an in- 
fluence not otherwise possible over his firing line and can control, within 
reasonable limits, an action once begun. So if his battalion be assigned 
to the firing line the major will cause one, two, or three companies to be 
deployed on the firing line, retaining the remaining companies or com- 
pany as a support for that firing line. The division of the battalion into 
firing line and support will depend upon the front to be covered and the 
nature and anticipated severity of the action. (298) 

If the battalion be part of a larger command, the number of 
companies in the firing line will generally be determinable from the regi- 
mental commander ^s order; the remainder constitutes the support. If the 
battalion is acting alone, the support must be strong enough to main- 
tain the original fire power of the firing line, to protect the flanks, and 
to perform the functions of a reserve, whatever be the issue of the action. 
See paragraph 346. (299) 

If the battalion is operating alone, the support may, according 
to circumstances, be held in one or two bodies and placed behind the 
center, or one or both flanks of the firing line, or echeloned beyond a 
flank. If the battalion is part of a larger force, the support is generally 
held in one body. (300) 

281. The distance between the firing line and the supporting group 
or groups will vary between wide limits; it should be as short as the 
necessity for protection from heavy losses will permit. When cover is 
available, the support should be as close as 50 jo 100 yards; when such 

[105] 



282-283-284-285 

cover is not available, it should not be closer than 300 yards. It may 
be as far as 500 yards in rear if good cover is there obtainable and is not 
obtainable at a lesser distance. (301) 

In exceptional cases, as in a meeting engagement, it may be neces- 
sary to place an entire battalion or regiment in the firing line at the 
initial deployment, the support being furnished by other troops. Such 
deployment causes the early mingling of the larger units, thus render- 
ing leadership and control extremely difficult. The necessity for such 
deployment will increase with the inefficiency of the commander and of 
the service of information. (302) 

Fire 

282. Fire direction and fire control are functions of company and 
platoon commanders. The major makes the primary apportionment of the 
target — in defense, by assigning sectors of fire; in attack, by assigning 
the objective. In the latter case each company in the firing line takes as 
its target that part of the general objective which lies in its front. (303) 

283. The major should indicate the point or time at which the fire 
fight is to open. He may do this in his order for deployment or he may 
follow the firing line close enough to do so at the proper time. If it be 
'mpracticable for him to do either, the senior officer with the firing line, 
.n each battalion, selects the time for opening fire. (304) 

Attack. 

284. The battalion is the attack unit, whether operating alone or as 
part of a larger unit. (305) 

285: If his battalion be one of several in the firing line, the major, 
in executing his part of the attack, pushes his battalion forward as 
vigorously as possible within the front, or section, assigned to it. The 
great degree of independence allowed to him as to details demands, in 
turn, the exercise of good judgment on his part. Better leadership, better 
troops, and more favorable terrain enable one battalion to advance more 
rapidly in attack than another less fortunate, and such a battalion will 
insure the further advance of the others. The leading battalion should 
not, however, become isolated; isolation may lead to its destruction. 
(306) 

The deployment having been made, the firing line advances with- 
out firing. The predominant idea must be to close with the enemy as 
soon as possible without ruinous losses. The limited supply of ammuni- 
tion and the uncertainty of resupply, the necessity for securing fire 
superiority in order to advance within the shorter ranges, and the im- 
possibility of accomplishing this at ineffective ranges, make it impera- 
tive that fire be not opened as long as the advance can be continued 
without demoralizing losses. The attack which halts to open fire at ex- 
treme range (over 1,200 yards) is not likely ever to reach its destina 

[106] 



286-287 

tion. Every effort should be made, by using cover or inconspicuous for- 
mations, or by advancing the firing line as a whole, to arrive within 800 
yards of the enemy before opening fire. (307) 

Except when the enemy's artillery is able to effect an unusual 
concentration of fire, its fire upon deployed infantry causes losses which 
are unimportant when compared with those inflicted by his infantry; 
hence the attacking infantry should proceed to a position as described 
above, and from which an effective fire can be directed against the hostile 
infantry with a view to obtaining fire superiority. The effectiveness 
of the enemy's fire must be reduced so as to permit further advance. 
The more effective the fire to which the enemy is subjected the les? 
effective will be his fire. (308) 

Occasionally the fire of adjacent battalions, or of infantry em- 
ploying fire of position, or of supporting artillery, will permit the further 
advance of the entire firing line from this point, but it will generally 
be necessary to advance by rushes of fractions of the line. 

The fraction maldng the rush should be as large as the hostile 
fire and the necessity for maintaining fire superiority will perniit. De- 
pending upon circumstances, the strength of the fraction may vary from 
a company to a few men. 

The advance is made as rapidly as possible without losing fire 
superiority. The smaller the fraction which rushes, the greater the 
number of rifles which continue to fire upon the enemy. On the other 
hand, the smaller the fraction which rushes the slower will be the progress 
of the attack. (309) 

286. Enough rifles must continue in action to insure the success of 
each rush. Frequently the successive advances of the firing line must 
be effected by rushes of fractions of decreased size; that is, advances 
by rushes may first be made by company, later by half company or 
platoon, and finally by squads or files; but no subsequent opportunity 
to increase the rate of advance, such as better cover or a decrease of the 
hostile fire, should be overlooked. (310) 

287. Whenever possible, the rush is begun by a flank fraction of the 
firing line. In the absence of express directions from the major, each 
captain of a flank company determines when an advance by rushes shall 
be attempted. A flank company which inaugurates an advance by rushes 
becomes the base company, if not already the base. An advance by 
rushes having been inaugurated on one flank, the remainder of the firing 
line conforms; fractions rush successively from that flank and halt on 
the line established by the initial rush. 

The fractions need not be uniform in size; each captain indi- 
cates how his company shall rush, having due regard to the ground 
and the state of the fire fight. (311) 

[107] 



288-289 

A fraction about to rush is sent forward when the remainder 
of the line is firing vigorously; otherwise ,the chief advantage of this 
method of advancing is lost. 

The length of the rush will vary from 30 to 80 yards, depend- 
ing upon the existence of cover, positions for firing, and the hostile 
fire. (312) 

When the entire firing line of the battalion has advanced to 
the new line, fresh opportunities to advance are sought as before. 
(313) 

Two identical situations will never confront the battalion; hence 
at drill it is prohibited to arrange the details of an advance before the 
preceding one has been concluded, or to employ a fixed or prearranged 
method of advancing by rushes. (314) 

288. The major posts himself so as best to direct the reenforcing bf 
the firing line from the support. When all or nearly all of the support 
has been absorbed by the firing line, he joins, and takes full charge of, 
the latter. (315) 

The reenforcing of the firing line by driblets of a squad or a 
few men has no appreciable effect. The firing line requires either no 
reenforcement or a strong one. Generally one or two platoons will be 
sent forward under cover of a heavy fir^ of the firing line. (316) 

To facilitate control and to provide intervals in which reenforce- 
ments may be placed, the companies in the firing line should be kept 
closed in on their centers as they become depleted by casualties ^ring 
the advance. 

When this is impracticable reenforcements must mangle with and 
thicken the firing line. In battle the latter method will be the rule 
rather than the exception, and to familiarize the men with such condi- 
tions the combat exercises of the battalion should include both methods 
of reenforcing. Occasionally, to provide the necessary intervals for 
reenforcing by either of these methods, the firing line should be thinned 
by causing m.en to drop out and simulate losses during the various ad- 
vances. Under ordinary conditions the depletion of the firing line for 
this purpose will be from one-fifth to one-half of its strength. (317) 

289. The major or senior officer in the firing line determines when 
bayonets shall be fixed and gives the proper command or signal. It 
is repeated by all parts of the firing line. Each man who was in the 
front rank prior to deployment, as soon as he recognizes the command 
or signal, suspends firing, quickly fixes his bayonet, and immediately 
resumies firing; after which the other men suspend firing, ^x bayonets, 
and immediately resume firing. The support also fixes bayonets. The 
concerted fixing of the bayonet by the firing line at drill does not simulate 
battle conditions and should not be required. It is essential that there 
be no marked pause in the firing. Bayonets will be fixed generally before 
or during the last, or second last, advance preceding the charge. (318) 

[1081 



290-291 

290. Subject to orders from higher authority, the major determines 
the point from which the charge is to be made. The firing line having 
arrived at that point and being in readiness, the major causes the charge 
to be sounded. The signal is repeated by the musicians of all parts of 
the line. The company officers lead the charge. The sldrmishers spring 
forward shouting, run with bayonets at charge, and close with, the enemy. 

The further conduct of the charging troops will, depend upon 
circumstances; they may halt and engage in bayonet combat or in pur- 
suing fire; they may advance a short distance to obtain a field of fire 
or to drive the enemy from the vicinity; they may assemble or reorgan- 
ize, etc. If the enemy vacates his position every effort should be made 
to open fire at once on the retreating mass, reorganization of the attack- 
ing troops being of secondary importance to the infliction of further 
losses upon the enemy and to the increase of his confusion. In combat 
exercises the major will assume a situation and terminate the assault 
accordingly. (319) 

Defense ^ 

291. In defense, as in attack, the battalion is the tactical unit best 
suited to independent assignment. Defensive positions are usually divid 
ed into sections and a battalion assigned to each. (320) 

The major locates such fire, communicating, and cover trenches 
and obstacles as are to be constructed. He assigns companies to construct 
them and details the troops to occupy them. (321) 

The major reenforces the firing line in accordance with the 
principles applicable to, and explained in connection with, the attack, 
maintaining no more rifles in the firing line than are necessary to pre- 
vent the enemy's advance. (322) 

The supply of ammunition being usually ample, fire is opened 
as soon as it is possible to break up the enemy's formation, stop his 
advance, or inflict material loss, but this rule maist be modified to suit 
the ammunition supply. (323) 

The major causes the firing line and support to fix bayonets 
when an assault by the enemy is imminent. Captains direct this to be 
done if they are not in communication with the major and the measure is 
deemed advisable. 

Fire alone will not stop a determined, skillfully conducted attack. 
The defender must have equal tenacity; if he can stay in his rrench or 
position and cross bayonets, he will at least have neutralized the hostile 
first line, and the combat will be decided by reserves. (324) 

If ordered or compelled to withdraw under hostile infantry fire 
or in the presence of hostile infantry, the support will be posted so as 
to cover the retirement of the firing line. (325) 

When the battalion is operating alone, the support must be 
strong and must be fed sparingly into the firing line, especially if a 

[109] 



292 

counter-attack is planned. Opportunities for counter-attack should be 
sought at all times. (326) 

THE REGIMENT 

292. Normally, the regiment consists of three battalions, but these 
regulations are applicable to a regiment of two or more battalions 



Q 

o 

if) 

z 

If 

o 



UNJE (Bhs in Line) 



f 

60 



30 J^" 
t30 



I iOi 



I 30 p 



39 



iO 
30 

CZl 

30 

CZl 

30 

n 

i i 



COLUMN OF . 

MASSES 

(Bns in Close 

Colunnn). 



LINE OF MASSES (Bos- in Close Column). 



f 

30 



I I 30 I jsof—l 

it 



Rate iV 
THE REGIMENT. 

COLONEL (with staff ETC) i 

BAND. ^ 

MACHINE SUNSET on COIWVNy) ^ 
MOU^f^EO DETACHMENT R 



TME. cot_o<=J accon/i?=a(sj<e:s cct^~f-tn=t' 
(rigmt cE:ivrrE:R)BAT-rAi_(ON4,Sc:E: F=i_tfrc. m. 

rsJUN/IERAUS are: DISTAMOES or liSJ-TElR- 
VALS irsj RACES 



Special units, such as band, machine-gun company, and mounted scouts, 
have special formations for their own use. Movements herein pre- 
scribed are for the battalions; special units conform thereto unless 
otherwise prescribed or directed. (327) 

The colonel is responsible for the theoretical instruction and 
practical training of the regiment as a whole. Under his immediate 
supervision the training of the units of the regiment is conducted by 
their respective commanders. (328) 

The colonel either gives his commands or orders orally, by 
bugle, or by signal, or communicates them by staff officers or orderlies. 

[110] 



293 

Each major gives *the appropriate commands or orders, and, in 
close-order movements, causes his battalion to execute the necessary 
movements at his command of execution. Each major ordinarily moves 
his battalion from one formation to another, in column of squads, in 
the most convenient manner, and, in the presence of the enemy, in the 
most direct manner consistent with cover. 

Commanders of the special units observe the same principles as 
to commands and movements. They take places in the new formation 
as directed by the colonel; in the. absence of such directions they con- 
form as nearly as practicable to Plate IV, maintaining their relative 
positions with respect to the flank or end of the regiment on which 
they are originally posted. (329) 

When the regiment is formed, and during ceremonies, the lieuten- 
ant colonel is posted 2 paces to the left of, and 1 pace less advanced 
than the colonel. In movements subsequent to the formation of the 
regiment and other than cermonies, the lieutenant colonel is on the left 
of the colonel. (330) 

In whatever formation the regiment may be, the battalions retain 
their permanent administrative designations of first, second, third bat- 
talion. For convenience, they may be designated, when in line, as 
right, center, or left battalion; when in column, as leading, center, or rear 
battalion. These designations apply to the actual positions of the bat- 
talions in line or column. (331) 

Except at cermonies, or when rendering honors, or when other- 
wise directed, after the regiment is formed, the battalions march and 
stand at ease during subsequent movements. (332) 

CLOSE OEDER 

To Form the Regiment 

293. Unless otherwise directed, the battalions are posted from right 

to left, or from head to rear, according to the rank of the battalion 

commanders present, the senior on the right or at the head. A battalion 

whose major is in command of the regiment retains its place. (333) 

For ordinary purposes, the regiment is formed in column of 
squads or in column of masses. 

The adjutant informs the majors what the formation is to be. 
The battalions and special units having been formed, he posts himself 
and draws saber. Adjutant's call is sounded, or the adjutant signals 
assemble. 

If forming in column of squads, the adjutant posts himself so as 
to be facing the column when formed; and 6 paces in front of the place 
to be occupied by the leading guide of the regiment; if forming in col- 
umn of masses, he posts himself so as to be facing the right guides of 
the column when formed, and 6 paces in front of the place to be occupied 

[111] 



293a 

by the right guide of the leading conipany. Later, he moves so as best 
to observe the formation. 

The battalions are halted, at attention, in column of squads or 
close column, as the case may be, successively from the front in their 
proper order and places. The band takes its place when the leading 
battalion has halted. Other special units take their places in turn when 
the rear battalion has halted. 

The majors and the commanders of the machine-gun company 
and mounted scouts (or detachment) each, when his command is in place, 
salutes the adjutant and commands: At ease; the adjutant returns the 
salutes. When all have saluted and the band is in place, the adjutant 
rides to the colonel, reports: Sir, the regiment is formed, and takes his 
post. The colonel draws saber. 

The formation in column of squads may be modified to the extent 
demanded by circumstances. Prior to the formation the adjutant in- 
dicates the point where the head of the column is to rest and 'the direc- 
tion in which it is to face; he then posts himself so as best to observe 
the formation. At adjutant's call or assemble the leading battalion 
marches to, and halts at, the indicated point. The other battalions 
take positions from which they may conveniently follow in their proper 
places. (334) ^ ^ 

^ 293a. For ceremonies, or when directed, the regiment is formed in 
line or line of masses. 

The adjutant posts himself so as to be 6 paces to the right of 
the right or leading company of the right battalion when the regiment 
IS formed and faces in the direction in which the line is to extend 
Adjutant's call is sounded; the band plays. 

The adjutant indicates to the adjutant of the right battalion 
the point of rest and the direction in which the line is to extend, and 
then takes post facing the regiment midway between 'the post of the 
colonel and the center of the regiment. Each of the other battalior- 
adjutants precedes his battalion to the line and m^arks its point of rest. 

The battalions, arriving from the rear, each in line or close 
column, as the case may be, are halted on the line successively from 
right to left in their proper order and places. Upon halting, each major 
commands: 1. Right, 2. DRESS. The battalion adjutant assists in align- 
ing the battalion and then takes his post. 

^ The band, arriving from the rear, takes its place in line when the 

right battalion has halted; it ceases playing when the left battalion has 
halted. The machine-gun company and the mounted scouts (or detach- 
ment) take their places in line after the center battalion has halted. 

The colonel and those who accompany him take post. 

When all parts of the line have been dressed, and officers and all 
others have reached their posts, the adjutant commands: 1. Present, 

[112] 



293c 

2. ARMS. He then turns about and reports to the colonel: Sir, the 
regiment is formed; the colonel directs the adjutant: Take your post. 
Sir, draws saber and brings the regiment to the order. The adjutant 
takes his post (Par. 53), passing to the right of the colonel. (335) 

To Dismiss the Regiment 
Being in any formation: DISMISS YOUR BATTALIONS. Each 
major marches his battalion off and dismisses it. (336) 

Movements by the Regiment 

293c. The regiment executes the halt, rests, facings, steps, and march- 
ings, manual of arms, resumes attention, kneels, lies down, rises, stacks 
and takes arms, as explained in the Schools of the Soldier and Squad, 
substituting in the commands, when necessary, battalions for squad. 

The regiment executes squads right (left), squads right (left) 
about, route step and at ease, obliques and resumes the direct march 
as explained in the School of the Company. 

The regiment in column of files, twos, squads, or platoons, changes 
direction, and in column of squads forms column of twos or files and re- 
forms column of twos or squads, as explained in the School of the 
Company. In column of companies, it changes direction as explained 
in the School of the Battalion. (337) 

When the formation admits of the simultaneous execution, by 
battalions, companies, or platoons, of movements prescribed in the School 
of the Company or Battalion, the colonel may cause such movements to 
be executed by prefixing, where necessary, battalions (companies, pla- 
toons), to the commands prescribed therein. (338) 

The column of squads is the usual column of march; to shorten 
the column, if conditions permit, a double column of squads may be used, 
the companies of each battalion marching abreast in two columns. Pre- 
liminary to an engagement, the regiment or its units will be placed in 
the formation best suited to its subsequent tactical employment. (339) 

To assume any formation, the colonel indicates to the majors 
the character of the formation desired, the order of the battalions, 
and the point of rest. Each battalion is conducted by its major, and 
is placed in its proper order in the formation, by the most convenient 
means and route. 

Having halted in a formation, no movements for the purpose of 
correcting minor discrepancies in alignments, intervals, or distances are 
made unless specially directed by the colonel or necessitated by conditions 
of cover. (340) 

To correct intervals, distances, and alignments, the colonel directs 
one or more of the majors to rectify their battalions. Each major so 
directed causes his battalion to correct its alignment, intervals, and 
distances, and places it in its proper position in the formation. (341) 

[113] 



294-295-296-297 

CEREMONIES AND INSPECTIONS 



CEEEMONIES 
General Rules for Ceremonies 

294. The order in which the troops of the various arms are arranged 
for ceremonies is prescribed by Army Regulations. 

When forming for ceremonies the companies of the battalion and 
the battalions of the regiment are posted from right to left in line and 
from head to rear in column, in the order of rank of their respective 
commanders present in the formation, the senior on the right or at the 
head. 

The commander faces the command; subordinate commanders 
face to the front. (708) 

295. At the command present arms, given by the colonel, the lieuten- 
ant colonel, and the colonePs staff salute; the major's staff salutes at 
the major ^s command. Each staff returns to the carry or order when the 
command order arms is given by its chief. (709) 

At the assembly for a ceremony companies are formed on their 
own parades and informally inspected. 

At adjutant's call, except for ceremonies involving a single bat- 
talion, each battalion is formed on its own parade, reports are received, 
and the battalion presented to the major. At the second sounding of 
adjutant's call the regiment is formed. (710) 

REVIEWS 

General Rules 

296. The adjutant posts men or otherwise marks the points where the 
column changes direction in such manner that its flank in passing will 
be about 12 paces from the reviewing officer. 

The post of the reviewing officer, usually opposite the center of 
the line, is indicated by a marker. 

Officers of the same or higher grade, and distinguished persop 
ages invited to accompany the reviewing officer, place themselves oi. 
his left; their staffs and orderlies place themselves respectively on the 
left of the staff and orderlies of the reviewing officer; all others who 
accompany the reviewing officer place themselves on the left of his 
staff, their orderlies in rear. A staff officer is designated to escort dis- 
tinguished personages and to indicate to them their proper positions. 
(711) 

297. While riding around the troops, the reviewing officer may direct 
his staff, flag and orderlies to remain at the post of the reviewing officer, 
or that only his personal staff and flag shall accompany him; in either 
case the commanding officer alone accompanies the reviewing officer. 

£1141 



298 

If the reviewing officer ip accompanied by his entire staff, the staff 
officers of the commander place themselves on the right of the staff 
of the reviewing officer. 

The reviewing officer and others at the reviewing stand salute 
the color as it passes; when passing around the troops, the reviewing 
officer and those accompanying him salute the color when passing in 
front of it. 

The reviewing officer returns the salute of the commanding officer 
of the troops only. Those who accompany the reviewing officer do not 
salute. (712) 

298. In passing in review, each staff salutes with its commander. 
(713) 

After saluting the reviewing officer, the commanding officer of 
the troops turns out of the column, takes post on the right of the review- 
ing officer, and returns saber; the members of his staff accompanying 
him take post on the right of the reviewing officer's staff and return 
saber. When the rear element of his command has passed, without 
changing his position, the commanding officer of the troops salutes the 
reviewing officer; he and the members of his staff accompanying him 
then draw saber and rejoin his command. The commanding officer of 
the troops and the members of his staff are the only ones who turn out 
of the column. (714) (0, 1, D. B,, No. 10, Dec. 28, 1914.) 

If the person reviewing the command is not mounted, the com- 
manding officer and his staff on turning out of the column after passing 
the reviewing officer dismount preparatory to taking post. In such 
case, the salute of the commanding officer, prior to rejoining his command, 
is made with the hand before remounting. (715) 

When the rank of the reviewing officer entitles him to the honor, 
each regimental color salutes at the command present arms, given or 
repeated by the major of the battalion with which it is posted; and 
again in passing in review. (716) 

The band of an organization plays while the reviewing officer 
is passing in front of and in rear of the organization. 

Each band, immediately after passing the reviewing officer, turns 
out of the column, takes post in front of and facing him, continues to 
play until its regiment has passed, then ceases playing and follows in 
rear of its regiment; the band of the following regiment commences to 
play as soon as the preceding band has ceased. 

While marching in review but one band in each brigade plays 
at a time, and but one band at a time when within 100 paces of the re- 
viewing officer. (717) 

If the rank of the reviewing officer entitles him to the honor, 
the band plays the prescribed national air or the field music sounds to the 
color, march, flourishes, or ruflaes when arms are presented. When pass- 
ing in review at the moment the regimental color salutes, the musicians 
halted in front of the reviewing officer, sound to the color, march, flour- 
ishes, or ruffles. (718) 



299-300 

The formation for review may be modified to suit the ground, 
and the present arms and the ride around the line by the reviewing 
officer may be dispensed with. (719) 

299. If the post of the reviewing officer is on the left of the column, 
the troops march in review with the guide left; the commanding officer 
and his staff turn out of the column to the left, taking post as prescribed 
above, but to the left of the reviewing officer; in saluting, the captains 
give the comm^and: 1. Eyes, 2. LEFT. (720) 

Except in the review of a single battalion, the troops pass in 
review in quick time only. (721) 

In reviews of brigades or larger commands, each battalion, after 
the rear has passed the reviewing officer 50 paces, takes the double time 
for 100 yards in order not to interfere with the march of the column 
in rear; if necessary, it then turns out of the column and returns to camp 
by the most practicable route; the leading battalion of each regiment 
is followed by the other units of the regiment. (722) 

In a brigade or larger review a regimental commander may 
cause his regiment to stand at ease, rest, or stack arms and fall out 
and resume attention, so as not to interfere with the ceremony. (723) 

When an organization is to be reviewed before an inspector 
junior in rank to the commanding officer, the commanding officer re- 
ceives the review and is accompanied by the inspector, who takes pest 
on his left. (724) 

Battalion Review 

300. The battalion having been formed in line, the major faces to 
the front; the reviewing officer moves a few paces toward the major 
and halts; the major turns about and commands: 1. Present, 2. ARMS, 
and again turns about and salutes. 

The reviewing officer returns the salute; the major turns about 
brings the battalion to order arms, and again turns to the front. 

The reviewing officer approaches to about 6 paces from the 
major, the latter salutes, takes post on his right, and accompanies him 
around the battalion. The band plays. The reviewing officer proceeds 
to the right of the band, passes in front of the captains to the left of 
the line and returns to the right, passing in rear of the file closers and 
the band. 

On arriving again at the right of the line, the major salutes, 
halts, and when the reviewing officer and staff have passed moves direct- 
ly to his post in front of the battalion, faces it, and commands: 1. Pass 
in review, 2. Squads right, 3. MARCH. 

At the first command the band changes direction if necessary, 
and halts. 

At the third command, given when the band has changed direc- 
tion, the battalion moves off, the band playing; without command from 

[116] 



300 (contd.) 

tiie major the column changes direction at the points indicated, and col- 
umn of companies at full distance is formed successively to the left 
at the second change of direction; the major takes his post 30 paces in 
front of the band immediately after the second change; the band having 
passed the reviewing officer, turns to the left out of the column, takes 
post in front of and facing the reviewing officer, and remains there 
until the review terminates. 

The major and staff salute, turn the head as in eyes right, and 
look toward the reviewing officer when the major is 6 paces from him; 
they return to the carry and turn th-^ head and eyes to the front when 
the major has passed 6 paces bey .:i him. 

Without facing about, eacn captain or special unit commander, 
except the drum major, commands: 1. Eyes, in time to add, 2. RIGHT, 
when at 6 paces from the reviewing officer, and commands FRONT 
when at 6 pacet beyond him. At the command eyes the company officers 
and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber execute the first 
motion of present saber; at the command right all turn head and eyes 
to the right, the company officers complete present saber and the non- 
commissioned officers armed with the saber execute the first motion of 
present saber; at the command front all turn head and eyes to the front, 
and officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber resume 
the carry saber; without arms in hand the first motion of the hand 
salute is made at the command right and the second motion not made 
until the command front. 

Noncommissioned staff officers, noncommissioned officers in com- 
mand of subdivisions, and the drum major salute, turn the head and eyes, 
return to the front, resume the carry or drop the hand, at the points 
prescribed for the major. Officers and dismounted noncommissioned 
officers in command of subdivisions with arms in hand render the rifle 
or saber salute. Guides charged with the step, trace, and direction do 
not execute eyes right. 

If the reviewing officer is entitled to a salute from the color 
the regimental color salutes when at 6 paces from him, and is raised 
when at 6 paces beyond him. 

The major, having saluted, takes post on the right of the review- 
ing officer, returns saber and remains there until the rear of the battalion 
has passed, then salutes, draws saber, and rejoins his battalion. The 
band ceases to play when the column has completed its second change 
of direction after passing the reviewing officer. (725) (C 7. D, R., 
No. 10, Dec. 28, 1914.) 

When the battalion arrives at its original position in column, 
the major commands: 1. Double time, 2. MARCH. 

The band plays in double time. 

The battalion passes in review as before, except that in double 
time the command eyes right is omitted and there is no saluting except 
by the major when he leaves the reviewing officer, 

[117] 



301-302 

The review terminates when the rear company has passed the 
reviewing officer; the band then ceases to play, and, unless otherwise 
directed by the major, returns to the position it occupied before march- 
ing in review, or is dismissed; the major rejoins the battalion and brings 
it to quick time. The battalion then executes such movements as the 
reviewing officer may have direcied, or is marched to its parade ground 
and dismissed. 

Marching past in double time may, in the discretion of the re- 
viewing officer, be omitted; the review terminates when the major rejoins 
his battalion. (726) 

At battalion review the major and his staff may be dismounted 
m the discretion of the commanding officer. (727) 
. Regimental Review 

301. The regiment is formed in line or in line of masses. 

In line the review proceeds as in the battalion, substituting 
** colonel'' for '^ major'' and ** regiment "for "battalion." 

To march the regiment in review, the colonel commands: PASS 
IN REVIEW. The band changes direction, if necessary, and halts. 
Each m^ajor then commands: 1. Squad* right, 2. MARCH. 

The band marches at the command of the major of the lead- 
ing battalion. 

At the second change of direction each major takes post 20 
paces in front of his leading company. 

The rear of the column having passed the reviewing officer, the 
battalions, unless otherwise directed, are marched to their parades and 
dismissed. 

In line of masses, when the reviewing officer has passed around 
the regiment, the colonel commands: PASS IN REVIEW. The band 
changes direction, if necessary, and halts. The major of the right bat- 
talion then commands: 1. Column of squads, first company, squads right, 
2. MARCH. At the command march the band and the leading company 
of the right battalion move off. Each company and battalion in rear 
moves off in time to follow at its proper distance. (728) 

The review of a small body of troops composed of different arms 
is conducted on the principles laid down for the regiment. The troops 
of each arm are formed and marched according to the drill regulations 
for that arm. (729) 

Review of Large Commands 

302. A command consisting of one regiment, or less, and detach- 
ments of other arms is formed for review as ordered by the commanding 
officer. The principles of regimental review will be observed whenever 
practicable. (730) 

In the review of a brigade or larger command the present arms 

and the ride around t^e line by the reviewing officer are omitted. The 

troops form and march in the order prescribed by the commanding 

officer. (731) 

^ ^ [118] 



S03-304 

PAEADES 
General Rules 

303. If dismounted, the officer receiving the parade, and his staff, 
stand at parade rest, with arms folded, while the band is sounding off; 
they resume attention with the adjutant. If mounted, they remain at 
attention. (732) 

At the command report, given by a battalion adjutant, the cap- 
tains in succession from the right salute and report; A (or other) com- 
pany, present or accounted for; or, A (or other) company, (so many) 
officers or enlisted men absent, and resume the order saber; at the same 
command given by the regimental adjutant, the majors similarly report 
their battalions. (733) 

Battalion Parade 

304. At adjutant's call the battalion is formed in line but not pre- 
sented. Lieutenants take their posts in front of the center of their 
respective platoons at the captain's command for dressing his company 
on the line. The major takes post at a convenient distance in front of 
the center and facing the battalion. 

The adjutant, from his post in front of the center of the battalion,, 
after commanding: 1. Guides, 2. POSTS, adds: 1. Parade, 2. REST; the 
battalion executes parade rest. The adjutant directs the band: SOUND 
OFF. 

The band, playing in quick time, passes in front of the line of 
officers to the left of the line and back to its post on the right, when 
it ceases playing. At evening parade, when the band ceases playing, 
retreat is sounded by the field music and, following the last note and 
while the flag is being lowered, the band plays The Star Spangled Banner. 

Just before the last note of retreat, the adjutant comes to at- 
tention and, as the last note ends, commands: 1. Battalion, 2. ATTEN- 
TION. When the band ceases playing he commands: 1. Present, 2. ARMS. 
He then turns about and reports: Sir, the parade is formed. The major 
directs the adjutant: Take your post. Sir. The adjutant moves at a 
trot (if dismounted, in quick time), passes by the major's right, and 
takes his post. 

The major draws saber and commands: 1. Order, 2. ARMS, and 
adds such exercises in the manual of arms as he may desire. Officers, 
noncommissioned officers commanding companies or armed with the saber, 
and the color guard, having once executed order arms, remain in that 
position during the exercises in the manual. 

The major then directs the adjutant: Receive the reports, Sir. 
The adjutant, passing by the major's right, advances at a trot (if dis- 
mounted, in quick time) toward the center of the line, halts midway 
between it and the major, and commands: REPORT. 

[119] 



304 (contd.) 

The reports received, the adjutant turns about, and reports: Sir, 
all are present or accounted for; or Sir, (so many) officers or enlisted 
men are absent, including in the list of absentees those from the band 
and field music reported to him by the drum major prior to the parade. 

The major directs: Publish the orders. Sir. 

The adjutant turns about and commands: Attention to orders; 
he then reads the orders, and commands: 1. Officers, 2. CENTER, 3. 
MARCH. 

At the comimand center, the company officers carry saber and 
face to the center. At the command march, they close to the center and 
face to the front; the adjutant turns about and takes his post. 

The officers having closed and faced to the front, the senior 
commands: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH. The officers advance, the band 
playing; the left officer of the center or right center company is the 
guide, and marches on the major; the officers are halted at 6 paces from 
the major by the senior who comm^ands: 1. Officers, 2. HALT. They 
halt and salute, returning to the carry saber with the major. The major 
then gives such instructions as he deems necessary, and commands: 
1. Officers, 2. POSTS, 3. MARCH. 

At the command posts, company officers face about. 

At the command march, they step off with guide as before, and 
the senior commands: 1. Officers, 2. HALT, so as to halt 3 paces from 
the line; he then adds: 1. Posts, 2. MARCH. 

At the command posts, officers face outward and, at the com- 
mand march, step off in succession at 4 paces distance, resume their 
posts and order saber; the lieutenants march directly to their posts in 
rear of tlieir companies. 

The music ceases when all officers have resumed their posts. 

The major then commands: 1. Pass in review, 2. Squads right, 
3. MARCH, and returns saber. 

The battalion marches according to the principles of review; 
when the last company has passed, the ceremiony is concluded. 

The band continues to play while the companies are in march 
upon the parade ground. Companies are formed in column of squads, 
without halting, and are marched to their respective parades by their 
captains. 

When the company officers have saluted the major, he may direct 
them to form line with the staff, in which case they individually move 
to the front, passing to the right and left of the major and staff', halt 
on the line established by the staff, face about, and stand at attention. 
The music ceases when the officers join the staff. The major causes the 
companies to pass in review under the comm^and of their first sergeants 
by the same commands as before. The company officers return saber 
with the major and remain at attention. (734) 

[120] 



305-306 

Regimental Parade 

305. The regiment is formed in line or in line of masses; the for- 
mation having proceeded up to, but not including the present, the parade 
proceeds as described for the battalion, with the following exceptions: 

^ ^Colonel'' is substituted for ' ^ major ^', ** regiment ^^ for ^* bat- 
talion/' in the description, and ''battalions'' for ''battalion" in the 
commands. 

Lieutenants remain in the line of file closers. 

After publishing the orders, the adjutant commands: 1. Officers, 
center, 2. MARCH. 

The company commanders remain at their posts with their com- 
panies. 

The field and staff oflS.cers form one line, closing on the center. 
The senior commands: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH. 

The second major is the guide and marches on the colonel. 

After being dismissed by the colonel, each major moves individ- 
ually to the front, turns Outward, and followed by his staff resumes his 
post by the most direct line. The colonel directs the lieutenant colonel 
to march the regiment in review; the latter moves to a point midway 
between the colonel and the regiment and marches the regiment in re.- 
view as prescribed. If the lieutenant colonel is not present the colonel 
gives the necessary commands for marching the regiment in review. 
(735) 

ESCORTS 
Escort of the Color 

306. The regiment being in line, the colonel details a company, other 
than the color company, to receive and escort the national color 
to i^ts place in line. During the ceremony the regimental color remains 
with the color guard at its post with the regiment. 

The band moves straight to its front until clear of the line of 
field officers, changes direction to the right, and is halted; the designated 
company forms column of platoons in rear of the band, the color bearer 
or bearers between the platoons. 

The escort then marches without music to the colonel's office 
or quarters and is formed in line facing the entrance, the band on the 
right, the color bearer in the line of file closers. 

The color bearer, preceded by the first lieutenant and followed 
by a sergeant of the escort, then goes to obtain the color. 

When the color bearer comes out, followed by the lieutenant 
and sergeant, he halts before the entrance, facing the escort; the lieu- 
tenant places himself on the right, the sergeant on the left of the 
color bearer; the escort presents arms, and the field music sounds to the 
calor; the first lieutenant and sergeant salute. 

[121] 



S07 

Arms are brought to the order; the lieutenant and sergeant re- 
turn to their posts; the company is formed in column of platoons, the 
band taking post in front of the column; the color bearer places him- 
self between the platoons; the escort marches in quick time, with guide 
left, back to the regiment, the band playing; the march is so conducted 
that when the escort arrives at 50 paces in front of the right of the 
regiment, the direction of the march shall be parallel to its front; when 
the color arrives opposite its place in line, the escort is formed in line 
to the left; the color bearer, passing between the platoons, advances 
and halts 12 paces in front of the colonel. 

The color bearer having halted, the colonel, who has taken post 
30 paces in front of the center of his regiment, faces about, commands: 
1. Present, 2. ARMS, resumes his front, and salutes; the field music 
sounds to the color; and the regimental color bearer executes the color 
salute at the command present arms. 

The colonel then faces about, brings the regiment to the order, 
at which the color bearer takes his post with the color company. 

The escort presents arms and comes to the order with the regi- 
ment, at the command of the colonel, after which the captain forms it 
again in column of platoons, and, preceded by the band, m^arches it 
to its place in line, passing around the left flank of the regiment. 

The band plays until the escort passes the left of the line, when 
it ceases playing and returns to its post on the right, passing in rear 
of the regiment. 

The regiment may be brought to a rest when the escort passes 
the left of the line. (736) 

Escort of the color is executed by a battalion according to the 
same principles. (737) 

Escorts of Honor 
307. Escorts of honor are detailed for the purpose of receiving and 
escorting personages of high rank, civil or military. The troops for this 
purpose are selected for their soldierly appearance and superior discip- 
line. 

The escort forms in line, opposite the place where the personage 
presents himself, the band on the flank of the escort toward which it 
will march. On the appearance of the personage, he is received with the 
honors due to his rank. The escort is formed into column of companies, 
platoons or squads, and takes up the march, the personage and his staff 
or retinue taking positions in rear of the column; when he leaves the 
escort, line is formed and the same honors are paid as before. 

When the position of the escort is at a considerable distance 
from the point where the personage is to be received, as for instance, 
where a courtyard or wharf intervenes, a double line of sentinels is 
posted from that point to the escort, facing inward; the sentinels suc- 
cessively salute as he passes and are then relieved and join the escort. 

[122] 



808 

An officer is appointed to attend him and bear such communica- 
tion as he may have to make to the commander of the escort. (738) 

Funeral Escort 
308. The composition and strength of the escort are prescribed in 
Army Regulations, 

The escort is formed opposite the quarters of the deceased; the 
band on that jfilank of the escort toward which it is to march. 

Upon the appearance of the coffin, the commander commands: 
1. Present, 2. ARMS, and the band plays an appropriate air; arms are 
then brought to the order. 

The escort is next formed into column of companies, platoons, 
or squads. If the escort be small, it may be marched in line. The pro- 
cession is formed in the following order: 1. Music, 2. Escort, 3. Clergy, 
4. CoflBn and pallbearers, 5. Mourners, 6. Members of the former command 
of the deceased, 7. Other ofacers and enlisted men, 8. Distinguished 
persons, 9. Delegations, 10. Societies, 11. Civilians. Officers and enlisted 
men (Nos. 6 and 7), with side arms, are in the order of rank, seniors 
in front. 

The procession being formed, the commander of the escort puts 
it in march. 

The escort marches slowly to solemn music; the column having 
arrived opposite the grave, line is formed facing it. 

The coffin is therr carried along the front of the escort to the 
grave; arms are presented, the music plays an appropriate air; the 
coffin having been placed over the grave, the music ceases and arms 
are brought to the order. 

The commander next commands: 1. Parade, 2, BEST. The escort 
executes parade rest, officers and men inclining the head. 

When the funeral services are completed and the coffin lowered 
into the grave the commander causes the escort to resume attention 
and fire three rounds of blank cartridges, the muzzles of the pieces 
being elevated. When the escort is greater than a battalion, one bat- 
talion is designated to fire the volleys. 

A musician then sounds taps. 

The escort is then formed into column, marched in quick time to 
the point where it was assembled, and dismissed. 

The band does not play until it has left the inclosure. 

When the distance to the place of interment is considerable, the 
escort, after having left the camp or garrision, may march at ease in 
quick time until it approaches the burial ground, when it is brought to 
attention. The music does not play while marching at ease. 

In marching at attention, the field music may alternate with the 
band in playing. (739) 

When arms are presented at the funeral of a person entitled to 
any of the following honors, the band plays the prescribed national air, 

[123] 



809 

or the field music sounds to the color, march, flourishes, or ruffles, ac- 
cording to the rank of the deceased, after which the- band plays an 
appropriate air. The commander of the escort, in forming column, gives 
the appropriate commands for the different arms. (740) 

At the funeral of a mounted officer or enlisted man, his horse, 
in mourning caparison, follows the hearse. (741) 

Should the entrance of the cemetery prevent the hearse accom- 
panying the escort till the latter halts at the grave, the column is halted 
at the entrance long enough to take the coffin from the hearse, when the 
column is again put in march. The Cavalry and Artillery, when unable' 
to enter the inclosure, turn out of the column, face the column, and 
salute the remains as they pass. (742) 

When necessary to escort the remains from the quarters of the 
deceased to the church before the funeral service, arms are presented 
upon receiving the remains at the quarters and also as they are borne 
into the church. (743) 

The commander of the escort, previous to the funeral, gives the 
clergyman and pallbearers all needful directions. (744) 

INSPECTIONS 
Company Inspection 
309. Being in line at a halt: 1. Open ranks, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march the front rank executes right dress; 
the rear rank and the file closers march backward 4 steps, halt, and 
execute right dress; the lieuteirants pass around their respective flanks^ 
and take post, facing to the front, 3 paces in front of the center of their 
respective platoons. The captain aligns the front rank, rear rank, and fil© 
closers, takes post 3 paces in front of^the right guide, facing to the left, 
and commands: 1. Front, 2. PREPARE FOR INSPECTION. 

At the second command the lieutenants carry saber; the captain 
returns saber and inspects them, after which they face about, order 
saber, and stand at ease; upon the completion of the inspection they 
carry saber, face about, a,nd order saber. The captain may direct the 
lieutenants to accompany or assist him, in which case they return saber 
and, at the close of the inspection, resume their posts in front of the 
company, draw and carry saber. 

Having inspected the lieutenants, the captain proceeds to the 
right of the company. Each man, as the captain approaches him, exe- 
cutes inspection arms. 

The captain takes the piece, grasping it with his right hand 
just above the rear sight, the man dropping his hands. The captain in- 
spects the piece, and, with the hand ^nd piece in the same position as 
in receiving it, hands it back to the man, who takes it with the left 
hand at the balance and executes order arms. 

[124] 



310 

As the captain returns the piece the next man executes inspection 
arms, and so on through the company. 

Should the piece be inspected without handling, each man ex- 
ecutes order arms as soon as the captain passes to the next man. 

The inspection is from right to left in front, and from left to 
right in rear, of each rank and of the line of file closers. 

When approached by the captain the first sergeant executes 
inspection saber. Enlisted men armed with the pistol execute inspection 
pistol by drawing the pistol from the holster and holding it diagonally 
across the body, barrel up, and 6 inches in front of the neck, muzzle 
pointing up and to the left. The pistol is returned to the holster as soon 
as the captain passes. 

Upon completion of the inspection the captain takes post facing 
to the left in front of the right guide and on line with the lieutenants 
and commands: 1. Close ranks, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march the lieutenants resume their posts in line; 
the rear rank closes to 40 inches, each man covering his file leader; the 
file closers close to 2 paces from the rear rank. (745) 

If the company is dismissed, rifles are put away. In quarters 
headdress and accoutrements are removed and the men stand near their 
respective bunks; in camp they stand covered, but without accoutre- 
ments, in front of their tents. 

The captain, accompanied by the lieutenants, then inspects the 
quarters or camp. The first sergeant precedes the captain and calls the 
men to attention on entering each squad room or on approaching the 
tents; the men stand at attention, but do not salute. (746) 

310. If the inspection is to include an examination of the equipment, 
the captain, after closing ranks, causes the company to stack arms, to 
march backward until 4 paces in rear of the stacks and to take intervals. 
He then commands: 1. Unsling Equipment, 2. OPEN PACKS. 

At the first command each man unslings his equipment and 
places it on the ground at his feet, haversack to the front, end of the 
pack 1 foot in front of toes. ' 

At the second command, pack carriers are unstrapped, packs 
removed and unrolled, the longer edges of the pack along the lower edge 
of the cartridge belt. Each man exposes shelter-tent pins; removes 
meat can, knife, fork, and spoon from the meat-can pouch, and places them 
on the right of the haversack, knife, fork, and spoon in the opened 
meat can; removes the canteen and cup from the cover and places them 
on the left side of the haversack; unstraps and spreads out haversack 
so as to expose its contents; folds up the carrier to uncover the cartridge 
pouches; opens same; unrolls toilet articles and places them on the 
outer flap of the haversack; opens first-aid pouch and exposes contents 
to view. Each man then resumes the attention. (PI. VI.) 

[125] 



310 (contd.) 




When the rations are not carried in the haversack the inspection 
proceeds as described, except that the toilet articles and bacon and con- 
diment cans are displayed on the unrolled packs. 

The captain then passes along the ranks and file closers as 
before, inspects the equipments, returns to the right, and commands: 
CLOSE PACKS. 

Each man rolls up his toilet articles, straps up his haversack and 
its contents, replaces the meat can, knife, fork, and spoon, and the 
canteen and cup; closes cartridge pockets and first-aid pouch; rolls up 
and replaces pack in carrier, and, leaving the equipment in its position 
on the ground, resumes the position of attention. 

All equipments being packed, the captain comxmands: SLING 
EQUIPMENT. 

The equipments are slung and belts fastened. n 

The captain then causes the company to assemble and take 



[126] 



311 

arms. The inspection is completed as already explained. (747) (For 
inspection in case of troops equipped with blanket roll and haversack, 
see Par. 346.) 

Should the inspector be other than the captain, the latter, after 
commanding front, adds REST, and faces to the front. When the in- 
spector approaches, the captain faces to the left, brings the company 
to attention, falces to the front, and salutes. The salute acknowledged, 
the captain carries saber, faces to the left, commands: Prepare for in- 
spection, and again faces to the front. 

The inspection proceeds as before; the captain returns saber 
and accompanies the inspector as soon as the latter passes him. (748) 

Battalion Inspection 
311. If there be both inspection and review, the inspection may 
either precede or follow the review. 

The battalion being in column of companies at full distance, all 
officers dismounted, the major commands: 1. Prepare for inspection, 2. 
MARCH. 

At the first command each captain commands: Open ranks. 

At the command march the ranks are opened in each company, 
as in the inspection of the company. 

The field musicians join their companies. 

The drum major conducts the band to a position 30 paces in 
rear of the column, if not already there, and opens ranks. 

The major takes post facing to the front and 20 paces in front 
of the center of the leading company. The staff takes post as if 
mounted. The color takes post 5 paces in rear of the staff. 

Field and staff officers senior in rank to the inspector do not 
take post in front of the column but accompany him. 

The inspector inspects the major, and, accompanied by the latter, 
inspects the staff officers. 

The major then commands: REST, returns saber, and, with his 
staff, accompanies the inspector. 

If the major is the inspector he commands: REST, returns saber, 
and inspects his staff, which then accompanies him. 

The inspector, commencing at the head of the column, then 
makes a minute inspection of the color guard, the noncommissioned 
staff, and the arms, accoutrements, dress, and ammunition of each 
soldier of the several companies in succession, and inspects the band. 

The adjutant gives the necessary commands for the inspection of 
the color guard, noncommissioned staff, and band. 

The color guard and noncommissioned staff may be dismissed 
as soon as inspected. (749) 

As the inspector approaches each company its captain commands: 
1. Company, 2. ATTENTION, 3. PREPARE FOR INSPECTION, and 

[127] 



312-313 

faces to tlie front; as soon as inspected lie returns saber and accom- 
panies the inspector. The inspection proceeds as in company inspection. 
At its completion the captain closes ranks and commands: REST. Unless 
otherwise directed by the inspector, the major directs that the company 
be marched to its parade and dismissed. (750) 

If the inspection will probably last a long time the rear com- 
panies may be permitted to stack arms and fall out; before the in- 
spector approaches they fall in and take arms. (751) 

The band plays during the inspection of the companies. 

When the inspector approaches the band the adjutant com- 
mands: PREPARE FOR INSPECTION. 

As the inspector approaches him each man raises his instrument 
in front of the body, reverses it so as to show both sides, and then 
returns it. 

Company musicians execute inspection similarly. (752) 

At the inspection of quarters or camp the inspector is accom- 
panied by the captain, followed by the other officers or by such of 
them as he may designate. The inspection is conducted as described 
in the company inspection. (753) 

Regimental Inspection 

312. The commands, means, and principles are the same as described 
for a battalion. 

The colonel takes post facing to the front and 20 paces in front 
of the major of the leading battalion. His staff takes post as if mounted. 
The color takes post 5 paces in rear of the staff. 

The inspector inspects the colonel and the lieutenant colonel, 
and accompanied by the colonel, inspects the staff officers. 

The colonel then commands: REST, returns saber, and, with 
the lieutenant colonel and staff, accompanies the inspector. 

If the colonel is the inspector he commands: REST, returns saber, 
and inspects the lieutenant colonel and staff, ail of w^hom then accompany 
him. 

The inspector, commencing at the head of the column, makes a 
minute inspection of the color guard, noncommissioned staff, each bat- 
talion in succession, and the band. 

On the approach of the inspector each major brings his battalion 
to attention. Battalion inspection follows. (754) 

MUSTES 
Regimental, Battalion, or Company Muster 

313. Muster is preceded by an inspection, and, when practicable, by 
a review. 

The adjutant is provided with the muster roll of the field, staff, 
and band, the surgeon with the hospital roll; each captain with the 
roll of his company. A list of absentees, alphabetically arranged, show- 
ing cause and place of absence, accompanies each roll. (755) 

[128] 



316-817 

Being in column of companies at open ranks, each captain, as 
the mustering officer approaches, brings his company to right shoulder 
arms, and commands: ATTENTION TO MUSTER. 

The mustering officer or captain then calls the names on the roll; 
each man, as his name is called, answers Here and brings his piece to 
order arms. 

After muster, the mustering officer, accompanied by the company 
commanders and such other officers as he may designate, verifies the 
presence of the men reported in hospital, on guard, etc. (756) 

A company may be mustered in the same manner on its own 
parade ground, the muster to follow the company inspection. (757) 



I 



THE COLOE 



316. The word *' color ^' implies the national color; it includes the 
regimental color when botH are present. 

The rules prescribing the colors to be carried by regiments and 
battalions on all occasions are contained in Army Regulations, (766) 

In garrison the colors, when not in use, are kept in the office 
or quarters of the colonel, and are escorted thereto and therefrom by 
the color guard. In camp the colors, when not in use, are in front of 
the colonel's tent. From reveille to retreat, when the weather permits, 
they are displayed uncased; from retreat to reveille and during in- 
clement weather they are cased. 

Colors are said to be cased when furled and protected by the 
oil-cloth covering. (767) 

The regimental color salutes in the ceremony of escort of the 
color, and when saluting an officer entitled to the honor, but in no other 
case. 

If marching, the salute is executed when at 6 paces from the 
officer entitled to the salute; the carry is resumed when 6 paces beyond 
him. 

The national color renders no salute. (768) 

The Color Guard 

317. The color guard consists of two color sergeants, who are the 
color bearers, and two experienced privates selected by the colonel. 
The senior color sergeant carries the national color; the junior color 
sergeant carries the regimental color. The regimental color, when car- 
ried, is always on the left of the national color, in whatever direction 
they may face. (769) 

The color guard is formed and marched in one rank, the color 
bearers in the center. It is marched in the same manner and by the 
same commands as a squad, substituting, when necessary, guard for 
squad. (770) 

ti29] 



318 

The color company is the center or right center company of the 
center or right center battalion. The color guard remains with that 
company unless otherwise directed. (771) 

In line the color guard is in the interval between the inner 
guides of the right and left center companies. 

In line of columns or in close line, the color guard is midway 
between the right and left center companies and on line with the cap- 
tains. 

In column of companies or platoons the color guard is midway 
between the color company and the company in rear of the color com- 
pany and equidistant from the flanks of the column. 

In close column the color guard is on the flank of the color com- 
pany. 

In column of squads the color guard is in the column between the 
color company and the company originally on its left. 

When the regiment is formed in line of masses for ceremonies, 
the color guard forms on the left of the leading company of the center 
(right center) battalion. It rejoins the color company when the regiment 
changes from line of masses. (772) 

The color guard when with a battalion that takes the battle 
formation, joins the regimental reserve, whose commander directs the 
color guard to join a certain company of the reserve. (773) 

The color guard executes neither loadings nor firings; in render- 
ing honors, it executes all movements in the manual; in drill, all move- 
ments unless specially excused. (774) 

To Eeceive the Color 

318. The color guard, by command of the senior color sergeant, 

presents arms on receiving and parting with the color. After parting 

with the color, the color guard is brought to order arms by command of 

the senior member who is placed as the right man of the guard. (775) 

At drills and ceremonies, excepting escort of the color, the color, 
if present, is received by the color company after its formation. 

The formation of the color company completed, the captain faces 
to the front; the color guard, conducted by the senior sergeant, ap- 
proaches from the front and halts at a distance of 10 paces from the 
captain, who then faces about, brings the company to the present, faces 
to the front, salutes, again faces about and brings the company to the 
order. The color guard comes to the present and order at the command 
of the captain, and is then marched by the color sergeant directly to 
its post on the left of the color company. (776) 

When the battalion is .dismissed the color guard escorts the 
color to the office or quarters of the colonel. (J If) 

[130] 



319-320-321 

Manual of the Color 

319. At the carry the heel of the pike rests in the socket of the 
sling; the right hand grasps the pike at the height of the shoulder. 

At the order the heel of the pike rests on the ground near the 
right toe, the right hand holding the pike in a vertical position. 

At parade rest the heel of the pike is on the ground, as at the 
order; the pike is held with both hands in front of the center of the 
body, left hand uppermost. 

The order is resumed at the command attention. 

The left hand assists the right when necessary. 

The carry is the habitual position when the troops are at a 
shoulder, port, or trail. 

The order and parade rest are executed with the troops. 

The color salute: Being at a carry, slip the right hand up the 
pike to the height of the eye then lower the pike by straightening the 
arm to the front. (778) 

THE BAND 

320. The band is formed in two or more ranks, with sufficient inter- 
vals between the men and distances between the ranks to permit of a 
free use of the instruments. 

The field music, when united, forms with and in rear of the band; 
when the band is not present the posts, movements, and duties of the 
field music are the same as prescribed for the band; when a musician 
is in charge his position is on the right of the front rank. "When the 
battalion or regiment turns about by squads, the band executes the 
countermarch; when the battalion or regiment executes right, left, or 
about face, the band faces in the same manner. 

In marching, each rank dresses to the ri^ht. 

In executing open ranks each rank of the band takes the distance 
of 3 paces from the rank next in front; the drum major verifies the 
alignment. 

The field music sounds the march, flourishes, or ruffles, and to the 
color at the signal of the drum major. (779) 

The drum major is 3 paces in front of the center of the front 
rank, and gives the signals or commands 'for the movements of the 
band as for a squad, substituting in the commands band for squad. (780) 

Signals of the Drum Major 

321. Preparatory to a signal the staff is held with the right hand near 
the head of the staff, hand below the chin, back to the front, ferrule 
pointed upward and to the right. 

Prepare to play: Face toward the band and extend the right 
arm to its full length in the direction of the staff: Play: Bring the arm 
back to its original position in front of the body. 

[131] 



321 (contd.) 

Prepare to cease playing: Extend the right arm to its full length 
in the direction of the staff. Cease playing: Bring the arm back to its 
original position in front of the body. 

To march: Turn the wrist and bring the staff to the front, the 
ferrule pointing upward and to the front; extend the arm to its full 
length in the direction of the staff. 

To halt: Lower the staff into the raised left hand and raise the 
staff horizontally above the head with both hands, the arms extended; 
lower the staff with both hands to a horizontal position at the height 
of the hips. 

To countermarch: Face toward the band and give the signal to 
march. The countermarch is executed by each front-rank man to the 
right of the drum major turning to the right about, each to the left, 
turning to the left about, each followed by the men covering him. The 
drum major passes through the center. 

To oblicLue: Bring the staff to a horizontal position, the head of 
the staff opposite the neck, the ferrule pointing in the direction the 
oblique is to be made; extend the arm to its full length in the direction 
of the staff. 

To march by the right flank: Extend the arm to the right, the 
staff vertical, ferrule upward, back of the hand to the rear. 

To march by the left flank: Extend the arm to the left, the 
staff vertical, ferrule upward, back of the hand to the front. 

To diminish front: Let the ferrule fall into the left hand at the 
height of the eyes, right hand at the height of the hip. 

To increase front: Let the ferrule fall into the left hand at the 
height of the hip, right hand at the height of the neck. 

The march, flourishes, or ruffles: Bring the staff to a vertical 
position, hand opposite the neck, back of the hand to the front, ferrule . 
pointing down. 

To the color: Bring the staff to a horizontal position at the 
height of the neck, back of the hand to the rear, ferrule pointing to 
the left. 

When the band is playing, in marching, the drum major beats 
the time with his staff and supports the left hand at the hip, fingers 
in front, thumb to the rear. 

The drum major, with staff in hand, salutes by bringing his staff 
to a vertical position, head of the staff up and opposite the left shoulder. 

At a halt, and the band not playing, the drum major holds his 
staff with the ferrule touching the ground about 1 inch from toe of i 
right foot, at an angle of about 60°, ball pointing upward to the right, 

[132] 



322 

right hand grasping staff near the ball, back of the hand to the front; 
left hand at the hip, fingers in front, thumb to the rear. (781) 

MANUAL OF THE SABEE 

322. 1. Draw, 2. SABER. 

At the command draw unhook the saber with the thumb and first 
two fingers of the left hand, thumb on the end of the hook, fingers lifting 
the upper ring; grasp the scabbard with the left hand at the upper 
band, bring the hilt a little forward, seize the grip with the right hand, 
and draw the blade 6 inches out of the scabbard, pressing the scabbard 
against the thigh with the left hand. 

At the command saber draw the saber quickly, raising the arm 
to its full extent to the right front, at an angle of about 45** with the 
horizontal, the saber, edge down, in a straight line with the arm; make 
a slight pause and bring the back of the blade against the 
shoulder, edge to the front, arm nearly extended, hand by the side, elbow 
back, third and fourth fingers back of the grip; at the same time hook 
up the scabbard with the thumb and first two fingers of the left hand, 
thumb through the upper ring, fingers supporting it; drop the left hand 
by the side. 

This is the position of carry saber dismounted. 



[133] 



322 (contd.) 




Par. 782. 





Par. 782. 



Par. 784. 



Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber un- 
hook the scabbard before mounting; when mounted, in the first motion 
of draw saber they reach with the right hand over the bridle hand 
and without the aid of the bridle hand draw the saber as before; the 
right hand at the carry rests on the right thigh. 

On foot the scabbard is carried hooked up. (782) 



[134] 



S22a 

When piibiisbiDg orders, calling the roll, etc., the saber is held 
suspended from the right wrist by the saber knot; when the saber knot 
is used it is placed on the wrist before drawing saber and taken off 
after returning saber. (783) 

322a. Being at the order or carry: 1. Present, 2. SABER (or ABMS). 

At the command present raise and carry the saber to the front, 
base of the hilt as high as the chin and 6 inches in front of the neck, 
edge to the left, point 6 inches farther to the front than the hilt, thumb 
extended on the left of the grip, all fingers grasping the grip. 

At the command saber, or arms, lower the saber, point in pro- 
longation of the right foot and near the ground, edge to the left, hand 
by the side, thumb on left of grip, arm extended. If mounted, the 
hand is, held behind the thigh, point a little to the right and front of 
the stirrup. 

In rendering honors with troops officers execute the first motion 
of the salute at the command present, the second motion at the command 
arms; enlisted men with the saber execute the first motion at the com- 
mand arms and omit the second motion. (784) 

Being at a carry: 1. Order, 2. SABER (or ARMS). 

Drop the point of the saber directly to the front, point on or 
near the ground, edge down, thumb on back of grip. 

Being at the present saber, should the next command be order 
arms, officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber order 
saber; or the command be other than order arms, they execute carry 
saber. 

When arms are brought to the order the officers or enlisted men 
with the saber drawn order saber. (785) 

The saber is held at the carry while giving commands, march- 
ing at attention, or changing position in quick time. 

When at the order sabers are brought to the carry when arms 
are brought to any position except the present or parade rest. (786) 

Being at the order: 1. Parade, 2. REST. 

Take the position of parade rest except that the left hand is 
uppermost and rests on the right hand, point of saber on or near the 
ground in front of the center of the body, edge to the right. 

At the command attention resume the order saber and the posi- 
tion of the soldier. (787) 

In marching in double time the saber is carried diagonally across 
the breast, edge to the front; the left hand steadies the scabbard. (788) 



[135] 



322a (contd.) 




Par. 785. 



Par. 787. 





Par. 790. 



Par. 788. 

Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber, on 
all duties under arms draw and return saber without waiting for com- 
mand. All commands to soldiers under arms are given with the saber 
drawn. (789) 

Being at a carry: 1. Return, 2. SABEB. 

[136] y . 



At the command return carry the right hand opposite to and 6 
inches from the left shoulder, saber vertical, edge "to the left; at the same 
time unhook and lower the scabbard with the left hand and grasp it at 
the upper band. 

At the command saber drop the point to the rear and pass th« 
blade across and along the left arm; turn the head slightly to the left, 
fixing the eyes on the opening of the scabbard, raise the right hand, 
insert and return the blade; free the wrist from the saber knot (if in- 
serted in it), turn the head to the front, drop the right hand by the side; 
hook up the scabbard with the left hand, drop the left hand by the side. 

Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber, 
when mounted, return saber without using the left hand; the scabbard 
is hooked up on dismounting. (790) 

At inspection enlisted men with the saber drawn execute the 
first motion of present saber and turn the wrist to show both sides of the 
blade, resuming the carry when the inspector has passed. (791) 

MANUAL OF TENT PITCHING 
Shelter Tents 
323. Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands: 
FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS. 

The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks form 
a file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first sergeant 
and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the company; blank filea 
are filled by the file closers or by men taken from the front rank; the 
remaining guide, or guides, and file closers form on a convenient flank. 
Before forming column of platoons, preparatory to pitching tents, the 
company may be redivided into two or more platoons, regardless of the 
size of each. (792) (For old pattern shelter tents, see Par. 347.) 

The captain then causes the company to take intervals as 
described in the School of the Squad, and commands: PITCH TENTS. 

At the command pitch tents, each man steps off obliquely to the 
right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the butt of 
the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the front, barrel to 
the left, and steps back into his place; each front-rank man then draws 
his bayonet and sticks it in the ground by the outside of the right heel 

Equipments are unslung, packs opened, shelter half and pins 
removed; each man then spreads his shelter half, small triangle to the 
rear, flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, the rear-rank man's 
half on the right. The halves are then buttoned together; the guy 
loops at both ends of the lower half are passed through the buttonholes 
provided in the lower and upper halves; the whipped end of the guy 
rope is then passed through both guy loops and secured, this at both 

[137] 



S24 

ends of the tent. Each front-rank man inserts the muzzle of his rifle 
under the front end of the ridge and holds the rifle upright, sling to 
the front, heel of butt on the ground beside the bayonet. His rear- 
rank man pins down the front corners of the tent on the line of bayonets, 
stretching the tent taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye of the front, 
guy rope and drives the pin at such a distance in front of the rifle as 
to hold the rope taut; both men go to the rear of the tent, each pins 
down a corner, stretching the sides and rear of the tent before securing; 
the rear-rank man then inserts an intrenching tool, or a bayonet in its 
scabbard, under the rear end of the ridge inside the tent, the front-rank 
man pegging down the end of the rear guy ropes; the rest af the pins 
are then driven by both men, the rear-rank man working oh the right. 

The front flaps of the tent are not fastened down, but thrown 
back on the tent. 

As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges his equipment 
and the contents of his pack in the tent and stands at attention in front 
of his own half on line with the front guyrope pin. 

To have a uniform slope when the tents are pitched, the guy ropes 
should all be of the same length. In shelter tents camps, in localities where 
suitable material is procurable, tent poles may be improvised and used 
in lieu of the rifle and bayonet or intrenching tool as supports for the 
shelter tent. (793) (See Par. 348.) 

When the pack is not carried the company is formed for shelter 
tents, intervals are taken, arms are laid aside or on the ground, the 
men are dismissed and proceed to the wagon, secure their packs, return 
to their places, and pitch tents as heretofore described. (794) 

Double shelter tents may be pitched by first pitching one tent 
as heretofore described, then pitching a second tent against the opening 
of the first, using one rifle to support both tents, and passing the front 
guy ropes over and down the sides of the opposite tents. The front 
corner of one tent is not pegged down, but is thrown back to permit 
an opening into the tent. (795) 

Single Sleeping Bag 
324. Spread the poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the feet, 
buttoned side to the left; fold the blanket once across its short dimen- 
sion and lay it on the poncho, folded side along the right side of the 
poncho; tie the blanket together along the left side by means of the 
tapes provided; fold the left half of the poncho over the blanket and 
button it together along the side and bottom. (796) (See Par. 351.) 

Double Sleeping Bag 
Spread one poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the feet, 
buttoned side to the left; spread the blankets on top of the poncho; 

[138] 



325-326-327 

tie the edges of the blankets together with the tapes provided; spread a 
second poncho on top of the blankets, buttoned end at the feet, but- 
toned side to the right; button the two ponchos together along both sides 
and across the end. (797) (See Par. 352.) 

To Strike Shelter Tents 

325. The men standing in front of their tents: STRIKE TENTS. 
Equipments and rifles are removed from the tent; the tents are 

lowered, packs m^ade up, and equipments slung, and the men stand at 
attention in the places originally occupied after taking intervals. (798) 
(See Par. 353.) 

Cammon and Wall Tents 

326. Four men pitch each tent. 

Drive a pin to mark the center of the door; spread the tent on 
the ground to be occupied; place door loops over door pin; draw front 
corners taut, align, and peg them down; lace rear door, if necessary; 
draw rear corners taut in both directions and peg them down; the 
four corner guy pins are then driven in prolongation of the diagonals of 
the tent and about 2 paces beyond the corner pins; temporarily loosen 
the front door and the lee corner loops from the pins; insert uprights 
and ridge pole, inserting the pole pins in ridge pole and in eyelets of 
tent and fly; raise the tent; hold it in position; replace lee corner loops, 
and secure corner and fly guy ropes; tighten same to hold poles vertical; 
drive wall pins through the loops as they hang; drive intermediate guy 
pins, aligning them on corner pins already driven. (799) 

The Pyramidal Tent 

327. One squad pitches each tent. 

The corporal drives a pin to mark the center of the door. The 
others of the squad unfold the tent and spread it out on the ground 
to be occupied, pole and tripod underneath. The corporal places the 
door loops over the door pin; one man goes to each corner of the tent; 
the two men in front draw the front corners taut, align the front of 
the tent with the company line of tents, and peg the corners down; 
the two men in rear draw rear corners taut in both directions and peg 
them down. The same four men drive the four corner guy pins in 
prolongation of the diagonals of the tent, about 2 paces beyond the 
corner pins. Meantime, the other men of the squad, having crept under 
the tent, insert the tent pole spindle in top plate, the corporal placing 
the hood in position; the pole is raised and the lower end inserted in 
the tripod socket; the tripod is raised to its proper height. Under the 
supervision of the corporal the men inside the tent shift the tripod and 
the men outside the tent handle the corner guy lines in such manner 
as to erect the tent with the corner eaves directly above the corner 
pins. Each outside man, moving to the left, drives pins for the wall 
loops along one side of the tent and, returning, drives the intermediate 

[139] 



328-329-330-331 

guy pins; in both cases the pins are aligned on the corner pins. The in- 
side men assist. (800) 

Conical Wall Tent 

328. Drive the door pin and center pin 8 feet 3 inches apart. Using 
the hood lines with center pin as center, describe two concentric circles 
with radii 8 feet 3 inches and 11 feet 3 inches. In the outer circle 
drive two door guy pins 3 feet apart. At intervals of about 3 feet 
drive the other guy pin. 

In other respects conical tents are erected practically as in the 
case of pyramidal tents. (801) 

To Strike Common, Wall, Pyramidal, and Conical Wall Tents 

329. STRIKE TENTS. 

The men first remove all pins except those of the four corner 
guy ropes, or the four quadrant guy ropes in the case of the conical wall 
tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in their receptacle. 

One man holds each guy, and when the ground is clear the tent 
is lowered, folded, or rolled and tied, the poles or tripod and pole fastened 
together, and the remaining pins collected. (802) 

To Fold Tents 

330. For folding common, wall, hospital, and storage tents: Spread 
the tent flat on the ground, folded at the ridge so that bottoms of side 
walls are even, ends of tent forming triangles to the right and left; 
fold the triangular ends of the tent in toward the middle, making it 
rectangular in shape; fold the top over about 9 inches; fold the tent in 
two by carrying the top fold over clear to the foot; fold again in two 
from the top to the foot; throw all guys on tent except the second from 
each end; fold the ends in so as to cover about two-thirds of the second 
cloths; fold the left end over to meet the turned-in edge of the right end, 
then fold the right end over the top, completing the bundle; tie with the 
two exposed guys. 

Method of Folding Pyramidal Tent 

331. The tent is thrown toward the rear and the back wall and roof 
canvas pulled out smooth. This may be most easily accomplished by 
leaving the rear-corner wall pins in the ground with the wall loops at- 
tached, one man at each rear-corner guy, and one holding the square 
iron in a perpendicular position and pulling the canvas to its limit away 
from the former front of the tent. This leaves the three remaining 
sides of the tent on top of the rear side, with the door side in the middle. 

Now carry the right -front corner over and lay it on^the left-rear 
corner. Pull all canvas smooth, throw guys toward square iron, and pull 
bottom edges even. Then take the right-front* corner and return to the 
right, covering the right-rear corner. This folds the right side of the 

[140] 



332 

tent on itself, with the crease in the middle and under the front side of 
tent. 

Next carry the left-front corner to the right and back as described 
above; this when completed will leave the front and rear sides of the 
tent lying smooth and flat and the two side walls folded inward, each 
on itself. 

Place the hood in the square iron which has been folded down- 
ward toward the bottom of tent, and continue to fold around the square 
iron as a core, pressing all folds down flat and smooth, and parallel 
with the bottom of the tent. If each fold is compactly made and the 
canvas kept smooth, the last fold will exactly cover the lower edge of 
the canvas. Lay all exposed guys along the folded canvas except the 
two on the center width, which should be pulled out and away from 
bottom edge to their extreme length for tying. Now, beginning at one 
end, fold toward the center on the first seam (that joining the first and 
second widths) and fold again toward the center so that the already 
folded canvas will come to within about 3 inches of the middle width. 
Then fold over to the opposite edge of middle width of canvas. Then 
begin folding from opposite end, folding the first width in half, then 
making a second fold to come within about 4 or 5 inches of that al- 
ready folded; turn this fold entirely over that already folded. Take 
the exposed guys and draw them taut across each other, turn bundle 
over on the under guy, cross guys on top of bundle drawing tight. Turn 
bundle over on the crossed guys and tie lengthwise. 

When properly tied and pressed together this will make a pack- 
age 11 by 23 by 34 inches, requiring about 8,855 cubic inches to store 
or pack. 

Stencil the organization designation on the lower half of the 
middle width of canvas in the back wall. (803) 

MANUAL- OF THE BUGLE 
Morning Calls 
332. First call, guard mounting, full dress, overcoats, drill, stable, 
water, and boots and saddles precede the assembly by such interval as 
may be prescribed by the commanding officer. 

Mess, church, and fatigue, classed as service calls, may also be 
used as warning calls. 

First call is the first signal for formation for roll call and for 
all ceremonies except guard mounting. 

Guard mounting is the first signal for guard mounting. 
The field music assembles at first call and guard mountiag. 
In a mixed command, boots and saddles is the signal to mounted 
troops that their formation is to be mounted; for mounted guard moirnt- 

[141] 



333-3S4-335 

ing or mounted drill, it immediately follows the signal guard mounting 
or drill. 

When full dress or overcoats are to be worn, the full dress or 
overcoat call immediately follows first call, guard mounting, or boots 
and saddles. (804) Formation CaUs 

333. Assembly: The signal for companies or details to fall in. 
Adjutant's call: The signal for companies to form battalion; 

^ also for the guard details to form for guard mounting on the camp or 
garrison parade ground; it follows the assembly at such interval as 
may be prescribed by the commanding officer. 

It is also used as a signal for the battalions to form regiment, 
following the first adjutant's call at such interval as the commanding 
officer may prescribe. 

To the color: Is sounded when the color salutes. (805) 

Alarm Calls 

334. Fire call: The signal for the men to fall in, without arms, to 
extinguish fire. 

To arms: The signal for the men to fall in, under arms, on their 
company parade grounds as quickly as possible. 

To horse: The signal for mounted men to proceed under arms 
to their horses, saddle, mount and assemble at a designated place as 
quickly as possible. In extended order this signal is used to remount 
troops. (806) g^^^.^g ^^^g 

335. Tattoo, taps, mess, sick, church, recall, issue, oificers', captains', 
first sergeants', fatigue, school, and the general. 

The general is the signal for striking tents and loading wagons 
preparatory to marching. _ 

Reveille precedes the assembly for roll call; retreat follows the 
assembly, the interval between being only that required for formation 
and roll call, except when there is parade. 

Taps is the signal for extinguishing lights; it is usually pre- 
ceded by call to quarters by such interval as prescribed by Army Regula- 
tions. 

Assembly, reveille, retreat, adjutant's call, to the color, the 
flourishes, ruffles, and the marches are sounded by all the field music 
united; the other calls, as a rule, are sounded by the musician of the 
guard or orderly musician; he may also sound the assembly when the 
musicians are not united. 

The morning gun is fired at the first note of reveille, or, if 
marches be played before reveille, it is fired at the commencement of 
the first march. 

The evening gun is fired at the last note of retreat. (807) 

[142] 



336-837-338-339 
APPENDIX A 

War Department, 
Office of the Chief of Staff, 

Washington, December 2, 1911, 
The Infantry Drill Eegulations, 1911, have been prepared for the 
use of troops armed with the United States magazine rifle, model 1903. 
For the guidance of organizations armed with the United States maga- 
zine rifle, model 189S, the following alternative paragraphs are pub- 
lished and will be considered as substitute paragraphs for the corres- 
ponding paragraphs in the text: 75 (in part), 96, 98, 99, 134, 139, 141, 
142, 148, and 150. 

By order of the Secretary of War: 

Leonard Wood, 
Major General, Chief of Staff. 

336. ♦ ♦ ♦ 

Third. The cut-off is kept turned down, except when using the 
magazine. (75) 

337. Being at order arms: 1. Unfix, BAYONET. 

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Take the posi- 
tion of parade rest, grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the 
right hand, press the spring with the forefinger of the left hand, raise 
the bayonet until the handle is about 6 inches above the muzzle of the 
piece, drop the point to the left, back of hand toward the body, and, 
glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing between 
the left arm and body; regrasp the piece with the right hand and resume 
the order. 

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the 
bayonet from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard 
in the most convenient manner. 

If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in 
the most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned 
to the original position. 

Fix and unfix bayonet are executed with promptness and reg- 
ularity, but not in cadence. (96) 

338. Being at order arms: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS. 

At the second command, take the position of port arms. (TWO) 
With the right hand open the magazine gate, turn the bolt handle up, 
draw the bolt back and glance at the magazine and chamber. Having 
found them empty, or having emptied them, raise the head and eyes to 
the front. (98) 

339. Being at inspection arms: 1. Order (Right shoulder, port), 2. 
ARMS. 

[143] 



S40-341-342 

At the preparatory command, push the bolt forward, turn the 
handle down, close the magazine gate, pull the trigger, and resume port 
arms. At the command arms, complete the movement ordered. (99) 

340. Pieces being loaded and in the position of load, to execute other 
moyements with the pieces loaded: 1, Lock, 2. PIECES. 

At the command pieces turn the safety lock fully to the right. 

The safety lock is said to be at the ''ready'' when turned to 
the left, and at the ''safe'' when turned to the right. 

The cut-off is said to be "on" when turned up and "of£," when 
turned down. (134) 

341. Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. With dummy (blank or 
ball) cartridges, 2. LOAD. 

At the command load each front-rank man or skirmisher faces 
half right and carries the right foot to the right, about one foot, to 
such position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the 
body; raises or lowers the piece and drops it infco the left hand at the 
balance, left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle at the height of 
the breast. With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt back, 
takes a cartridge between the thumb and first two fingers and places it 
in the receiver; places palm of the hand against the back of the bolt 
handle; thrusts the bolt home with a quick motion, turning down the 
handle, and carries the hand to the small of the stock. Each rear-rank 
man moves to the right front, takes a similar position opposite the in- 
terval to the right of his front-rank man, muzzle of the piece extending 
beyond the front rank, and loads. 

A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held 
as nearly as practicable in the position of load. 

If kneeling or sitting the position of the piece is similar; if 
kneeling the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting the elbows 
are supported by the knees. If lying down the left hand steadies and 
supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt resting on the 
ground, the muzzle off the ground. 

For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying 
down) are designated as that of load. (139) 

342. FILL MAGAZINE. 

Take the position of load, if not already there, open the gate of 
the magazine with the right thumb, take ^ve cartridges froai the box 
or belt, and place them, with the bullets to the front, in the magazine, 
turning the barrel slightly to the left to facilitate the insertion of the 
cartridges; close the gate and carry the right hand to the small of the 
stock. 

To load from the magazine the command from magazine will 
be given preceding that of load; the cut-off will be turned up on coming 
to the position of load. 

[1441 



343-844-345 

To resume loading from the belt the command from belt will 
be given preceding the command load; the cut-off will be turned down 
on coming to the position of load. 

The commands from magazine and from belt, indicating the 
change in the manner of loading, will not be repeated in subsequent 
commands. 

The words from belt apply to cartridge box as well as belt. 

In loading from the magazine care should be taken to push the 
bolt fully forward and turn the handle down before drawing the bolt 
back, as otherwise the extractor will not catch the cartridge in th© 
chamber, and jamming will occur with the cartridge following. 

To fire from the magazine, the command magazine fire 
may be given at any time. The cut-off is turned up and an increased 
rate of fire is executed. After the magazine is exhausted the cut-off is 
turned down and the firing continued, loading from the belt. 

Magazine fire is employed only when, in the opinion of the platoon 
leader or company commander, the maximum rate of fire becomes neces- 
sary. (141) 

343. UNLOAD. 

All take the position of load, turn the cut-off up, if not already 
there, turn the safety lock to the left, and alternately open and close 
the chamber until all the cartridges are ejected. After the last cart- 
ridge is ejected the chamber is closed and the trigger pulled. The cart- 
ridges are then picked up, cleaned, and returned to the box or belt, and 
the piece brought to the order. (142) 

344. CLIP FIRE. 

Turn the cut-off up; fire at will (reloading from the magazine) 
until the cartridges in the piece are exhausted; turn the cut-off down; 
fill magazine; reload and take the position of suspend firing. (148) 

345. CEASE FIRING. 

Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position 
of load, the cut-off turned down if firing from magazine, the cartridge 
is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the trigger is pulled, sights are 
laid down, and the piece is brought to the order. 

Cease firing is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of 
position or to steady the men. (150) 

APPENDIX B 

War Department, 
Office of the Chief ofStaff, 

Washington, December S, 1911, 
Paragraphs 747, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796, 797, and 7§8, Infantry 
Drill Regulations, 1911, apply only to troops equipped with the Infantry 
Equipment, model 1910. For troops equipped under General Orders, No. 23, 

[145] 



346 

War Department, 1906, and orders amendatory thereof, the alternative 
paragraphs published herewith will govern. 

By order of the Secretary of War: 

Leonard Wood, 
Major General, Chief of Staff, 
346. If the inspection is to include an examination of the blanket 
rolls the captain, before dismissing the company and after inspecting the 
file closers, directs the lieutenants to remain in place, closes ranks, 
stacks arms, dresses the company back to four paces from the stacks, 
takes intervals, and commands: 1. Unsling, 2. PACKS, 3. Open, 4. PACKS. 

At the second command each man unslings his roll and places it 
on the ground at his feet, rounded end to the front, square end of shelter 
half to the right. 

At the fourth command the rolls are untied, laid perpendicular to 
the front with the triangular end of the shelter half to the front, opened, 
and unrolled to the left; each man prepares the contents of his roll for 
inspection and resumes the attention. 

The captain then returns saber, passes along the ranks and file 
closers as before, inspects the rolls, returns to the right, draws saber 
and commands: 1. Close, 2. PACKS. 

At the second command each man, with his shelter half smoothly 
spread on the ground with buttons up and triangular end to the front, 
folds his blanket once across its length and places it upon the shelter 
half, fold toward the bottom edge one-half inch from the square end, 
the same amount of canvas uncovered at the top and bottom. He then 
places the parts of the pole on the side of the blanket next the square 
end of shelter half, near and parallel to the fold, end of pole about 6 
inches from the edge of the blanket; nests the pins similarly near the 
opposite edge of the blanket and distributes the other articles carried in 
the roll; folds the triangular end and then the exposed portion of the 
bottom of the shelter half over the blanket. 

The two men in each file roll and fasten first the roll of the 
front and then of the rear rank man. The file closers work similarly 
two and two, or with the front rank man of a blank file. Each pair 
stands on the folded side, rolls the blanket roll closely and buckles the 
straps, passing the end of the strap through both keeper and buckle, 
back over the buckle and under the keeper. With the roll so lying on 
the ground that the edge of the shelter half can just be seen when look- 
ing vertically downward one end is bent upward and over to meet the 
other, a clove hitch, is taken with the guy rope first around the end to 
which it is attached and then around the other end, adjusting the length 
of rope between hitches to suit the wearer. 

As soon as a file completes 4ts two rolls each man places his 
roll in the position it was in after b^ing unslung and stands at attention. 

[146] 



347-348-349 

All the rolls being completed, the captain commands: 1. Sling, 
2. PACKS. 

At the second command the rolls are slung, the end containing 
the pole to the rear. 

The company is assembled, takes arms, and the captain com- 
pletes the inspection as before. (747) 

347. Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands: 
FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS. 

The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks form a 
file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first sergeant 
and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the company; blank 
files are filled by the file closers or by men taken from the front rank; 
the remaining guide or guides, and file closers form on a convenient flank. 
Before forming column of platoons, preparatory to pitching tents, the 
company may be redivided into two or more platoons regardless of the 
size of each. (792) 

348. The captain then causes the company to take intervals' as de- 
scribed in the School of the Squad, and commands: PITCH TENTS. 

At the command pitch tents, each man steps off obliquely to the 
right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the butt of 
the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the front, barrel to 
the left, and steps back into his place; each front-rank man then draws 
his bayonet and sticks it in the ground by the outside of the right heel. 
All unsling and open the blanket rolls and take out the shelter half, 
poles, and pins. Each then spreads his. shelter half, triangle to the 
rear, flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, rear-rank man's half 
on the right. The halves are then buttoned together. Each front- 
rank man joins his pole, inserts the top in the eyes of the halves, and 
holds the pole upright beside the bayonet placed in the ground; his rear 
rank man, using the pins in front, pins down the front corners of the 
tent on the line of bayonets, stretching the canvas taut; he then inserts 
a pin in the eye of the rope and drives the pin at such distance in front 
of the pole as to hold the rope taut. Both then go to the rear of the 
tent; the rear-rank man adjusts the pole and the front-rank man drives 
the pins. The rest of the pins are then driven by both men, the rear- 
rank man working on the right. 

As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges the contents 
of the blanket roll in the tent and stands at attention in front of his 
own half on line with the front guy rope pin. 

The guy ropes, to have a uniform slope when the shelter tents 
are pitched, should all be of the same length. (793) 

349. When the blanket roll is not carried, intervals are taken as 
described above; the position of the front pole is marked with a bayonet 

[147] 



350r351-352 

and equipments are laid aside. The men then proceed to the wagon, 
secure their rolls, return to their places, and pitch tents as heretofore 
described. (794) 

350. To pitch double shelter tent, the captain gives the same com- 
mands as before, except take half interval is given instead of take in- 
terval. In taking interval each man follows the preceding man at 2 
paces. The captain then commands: PITCH DOUBLE TENTS. 

The first sergeant places himself on the right of the right guide 
and with him pitches a single shelter tent. 

Only the odd numbers of the front rank mark the line with the 
bayonet. 

The tent is formed by buttoning together the square ends of two 
single tents. Two complete tents, except one pole, are used. Two guy 
ropes are used at each end, the guy pins being placed in front of the 
corner pins. 

The tents are pitched by numbers 1 and 2, front and rear rank; 
and by numbers 3 and 4, front and rear rank; the men falling in on the 
left are numbered, counting off if necessary. 

All the men spread their shelter halves on the ground the tent 
is to occupy. Those of the front rank are placed with the triangular 
ends to the front. All four halves are then buttoned together, first the 
ridges and then the square ends. The front corners of the tent are pinned 
by the front-rank men, the odd number holding the poles, the even num- 
ber driving the pins. The rear-rank men similarly pin the rear corners. 

While the odd numbers steady the poles, each even number of 
the front rank takes his pole and enters the tent, where, assisted by the 
even number of the rear rank, he adjusts the pole to the center eyes 
of the shelter halves in the following order: (1) The lower half of the 
front tent; (2) the lower half of the rear tent; (3) the upper half of 
the front tent; (4) the upper half of the rear tent. The guy ropes are 
then adjusted. ^■ 

The tents having been pitched, the triangular ends are turned 
back, contents of the rolls arranged, and the men stand at attention, 
each opposite his own shelter half and facing out from the tent. (795) 

351. Omitted. (796) 

352. Omitted. (797) 



[148] 



854 



CHAPTER II 

MANUAL OF THE BAYONET 

(The numbers following the paragraphs are those of the Manual 
of the Bayonet, and references in the text to certain paragraph numbers 
refer to these numbers and not to the numbers preceding the paragraphs.) 
354. The infantry soldier reliea mainly on fire action to disable the 
enemy, but he should know that personal combat is often necessary to 
obtain success. Therefore, he must be instructed in the use of the rifle 
and bayonet in hand-to-hand encounters. (1) 

The object of this instruction is to teach the soldier how to make 
effective use of the rifle and bayonet in personal combat; to make him 
quick and proficient in handling his rifle; to -give him an accurate eye 
and a steady hand; and to give him confidence in the bayonet in offense 
and defense. Whe^ skill in these exercises has been acquired, the rifle 
will still remain a most formidable weapon at close quarters should the 
bayonet be lost or disabled. (2) 

Efficiency of organizations in bayonet fighting will be judged 
by the sldll shown by individuals in personal combat. For this purpose 
pairs or groups of opponents, selected at random from among recruits 
and trained soldiers, should engage in assaults, using the fencing equip- 
ment provided for the purpose. (3) 

Officers and specially selected and thoroughly instructed non- 
commissioned officers will act as instructors. (4) 

Instruction in bayonet combat should begin as soon as the 
soldier is familiar, with the handling of his rifle and will progress, as 
far as practicable, in the order followed in the text. (5) 

Instruction is ordinarily given on even ground, but practice 
should also be had on uneven ground, especially in the attack and 
defense of intrenchments. (6) 

These exercises will not be used as a calesthenic drill. (7) 

The principles of the commands are the same as those given in 
paragraphs 9, 15, and 38, Infantry Drill Eegulations. Intervals and 
distances will be taken as in paragraphs 109 and 111, Infantry Drill 
Regulations, except that, in formations for bayonet exercises, the men 
should be at least four paces apart in every direction. (8) 

Before requiring soldiers to take a position or execute a move- 
ment for the first time, the instructor executes the same for the purpose 
of illustration, after which he requires the soldiers to execute the move- 
ment individually. Movements jprescribed in this manual will not be 
executed in cadence as the attempt to do so results in incomplete execu- 
tion and lack of vigor. Each movement will be executed correctly as 
quickly as possible by every man. As soon as the movements are ex- 

[149] 



354a 

ecuted accurately, the commands are given rapidly, as expertness with 
the bayonet depends chiefly upon quickness of motion. (9) 

The exercises will be interrupted at first by short and frequent 
rests. The rests will be less frequent as proficiency is attained. Fa- 
tigue and exhaustion will be specially guarded against as they prevent 
proper interest being taken in the exercises and delay the progress of 
the instruction. Eests will be given from the position of order arms in 
the manner prescribed in Infantry Drill Regulations, (10) 

THE BAYONET 

Nomenclature and Description 
354a. The bayonet is a cutting and thrusting weapon consist- 
ing of three principal parts, viz, the blade, guard, and gri'p, (11) 

I 
& 

J JSUAKD 

BLADE 




The blade has the following parts: Edge, false edge, back, 
grooves, point, and tang. The length of the blade from guard to point 
is 16 inches, the edge 14.5 inches, and the false edge 5.6 inches. Length 
of the rifle, bayonet fixed, is 59.4 inches. The weight of the bayonet is 
1 pound; weight of rifle without bayonet is 8.69 pounds. The center of 
gravity of the rifle, with bayonet fixed, is just in front of the rear 
sight. (12) 

I. INSTEUCTION WITHOUT THE RIFLE 

The instructor explains the importance of good footwork and 
impresses on the men the fact th^t quickness of foot and suppleness of 
body are as important for attack' and defjjnse as is the ability to parry 
and deliver a strong point or cut. (13) 

All foot movements should be made from the position of guard. 
As far as practicable, they will* be made on the balls of the feet to 
insure quickness and agility. No hard and fast rule can be laid 
down as to the length of the various foot movements; this depends en- 
tirely on the situations occurring in combat. (14) 

The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor 
commands: 

1. Bayonet exercise, 2. GUARD. 

[150] 



354a (contd.) 

At the command guard, half face to the right, carry back and 
place the right foot about once and a half its length to the rear and 
about 3 inches to the right, the feet forming with each other an angle 
of about 60°, weight of the body balanced equally on the balls of the 
feet, knees slightly bent, palms of hands on hips, fingers to the front, 
thumbs to the rear, head erect, head and eyes straight to the front. (15) 

To resume the attention, 1. Squad 2. ATTENTION. The men 
take the position of the soldier and fix their attention. (16) 

ADVANCE. Advance the left foot quickly about once its length 
follow immediately with the right foot the same distance. (17) 

BETIKE. Move the right foot quickly to the rear about once its 
length, follow immediately with the left foot the same distance. (18) 

1. Front,. 2. PASS. Place the right foot quicldy about once its 
length in front of the left, advance the left foot to its proper position 
in front of the right. (19) 

1. Rear, 2. PASS. Place the left foot quickly about once its 
length in rear of the right, retire the right foot to its proper position in 
rear of the left. 

The passes are used to get quickly within striking distance or 
to withdraw quickly therefrom. (20) 

1. Right, 2. STEP. Step to the right with the right foot about 
once its length and place the left foot in its proper relative position. 
(21) 

1. Left, 2. STEP. Step to the left with the left foot about once 
its length and place the right foot in its proper relative position. 

These steps are used to circle around an enemy, to secure a more 
favorable line of attack, or to avoid the opponent's attack. Better 
ground or more favorable light may be gained in this way. In bayonet 
fencing and in actual combat the foot first moved in stepping to the 
right or left is the one which at the moment bears the least weight. (22) 

II. INSTEUCTION WITH THE EITLE 

The commands for and the execution of the foot movements 
are the same as already given for movements without the rifle. (23) 

The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor 
commands: 

1. Bayonet exercise, 2. GUARD. 

At the second command take the position of guard (see par. 
15) ; at the same time throw the rifle smartly to the front, grasp the 
rifle with the left hand just below the lower band, fingers between the 
stock and gun sling, barrel turned slightly to the left, the right hand 
grasping the small of the stock about 6 inches in front of the right 
hip, elbows free from the body, bayonet point at the height of the 
chin. (24) 

[151] 



354a (contd.) 

1. Order, 2. ARMS. 

Bring the right foot up to the left and the rifle to the position 
of order arms, at the same time resuming the position of attention. (25) 

During the preliminary instruction, attacks and defenses will 
be executed from guard until proficiency is attained, after which they 
may be executed from any position in which the rifle is held. (26) 

Attacks 
1. THRUST. 

Thrust the rifle quickly forward to the full length of the left 
arm, turning the barrel to the left, and direct the point of the bayonet 
at the point to be attacked, butt covering the right forearm. At the 
same time straighten the right leg vigorously and throw the weight of 
the body forward and on the left leg, the ball of the right foot always 
on the ground. Guard is resumed immediately without command. 




^13 2 



Par. 24 



[152] 



354a (contd.)* 

The force of the thrust is delivered principally with the right 
arm, the left being used to direct the bayonet. The points at which 
the attack should be directed are, in order of their importance, stomach, 
chest, head, neck, and limbs. (27) 

1. LUNGE. 

Executed in the same manner as the thrust, except that the left 
foot is carried forward about twice its length. The left heel must al- 
ways be in rear of the left knee. Guard is resumed immediately with- 
out command. Guard may also be resumed by advancing the right foot 
if, for any reason, it is desired to hold the ground gained in lunging. In 
the latter case, the preparatory command forward will be given. Each 
method should be practiced. (28) 

1. Butt, 2. STRIKE. 

Straighten right arm and right leg vigorously and swing butt of 
rifle against point of attack, pivoting the rifle in the left hand at about 
the height of the left shoulder, allowing the bayonet to pass to the rear 
on the left side of the head. Guard is resumed without command. 

The points of attack in their order of importance are, head, 
neck, stomach, and crotch. (29) 




Par. 28. 



[153] 



364a (cortd.) 




Par. 29. 



1. Cut, 2. DOWN. 

Execute a quick downward stroke, edge of bayonet directed at 
point of attack. Guard is resumed without command. (30) 

1. Out, 2. RIGHT (LEFT). 

With a quick extension of the arms execute a cut to the right 
(left), directing the edge toward the point attacked. Guard is resumed 
without command. 

The cuts are especially useful against the head, Tjeck, and hands 
of an enemy. In executing left cut it should be remexiibered that the 
false, or back edge, is only 5.6 inches long. The cuts can be executed 
in continuation of strokes, thrusts, lunges, and parries. (31) 

To direct an attack to the right, left, or rear the soldier will 
change front as quickly as possible in the most convenient manner, 
for example: 1. To the right rear, 2. Out, 3. DOWN; 1. To the right, 
2. LUNGE; 1. To the left, 2. THRUST, etc. 

Whenever possible the impetus gained by the turning movement 
of the body should be thrown into the attack. In general this will 
be best accomplished by turning on the ball of the right foot. 

These movements constitute a change of front in which the 
position of guard is resumed at the completion of the movement. (32) 

[154] 



354a (contd.) 

Good judgment of distance is essential. Accuracy in thrusting 
and lunging is best attained by practicing these attacks against rings 
or other convenient openings, about 3 inches in diameter, suitably sus- 
pended at desired heights. (33) 



Tar. 33. 



Par. 36. 



tlS5] 



354a (contd.) 

The thrust and lunges at rings should first be practiced by en- 
deavoring to hit the opening looked at. This should be followed by 
directing the attack against one opening while looking at another. (34) 

The soldier should also experience the effect of actual resistance 
offered to the bayonet and the butt of the rifle in attacks. This will 
be taught by practicing attacks against a dummy. (35) 

Dummies should be constructed in such a manner as to permit 
the execution of attacks without injury to the point or edge of the 
bayonet or to the barrel or stock of the rifle. A suitable dummy can 
be made from pieces of rope about 5 feet 'in length plaited closely to- 
gether into a cable between 6 and 12 inches in diameter. Old rope is 
preferable. Bags weighted and stuffed with hay, straw, shavings, etc., 
are also suitable. (36) 

Defenses. 

In the preliminary drills in the defenses the position of guard 
is resumed, by command, after each parry. When the men have be- 
come proficient, the instructor will cause them to resume the position of 
guard instantly without command after the execution of each parry. (37) 

1. Parry, 2. EIGHT. 

Keeping the right hand in the guard position, move the rifle 
sharply to the right with the left arm, so that the bayonet point is 
about 6 inches to the right. (38) 

1. Parry, 2. LEFT. 

Move the rifle sharply to the left front with both hands so as 
to cover the point attacked. (39) 

1. Parry, 2. HIGH. 

Eaise the rifle with both hands high enough to clear the line of 
vision, barrel downward, point of the bayonet to the left front. 

When necessary to raise the rifle well above the head, it may 
be supported between the thumb and forefinger of the left hand. This 
position will be necessary against attacks from higher elevations, such 
as men mounted or on top of parapets. (40) 

) 



[156] 



354a (contd.) 




Par. 40. 



Tar. 41. 



1. Low parry, 2. RIGHT (LEFT). 

Carry the point of the bayonet down until it is at the height 
of the knee, moving the point of the bayonet sufficiently to the right 
(left) to keep the opponent's attacks clear of the point threatened. 

These parries are rarely used, as an attack below the waist 
leaves the head and body exposed. (41) 



[157] 



354a (contd.) 




Par. 41/ 



Par. 44, 



Parries must not be too wide or sweeping, but sharp, short 
motions, finished with a jerk or quick catch. The hands should, as far 
as possible, be kept in the line of attack. Parries against butt strike 
are made by quickly moving the guard so as to cover the point attacked. 
(42) 

To pro\^ide against attack from the right, left, or rear the soldier 
will change front as quickly as possible in the most convenient manner; 
for example: 1. To the left rear, 2. Parry, 3. HIGH; 1. To the right, 
2. Parry, 3. RIGHT, etc. 

These movements constitute a change of front in which the posi- 
tion of guard is resumed at the completion of the movement. 

In changing front for the purpose of attack or defense, if there 
is danger of wounding a comrade, the rifle should first be brought to a 
vertical position. (43) 

III. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE BAYONET 

1. Club rifle, 2. SWING, 

>Being at order arms, at the preparatory command quickly raise 
and turn the rifle, regrasping it with both hands between the rear sight 

[158] 



354a (contd.) 

and muzzle, barrel down, thumbs around the stock and toward the butt; 
at the same time raise the rifle above the shoulder farthest from the 
opponent, butt elevated and to the rear, elbows slightly bent and knees 
straight. Each individual takes such position of the feet, shoulders, 
and hands as best accords with his natural dexterity. SWENTG. Tighten 
the grasp of the hands and swing the rifle to the front and downward, 
directing it at the head of the opponent and immediately return to the 
position of club rifle by completing the swing of the rifle downward 
and to the rear. Eepeat by the command, SWING. 

The rifle should be swung with sufficient force to break through 
any guard or parry that may be interposed. 

Being at club rifle, order arms is resumed by command. 

The use of this attack against dummies or in fencing is pro- 
hibited. (44) 




Par. 44. 



The position of club rifle may be taken from any position of 
the rifle prescribed in the Manual of Arms. It will not be taken in 
personal combat unless the emergency is such as to preclude the use 
of the bayonet, (45) 

[159] 



354a (contd.) 

IV. COMBINED MOVEMENTS 

The purpose of combined movements is to develop more vigorous 
attacks and more effective defenses than are obtained by the single 
movements; to develop skill in passing from attack to defense and the 
reverse. Every movement to the front should be accompained by an 
attack, which is increased in effectiveness by the forward movement 
of the body. Every movement to the rear should ordinarily be accom- 
panied by a parry and should always be followed by an attack. Move- 
ments to the right or left may be accompanied by attacks or defenses. 
(46) 

Not more than three movements will be used in any combina- 
tion. The instructor should first indicate the number of movements that 
are to be combined as two movements or three movements. The execu- 
tion is determined by one command of execution, and the position of 
guard is taken upon the completion of the last movement only. 

Examples 
Front pass and LUNGE. 
Right step and THRUST. 
Left step and low parry RIGHT. 
Rear pass, parry left and LUNGE. 
Lunge and cut RIGHT. 
Parry right and parry HIGH. 
^ Butt strike and cut DOWN. 
Thrust and parry HIGH. 
Parry high and LUNGE. 
Advance, thrust and cut RIGHT. 

Right step, parry left and cut DOWN. ' / 

To the left, butt strike and cut DOWN. 
To the right rear, cut down and butt STRIKE. (47) 
Attacks against dummies will be practiced. The approach will 
be made against the dummies both in quick time and double time. (48) 

V. PRACTICAL BAYONET COMSAT 

The principles of practical bayonet combat should be taught as 
far as possible during the progress of instruction in bayonet exer- 
cises. (49) 

The soldier must be continually impressed with the extreme 
importance of the offensive due to its moral effect. Should an attack 
fail, it should be followed immediately by another attack before the 
opponent has an opportunity to assume the offensive. Keep the opponent 
on the defensive. If, due to circumstances, it is necessary to take the 
defensive, constantly watch for an opportunity to assume the offensive 
and take immediate advantage of it. (50) 

[160] 

\ 



S54a (eontd.) 

Observe the ground with a view to obtaining the best footing. 
Time for this will generally be too limited to permit more than a single 
hasty glance. (51) 

In personal combat watch the opponent's eyes if they can be 
plainly seen, and do not fix the eyes on his weapon nor upon the point 
of your attack. If his eyes can not be plainly seen, as in night attacks, 
watch the movements of his weapon and of his body. (52) 

Keep the body well covered and deliver attacks vigorously. The 
point of the bayonet should always be kept as nearly as possible in the 
line of attack. The less the rifle is moved upward, downward, to the 
right, or to the left, the better prepared the soldier is for attack or de- 
fense. (53) 

Constantly watch for a chance to attack the opponent's left hand, 
flis position of guard will not differ materially from that described in 
paragraph 24. If his bayonet is without a cutting edge, he will be at a 
great disadvantage. (54) 

The butt is used for close and sudden attacks. It is particularly 
useful in riot duty. From the position of port arms a sentry can strike 
a severe blow with the butt of the rifle. (55) 

. Against a man on foot, armed with a sword, be careful that the 
muzzle of the rifle is not grasped. All the swordsman's energies will be 
directed toward getting past the bayonet. Attact him with short stabbing 
thrusts, and keep him beyond striking distance of his weapon. (56) 

The adversary may attempt a greater extension in the thrust and 
lunge by quitting the grasp of his piece with the left hand and advancing 
the right as far as possible. When this is done, a sharp parry may cause 
him to lose control of his rifle, leaving him exposed to a counter-attack, 
which should follow promptly. (57) 

Against odds a small number of men can fight to best advantage 
by grouping themselves so as to prevent their being attacked from be- 
hind. (58) 

In fighting a mounted man armed with a saber every effort must 
be made to get on his near or left side, because here his reach is much 
shorter and his parries much weaker. If not possible to disable such an 
enemy, attack his horse and then renew the attack on the horseman (59) 

In receiving night attacks the assailant's movements can be best 
observed from the kneeling or prone position, as his approach generally 
brings him against the sky line. When he arrives within attacking dis- 
tance rise quickly and lunge well forward at the middle of his body. (60) 

VI. FENCING EXERCISES 

1 

I Fencing exercises in two lines consist of combinations of thrusts, 

parries, and foot movements executed at command or at will, the oppo- 
I nent replying with suitable parries and returns. (61) 

[161] 



S54a (contd.) 

The instructor will inspect the entire fencing equipment before 
the exercise begins and assure himself that everything is in such condi- 
tion as will prevent accidents. (62) 

The men equip themselves and form in two lines at the order, 
facing each other, with intervals of about 4 paces between files and a 
distance of about 2 paces between lines. One line is designated as num- 
ber 1; the other, number 2. Also as attack and defense. (63) 

The opponents being at the order facing each other, the instructor 
commands: SALUTE. 

Each man, with eyes on his opponent, carries the left hand smart- 
ly to the right side, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers extended 
and joined, forearm horizontal, forefinger touching the bayonet. (Two) 
Drop the arm sm^artly by the side. 

This salute is the fencing salute. 

All fencing exercises and all fencing at will between iiidividuals 
will begin and terminate with the formal courtesy of the fencing salute. 
(64) 

After the fencing salute has been rendered the instructor com- 
mands: 1. Fencing exercise, 2. GXJAED. 

At the command guard each man comes to the position of guard, 
heretofore defined, bayonets crossed, each man 's bayonet bearing lightly 
to the right against the corresponding portion of the opponent's bayo- 
net. This position is known as the engage or engage right. (65) 

Being at the engage right: ENGAGE LEFT. 

The attack drops the point of his bayonet quickly until clear of 
his opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the 
right; bayonets are crossed similarly as in the engaged position, each 
man's bayonet bearing lightly to the left against the corresponding por- 
tion of the opponent's bayonet. (66) 

Being at engage left: ENGAGE RIGHT. 

The attack quickly drops the point of his bayonet until clear of 
his opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the 
left and engages. (67) 

Being engaged: ENGAGE LEFT AND RIGHT. 

The attack engages left and then immediately engages right. (68) 

Being engaged left: ENGAGE RIGHT AND LEFT. 

The attack engages right and then immediately engages left. (69) 

1, Number one, ENGAGE EIGHT (LEFT); 2. Number two, 
COUNTER. . 

Number one executes the movement ordered, as above; number I 
two quickly drops the point of his bayonet and circles it upward to the * 
original position. (70) 

In all fencing while maintaining the pressure in the engage, a 
certain freedom of motion of the rifle is allowable, consisting of the 

[162] 



S54a (contd.) 

play, or up-and-down motion, of one bayonet against the other. This is 
necessary to prevent the opponent from divining the intended attack. It 
also prevents his using the point of contact as a pivot for his assaults. 
In changing from one engage to the other the movement is controlled by 
the left hand, the right remaining stationary. (71) 

After some exercise in engage, engage left, and counter, exer- 
cises will be given in the assaults. (72) 

Assaults 

The part of the body to be attacked will be designated by name 
as head, neck, chest, stomach, legs. No attacks will be made below the 
knees. The commands are given and the movements for each line are 
first explained thoroughly by the instructor; the execution begins at 
the command assault. Number one executes the attack, and number two 
parries; conversely, at command, number two attacks and humber one 
parries. (73) 

For convenience in instruction assaults are divided into simple 
attacks, counter-attacks, attack on the rifle, and feints. (74) 

Simple Attacks 

Success in these attacks depends on quickness of movement 
There are three simple attacks — the straight, the disengagement, and the 
counter disengagement. They are not preceded by a feint. (75) 

In the straight the bayonet is directed straight at an opening from 
the engaged position. Contact with the opponent's rifle may, or may not, 
be abandoned while making it. If the opening be high or low, contact 
with the rifle will usually be abandoned on commencing the attack. If 
the opening be near his guard, the light pressure used in the engage may 
be continued in the attack. 

Example: Being at the engage right, 1. Number one, at neck 
(head, chest, right leg, etc.), thrust; 2. Number two, parry right; 3. 
ASSAULT. (76) 

In the disengagement contact with the opponent's rifle is aban- 
doned and the point of the bayonet is circled under or over his bayonet or 
rifle and directed into the opening attacked. This attack is delivered by 
one continuous spiral movement of the bayonet from the moment contact 
is abandoned. 

Example: Being at the engage right, 1. Number one, at stomach 
(left chest, left leg, etc.), thrust 2. Number two, parry left (etc.); 
3. ASSAULT. (77) 

In the counter disengagement a swift attack is made into the 
opening disclosed while the opponent is attempting to change the engage- 
ment of his rifle. It is delivered by one continuous spiral movement 
of the bayonet into the opening. 

[163] 



S54a (contd.) 

Example: Being at the engage right, 1. Number two, engage left; 
2. Number one, at chest, thrust; 3. Number two, parry left; 4. ASSAULT. 

Number two initiates the movement, number one thrusts as soon 
as the opening is made, and number two then attempts to parry. (78) 

A counter-attack or return is one made instantly after or in 
continuation of a parry. The parry should be as narrow as possible. This 
makes it more difficult for j:he opponent to recover and counter parry. 
The counter-attack should also be made at, or just before, the full 
extension of the opponent's attack, as when it is so made, a simple 
extension of the arms will generally be sufficient to reach the opponent's 
body. 

Example: Being at engage, 1. Number two, at chest, lunge; 

2. Number one, parry right, and at stomach (chest, head, etc.), thrust; 

3. ASSAULT. (79) 

Attacks on the Rifle 

These movements are made for the purpose of forcing or dis- 
closing an opening into which an attack can be made. They are the 
press, the beat, and the twist. (80) 

In the press the attack quickly presses against the opponent's 
bayonet or rifle with his own and continues the pressure as the attack 
is delivered. 

Example: Being at the engage, 1. Number one, press, and at 
chest, thrust; 2. Number two, parry right; 3. ASSAULT. (81) 

The attack by disengagement is particularly effective following 
the press. 

Example: Being at the engage, 1. Number one, press, and at 
stomach, thrust; 2. Number two, low parry left; 3. ASSAULT. (82) 

The beat is an attack in which a sharp blow struck against 
the opponent's rifle for the purpose of forcing him to expose an opening 
into which an attack immediately follows. It is used when there is 
but slight opposition or no contact of rifles. 

Example : Being at the engage, 1. Number one, beat, and at 
stomach (chest, etc.), thrust; 2. Number two, parry left; 3. ASSAULT. 
(83) 

In the twist the rifle is crossed over the opponent 's rifle or bayonet 
and his bayonet forced downward with a circular motion and a straight 
attack made into the opening. It requires superior strength on the 
part of the attack. 

Example: Being at the engage, 1. Number one, twist, and at 
stomach, thrust; 2. Number two, low parry, left; 3. ASSAULT. (84) 

Feints 
Feints are movements which threaten or simulate attacks and 
are made with a view to inducing an opening or parry that exposes 

[164] 



354a (contd.) 
the desired point of attack. They are either single or double, according 
to the number of such movements made by the attack. (85) 

In order that the attack may be changed quickly, as little force 
as possible is put into a feint. 

Example: Being at the engage, Number one, feint head thrust 
at stomach, lunge; 2. Number two, parry right and low parry right; 
3. ASSAULT. 

Number one executes the feint and then the attack. Number 
two executes both parries. (86) 

In double feints first one part of the body and then another 
is threatened and a third attacked. 

Example: Being at the engage, 1. Number one, feint straight 
thrust at chest; disengagement at chest; at stomach, lunge; 2. Number 
two, parry right, parry left, and low parry left; 3. ASSAULT. (87) 

An opening may be offered or procured by opposition, as in the 
press or beat. (88) 

In fencing exercises every feint should at first be parried. When 
the defense is able to judge or divine the character of the attack the 
feint is not necessarily parried, but may be nullified by a counter feint. 
(89) 

A counter feint is a feint following the opponent's feint or 
following a parry of his attack and generally occurs in combined move- 
ments. (90) 

Combined Movements 

When the men have become thoroughly familiar with the varion^ 
foot movements, parries, guards, attacks, feints, etc., the instructor com- 
bines several of them and gives the commands in quick succession, 
increasing the rapidity and number of movements as the men become 
more skillful. Opponents will be changed frequently. 

1. Example: Being at the engage, 1. Number one, by disengage- 
ment at chest, thrust; 2. Number two, parry left, right step (left foot 
first), and lunge; 3. ASSAULT. 

2. Example: Being at engage left, 1. Number one, press and lunge; 
2. Number two, parry right, left step, and thrust; 3. ASSAULT. 

3. Example: Being at the engage, 1. Number one, by disengage- 
ment at chest, thrust; 2. Number two, parry left, front pass, and at head 
butt strike; 3. Number one, right step; 4. ASSAULT. (91) 

Examples 1 and 2 are typical of movements known as cross 
counters, and example No. 3 of movements known as close counters. (92) 

A chancery is an attack by means of which the opponent is dis- 
armed, which causes him to lose control of his rifle, or which disables 
his weapon. (93) 

When the different combinations are executed with sufficient 
skill the instructor will devise series of movements to be memorized 

[165] 



354a (contd.) 

and executed at the command assault. The accuracy and celerity of 
the movements will be carefully watched by the instructor, with a 
view to the correction of faulty execution. (94) 

It is not intended to restrict the number of movementi, but to 
leave to the discretion of company commanders and the ingenuity of 
instructors the selection of such other exercises as accord vdth the 
object of the drill. (95) 

VII. FENCING AT WILL 

As satisfactory progress is made the instructor will proceed to 
the exercises at will, by which is meant assaults between two men, each 
endeavoring to hit the other and to avoid being hit himself. Fencing 
at will should not be allowed to degenerate into random attacks and 
defenses. (96) 

The instructor can supervise but one pair of combatants at a 
^time. Frequent changes should be made so that the men may learn 
different methods of attack and defense from each other. (97) 

The contest should begin with simple, careful movements, with 
a view to forming a correct opinion of the adversary; afterwards every- 
thing will depend on coolness, rapid and correct execution of the move- 
ments and quick perception of the adversary's intentions. (98) 

Continual retreat from the adversary's attack and frequent dodg- 
ing to escape attacks should be avoided. The offensive shotild be con- 
tinually encouraged. (99) 

In fencing at will, when no commands are given, opponents 
facing each other at the position of order arms, salute. They then im- 
mediately and simultaneously assume the position of guard, rifles engaged. 
Neither man may take the position of guard before his opponent has com- 
pleted his salute. The choice of position is decided before the salute. 
(100) 

The opponents being about two paces apart and the fencing 
salute having been rendered, the instructor commands, at will, 2. AS- 
SAULT, after which either party has the right to attack. To interrupt 
the contest the instructor will command HALT, at which the combatants 
will immediately come to the order. To terminate the contest the in- 
structor will command, 1. Halt, 2. SALUTE, at which the combatants 
will immediately come to the order, salute, and remove their masks. (101) 

When men have acquired confidence in fencing at will, one 
opponent should be required to advance upon the other in quick time 
at charge bayonet, from a distance not to exceed 10 yards, and deliver 
an attack. As soon as a hit is made by either opponent the instructor 
commands, HALT, and the assault terminates. Opponents alternate in 
assaulting. The assailant is likewise required to advance at double time 
from a distance not exceeding 20 yards and at a run from a distance 
not exceeding 30 yards. (102) 

[166] 



354a (contd.) 

The instructor will closely observe the contest and decide doubt- 
ful points. He will at once stop the contest upon the slightest indication 
of temper. After conclusion of the combat he will comment on the 
action of both parties, point out errors and deficiencies and explain how 
they may be avoided in the future. (103) 

As additional instruction, the men may be permitted to wield 
the rifle left handed, that is on the loft side of the body, left hand at the 
small of the stock. Many men will be able to use this method to ad- 
vantage. It is also of value in case the left hand is wounded. (104) 




Par. 104. 



After men have fenced in pairs, practice should be given in 
fencing between groups, equally and unequally divided. When practic- 
able, intrenchments will be used in fencing of this character. 

In group fencing it will be necessary to have a sufficient number 
of umpires to decide hits. An individual receiving a hit is withdrawn 
at once from the bout, which is decided in favor of the group having 
the numerical superiority at the end. The fencing salute is not required 
in group fencing. (105) 

Rules for Fencing at WiHl 
1. Hits on the legs below the knees will not be counted. No hit 
counts unless, in the opinion of the instructor, it has sufficient force 
to disable. 

[1671 



354a (contd.) 

2. Upon receiving a hit, call out ''hit." 

3.^ After receiving a fair hit a counter-attack is not permitted. A 
position of engage is taken. 

4. A second or third hit in a combined attack will be counted only 
when the first hit was not called. 

5. ^ When it is necessary to stop the contest— for example, because of 
breaking of weapons or displacement of means of protection— take the 
position of the order. 

^ 6. When it is necessary to suspend the assault for any cause, it 
will not be resumed until the adversary is ready and in condition to 
defend himself. 

7. Attacks directed at the crotch are prohibited in fencing. 

8. Stepping out of bounds, when established, counts as a hit. (106) 

Suggestions for Fencing at Will 

When engaging in an assault, first study the adversary's posi- 
tion and proceed by false attacks, executed with speed, to discover, if 
possible, his instinctive parries. In order to draw the adversary out 
and induce him to expose that part of the body at which the attack 
is to be made, it is advisable to simulate an attack by a feint and then 
make the real attack. (107) 

Beturn attacks should be frequently practiced, as they are diffi- 
cult to parry, and the opponent is within easier reach and more exposed. 
The return can be made a continuation of the parry, as there is no 
previous warning of its delivery, although it should always be expected. 
Eeturns are made without lunging if the adversary can be reached by 
thrusts or cuts. (108) 

Endeavor to overcome the tendency to make a return without 
knowing where it will hit. Making returns blindly is a bad habit and 
leads to instinctive returns — that is, habitual returns with certain attacks 
from certain parries — a fault which the skilled opponent will soon dis- 
cover. (109) 

Do not draw the rifle back preparatory to thrusting and lunging- 
(110) 

The purpose of fencing at will is to teach the soldier as many 
forms of simple, effective attacks and defenses as possible. Complicated 
and intricate movements should not be attempted. (Ill) 

Hints for Instructors 
The influence of the instructor is great. He must be master of 
Mb weapon, not only to show the various movements, but also to lead 
in the exercises at will. He should stimulate the zeal of the men and 
arouse pleasure in the work. Officers should qualify themselves as in- 
structors by fencing with each other. (112) 

[168] 



354a (^contd.) 

The character of each man, his bodily conformation, and his 
degree of skill must always be taken into account. When the instructor 
is demonstrating the combinations, feints, returns, and parries the 
rapidity of his attack should be regulated by the skill of the pupil and 
no more force than is necessary should be used. If the pupil exposes 
himself too much in the feints and parries the instructor will, by an at- 
tack convince him of his error; but if these returns be to» swiftly or 
too strongly made the pupil will become overcautious and the precision 
of his attack will be impaired. The object is to teach the pupil, not 
to give exhibitions of superior skill. (113) 

Occasionally the instructor should leave himself uncovered and 
fail to parry, in order to teach the pupil to take quick advantages of 
such opportunities. (114) 

VIII. COMPETITIONS 

In competitions between different organizations none but skillful 
fencers will be allowed to participate. (115) 

In contests between two men judges may assign values to hits 
as follows: 

Thrusts 

and 
lunges. 



Stomach . . . i 


4 
3 
3 
2 

1 
1 




1 


Chest 






Head 


2 

2 

1 
1 


3 


Neck 


2 


Legs 




Arms Sii^d hands 









Stepping out of bounds, 4 points. (116) 

When superiority between two men is decided by bouts, each 
bout will be decided by itself, i. e., points won in one bout can not be 
carried over to another. (117) 

Details other than those mentioned above will be arranged by the 
officials of the competition. (118) 



[169] 



355 

CHAPTER III 
MANUAL OF PHYSICAL TRAINING 

(Extracts) 
METHODS 

355. In the employment of the various forms of physical training 

it is necessary that well-defined methods should be introduced in order 
that the object of this training may be attained in the most thorough 
and systematic manner. Whenever it is possible this work should be 
conducted out of doors. In planning these methods the following 
factors must be. considered: 

(a) The condition and physical aptitude of the men. 

(6) The facilities. 

(c) The time. 

(d) Instruction material. 

The question of the physical aptitude and general condition^ etc., of 
the men is a very important one, and it should always determine the 
nature and extent of the task expected of them; never should the work 
be made the determining factor. In general, it is advisable to divide the 
m.en into three classes, viz, the recruit class, the intermediate class, and 
the advanced class. The work for each class should fit the capabilities of 
the members of that class and in every class it should be arranged 
progressively. 

Facilities are necessarily to be considered in any plan of instruc- 
tion, but as most posts are now equipped with better than average 
facilities the plan laid down in this Manual will answer all purposes. 

Time is a decidedly important factor, and no plan can be made 
unless those in charge of this work know exactly how much time they 
have at their disposal. During the suspension of drills five periods a 
week,, each of 45 minutes duration, should be devoted to physical train- 
ing; during the drill period a 15-minute drill in setting-up exercises should 
be ordered on drill days. The time of day, too, is important. When 
possible, these drills should be held in the morning about two hours after 
breakfast, and at no time should they be held immediately before or 
after a meal. 

The proper use of the instruction material is undoubtedly, the 
most important part of an instructor's duty, for it not only means 
the selection of the proper material but its application. Every ex- 
exercise has a function peculiarly its own; in other words, it has a cer- 
tain affect upon a certain part of the body and plays a rSle in the 
development of the men. It is, therefore, the sum of these various 

[1703 



355 (contd.) 

exercises properly grouped that constitutes the method. So far as 
possible, every lesson should be planned to embrace setting-up exercises 
that call into action all parts of the body, applied gymnastics, apparatus 
work, and exercises that develop coordination and skill, sueh as jump- 
ing and vaulting. 

The best results are obtained when these exercises which affect 
the extensor muscles chiefly are followed by those affecting the flexors; 
i. e., flexion should always be followed by extension, or vice versa. It 
is also advisable that a movement requiring a considerable amount of 
muscular exertion should be followed by one in which this exertion is 
reduced to a minimum. As a rule, especially in the setting-up exercises, 
one portion of the body should not be exercised successively; thus, 
arm exercises should be followed by a trunk exercise, and that in turn 
by a leg, shoulder, and neck exercise. 

The following program of a week's work illustrates the applica- 
tion of the instruction material as described above: each drill is of 
45 minutes duration: 

First Day's Program 

1. MarcLing*in quick and double time (5 minutes). 

2. Setting-up exercises (15 minutes). 

3. Applied gymnastics, flexor work, horizontal bar (15 minutes). 

4. Jumping exercises. (8 minutes). 

5. Trunk and arm stretching exercises in conjunction with breath • 

ing exercises (2 minutes). 

Second Day's Program 

1. Exercises in marching, combined with arm and leg exercises 

(10 minutes). 

2. Setting-up exercises, chiefly trunk exeraises (5 minutes). 

3. Applied gymnastics, extensor work, parallel bars (15 minutes). 

4. Vaulting, low vaulting bars (13 minutes). 

5. Stretching and breathing exercises (2 minutes). 

Third Day's Program 

1. Marching in double and quick time (5 minutes). 

2. Setting-up exercises, general work (15 minutes). 

3. Applied gymnastics, fleAr work, rings (15 minutes). 

4. Jumping exercises (8 minutes). 

5. Stretching and breathing exercises (2 minutes). 

Fourth Day's Program 

1. Eunning and walldng (5 minutes). 

2. Setting-up exercises, general work (10 minutes). 

3. Applied gymnastics, extensor work, side horse (15 minutes). 

[171] 



355 (contd.) 

4. Climbing (13 minutes). 

5. StretcMng and breathing exercises (2 minutes). 

Fifth Day's Program 

1. Marching quick time, running, and exercises while marching in 

quick time (10 minutes). 

2. Setting-up exercises, trunk movements (5 minutes). 

3. Applied gymnastics, flexor work, horizontal bar (15 minutes). 

4. Vaulting, side horse vaults (13 minutes). 

5. Stretching and breathing exercises (2 minutes). 

Clubs, dumb-bells, bar bells, wands, or rifles may be substituted 
for the setting-up exercises occasionally, and the gymnastic contests 
may also be used in place of the jumping and vaulting exercises. 

Large numbers may be employed in a body in the setting-up 
exercises and also in the exercises with the clubs, etc. In the applied 
or apparatus work, unless the facilities afford a sufficient number of the 
same kind of apparatus, it is advisable to divide the men into smaU 
squads. 

Officers who have been placed in charge of tliis work must not 
for an instant lose sight of the fact that to them has been intrusted a 
part of the soldier's training which is of great importance, and that 
success or failure is dependent entirely upon themselves. Work as 
in3(J)ortant as this is worthy of the best efforts, and it should never be 
intrusted to those who are not enthusiastic about it. 

Whenever possible the officer in charge should conduct the work 
personally, as in no profession does the individuality and personal in- 
fluence of a leader carry such weight as it does in the military. 

A well-defined program should be mapped out before the drill 
begins, and this should be carried out faithfully. Every day's work 
should dovetail into the next and be progressive. 

Instructors should not fail to do as much as possible themselves, 
as an example is always more impressive than a precept; it will also 
serve to keep the officer in fit condition. 

Where commands are large, the athletic officer should be given 
officer assistants, whom he should train so that they may be able to 
carry out his program intelligently. H officers are not available, he 
should select likely enlisted men and train them to be leaders capable 
of taking charge of a squad. 

The work laid down in this manual should not be followed 
blindly; every instructor should select such portions, and if necessary 
vary them, as in his opinion are productive of the best results under 
the conditions under which he is laboring. 

[1733 



355 (contd.) 

The work should be so conducted that the men are developed 
harmoniously; that is, any tendency to develop one side or one portion 
of the body at the expense of the other should be avoided. 

Insist upon accurate and precise execution of every movement. 
By doing so those other essential qualities, besides strength and en- 
durance — activity, agility, gracefulness, and accuracy — will also be 
developed. 

Exercises which require activity and agility, rather than those 
that require strength only, should be selected. 

It should be constantly borne in mind that these exercises are 
the means and not the end; and if there be a doubt in the mind of the 
instructor as to the effect of an exercise, it is always well to err upon 
the side of safety. Underdoing is rectifiable; overdoing is often not. 
The object of this work is not the development of expert gymnasts, 
but the development of physically sound men by means of a system 
in which the chances of bodily injury are reduced to a minimum. 
When individuals show a special aptitude for gymnastics they may 
be encouraged, within limits, to im.prove this ability, but never at the 
expense of their fellows. 

The drill should be made as attractive as possible, and this can 
best be accomplished by employing the mind as well as the body. 
The movements should be as varied as possible, thus constantly offer- 
ing the men something new to make them keep their minds on their 
work. A movement many times repeated presents no attraction and is 
executed in a purely mechanical manner, which should always be dis- 
countenanced. 

Short and frequent drills should be given in preference to long 
ones, which are liable to exhaust all concerned, and exhaustion means 
lack of interest and benefit. All movements should be carefully ex- 
plained, and, if necessary, illustrated by the instructor. 

The lesson should begin with the less violent exercises, gradually 
working up to those that are more so, then gradually working back to 
the simpler ones, so that the men at the close of the drill will be in an 
nearly a normal condition as possible. 

When one portion of the body is being exercised, care should bo 
taken that the other parts remain quiet as far as the conformation of 
the body will allow. The men must learn to exercise any one part of 
the body independent of the other part. 

Everything in connection with physical training should be such 
that the men look forward to it with pleasure, not with dread, for 
the mind exerts more influence over the human body than all tkt 
gymnastic paraphernalia that was ever invented. 

Exercise should be carried on as much as possible in the opem 
air; at all times in pure, dry air. 



355 (contd.) 

Only those men whom the post surgeon declares to be physically 
qualified and sure to be benefited thereby should be put through a 
course of physicaLtraining. 

Never exercise the men to the point of exhaustion. If there is 
evidence of panting, faintness, fatigue, or pain, the exercise should 
be stopped at once, for it is nature ^s way of saying *'too much." 

By constant practice the men should learn to breathe slowly 
through the nostrils during all exercises, especially running. 

A fundamental condition of exercise is unimpeded respiration. 
Proper breathing should always be insisted upon; *^ holding the breath'* 
and breathing only when it can no longer be held is injurious. Every 
exercise should be accompanied by an unimpeded and, if possible, by an 
uninterrupted act of respiration, the inspiration and respiration of 
which depends to a great extent upon the nature of the exercise. In- 
halation should always accompany that part of an exercise which tends 
to elevate and distend the thorax — as raising arms over head laterally, 
for instance; while that part of . an exercise which exerts a pressure 
against the walls of the ch«st should be accompp-aied by exhalation, as 
for example, lowering arms laterally from shoulders or overhead. 

If after exercising, the breathing becomes labored and dis- 
tressed, it is an unmistakable sign that the work has been excessive. 
Such excessiveness is not infrequently the cause of serious injury to 
the heart and lungs, or to both. In cases where exercise produces 
palpitation, labored respiration, etc., it is advisable to recommend 
absolute rest, or to order the execution of such exercises as will relieve 
the oppressed and overtaxed organ. Leg exercises slowly executed will 
afford great relief. By drawing the blood from the upper to the lower 
extremities they equalize the circulation, thereby lessening the heart's 
action and quieting the respiration. 

Never exercise immediately after a meal; digestion is more im- 
portant at this time than extraneous exercise. 

Never eat or drink immediately after exercise; allow" the body 
to recover its normal condition first, and the most beneficial results 
will follow. If necessary, pure water, not too cold, may be taken in 
small quantities, but the exercise should be continued, especially if in 
a state of perspiration. 

Never, if at all possible, allow the underclothing to dry on the 
body. Muscular action produces an unusual amount of bodily beat; this 
should be lost gradually, otherwise the body will be chilled; hence, 
after exercise, never remove clothing to cool off, but, on the contrary, 
wear some wrap in addition. In like manner, be well wrapped on leav- 
ing the gymnasium. 

Cold baths, especially when the body is heated, as in the case 
after exercising violently, should be discouraged. In individual in- 

[1741 



355 (contd.) 

stances such baths may appear apparently beneficial, or at least not 
injurious; in a majority of cases, however, they can not be used with 
impunity. Tepid baths are recommended. When impossible to bathe, 
the flannels worn while exercising should be stripped off; the body 
sponged with tepid water, and then rubbed thoroughly with^ coarse 
towels. After such a sponge the body should be clothed in clean, 
warm clothing. 

Flannel is the best material to wear next to the body during 
physical drill, as it absorbs the perspiration, protects the body againgt 
drafts and, in a mild manner, excites the skin. When the conditions 
permit it the men may be exercised in the ordinary athletic costume, 
sleeveless shirt, flappers, socks, and gymnasium shoes. 

COMMANDS— SETTING-UP EXERCISES 

COMMANDS 

There are two kinds of commands: 

The preparatory indicates the movement to be executed. 

The commxand of execution causes the execution. 

In the command: 1. Arms forward, 2. RAISE, the words Arms 
forward constitute the preparatory command, and Raise, the command 
of execution. Preparatory commands are printed in bold face, and 
those of execution in CAPITALS. 

The tone of command is animated, distinct, and of a loudness 
proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended. 

The various movements comprising an exercise are executed by 
commands and, unless otherwise indicated, the continuation of -an 
exercise is carried out by repeating the command, which usually takes 
the' form of numerals, the numbers depending upon the number of 
movements, that an exercise comprises. Thus, if an exercise consists of 
two movements, the counts will be one, two; or if it consists of eight 
movements, the counts will be- correspondingly increased; thus every 
movement is designated by a separate command. 

Occasionally, . especially in exercises that are to be executed 
slowly, words rather than numerals are used, and theso must be in- 
dicative of the nature of the various movements. 

In the continuation of an exercise the preparatory command is 
explanatory, the command of execution causes the execution and tho 
continuation is caused by a repetition of numerals denoting the number 
of movements required, or of words describing the movements if words 
are used. The numerals or words preceding the command halt should 
always be given with a rising inflection on the first numeral or word of 
command of the last repetition of the exercise in order to prepare the 
men for the command halt. 

[175] 



355 (contd.) ] 

For example: 

1. Arms to thrust, 2. BAISE, 3. Thrust arms upward, 4. EXER- 
CISE, ONE, TWO, ONE, TWO, ONE, HALT; the rising inflection 
preparatory to the command halt being placed on the ^'one'' preced- 
ing the '*halt/' 

Each command must indicate, by its tone, how that particular 
movement is to be executed; thus, if an exercise consists of two move- 
ments, one of which is to be energized, the command corresponding to 
that movement must be emphasized. 

Judgment must be used in giving commands, for rarely is the 
cadence of two movements alike; and a command should not only in- 
dicate the cadence of an exercise, but also the nature if its execution. 

Thus, many of the arm exercises are short and snappy; hence the 
command should be given in a smart tone of voice, and the interval 
between the commands should be short. 

The leg exercises can not be executed as quickly as those of the 
arms; therefore, the commands should be slightly drawn out and follow 
one another in slow succession. 

The trunk exercises, owing to the deliberateness of execution, 
should be considerably drawn out and follow one another in slow suc- 
cession. 

The antagonistic exercises, where one group of muscles is made 
to antagonize another, tensing exercises, the commands are drawn still 
more. In these exercises words are preferable to numerals. In fact 
it should be the object of the instructor to convey to the men, by the 
manner of his command, exactly the nature of the exercise. 

All commands should be given in a clear and distinct tone of 
voice, articulation should be distinct, and an effort should be made 'to 
cultivate a voice which will inspire the men with enthusiasm and tend 
to make them execute the exercises with willingness, snap, and precisioiv 
It is not the volume, but the quality, of the voice which is necessary 
to successful instruction. 

The Position of Attention 

This is the position an unarmed dismounted soldier assumes 
when in ranks. During the setting-up exercises, it is assumed whenever 
the command attention is given by the instructor. 

Having allowed his men to rest, the instructor commands: 1. 
Squad, 2. ATTENTION. Figs. A and B. 

The words class, section, or company may be substituted for the 
word "squad." 

At the command attention, the men will quickly assume and 
retain tho following position: 

[176] 



355 (contd.) 




-.4 ■ 1. ; 




Fig. a. Fig. B. 

Heels on same line and as near each other as the conformation 
of the man permits. 

Teet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45 de- 
grees. 

Knees straight without stiffness. 

The body erect on the hips, the spine extended throughout its 
entire length. 

The shoulders falling naturally, are forced back until they are 
square. 

Chest arched and slightly raised. 

The arms hang naturally; thumbs along seams of trousers; 
back of hands out and elbows turned back. 

Head erect, chin drawn in so that the axis of the head and 
neck is vertical; eyes straight to the front and, when the nature of 
the terrain permits it, fixed on an object at their own height. 

Too much attention can not be given to this position, and in- 
structors are cautioned to insist that the men accustom themselves to it. 
As a rule, it is so exaggerated that it not only becomes ridiculous, 
but positively harmful. The men must be taught to assume a natural 
and graceful position, one from which all rigidity is eliminated and 

[177] 



355 (contd.) 

from which action is possible without first relaxing muscles that have 
been constrained in an effort to maintain the position of attention. In 
other words, coordination rather than strength should be depended upon. 

In the position described the weight rests principally upon the 
balls of the feet, the heels resting lightly upon the ground. 

The knees are extended easily, but never locked. 

The body is now inclined forward until the front of the thighs is 
directly over the point of the toes; the hips are square and the waist 
is extended by the erection of the entire spine, but never to such a 
degree that mobility of the waist is lost. 

In extending the spine, the chest is naturally arched and the 
abdomen is drawn in, but never to the extent where it interferes with 
respiration. 

In extending the spinal column, the shoulders must not be raised, 
but held loosely in normal position and forced back until the points of 
the shoulders are at right angles with an anterior-posterior plane run- 
ning through the shoulders. 

The chin should be square; i. e., horizontal and forced back 
enough to bring the neck in a vertical plane; the eyes fixed to the 
front and the object on which they are fixed must be at their own 
height whenever the nature of the terrain permits it. 

Whjen properly assumed, a vertical line drawn from the top of 
the head should pass in front of the ear, just in front of the shoulder and 
of the thigh, and find its base at the balls of the feet. 

All muscles should be contracted only enough to maintain this 
position, which at all times should be a lithesome one, that can be 
maintained for a long period without fatigue — one that makes for 
activity and that is based upon a correct anatomical and physicological 
basis. 

Instructors will correct the position of attention of every man 
individually and they will ascertain, when the position has been prop- 
erly assumed, whether the men are ^'on their toes,'' i. e., carrying the 
weight on the balls of the feet, whether they are able to respire prop- 
erly, and whether they find a strain across the small of the back, which 
should be as flat as possible. This should be repeated until the men are 
able to assume the position correctly without restraint or rigidity. 

At the command rest or at ease the men, while carrying out the 
provisions of the drill regulations, should be cautioned to avoid assum- 
ing any position that has a tendency to nullify the object of the posi- 
tion of attention; standing on leg for instance; allowing the shoulders 
to slope forward; drooping the head; folding arms across chest, etc. The 
weight should always be distributed equally upon both legs; the head, 
trunk, and shoulders remain erect and the arms held in a position that 
does not restrict the chest or derange the shoulders. The positions il- 
lustrated here have been found most efficacious. Figs. C. and D. 

[178] 



355 (contd.) 





right. 



Fig. C. Fig. D. 

' FortMATIOXS 

The men form in a single or double rank, the tallest men on the 



The instructor commands: 1. Count off. 

At. this command, all except the right file iexecute ''eyes right'' 
and, beginning on the right, the men in each rank count 1, 2, 3, 4; each 
man turns his head and eyes to the front as he counts. 

The instructor then commands: 1. Take distance, 2. MARCH, 
3. Squad, 4. HALT. 

At the command march, No. 1 of the front rank moves straight 
to the front; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 of the front and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 of 
the rear rank in the order named move straight to the front, each step- 
ping off, so as to follow the preceding man at four paces; the command 
halt is given when all have their distances. 

If it is desired that a less distance than four paces be taken, the 
distance desired should be indicated in the preparatory command. The 
men of the squad may be caused to cover No. 1 front rank by command 
cover. 

The instructor then commands: 1. Right (left), 2. FACE, 8. 
COVER. 



355 (contd.) 

At these commaiids the men face in the direction indicated and 
cover in file. 

To assemble the squad the instructor commands: 1. Right (left), 
2. FACE, 3. Assemble, 4. MARCH. 

After facing and at command march, No. 1 of the front rank 
stands fast, the other members of both ranks resuming their original 
positions, or for convenience in the gymnasium they may be assembled 
to the rear, in which case the, assemblage is made on No. 4 of the rear 
rank. 

Unless otherwise indicated, the guide is always right. 

Special Training 
In addition to the regular squad or class work instructors should, 
when they notice a physical defect in any man, recommend some exercise 
which will tend to correct it. 

The most common physical defects and corresponding corrective 
exercises are noted here. 

Drooping Head 
Exercise the muscles of the neck by bending, turning, and circ- 
ling the head, muscles tense. 

Round and Stooped Shoulders 

Stretch arms sideward from front horizontal, turning palms up- 
ward, muscles tense. 

Swing arms forward and backward, muscles relaxed. 

Circle arms forward and backward slowly, energize backward 
motion, muscles tense; forward motion with muscles relaxed. 

Circle shoulders backward, move them forward first, then raise 
them, then move them backward as far as possible in the raised position, 
muscles tense, and then, lower to normal position, muscles relaxed. 

Weak Back 

Bend trunk forward as far as possible and erect it alowly. 

Bend trunk forward, back arched and head thrown back. 

Bend trunk sideward, without moving hips out of normal posi- 
tion, right and left. 

Lie on floor, face down, and raise head and shoulders. 
Weak Abdomen 

Circle trunk right or left. 

Bend trunk backward or obliquely backward. 

Bend head and trunk backward without moving hips out of nor- 
mal plane. 

Lie on floor, face up, and raise head and shoulders slightly; or 
to sitting position or raise legs slightly; or to a vertical position. 

[180] 



355 (contd.) 
To increase depth and width of chest 
Arm stretchings, sideward and upward, muscles tense. 
Same, with deep inhalations. 

Arm swings and arm circles outward, away from the body. 
Eaise extended arms over head laterally and cross them behind 
the head. 

Breathing exercises in connection with arm and shoulder exer- 
cises. „ 

Starting Positions 

In nearly all the arm exercises it is necessary to hold the arms 
in some fixed position from which the exercises can be most advanta- 
geously executed, and to which position the arms are again returned 
upon completing the exercise. These positions are termed starting 
positions; and though it may not be absolutely necessary to assume 
one of them before or during the employment of any other portion of 
the body, it is advisable to do so, since they give to the exercise a finished, 
uniform, and graceful appearance. 

In the following positions, at the command down, resume the 
attention. Practice in assuming the starting position may be had by 
repeating the commands of execution, such as raise, down. 




Intervals having been taken 
and attention assumed, the instruc- 
tor commands: 

1. 1. Arms forward, 2. RAISE, 3. 
Arms, 4. DOWN. Pig. 1. 

At the command raise, raise 
the arms to the front smartly, ex- 
tended to their full length, till the 
hands are in front of and at the 
height of the shoulders, palms down, 
fingers extended and joined, thumbs 
under forefingers. At Arms, DOWN, 
resume position of attention. 



Fig. 1. 



[181] 



355 (contd.) 




2. 1. Arms sideward, 2. 
EAISE, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN. 

Fig. 2. 

At the command 
raise, raise the arms later- 
ally until horizontal, palms 
down, fingers as in 1. 

The arms are brought 
down smartly without al- 
lowing them to touch the 
body. 




Fig. 3. 



Fig. 2. 



3. 1. Arms upward, 2. 
RAISE, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN. 
Fig. 3. 

At the command raise, 
raise the arms from the sides, 
extended to their full length, 
with the forward movement, 
until they are vertically over- 
head, backs of hands turned 
outward, fingers as in 1. 

This position may also 
be assumed by raising the arms 
laterally until vertical. The 
instructor cautions which way 
he desires it done. 

4. 1. Arms backward, 2. 
CROSS, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN, 
Fig. 4. 



[182] 




Fig. 4. 



355 (cont.) 




At the command cross, 
the arms are folded across the 
back; hands grasping forearms. 

5. 1. Arms to thrust, 2. 
RAISE, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN. Fig. 5. 

At the command raise, 
raise the forearms to the front un- 
til horizontal, elbow forced back, 
upper arms against the chest, 
hands tightly closed, knuckles 
down. 

6. 1. Hands on hips, 2. 
PLACE, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN. Fig. 6. 

At the command place, 
place the hands on the hips, the 
finger tips in line with trouser 
seams; fingers extended and 
joined, thumbs to the rear, elbows 
pressed back. 




Fig. 5. 



Fig. 6. 




Fig. 7.i 
rest lightly on the shoulders, 



7. 1. Hands on 
shoulders, 2. 
PLACE, 3. Arms, 
4. DOWN. Fig. 7. 
At the com- 
mand place, raise 
the forearms to 
the vertical posi- 
tion, palms in- 
ward, without 
moving the upper 
arms; then raise 
the elbows up- 
ward and outward 
until the upper 
arms are horizon- 
tal; at the same 
time bending the 
wrist and allowing 
the finger tips to 

[183] 




Fig. 8. 



356 

8. 1. Fingers in rear of head, 2. LACE, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN. Fig. 8. 

At the command lace, raise the arms and forearms as described 
in 7, and lace the fingers behind the lower portion of the head, elbows 
tvell up and pressed well back. 

These positions should be practiced frequently, and instead of 
recovering the position of attention after each position, the instructor 
may change directly from one to another by giving the ^proper com- 
mands instead of commanding arms, DOWN. 

For instance: To change from the position described in paragraph 
8 to that described in paragraph 9 (having commanded: 1. Hands on 
shoulders, 2. PLACE) he commands: 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE. 

These changes should, however, be made only after the positions 
are thoroughly understood and correctly assumed. 

SETTING-UP EXERCISES - 

356. As has been stated previously (see par. 2), the exercises form 
the basis upon which the entire system of physical training in the service 
is founded. Therefore too much importance can not be attached to 
them. Through the number and variety of movements they offer it is 
possible to develop the body harmoniously with little if any danger of 
injurious results. They develop the muscles and impart vigor and tone 
to the vital organs and assist them in their functions; they develop 
endurance and are important factors in the development of smartness, 
grace, and precision. They should be assiduously practiced. The fact 
that they require no apparatus of any description makes it possible to do 
this out of doors or even in the most restricted room, proper sanitary con- 
ditions being the only adjunct upon which their success is dependent. No 
physical training drill is complete without them. They should always 
precede the more strenuous forms of training, as they prepare the body 
for the greater exertion these forms demand. 

The following series prescribed for the recruit and trained sol- 
dier's instruction is indicated here to illustrate the nature and amount 
and arrangement of work that should be required of each class. At 
the discretion of instructors these exercises may be substituted by 
others of a similar character. Instructors are cautioned, however, to 
employ all the parts of the body in every lesson and to suit the exercise 
as far as practicable to the natural function of the particular part 
of the body which they employ. 

In these lessons only the preparatory command is given here; the 
command of execution, which is invariably Exercise, and the commands 
of continuance, as well as the command to discontinue, having been 
explained in paragraph 6, are omitted. 

[184] 



356 (contd.) 

Every preparatory command should convey a definite description 
of the exercise required; by doing so long explanations are avoided 
and the men will not be compelled to memorize the various movements. 

Recruit Instruction 
First Series 

1. Position of attention, from at ease and rest. 

2. Starting position, Par. 10, Figs. 1 to 8. 

3. 1. Eaise and lower arms to side horizontal. 

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 2. 

The arms rigidly extended are brought to the sides smartly with- 
out coming in contact with the thighs. Inhale on first and exhale on 
second count. 

4. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. QUARTER BEND TRUNK FOR- 
WARD. 

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 9. 

The trunk is inclined forward at the waist about 45° and then 
extended again; the hips are as perpendicular as possible; execute slowly; 
exhale on first and inhale and raise chest on second count. 




Fig. 9. 
5. 1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, S. RAISE SHOULDERS. 

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 10. 

The shoulders are raised as high as possible without deranging 
the position of the body or head and lowered back to position; execute 
briskly; inhale on first and exhale on second count. 

[185] 



356 (contd.) 





6. 



Fig. 10. 

Fig. 11. 

1, Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. QUARTER BEND KNEES. 

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig 11. 

The knees are flexed until the point of the knee is directly 
over the toes; whole foot remains on ground; heels closed; head and 
body erect; execute moderately fast, emphasizing 
the extension; breathe' naturally. 

7. 1. Arms backward, 2. CROSS, 3. RISE ON 
TOES. 

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 12. 

The body is raised smartly until the toes 
and ankles are extended as much as possible; heels 
closed; head and trunk erect; in recovering posi- 
tion heels are lowered gently; breathe naturally. 

8. 1. Breathing exercise, 2. INHALE, 3. EX- 
HALE. 

At inhale the ^r-ms are stretched forward 
overhead and the lu'igs are inflated; at exhale the 
arms are lowered laterally and the lungs deflated; 
execute slowly; repeat four times. 




Fig. 12. 



[186] 



356 (contd.) 




Second Series 



Fig. 13. 



1. Position of attention, as in first series. 

2. Repeat first lesson. 

3. 1. Hands on shoulders, 2. PLACE, 3. EX- 
TEND ARMS FORWARD. 

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times. 

The arn:s are extended forward forcibly, 
palms down, and brought back to position 
smartly, elbows being forced back; exhale on 
first and inhale on second count. 

4. 1. Handr5 on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. BEND 
TRUNK BACKWARD. 

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, Fig. 13. 

The trunk is bent backward as far as pos- 
sible; head and shoulders fixed; knees extended; 
feet firmly on the ground; hips as nearly per- 
pendicular as possible; in recovering care should 
be taken not to sway forward; execute slowly; 
inhale on first and exhale on second count. 

5. 1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. MOVE 



SHOULDERS FORWARD. 




Two counts; repeat 8 
to 10 times, Tig. 14. 

The shoulders are re- 
laxed and moved forward 
and in as far as possible and 
then moved backward with- 
out jerking; head and trunk 
erect; execute slowly; ex- 
hale on first and inhale on 
second count. 

6. 1. Arms backward, 2. 
CROSS, 3. HALF BEND 
KNEES. 

Two counts; repeat 8 
to 10 times, Fig. 15. 

The knees are sep- 
arated and bent halfway to 
the ground, point of knee 
being forced downward; 
head and trunk erect; ex- 
ecute smartly and empha- 




FlG. 14. 

size the extension; breathe naturally. 

[187] 



Fig. 15. 



356 (contd.) 




7. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. 
HALF BEND TRUNK FORWARD. 

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, 
Fig. 16. 

The trunk is inclined forward 
until it is at right angles to the legs, 
hips perpendicular; knees extended; 
head and shoulders fixed; execute mod- 
erately slow; exhale on first and inhale 
and raise chest on second count. 

8. 1. Hands on shoulders, 2. PLACE, 
3. STRIKE ARMS SIDEWARD. 

The arms, knuckles down, hands 
closed, are flung outward forcibly and 
brought back to shoulders smartly; ex- 
ecute fast; breathe naturally. 

9. Breathing exercise, as in first 
lesson. 



1. 



Third Series 
Position of attention, as in first 



Fig. 16. series. 

2. Eepeat second lesson. 

3. 1. Eaise arms overhead laterally. 
Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times. 

Fig. 3. 

The arms, rigidly extended at the el- 
bows, are raised overhead, palms inward, 
smartly and brought down the same way; 
execute moderately fast; inhale on the first 
and exhale on the second count. 

4. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. BEND 
TRUNK SIDEWARD, RIGHT OR LEFT. 

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, 
Fig. 17. 

The trunk, stretched at the waist, is 
inclined sideward, as far as possible; head 
and shoulders fixed; knees extended and feet 
firmly on the ground; execute slowly; inhale 
on first and exhale on second count. 




Fig. 17. 



[188] 



356 (contd.) 




5. 1. Arms to thrust, 2. 
KAISE, 3. BEND HEAD FOR- 
WARD AND BACKWARD. 

Four counts; repeat 6 
to 8 times, Fig. 18. 

The chin is drawn in 
and the head bent forward 
back muscles of neck being 
stretched upward ; shoulders 
remain fixed; in recovering the 
muscles are relaxed; execute 
slowly; inhale and raise chest 
on first and exhale on second 
count. In bending the head 
backward the muscles of the 
aeck are stretched upward; 
breathe as before. 

6. 1. Curl shoulders for- 
ward. 

Two counts; repeat 6 
to 8 times. Fig 19. 




Fig. 19. 



Fig. 18. 

The shoulders relaxed are rolled forward as far as possible; 
arms being rotated forward; they are then rolled backward and the 
arms are rotated backward; execute slowly; exhale on first and inhale 
on second count. 



7. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. FULL 
BEND KNEES. 

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, Fig. 
20. 

The knees are separated and bent as 
much as possible; point of knees forced for- 
ward and downward; heels together; trunk 
and head erect; execute slowly; breathe 
naturally. 




Fig. 20. 



[189] 



356 (contd.) 

8. 1. Hands in rear of head, 2. LACE, 3. On toes, 4. RISE, S^ROOK. 

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times. 

The body is raised on toes and then by short and quick ex- 
tensions and flexions of the toes it is lowered and raised, knees extended; 
heels together and free from the ground; breathe naturally. 

9. Breathing exercise as in first lesson. 




Fig. 21. 




Fourth Series 

1. Eepeat third series. 

2. 1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. THRUST ARMS FORWARD. 

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 21. 

The arms, knuckles up, are thrust forward forcibly; in recover- 
ing the elbows are forced back; execute moderately fast; exhale on first 
and inhale on the second count. 

3. 1. Hands on shoulders, 2. PLACE, 3. TWIST TRUNK SIDE- 
WARD, RIGHT OR LEFT. 

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, Fig. 22. 

The trunk is turned to the right or left as far possible; hips 
as nearly perpendicular as possible; shoulders square and head erect; 
knees extended and feet firm; execute slowly; inhale on first and exhale 
on second count. 

[190] 



356 (contd.) 




Fig. 23. 

The thigh 



4. 1. Arms to thmsl, 
2. RAISE, 3. TURN 
HEAD RIGHT, OR 
LEFT. 

Two counts; re- 
peat 6 to 10 times, 
Fig. 23. 

The head^ chin 
square, is turned to the 
right, or left as far as 
possible, muscles of the 
neck being stretched; 
shoulders remain square; 
execute slowly; breathe 
naturally. 

5. 1. Hands on hips, 
2. PLACE, 3. RAISE 
KNEE. 

Two counts; re- 
peat 10 to 12. times, Fig. 
24. , 




Fig. 24. 



and knee are flexed until they are at right angles, 
thigh horizontal; toes depressed; the right knee is raised at one and the 
left at two; trunk and head erect; execute in cadence of quick time; 
breathe naturally. 







*•■ 



Fig. 25. 
Breathing exercise, as in first lesson. 



6. 1. Fingers in rear of head, 2. LAOE, 
3. FULL BEND TRUNK FORWARD. 

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, 
Fig. 25. 

The trunk is bent forward as far 
as possible; knees extended; feet firm; head 
and shoulders fixed; execute slowly; ex- 
hale on first and inhale on second count. 

7. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. On 
toes, 4. RISE, 5. HOP. 

Two counts; repeat 12 to 16 times. 

The body is raised on toes and the 
hopping is performed with knees extended; 
execute fast; breathe naturally. 



[Ifl] 



356 (contd.) 

Fifth Series 

1. Repeat fourth series. 

2. 1. Arms forward, 2. SAISE, 3. STRETCH ARMS SIDEWARD. 

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, Fig. 26. 

Prom the front horizontal the arms are extended to their fullest 
extent and then stretched sideward, the arms rotating till the palms 
are up; the sideward movement is performed slowly; the recovery re- 
laxed and quick; inhale on first and exhale on the second count. 




Fig. 26. 



[192] 



356 (contd.) 

3. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. BEND TRUNK OBLIQUELY 
FORWARD, RIGHT OR LEFT. 

Two counts; repeat 4 to 8 times, Fig. 27. 

The trunk is turned to the ri*ght and bent forward to the half- 
bend position; shoulders remain square, in the plane of the ground; 
head fixed; knees straight; feet firm; hips as nearly perpendicular as 
possible; execute slowly; exhale on the first and inhale and raise chest 
on second count. 




Fig. 27. 




FiG._28.j 



4. 1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. EXTEND LEG FORWARD. 

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 28. 

The knee and ankle are extended forward with a snap, the 
toes just escaping the ground; all extensor muscles contracted; in re- 
covering relax; trunk and head erect; execute briskly; breathe natu- 
rally. 



[193] 



356 (contd.) 





Fig. 29. ___ 

Fia. 30. 

5. 1. Hands on shoulders, 2. PLACE, 3. MOVE ELBOWS FOR- 
WARD. 

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times^ Mg. 29. 

The elbows are brought together horizontally in front and then 
forced back as far as possible; the forward movement relaxed, the 
backward a stretch not a jerk; execute moderately fast; exhale on 
the first and inhale on the second count. 

6. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. BEND TRUNK FORWARD AND 
BACBIWARD. \ 

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times. 

Bend trunk forward to the half -bend position, Fig. 16, and then 
backward, Fig. 13; execute slowly; exhale on first and inhale on second 
count. 

7. 1. Arms backward, 2. CROSS, 3. RISE ON TOES, RIGHT AND 
LEFT ALTERNATELY. 

Four counts: repeat 10 to 12 times, Fig. 30. 

The body is extended on the toes of the right foot and then 
on those of the left; heels closed; trunk and head erect; execute mod- 
erately fast; breathe naturally. 

8. Breathing exercise, as the first lesson. 



C194] 



356 (contd.) 





Fig. 32. 



Fig. 31. 

Sixth Series 

1. Eepeat fifth series. 

2. 1. Arms forward overhead, 2. RAISE, 3. SWING ARMS DOWN- 
WARD AND UPWARD. 

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 31. 

3. 1. Arms sideward overhead, 2. RAISE, 3. Fingers, 4. LAOE, 
5. BEND TRUNK SIDEWARD, RIGHT AND LEFT. 

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, Fig. 32. 

The arms are fully extended and the body, stretched at the 
waist, is bent sideward to the right and left; knees straight; feet 
firm; head erect; execute slowly; breathe naturally. 

4. 1. Knees to squatting position, hands on hips, 2. BEND, 
3. ROOK. 

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times. 

The knees are bent as in Fig. 20; extend and bend the knees 
in quick succession; trunk and head erect; heels closed; execute mod- 
erately fast; breathe naturally. 

5. 1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. MOVE SHOULDERS FOR- 
WARD, UP, BACK, AND DOWN. 

[195] 



356 (contd.) 

Four counts; repeat 8 to 10 times. 

Tlie shoulders are relaxed and brought forward; in that position 
they are raised; then they are forced back without lowering them; and 
then they me dropped back to position; execute slowly; exhale on the 
first; inhale on the second and third and exhale on the last count. 

6. 1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. THRUST ARMS FORWARD; 
SWING- THEM SIDEWARD, FORWARD, AND BACK TO POSITION. 

Four counts; repeat 8 to 10 times. 

The arms are thrust forward, then relaxed and swung sideward, 
then forward and finally brought back to position, pressing elbows well to 
the rear; execute moderately fast; exhale on the first and third and 
inhale on the second and fourth counts. 




Fig. ^3. 



7. 1. HOP TO SIDE STRADDLE AND SWING ABMS OVER HEAD 
LATERALLY AND RECOVER POSITION OF ATTENTION. 

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 33. 

The distance between the legs is about 30 inches; in alighting 
the t®e« co«m@ in contact with the ground first and knees are bent 



356 (contd.) 

slightly; trunk and head erect; arms extended; execute moderately fast; 
breathe naturally. 

8. Breathing exercises, as in first lesson. 

Trained Soldier's Instruction 
First Series 
1. 1. Stretch arms FORWARD, SIDEWARD, FORWARD AND 
DOWN. 

Four counts; repeat 6 to 8 times. 

The arms, stretched to their utmost, are raised forward hori- 
zontally, then mxoved sideward, knuckles down; in returning and lower- 
ing the arms the muscles are relaxed; trunk and head erect; execute 
first two motions slowly; second two moderately fast; inhale on first 
and second, and exhale on third and fourth counts. 




Fig. 34. 



2. 1. Hands on shoulders, 2. PLACE, 3. HALF BEND TRUNK FOR- 
WARD AND EXTEND ARMS SIDEWARD. 

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times. Fig. 34. 

The trunk is bent as in Fig. 16. and arms are extended forcibly; 
in the recovery the elbows are forced back and the chest raised; execute 
slowly; inhale on first, exhale on second count. 

[197] 



356 (contd.) 




Fig. 35. 



FULL BEND KNEES AND 



3. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLAGE, 
EXTEND AEMS SIDEWARD. 

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, Fig. 35. 

The knees are bent as in 
Fig. 20, and arms are extended 
sideward forcibly; execute mod- 
erately slow; breathe naturally. 
4. 1. Arms sideward, 2. 
RAISE, 3. ROLL SHOULDERS 
AND ARMS FORWARD AND 
BACK. 

Two counts; repeat 6 to 
10 times, Fig. 36. 

The arms are rotated and 
the shoulders rolled forward and 
backward as far as possible; 
execute slowly; exhale on first 
and inhale and raise chest on 
second count. 




L ivjr. oG. 



U98] 



356 (contd.) 

5. 1. Hands on shoulders, 2. PLACE, 3. TWIST TRUNK SIDE- 
WARD RIGHT, OR LEFT, AND EXTEND ARMS SIDEWARD. 

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, Fig. 37. 

The trunk is twisted as in Fig. 22; execute moderately fast; 
inhale on the first and exhale on the second count. 





Fig. 37. 



Fig. 38. 



6. 1. RAISE ARMS AND RIGHT OR LEFT LEG FORWARD, 
MOVE ARMS SIDEWARD AND LEG BACKWARD; MOVE ARMS 
AND LEG FORWARD AND RECOVER. 

Four counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 38. 

On the first count, the arms and legs are raised forward, arms 
horizontal, leg extended; toes depressed; foot at height of knee; on the 
second count the arms are moved smartly to side horizontal and the leg is 
moved backward, knee and toes extended; at three the first position is 
assumed and at four the position of attention; execute moderately 
fast; inhale on first two and exhale on last two counts. 



[199] 



356 (contd.) 

7. 1. Forearms vertical, 2. EAISE, 3. 
EXTEND UPWAED AND RAISE ON 
TOES; RESUME VERTICAL POSITION; 
AND RECOVER POSITION OF ATTEN- 
TION. 

Four counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, 
Fig, 3a. 

The forearms are raised vertically at 
one; at two they are extended upward and 
the body is raised on toes; at three''the first 
position is assumed, and at four the position 
of attention; execute briskly; inhale on first 
two and exhale on last two counts. 

8. Breathing exercise. 

Second Series 

1. Eepeat first series. 

2. 1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. 
THRUST ARMS UPWARD, SWING DOWN- 
WARD AND BACKWARD, SWING UP- 
WARD AND RECOVER. 

Fonr ('onnts: repeat 6 to 10 times, 
Fig. 40. 

The arms 
are thrust up- 
ward forcibly at 
one; at two the 
arms, relaxed, 
are swung down- 
ward to the 
front and back 
as far as pos- 
sible; at three 
they are swung 
upward, and at 
four the position 
of attention is 
resumed; trunk 
and head erect; 
knees extended; 
execute moder- 
ately fast; inhale 
on first three and 
exhale on last 
count. 
Fig. 40. [2001 





Fig. 39. 




Fig. 41. 



356 (contd.) 

3. 1. Hands on shoulders, 2. PLACE, 3. BEND TRUNK BACK- 
WARD AND EXTEND ARMS SIDEWARD, KNUCKLES UP. 

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, Fig. 41. 

The trunk is bent backward as in Fig. 13, and the arms, knuckles 
down, are extended to the side horizontal; head fixed; knees extended; 
feet firm; execute slowly; inhale on first and exhale on second count. 

4. 1. FuU bend 
knees and raise arms 
knuckles down, to 
side horizontal, 2. 
BEND, 3. ROCK, 
AND CIRCLE ARMS 
BACKWARD. 

Two counts; re- 
peat 6 to 10 times, 
Fig. 42. 

The knees, bent 
to the squatting posi- 
tion, are slightly ex- 
tended and flexed as 
in Exercise 4, Sixth 
Lesson, Recruit In- 
struction, and the 
arms are circled back- 
ward in circles of Fig. 42. 

about 12 inches; head and trunk erect; arms extended; execute moder- 
ately fast; breathe naturally. 

5. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. CIRCLE 
TRUNK RIGHT, OR LEFT. 

Six counts; repeat 4 to 6 times, 
Fig. 43. 

The trunk is half forward at one; 
at two it is moved to the right side bend 
position; at three to the back bend; at four 
^o the left bend; at filve to the front bend 
I'osition and raised at six; knees extended; 
feet firm; head fixed; execute slowly; ex- 
hale on first; inhale on second; hold breath 
on third and fourth; exhale on fifth and 
inhale on sixth count. 

6. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. 
SWING RIGHT AND LEFT LEG FOR- 
WARD, BREAST HIGH, AND EXTEND 
Fig. 43. RIGHT AND LEFT ARM FORWARD 

HORIZONTALLY, ALTERNATING RIGHT AND LEFT. 





356 (contd.) ■ 

Four counts; repeat 6 to 10 times, Fig. 44. 

The right leg, knee extended, is swung forward high enough 
to come in contact with the hand; supporting leg extended; body in- 
clined as little as possible; execute moderately fast; breathe naturally. 




Fig. 45 a. Fig. 45 6. 

7. 1. LEANING BEST ON FOUR COUNTS. 
Repeat 6 to 8 times, Fig. 45 a and b. 

[202] 



356 (contd.) 

At one knees are bent to squatting position, hands on the ground 
between knees; at two the legs are extended backward to the leaning 
rest; at three the first position is resumed, and at four the position 
of attention; hands should be directly under shoulders; back arched; 
knees straight; head fixed; execute moderately fast; breathe naturally. 
8. Breathing exercise. 

Third Series 

1. Eepeat second series. 

2. 1. STRETCH ARMS FORWARD, SIDEWARD, UPWARD, SIDE- 
WARD, FORWARD, AND DOWN. 

Six counts; repeat 6 to 10 times. 

First five counts arms are extended as much as possible; in the 
last they are relaxed; execute slowly: inhale on first five counts and ex- 
hale on last. 




Fig. 46. 

3. 1. HALF BEND TRUNK FORWARD AND ROTATE ARMS IN- 
WARD; RAISE AND BEND TRUNK BACKWARD, RAISING AND 
ROTATING ARMS BACKWARD, PALMS UP; RESUME FIRST POSI- 
TION AND RECOVER. 

Four counts; repeat 4 to 8 times, Fig. 46. 

In the first position the body and arms are relaxed; in the 
second the body and arms are tense, Fig. 41; the third position is the 
same as the first, and at four the position of attention is resumed; ex- 
ecute slowly; exhale on first and third and inhale on second and fourth 
counts. 

4. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. RAISE ON TOES, BEND KNEES 
TO SQUATTING POSITION; EXTEND KNEES AND RECOVER. 

Four counts; repeat 6 to 8 times. 

The body is raised on toes slowly at one; at two the kn«es are 
bent slowly to squatting position; at three they are extended slowly 
and at four the starting position is resumed; execute slowly; breathe 
naturally. 

[203] 



356 (contd.) 





Fig. 47. 



Fig. 48. 

5. 1. HOP TO SIDE STRADDLE POSITION, HANDS ON HIPS, 
BEND TRUNK FORWARD AND EXTEND ARMS DOWNWARD, 
FINGERS TOUCHING GROUND; RESUME STRADDLE WITH 
HANDS ON HIPS AND HOP TO ATTENTION. 

Four counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, Fig. 47. 
Execute moderately fast; breathe naturally. 

6. 1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. THRUST ARMS FORWARD; 
SWING RIGHT, (LEFT) ARM UP, LEFT, (RIGHT) DOWN; SWING 
TO FRONT HORIZONTAL AND RECOVER. 

Four counts, or alternating in eight counts; repeat 8 to 10 
times, Fig. 48. 

The thrust and recovery are forcible, the swings brisk but 
relaxed; execute moderately fast; exhale on first and third count and 
inhale on second and fourth. 

7. 1. STEP POSITION FORWARD RIGHT, OR LEFT, AND RAISE 
ARMS TO FRONT HORIZONTAL; LUNGE FORWARD AND SWING 
ARMS TO SIDE HORIZONTAL; RESUME FIRST POSITION AND 
RECOVER POSITION OF ATTENTION. 



[204] 



356 (contd.) 





Fig. 49 b. 



Fig. 4'Ja. 



Four counts; repeat 6 to 10 times, Fig. 49 a and b. 
The right foot, knee extended and toes depressed, is moved 
forward once its length, the toes resting on the ground lightly, the 
weight resting on the left leg, and the arms are raised to the front 
horizontal, at one; at two the right foot is advanced and planted smartly, 
the distance between heels being about 3-foot lengths, and the arms 
are swung to side horizontal; right knee is well bent, left extended; 
trunk and head erect; at three the first position, and at four the position 
of attention are resumed; execute moderately fast;- exhale first and 
third and inhale on second and fourth counts. 
8. Breathing exercise. 

Fourth Series 

1. ^Repeat third series. 

2. 1. Hands on shoulders, 2. PLACE, 3. EXTEND ARMS UPWARD; 
SWING ARMS DOWNWARD LATERALLY, UPWARD LATERALLY, 
AND RECOVER STARTING POSITION. 

Four counts; repeat 6 to 10 times. 

The first and fourth motions are energetic; the second and third 
relaxed; execute moderately fast; inhale on first and third counts and 
exhale on second and fourth. 

3. 1. To side straddle with arms overhead, 2. Hop, 3. BEND TRUNK 
FORWARD AND BACK AND SWING ARMS DOWNWARD AND UP- 
WARD. 

[205] 



356 (contd.) 




Fig. 50. 



Two counts; repeat 6 
to 8 times, Fig. 50. 

Being in the straddle 
position, the body is bent for- 
ward as far as possible and 
the arms are swung between 
the legs; the arms are then 
swung upward and the body 
bent backward; knees ex- 
tended; execute moderately 
fast; exhale on first and in- 
hale on second count. 

4. 1. Arms to thrust, 2. 
RAISE, 3. THRUST ARMS 
SIDEWARD AND LXnsTGE 
SIDEWARD RIGHT AND 
LEFT ALTERNATELY. 

Four counts; repeat 8 
to 10 times, Fig. 51. 




Fig. 51. 



Fig. 52. 



[206] 



356 (contd.) 

The starting position is resumed at two and four; the distance 
of the lunge is three times the length of the feet; supporting leg ex- 
tended; head and trunk erect; execute moderately fast; inhale on first 
and third and exhale on second and fourth counts. 

5. 1. Hands on shoulders, 2. PLACE, 3. BEND TRUNK SIDEWARD 
RIGHT AND EXTEND LEFT ARM OBLIQUELY UPWARD AND 
RIGHT OBLIQUELY DOWNWARD; SWING TRUNK SIDEWARD 
LEFT AND RIGHT AND RECOVER. - 

Four counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, Fig. 52. 

The trunk is bent to the right, the left arm, palm down, is ex- 
tended obliquely upward and the right arm obliquely downward, at 
one; at two the body is bent to the left; at three to the right and at four 
the starting position is resumed; arms extended; knees straight; head 
fixed; execute moderately fast; breathe naturally. 




Fig. 53. 



6. 1. To squatting position, hands on ground, 2. BEND, 3. EXTEND 
RIGHT AND LEFT LEGS BACKWARD, ALTERNATELY. 

Four counts; repeat 6 to 10 times, Fig. 53. 

The squatting position is the starting position, from there the 
right and left legs are extended backward and brought back to the 
squatting position again; execute moderatel}'' fast; breathe naturally. 

7. 1. Hands on shoulders, 2. PLACE, 3. EXTEND ARMS SIDE- 
WARD AND SWING RIGHT AND LEFT LEGS S'IDBWARD ALTER- 
NATELY. 

Four counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 54. 

The legs are extended and swung loosely to the side as high 
as possible, arms being extended with each leg movement; execute mod- 
erately fast; inhale on one and three and exhale on two and four. 

8. Breatliing exercise. 

[207] 



356 (contd.) 




Fig. 54. 



Fifth Series 

This series is composed of three groups, each group containing 
four exercises, and together they form a combination which can be 
adapted to music. 

Each exercise is composed of four movements and should be 
repeated four times, twice to the right and twice to the left, alter- 
nately, except the last, which is repeated in the same direction. The 
third positron always corresponds to the first, and the fourth to the 
position of attention. 

When performed to music it is advisable to <^mploy *Hwo-four'' 
time, allowiDg two beats to every movement, or four measures to an 
exercise, the action occurring on the first beat and a pause in position 
during the second beat. If this is done, and the tempo is made to suit the 
movements, it will be possible to execute the exercises with precision 
and vigor, and slurring a movement for the sake of keeping time will 
be eliminated. Every group should be preceded by an introduction 
of four measures. 

caotj 



856 (contd.) 



Fib ST Group 
First Exercise 





Fig. 56. 



Fig. 55. 



Counts. 

1 — 2. Raise arms overhead laterally aud step position forward right. 
Fig. 55. ^ 

3 — 4. Lunge forward right and swing the arms downward and back 
ward laterally. Fig. 56. 

5 — 6. Resume first position. 

7 — 8. Resume position of attention. 
Repeat left, right, Icfl. 



[209] 



356 (contd.) 



Second Exercise. 





Fiu. 5b, 



Fig. 57. 




Fig. 59. 



1 — 2. Eaise right arm obliquely upward 
to the right, and left arm obliquely back- 
ward to the left, and step position forward 
to the right with the right foot. Fig. 57. 

3 — 4. Lunge obliquely forward to the 
right and swing right arni downward to 
the rear, and left arm obliquely upward. 
Fig. 58. 

i» — 6. Eesume first position. 

7 — 8. Eesume position of attention. 
Eepeat left, right, left. 

1 — 2. Flex arm.s over shoulders with 
lateral motion, knuckles to the rear, hands 
closed, and step position sideward right. 
Fig. 59. 



[210] 




356 (contd.) 

3 — 4. Lunge sideward right 
and extend arms to side hori- 
zontal, knuckles to the rear. 
Fig. 60. 

5 — 6. Eesume first position. 

7 — 8. Eesume position of at- 
tention. 

Kepeat left, right, left. 

Fourth Exercise 
1 — 2. Eaise arms to side 
horizontal and step position 
backward right. Fig. 61. 

3 — 4. Lunge backward right 
and raise arms overhead, 
knuckles out. Fig. 62. 

5 — 6. Eesume first position. 

7 — 8. Eesum-e position of at- 
tention. 

Eepeat left, right, left. 




Fig. 61. 



Fig. 62. < 



356 (eontd.) 



Second Group 
First Exprrise 




Fig. 63. 
1 — 2. Lunge forward right and raise arms to side horizontal. Fig. 63. 
3 — 4. Bend trunk forward and move arms downward. Fig. 64. 
5 — 6. Resume first position. 




356 (contd.) 



-8. Resume position o:fi attention.. 
Repeat left, right, left. 

Second Exercise 




Fig. 65. 



1 — 2. Lunge sideward right and raise right arm obliquely upward, 
and left arm obliquely downward. Fig. 85. 

3 — 4. Bend trunk sideward right and swing left arm upward, knuckles 
out, and right arm downward in rear of body, knuckles oat. Fig. QQ. 

5 — 6. Resume first position. 

7 — 8. Resume position of attention. 
Repeat left, right, left. 



[213} 



356 (contd.) 




Fig. 66. 
Third Exercise 

1 — 2. Lunge obliquely forward to the right, and raise arms overhead 
laterally. Fig. 67. 

3 — L Bend trunk forward and swing arms downward and upward. 
Fig. 68. 

5 — 6. Eesume first position. 

7 — 8. Eesume position of attention. 
Eepeat left, right, left. 



[214] 



356 (contd.) 




Fourth Exercise 

1 — 2. Lunge backward right and 
raise arms to side horizontal, knuck- 
les up. Fig. 69. 

3 — 4. Bend trunk and head back- 
ward and raise arms overhead, palms 
in. Fig. 70. 

5 — 6. Kesume first position. 

7 — 8. Eesume position of atten- 
tion. 

Eepeat left, right, left. 




Fig. 68. 



Fig. 69. 



[2151 



356 (contd.) 



Third Group 
First Exercise 









Fig. 70. 






B 


1 

1 


■ 


M 


! 


1 


1 




m 


1 


H 


i 


1 






I^P^^^^ 


■ 


■ 







1 — 2. Stride forward 
right and flex arms over 
shoulders laterally, hands 
closed, knuckles up. Fig. 
71, 

3—4. Face to the left 
on both heels, bending 
knees and striking arms 
sideward, knuckles down. 
Fig. 72. 

5 — 6. Eesume first po- 
sition. 

7 — 8. Resume position 
of attention. 

Repeat left, right, 
left. 



Fig. 72. 



356 (contd.) 



Second Exercise 




Fig. 73. 
1 — 2. Stride sideward right and raise and circle arms inward, cross- 
ing them above. Fig. 73. 

3 — 4. Bend right knee and trunk obliquely forward, clasp thigh with 
arms. Fig. 74. 

5 — 6. Eesume first x^osition. 
7 — 8. Resume position of attention. 
Repeat left, right, left. 



1217J 



S56 (contd.) 



Third Exercise 




Fig. 75. 




1 — 2. Stride backward right, and raise arms overhead laterally, palms 
in. Fig, 75. 

3 — i. Turn about on both heels, bend left knee and trunk backward 
and lower arms to side horizontal, palms up. Fig. 76. 
5 — 6. Resume first position. 
7 — 8. Besume position of attention. 
Repeat left, right, left. 



[2181 



^iFourtli Exercise 



856 (contd.) 




Fig. 77. 

1 — 2. Bend to the squatting position, hands on the ground. Same 
as Fig. 45a. 

3 — 4. Extend to the leaning-rest with legs straddled. Fig. 77. 
5 — 6. Eesume first position. 
7 — 8. Eesume position of attention. 
Kepeat left, right, left. 
Note. — Length of stride in these exercises should be 28 inches 
between heels. 

Hopping Exercises 
Hopping is executed by raising the body on the balls of the feet 
and forcing the body from the ground by a series of quick extensions 
of the toe and ankle joints; knees remain easily extended, heels together 
and free from the floor. 

Having assumed a position for the arms, the instructor commands: 
1. On toes, 2. RISE, 3. HOP. 

At the command hop, execute one spring, alighting on the balls 
of the feet. Continue by repeating one, two. 

1. Hop and turn to the right or left at every second, fourth or 
sixth hop. 

2. Hop and turn about at every second, fourth, or sixth hop. 
Hop to side straddle in four and Return to attention in four hops. 
Hop to side straddle and continue to hop in that direction. 
Hop to side straddle in one hop and return to attention in next 



3. 

4. 

5. 
hop. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
on left leg, holding the unemployed leg forward, sideward, or backward. 

[219] 



Hop to cross straddle and return to attention in next hop. 
Hop on right leg and hold left forward, sideward, or backward. 
Hop on left leg and hold right forward, sideward, or backward. 
Hop four times on right leg, and then change and hop four times 



356 (contd.) 

10. Same as in Oj hopping twice on each leg. 

11. Same as in 9, hopping once on each leg. 

12. Hop forward, sideward, or backward. 

LEAPIlfG 

Leaping or jumping as a setting-up exercise has for its object the 
raising of the body from 8 to 12 inches from the ground, and there is, 
however, no gaining of ground as in gymnastic or athletic jumping 

At the first command, the arms are raised to the front horizontal 
and the body is elevated on the toes. (See Fig. 1, Jumxping.) 

At the command leap, the arms are swung downward and back 
ward and the knees are slightly bent (See Fig. 2, Jumping); without 
pausing the arms are swung forward again and as they passk through 
the vertical plane the knees are extended and the body is forced from 
the floor. 

The moment the feet leave the floor the knees are extended; feet 
are closed and toes depressed; the arms are in the front horizontal; the 
back is arched and the head is erect. (See Fig. 3, Jumping.) 

In alighting, the balls of the feet touch the floor first, knees 
slightly bent; the latter are quickly extended, however, and the arms 
brought down by the sides and the position of attention is assumed. 

Continue by repeating leap. 

Leaping Exercises 

1. Leap and execute a quarter of a turn to the right or left. 

2. Leap and execute a half turn to the right or left. 

3. Leap and straddle legs sideward (legs are closed) before alighting 

4. Leap and cross straddle, right or left leg forward. 

5. Leap and cross legs, right over left or left over right. 

6. Leap and raise heels. 

7. Leap and raise knees. 

8. Leap and strike feet together. 

9. Leap and strike feet together twice. 

10. Leap and strike feet together three times. 

11. Leap and cross and recross legs. 

12. Leap and raise heels and touch them with hands. 

13. Leap and swing arms sideward. 

14. Leap and swing arms upward. 

15. Leap and circle arms forward. 

16. Leap and circle arms backward. 

17. Leap and circle arms inward. 

18. 'Leap and circle arms outward. 

19. Leap and swing arms upward and execute a whole body turn. 



[220] 



356 (contd.) 
Walkixg axd Marchij^g 

The length of the full step in quick time is 30 inches, measured 
from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120 steps per 
minute. 

Proper posture and carriage have ever been considered very im- 
portant in the training of soldiers. In marching, the head and trunk 
should remain immobile, but without stiffness; as the left foot is carried 
forward the right forearm is swung forward and inward obliquely across 
the body until the thumb, knuckles being turned out, reaches a point 
about the height of the belt plate. The upper arm does not move beyond 
the perpendicular plane while the forearm is swung forward, though 
the arm hangs loosely from the shoulder joint. The forearm swing ends 
precisely at the moment the left heel strikes the ground; the arm is 
then relaxed and allowed to swing down and backward by its own 
weight until it reaches a point where the thumb is about the breadth 
of a hand to the rear of the buttocks. As the right arm swings back, 
the left arm is swung forward with the right leg. The forward motion 
o-f the arm assists the body in marching by throwing the weight forward 
and inward upon the opposite foot as it is planted. The head is held 
erect; body well stretched from the waist; chest arched; and there 
should be no rotary motion of the body about the spine. 

As the leg is thrown forward the knee is smartly extended, the 
heel strildng the ground first. 

The instructor having explained the principles and illustrated the 
step and arm swing, conim^ands: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH — and to halt 
the squad he commands: 1. Squad, 2. HALT. 

In executing the setting-up exercises on the march the cadence 
should at first be given slowly and gradually increased as the men be- 
come more expert; some exercises require a slow and others a faster 
pace; it is best in these cases to allow the cadence of the exercise to 
determine the cadence of the step. 

* The men should march in a single file at proved intervals. The 
command that causes and discontinues the execution should be given 
as the left foot strikes the ground. 

On the march, to discontinue the exercise, command: 1. Quick 
time, 2. MARCH, instead of HALT, as when at rest. 

All of the arm, wrist, finger, and shoulder exercises, and some of 
the trunk and neck, may be executed on the march by the same commands 
and means -as when at rest. 

The following leg and foot exercises are executed at the com- 
mand inarch; the execution always beginning with the left leg or foot, 

1. 1. On toes, 2. MARCH. 

2. 1. On heels, 2. MARCH. 

3. 1. On right heel and left toe, 2. MARCH. 

[221] 



356 (contd.) 

4. 1. On left heel and right toe, 2. MARCH. 

5. 1. On toes with knees stiff, 2. JMAEOH. 

6. 1. Swing extended leg forw^ard, ankle high, 2. MAECH. 

7. 1. Swing extended leg forward, knee high, 2. MARCH. 

8. 1. Swing extended leg forward, waist high, 2. MARCH. 

9. 1. Swing extended leg forward, shoulder high, 2. MARCH. 

10. 1. Raise heels, 2. MARCH. 

11. 1. Raise knees, thigh horizontal, 2. MARCH. 

12. 1. Raise knees, chest high, 2. MARCH. 

13. 1. Circle extended leg forward, ankle high, 2. MARCH. 

14. 1. Circle extended leg forward, knee high, 2. MARCH;, 

15. 1. Circle extended leg forward, v^raist high, 2. MARCH. 

16. 1. Swing extended leg backward, 2. MARCH. 

17. 1. Swing extended leg sideward, 2. MARCH. 

18. 1. Raise knee and extend leg forward, 2. MARCH. 

19. 1. Raise heels ana extend leg forward, 2. MARCH. 

Steps 

In the steps, the rules given above apply, viz, the command 
march given as the left foot strikes the ground, determines the execution, 
which always begins with the left foot, and is continued until the com- 
mand: 1. Quick time, 2. MARCH, is given, when the direct step is 
resumed. 

The different steps are executed at the following commands: 

1. Cross step, 2. MARCH. 

As the legs move forward they are crossed. The body does 
not turn. 

1. Halting step, 2. MARCH. 

The left foot is advanced and planted; the right foot is brought 
directly in rear of the left, resting on the ball only; the right is then 
advanced and planted and the left brought up, and so on. 

1. Poot-balancing step, 2. MARCH. 

The left foot is advanced and planted; the right foot is brought 
up beside it, heels touching; the body is then raised on the toes and 
lowered. The right foot is then advanced and planted and the left 
brought up, and so on. 

1. Continuous change step, 2. MARCH. 

The left foot is advanced and planted; the toes of the right 
are then advanced near the heel of the left in the halting step; the 
left foot is then advanced about half a step (15 inches) and the right 
foot is advanced- with the full step and planted; the toes of the left foot 
are then brought up to the heel of the right foot, which advances a 
half step, when the left foot is advanced a full step, and so on. 

[222] 



856 (contd.) 

1. Knee-rocking step, 2. MARCH. 

As each foot is planted it is accompained by a slight bending 
and extension in the corresponding knee; the other leg remaining fully 
extended; heel raised. 

1. Lunging step, 2. MARCH. 

The length of the step is 45 inches, the knee in advance being 
well bent; the other leg remaining fully extended, heel raised; trunk 
erect. 

1. Leg-balance step, 2. MARCH. 

The left foot is advanced, ankle high; it is then swung back- 
ward and forward and planted, the body during the swinging balanced 
on the right leg. The right foot is then advanced, swung backward 
and forward and planted, and so on. 

1. Body-balance step, 2. MARCH. 

The left foot is advanced, ankle high, body being bent slightly 
to the rear; the left foot is then swung backward, body being bent 
slightly to the front; the same foot is then swung forward again and 
planted, the body in the meantime becoming erect. This is repeated 
with the right foot, and so on. 

1. Keei-and-toe step, 2. MARCH. 

The left foot is advanced and allowed to rest on the heel; it is 
then swung backward and allowed to rest on the toes; it is once more 
advanced and planted. This is repeated with the right foot, and so on. 

1. Cross step, raising knees, 2. MARCH. 

Execute the cross step and raise the knees. The cross step may 
also be executed in combination with the swings of the extended leg. 

The change step may be combined with the following: Cross step, 
halting step, raising knees, foot-rocking step, on toes, raising heels, 
swinging and circling legs, heel and toe step. These may also be com- 
bined with the change step hop. 

1. Continuous change step hop, 2. MARCH. 

Execute the ordinary change step, hopping with the change. 

1. Forward gallop hop, 2. MARCH. 

The left foot ts advanced and planted, the right is brought up 
in rear as in th© halting step; this is done four times in succession. 
The same is done four times with the right foot in advance, and so on. 

1. Sideboard gallop hop, 2. MARCH. 

The left foot is advanced, body turning on the right; four hops 
are then executed sideward on the left foot followed by the right; at 
the fourth hop the body is turned to the left about and four hops ex- 
ecuted sideward on the right foot followed by the left, and so on. 

Double Timing 

The length of the step in double time is 36 inches; the cadence 
is at the rate of 180 steps per minute. To march in double time the 
instructor comip^p^s: 1. Double time, 2. MARCH. 



356 (contd.) 

If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight of the body 
to the right leg. At the command march raise the forearms, fingers 
closed; to a horizontal position along the waist line; take up an easy 
run with the step and cadence of double time, allowing a natural swing- 
ing motion to the arms inward and upward in the direction of the 
opposite shoulder. 

In marching in quick time, at the command march, given as 
either foot strikes the ground, take one step in quick time, and then 
step off in double time. 

When marching in double time and in running the men breathe 
as much as possible through the nose, keeping the mouth closed. 

A few minutes at the beginning of th^ setting-up exercises should 
be devoted to double timing. From lasting only a few minutes at the 
start it may be gradually increased, so that daily drills should enable the 
men at the end of five or six months to double time for 15 or 20 minutes 
without becoming fatigued or distressed. 

After the double time the men should be marched for several min- 
utes at quick time; after this the instructor should command: 

1. Eoute step, 2. MARCH. 

In marching at route step, the men are not required to preserve 
silence nor keep the step; if marching at proved intervals, the latter 
is preserved. 

To resume the cadence step in quick time, the instructor com- 
mands: 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTIOIT. 

Great care must be exercised concerning the duration of the 
double time and the speed and duration of the run. The demands made 
upon the men should be increased gradually. 

When exercise rather than distance is desired, the running should 
be done on the balls of the feet, heels raised from the ground. 
DouBLE-TiMiifG Exercises 

While the men are double timing the instructor may vary the 
position of the arms by commanding: 

1. 1. Arms forward, 2. RAISE. 

2. 1. Arms sideward, 2. RAISE. 

3. 1. Arms upward, 2. RAISE. 

4. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE. 

5. 1. Hands on shoulders, 2. PLACE. 

6. 1. Arms forward, 2. CROSS. 

7. 1. Arms backward, 2. CROSS. 

At the command down, the double-time position for the arms 
and hands is resumed. 

The instructor m.ay combine the following with the double time: 

1. 1. Cross step, 2. MARCH. 

2. 1. Raise knees, 2. MARCH. 

[224] 



367 



3. 1. Eaise heels, 2. MARCH. 

4. 1. Swing legs forward, 2. MARCH. 

5. 1. Swing legs backward, 2. MARCH. 

To continue these exercises, but still continue the double timing, 
command: 1. Double time, 2. MARCH. To march in quick time, com- 
mand: 1. Quick time, 2. MARCH. Marching in quick or double time, 
to halt, command: 1. Squad, 2. HALT. 

EIPLE EXERCISES 

357. The object of these exercises, which may also be performed with 
wands or bar bells, is to develop the muscles of the arms, shoulders, and 
back so that the men will become accustomed to the weight of the piece 
and learn to wield it with that '^handiness^' so essential to its successful 
use. When these exercises are combined with movements of the various 
other parts of the body, they serve as a splendid, though rather strenuous, 
method for the all-round development of the men. As the weight of the 
piece is considerable, instructors are cautioned to be reasonable in their 
demands. Ear better results are obtained if these exercises are performed 
at commands than when they are grouped and performed for spectacular 
purpofles. 





:mw^?^^^Kry 




FiQ.l. 



1225} 



Fig. 2. 



357 (contd.) 

All the exercises start from the startis.^ position, which is the 
low extended arm horizontal position in front of the body, arms straight; 
the fight hand grasping the small of the stock and the left hand the 
barrel; the knuckles turned to the front and the distance between the 
hands slightly greater than the width of the shoulders. Fig. 1. 

This position is assumed at the command: 1. Starting, 2. POSI- 
TION; at the command position the 'piece is brought to the port and 
lowered to the front horizontal snappily. 

To recover the position of order, command: 1. Order, 2. ARMS; 
the piece is first brought to the port and then ordered. 

Arm Exercises 

From the starting position (Fig. 1) ; all exercises are in two 
counts. 





Fig. 3* J^Mi* 

1. Raise pxcv.e to front, extended arm horizonta,i. 

2. Raise piece to high, overhead, extended arm horizontal. 

3. Raise piece to side, horizontal, right or left. Fig. 2. 

4. Raise piece to front, perpendicular, right or left hand up. 

5. Raise piece to front, bent arm horizontal, waist high. 

6. Raise piece to front, bent arm horizontal, shoulder high. 

[226] 



Fig. 
Fig. 



357 (contd.) 




Fig. 5. Fig. 6. 

7. Eaise piece to rear, bent arm horizontal, on shoulders. Fig. 5. 

8. Raise piece to front, bent arm horizontal, shoulder high, arms 
crossed, left over right or vice versa. 

9. Eaise piece to low side, perpendicular, right or left, right or left 
hand up. Fig. 6. 

10. Raise piece to high side, perpendicular, right or left. Fig. 7. 

In the above exercises the movement begins at the command 
** EXERCISE'* and is discontinued at **HALT.'' 

From front bent arm horizontal, shoulder high: 

Thrust piece forward, upward, downward or sideward, right or 



11. 

left. 

12. 

13. 



Thrust piece upward from rear, bent arm horizontal. 

From high extended arm horizontal: 

Circle piece from right to left, or from left to right. 



Describe 



complete circle parallel with the front of the body. 

Aem Combinations 
All of the following exercises consist of four movements, the 
third carrying the piece back to the first position, and the fourth to 



1227} 



357 (contd.) 




Fig, 7. 

the starting position; in other words, the piece is carried back in reverse 
order at 'three and four. 

1. Eaise piece to high, extended arm horizontal; flex to the bent 
arm horizontal in front of shoulders and return in reverse order. 

2. Same as above, except that the piece is brought to the shoulders 
in rear of head. 

3. Kaise piece as in 1, lower to right horizontal, and return in re- 
verse order. 

4. Same, left. 

5. Raise piece to front, bent arm horizontal, shoulder high; thrust 
piece upward, and return in reverse order. 

6. Same, thrusting piece forward or sideward right or left. 

7. Raise piece to front, extended arm perpendicular, right hand up; 
reverse bringing left hand up; reverse again and lower. 

8. Raise piece to low side perpendicular, left hand up; change to 
high side perpendicular, right hand up; and return in reverse order. 

9. Same on the left. 



1229} 



357 (contd.) 

10. Eaise piece to front, extended arm horizontal; cross and bend 
arms to front, bent arm horizontal, right over left; and return in reverse 
order. 

11. Eaise piece to front, bent arm horizontal, arms crossed, right over 
left; change by crossing left over right; reverse and down. 




Fig. 8. Fig. 9. 

Arm, Leg. and Trujstk Combinations' s 

From the starting position: All exercises in two counts. 

1. Raise piece to front, extended arm horizontal and bend knees 
quarter, half, or full. 

2. Raise piece to high, extended arm horizontal and raise on toes. 

3. Raise piece as in 2 and bend trunk forward. 

4. Raise piece to rear, bent arm horizontal on shoulders and bend 
trunk forward. 

5. Raise piece to front perpendicular, left hand up, and bend trunk 
sideward right. Fig. 8. 

6. Same to the left, right hand up. 

7. Raise piece to high, right side perpendicular and bend trunk 
sideward left. 

[229] 



357 (contd.) 

8. Same, piece on the left, bending trunk to the right. From front 
bent arm horizontal, shoulder high. 

9. Thrust piece forward or upward and bend knees, quarter, half, 
or full. 

10. Eaise piece forward and upward and bend trunk forward. 

11. Thrust piece sideward right and bend trunk sideward left. 

12. Same reversed. 

13. Thrust piece forward and twist body to the left or right. 

14. Thrust piece upward and bend trunk backward. 

15. Thrust piece upward and hop to side straddle. 

16. Thrust piece forward or upward and lunge forward right or left. 

17. Thrust piece upward or forward and lunge obliquely forward 
right or left. 

18. Thrust piece sideward left and lunge sideward right or left. 

19. Thrust piece upward and lunge backward. 

20. Thrust piece downward; lunge forward and bend body forward, 
FiV. 9. 




Fig. 10. Fig. 11. 

21. Thrust piece upward; - lunge backward and bend trunk back- 
ward. Fig. 10. 

[230] 



357 (cont.) 

22. Thrust piece side right and lunge and bend trunk sideward left. 
Fig. 11. 

Rifle Drill Combination 
The following exercises consist of four movements, the third 
position always corresponding to the first position and the fourth to the 
starting position. They have been grouped and arranged precisely like 
the setting-up combination, Fifth Lesson prescribed for trained solUers. 
When performed as a musical drill, the instructions laid down in that 
lesson are applicable here. 

All exercises begin and end with the first or starting poaitfon. 
Fig. 1. 

FmsT Group 
First Exercise 





Fig. 12. Fig. 13. 

Counts. 

1 — 2. Raise piece to bent arm front horizontal, shoulder high, and 

stride forward right, Fig. 12; 

3 — i. Face to the left on both heels and extend piece upward, Fig. 13 j 

5 — 6. Resume first position; 

7 — 8. Resume starting position. 

Repeat left, right, left. 

[231] 



357 (contd:) 



Second Exercise 




Fia. 14. 



Fig. 15. 



1 — 2. Eaise piece to extended high horizontal, and stride sideward 
right, Fig. 14; 

3 — 4. Bend right knee and lower piece to left horizontal, Fig. 15; 

5 — 6. Eesume first position; 

7 — 8. Eesume starting position. 

Eepeat left, right, left. / 



[232] 



857 (contd.) 



Third Exercise 




Fig. 16. 



Fig. 17. 



1 — 2. Eaise piece to high side perpendicular on the left, Jeft hand 
up, and stride backward right, Fig. 16; 

3 — 4. Face about on heels and swing piece down and up to high side 
perpendicular on the right, Fig 17; 

5 — 6. Resume first position; 

7 — 8. Eesume starting position. 
Repeat left, right, left. 



[233] 



357 (contd.) 



Fourth Exercise 




Fig. 18. 



Fig. 19. 



1 — 2. Eaise piece to extended high iiorizontal, and stride obliquely 
forward right, Pig 18; 

3 — 4. Face about on heels and lower piece to horizontal on shoulders; 
Fig. 19; 

5 — 6. Kesume first position; 

7 — 8. Resume starting position. 
Repeat left, right, left. 



12141 



Second Group 
First Exercise 



357 (contd.) 





Fig. 20. 



Fig. 21. 



1 — 2. Lower piece to front extended horizontal and bend trunk for- 
ward, Fig. 20; 

3 — 4. Lunge obliquely forward right and raise piece to right oblique, 
left hand at shoulder, Fig 21; 

5 — 6. Eesume first position; 

7 — 8. Eesume starting position. 
Eepeat left, right, left. 



[235] 



357 (contd.) 



Second Exercise 




Fig. 22. 



Fig. 23. 



down and up to right 



1 — 2. Eaise piece to high perpendicular on the left, left hand up, 
and bend trunk sideward right, Fig. 22; 

3 — 4. Lunge sideward right and swing piece 
high perpendicular, right hand up. Fig. 23; 

5 — 6. Eesume first position; 

7 — 8. Eesume starting position. 
Repeat left, right, left. 



[236] 



Third Exercise 



S57 (contd.) 




Fig. 24. 



Fig. 25. 



1 — 2. Eaise piece to high extended arm horizontal and bend trunk 
backward, Fig. 24; 

3 — 4. Lunge forward right, and swing piece to side horizontal, left 
hand to the rear. Fig. 25; 

5—6. Eesume first position; 

7 — 8. Eesume starting position. 
Eepeat left, right, left. 



1237] 



357 (contd.) 



Fourth Exercise 





Fig. 26. 



Fia. 27. 



1—2. Eaise piece to right high perpendicular and side step position 
left, Fig. 26; 

3 — 4. Lunge sideward left and swing piece to left high perpendicular. 
Fig. 27; 

5 — 6. Eesume first position; 

7 — 8. Eesume starting position. 
Eepeat left, right, left. 



[298] 



357 (contd.) 



Third Group 
First Exercise 





Fig. 28. 



Fig. 29. 



1 — 2. Kaise piece to front bent horizontal, arms crossed, left over 
right; lunge sideward right and bend trunk sideward right, Fig. 28; 

3 — 4. Extend right knee and bend trunk to the left, bending left knee 
and recrossing arms, left over right; Fig 29; 

5 — 6. E^esume first position; 

7 — 8. Resume starting position. 
Repeat left, right, left. 



[239] 



357 (contd.) 



Second Exercise 




Fig. 30. 



Fig. 31. 



1 — 2. Eaise piece to bent arm horizontal; face right and lunge for- 
ward right and bend trunk forward, Fig. 30; 

3 — 4. Eaise trunk and turn to the left on both heels and extend 
piece overhead, Fig. 31; 

5 — 6. Kesume first position; * 

7 — 8. Resume starting position. 
Repeat left, right, left. 



£240] 



S67 (contd.) 



Third Exercise 





Fia. 32, 



Fig. 33. 



1 — 2. Kaise piece to loft high horizontal; lunge forward right, Fig. 32; 
3 — 4. Bend trunk forward and lower piece to low front horizontal, 
Fig. 33; 

5 — 6. Resume first position; 
7 — 8. Resume starting position. 
Repeat left, right, left. 



[241] 



358 



Fourth Exercise 




Fig. 34. 



Fig. 35, 



1—2. Eaise piece to high extended horizontal and hop to side straddle 
position, Fig. 34; 

3 — 4. Bend trunk forward and swing piece to extended low horizontal, 
left hand between legs, right hand forward, Fig. 35; 

5 — 6. Kasume first position; ^ 

7 — 8. Eesume starting position. 
Eepeat left, right, left. 

GYMNASTIC CONTESTS 

358. These exercises are those in which the benefits are lost sight of in 
the pleasure their attainment provides, which in the case of these con- 
tests is the vanquishing of an opponent. The men are pitted against 
each other in pairs; age, height, weight, and general physical aptitude 
being the determining factors in the selection. 

In the contests in which superiority is dependent upon skill and 
agility no restrictions need be placed upon the efforts of the contestantB; 

[242] 



358 (contd.) 

but in those that are a test of strength and endurance it is well to call 
a contest a **draw'', when the men are equally matched and the contest 
is likely to be drawn out to the point of exhaustion of one or both 
contestants. 

It is recommended that these contests be indulged in once or 
twice a month and then at the conclusion of the regular drill. 

Contests that require sldll and agility should alternate with 
those that depend upon force and endurance. In order to facilitate the 
instruction a number of pairs should be engaged at the same time. 

1. Cane wrestling: The cane to be about an inch in diameter and 
a yard long, ends rounded. It is grasped with the right hand at the 
end, knuckles down, and with the left hand, knuckles up, inside of and 
close to the opponent's right hand. Endeavor is then made to wrest the 
cane from the opponent. Loss of grip with either hand loses the bout. 

2. Cane twisting: Same cane as in 1. Contestants grasp it as in 
1, only the knuckles of both hands are up, and the arms are extended 
overhead. Object: The contestants endeavor to make the cane revolve 
in their opponent's hand without allowing it to do so in their own. The 
cane must be forced down. 

3. Cane pulling: Contestants sit on the ground, facing each other, 
legs straight and the soles of the feet in contact. The cane is grasped 
as in 2 but close to the feet. Object: To pull the opponent to his feet. 
The legs throughout the contest- must be kept rigid. 

4. ** Bucked'' contest: Contestants sit on the ground ^'bucked"; 
i. e., the cane is passed under the knees, which are drawn up, and the 
arms passed under the cane with the fingers laced in front of the ankles. 
Object: To get the toes under those of the opponent and roll him over. 

5. Single pole pushing: Contestants grasp end of pole, 6 feet long 
and 2 inches thick, and brace themselves. Object: To push the opponent 
out of position. 

6. Double pole pushing: The poles are placed under the arms close 
to the arm pits, ends projecting. Object: Same as in 5. 

7. Double pole pulling: Position as in 6 but standing back to back. 
Object: To pull the opponent out of position. 

8. ''Cock fight:" Contestants hop on one leg with the arms folded 
closely over the chest. Object: by butting with the fleshy part of the 
shoulder without raising the arms, or by dodging to make the opponent 
change his feet or touch the floor with his hand or other part of his body. 

9. One-legged tug of war: Contestants hop on one leg and grasp 
hands firmly. Object: To pull the opponent forward or make him place 
the raised foot on the floor. 

10. The ''siege:" One contestant stands with one foot in a circle 
14 inches in diameter, the other foot outside, and the arms folded as 
in 8. Two other contestants, each hopping on one leg, endeavor to dis- 

[243] 



357 (contd.) 

lodge the one in the circle by butting him with the shoulder. The be 
sieged one is defeated in case he raises the foot in the circle, or removes 
it entirely from the circle. The besiegers are defeated in case they 
change feet or touch the floor as in 8. As soon as either of the latter 
is defeated his place is immediately filled, so that there are always two 
of them. The besieged should resort to volting, ducking, etc., rather than 
to depend upon his strength. 

11. One-armed tug: Contestants stand facing each other; right hands 
grasped, feet apart. Object: Without moving feet, to pull the opponent 
forward. Shifting the feet loses the bout. 

12. '^Tug royal:'' Three contestants stand facing inward and grasp 
each other's wrists securely with their feet outside a circle about three 
feet in diameter. Object: by pulling or pushing to make one of the 
contestants step inside of the circle. 

13. Indian wrestling: Contestants lie upon the ground face up, right 
shoulders in close contact, right elbows locked; at one the right leg is 
raised overhead and lowered, this is repeated at two, and at three the 
leg is raised quickly and locked with tlie opponent's right leg. Object: 
To roll him over by- forcing his leg down. 

14. Medicine ball race. Teams of five or six men are organized and 
a track for each team is marked out. This track consists of marks on 
the floor or ground at distances of 4 yards. On each of these marks 
stands a man with legs apart, the team forming a column of files. At 
^^ ready," ^^get set," the contestants prepare for the race, and at '^go, " 
the first man in the column rolls a medicine ball, which he has on the 
floor in front of him, through his. legs to No. 2, he in turn rolls it to S, 
etc., when it reaches the last man he picks it np and runs to the starting 
place with it and, the others all having shifted back one mark, the rolling 
is repeated. This continues until the first man brings the ball back to 
the starting place and every m.an is in his original position. The ball 
should be kept rolling; each man, as it comes to him, pushing it on 
quickly. Any ball about 9 inches in diameter will answer; it may be 
made of ^strong cloth and stuffed with cotton waste. 



[244] 



359-360-S61 

CHAPTER IV 

MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD DUTY 

(To include Changes No. 1, February 24, 1915.) 

(The numbers following the paragraphs are those of the Manual of Interior 
Guard Duty, and references in the text to certain paragraph numbers, refer to these 
numbers and not to the numbers preceding the paragraphs.) 

359. [Guard Duty is one of the soldier's most important duties, and 
in all armies of the world the manner in which it is performed is an 
index to the discipline of the command and the manner in which other 
duties are performed. 

Upon the guard's vigilance and readiness for action depend not 
only the enforcement of military law and orders, but also the safety 
and protection of the post and the quelling of sudden disorder, perhaps 
even mutiny. 

The importance of guard duty is increased during times of war, 
when the very safety of the army depends upon the vigilance of the 
sentinels, who are required to watch that others may sleep and thus 
refresh themselves from the labors of the day. The sentinels are the 
guardians of the repose, quiet and safety of the camp. 

Respect for Sentinels. 

360. Eespect for the person and office of a sentinel is as strictly en- 
joined by military law as that required to be paid to an officer. As it is 
expressed in the Manual of Guard Duty, ''All persons of whatever 
rank in the service are required to observe respect toward sentinels''. 
Invested as the private soldier frequently is, while on his post, with a 
grave responsibility, it is proper that he should be fully protected in tho 
discharge of his duty. To permit anyone, of whatever rank, to molest or 
interfere with him while thus employed, without becoming liable to 
severe penalty, would clearly establish a precedent highly prejudicial 
to the interests of the service. (Davis' Military Law), 

Duty of sentinels. 

A sentinel, in respect to the duties with which he is charged, 
represents the superior military authority of the command to which he 
belongs, aiul whose orders he is required to enforce on or in the vicinity 
of his post. As such he is entitled to the respect and obedience of all 
persons who come within the scope of operation of the orders, which he 
is required to carry into effect. Over military persons the authority of 
the sentinel is absolute, and disobedience of his orders on the part of 
such persons constitutes a most serious military offence and is prejudicial 
in the highest degree to the interests of discipline. (Davis' Military 
Law),-^KuihoT.] ' INTRODUCTION 

361. Guards may be divided into four classes: Exterior guards, in- 
terior guards, military police, and provost guards. (1) 

[245] 



362-363-364-365 

Exterior guards are used only in time of war. They belong 
to the domain of tactics -and are treated of in the Field Service Regula- 
tions and in the drill regulations of the different arms of the service. 

The purpose of exterior guards is to prevent surprise, to delay 
attack, and otherwise to provide for the security of the main body. 

On the march they take the form of advance guards, rear guards, 
and flank guards. At a halt they consist of outposts. (2) 

Interior guards are used in camp or garrison to preserve order, 
protect property, and to enforce police regulations. In time of war 
such sentinels of an interior guard as may be necessary are placed close 
in or about a camp, and normally there is an exterior guard further out 
consisting of outposts. In time of peace the interior guard is the only 
guard in a camp or garrison. (3) 

362. Military police differ somewhat from either of these classes. 
(See Field Service Regulations). They are used in time of war to guard 
prisoners, to arrest stragglers and deserters, and to maintain order and 
enforce police regulations in the rear of armies, along lines of communi- 
cation, and in the vicinity of large camps. (4) 

363. Provost guards are used in the absence of military police, gen- 
erally in conjunction with the civil authorities at or near large posts or 
encampments, to preserve order among soldiers beyond the interior 
guard. (5) 

INTERIOE GUARD 

Classification 

364. The various elements of an interior guard classified according to 
their particular purposes and the manner in which they perform their 
duties are as follows: 

(a) The main guard. 

(b) Special guards: Stable guards, park guards, prisoner guards, 
herd guards, train guards, boat guards, watchmen, etc. (6) 

Details and Rosters 

365. At every military post, and in every regiment or separate com- 
mand in the field, an interior guard will be detailed and duly mounted. 

It will consist of such number of officers and enlisted men as the 
commanding officer may deem necessary, and will be commanded by the 
senior officer or noncommissioned officer therewith, under the super- 
vision of the officer of the day or other officer detailed by the command- 
ing Cfficg^r. (7) 

The system of sentinels on fixed posts is of value in discipline 
and training because of the direct individual responsibility which is 
imposed and required to be discharged in a definite and precise manner. 
In order, however, that guard duty may not be needlessly irksome and 

12461 



365 (contd.) 
interfere with tactical instruction, the number of men detailed for guard 
will be the smallest possible. , 

Commanding officers are specifically charged with this matter, 
and, without entirely dispensing with the system of sentinels on fixed 
posts will, as far as- practicable, in time of peace, replace such sentinels 
with watchmen. (See Par. 221.) (8) 

At posts where there are less than three companies the main 
guard and special guards may all be furnished by one company or by 
detail from each company. 

Where there are three or more companies, the main guard will, if 
practicable, be furnished by a single company, and, as far as practicable, 
the same organization will supply all details for that day for special 
guard, overseer, and fatigue duty. In this case the officer of the day, 
and the officers of the guard, if there are any, will, if practicable, be 
from the company furnishing the guard. (9) 

At a post or camp where the headquarters of more than one 
regiment are stationed, or in the case of a small brigade in the field, 
if but one guard be necessary for the whole command, the details will 
be made from the headquarters of the command. 

If formal guard mounting is to be held, the adjutant, sergeant- 
major, and band to attend guard mounting will be designated by the 
commanding officer. (10) 

When a single organization furnishes the guard, a roster of 
organizations will be kept by the sergeant-major under the supervision 
of the adjutant. (See Appendix B.) (11) 

When the guard is detailed from several organizations, rosters 
will be kept by the adjutant, of officers of the day and officers of the 
guard by name; by the sergeant-major, under the supervision of the 
adjutant, of sergeants, corporals, musicians, and privates of the guard 
by number per organization; and by first sergeants, of sergeants, cor- 
porals, musicians, and privates by name. (See Appendix A.) (12) 

When organizations furnish their own stable, or stable and 
park guards, credit will be given each for the number of enlisted men 
so furnished, as though they had been detailed for main guard. (13) 

Special guards, other than stable or park guards, will^be credited 
the same as for main guard, credited with fatigue duty, carried on special 
duty, or credited as the commanding officer may direct. (Pars. 6, 221, 
247, and 300.) (14) 

Captains will supervise the keeping of company rosters and see 
that all duties performed are duly credited. (See pars. 355-364, A. E., 
for rules governing rosters, and Form 342, A. G. O., for instructions as 
to how rosters should be kept.) (15) 

There will be an officer of the day with each guard, unless in 
the opinion of the commanding officer the guard is so small that his ser- 

[247] 



365 (contd.) 

vices are not needed. In this case an officer will be detailed to super- 
vise the command and instruction of the guard for such period as the 
commanding officer may direct. (16) 

When more than one guard is required for a command, a field 
officer of the day will be detailed, who will receive his orders from the 
brigade or division commander as the latter may direct. When necessary, 
captains may be placed on the roster for field officer of the day. (17) 

The detail of officers of the guard will be limited to the neces- 
sities of the service and efficient instruction; inexperienced officers may 
be detailed as supernumerary officers of the guard for purposes of in- 
struction. (18) 

Officers serving in staff departments are, in the discretion of 
the commanding officer, exempt from guard duty. (19) 

Guard details will, if practicable, be posted or published the day 
preceding the beginning of the tour, and officers notified personally by 
a written order at the same time. (20) 

The strength of guards and the number of consecutive days for 
which an organization furnishes the guard will be so regulated as to in- 
sure privates of the main guard an interval of not less than ^yq days 
between tours. 

When this is not otherwise practicable, extra and special duty 
men will be detailed for night-guard duty, still performing their daily 
duties. When so detailed a roster will be kept by the adjutant showing 
the duty performed by them. (21) 

The members of main guards and stable and park guards will 
habitually be relieved every 24 hours. The length of the tour of en- 
listed men detailed as special guards, other than stable or park guards, 
will be so regulated as to permit of these men being held accountable 
for a strict performance of their duty. (22) 

Should the officer of the day be notified that men are required to 
fill vacancies in the guard, he will cause them to be supplied from the 
organization to which the guard belongs. If none are available in that 
organization, the adjutant will be notified and will cause them fb be 
supplied from the organization that is next for guard. (Par. 63.) (23) 

The adjutant will have posted on the bulletin board at his office 
all data needed by company commanders in making details from their 
companies. 

At first sergeant's call, first sergeants will go to headquarters 
and take from the bulletin board all data necessary for making the 
details required from their companies; these* details will be made from 
their company rosters. (24) 

In order to give ample notice, first sergeants will, when practic- 
able, publish at retreat and post on the company bulletin board all 
details ma.de from the company for duties to be performed. (25) 

1249'] 



366-367 

Where rosters are required to be kept by this manual, all de- 
tails will be made by roster. (26) 

The Commanding Officer 

366. The commanding officer will exact a faithful, vigilant, and cor- 
rect performance of guard duty in all of its details, giving his orders 
to the officer of the day, or causing them to be communicated to him 
with the least practicable delay. He will prescribe the strength of the 
guard, and the necessary regulations for guard, police, and fatigue 
duty. (27) 

The commanding officer receives the reports of the officers of the 
day immediately after guard mounting, at his office, or at some other 
place previously designated; carefully examines the guard report and 
remarks thereon (questioning the old officer of the day, if necessary, con- 
cerning his tour of duty), relieves the old officer of the day and gives 
the new officer of the day such instructions as may be necessary. (28) 
The Officer of the Day 

367. The officer of the day is responsible for the proper performance 
of duty by the guard with which he marches on and for the enforcement 
of all police regulations. He is charged with the execution of all orders 
of the commanding officer relating to the safety and good order of the 
post or camp. His actual tour begins when he receives the instructions 
of the commanding officer after guard mounting, and ceases when he 
has been relieved by the commanding officer. In case of emergency dur- 
ing the interval between guard mounting and reporting to the, command- 
ing officer, the senior officer of the day will give the necessary instruc- 
tions for both guards. (29) 

In the absence of special instructions from the commanding 
officer, the officer of the day will inspect the guard and sentinels during 
the day and at night at such times as he may deem necessary. He will 
visit them at least once between 12 o'clock midnight and daylight. (30) 

He may prescribe patrols ( Par. 218) and visits of inspection to 
be made by officers and noncommissioned officers of the guard whenever 
he deems it necessary. (31) 

He will see that the commander of the guard is furnished with 
the parole and countersign before retreat in case they are to be used, 
and will inform him of the presence in post or camp of any person en- 
titled to the compliment. (32) 

In case of alarm of any kind he will at once take Such steps as 
may be necessary to insure the safety of life and public property and 
to preserve order in the command, disposing his guard so as best to 
accomplish this result. (33) . 

In the p^erformance of his duties as officer of the day he is sub- 
ject to the orders of the commanding officer only, except that in case 

[249] 



368 

of an alarm of any kind, and at a time of great danger, the senior line 
officer present is competent to give necessary orders to the officer of the 
day for the employment of the guard. (34) 

At the inspections and musters prescribed in Army Regulations , 
the officer of the day will be present at the post of the guard, but all 
commands to the guard will be given by the commander of the guard. (35) 

Both officers of the day together verify the prisoners and inspect 
the guardhouse and premises. (36) 

In the absence of special instructions, the old officer of the day 
will, at guard mounting, release all garrison prisoners whose sentences 
expire that day. If there are any prisoners with no record of charges 
against them, the old officer of the day will report that fact to the com- 
manding officer who will give the necessary instructions. (37) 

The old officer of the day signs the report of the commander 
of the guard. He also enters on it such remarks as may be necessary. (38) 

The officers of the day then report to the commanding officer. 

On presenting themselves, both salute with the right hand, re- 
maining covered. The old officer orf the day, standing on the right of 
the new, then says : * ' Sir, I report as old officer of the day, ' ' and presents 
the guard report. As soon as the commanding officer notifies the old 
officer- of the day that he is relieved, the old officer of the day salutes the 
commanding officer and retires. The new officer of the day again salutes 
and says: **Sir, I report as new officer of the day,'* and then receives his 
instructions. (39) 

The officer of the day will always keep the guard informed as to 
where he may be found at all hours of the day and night. (40) 

Commander of the Guard 

368. The commander of the guard is responsible for the instruction 
and discipline of the guard. He will see that all of its members are 
correctly instructed in their orders and duties, and that they understand 
and properly perform them. He will visit each relief at least once while 
it is on post, and at least one of these visits will be made between 12 
o^clock midnight and daylight. (41) 

He receives and obeys the orders of the commanding officer and 
the officer of the day, and reports to the latter without delay all orders 
to the guard not received from the officer of the day; he transmits to 
his successor all material instructions and information relating to his 
duties. (42) 

He is responsible under the officer of the day for the general 
safety of the post or camp as soon as the old guard marches away from 
the guardhooise. In case of emergency while both guards are at the 
guardhouse, the senior commander of the two guards will be responsible 
that the proper action is taken. (43) 

[250] 



368 (contd.) 

Officers of the gnard will remain constantly with their guards, 
except while visiting patrols or necessarily engaged elsewhere in the 
performance of their duties. The commanding officer will allow a 
reasonable time for meals. (44) 

A commander of a guard leaving his post for any purpose will 
inform the next in command of his destination and probable time of 
return. (45) 

Except in emergencies, the commander of the guard may divide 
the night with the next in command, but retains his responsibility; the 
one on watch must be constantly on the alert. (46) 

When any alarm is raised in camp or garrison, the guard will 
be formed immediately. (Par. 234.) If the case be serious, the proper 
call will be sounded, and the commander of the guard will cause the 
commanding officer and the officer of the day to be at once notified. (47) 

If a sentinel calls: **Tlie Guard,*' the commander of the guard will 
at once send a patrol to the sentinel's post. If the danger be great, in 
which case the sentinel will discharge his piece, the patrol will be as 
strong as possible. (48) 

When practicable, there should always be an officer or noncom- 
missioned officer and two privates of the guard at the guardhouse, in 
addition to the sentinels there on post. (49) 

Between reveille and retreat, when the guard had been turned 
out for any person entitled to the compliment (See Pars. 222 and 224), the 
commander of the guard, if an officer, will receive the report of the 
sergeant, returning the salute of the later with the right hand. He 
will then draw his saber, and place himself two paces in front of the 
center of the guard. When the person for whom the guard has been 
turned out approaches, he faces his guard and commands: 1. Present, 2. 
AEMS; faces to the front and salutes. When his salute is acknowledged 
he resumes the carry, faces about, and commands: 1. Order, 2. ARMS; 
and faces to the front. 

If it be an officer entitled to inspect the guard, after saluting 
and before bringing his guard to an order, the officer of the guard 
reports: **Sir, all present or accounted for**; or, **Sir, (so and so) is 
absent**; or, if the roll call has been omitted: **Sir, the guard is formed,*' 
except that at guard mounting the commanders of the guards present their 
guards and salute without making any report. 

Between retreat and reveille, the commander of tjhe guard salutes 
and reports, but does not bring the guard to a present. (50) 

To those entitled to have the guard turned out but not entitled 
to inspect it, no report will be made; nor will a report be made to any 
officer, unless he halts in front of the guard. (51) 

When a guard commanded by a noncommissioned officer is turned 
out as a compliment or for inspection, the noncommissioned officer, stand- 

[251] 



368 (contd.) 

ing at a right shoulder on the right of the right guide, commands: 1. 
Present, 2. ARMS. He then executes the rifle 'salute. If a report be 
also required, he will, after saluting, and before bringing his guard to 
an order, report as prescribed for the officer of the guard. (Par. 50.) (52) 
368a. When a guard is in line, not under inspection, and commanded 
by an officer, the commander of the guard salutes his regimental, bat- 
talion, and company commander, by bringing the guard to attention and 
saluting in person. 

For all other officers, excepting those entitled to the compliment 
from a guard (Par. 224), the commander of the guard salutes in persoii. 
but does not bring the guard to attention. 

When commanded by a noncommissioned officer the guard is 
brought to attention in either case, and the noncommissioned officer 
salutes. 

The commander of a guard exchanges salutes with the command- 
ers of all other bodies of troops; the guard is brought to attention dur- 
ing the exchange. 

** Present arms" is executed by a guard only when it has turned 
out for inspection or as a compliment, and at the ceremonies of guard 
mounting and relieving the old guard. (53) 

In marching a guard or a detachment of a guard the principles 
of paragraph 53 apply. **Eyes right" is executed only in the cere- 
monies of guard mxountirjg and' relieving the old guard. (54) 

If a person entitled to the compliment, or the regimental, bat- 
talion, or company commiander, passes in rear of a guard, neither the 
compliment nor the salute is given, but the guard is brought to atten- 
tion while such person is opposite the post of the commander. 

After any person has received or declined the compliment, or 
received the salute from the commander of the guard, official recognition 
of his presence thereafter while he remains in the vicinity will be taken 
by bringing the guard to attention. (55) 

The commander of the guard will inspect the guard at reveille 
and retreat, and at such other times as may be necessary, to assure him- 
self that the men are in proper condition to perform their duties and 
that their arms and equipments are in proper condition. For inspection 
by other officers, he prepares the guard in each case as directed by the 
inspecting officer. (56) 

The guard -will not be paraded during ceremonies unless directed 
by the commanding officer. (57) 

At all formations members of the guard or reliefs will execute 
inspection arms as prescribed in the drill regulations of their arm. (58) 

The commander of the guard will see that all sentinels are habit- 
ually relieved every two hours, unless the weather or other cause makes 
it necessary that it be done at shorter or longer intervals, as directed by 
the commanding officer. (59) 

[252] 



368 (contd.) 

He will question his noncommissioned officers and sentinels rela- 
tive to the instructions they may have received from the old guard; he 
will see that patrols and visits of inspection are made as directed by 
the officer of the day. (60) 

He will see that the special orders for each post and member 
of the guard, either written or printed, are posted in the guardhouse, 
and, if practicable, in the sentry box or other sheltered place to which 
the member of the guard has constant access. (61) 

He win see that the proper calls are sounded at the hours ap- 
pointed by the commanding officer. (62) 

Shoiild a member of the guard be taken sick, or be arrested, or 
desert, or leave his guard, he will at once notify the officer of the day. 
(Par. 23.) (6:3) 

He will, when the countersign is used (Pars. 210 to 216), com- 
municate it to the noncommissioned officers of the guard and see that it 
is duly communicated to the sentinels before the hour for challenging; 
the countersign will not be given to' sentinels posted at the guardhouse. 
(64) 

He will have the details for hoisting the flag at reveille, and 
lowering it at retreat, and for firing the reveille and retreat gun, made^ 
in time for the proper performance of these duties. (See Pars. 338, 344, 
345, and 346.) He will see that the flags are kept in the best con- 
dition possible, and that they are never handled escept in the proper 
performance of duty. (65) 

He may permit members of the guard while at the guardhouse 
to remove their headdress, overcoats, and gloves; if they leave the 
guardhouse for any purpose whatever he will require that they be 
properly equipped and armed according to the character of the service 
io which engaged, or as directed by the commanding officer. (66) 

He will enter in the guard report a report of his tour of duty, 
and, on the completion of his tour, will present it to the officer of the 
day. He will transmit with his report all passes turned in at the post 
of the guard. (67) 

Whenever a prisoner is sent to the guardhouse or guard tent for 
confinement, he will cause him to be searched, and will, without un- 
necessary delay, report the case to the officer of the day. (68) 

Under war conditions, if any one is to be passed out of camp at 
night, he will be sent to the commander of the guard, who will have him 
passed beyond the sentinels. (69) 

The commander of the guard will detain at the guardhouse all 
suspicious characters or parties attempting to pass a sentinel's post 
without authority, reporting his action to the officer of the day, to whom 
persons so arrested will be sent, if necessary. (70) 

[2S3] 



869 

He will inspect tlie guard rooms and cells, and the irons of such 

prisoners as may be ironed, at least once during his tour, and at such 
other times as he may deem necessary. (71) 

He will cause the corporals of the old and new reliefs to verify 
together, immediately before each relief goes on post, the number of 
prisoners who should then properly be at the guardhouse. (72) 

He will see that the sentences of prisoners under his charge are 
executed strictly in accordance with the action of the reviewing author- 
ity. (73) 

When no special prisoner guard has been detailed (Par. 300), 
he will, as far as practicable, assign as guards over working parties of 
prisoners sentinels from posts guarded at night only. (74) 

The commander of the guard will inspect all meals sent to the 
guardhouse and see that the quantity and quality of food are in ac- 
cordance with regulations. (75) 

At guard mounting he will report to the old officer of the day 
all cases of prisoners whose terms of sentence expire on that day, and 
also all cases of prisoners concerning whom no statement of charges 
has been received. (See Par. 241.) (76) 

The commander of the guard is responsible for the security of 
the prisoners under the charge of his guard; he becomes responsible for 
them after their number has been verified, and they have been turned 
over to the custody of his guard by the old guard or by the prisoner 
guard or overseers. (77) 

The prisoners will be verified and turned over to the new guard 
without parading them, unless the commanding officer or the officer of 
the day shall direct otherwise. (78) 

To receive the prisoners at the guardhouse when they have been 
paraded and after they have been verified by the officers of the day, 
the com^mander of the new guard directs his sergeant to form his guard 
with an interval, and commands: 1. Prisoners, 2. Right, 3. FACE, 4. For- 
ward, 5. MARCH. The prisoners having arrived opposite the interval in 
the new guard, he commands: 1. Prisoners, 2. HALT, 3. Left, 4. FACE, 5. 
Right (or left), 6. DRESS, 7. FRONT. 

The prisoners dress on the line of the new guard. (79) 

Sergeant of the Guard 
369. The senior noncommissioned officer of the guard always acts as 
sergeant of the guard, and if there be no officer of the guards will per- 
form the duties prescribed for the commander of the guard. (80) 

The sergeant of the guard has general supervision over the other 

noncommissioned officers and the musicians and privates of the guard, 

and must be thoroughly familiar with all of their orders and duties. (81) 

He is directly responsible for the property under charge of the 

guard, and will see that it is properly cared for. He will make lists of 



369 (contd.) 
articles taken out by working parties, and see that all such articles are 
duly returned. If they are not, he will immediately report the fact to 
the commander of the guard. (82) 

Immediately after guard mounting he will prepare duplicate 
lists of the names of £^11 noncommissioned officers, musicians, and privates 
of the guard, showing the relief and post or duties of each. One list 
will be handed as soon as possible to the commander of the guard; the 
other will be retained by the sergeant. (83) 

He will see that all reliefs are turned out at the proper time, 
and that the corporals thoroughly understand, and are prompt and 
efficient in, the discharge of their duties. (84) 

During the temporary absence from the guardhouse of the ser- 
geant of the guard, the next in rank of the noncommissioned officers will 
perform his duties. (85) 

Should the corporal whose relief is on post be called away from 
the guardhouse, the sergeant of the guard will designate a noncom- 
missioned officer to take the corporaPs place until his return. (86) 

The sergeant of the guard is responsible at all times for the 
proper police of the guardhouse or guard tent, including the ground 
about them and the prison cells. (87) 

At "first sergeant's call'* he will proceed to the adjutant's 
office and obtain the guard report book. (88) 

When the national or regimental colors are taken from the 
stacks of the color line, the color bearer and guard, or the sergeant of 
the guard, unarmed, and two armed privates as a guard, will escort the 
colors to the colonel's quarters, as prescribed for the color guard in the 
drill regulations of the arm of the service to which the guard belongs. 
(89) 

He will report to the commander of the guard any suspicious or 
unusual occurrence that comes under his notice, will warn him of the 
approach of any armed body, and will send to him all persons arrested 
by the guard. (90) 

When the guard is turned out, its formation will be as follows: 
The senior noncommissioned officer, if commander of the guard, is on 
the right of the right guide; if not commander of the guard, he is in 
the line of file closers, in rear of the right four of the guard; the next 
in rank is right guide; the next left guide; the others in the line of 
file closers, usually, each in rear of his relief; the field music, with its 
left three paces to the right of the right guide. The reliefs form in 
the same order as when the guard was first divided, except that if the 
guard consists of dismounted cavalry and infantry, the cavalry forms 
on the left. (91) 

The sergeant forms the guard, calls the roll, and, if not in com- 
mand of the guard, reports to the commander of the guard as prescribed 
in drill regulations for a first sergeant forming a troop or company; 



369 (contd.) 

the guard is not divided into platoons or sections, and, except when the 
whole guard is formed prior to marching off, fours are not counted. (92) 

The sergeant reports as follows: **Sir, all present or accountea 
for,'' or **Sir, (so-and-so) is absent''; or if the roll call has been omitted, 
**Sir, the guard is formed." Only men absent without proper authority 
are reported absent. He then takes his place, without command. (93) 

At night, the roll may be called by reliefs and numbers instead of 
names; thus, the first relief being on post: Second relief; No. 1; No. 2, 
etc.; Third relief, Corporal; No. 1, etc. (94) 

Calling the roll will be dispensed with in forming the guard 
when it is turned out as a compliment, on the approach of an armed 
body, or in any sudden emergency; but in such cases the roll may be 
called before dismissing the guard. If the guard be turned out for an 
officer entitled to inspect it, the roll will, unless he directs otherwise, 
always be called before a report is made. (95) 

The sergeant of the guard has direct charge of the prisoners, 
except djiring such time as they may be under the charge of the prisoner 
guard or overseers, and is responsible to the commander of the guard 
for their security. (96) 

He will carry the keys of the guardroom and cells, and will not 
suffer them to leave his personal possession while he is at the guardhouse, 
except as hereinafter provided. (Par. 99.) Should he leave the guard- 
house for any purpose, he will turn the keys over to the noncommissioned 
officer who takes his place. (Par. 85.) (97) 

He will count the knives, forks, etc., given to the prisoners with 
their food, and see that none of these articles remain in their possession. 
He will see that no forbidden articles of any kind are conveyed to the 
prisoners. (98) 

Prisoners, when paraded with the guard, are placed in line in its 
center. The sergeant, immediately before forming the guard, will turn 
over his keys to the noncommissioned officer at the guardhouse. Having 
formed the guard, he will divide it into two nearly equal parts. Indicat- 
ing the point of division with his hand, he commands: 

1. Right (or left), 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH, 5. Guard, 
6. HALT, 7. Left (or right), 8. FACE. 

If the first command be right face, the right half of the guard 
only will execute the movements; if left face, the left half only will 
execute them. The command halt is given when sufficient interval is ob- 
tained to admit the prisoners. The doors of the guardroom and cells 
are then opened by the noncommissioned officer having the keys. The 
prisoners will file out under the supervision of the sergeant, the non- 
commissioned officer, and sentinel on duty at the guardhouse, and such 
other sentinels as may be necessary; they will form in line in the in- 
terval between the two parts of the guard. (99) 

[256] 



370-371 

To return the prisoners to the guard room and cells, the sergeant 
commands: 

1. Prisoners, 2. Right (or left), 3. FACE, 4. Column right, (or left), 

5. MARCH. 

The prisoners, under the same supervision as before, return to 
their proper rooms or cells. (100) 

To close the guard, the sergeant commands: 

1. Left (or right), 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH, 5. Guard, 

6. HALT, 7. Right (or left), 8. FACE. 

The left or right half only of the guard, as indicated, executes the 
movement. (101) 

If there be but few prisoners, the sergeant may indicate the 
point of division as above, and form the necessary interval by the com- 
mands: 

1. Right (or left) step, 2. MARCH, 3. Guard, 4. HALT, and close 
the intervals by the commands: 

1. Left (or right) step, 2. MARCH, 3. Guard, 4. HALT. (102) 

If sentinels are numerous, reliefs may, at the discretion of the 
commanding officer, be posted in detachments, and sergeants, as well as 
corporals, required to relieve and post them. (103) 

Corporal of the Guard 

370. A corporal of the guard receives and obeys orders from none but 
noncommissioned officers of the guard senior to himself, the officers of 
the guard, the officer of the day, and the commanding officer. (104) 

It is the duty of the corporal of the guard to post and relieve 
sentinels, and to instruct the members of his relief in their orders and 
duties. (105) 

Immediately after the division of the guard into reliefs the 
corporals will assign the members of their respective reliefs to posts by 
number, and a soldier so assigned to his post will not be changed to an- 
other during the same tour of guard duty, unless by direction of the 
commander of the guard or higher authority. Usually, experienced 
soldiers are placed over the arms of the guard, and at remote and respon- 
sible posts. (106) 

Each corporal will then make a list of the members of his relief, 
including himself. This list will contain the number of the relief, the 
name, the company, and the regiment of every member thereof, and the 
post to which each is assigned. The list will be made in duplicate, one 
copy to be given to the sergeant of the guard as soon as completed, the 
other to be retained by the corporal. (107) 

371. When directed by the commander of the guard, the corporal of 
the first relief forms his relief, and then commands: CALL OFF, 

[257] 



371 (contd.) 

Commencing on the riglit, the men call off alternately rear 
and front rank, **one," '*two/' ** three,'* *'four,*' and so on; if in 
single rank, they call off from right to left. The corporal then commands: 

1. Right, 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH. 

The corporal marches on the left, and near the rear file, in order 
to observe the march. The corporal of the old guard marches on the 
right of the leading file, and takes command when the last one of the 
old sentinels is relieved, changing places with the corporal of the new 
guard. (108) 

"When the relief arrives at six paces from a sentinel (See Par. 
168), the corporal halts it and commands, according to the number of 
the post: No. ( — ). 

Both sentinels execute port arms or saber; the new sentinel ap- 
proaches the old, halting about one pace from him. (See Par. 172.) 
(109) 

The corporals advance and place themselves, facing each other, 
a little in advance of the new sentinel, the old corporal on his right, 
the new corporal on his left, both at a right shoulder, and observe that 
the old sentinel transmits correctly his instructions. 

The following diagram will illustrate the positions taken: 

A 

R n 

n n n D n 

en aD 
n n n n 

n 

B 

R is the relief; A, the new corporal; B, the old; C, the new 
sentinel; D, the old. (110) 

The instructions relative to the post having been communicated, 
the new corporal commands. Post; both sentinels then resnme the right 
shoulder, face toward the new corporal and step back so as to allow the 
relief to pass in front of them. The new corporal then commands, 1. 
Forward, 2. MARCH; the old sentinel takes his place in rear of the relief 
as it passes him, his piece in the sam_e position as those of the relief. 
The new sentinel stands fast at a right shoulder until the relief has 
passed six paces beyond him, when he walks his post. The corporals 
take their places as the relief passes them. (Ill) 

Mounted sentinels are posted and relieved in accordance with 
the same principles. (112) 

On the return of the old relief, the corporal of the new guard 
falls out when the relief halts; the corporal of the old guard forms his 
relief on the left of the "old guard, salutes, and reports to the commander 
of his guard: **Sir, the relief is present"; or **Sir, (so and so) is absent,*' 
and takes his place in the guard. (113) 

[258] — 



371 (contd.) 
To post a relief other than that which is posted when the old 
guard IS relieved, its corporal commands: 

f V h}^"""^^ '^^'^^' ^- ^^'^'^ ^'' *""^ '* ^'-"^ are stacked, they are 
taken at the proper commands. 

The relief is formed facing to the front, with arms at an order- 
the men place themselves according to the numbers of their respective 
posts, VIZ, two, four, six, and so on, in the front rank, and one, three 
five and so on, in the rear rank. The corporal, standing about two paces 
in front of the center of his relief, then commands: Call off 
T.=« J"^^ o""*"* J,^" °*^ ^' prescribed. The corporal then commands: L 
Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Order, 4. ARMS; faces the commander of the 
guard, executes the rifle salute, reports: "Sir, the relief is present," or 

order Sr^'ni/' ''""*"' '^ ^''^" '^''^^ ''^ ^'^'^ ^ '^^ "^^^ ^^ 
^m.r.ov^'i'!?.^^^ commander of the guard directs the corporal: "Post 
fn« V ?•, ^ !^^ <^oi'Poral salutes and posts his relief as prescribed (Pars. 
108 to 111); the corporal of the relief on post does not go with the new 
reliet, except when necessary to show the way. (115) 

th '^1 '^'""i'' "'^ °^^ '^"^^' " ^' ^a^*^'^ '^'^'^ faced to the front at 

the guardhouse by the corporal of the new relief, who then falls out- the 
corporal of the old relief then steps in front of 'the relief and dSsse 
it by the proper commands. (116) 

ih« . ^^°f^ the pieces have been loaded before the relief was posted, 
he corporal will before dismissing the relief, see that no cartridges are 

ItrXne^rSr)'^ "^^^^^'^"- "^'^ ^^""^ '^''^ ^^^^^ '^ ^^^^-^^ 
Each corporal will thoroughly acquaint himself with all the 
special orders ot every sentinel on his relief, and see that each under- 
stands and correctly transmits such orders in detail to his successor. (118) 
nr. th if ! 7^*^ ^^ ** ^^*'* """^ noncommissioned officer constantly 
TJ^^l ' guardhouse, usually the corporal whose relief is on 

post. This noncommissioned officer takes post near the entrance of 

He w„r. f-' ""f ''°'' ""* '=*" '"^ ^'^'^ ^''^ g"ard when it is formed. 
He will have his rifle constantly with him. (119) 

r,.«r .J^^^f''''" it becomes necessary for the corporal to leave his post 
IZJ ^ T f *^' guardhouse, he will notify the sergeant of the 
guard, who will at once take his place, or designate another noncom- 
missioned officer to do so. (120) "oucom 

n. . He will see that no person enters the guardhouse, or euard tent 
Uy (Til) """'" °' *'' '""""^'^ '''''' ^"'"'^ ^'''''^' P^«P«^ author- 
will . ^''^"''^ ^"^y '^""'^^l «all for the corporal of the guard, the corporal 
wiil notify the sergeant of the guard before leaving the guardhouse. (122) 

[259] ^ 



371 (oontd.) 

He will at onee report to the commander of the guard any viola- 
tion of regulations or any unusual occurrence which is reported to him 
by a sentinel, or which comes to his notice in any other way. (123) 

Should a sentinel call: **The Guard,** the corporal will promptly 
notify the commander of the guard. (124) 

Should a sentinel call: ** Relief," the corporal will at once pro- 
ceed to the post of such sentinel, taking with him the man next for duty 
on that post. If the sentinel is relieved for a short time only, the cor- 
poral will again post him as soon as the necessity for his relief ceases. 
(125) 

When the countersign is used, the corporal at the posting of the 
relief during whose tour challenging is to begin gives the countersign 
to the members of the relief, excepting those posted at the guardhouse. 
(126) 

He will wake the corporal whose relief is next on post in time 
for the latter to verify the prisoners, form his relief, and post it at the 
proper hour. (127) 

Should the guard be turned out, each corporal will call his own 
relief, and cause its members to fall in promptly. (128) 

Tents or bunks in the same vicinity will be designated for the 
reliefs so that all the members of each relief may, if necessary, be 
found and turned out by the corporal in the least time and with the 
least confusion. (129) 

When challenged by a sentinel while posting his relief, the cor- 
poral commands: 1. Relief, 2. HALT; to the sentinel's challenge he an- 
swers ** Relief," and at the order of the sentinel he advances alone to 
give the countersign, or to be recognized. When the sentinel says, "Ad- 
vance relief," the corporal commands: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH. 

If to be relieved, the sentinel is then relieved as prescribed. (130) 

Between retreat and reveille, the corporal of the guard will chal- 
lenge all suspicious looking persons or parties he may observe, first halt- 
ing his patrol or relief, if either be with him. He will advance them in 
the same manner that sentinels on post advance like parties (Pars. 191 to 
197), but if the route of a patrol is on a continuous chain of sentinels, he 
should not challenge persons coming near him unless he has reason to 
believe that they have eluded the vigilance of sentinels. (131) 

Between retreat and reveille, whenever so ordered by an officer 
entitled to inspect the guard, the corporal will call: **Turn out the 
guard," announcing the title of the officer, and then, if not otherwise 
ordered he will salute and return to his post. (132) 

As a general rule he will advance parties approaching the guard 
at night in the same manner that sentinels on post advance like parties. 
Thus, the sentinel at the guardhouse challenges and repeats the answer 
to the corporal, as prescribed hereafter (Par. 200); the corporal, ad- 

^ [260] 



372-373 

vancing at **port arms," says: * 'Advance (so and so) with tlie counter- 
sign/* or "to be recongnized, * ' if there be no countersign used; the 
countersign being correctly given, or the party being duly recognized, 
the corporal says: ** Advance (so and so)*'; repeating the answer to the 
challenge of the sentinel. (133) 

When officers of different rank approach the guardhouse from 
different directions at the same time, the senior will be advanced first, 
and will not be made to wait for his junior. (134) 

Out of ranks and under arms, the corporal salutes with the rifle 
salute. He will salute all officers whether by day or night. (135) 

The corporal will examine parties halted and detained by sen- 
tinels, and if he has reason to believe the parties have no authority to 
cross sentinePs posts, will conduct them to the commander of the 
guard. (136) 

The corporal of the guard will arrest all suspicious looking 
characters prowling about the post or camp, all persons of a disorderly 
character disturbing the peace, and all persons taken in the act of 
committing crime against the> Government on a military reservation or 
post. All persons arrested by corporals of the guard, or by sentinels, 
will at once be conducted to the commander of the guard by the corporal. 
(137) 

Musicians of the Guard 

372. The musicians of the guard will sound call as prescribed by the 
commanding officer. (138) 

Should the guard be turned out for national or regimental colors 
or standards, uncased, the field music of the guard will, when the 
guard present arms, sound, **To the color** or **To the standard**; or, 
if for any person entitled thereto, the march, flourishes, or ruffles, pre- 
scribed in paragraphs 375, 376, and 377, A. E. (139) 

Orderlies and Color Sentinels 

373. When so directed by the commanding officer, the officer who 
inspects the guard at guard mounting will select from the members of 
the new guard an orderly for the commanding officer and such number 
of other orderlies and color sentinels as may be required. (140) 

For these positions the soldiers will be chosen who are most cor- 
rect in the performance of duty and in military bearing, neatest in 
person and clothing, and whose arms and accoutrements are in the 
best condition. Clothing, arms, and equipments must cenform to regu- 
lations. If there is any doubt as to the relative qualifications of two 
or more soldiers, the inspecting officer will cause them to fall out at the 
guardhouse and to form in line in single rank. He will then, by testing 
them in drill regulations, select the most proficient. The commander 
of the guard will be notified of the selection. (141) 

[261] 



373 (contd.) 

When directed by the commander of the guard to fall out and 
report, an orderly will give his name, company, and regiment to the 
sergeant of the guard, and, leaving his rifle in the arm rack in his com- 
pany quarters, will proceed at once to the officer to whom he is assigned, 

reporting: **Sir, Private , Company — , reports as orderly." 

(142) 

If the orderly selected be a cavalryman, he will leave his rifle 
in the arm rack of his troop quarters, and report with his belt on, but 
without side arms unless specially otherwise ordered. (143) 

Orderlies, while on duty as such, are subject only to the orders 
of the commanding officer and of the officers to whom they are ordered 
to report. (144) 

When an orderly is ordered to carry a message, he will be care- 
ful to d-eliver it exactly as it was given to him. (145) 

His tour of ducy ends when he is relieved by the orderly selected 
from the guard relieving his own. (146) 

Orderlies are members of the guard, and their name, company, 
and regiment are entered on the guard report and lists of the guard. 
(147) 

If a color line is established, sufficient sentinels are placed on 
the color line to guard the colors and stacks. (148) 

Color sentinels are posted only so long aPs the stacks are formed. 
The commander of the guard will divide the tiijie equally among them. 
(149) 

When stacks are broken, the color sentinels may be permitted 
to return -to their respective com.panies. They are required to report in 
person to the commander of the guard at reveille and retreat. They will 
fall in with the guard, under arms, at guard mounting. (150) 

Color sentinels are not placed on the regular reliefs, nor are 
their posts numbered. In calling for the corporal of the guard, they 
call: ** Corporal of the guard. Color line.'* (151) 

Officers or enlisted men passing the uncased colors will render 
the prescribed salute. If the colors are on the stacks, the salute will 
be made on crossing the color line or on passing the colors. (152) 

A sentinel placed over the colors will not permit them to be 
moved, except in the presence of an armed escort. Unless otherwise 
ordered by the commanding officer, he will allow no one to touch them 
but the color bearer. 

He will, not permit any soldier to take arms from the stacks, 
or to touch them, except by order of an officer or noncommissioned officer 
of the guard. 

If any person passing the colors or crossing the color line fails 
to salute the colors, the sentinel will caution him to do so, and if the 
caution be not heeded he will call the corporal of the guard and report 
the facts. (153) [262] 



374 

Privates of the Guard 
374. Privates are assigned to reliefs bv tlie commander of the guard, 
and to posts, usually, by the corporal of their relief. They will not 
change from one relief or post to another during the same tour of guard 
djity unless by proper authority. (154) 

Orders for Sentinels 
Orders for sentinels are of two classes: General orders and 
special orders. General orders apply to all sentinels. Special orders 
relate to particular posts and duties. (155) 

Sentinels will be required to memorize the following: 
My general orders are: 

1. To take charge of this post and all Government property in view. 

2. To walk my post in a military manner, keeping always on the 
alert and observing everjrthing that takes place within sight or hear- 
ing. 

3. To report all violations of orders I am instructed to enforce. 

4. To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the guardhouse 
than my own. 

5. To quit my post only when properly relieved. 

6. To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who relieves me 
all orders from the commanding officer, officer of the day, and officers and 
noncommissioned officers of the guard only. 

7. To talk to no one except in line of duty. 

8. In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm. 

9. To allow no one to commit a nuisance on or near my post. 

10. In any case not covered by instructions to call the corporal of 
the guard. 

11. To salute all officers, and all colors and standards not cased. 

12. To be especially watchful at night, and, during the time for 
challenging, to challenge all persons on or near my post, and to allow no 
one to pass without proper authority. (156) 

Regulations Relating to the General Orders for Sentinels 

No. 1: To take charge of this post and all Government property 
in view. 

All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are required to 
observe respect toward sentinels and members of the guard when such 
are in the performance of their duties. 157) 

A sentinel will at once report to the corporal of the guard every 
unusual or suspicious occurrence noted. (158) 

He will arrest suspicious persons prowling about the post or 
camp at any time, all parties to a disorder occurring on or near his 
post, and all, except authorized persons, who attempt to enter the camp 
at night, and will turn over to the corporal of the guard all persons 
arrested. (159) 

[263] 



374 (contd.) 

The number, limits, and extent of his post will invariably con- 
stitute part of the special orders of a sentinel on post. The limits of his 
post should be so defined as to include every place to which he is re- 
quired to go in the performance if his duties. 

No. 2: To walk my post in a military manner, keeping always 
on the alert and observing everything that takes place within sight or 
hearing. (160) 

A sentinel is not required to halt and change the position of his 
rifle on arriving at the end of his post, nor to execute to the rear, march, 
precisely as prescribed in the drill regulations, but faces about while walk- 
ing, in the manner most convenient to him, and at any part of his post 
as may be best suited to the proper performance of his duties. He carries 
his rifle on either shoulder, and in wet or severe weather, when not in a 
sentry box, may carry it at a secure. (161) 

Sentinels when in sentry boxes stand at ease. Sentry boxes 
will be used in wet weather only, or at other times when specially author- 
ized by the commanding officer. (162) 

In very hot weather, sentinels may be authorized to stand at 
e^ise on their posts, provided they can effectively discharge their duties 
in this position, but they will take advantage of this privilege only on 
the express authority of the officer of the day or the commander of 
the guard. (163) 

A mounted sentinel may dismount occasionally and lead his horse 
but will not relax his vigilance. 

No. 3: To report all violations of orders I am instructed to en- 
force. (164) 

A sentinel will ordinarily report a violation of orders when he 
is inspected or relieved, but if the case be urgent he will call the corporal 
of the guard, and also, if necessary, will arrest the offender. 

No. 4: To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the guard- 
house than my own. (165) 

To call the corporal, or the guard, for any purpose other than 
relief, fire, or disorder (Pars. 167 and 173), a sentinel will call, "Corporal 
of the guard, No. ( — ),*' adding the number of his post. In no case 
will any sentinel call, ** Never mind the corporal;** nor will the corporal 
heed such call if given. 

No. 5. To quit my post only when properly relieved. (166) 

If relief becomes necessary, by reason of sickness or other cause, 
a sentinel will call, '* Corporal of the guard, No. ( — ), Belief/' giving 
the number of his post. (167) 

Whenever a sentinel is to be relieved, he will halt, and with 
arms at a right shoulder, will face toward the relief when it is thirty 
paces from him. He will come to a port arms with the new sentinel, 
and in a low tone will transmit to him all the special orders relating 

12641 



374 (contd.) 

to the post, and any other information which will assist him to better 
perform his duties. 

No. 6: To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who relieves 
me, all orders from the commanding oflacer, officer of the day, and officers 
and noncommissioned officers of the guard only. (168) 

During this tour of duty a soldier is subject to the orders of 
the commanding officer, officer of the day, and officers and noncommis- 
sioned officers of the guard only; but any officer is competent to in- 
vestigate apparent violations of regulations by members of the guard. 
(169) 

A sentinel will quit his piece on an explicit order from any 
person from whom he lawfully receives orders while on post; under no 
circumstances will he yield it to any other person. Unless necessity there- 
for exists, no person will require a sentinel to quit his piece, even to 
allow it to be inspected. (170) 

A sentinel will not divulge the countersign (Pars. 209 to 217) 
to any one except the sentinel who relieves him, or to a person from 
whom he properly receives orders, on such person's verbal order given 
personally. Privates of the guard will not use the countersign except 
in the performance of their duties while posted as sentinels. 

No. 7: To talk to no one except in line of duty. (171) 

When calling for any purpose, challenging, or holding com- 
munication with any person, a dismounted sentinel, armed with a ritio 
or saber, will take the position of *^porf arms or saber. At nignt 
a dismounted sentinel, armed with a pistol, takes the position of raise 
pistol in challenging or holding communication. A mounted sentinel 
does not ordinarily draw his weapon in the daytime when challenging 
or holding conversation; but if drawn, he holds it at advance rifle, raise 
pistol, or port saber, according as he is armed with a rifle, pistol, or 
saber. At night, in challenging and holding conversation, bis weapon 
is drawn and held as just prescribed, depending on whether ho is armed 
with a rifle, pistol, or saber. 

No. 8: In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm. (172) 

In case of fire, a sentinel will call, "Fire No. ( — )," adding 
the number of his post; if possible, he will extinguish the fire himself. 
In case of disorder, he will call: **The Guard, No ( — )," adding the 
number of his post. If the danger be great, he will, in either case, dis- 
charge his piece before calling. 

No. 11: To salute all officers and alt colors and standards not 
cased. (173) 

When not engaged in the performance of a specific duty, the 
proper execution of which would prevent it, a member of the guard 
will salute all officers who pass him. This rule applies at all hours of the 
day or night, except in the case of mounted sentinels armed with a 

[265] 



374 (contd.) 

rifle or pistol, or dismounted sentinels armed with a pistol, after chal- 
lenging. (See Par. 181.) (174) 

Sentinels will salute as follows: A dismounted sentinel armed 
with a rifle or saber, salutes by presenting arms; if otherwise armed, 
he salutes with the right hand. 

A mounted sentinel, if armed with a saber and the saber be 
drawn, salutes by presenting saber; otherwise he salutes in all cases 
with the right hand. (175) 

To salute, a dismounted sentinel, with piece at a right shoulder 
or saber at a carry, halts and faces toward the person to be saluted 
when the latter arrives within thirty paces. 

The limit within which individuals and insignia of rank can be 
readily recognized is assumsd to be about 30 paces, and, therefore, at 
this distance cognizance is taken of the person or party to be saluted. 
(176) 

The salute is rendered at 6 paces; if the person to be saluted 
does not arrive within that distance, then when he is nearest. (177) 

A sentinel in a sentry box, armed with a rifle, stands at attention 
in the doorway on the approach of a person or party entitled to salute, 
and salutes by presenting arms according to the forgoing rules. 

If armed with a saber, he stands at a carry and salutes as be- 
fore. (178) 

A mounted sentinel on a regular post halts, faces, and salutes 
in accordance with the foregoing rules. If doing patrol duty, he salutes, 
but does not halt unless spoken to. (179) 

Sentinels salute, in accordance with the foregoing rules, all 
persons and parties entitled to compliments from the guard (Par. 244, 
227, and 228) : officers of the Army, Navy, and Marine Corps; military 
and naval officers of foreign powers; officers of volunteers, and militia 
officers when in uniform. (180) 

A .sentinel salutes as just prescribed when an officer comes on 
his post; if the officer holds communication with the sentinel, the sen- 
tinel again salutes when the officer leaves him. 

During the hours when challenging is prescribed, the first salute 
is given as soon as the officer has been duly recognized and advanced. 
A mounted sentinel armed with a rifle or pistol, or a dismounted sen- 
tinel armed with a pistol, does not salute after challenging. 

He stands at advance rifle or raise pistol until the officer passes. 
(181) 

In case of the approach of an armed party of the guard, the 
sentinel will halt when it is about 30 paces from him, facing toward the 
party with his piece at the right shoulder. If not himself relieved, he 
will, as the party passes, place himself so that the party will pass in 
front of him; he resumes walking his post when the party has reached 
6 paces beyond him. (182) 

[266] 



374 (contd.) 

An officer is entitled to the compliments prescribed, whether 
'in uniform or not. (183) 

A sentinel in communication with an officer will not interrupt 
the conversation to salute. In the case of seniors the officer will salute, 
whereupon the sentinel will salute. (184) 

When the flag is being lowered at retreat, a sentinel on post 
and in view of the flag will face the flag, and, at the first note of the 
**Star Spangled Banner'^ or to the color will come to a present arms. 
At the sounding of the last note he will resume walking his post. 

No. 12: To be especially watchful at night and during the time 
for challenging, to challenge all persons on or near my post, and to 
allow no one to pass v/ithout proper authority. (185) 

During challenging hours, if a sentinel sees any person or party 
on or near his post, he will advance rapidly along his post toward such 
person or party and when within about 30 yards will challenge sharply, 
**HALT. Who is there?" He will place himself in the best possible 
position to receive or, if necessary, to arrest the person or party. (186) 

In case a mounted party be challenged, the sentinel will call, 
**HALT. DISMOUNT. Who is there?" (187) 

The sentinel will permit only one of any party to approach him 
for the purpose of giving the countersign (Pars. 209 to 217), or if no 
coujitersign be used, of being duly recognized. When this is done the 
whole party is advanced, i. e., allowed to pass. (188) 

In all cases the sentinel must satisfy himself beyond a reason- 
able doubt that the parties are what they represent themselves to 'be 
and have a right to pass. If he is not satisfied, he must cause them to 
stand and call the corporal of the guard. So, likewise, if he have no 
authority to pass persons with the countersign, or when the party has 
not the countersign, or gives an incorrect one. (189) 

A sentinel will not permit any person to approach so close as 
to prevent the j>roper use of his own weapon before recognizing the 
person or receiving the countersign. (190) 

When two or more persons approach in one party, the sentinel 
on receiving an answer that indicates that some one in the party has 
the countersign, will say, ** Advance one wilfh the countersign," and, if 
the countersign is given correctly, will then say, ** Advance (So and so)," 
repeating the answer to his challenge. Thus, if the answer be, **Relief 
(friends with the countersign, patrol, etc.)," the sentinel will say, ** Ad- 
vance one with the countersign"; then, ** Advance relief (friends, patrol, 
etc.)." (191) 

If a person having the countersign approach alone, he is ad- 
vanced to give the countersign. Thus, if the answer be, **Friend with 
the countersign (or officer of the day, or etc.),'* the sentinel will say, 

[267] 



375 

* 'Advance, friend (or officer of the day, or etc.), with the counter- 
sign**; then, V* Advance, friend (or officer of the day, or etc.)." (192) 

If two or more persons approach a sentinel's post from different 
directions at the same time, all such persons are challenged in turn and 
required to halt and to remain halted until advanced. 

The senior is first advanced, in accordance with the foregoing 
rules. (193) 

If a party is already advanced and in communication with a 
sentinel, the latter will challenge any other party that may approach; 
if the party challenged be senior to the one already on his post, the 
sentinel will advance the new party at once. The senior may allow 
him to advance any or all of the other parties; otherwise, the sentinel 
will not advance any of them until the senior leaves him. He will 
then advance the senior only of the remaining parties, and so on. (194) 

The following order of rank will govern a sentinel in advancing 
different persons or parties approaching his post: Commanding officer, 
officer of the day, officer of the guard, officers, patrols, reliefs, noncom- 
missioned officers of the guard in order of rank, friends. (195) 

A sentinel will never allow himself to be surprised, nor permit 
two parties to advance upon him at the same time. (196) 

If no countersign be used, the rules for challenging are the same. 
The rules for advancing parties are modified only as follows: Instead 
of saying ** Advance (so and so) with the countersign,** the sentinel 
will say^ ** Advance (so and so) to be recognized.*' Upon recognition 
he will say, ** Advance (so and so).** (197) 

Answers to a sentinePs challenge intended to confuse or mislead 
him are prohibited, but the use of such an answer as **Friends with the 
countersign,** is not to be understood as misleading, but as the usual 
answer made by officers, patrols, etc., when the purpose of their visit 
makes it desirable that their official capacity should not be announced. 
(198) 

Special Orders For Sentinels at the Post of the Guard- 
375. Sentinels posted at the guard will be required to memorize the 
following : 

Between reveille an4 retreat to turn out the guard for all persons 
designated by the commanding officer, for all colors or standards not 
cased, and in time of war for all armed parties approaching my post, 
except troops at drill and reliefs and detachments of the guard. 

At night, after challenging any person or party, to advance no 
one but call the corporal of the guard, repeating the answer to the chal- 
lenge. (199) 

After receiving an answer to his challenge, the sentinel calls, 
**Oorporal of the guard (So and so),V* repeating the answer to the chal- 
lenge. 

[268] 



376 

fle does not in such cases repeat the number of his post. (200) 

He remains in the position assumed in challenging until the 
corporal has recognized or advanced the person or party challenged, 
when he resumes walking his post, or, if the person or party be entitled 
thereto, he salutes and, as soon as the salute has been acknowledged, 
resumes walking his post. (201) 

The sentinel at the post of the guard will be notified by di- 
rection of the cammanding officer of the presence in camp or garrison of 
persons entitled to the compliment. (Par. 224.) (202) 

The following examples illustrate the manner in which the sentinel 
at the post of the guard will turn out the guard upon the approach of 
persons or parties entitled to the compliment (Pars. 224, 227, and 228): 
**Turn out the guard, Commanding Officer*'; **Turn out the guard, 
Governor of a Territory*'; **Turn out the guard, national colors"; 
**Turn out the guard, armed party"; etc. 

At the approach of the new guard at guard mounting the sen- 
tinel will call **Turn out the guard, armed party." (203) 

Should the person named by the sentinel not desire the guard 
formed, he will salute, whereupon the sentinel will call ** Never mind the 
guard." (204) 

After having called **Turn out the guard," the sentinel will 
never call **Never mind the guard," on the approach of an armed 
party. (205) 

Though the guard be already formed he will not fail to call 
**Turn out the guard," as required in his special orders, except that 
the guard will not be turned out for any person while his senior is at 
or coming to the post of the guard. (206) 

The sentinels at the post of the guard will warn the commander 
of the approach of any armed body and of the presence in the vicinity 
of all suspicious or disorderly persons. (207) 

In case of fire or disorder in sight or hearing, the sentinel at the 
guardhouse will call the corporal of the guard and report the facts to 
him. (208) 

Countersigns and Paroles 
376. Forty- fourth Article of War. Any person belonging to the armies 
of the United States who makes known the watchword to any person 
not entitled to receive it, according to the rules and discipline of war, 
or presumes to give a parole or watchword different from that which 
he received, shall suffer death or such other punishment as a court- 
martial may direct. (See Par. 171.) (209) 

The countersign is a word given daily from the principal head- 
quarters of a command to aid guards and sentinels in identifying persons 
who may be authorized to pass at night. 

[269] 



376 (contd.) 

It is given to sucli persons as maybe authorized to pass and re- 
pass sentinels' posts during the night, and to officers, noncommissioned 
officers, and sentinels of the guard. (210) 

The parole is a word used as a check on the countersign in order 
to obtain more accurate identification of persons. It is imparted only 
to those who are entitled to inspect guards and to commanders of guards. 

The parole or countersign, or both, are sent sealed in the form 
of an order to those entitled to them. (211) 

When the commander of the guard demands the parole, he will 
advance and receive it as the corporal receives the countersign. (See 
Par. 133.) (212) 

As the communications containing the parole and countersign 
must at times be distributed by many orderlies, the parole intrusted 
to many officers, and the countersign and parole to many officers and 
sentinels, and as both the countersign and parole must, for large com- 
mands, be prepared several days in advance, there is always danger 
of their being lost or becoming known to persons who would make im- 
proper use of them; moreover, a sentinel is too apt to take it for 
granted that any person who gives 'the right countersign is what he 
represents himself to be; hence for outpost duty there is greater security 
in omitting the use of the countersign and parole, or in using them 
with great caution. The chief reliance should be upon personal recogni- 
tion or identification of all persons claiming authority to pass. 

Persons whose sole means of identification is the countersign, 
or concerning whose authority to pass there is a reasonable doubt, should 
not be allowed to pass without the authority of the corporal of the 
guard after proper investigation; the corporal will take to his next 
superior any person about whom he is not competent to decide. (213) 

The countersign is usually the name of a battle; the parole, that 
of a general or other distinguished person. (214) 

When they can not be communicated daily, a series of words 
for some days in advance may be sent to posts or detachments that are 
to use the same parole or countersign as the main body. (215) 

If the countersign be lost, or if a member of the guard desert 
with it, the comm^ander on the spot will substitute another for it and 
report the case at once to headquarters. (216) 

In addition to the countersign, use may be made of preconcerted 
signals, such as strildng the rifle with the. hand or striking the hands 
together a certain number of times, as agreed upon. Such signals may 
be used only by guards that occupy exposed points. 

They are used before the countersign is given, and must not be 
communicated to anyone not entitled to know the countersign. Their 
use is intended to prevent the surprise of a sentinel. 

[270] 



377-378 

In the daytime signals such as raising a cap or a handkerchief 
in a prearranged manner may be used by sentinels to communicate with 
the guard or with each other. (217) 

Guard Patrols 

377. A guard patrol consists of one or more men detailed for the 
performance of some special service connected with guard duty. (218) 

If the patrol be required to go beyond the chain of sentinels, 
the officer or noncommissioned officer in charge will be furnished with 
the countersign, and the outposts and sentinels warned. (219) 

If challenged by a sentinel, the patrol is halted by its commander, 
and the noncommissioned officer accompanying it advances alone and 
gives the countersign. (220) 

Watchmen 

Enlisted men may be detailed as watchmen or as overseers over 
prisoners, and as such will receive their orders and perform their duties 
as the commanding officer may direct. (221) 

Compliments From Guards 

378. The compliment from a guard consists in the guard turning out 
and presenting arms. (See Par. 50.) No compliments will be paid 
between retreat and reveille except as provided in paragraphs 361 and 
362, nor will any person other than those named in paragraph 224 re- 
ceive the compliment. (222) 

Though a guard does not turn out between retreat and reveille 
as a matter of compliment, it may be turned out for inspection at any 
time by a person entitled to inspect it. (223) 

Between reveille and retreat the following persons are entitled 
to the compliment: The President, sovereign or chief magistrate of a 
foreign country, and members of a royal family; Vice-President; Presi- 
dent and President pro tempore of the Senate; American and foreign 
ambassadors; members of the Cabinet; Chief Justice; Speaker of the 
House of Eepresentatives; committees of Congress officially visiting a 
military post; governors within their respective States and Territories; 
governors generala; Assistant Secretary of War officially visiting a 
military post; all general officers of the Army; general officers of foreign 
services visiting a post; naval, marine, volunteer, and militia officers in 
the service of the United States and holding the rank of general officer; 
American or foreign envoys or ministers; ministers accredited to the 
United States; charges d'affaires accredited to the United States; consuls 
general accredited to the United States; commanding officer of a coast 
artillery district, coast defense command, post, fort or camp; officer of 
the day. (224) (C. M. I. G. D., No. 1, Feb. 24, 1915.) 

a The term "governors general" shall be taken to mean administrative officers 
under whom officers with the title of governor are acting. 

[271] 



370 

The relative rank^ between officers of the Army and Navy is as 
follows: General with admiral, lieutenant general with the vice admiral, 
major general with rear admiral, brigadier general with commodore,b 
colonel with captain, lieutenant colonel with commander, major with 
lieutenant commander, captain with lieutenant, first lieutenant with lieu- 
tenant (junior grade), second lieutenant with ensign. (A. E. 12.) (225) 

Sentinels will not be required to memorize paragraph 224, and 
except in the cases of general officers of the Army, the commanding 
officer, and the officer of the day, they will be advised in each case of 
the presence in camp or garrison of persons entitled to the compliment. 
(226) 

Guards will turn out and present arms when the national or 
regimental colors or standards, not cased, are carried past by a guard 
or an armed party. This rule also applies when the party carrying the 
colors is at drill. If the drill is conducted in the vicinity of the guard- 
house, the guard mil be turned out when the colors first pass, and not 
thereafter. (227) 

In case the remains of a deceased officer or soldier are carried 
past, the guard will turn out and present arms. (228) 

In time of war all guards will turn out under arms when armed 
.parties, except troops at drill and reliefs or detachments of the guard, 
approach their post. (See Par. 53.) (229) 

The commander of the guard will be notified of the presence 
in camp or garrison of all persons entitled to the compliment, except 
general officers of the Army, the commanding officer, and the officer of 
the day. Members of the guard will salute all persons entitled to the 
compliment and all officers in the military or naval service of foreign 
powers, officers of the Army, Navy and Marine Corps, officers of volun- 
teers, and officers of militia when in uniform. (230) 

General Rules Concerning Guard Duty 
379. Thirty-sixth Article of War. No soldier shall hire another to 
do his duty for him. (231) 

Thirty-eighth Article of War. Any soldier who is found drunk 
on his guard, party, or other duty shall suffer such punishment as a 
court-martial may direct. (232) 

All material instructions given to a member of the guard by an 
officer harving authority will be promptly communicated to the com- 
mander of the guard by the officer giving them. (233) 

Should the guard be formed, soldiers will fall in ranks under arms. 
At roll call, each man, as his name or number and relief are called, will 
answer ''Here,'' and come to an order arms. (234) 

b The grade of commodore ceased to exist as a grade on the active list of the 
Navy of the United States on Mar. 3, 1899. By section 7 of the act of Mar. 3, 
1899, the nine junior rear admirals are authorized to receive the pay and allowances 
of m brigadier general of the Army. 

1272} 



880 

Whenever the guard or a relief is dismissed, each member not 
at once required for duty will place his rifle in the arms racks, if they 
be provided, and will not remove it therefrom unless he requires it in 
the performance of some duty. (235) 

Without permission from the commander of the guard, mem- 
bers of the main guard, except orderlies, will not leave the immediate 
vicinity of the guard house. Permission to leave will not be granted 
except in cases of necessity. (236) 

Members of the main guard, except orderlies, will not remove 
their accoutrements or clothing without permission from the commander 
of the guard. (Par. 66.) (237) 

Prisoners 
380. Articles of war 66y 67, 68, 69 and 70 have special reference to the 
confinement of prisoners and should be carefully borne in mind (238) 

The commander of the guard will place a civilian in confine- 
ment on an order from higher authority only, unless such civilian is 
arrested while in the act of committing some crime withtin the limits 
of the military jurisdiction; in which case the commanding officer will 
be immediately notified. (239) 

Except as provided in the twenty-fourth article of war, or when 
restraint is necessary, no soldier will be confined without the order of 
an officer, who shall previously inquire into his offense. (A. E. 930.; 
(240) 

An officer ordering a soldier into confinement will send, as soon 
as practicable, a written statement, signed by himself, to the commander 
of the guard, setting forth the name, company and regiment of such 
soldier, and a brief statement of the alleged offense. It is a sufficient 
statement of the offense to give the number and article of war under 
which the soldier is charged. (241) 

A prisoner, after his first day of confinement, and until his 
sentence has been duly promulgated, is considered as held in confine- 
ment by the commanding officer. After due promulgation of his sentence, 
the prisoner is held in confinement by authority of the officer who re- 
views the proceedings of the court awarding sentence. The commander 
of the guard will state in his report, in the proper place, the name of 
the officer by whom the prisoner was originally confined. (242) 

Enlisted men against whom charges have been preferred will 
be designated as ''awaiting trial''; enlisted men who have been tried 
will, prior to the promulgation of the result, be designated as ''await- 
Jjig result of trial''; enlisted men serving sentence of confinement, not 
involving dishonorable discharge, will be designated as "garrison pris- 
oners." Persons sentenced to dismissal or dishonorable discharge and 
to terms of confinement at military posts or elsewhere will be designated 
as "general prisoners." (A. R. 928.) (243) 

[273] 



380 (contd.) 

The sentences of prisoners will be read to them when the ordei 
promulgating the same is received. The^ofiIcer of the guard, or the officer 
of the day, if there be no officer of the guard, will read them unless 
the commanding officer shall direct otherwise. (244) 

When the date for the commencement of a term of Confinement 
imposed by sentence of a court-martial is not expressly fixed by sen- 
tence, the term of confinement begins on the date of the order promul- 
gating it. The sentence is continuous until the term expires, except when 
the person sentenced is absent without authority. (A. E. 969.) (245) 

When soldiers awaiting trial or the result of trail, or under- 
going sentence, commit offenses for which they are tried, the second 
sentence will be executed upon the expiration of the first. (246) 

Prisoners awaiting trial by, or undergoing sentence of a general 
court-martial, and those confined for serious offenses, will be kept apart, 
when practicable, from those confined by sentence of an inferior court, 
or for minor offenses. Enlisted men in confinement for minor offenses, 
or awaiting trial or the result of trial for the same, will ordinarily be 
sent to work under charge of unarmed overseers instead of armed sen 
tinels, and will be required to attend drills unless the commanjiing 
officer shall direct otherwise. (247) 

Prisoners, other than general prisoners, will be furnished with 
food from their respective companies or from the organizations to which 
they may be temporarily attached. 

The food of prisoners will, when practicable, be sent to their 
places of confinement, but post commanders may arrange to send the 
prisoners, under proper guard, to their messes for meals. 

When there is no special mess for general prisoners, they will be 
attached for rations to companies. 

Enlisted men bringing meals for the prisoners will not be allowed 
to enter the prison room. (See Par. 289.) (248) 

With the exception of those specially designated by the com- 
manding officer, no prisoners will be allowed to leave the guard house 
unless under charge of a sentinel and passed by an officer or noncommis- 
sioned officer of the guard. The commanding officer may authorize certain 
garrison prisoners and paroled general prisoners to leave the guard house, 
not under the charge of a sentinel, for the purpose of working outside 
under such surveillance and restrictions as he may impose. (249) 

Prisoners reporting themselves sick at sick call, or at the time 
designated by the commanding officer, will be sent to the hospital under 
charge of proper guard, with a sick report kept for the purpose. The 
recommendation of the surgeon will be entered in the guard report 
(250) 

The security of sick prisoners in the hospital devolves upon the 
post surgeon, who will, if necessary, apply to the post commander for 
a guard. (261) 

[274] 



380 (contd.) ' 

Prisoners will be paraded with the guard only when directed 
by the commanding officer or the officer of the day. (252) 

A prisoner under charge of a sentinel will not salute an officer. 
(253) 

All serviceable clothing which belongs to a prisoner, and his 
blankets, will accompany him to the post designated for his confine- 
ment, and will be fully itemized on the clothing list sent to that post. 
The guard in charge of the prisoner during transfer will be furnished 
with a duplicate of this list and will be held responsible for the de- 
livery of all articles itemized therein, with the prisoner. At least one 
serviceable woolen blanket will be sent with every such prisoner so 
transferred. (A. R. 939.) (254) 

When mattresses are not supplied, each prisoner in the guard- 
house will be allowed a bed sack and 30 pounds of straw per month 
for bedding. So far as practicable, iron bunks will be furnished to all 
prisoners in post guardhouses and prison rooms. (A. R. 1084.) (255) 

If the number of prisoners, including general prisoners confined 
at a post justifies it, the commanding officer will detail a commissioned 
officer as '* officer in charge of prisoners.^' At posts where the average 
number of prisoners continually in confinement is less than 12, the de- 
tail of an officer in charge of prisoners will not be made. (256) 

Eules and Regulations for the Government of General Prisoners at Posts. 

The officer in charge of prisoners, when one is detailed, will 
make a daily inspection of the cells, and prison rooms and will inspect 
the food and submit to the commanding officer any complaints about 
the same. (257) 

He will have charge of the property, money, and valuables be- 
longing to general prisoners, which they are not permitted to keep in their 
possession, and will disburse said money, when desired by the owner, 
for purposes approved by the commanding officer. If there be no officer 
in charge of prisoners, this duty will be intrusted to the adjutant. (258) 

No general prisoner will be released from confinement except 
on an order communicated by the commanding officer, who, before giv- 
ing such order, will verify the date of expiration of tlie prisoner's sen- 
tence by examining all orders fixing or modifying the term of confine- 
ment. (259) 

The following records and reports will be kept: Record of gen- 
eral prisoner, on blank supplied by the Adjutant General's Department; 
morning report, and clothing book (ordinary blank book without special 
ruling furnished by the Quartermaster's Department). (260) 

Paragraphs 262 to 295 of this manual will be read to or by 
every general prisoner as soon as practicable after his confinement, and 
a copy of these rules and regulations, which will be furnished by the 

[275] , 



380 (contd.) 

Adjutant General's Department, will be kept posted in each cell and 

room. (261) i 

After a general prisoner, who is serving sentence at a post, has 
served one-half of his sentence, he may submit to the commanding officer 
of the post an application to be placed upon parole during working 
hours for the remainder of the term of confinement. Such application 
will contain a pledge on the part of the applicant to comply with all 
general conditions under which general prisoners may be paroled, and 
also with any special requirements that may from time to time be made 
of him. Upon receipt of such an application, the post commander may, 
in the exercise of his discretion, parole the prisoner during working 
hours for work in the Quartermaster Corps upon condition that if the 
prisoner's conduct is not good the parole status will be forfeited. The 
granting of the qualified parole here authorized does not constitute a 
release of the prisoner from military custody or control, but merely 
authorizes a relaxation of the strict rule which would otherwise require 
the presence of a guard whenever the prisoner is outside of the guard- 
house. In determining what constitutes one-half of a sentence the 
calculation will be based upon the prisoner's term without deduction for 
good conduct. The authorized abatement for good conduct will con- 
tinue to accrue during the good conduct of a general prisoner on parole. 
4 A. E. 943.) No paroled general prisoner will be employed about the 
post exchange or the quarters of any officer except as a mechanic or 
laborer under the dixection of the quartermaster. (262) 

Every general prisoner on admission will be minutely searched 
and will be permitted to retain in his possession only proper clothing 
and necessary foilet articles. He will then be required to bathe, his 
hair will be cut close, and his beard, whiskers, and mustache trimmed. 
(263) 

General prisoners will bathe at least once a week and will wear 
their hair short. The hair and beard of a general j)risoner may be 
allowed to grow during the last month of his confinement. (264) 

All articles of personal property taken from a general prisoner 
will be marked with his name and stored until he is released, when they 
will be returned to him. (265) 

The prison rooms will be properly policed, good order and quiet 
demeanor maintained, and necessary measures taken for security. The 
names of occupants of xiells will be posted on the doors. Each cell and 
prison room will be inspected at least once a day for the purpose of 
detecting contraband articles and of seeing whether any alterations have 
been made or attempted which might facilitate escape. (266) 

The diet of general prisoners shall be determined by the com- 
manding officer. A general prisoner confined on bread-and-water diet 
will receive an allowance of 18 ounces of bread each day and as much 
water as he may desire. (267) 

12761 



380 (contd.) 

Meals will be served in prison rooms or cells when no separate 
mess is provided. Ample time and a sufficient quanity of food will be 
allowed for each meal. (268) 

Each general prisoner will be furnished with and will have at 
all times one complete suit of outer clothing, two complete suits of 
underclothing, one pair of shoes, one hat, and one or two blankets, de- 
pending on the temperature. The outer clothing of general prisoners 
will be conspicuously marked '^P'' and divested of all ornament. When 
released such prisoner will have in his possession a serviceable suit of 
clothing, the outer garments bearing no prison mark. (269) 

At the weekly inspection each general prisoner will stand by 
his bed or bunk, and the inspecting officer will see that the rules for 
cleanliness have been observed. The bedding and clothing will be folded, 
clothing on top of the bedding. General prisoners will be held to a strict 
accountability for clothing in their possession, and they are forbidden 
to alter it without authority. (270) 

General prisoners will be kept at hard labor daily except Sunday, 
January 1, February 22, May 30, July 4, Labor Day, Thanksgiving 
Day, and Christmas Day, but in case of pressing necessity they may 
be employed on these days. So far as practicable, they will perform 
all scavenger duties at the post. They will not be employed in cultivating 
company or private gardens, nor upon ordinary police about stables or 
barracks. (271) 

General prisoners who desire an interview with the commanding 
officer will make application to the officer in charge, stating the pur- 
pose. The officer in charge will receive oral complaints which may be 
made by them, and will notify them of his action. Complaints in writ- 
ing will also be addressed to him, and will be laid before the com- 
manding officer with such information as he may possess bearing on the 
case. If there be no officer detailed in charge of prisoners, the officer 
of the day will receive application for interviews, complaints, etc., 
under this paragraph. (272) 

Wrongs will be righted, if possible, but those who make frivolous 
or untruthful complaints will be punished. General prisoners will be 
permitted to submit explanations for offenses for which reported. No 
general prisoner will sign any protest or petition in conjunction with 
other prisoners; each will make his own complaints or requests. (273) 

A record will be kept of all reports against general prisoners, 
with the disciplinary punishment awarded in each case. (274) 

Except as otherwise ordered by the commanding officer, general 
prisoners will be constantly under charge of the guard, and in the event 
of mutiny, attempted outbreak or escape, or any disorder immediate 
action will be taken by the guard afld enough force used to restore 
order. The force used in any case will be limited to that necessary to 
the enforcement of these rules, the preservation of order, and the proper 
control of prisoners. (275) 

[277] 



380 (contd.) 

No disciplinary punishment will be inflicted upon general pris- 
oners unless by direction of the commanding officer, and then only after 
a full investigation of each case. (276) 

A general prisoner who violates any of these rules, who is insolent, 
insubordinate, disrespectful, or disorderly, or who uses indecent or pro- 
fane language may be disciplined by — 

(a) Being deprived of a mieal. 

(b) Being locked in his cell when not at work. 

(c) Performing extra hard or disagreeable labor. 

(d) Solitary confinement on bread-an-water diet. 

(e) Forfeiture of good-conduct time. 

In addition to being disciplined as indicated he may also be 
tried by court-martial if the gravity of the offense so demands. 

Solitary confinement on br.ead and water will not exceed 14 con- 
secutive days at any one period, and will not be repeated until an in- 
terval of 14 days shall have elapsed and shall not exceed 84 days in one 
year. (277) 

No good-conduct time can be forfeited in advance. When it is 
necessary to discipline a general prisoner who has. none to his credit, 
the punishment must take some other form. (278) 

Any general prisoner who attempts to escape will forfeit all 
good-conduct time previously earned. A recaptured prisoner will suffer 
the same forfeiture. In either case, the prisoner may, in addition, be 
tried by court-martial. (279) 

A general prisoner who refuses to work may, for the first of- 
fense, be closely confined and deprived of his next meal, but food will 
be allowed him as soon as he consents to resume work; and he may 
be further punished for his offense by loss of not more than 20 days' 
good-conduct time, or by being locked in his cell for not more than 30 
days, except when at work. (280) 

Letters will be sent out. by general prisoners through the officer 
in charge or officer of the day. Each prisoner will be permitted to write 
to his family or friends once in each month, all letters to be submitted 
unsealed (without stamp or envelope) for inspection. Paper will be 
furnished to prisoners for official as well as private communications. 
(281) 

Prison authorities without the consent of a general prisoner will 
not open and inspect letters addressed to him. Such letters may, how- 
ever, be retained unopened until the prisoner is released, or his letters 
otherwise disposed of under judicial process. (282) 

General prisoners will be permitted to make application for 
clemency as soon after their arrival at a post for confinement as they 
may desire, but thereafter not until six months shall have elapsed since 
the date of final action upon the last application. Applications should 

[278] 



380 (contd.) 

be addressed to the officer in charge (or the officer of the day), but 
applicants may state to what authority they wish to appeal. (283) 

Applications for clemency should be based on reasonable grounds. 
Good conduct is rewarded by an allowance of good-conduct time, but 
does not of itself furnish any claim to clemency or further mitigation 
of sentence. It will aid, however, in obtaining favorable consideration 
for applications based upon other grounds. (284) 

General prisoners, other than those confined in penitentiaries; 
will be allowed in abatement of their terms of confinement, when serv- 
ing sentences of over 3 months and not over 12 months, 5 days for each 
complete period of 25 days during the whole of which their conduct 
has been good; but the abatement of 5 days so authorized shall not 
have the effect in any case of reducing the confinement below 3 months. 
On sentences exceeding 1 year there will be allowed the foregoing abate- 
ment for the first year of the sentence, including abatement, and there- 
after 10 days for each complete period of 20 days during the whole 
of which the conduct of the prisoners has been good. Abatements thus 
authorized may be forfeited wholly or in part by subsequent miscon- 
duct, such forfeiture to be determined by the commanding officer of 
the post where the prisoner is confined. A general prisoner serving 
sentence in a penitentiary will receive the abatement authorized for 
convicts in that penitentiary. (A. E. 942.) (285) 

In order to secure uniformity in computing abatement of terms 
of confinement, the following method of computation will be used: 

A general prisoner will be credited at the. beginning of his con- 
finement with all the good-conduct time that can be earned in his case 
during the entire period of his sentence. All months will be assumed to 
consist of 30 days. When forfeitures of good-conduct time are imposed 
they will be deducted from the amount of the prisoner's credit, but 
care will be taken not to impose or deduct a forfeiture in excess of the 
amount of good-conduct time that has actually been earned at date of 
forfeiture. (A. E. 942.) Except when the loss of good -conduct time is 
prescribed for specific offenses, the other minor penalties enumerated 
in paragraph 275 will ordinarily be inflicted before resort is had to loss 
of good-conduct time. (286) 

Talking, gazing about, or laughing in ranks is prohibited. Gen- 
eral prisoners who are not at work will stand at attention when addressed 
by an officer or concommissioned officer. Those at work will, under 
no circumstances, leave their places of employment without the per- 
mission of the noncom.missioned officer or sentinel in charge of the party. 
(287) 

A general prisoner desiring to speak to a sentinel will hold up 
his hand as a signal for the desired permission. (288) 

[279] 



880 (contd.) 

No persons will be permitted to enter the prison rooms without 
authority from the commanding officer, the officer of the day, or the 
officer in charge. (289) 

The beds will be neatly made up as soon as the cells are un- 
locked. The night buckets will be emptied, cleaned, and put in the 
place provided for them during the day. A small quantity of disinfect- 
ing fluid will be placed in each bucket, and the buckets will be taken 
into the cells immediately after supper. (290) 

Spitting on the walls or floors of cells and prison rooms, or 
defacing them, is forbidden. Any general prisoner who makes unneces- 
sary litter or dirt in the prison will be reported to the officer in charge 
or officer of the day. (291) 

• Trafficking with general prisoners is forbidden. (292) 

General prisoners will be in bed at taps. Loud talking or loud 
noises of any kind will not be permitted at any time. Strict silence is 
enjoined after tattoo. (293) 

General prisoners will be respectful in their treatment of one 
another. They are forbidden to hold any conversation with soldiers or 
citizens, except on a matter of duty, without authority from the com- 
manding officer, officer of the day, or officer in charge. (294) 

A record of all violations of these rules will be kept by the 
provost sergeant or commander of the guard, and report of the same 
will be made to the officer in charge of prisoners or the officer of the day, 
in time to accompany the morning report of general prisoners. (295) 

The foregoing rules will be enforced with reference to garrison 
prisoners so far as applicable. (296) 

Garrison prisoners will be allowed in abatement of their terms 
of confinement when serving sentences of 1 month, 5 days for good 
conduct. On sentences exceeding 1 month they will be allowed the 
foregoing abatement for the first month of the sentence, and there- 
after 10 days for each complete period of 20 days during the whole of 
which their conduct has been good. Abatements thus authorized may 
be forfeited, wholly or in part, by subsequent misconduct, such for- 
feiture to be determined by the commanding officer of the post where 
the prisoner is confined. (A. R. 942.) (297) 

After a garrison prisoner has served one-half of his sentence he 
may, if his enlistment has not expired, submit to the commander of the 
post where the sentence is being executed a request to be put on proba- 
tion for the remainder of the term of confinement adjudged, and upon 
the request being granted the soldier will be restored to duty upon 
condition that if his conduct is not good while on probation he will 
be required tj) serve the remainder of his sentence. In determining 
what constituted one-half of a sentence the calculation will be based 
upon the prisoner's term without deduction for good conduct. The 

[280] 



381 

authorized abatement for good conduct will continue to accrue during the 
good conduct of a garrison prisoner on probation. (A. E. 943.) (298) 

Guarding Prisoners. 

381. The sentinel at the post of the guard has charge of the prisoners 
except when they have been turned over to the prisoner guard or over- 
seers. (Par. 247 and SOO to 304.) 

(a) He will allow none to escape. 

(b) He will allow none to cross his post leaving the guardhouse 
except when passed by an officer or noncommissioned officer of the 
guard. 

(c) He will allow no one to communicate with prisoners without per- 
mission from proper authority. 

(d) He will promptly report to the corporal of the guard any sus- 
picious noise made by the prisoners. 

(e) He will be prepared to tell whenever asked how many prisoners 
are in the guardhouse and how many are out at work or elsewhere. 

Whenever prisoners are brought to his post returning from work 
or elsewhere, he will halt them and call the corporal of the guard, notify- 
ing him of the number of prisoners returning. Thus: *' Corporal of the 
guard, (so many) prisoners." 

He will not allow prisoners to pass into the guardhouse until 
the corporal of the guard has responded to the call and ordered him to 
do so. (299) 

Whenever practicable special guards will be. detailed for the 
particular duty of guarding working parties composed of such prisoners 
as cannot be placed under overseers. (Par. 247.) (300) 

The prisoner guard and overseers will be commanded by the 
police officer; if there be no police officer, then by the officer of the 
day. (301) ^ . 

The provost sergeant is sergeant of the prisoner guard and 
overseers, and as such receives orders from the commanding officer and 
the commander of the prisoner guard only. (302) 

Details for prisoner guard are marched to the guardhouse and 
mounted by being inspected by the commander of the main guard, who 
determines whether all of the men are in proper condition to perform 
their duties and whether their arms and equipments are in proper con- 
dition, and rejects any men found unfit. (303) 

When prisoners have been turned over to the prisoner guard or 
overseers, such guards or overseers are responsible for them under their 
commander, and all responsibility and control of the main guard ceases 
until they are returned tc the main guard. (Par. 306.) (304) 

If a prisoner attempts to escape, the sentinel will call **Halt*'. 
If he fails to halt when the sentinel has once repeated his call, and if 

[281] 



S81 (contd.) 

there be no other possible means of preventing his escape, the sentinel 

will fire upon him. 

The following will more fully explain the important duties of 

a sentinel in this connection: 

(CIRCULAR.) * War Department, 

Adjutant General's Office, 
Washington, November i, 1887, 
By direction of the Secretary of War the following is published for the information 
of the Army: 

United States Circuit Court, Eastern District of Michigan, August 1, 1887. 

The United States v. James Clark. 

The circuit court has jurisdiction of a homicide committed by one soldier upon 

another within a military reservation of the United States. 
If a homicide be committed by a military guard without malice and in the per- 
formance of his supposed duty as a soldier, such homicide is excusable, unless 
it was manifestly beyond the scope of his authority or was such that a man of 
ordinary sense and understanding would know that it was illegal. 
It seems that the sergeant of fhe guard has a right to shoot a military convict if there 

be no other possible means of preventing his escape. 
The common-law distinction between felonies and misdemeanors has no application 

to military offenses. 
While the finding of a court of inquiry acquitting the prisoner of all blame is not 
a legal bar to a prosecution, it is entiled to weight as an expression of the 
views of the military court of the necessity of using a musket to prevent the 
escape of the deceased. 

« * * » * * « 

By order of the Secretary of War: 

R. C. Drumm, 
Adjutant General, 
The following is taken from Circular No. 3 of 1883, from Head- 
quarters Department of the Columbia: 

Vancouver Barracks, W. T., 

April 20, 1883. 
To the Assistant Adjutant General, 
Department of the Columbia. 
Sir: 

A sentinel is placed as guard over prisoners to prevent their escape, and for this 
purpose he is furnished a musket, with ammunition. To prevent escape is his first 

and most important duty. 

♦ * « »♦ * « 

I suppose the law to be this: That a sentinel shall nt)t use more force or violence 
to prevent the escape of a prisoner than is necessary \o effect that object, but if the 
prisoner, after bein^ ordered to halt, continues his flight, the sentinel may maim or 
even kill him, and it is his duty to do so. 

A sentinel who allows a prisoner to escape without firing upon him and firing to 
hit him, is, in my judgment, guilty of a most serious military offense, for which he 

should and would be severely punished by a general court-martial. 

* * * »» ♦ » 

[Signed] Henry A. Morrow, 

Colonel 2ist Infantry, Commanding Post. 

[Third indorsement.] 

Office Judge Advocate, 
Military Division of the Pacific, 

Moy II, 1883. 
Respectfully returned to the Assistant Adjutant General, Military Division of the 
Pacific, concurring fully in the views expressed by Colonel Morrow. ^ I was not aware 
that such a view had ever been questioned. That the period is a time of peace does 
not affect the authority and duty of the sentinel or guard to fire upon the escaping 
prisoner, if this escape can not otherwise be prevented. He should, of course, attempt 
to stop the prisoner before firing, by ordering him to halt, and will properly warn 
him by the words, "Halt, or I fire," or words to such effect. 

W. Winthrop, 
Judge Advocate, 
[282] 



382-383 

[Fourth indorsement.] 
Headquarters Military Division of the Pacific, 

May II, 1883. 
Respectfully returned to the Commanding General, Department of the Columbia, 
approving the opinion of the commanding officer, Twenty-first Infantry, and of the 
Judge Advocate of the Division, in respect. to the duty of and method to be adopted 
by sentinels in preventing prisoners from escaping. 

By command of Major General Schofield: 

J. C. Kelton, 
Assistant Adjutant General. 
See also Circular No. 53, A. G. O., December 22, 1900. (305) 

On approaching the post of the sentinel at the guardhouse, a 
sentinel of the prisoner guard or an overseer in charge of prisoners 
will halt them and call, *'No. 1, (so many prisoners.)'' He will not 
allow them to cross the post of the sentinel until so directed by the 
corporal of the guard. (306) 

Members of the prisoner guard and overseers placed over pris- 
oners for work will receive specific and explicit instructions covering the 
required work; they will be held strictly responsible that the prisoners 
under their charge properly and satisfactorily perform the designated 
work. (307) 

Stable Guards. 

382. Under the head of stable guards will be included guards for 
cavalry stables^ artillery stables and parks, mounted infantry stables, 
machine-gun organization stables and parks, and quartermaster stables 
and parks. Where the words *' troop'' and ^'cavalry'' are used they 
will be held to include all of these organizations. (308) 

When troop stable guards are mounted they will guard the 
stables of the cavalry (See Par. 13). When no stable guards are raounted, 
the stables will be guarded by sentinels posted from the main guard, 
under the control of the officer of the day. 

The instructions given for troop stable guard will be observed 
as far as applicable by the noncommissioned officers and sentinels of the 
main guard when in charge of the stables. (309) 

Troop Stable Guards. 

383. Troop stable guards will not be used except in the field, or when it 
is impracticable to guard the stables by sentinels from the main guard. 
(310) 

Troop stable guards will be under the immediate control of 
their respective troop commanders; they will be posted in each cavalry 
stable, or near the picket line, and will consist of not less than one 
noncommissioned officer and three privates. 

Stable guards are for the protection of the horses, stabj^s, forage, 
equipments, and public property generally. They will in addition en- 
force the special regulations in regard to stables, horses, and parks. 
(311) 

[283] 



384 

Sentinels of stable guards will be posted at the stables or at the 
picket lines when the horses are kept outside. The troop stable guard 
may be used as a herd guard during the day time or when grazing is 
practicable. (312) 

The troop stable guard, when authorized by the post commander, 
will be mounted under the supervision of the troop commander. It will 
be armed, at the discretion of the troop commander, with either rifle 
or pistol. (313) 

The tour continues for 24 hours, or until the guard is relieved 
by a new guard. (314) 

The employment of stable guards for police and fatigue duties 
at the stables is forbidden; but this will not prohibit them from being 
required to assist in feeding grain before reveille. (315) 

The troop stable guard will attend stables with the rest of the 
troop and groom their own horses, the sentinels being taken off post 
for the purpose. (316) 

Neither the noncommissioned officer nor the members of the 
stable guard will absent themselves from the immediate vicinity of the 
stables except in case of urgent necessity, and then for no longer time 
than is absolutely necessary. No member of the guard will leave for any 
purpose without the authority of the noncommissioned officer of the 
guard. (317) 

The noncommissioned officer and one member of the stable guard 
will go for meals at the proper hour; upon their return the other mem- 
bers of the guard will be directed to go by the noncommissioned officer. 
(318) 

When the horses are herded each troop will furnish its own herd 
guard. (Par. 14.) (319) 

Smoking in the stables or their immediate vicinity is prohibited. 
No fire or light, other than electric light or stable lanterns, will be 
permitted in the stables. A special place will be designated for trim- 
ming, filling, and lighting lanterns. (320) 

Noncommissioned Officer of the Troop Stable Guard 
384. The noncommissioned officer receives his orders from his troop 
commander, to whom he will report immediately after posting his first re- 
lief, and when relieved will turn over all his orders to his successor. He 
instructs his sentinels in their general and special duties; exercises gen- 
eral supervision over his entire guard; exacts order and cleanliness about 
the guardroom; prevents the introduction of intoxicants into the guard- 
house and stables; receives, by count, from his predecessor, the animals, 
horse equipments, and all property (both private and public) pertaining 
thereto; famines, before relieving his predecessor, all locks, windows, 
and doors, and should any be found insecure he will report the fact 
to his troop commander when he reports for orders. He will personally 

[2843 



886 

post and relieve each sentinel, taking care to verify the property respon- 
sibility of the sentinel who comes off post, and see that the sentinel who 
goes on post is aware of the property responsibility that he asBumes. (321) 

That the noncommissioned officer may be more thoroughly in- 
formed of his responsibility, all horses returning, except those from a 
regular formation, will be reported to him. He will then notify the 
sentinel on post, and, in the absence of the stable sergeant, will see that 
the horses are promptly cared for. 

In case of abuse, he will promptly report to the troop commander. 
Should the horse be the private property of an officer, he will report such 
abuse to the owner. (322) 

The noncommissioned officer will report any unusual occurrence 
during his tour direct to his troop commander. (323) 

Horses and other property for which the noncommissioned officer 
is responsible will not be taken from the stables without the authority of 
the post or troop commander. (324) 

The noncommissioned officer must answer the sentinel ^s calls 
promptly. (325) 

In case of fire, the noncommissioned officer will see that the re- 
quirements of paragraph 334 are promptly carried out. (326) 

Whenever it becomes necessary for the noncommissioned officer 
to leave his guard, he will designate a member of it to take charge and 
assume his responsibility during his absence. (327) 

Sentinels of the Troop Stable Guard 
385. The sentinel in the discharge of his duties will be governed by 
the regulations for sentinels of the main guard whenever they are ap- 
plicable — such as courtesies to officers, walking post in a soldierly man- 
ner, challenging, etc.; he will not turn out the guard except when ordered 
by proper authority. (328) 

The sentinel will receive orders from the commanding officer, the 
troop commander, and the noncommissioned officers of the stable guard 
only, except when the commanding officer directs the officer of the day 
to inspect the stable guard. (329) 

In the field and elsewhere when directed by the commanding 
officer the sentinel when posted will verify the number of horses for 
which he is responsible, and when relieved will give the number to his 
successor. (330) 

The sentinel will not permit any horse or equipments to be taken 
from the stables, except in the presence of the noncommissioned officer. 
(331) 

Should a horse get loose, the sentinel will catch him and tie him 
up. If he be unable to catch the horse, the noncommissioned officer will 
at once be notified. In case a horse be cast, or in any way entangled, 
he will relieve him, if possible; if unable to relieve him, he will call the 

[2iS3 



386 

noncommissioned officer. Sentinels are forbidden to punish or maltreat 
a horse. (332) 

When a horse is taken sick, the sentinel will notify the non- 
commissioned officer, who in turn will call the farrier, and see that the 
horse is properly attended to. (333) 

In case of fire the sentinel will give the alarm by stepping outside 
the stable and firing his pistol or piece repeatedly, and calling out at the 
same time, **Fire, stables, Troop ( — )/' 

As soon as the guard is alarmed, he will take the necessary pre- 
cautions in opening or closing the doors so as to prevent the spreading 
of the fire and make it possible to remove the horses; he will drop the 
chains and bars, and, with the other members of the guard, proceed to lead 
out the horses and secure them at the picket line or such other place as 
may have been previously designated. (334) 

Sentinels over horses," or in charge of prisoners, receive orders from 
the stable sergeant, so far as the care of the horses and the labor of 
prisoners are concerned. (335) 

In field artillery and machine-gun organizations, the guard for 
the stables has charge of the guns, caissons, etc., with their ammunition 
and stores, as well as the horses, harness, and forage. (336) 

Flags 

386. The garrison, post and storm flags are national flags and shall 
be of bunting. The union of each is as described in paragraph 216, 
Army Regulations, and shall be of the following proportions: Width, 
seven-thirteenths of the hoist of the flag; length, seventy-six one-hun- 
dredths of the hoist of the flag. 

The garrison flag will have 38 feet fly and 20 feet hoist. It 
will be furnished only to posts designated in orders from time to time 
from the War Department, and will be hoisted only on holidays and 
important occasions. 

The post flag will have 19 feet fly and 10 feet hoist. It will be 
furnished for all garrison posts and will be hoisted in pleasant weather. 

The storm flag will have 9 feet 6 inches fly and 5 feet hoist. 
It will be furnished for all occupied posts for use in stormy and windy 
weather. It will also be furnished to national cemeteries. (A. K. 223.) 
(337) 

At every militarj^ post or station the flag will be hoisted at the 
sounding of the first note of the reveille, or of the first note of the march, 
if a march be played before the reveille. The flag will be lowered at 
the sounding of the last note of the retreat, and while the flag is being 
lowered the band will play ^^The Star Spangled Banner,'' or, if there 
be no band present, the field music will sound ^Ho the color." When 
'*to the color'' is sounded by the field music while the flag is being 

[286] 



387 

lowered tlie same respect will be observed as when *'The Star Spangled 
Banner" is played by the band, and in either case officers and enlisted 
men out of ranks will face toward the flag, stand at attention, and render 
the prescribed salute at the last note of the music. (A. E. 437) 

The lowering of the flag will be regulated as to be completed 
at the last note of ''The Star Spangled Banner'' or ''to the color/' (338) 

The national flag will be displayed at a seacoast or lake fort at 
the beginning of and during an action in which a fort may be engaged, 
whether by day or by night. (A. E. 437.) (339) 

The national flag will always be displayed at the time of firing 
a salute. (A. E. 397.) (340) 

The flag of a military post will not be dipped by way of salute 
or compliment. (A. E. 405.) (341) 

On the death of an officer at a military post the flag is displayed 
at half-staff and so remains, between reveille and retreat until the last 
salvo or volley is fired over the grave; or if the remains are not interred 
at the post, until they are removed therefrom. (A. E. 422.) (342) 

During the funeral of an enlisted man at a military post the 
flag is displayed at half-staff. It is hoisted to the top after the final 
volley or gun is fired or after the remains are taken from the post. The 
same honors are paid on the occasion of the funeral of a retired enlisted 
man. (A. E. 423.) (343) 

When practicable, a detail consisting of a noncommissioned of- 
ficer and two privates of the guard will raise or lower the flag. This 
detail wears side arms or, if the special equipments do not include side 
arms, then belts only. 

The noncommissioned officer, carrying the flag, forms the detail 
in line, takes his post in the center, and marches it to the staff. The 
flag is then securely attached to the halyards and rapidly hoisted. The 
halyards are then securely fastened to the cleat on the staff and the de- 
tail marched to the guardhouse. (344) 

When the flag is to be lowered, the halyards are loosened from 
the staff and made perfectly free. At retreat the flag is lowered at the 
last note of retreat. It is then neatly folded and the halyards made fast. 
The detail is then reformed and marched to the guardhouse, where the 
flag is turned over to the commander of the guard. 

The flag should never be allowed to touch the ground and should 
always be hoisted or lowered from the leeward side of the staff, the 
halyards being held by two persons. (345) 

Reveille and Retreat Gun 

387. The morning and evening gun will be fired by a detachment of 

the guard, consisting, when practicable, of a corporal and two privates. 

The morning gun is fired at the first note of reveille, or, if marches be 

played before the reveille, it is fired at the beginning of the first march 

[287] 



388 

The retreat gun is fired at the last note of retreat. 

The corporal marches the detachment to and from the piece, 
which is fired, sponged out, and secured under his direction. (346) 

Guard Mounting 
388. Guard mounting will be formal or informal as the commanding 
oflScer may direct. It will be held as prescribed in the drill regulations 
of the arm of the service to which the guard belongs; if none is prescribed, 
then as for infantry. In case the guard is composed wholly of mounted 
organizations, guard mounting may be held mounted. (347) 

When infantry and mounted troops dismounted are united for 
guard mounting, all details form as prescribed for infantry. (348) 

Formal Guard Mounting for Infantry 
Formal guard mounting will ordinarily be held only in posts or 
camps where a band is present. (349) 

At the assembly, the men designated for the guard fall in on their 
company parade grounds as prescribed in paragraph 106, I. D. R. The 
first sergeant then verifies the detail, inspects it, replaces any man un- 
fit to go on guard, turns the detail over to the senior noncommissioned 
officer, and retires. The band takes its place on the parade ground so 
that the left of its front rank shall be 12 paces to the right of the 
front rank of the guard when the latter is formed. (350) 

At adjutant's call, the adjutant, dismounted, and the sergeant- 
major on his left, marches to the parade ground. The adjutant halts 
and takes post so as to be 12 paces in front of and facing the center of 
the guard when formed; the sergeant-major continues on, moves by the 
left flank, and takes post, facing to the left, 12 paces to the left of 
the front rank of the band; the band plays in quick or double time; 
the details are marched to the parade ground by the senior noncom- 
missioned officers; the detail that arrives first is marched to the line so 
that, upon halting, the breast of the front-rank man shall be near to 
and opposite the left arm of the sergeant-major; the commander of the 
detail halts his detail, places himself in front of and facing the sergeant- 
major, at a distance equal to or a little greater than the front of his 
detail, and commands: 1. Right, 2. DBESS. The detail dresses up to the 
line of the sergeant-major and its commander, the right front-rank mian 
placing his breast against the left arm of the sergeant-major; the non- 
commissioned officers take post two paces in rear of the rear rank of the 
detail. The detail aligned, the commander of the detail commands: 
FRONT, salutes,' and then reports: *'The detail is correct;" or **So 
many sergeants, corporals, or privates are absent;'* the ser^ea;nt-major 
returns the salute with the right hand after the report is made; the 
commander then passes by the right of the guard and takes post in 
the line of noncommissioned officers in rear of the right file or his detail. 

[288] 



388 (contd.) 

Should there be more than one detail, it is formed in like manner 
on the left of the one preceding; the privates, noncommissioned officers, 
and commander of each detail dress on those of the preceding details in 
the same rank or line; each detail commander closes the rear rank to 
the right and fills blank files, as far as practicable, with the men from 
his front rank. 

Should the guard from a company not include a noncommissioned 
officer, one will be detailed to perform the duties of commander of the de- 
tail. In this case the commander of the detail, after reporting to the 
sergeant-major, passes around the right flank between the guard and the 
band and retires. (351) 

When the last detail has formed, the sergeant-major takes a 
side step to the right, draws sword, verifies the detail, takes post two 
paces to the right and two paces to the front of the guard, facing to the 
left, causes the guard to count off, completes the left squad, if necessary, 
as in the school of the company, and if there be more than three squads, 
divides the guard into two platoons, again takes post as described above 
and commands: 1. Open ranks, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, the rear rank and file closers march back- 
ward four steps, halt, and dress to the right. The sergeant major aligns 
the ranks and file closers and again, taking post as described above, 
commands: FRONT, moves parallel to the front rank until opposite the 
center, turns to the right, hallos midway to the adjutant, salutes, and 
reports: **Sir, the details are correct;'' or, **Sir, (so many) sergeants, 
corporals, or privates are absent; ' the adjutant returns the salute, directs 
the sergeant-major: Take your post, and then draws saber; the sergeant- 
major faces about, approaches to within two paces of the Q^nter of the 
front rank, turns to the right, moves three paces beyond the left of the 
front rank, turns to the left, halts on the line of the front rank, faces 
about, and brings his sword to the order. When the sergeant-major has 
reported, the officer of the guard takes post, facing to the front, three 
paces in front of the center of the guard, and draws saber. 

The adjutant then commands: 1. Officer (or officers) and non- 
commissioned officers, 2. Front and Center, 3. MARCH. 

At the command center, the officers carry saber. At the com- 
mand march, the officer advances and halts three paces from the adjutant, 
remaining at the carry; the noncommissioned officers pass by the flanks, 
along the front, and form in order of rank from right to left, three 
paces in rear of the officer, remaining at the right shoulder; if there is 
no officer of the guard the noncommissioned officers halt on a line three 
paces from the adjutant; the adjutant then assigns the officers and non- 
commissioned officers according to rank, as follows: Commander of the 
guard, leader of first platoon, leader of second platoon, right guide of 
first platoon, left guide of second platoon, left guide of first platoon, 

[289] 



388 (contd.) 

right guide of second platoon, and file closers, or, if the guard is not 
divided into platoons: Commander of the guard, right guide, left guide, 
and file closers. 

The adjutant then commands: 1. Officer (or officers) and noncom- 
missioned officers, 2. POSTS, 3. MARCH. 

At the command posts, all, except the officer commanding the 
guard, face about. At the command march, they take the posts pre- 
scribed in the school of the company with open ranks. The adjutant ■ 
directs: Inspect your guard, sir; at which the officer commanding the 
guard faces about, coiiimands: Prepare for inspection, returns saber, and 
inspects the guard. 

During the inspection, the band plays; the adjutant returns 
saber, observes the general condition of the guard, and falls out any 
man who is unfit for guard duty or does not present a creditable ap- 
pearance. Substitutes will report to the commander of the guard at 
the guardhouse. (352) 

The adjutant, when so directed, selects orderlies and color senti- 
nels, as prescribed in paragraphs 140 and 141, and notifies the commander 
of the guard of his selection. (353) 

If there be a junior officer of the guard he takes post at the 
same time as the senior, facing to the front, 3 paces in front of the 
center of the first platoon; in going to 'the front and center he follows 
and takes position on the left of the senior and is assigned as leader of 
the first platoon; he may be directed by the commander of the guard 
to assist in inspecting the guard. 

If there be no officer of the guard, the adjutant inspects the 
guard. A noncommissioned officer commanding the guard takes post on 
the right of the right guide, when the guard is in line; and takes the 
post of the officer of the guard, when in column or passing in review. 
(354) 

The inspection ended, the adjutant places himself about 30 paces 
in front of and facing the center of the guard, and draws saber; the 
new officer of the day takes post in front of and facing the guard, about 
30 paces from the adjutant; the old officer of the day, takes post 3 paces 
to the right of and 1 pace to the rear of the new officer of the day; 
the officer of the guard takes post 3 paces in front of its center, draws 
saber with the adjutant and comes to the order; thereafter he takes the 
same relative positions as a captain of a company. 

The adjutant then commands: 1. Parade, 2. REST, 3. SOUND OFF, 
and comes to the order and parade rest. 

The band, playing, passes in front of the officer of the guard to 
the left of the line, and back to its post on the right, when it ceases 
playing. 

[290] 



388 (contd.) 

The adjutant then comes to attention, carries saber, and com- 
mands: 1. Guard, 2. ATTENTION, 3. Close ranks, 4. MARCH. 

The ranks are opened and closed as in paragraph 745, I. D. R. 

The adjutant then commands: 1. Present, 2. ARMS, faces toward 
the new officer of the day, salutes, and then reports: Sir, the guard is 
formed. The new officer of the day, after the adjutant has reported, 
returns the salute with the hand and directs the adjutant: March the 
guard in review, sir. 

The adjutant carries saber, faces about, brings the guard to an 
order, and commands: 1. At trail, platoons (or guard) right, 2. MARCH, 
3. Guard, 4. HALT. 

The platoons execute the movements; the band turns to the right 
and places itself 12 paces in front of the first platoon. 

The adjutant places himself 6 paces from the flank and abreast 
of the commander of the guard; the sergeant major, 6 paces from the 
left flank of the second platoon. 

The adutant then commands: 1. Pass in review, 2. FORWARD, 3. 
MARCH. 

The guard marches in quick time past the officer of the day, ac- 
cording to the principles of review, and is brought to eyes right at the 
proper time by the commander of the guard; the adjutant, commander 
of the guard, leaders of platoons, sergeant-major, and drum major salute. 

The band, having passed the officer of the day, turns to the left 
out of the column, places itself opposite and facing him, and continues 
to play until the guard leaves the parade ground. The field music detaches 
itself from the band when the latter turns out of the column, and, re- 
maining in front of the guard, commences to play when the band ceases. 

Having passed 12 paces beyond the officer of the day, the adjutant 
halts; the sergeant-major halts abreast of the adjutant and 1 pace to his 
left; they then return saber, salute, and retire; the commander of the 
guard then commands: 1. Platoons, right by squads, 2. MARCH, and 
marches the guard to its post. 

The officers of the day face toward each other and salute; the 
old officer of the day turns over the orders to the new officer of the day. 

"While the band is sounding off, and while the guard is marching 
in review, the officers of the day stand at parade rest with arms folded. 
They take this position when the adjutant comes to parade rest, resume 
the attention with him, again take the parade rest at the first note of the 
march in review, and resume attention as the head of the column ap- 
proaches. 

The new officer of the day returns the salute of the commander of 
the guard and the adjutant, making one salute with the hand. (355) 

If the guard be not divided into platoons, the adjutant com- 
mands: 1. At trail, guaxd right, 2. MARCH, 3. Guard, 4. HALT, and it 

[291] 



389-390 

passes in review as above; the commander of the guard is 3 paces in 
front of its ftenter; the adjutant places himself 6 paces from the left flank 
and abreast of the commander of the guard; the sergeant covers the 
adjutant on a line with the front rank. (356) 

Informal Guard Mounting for Infantry 

389. Informal guard mounting will be held on the parade ground of the 
organization from which the guard is detailed. If it is detailed from 
more than one organization, then at such place as the commanding officer 
may direct. (357) 

At assembly, the detail for guard falls in on the company parade 
ground. The first sergeant verifies the detail, inspects their dress and 
general appearance, and replaces any man unfit to march on guard. He 
then turns the detail over to the commander of the guard and retires. 
(358) 

At adjutant's call, the officer of the day takes his place 15 paces 
in front of the center of the guard and commands: 1. Officer (or officers) 
and noncommissioned officers, 2. Front and center, 3. MARCH; whereupon 
the officers and noncommissioned officers take their positions, are assigned 
and sent to their posts as prescribed in formal guard mounting. (Par. 352.) 

The officer of the day will then inspect the guard with especial 
reference for its fitness for the duty for which it is detailed, and will 
select as prescribed in paragraphs 140 and 141, the necessary orderlies 
and color sentinels. The men found unfit for guard will be returned to 
quarters and will be replaced by others found to be suitable, if available 
in the company. If none are available in the company, the fact will be 
reported to the adjutant immediately after guard mounting. 

"When the inspection shall have been completed, the officer of the 
day resumes his position and directs the commander of the guard to 
march the guard to its post. (359) 

Relieving the Old Guard 

390. As the new guard approaches the guardhouse, the old guard is 
formed in line, with its field music 3 paces to its right; and when the 
field music at the h^ad of the new guard arrives opposite its left, the 
commander of the new guard commands: 1. Eyes, 2. RIGHT; the com- 
mander of the old guard commands: 1. Present, 2. ARMS; commanders of 
both guards salute. The new guard marches in quick time past the old 
guard. 

When the commander of the new guard is opposite the field music 
of the old guard, he commands: FRONT; the commander of the old guard 
commands: 1. Order, 2. ARMS, as soon as the new guard shall have 
cleared the old guard. 

The field music having marched 3 paces beyond the field music of 
the old guard, changes direction to the right, and, followed by the guard, 

[292] 



390 (contd.) 

changes direction to the left when on a line with the old guard; the 
changes of direction are without command. The commander of the 
guard halts on the line of the front rank of the old guard, allows his 
guard to march past him, and when its rear approaches forms it in line 
to the left, establishes the left guide 3 paces to the right of the field 
music of the old guard, and on a line with the front rank, and then 
dresses his guard to the left; the field music of the new guard is 3 paces 
to the right of its front rank. (360) 

The new. guard being dressed, the commander of each guard, in 
front of and facing its center, commands: 1. Present, 2. ARMS, resumes 
his front, salutes, carries saber, faces his guard and commands: 1. Order, 
2. ARMS. 

Should a guard be commanded by a noncommissioned officer, he 
stands on the right or left of the front rank, according as he commands 
the old or new guard, and executes the rifle salute. (361) 

After the new guard arrives at its post, and has saluted the old 
guard, each guard is presented by its commander to its officer of the day; 
if there be but one officer of the day present, or if one officer acts in 
the capacity of old and new officer of the day, each guard is presented to 
him by its commander. (362) 

If other persons entitled to a salute approach, each commander of 
the guard will bring his own guard to attention if not already at attention. 
The senior commander of the two guards will then command *'l. Old 
and new guards, 2. Present, 3. ARMS.*' 

The junior will salute at the command "Present Arms" given by 
the senior. After the salute has been acknowledged, the senior brings 
both guards to the order. (363) 

After the salutes have been acknowledged by the officers of the 
day, each guard is brought to an order by its commander; the commander 
of the new guard then directs the orderly or orderlies to fall out and 
report, and causes bayonets to be fixed if so ordered by the commanding 
officer; bayonets will not then be unfixed during the tour except in route 
marches while the guard is actually marching, or when specially directed 
by the commanding officer. 

The commander of the new guard then falls out members of the 
guard for detached posts, placing them under charge of the proper 
noncommissioned officers, divides the guard into three reliefs, first, second, 
and third, from right to left, and directs a list of the guard to be made 
by reliefs. When the guard consists of troops of different arms com- 
bined, the men are assigned to reliefs so as to insure a fair division of 
duty, under rules prescribed by the commanding officer. (364) 

The sentinels and detachments of the old guard are at once re- 
lieved by members of the new guard; the two guards standing at ease or 
at rest while these changes are being made. The commander of the old 

[2931 



391 

transmits to the commander of the new guard ail his orders, instructions, 
and information concerning the guard and its duties. The commander 
of the new guard then takes possession of the guardhouse and verifies the 
articles in charge of the guard. (365) 

If considerable time is required to bring in that portion of the 
old guard still on post, the comm_anding officer may direct that as soon 
as the orders and property are turned over to the new guard, the portion 
of the old guard at the guardhouse may be marched off and dismissed. 
In such a case, the remaining detachment or detachments of the old 
guard will be inspected by the commander of the new guard when they 
reach the guardhouse. He will direct the senior noncommissioned officer 
present to march these detachments off and dismiss them in the prescribed 
manner. (366) 

In bad weather, at night, after long marches, or when the guard 
is very small, the field music may be dispensed with. (367) 

Appendix A 
391. When the guard for the day is supplied by more than one organi- 
zation, the details due from the several companies will be determined as 
follows: Take the number of privates for duty in each company from its 
morning report for the day next preceding that on which the tour of 
duty is to commence, deducting details for detached service of over 24 
hours, made after the morning report has been received; the total of these 
gives the total number of privates available. Then: The total strength 
is to the strength of a company as the total detail is to the detail from 
the company. Multiply the total detail by the strength of the company, 
and divide the result by total strength; carry out to two places of deci- 
mals, disregarding all smaller fractions. This rule is applied for each 
company. 

The whole numbers in the results thus obtained are added to- 
gether, and if the total is less than the total detail required add one 
to the whole number in the result that has the largest fraction, and so 
on for each company till the required total is obtained. 

There will thus be a difference between the exact proportion and 
the number detailed from each company; this difference is entered in 
the credit column and the next day is carried forward and added or sub- 
tracted from the first proportion. 



[294] 



391 (contd.) 



FIRST DAY 









-s^^ 


















rt 3-5 


















g,"^- 


















bO q W 


A 
















Ui ti 


bo 
















o ^o 


a 
















**^'o'*^ 


u 




a 






1 












o 




CO 


o 






riva 
req 
ing 
gua 

otal 




s 




^3 


U 


m 




CLi 


H 




P4 


Q 


u 


A 


25 


X 


14 - 


- 160 


~ 


—2.18 


+ 2 


—.18 


B 


24 


X 


14 - 


- 160 


rr 


—2.10 


+ 2 


—.10 


C 


30 


X 


14 - 


- 160 


— 


—2.62 


+ 3 


+ .38 


D 


22 


X 


14 - 


- 160 


= 


+ 1.92 


+ 2 


+ .08 


E 


22 


X 


14 - 


- 160 


nz 


+ 1.92 


+ 2 


+ .08 


F(Cav.) 37 


X 


14 - 


- 160 


= 


—3.23 


+*3 


—.23 




160 










11 


14 





* Troop F. Furnishes 3 stable and no other guard. 

Note. — The proportion due from a company is always given a minus sign and 
the detail furnished given a plus sign. 

SECOND DAY 









ns • « 






u 


















rt 3-9 






S 


















2.1 a 


J 


o 


^ 


.2 












^ 
t. 




tes for 
uired, 

3 for 
ird. 


u 
en 


u 
O 

o 


bo 

2 


O 

§• 

a 








^ 


s 

o 






riva 
req 
ing 
gus 

otal 


^ 












-s 


u 


in 




Ph 


H 


\^ 


u 


t^ 




« 




u 


A 


27 


X 


14 - 


- 160 


= 


—2.36 


—.18 


—2.54 


+ 


2 


—.54 


B 


23 


X 


14 - 


- 160 


= 


—2.01 


—.10 


—2.11 


+ 


2 


—.11 


C 


28 


X 


14 - 


- 160 


— 


—2.45 


+ .38 


—2.07 


+ 


2 


—.07 


D 


23 


X 


14 - 


- 160 


= 


—2.01 


+ .08 


—1.93 


+ 


2 


+ .07 


E 


21 


X 


14 - 


- 160 


— 


—1.83 


+ .08 


—1.75 


+ 


2 


+ .25 


F (Cav.) 


38 
160 


X 


14 - 


- 160 




—3.32 


-.23 


—3.55 
11 


+ 


*4 
14 


+ .45 



* Troop F furnishes 3 stable and 1 main guard. 

The number of sergeants, corporals, and musicians will be deter- 
mined in like manner. 

A convenient form for the roster is as follows. 



[295] 



392 



Roster I. Privates. 
Enlisted strength of guard, 14 privates. 



Guard required. 



Jan. 1, 
14. 



Jan. 2, 
14. 



Jan. 3, 
14. 



. Company: 

Strength 

First proportion 
Final proportion 

Detail 

Credits 

Company: 

Strength 

First proportion 
Final proportion 

Detail 

Credits 

Company : 

Strength 

First proportion 
Final proportion 

Detail 

Credits 

Company: 

Strength 

First proportion 
Final proportion 

Detail 

Credits 

Company: 

Strength 

First proportion 
Final proportion 

Detail 

Credits 

Troop : 

Strength 

First proportion 
Final proportion 

Detail 

Credits 



25 
—2.18 



+ 2 
— .18 

24 
—2.10 



+ 2 
— .10 

30 
—2.62 

' + 3**" 
+ .38 

22 
—1.92 

• + 2"" 
+ .08 

22 
—1.92 

• + 2"" 
+ .08 

37 
—3.23 



+ 3 



.23 



27 
-.2.36 
—2.54 

+ 2 

— .54 

23 
—2.01 
—2.11 
+ 2 

— .11 

28 
—2.45 
—2.^7 
+ 2 

— .07 

23 

—2.01 
—1.93 
+ 2 
+ .07 

21 
—1.84 
—1.76 
+ 2 
+ .24 

38 
—3.32 
—3.55 
+ 4 
+ .45 



27 
—2.36 
—2.90 
+ 3 
+ .10 

" 23 
—2.01 
—2.12 
+ 2 
— .12 

28 
—2.45 
—2.52 
+ 3 
+ .48 

23 
—2.01 
—1.94 

+ .08 

21 
—1.84 
—1.59 

±'.59 

38 
—3.32 
—2.87 
+ 3 
+ .13 



Appendix B 

392. When details for guard and fatigue are made as prescribed in 
paragraph 11, no account will be taken of very small disproportions 
in the strength of companies. 

When the disproportion is considerable a roster will be kept by the 
sergeant-major under the supervision of the adjutant as follows: In 
accordance with the method explained in Appendix A, determine the pro- 
portion of privates each company would be required to furnish. 

In the credit column, charge each company, except the one fur- 
nishing the guard, with this proportion, i. e., with the number of men 

[2961 



392 (contd.) 

it was due to furnish but did uot furnish. Enter this number or pro- 
portion with a minus sign. 

Then credit the company furnishing the guard with the number 
of men furnished, less +he proportion it was due to furnish. The differ- 
ence is the number of men it furnished in excess, and is entered in the 
credit column with a plus sign. 

Whether the same or different companies furnish the guard on 
consecutive days, the drbits and credits will be determined for each day 
and added algebraically to the credit or debit brought forward from the 
preceding day. The res-ult will then be entered in the credit column for 
the day. 

When a new company is to relieve the one furnishing the guard, 
that one will ordinarily be detailed which has the largest minus num- 
ber in the credit column. 

The following table indicates the form of the roster. 

The order in which companies are shown in this table as furnish- 
ing the guard has no especial significance, as many reasons may enter into 
determination of this matter. 



[297] 



392 (contd.) 



I 



c 


•s;tp3J3 


O O O b* '<l- •-• 00 »n C^ 0\ -"If t^ O '^ -"T 

1 1 ++?+++++! 111+ 




c^^• <M oi -H* ^' ^ -^" -4 ^* ^" ^* ^* ^ _: -; 


B 

6 


•uopjodojj 


•q:j3u3j;s 




>> 

c 


•s^ipaJO 


vO^OOvOTfCMOCMTt-rl-rqOOOOCN 

<m' '** t^ ON >-I CO lo oi * r-i* crJ u-> 'O tt" <n 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ++ 1 1 1 +++ 




•uoTpodojj 


VO^VOOOOOOOOOOOOOCOOOOOOOOOOO 

(M* CVJ Cvi »-4 ^' .-J ,-H r-^ ^ ,-1 ,-3 ^ ^' r-H* T-3 


•q:^2u3Jis 




POfOfOfDro«^fOfOfOfOrO^O<*5<r)fO 




•s;ip3J0 


O'Noo— "rrxO'^'ro\CMtoooir)f\j 

■?}-C3N»^rO<M^— <OOOOOOI^VOr<JPO 

rvi'«rtsI(?\-H'f<Jir}'t<i-J ' cm' Tt vo Tf' CM* 

1 1 1 M M 1 + 1 i 1 1 ++ 


a 


•uopjodojti 


B 
o 
U 


\OvOVO'0'^<r><r5rofO'OrOrofO'r)rr> 
Tr*^rrO\0\C7\0\OsO\0\ONO\ONC\C7\ 

cm' cm* cm* -H ^ ^' ,-H* ^'t-^ ^ ^ ^* rt' rJ, —I 


U 


•qi3u3JJS 






c 
a 

a 

a 


•s;ipw3 


O\00t^CMt«^<NJt^(Mt^00rOCMt^<>Jt^ 
O — CM On lO CM 00 »0 -- -< lO -- 1>. -^ O 
CM rj-* \0* »>! 0\ '-i CM tJ-* Vo' Cm' * r-i CM* ■^* VO 

1 1 1 1 iT 1 1 1 ++ M 1 1 


•uoi;jodoj<j 


ONO\OMnmioiou-)io"^ir)io»mouo 

OOOvOvOvONOVONO^vovOvOvpvO 
CNJ* CM* CM '-^* '-*' i-J t-H* .-I --H* T-4 T-H* T-J ,-1 ,-<* ^ 




•T{;SU3J^S 


0\O0N'-''-H'-^'-"-H'-l— "-Ht-H-li-HT-l 

(^JCMCMrOrOfOrOfO^O^O^O^OfO^OfO 


ca 

a 


•s;ip3J3 


— CM'MOCNOOrN.vOt.OVOuT'il-'^'N— ^ 
VO CM 00 fO IN. CM tN CM W t-^ CM tN. CM »>. CC 
0\ C3\ lO "T) O 00* lO ro* * 1-h' o' no* ■<*• — <* On 

+++++++++ 1 ++4-++ 


E 


•UOTpOdOJJ 


ONOnON — — 1 — — ' — — '^^-^r-.— .— . 

«r> <rj ro* CM* <M* CM* CM* CM* CM* CM* CM* CM* CM* CM* CM* 


•< 


•q;5u3j;s 






•sajBAud 


poroinoooooooooooo 






-^1 
«.2 


•XuEduio3 


<<WCdQOttQOtt«GUW 






'-HCM«*3'^tON0tN,00C\O— <CM«^"*»0 

c c c* c c* d c c c c c c d d d 



[298] 



393-394 

CHAPTER V 
SIGNALING 

Signals and Codes 
General Service Code, (International Morse Code.) 
393. Used for all visual and sound signaling, radiotelegraphy, and on 
cables using siphon recorders, used in communicating with Navy. 



A .- 




N 


- . 


B -. . . 




O 





C - .-. 




P 


. . 


D -. . 




Q 


. — 


E . 




R 


, — , 


F . .-. 




S 


. . . 


G — . 




T 


— 


H .... 




U 


. . - 


I . . 




V 


. . . — 


J . 




w 


, 


K -.- 




X 


— . . - 


L .-. . 




Y 


— . 


M — 


NUMERALS 


Z 


• • 


2 _ _ 




6 


— . • . . 


2 .' . 




7 


. . . 


3 . . . — 




8 




4 . . . . - 

5 




9 



. 


PUNCTUATION 




Period 








Comma , 

Interrogation , - 







."-."."■ 


THE MORE IMPORTANT CONVENTIONAL 


FLAG SIGNALS 



For communication between the firing line an^the reserve or 
commander in rear. In transmission, their concealment from the enemy ^s 
view should be insured. In the absence of signal flags the headdress 
or other substitute may be used. 

(See Par. 72 for the signals. — Author.) 

Wigwag 

Signaling by flag, torch, hand lantern, or beam of searchlight (without 

shutter)^ 

394. 1. There is one position and there are three motions. The position 
is with flag or other appliance held vertically, the signalman facing 
directly toward the station with which it is desired to communicate. 
The first m.otion (the dot) is to the right of the sender, and will embrace 
an arc of 90°, starting with the vertical and returning to it, and will 
be made in a plane at right angles to the line connecting the two stations. 
The second motion (the dash) is a similar motion to the left of the sender. 
The third motion (front) is downward directly in front of the sender and 

^ Extracts from Signal Book, United* States Army. 
[299] 



394 (contd.) 



ERR^F 




A »L I 




NDBATIVEl 



K 






G iii 7 




REPEAT 




C ill 3 




H iil 8 



M 




D 1 .4 




I iiL, 9 



N 





E H 5 




INTERROGATORY 



J JJt O 




UOO] 



394 (contd.) 




THE TWO-ABM SEMAPHORE CODE. 

fvT" 



u f 







pr^> 



ACKNOWLLDGE 

R I 



W 




INTERVAL 




NUMERALS 





\\^ 




He 



1301J 



394 (contd.) 

instantly returned upward to the first position. This is used to indicate 
a pause or conclusion. 

2. The beam of the searchlight, though ordinarily used with the shut- 
ter like the heliograph, may be used for long-distance signaling, when 
no shutter is suitable or available, in a similar manner to the flag or 
torch, the first position being a vertical one. A movement of the beam 
90° to the right of the sender indicates a dot, a similar movement to the 
left indicates a dash; the beam is lowered vertically for front. 

3. To use the torch or hand lantern, a footlight must be employed 
as a point of reference to the motion. The lantern is more conveniently 
swung out upward to the' right of the footlight for a dot, to the left for 
a dash, and raised vertically for front. 

4. To call a station, make the call letter until acknowledged, at in- 
tervals giving the call or signal of the calling station. If the call letter 
of a station is unknown, wave flag until acknowledged. In using the 
search light without shutter throw the beam in a vertical position and 
move it through an arc of 180° in a plane at right angles to the line 
connecting the two stations until acknowledged. To acknowledge a 
call, signal *^ Acknowledgment (or) I understand (- - - - front) '* fol- 
lowed by the call letter of the acknowledging station. 

Signaling with heliograph, flash lantern, and searchlight (vnth shutter)^ 

1. The first position is to turn a steady flash on the receivin*g sta- 
tion.- The signals are made by short and long flashes. Use a short flash 
for dot and a long steady flash for dash. The elements of a letter should 
be slightly longer than in sound signals. 

2. To call a station, make the call letter until acknowledged, at in- 
tervals the call or signal of the calling station. 

3. If the call letter of a station be unknown, signal a series of dots 
rapidly made until acknowiedg^ed. Each station will then turn on a 
steady flash and adjust. When the adjustment is satisfactory to the 
called station, it will cut off its flash, and the calling station will pro- 
ceed with its message. 

4. If the receiver sees that the sender's mirror needs adjustment, he 
will turn on a steady flash until answered by a steady flash. When the 
adjustment is satisfactory, the receiver will cut off his flash and the sender 
will resume his message. 

5. To break the sending station for other purposes, turn on a steady 
flash. 

^ Extracts from Signal Book, United States Army. 



[3023 



395 
APPENDIX 8 

Sound Signals} 

1. Sound signals made by the whistle, foghorn, bugle, trumpet, 
and drum may be used in a fog, mist, falling snow, or at night. 
They may be used with the dot and dash code. 

2. In applying the code to whistle, foghorn, bugle, or trumpet, one 
short blast indicates a dot and one long blast a dash. With the drum, 
one tap indicates a dot and two taps in rapid succession a dash. Al- 
though these signals can be used with a dot and dash code, they should 
be so used in connection with a preconcerted or conventional code. 

Morse Code, (American Morse Code)^ 
395. Used only by the army on telegraph lines, on short cables, and on 
field lines, and on all commercial lines in the United States. 

A .- O . . 

B - . . . P 

C . . . Q • •-• 

D -. . R . . . 

E . S . . . 

F . - . T - 

G — . U . .- 

H . . . . V . . .- 

I . . W . — 

X .-. . 

Y . . . . 

L ~ Z . . . . 

M -- & . . . . 
N -. 

NUMERAL^ 

1 . --. 6 

2 . .- . . 7 — . . . 
3...-. 8-.... 
4 . . . .- 9 - . .- 
5 

PUNCTUATION 

Period - - . . 

Comma . - . - 

Interrogation - . . - . 

^ Extracts from Signal Book, United States Army. 



k 



[MJ] 



396-397 . : 

CHAPTER VI 

SMALL-ARMS FIRING MANUAL 

(To include Changes No. 2, June 26, 1914.) 

Extracts 

(The numbers following the paragraphs are those of the Small-Arms Firing 
Manual, and references in the text to certain paragraph numbers refer to these 
numbers, and not to the numbers preceding the paragraphs.) 

ESTDIVIDUAL INSTRUOTION 
Preliminary Instruction and Sighting Drills for the Bifle 

396. Nomenclature and Oare of the Rifle. — Although each recruit is 
required to be instructed in the nomenclature, care, use, and preservation 
of the rifle, this instruction will be repeated as the initial step for each 
season's known distance practice. 

The precautions necessary to avoid accidents will also be thor 
oughly impressed upon the soldier at this time. (12) 

Sighting Drills 

397. Value. — The value of the sighting drills and the position and 
aiming drills can not be too strongly emphasized. By means of them the 
fundamental principles of shooting may be inculcated before the soldier 
flres a shot. (13) 

To Whom Given. — The sighting drills will be given to all soldiers 
who have not qualified as ^^ marksman" or better in the preceding target 
year. (14) 

Purpose: 

(a) To show how to align the sights properly on the mark. 

(b) To discover and demonstrate errors in sighting. 

(c) To teach uniformity in sighting. (15) 



[304] 



397 (contd.) 
Apparatus and Its Use— Sighting Bar.--(See PI. I.) To consist of: 



Eye piece 




Pear sight 



CI3 



B 



Front 
sight 



Plate I. 



(a) A bar of wood about 1 by 2 inches by 4 feet, with a thin 
slot 1 inch deep cut across the edge about 20 inches from one end. 

(b) A front sight of tin or cardboard % by 3 inches tacked to 
the end nearer the slot and projecting 1 inch above bar. 

(c) An eyepiece of tin or cardboard 1 by 3 inches tacked to the 
other end of, and projecting 1 inch above, the bar, with a very small 
hole (0.03 inch) % inch from top of part projecting above the bar. 

(d) An open rear sight of tin or cardboard 1^2 by 3 inches, with 
a U-shaped notch % inch wide cut in the middle of one of the long edges. 
This is placed in the slot on the bar. A slight bend of the part of the 
tin fitting in the slot will give enough friction to hold the sight in any 
part of slot in which it is placed. 

(e) A peep rear sight of tin or cardboard 3 by 3 inches, with a 
peep hole % inch in diameter cut in the center. This replaces the open 
sight when the peep sight is shown. 

Carefully blacken all pieces of tin or cardboard and the top of 
the bar. Nail the bar to a box about 1 foot high and place on the ground, 
table, or other suitable place. Then adjust the open or peep rear sight 
in the slot and direct the bar upon a bull's-eye (preferably a Y target) 
placed about 5 yards from the bar. No other than the sight desired can 

[305] 



397 (eontd.) 

be seen. Errors, etc., are shown by manipulating the open and peep 
rear sights. (16) 

Sighting Rest for Rifle.— (See PI. 11.) Take an empty pistol 
ammunition box or a similar well-made box, remove the top and cut 
notches in the ends to fit the rifle closely. Place the rifle in these notches 
with the trigger guard close to and outside one end. (The stock may 
be removed from the rifle so as to bring the eye as near the rear sight 
as in shooting.) Nail a plank (top of box will do) to a stake or wall 
about 12 inches from the ground. Fasten a blank sheet of paper to 
the plank. Place the rest firmly on the ground, 20 or 30 feet from the 
plank, so that the rifle is canted neither to the right nor left — weight the 
box with sand if necessary — and without touching the rifle or rest, 
sight the rifle near the center of the blank sheet of paper. Changes in 
the line of sight are made by changing the elevation and windage. Take 
the prone position with elbows on the ground, hands supporting the 
head. A soldier acting as marker is provided with a pencil and a small 
rod bearing a disk of white cardboard about 3 inches in diameter, with 
a black bull^s-eye (a black paster is best) pierced in the center with 
a hole just large enough to admit the point of a lead pencil. The sol- 
dier sighting directs the marker to move the disk to the right, left, 
higher, or lower, until the line of aim is established, when he commands 
Mark or Hold. At the command Mark being careful not to move the 
disk, the marker records through the hole in its center the position of 
the disk and then withdraws it. At the command Hold the marker holds 
the disk carefully in place without marking until the position is verified 
by the instructor, and the disk is not withdrawn until so directed. (17) 




397 (contd.) 

Line of Sight. — With the open sight the line of sight is- deter- 
mined by a point on the middle line of the notch of the rear sight and 
the top of the front sight. With the peep sight, the line of sight is 
determined by the center of the peep and the top of the front sight. (18) 

Point of Aim. — The soldier will be informed that to give the 
greatest uniformity a point just below the mark, and not the mark, 
is taken as the point of^ aim, as it is impossible to always know, if 
touching the mark with the top of the front sight, how much of the 
front sight is seen; that the term '*on the mark or buirs-eye'' will 
be understood to mean an aim, taken just below the mark, showing a 
fine line of light between the mark and the top of the front sight. (19) 

The Normal Sight. — Look through the rear-sight notch at the 
bull's-eye or mark and bring the top of the front sight on a line with 
the top of and in the center of the rear-sight notch and aligned upon 
the point of aim. (See Fig. 1, PI. III.) (20) 




[307] 



397 (contd.) 




rfii66£/f. 



rjc. <4 

Plate IV. 

The Peep Sight. — Look througli the peep hole at the bull's-eye 
or mark and bring the top of the front sight to the center of the aperture 
and aligned upon the point of aim. (See Fig. 2, PI. III.) 

The soldier should be informed that regular results in firing can 
be obtained only when the same amount of front sight is taken each 
time, and that this can be done only by using the normal sight with 
the open notch or the peep sight in the manner described above. He 
should understand that the effect of taking less than the normal amount 
of sight is to cause a point lower than that aimed at to be struck, and 
that taking too much of the front sight causes a higher point to be 
struck. 

Although men will be found occasionally who can get excellent 
results by using the fine sight (Mg. 1, PI. IV), the average man can 
not, and this form of sighting is not recommended. The so-called full 
sight should not be taught under any circumstances. If shown to the 
men at all, it should be for the purpose of pointing out a fault to be 
carefully avoided. 

1308] 









Plate V 



397 (contd.) 

Remarks. — The eye can be focused • accurately upon objects at - 
but one distance at a time; all other objects in the field of view will 
appear more or less blurred, depending on their distance from the eye. 
This can readily be seen if a pencil is placed in the field of view near 
the eye while looking at some distant object. The pencil will appear 
blurred. This is the condition met with by the normal eye in sighting 
a rifle. If the eye is focused on one of the three points — the buirs-eye, 
the front sight, or the rear sight — the other two will appear blurred. 
This blurring effect is best overcome by using the ^^peep sight,'' as 
though looldng through a window, and focusing the eye on the bull's-eye.- 
The blurring of the peep hole will be concentric, giving a clear and easily 
defined center. The blurring of the front sight will be less, but sym- 
metrical on both sides with very little blur on the top. It can be readily 
and naturally brought to the center of the peep hole. Variations in light 
have less effect on the peep than on the open sight. 

But the limited field of view and lack of readiness in getting a 
quick aim with the peep sight limit its use to those stages of the com- 
bat when comparative deliberation will be possible. In the later stages 
of battle — especially when a rapid fire is to be delivered — the open sight 
will, in most cases, be used. In this case the normal sight should be 
used, as the horizontal line at the top of the notch of the rear sight 
affords a good guide for regularity. 

Whatever sight is used, the eye must be focused on the bulPs- 
eye, or mark, not on the front or rear sight. (21) 

First Sighting Exercise 

Using illustrations, describe the normal sight and the peep sight. 
(22) 

Using the sighting bar, represent the normal sight and the peep 
sight and require each man in the squad to look at them. (23) 

Using the sighting bar, describe and represent the usual errors 
of sighting and require each man in the squad to look at them.. (24) 

Second Sighting Exercise 

Using the sighting rest for the rifle, require each man to direct 
the marker to move the disk until the rifle is directed on the bull's-eye 
with the normal sight and command Hold. The instructor will verify 
this line of sight. Errors, if any, will be explained to the soldier and 
another trial made. If he is still unable to sight correctly, the first 
exercise will be repeated. 

Soldiers will sometimes be found who do not know how to place 
the eye in the line of sight; they often look over or along one side of 
the notch of the rear sight and believe that they are aiming through the 
notch because they see it at the same time that they do the front sight. 
This error will probably be made evident by the preceding exercise. 

[309] 



397 (contd.) 

Some men in sighting will look at the front sight and not at the object. 
As this often occasions a blur, which prevents the object from being 
distinctly seen and increases both the difficulties ' and inaccuracies of 
sighting, it should be corrected. (25) 

Eepeat the above, using the peep sight. (26) 

Third Sighting Exercise 

Using the sighting rest for the rifle, require each man to direct 
the marker to move the disk until the rifle is directed on the bulPs- 
eye with the normal sight and command Mark; then, being careful 
not to move the rifle or sights, repeat the operation until three marks 
have been made. 

(a) The Triangle of Sighting. — Join the three points determined 
as above by straight lines, mark with the soldier's name, and call his 
attention to the triangle thus formed. The shape and size of this 
triangle will indicate the nature of the variations made in aiming. 

(b) Abnormal Shape, Causes. — ^If the triangle is obtuse angled, with 
its sides approaching the vertical (See Fig. 2, PL IV), the soldier has 
not taken a uniform amount of front sight. If the sides of the triangle 
are more nearly horizontal (See Fig. 3, PI. IV) the errors were probably 
caused by not looking through the middle of the notch or not over 
the top of the front sight. If any one of the sides of the triangle is 
longer than one-half inch, the instructor directs the exercise to be re- 
peated, verifying each sight and calling the soldier's attention to his 
errors. The instructor will expla^in that the sighting gains in regularity 
as the triangle becomes smaller. 

(c) Verifying the Triangle. — If the sides of the triangle are so small 
as to indicate regularity in sighting, the instructor will mark the center 
of the triangle and then place the center of the bull's-eye on this mark. 
The instructor will then examine the position of the bull's-eye with 
reference to the line of sight. If the bull's-eye is properly placed 
with reference to the line of sight, th soldier aims correctly and with 
uniformity. If not so placed, he aims in a regular manner but with a 
constant error. 

(d) Causes of Errors. — If the bull's-eye is directly above its proper 
position, the soldier has taken in aiming too little front sight, or if 
directly below too much front sight. If directly to the right or left, 
the soldier has not sighted through the center of the rear-sight notch 
and over the top, of the front sight. If to the right, he has probably either 
sighted along the left of the rear sight notch or the right side of the 
front sight, or has committed both of these errors. If the bull's-eye 
is too far to the left, he has probably sighted along the right of the 
rear sight notch or to the left of the front sight, or has combined both 
of these errorsi 

£310] 



397 (contd.) 

If the bull's-eye is placed with reference to its proper position 
diagonally above and to the right, the soldier has probably combined 
the errors which placed it too high and too far to the right. Any other 
diagonal position would be produced by a similar combination of ver- 
tical and horizontal errors. 

As the errors thus shojvn are committed when the rifle is fixed in 
position, while that of the bull's-eye or target is altered, the effect 
will be directly opposite to the changes in the location of a hit in actual 
fire, occasioned by the same errors, when the target will be fixed and 
the rifle moved in aiming. 

After the above instruction has been given to one man, the line 
of sight will be slightly changed by moving the sighting rest or by 
changing the elevation and windage, and the exercises similarly re- 
peated with the other men in the squad. (27) 

Eepeat the third sighting exercise, using the peep sight. (28) 

Fourth Sighting Exercise 

This exercise is a demonstration of the effect of canting the 
piece. The soldier must be impressed with the necessity of keeping 
the sights vertical when aiming, and not canting the piece to the right 
or left. Explain to the soldier that if the piece is canted to the right, 
the bullet will strike to the right and below the point aimed at, even 
though the rifle be otherwise correctly aimed and the sights correctly 
set. Similarly, if the piece is canted to the left, the bullet will strike 
to the left and low. This can be explained by showing that the eleva- 
tion fixes the height of the point where the bullet will hit the target, 
and that the windage fixes the point to the right or left; i. e., the eleva- 
tion gives vertical effects and the windage horizontal effects. Let a 
pencil (or rod) held vertical represent the elevation; now if the pencil 
is turned to the right 90°, or horizontal, all of the elevation has been 
taken off, Causing the shot to strike low and changed into windage, 
causing the shot to strike to the right. (29) 

This effect may be demonstrated as follows: Use the sighting 
rest with the rifle firmly held in the notches, the bolt removed. Paste 
a black paster near the center of the bottom line of the target. Sight 
the rifle on this mark, using about 2,000 yards elevation, then, being 
careful not to move the rifle, look through the bore and direct the marker 
to move the disk until the bull's-eye is in the center of the field ^f view 
and command Mark. Next turn the rest with the rifle on its side, 
and with the same elevation sight on the same paster as above, then, 
being careful not to move the rifle, look through the bore and again direct 
the marker to move the disk until the bull's-eye is in the center of the 
field of view and command Mark. Not considering the fall of the 
bullet, the first mark represents the point struck with the sight vertical, 
the second mark represents the point struck, low and to the right, using 

[311] 



398 ^ 

the same elevation and tlie same point of aim, when the piece is canted 
90° to the right. 

Different degrees of canting the piece can be represented by 
drawing an arc of a circle through the two marks with the paster as a 
center. The second mark will be at a point on this arc corresponding 
to the degree of canting the piece. Emphasis will be laid upon the 
fact that this effect of canting increases with the distance from the 
target, (30) 

Other Exercises. — If time permits, the instructor may devise oth- 
er exercises which suggest themselves as useful and beneficial to his 
men. The following are examples: 

(a) In strong sunlight make a triangle of sighting, using a rifle 
having sights worn bright. Then, being careful not to move the rifle, 
blacken sights and make another triangle. Use dotted lines for the 
triangle made ■ with bright sights and full lines for the triangle made 
with blackened sights. The position and size of the two triangles will 
plainly show the^ advantage of the blackened sights. 

(b) In strong sunlight make a triangle of sighting; then, being care- 
ful not to move the rifle, make another triangle, having first shaded the 
target and the man sighting. The relative .position of the triangles will 
show the importance of knowing the effects of varying degrees of light. 
(31) 

Position and Aiming iDrills 
398. Purpose. — These drills are intended to so educate the muscles 
of the arm and body that the piece, during the act of aiming, shall be 
held without restraint, and during the operation of firing shall not be 
deflected from the target by any convulsive or improper movement of 
the trigger finger or of the body, arms, or hands. They also establish 
between the hand and eye such prompt and intim^ate connection as 
will insure that the finger shall act upon the trigger, giving the final 
pressure at the exact moment when the top of the front sight is seen 
to be directed upon the mark. 

The fact, though simple, can not be too strongly impressed upon 
the recruit that if, at the moment of discharge, the piece is properly 
supported and correctly aimed, the mark will surely be hit. Since 
any intelligent man can be taught to aim correctly and to hold the 
sights aligned upon the mark with a fair amount of steadiness, it follows 
that bad shooting must necessarily arise from causes other than bad 
aiming. The chief of these causes is known to be the deflection given 
to the rifle when it is discharged, due to the fact that the soldier, at 
the moment of firing, instead of squeezing the trigger, jerks it. This 
convulsive action is largely due to lack of familiarity with the methods 
of firing and to a constrained position of the muscles of the body, arm^ 
and hands, which constrained position it is the purpose of the position 
and aiming drills to correct. 

[312] 



398 (contd.) 

To become a good shot, constant, careful, and patient practice is 
required. Systematic aiming and squeezing the trigger will do much 
to make a rifleman. The men will be taught to take advantage of every 
opportunity for practicing aiming, and squeezing the trigger. For this 
purpose the barracks and ground in the vicinity of the barracks should 
be furnished with aiming targets, which the men will be encouraged 
to use at odd moments, as when w^aiting for a formation or during a 
rest. At drill the soldier will be cautioned never to squeeze the trigger 
without selecting an object and taldng careful aim. "When on the range 
waiting for his turn to fire, the soldier should use part of his time in 
position and aiming exercises, aiming at the target or at objects outside 
of the range, and he should be made to understand that this practice 
previous to firing will tend to prevent nervousness and will have a 
marked effect upon his score. (32) 

To Whom Given. — The position and aiming drills will be given 
to all soldiers who have not qualified as ^* marksman '\,o^., better in the 
preceding target year. Some practice in these drills (especially in the 
trigger-squeeze exercise) is recommended for those who have qualified 
as '• marksman ^^ or better. The amount to be given is left to the discre- 
tion of the company commander. (33) 

Drills; General Instructions. — These drills are divided into four 
progressive exercises. The first exercise teaches the position; the second 
exercise teaches the position and the aim; the third exercise teaches the 
aim and the manner of squeezing the trigger; and the fourth exercise 
teaches the methods of rapid fire. The exercises should be taught by 
the numbers at first; when fully understood, without numbers. 

To correct any tendency to cant the piece, the rear sight will be 
raised. A black paster at which to aim will be placed on the wall 
opposite each man. The squad being formed in single rank, with an 
interval of 1 yard between files, the instructor directs the men to take 
the position of Keady except that the position of the feet will be 
such as to insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the body. The 
instructor then cautions "Position and aiming drill.'* 

The exercise which is being taught should be repeated frequently 
and made continuous. The instructor prefaces the preparatory com- 
mand by Continue the motion or At will and gives the command Halt at 
the conclusion of the exercise, when the soldier will return to the position 
of Ready. Or the soldier may be made to repeat the first and second 
motions by the command One, Two, the exercise concluding with the 
command Halt. 

Care should be taken by the instructor not to make the position 
and aiming drills tedious. Thirty minutes daily should be spent in this 
practice during the period of preliminary instruction. After gallery 
practice is taken up, however, five or ten minutes daily should be suf- 
ficient for these exercises. 

[313] 



398 (contd.) 

In order that the instructor may readily detect and correct errors, 
the squads for these drills should not consist of more than eight men. 

The instructor should avoid holding the squad- in tiresome posi- 
tions while maldng explanations or correcting errors. (34) 

Position Exercise 

The instructor commands: 1. Position, 2. EXERCISE. At the 
last command, without moving the body or eyes, raise the rifle smartly 
to the front of the right shoulder to the full extent of the left arm, 
elbow inclined downward, the barrel nearly horizontal, muzzle slightly 
depressed, heel of the butt on a line with the top of the shoulder. 

(Two.) Bping the piece smartly against the hollow of the shoulder, 
without permitting the shoulder to give way, and press the rifle against 
it, mainly with the right hand, only slightly with the left, the fore- 
finger of the right hand resting lightly against the trigger, the rifle 
inclined neither -to the right nor left. 

(Three.) ^ Eesume the position of Ready. (35) 

Remarks. — The instructor should especially notice the position 
of each soldier in this exercise, endeavoring to give to each man an 
easy and natural position. He should see that the men avoid drawing 
in the stomach, raising the breast, or bending the small of the back. 

The butt of the piece must be pressed firmly, but not too tightly, 
into the hollow of the shoulder and not against the muscles of the upper 
arm. If held too tightly, the pulsations of the body will be communi- 
cated to the piece; if too loosely, the recoil will bruise the shoulder. 
If only the heel or toe touches the hollow of the shoulder, the recoil 
may throw the muzzle down or up, affecting the position of the hit. 
While both arms are used to press the piece to the shoulder, the left 
arm should be used to direct the piece and the right forefinger inust be 
left free to squeeze the trigger. (36) 

Aiming Exercise 

The instructor will first direct the sights to be adjusted for the 
lowest elevation and subsequently for the different longer ranges. 

The instructor commands: 1. Aiming, 2. EXERCISE. 

At the last command execute the first and second motion of the 
position exercise. 

(Two.) Bend the head a little to the right, the cheek resting 
against the stock, the left eye closed, the right eye looking through the 
notch of the rear sight at a point slightly below the mark. 

(Three.) Draw a moderately long breath, let a portion of it es- 
cape, then, with the lungs in a state of rest, slowly raise the rifle with 
the left hand, being careful not to incline the sight to either side, until 
the line of sight is directly on the mark; hold the rifle steadily directed 
on the mark for a moment; th^n, without command and just before 

[314] 



398 (contd.) 
the power to hold the rifle steadily is lost, drop the rifle to the position 
of Ready and resume the breathing. (37) 

Remarks. — Some riflemen prefer to extend the left arm. Such 
a position gives greater control over the rifle when firing in a strong 
wind or at moving objects. It also possesses advantages when a rapid 
as well as accurate delivery of fire is desired. Whatever the position, 
whether standing, kneeling, sitting, or prone, the piece should rest on 
the palm of the left hand, never on the tips of the fingers, and should 
be firmly grasped by all the fingers and the thumb. 

The eye may be brought to the line of sight either by lowering 
the head or by raising the shoulder; it is best to combine somewhat these 
methods; the shoulder to be well raised by raising the right elbow 
and holding it well to the front and at right angles to the body. 

If the shoulder is not raised, it will be necessary for the soldier 
to lower the head to the front in order to bring the eye in to the line of 
sight. Lowering the head too far to the front brings it near the right 
hand, which grasps the stock. When the piece is discharged, this hand 
is carried by the recoil to the rear and, when the head is in this posi- 
tion, may strike against the nose or mouth. This often happens in 
practice, and as a result of this blow often repeated many men become 
gun-shy, or flinch, or close their eyes at the moment of firing. Much 
bad shooting, ascribed to other causes, is really due to this fault. Rais- 
ing the right elbow at right angles to the body elevates the right shoul- 
der, and lifts the piece so that it is no longer necessary to incline the 
head materially to the front in order to look along the sights. 

As the length of the soldier ^s neck determines greatly the exact 
method of taking the proper position, the instructor will be careful to 
see that the position is taken without restraint. (38) 

As changes in the elevation of the rear sight will necessitate a 
corresponding change in the position of the soldier's head when aim- 
ing, the exercise should not be held with the sight adjusted for the 
longer ranges until the men have been practiced with the sights as the 
latter would generally be employed for offhand firing. (39) 

The soldier must be cautioned that while raising the line of sight 
to the mark he must fix his eyes on the mark and not on the front sight; 
the latter can then be readily brought into the line joining the rear- 
sight notch and mark. If this plan be not followed when firing is held 
on the range at long distances the mark will generally appear blurred 
and indistinct. The front sight will always be plainly seen, even though 
the eye is not directed particularly upon it. (40) 

The rifle must be raised slowly, without jerk, and its motion 
stopped gradually. In retaining it directed at the mark, care must be 
taken not to continue the aim after steadiness is lost; this period will 
probably be found to be short at first, but will quickly lengthen with 
practice. No effort should be made to prolong it beyond the time that 

[315] 



398 (contd.) 

breathing can be easily restrained. Each soldier will determine for him- 
self the proper time for discontinuing the aim. (41) 

The men must be cautioned not to hold the breath too long, 
as a trembling of the body will result in many cases. (42) 

Some riflement prefer, in aiming, to keep both eyes open but, 
unless the habit is fixed, the soldier should be instructed to close the left 
eye. (43) 

Trigger-squeeze Exercise 

The instructor commands: 1. Trigger squeeze, 2. EXERCISE. At 
the command EXERCISE, the soldier will execute the first motion of 
the aiming exercise. 

(Two.) The second motion of the aiming exercise. 

(Three.) Draw a moderately long breath, let a portion of it 
escape, hold the breath and slowly raise the rifle with the left hand 
until the line of sight is on the mark, being careful not to incline the 
sights to either side. Contract the trigger finger gradually, slowly and 
steadily increasing the pressure on the trigger, while the aim is being 
perfected; continue the gradual increase of pressure so that when the aim 
has become exact the additional pressure required to release the point 
of the sear can be given almost insensibly and without causing any de- 
flection of the rifle. Continue the aim a moment after the release of the 
firing pin, observe if any change has been made in the direction of the 
line of sight, and then resum-e the position of Ready, cocking the piece 
by raising and lowering the bolt handle. (44) 

Remarks. — Poor shooting is o^ten the result of lack of proper 
coordination of holding the breath, the maximum steadiness of aim, 
and the squeeze of the trigger. By frequent practice in this exercise, 
each man may come to know the exact instant his firing pin will be 
released. He must be taught to hold the breath, bring the sights to bear 
upon the mark, and squeeze the trigger all at the same time. (45) 

The Trigger Squeeze. — The trigger should be squeezed, not 
pulled, the hand being closed upon itself as a sponge is squeezed, the 
forefinger sharing in this movement. The forefinger sh'ould be placed 
as far around the trigger as to press it with the second joint. (See Fig.4, 
PI. IV.) By practice the soldier becomes familiar with the trigger 
squeeze of his rifle, and knowing this, he is able to judge at any time, 
within limits, what additional pressure is required for its discharge. By 
constant repetition of this exercise he should be able finally to squeeze 
the trigger to a certain point beyond which the slightest movement 
will release the sear. Having squeezed the trigger to this point, the aim 
is corrected and, when true, the additional pressure is applied and the 
discharge follows. (46) 

[316] 



398 (contd.) 
Rapid-3re Exercise 

Object. — The object of this exercise is to tea^li the soldier to aim 
quickly and at the same time accurately in all the positions he will 
be called upon to assume in range j^ractice. (47) 

The instructor commands: 1. Rapid-fire exercise, 2. COMMENCE 
FIRING. At the first command the first and second motions of the trig- 
ger-squeeze exercise are performed At the second command the soldier 
performs the third motion of the trigger-squeeze exercise, squeezing the 
trigger without disturbing the aim or the position of the piece, but 
at the same time without undue deliberation. He then, without removing 
the rifle from the shoulder, holding the piece in position with the left 
hand, grasps the handle of the bolt with the right hand, rapidly draws 
back the bolt, closes the chamber, aims, and again squeezes the trigger. 
This movement is repeated until the trigger has been squeezed five times, 
when, without command, the piece is brought back to the position of 
Ready. 

When the soldier has acquired some facility in this exercise, he 
will be required to repeat the movement ten times, and finally by using 
dummy cartridges, he msij, by degrees, gain the necessary quickness and 
dexterity for the execution of the rapid fire required in range firing. 
(48) 

Methods. — The methods of taking position, of aiming, and of 
squeezing the trigger, taught in the preceding exercises, should be 
carried out in the rapid-fire exercise, with due attention to all details 
taught therein; the details being carried out as p"1^cribed except that 
greater promptness is necessary. In order that any tendency on the 
part of the recruit to slight the movements of aiming and of trigger 
squeeze shall be avoided, the rapid-fire exercise will not be taught until 
the recruit is thoroughly drilled and familiar with the preceding exer- 
cises. The recruit will be instructed that with practice in this class of 
fire the trigger can be squeezed promptly without deranging the piece. 
(49) 

Repetition. — If the recruit seems to execute the exercise hurried- 
ly or'^carelessly, the instructor will require him to repeat it at a s'ower 
rate. (50) 

Manipulation of the Breech Mechanism. — To hold the piece to . 
the shoulder and, at the same time, manipulate the breech' mechanism 
with the proper facility, are learned only after much practice. Some 
riflemen, especially men who shoot from the left shoulder, find it easier, 
in rapid firing, to drop the piece to the position of load after each shot. 
While at first trial this method may seem easier, it is believed that, with 
practice, the advantage of the former method will be apparent. (51) 

L3173 



398 (contd.) 

Position and Aiming Drill, Kneeling 

These exercises will be repeated in the kneeling position by 
causing the squad to kneel by the commands prescribed in the DrUl 
Regulations.' The exercises will be executed as prescribed for standing, 
except that at the commandTwo in the position exercise, the soldier 
will rest the left elbow on the left knee, the point of the elbow in front 
of the kneecap. The pasters for the kneeling exercise should be at 
2% feet from the floor or ground. (52) 

Remarks. — Frequent rests will be given during practice in these 
exercises kneeling, as the position, if long continued, becomes constrained 
and fatigues the soldier unnecessarily. 

In raising the rifle to the mark in the second and third exercises, 
the position of the left hand should not be changed, but the left fore- 
arm should be brought toward the body and at the same time the body 
bent slightly to the rear. 

When aiming kneeling there is, from the nature of the position, 
a tendency to press the butt of the rifle against the upper arm instead 
of against the hollow of the shoulder; this will necessitate inclining 
the head considerably to the right to get the line of sight, and by bring- 
ing the rifle so far to the rear will, if the thumb is placed across the 
stock, cause it to give by the recoil a blow upon the nose or mouth. 

These difficulties may be avoided by advancing the right elbow 
well to the front, at the same time raising it so that the arm is about 
parallel with the ground. The hollow of the shoulder will then be the 
natural place for the rifle butt, and the right thumb will be brought 
too far from the face to strike it in the recoil. 

Some riflemen prefer, by bending the ankle, to rest the instep flat 
on the ground, the weight of the body coming more on the upper part 
of the heel; this obviates any tendency of the right knee to slip; or, 
by resting the right side of the foot on the ground, toe pointing to the 
front, to bring the weight of the body on the left side of the foot. These 
positions are authorized. (53) 

Choice of Position. — In firing kneeling, the steadiness obtained 
depends greatly upon the position adopted. The peculiarities of con- 
formation of the individual soldier exert when firing kneeling a gfeater 
influence than when firimg either standing, sitting, or prone; the instruc- 
tor should, therefore, carefully endeavor, noticing the build of each 
soldier, to place him in the position for which he is best adapted and 
which will exert the least tension or strain upon the muscles and nerves. 
It should be remembered, however, that without the rest of the left 
elbow on the knee this position possesses no advantage of steadiness 
over the standing position. (54) 

Kneeling Position; When Taken. — The kneeling position can be 
taken more quickly than either the sitting or the prone position. It 

[318] 



898 (contd.) 
is, therefore, the position naturally assumed when a soldier, who is stand- 
ing or advancing, has to make a quick shot at a moving or disappear- 
ing object and desires more steadiness than can be obtained standing. 
(55) 

Position and Aiming Drill, Sitting Down 

In many cases the men, while able to kneel and hold the piece 
moderately steady, can obtain in a sitting position much better results. 
A.11 should, therefore, be instructed in aiming sitting down as well as 
kneeling. 

To practice the soldier in the preceding exercises in a sitting 
position, the squad being formed in a single rank, with an interval of one 
pace between files, the rifle should first be brought to Order arms; the 
instructor then commands: Sit Down. 

At this command make a half face to the right and, assisted by 
the left hand on the ground, sit down, facing slightly to the right, the 
left leg directed toward the front, right leg inclined toward the right, 
both heels, but not necessarily the bottoms of the feet, on the ground, 
the right knee slightly higher than the left; body erect and carried 
naturally from the hips; at the same time drop the muzzle of the piece 
to the front, and to the position of the first motion of load, right hand 
upon the thigh, just in front of the body, the left hand slightly above, 
but not resting upon, the left leg. 

The exercise will be executed as heretofore prescribed, except 
that at the command Two (position exercise) the soldier will rest 
the left elbow on the left knee, the point of the elbow in front of the 
knee cap, and the right elbow against the left or inside of the right 
knee, at the same time inclining the body from the hips slightily for- 
ward. 

For the aiming and trigger-squeeze exercises the pasters, used as 
aiming points, will be 2% feet from the floor or the ground. 

To afford the men rest, or on the completion of the kneeling or 
sitting down exercises, the instructor will command BISE, when the 
men rise, face to the front, and resume the Order arms. (56) 

Remarks. — If the preceding position is carefully practiced, steadi- 
ness is quickly attained. The right leg should not be carried so far 
to the right as not to afford a good support or brace for the right elbow. 

This position may be modified, but, in general, not without im- 
paring the steadiness of the man, by crossing the legs at the ankle, 
the outside of each foot resting upon the ground, body more erect, and 
the knees slightly more raised than in the previous position. (57) 

Position and Aiming Drill, Prone 
From the nature of the position it is not practicable to execute 
these exercises according to the method followed when standing or 
klieeling. Instruction will, however, always be given with reference to 

[319] 



398 (contd.) 

the position, to the manner of assuming it, and to aiming and squeezing 

the trigger. 

For this purpose the squad being formed as specified in paragraph 
56 (the black pasters therein mentioned being about 12 inches from 
the ground), the squad will be brought to Order arms. 

Then (the squad either standing or kneeling), the instructor com- 
mands: LIE DOWN, which will be executed as prescribed in the Drill 
Regulations-, the legs may be spread apart and the toes turned out if 
found to give a steadier position. 

After the squad has taken the position as prescribed above, the 
legs should be inclined well to the left, and either crossed or sepa- 
rate(J as the soldier prefers or as his particular conformation appears 
to render most desirable, and the body at the same time inclined slightly 
to the right. 

With care and practice the soldier may acquire an easy position 
which he is able to assume with great facility. 

Being at Eeady the instructor then commands: 1. Trigger 
squeeze, 2. EXEECISE. 

At the latter command carry the left elbow to the front and 
slightly to the right, the left hand under the barrel at the balance, 
weight of the body mainly supported by the left elbow, the right rest- 
ing lightly on the floor or ground. 

(Two.) Slide the rifle with the right hand through the left hand 
to the front until the left hand is a little in front of the trigger guard; 
at the same time raise the rifle with both hands and press it against 
the hollow of the shoulder. 

(Three.) Direct the rifle upon the mark and carry out the further 
details of aiming and squeezing the trigger as prescribed in paragraph 
44. 

Then resume the position, lying down. 

As soon as the men have acquired with accuracy the details of the 
position they will be practiced, without the numbers, in aiming and 
squeezing the trigger at will; after which the rapid-fire exercise in 
the prone position will be practiced, the necessary sldll and dexterity 
being acquired by degrees. 

To afford the men rest, or on completion of the exercise, the in- 
structor will command: BISE, which is executed as prescribed in the 
Drill Regulations. (58) 

Remarks. — The preceding position for firing lying down pos- 
sesses in a greater degree than any other position the merit of adapta- 
bility to the configuration of the ground; it enables the soldier to deliver 
fire over low parapets or improvised shelters, thus making the best 
use of cover. The importance of training the soldier in firing from the 
other positions should not, however, be lost sight of, since from the 
prone position it will frequently be impossible to see the objective. 

[320] 



398 (contd.) 

Back positions are not authorized. 

In the prone position, when aiming, the left elbow should be 
well under the barrel, the other elbow somewhat to the right, but not 
so far as to induce any tendency to slip on the floor or ground. 

The greater changes in elevation required in first directing the 
rifle on the object should be given by altering the position of the left 
hand under the barrel, the slighter changes only by advancing or with- 
drawing the shoulder. 

As the body does not yield to the recoil, as when firing standing 
or kneeling, the force of recoil, if the rifle is not properly held, may 
severely bruise the soldier. It is one of the objects of this exercise 
to so teach him that this will be prevented by assuming a correct posi- 
tion. Care must be exercised that the butt is not brought against the 
collar bone. By moving the shoulder slightly to the front or rear, and 
by moving the right elbow from the body or toward it, each soldier 
may determine the position in which the shoulder gives to the butt 
of the rifle the easiest rest. This will probably be the one in which 
the force of the recoil will be least felt. 

The soldier should persist in this exercise until he obtains a 
position in which he feels no constraint, which will not subject him to 
bruises from the recoil, and from which the mark appears plainly 
through the sights. Having secured such a position, he must not change 
it when firing, as a variation in the points of support of the rifle, the 
distance of the eye from the rear sight, or the tension of the hold has 
a decided effect, especially at the longer ranges, upon the location of the 
point struck. (59) 

Use of Sling. — After the soldier has been drilled in the proper 
standing, kneeling, sitting, and prone positions in the foregoing exer- 
cises, the use of the sling will be taught. Its use is described in para- 
graph 91. Adjustments and their advantages will be taught with the 
idea on noninterference with quickness and freedom of action. The 
trigger-squeeze exercises will then be continued in the different posi- 
tions, using the sling. (60) 

General Remarks on the Preceding Drills 
The importance of sighting and position and aiming drills can 
not be too persistently impressed upon the soldier. If these exercises are 
carefully practiced, the soldier, before firing a shot at a target, will 
have learned to correctly aim his piece, to hold his rifle steadily, to 
squeeze the trigger properly, to assume that position best adapted to 
the particular conformation of his body, and will have acquired the 
quickness and manual dexterity required for handling the piece in rapid 
fire. This knowledge can not be successfully acquired upon the target 
ground. At that place the time that can be given to instruction is 
limited and should be devoted to the higher branches of the subject. 

[321] 



399 

Even, if the desired amount of attention could be given to eacli soldier, 
nevertheless, from the circumstances of the firing, his errors can not 
be readily determined. It is more than likely that the soldier would never 
discover the reasons for his failures and would, therefore, be unable to 
properly correct them. 

Under such conditions the knowledge that he may have , of the 
many other requisites for good marksmanship can not be utilized to 
full advantage, and, in fact, can but in a limited degree compensate 
for the neglect of these first principles and for the failure to lay, by 
assiduously practicing them, the only firm foundation for future pro- 
ficiency. 

If, in the instruction practice on the range, it is found that the 
soldier makes errors in his position, he should be required to stop firing 
and to practice the third exercise for 10 or 15 minutes. He should 
be encouraged to go through these exercises frequently at other than 
drill hours, care being taken that, in the aiming and trigger-squeeze 
exercises, he always has some definite object for a mark. (61) 
399. Deflection and Elevation Correction Drills. 

Sight Correction. — The soldier may find when firing at a target 
that the first shot has missed the bulPs-eye or figure, and in order to 
cause the second to hit, two methods may be used: The point of aim 
may be changed or the sights may be moved and the same point be 
aimed at. In order to do accurate shooting it is essential to have a well- 
defined mark at which to aim; consequently, except for very slight 
corrections, the method of moving the sights, involving changes in ele- 
vation and windage, is devised. (62) 

Elevation. — The instructor will show the men the graduations 
on the rear-sight leaf, and will explain to them the value of the different 
divisions. He will explain how to adjust their sights for different dis- 
tances. He will make it clear that raising or lowering the slide on the 
rear-sight leaf has the effect of raising or lowering the point struck. 
The amount of change which a given amount of elevation will cause in 
the point struck varies with the range and with the rifle and the am- 
munition used. (63) 

Deflection. — The instructor will explain how to move the mov- 
able base by use of the windage screw; that the graduations on the 
rear end of the movable base are for convenience in setting the sights 
and applying corrections; that each division is called a point of windage; 
that turning the movable base of the rear sight to the right or left 
changes the point struck to the right or left;, that, to overcome the 
drifting effect of a wind from the right, the movable base must be 
moved to the right, and, if the wind be from the left, the movable sight 
base must be moved to the left. (64) 

Adjusting the Sights. — (a) Elevation. — The graduations on the 
rear sight will be found correct for but few rifles. This is due to slight 

C322] 



399 (contd.) 

variations in the parts of the rifle, especially the barrel, which occur 
under the most exact methods of fabrication. Not all rifles are tested 
at the arsenal, and when the graduations for the rear sight have been 
experimentally determined, they are correct only for the particular con- 
ditions existing when they were so determined. The correction necessary 
for each particular rifle at any range is found by shooting it at that 
range, and is constant with the same ammunition and when firing under 
the same conditions. If no correction is necessary, the rifle is said to 
''shoot on the mark.'' 

(b) The zero of a rifle. — That reading of the wind gauge necessary 
to overcome the drift of a rifle at a particular range is called the *'zero" 
of that rifle for that range, and all allowances for wind should be cal- 
culated from this reading. 

The ''zero'' of a rifle is found by shooting it on a perfectly 
calm day. (65) 

The following table gives the approximate corrections on the 
rear-sight leaf and the wind gauge necessary to move the point struck 
1 foot at ranges from 100 to 1,000 yards: 





Correction on 


Correction in 




wind gauge 


elevation 


• Range. 


necessary to 


necessary to 




move the 


change the 




point struck 1 


point struck 1 




foot. 


foot. 


Yards. 


Points, 


Yards. 


100 


3 


415 


200 


1.5 


185 


300 


1 


105 


400 


.75 


70 


500 


.6 


48 


600 


.5 


35 


700 


.43 


25 


800 


.375 


20 


900 


.333 


IS 


1,000 


.3 


12 



Exercise. — To give the soldier practice in correcting elevation 
and windage, a target should be placed on the wall facing the squad 
and a blank paster attached a foot or more from the bull's-eye, at 
first directly above or below the bull's-eye, then on a horizontal line 
with it, and finally in an oblique direction. 

For this drill the rifle of each soldier who has not determined, 
by actual firing the "zero" and the correct elevations for the different 
ranges will be assumed to shoot on the mark and to require no windage. 

Announce the range and tell the men that the paster represents 
the position of an assumed hit and require each man to correct his 
sight so as to bring the next hit into the bull's-eye. This exercise should 
be repeated daily during gallery practice, using the A, B, C, and D tar- 

[323] 



S99 (contd.) 

gets, until the men have acquired accuracy in maldng corrections for 

all ranges up to 1,000 yards. 

When the men have learned how to adjust their sights, this 
exercise should be carried on in connection with gallery practice. The 
rear sight on each rifle is given an incorrect setting in elevation and 
windage by the instructor, and the soldier required to find the correct 
adjustment by firing. (67) 

The Effect of Wind. — It is important that before going on the 
range the soldier should be taught to estimate the force and direction 
of the wind and the amount of correction necessary to apply to the 
movable rear-sight base to overcome the effect of the wind on the bullet 
in its flight. 

The direction of the wind, for convenience, is expressed by a 
clock-face notation, the clock being supposed to lie on the ground with 
the hour XII toward the target or mark and the hour III at the firer's 
right hand. A wind blowing from the front (that is, from the direction 
of the target) is called a '^XII-o 'clock wind," one directly from the 
left across the field of fire is called a ^^IX-o 'clock wind," and so on. The 
direction of the wind can be obtained by observing its effect upon smoke, 
on trees, or grass, or dust, or by wetting the finger and holding it up. 

The force of the wind is designated in miles per hour. An ane- 
mometer should be placed near the barracks, where it Will not be ex- 
posed to cross currents, and so that the dial can be readily seen. The 
force of the wind can then be read from the dial and at the same time 
the effect of the wind on the boughs of trees, flags, and streamers, and 
the smoke from chimneys should be observed. The soldier should be 
required to estimate the force of the wind and then verify his estima- 
tion by anemometer readings. This exercise should be repeated fre- 
quently until the soldier has learned to estimate roughly the force of the 
wind without the aid of an anemometer. 

Heat waves, when present, are an important aid in estimating 
the force of the wind. (68) 

In the following table are shown the points of windage neces- 
sary to correct for a 10-mile-an-hour wind: 



Range. 


III or IX. 


II, IV, Vlfl, X. 


I, V, VII, XI. 


Yards. 


Points. 


Points. 


Points, 




100 


0.23 


0.2 


0.1 




200 


.34 


.31 


.17 




300 


.61 


.53 


.30 




400 


.86 


.75 


.43 




500 


1.11 


.96 


.55 




600 


1.39 


1.2 


.69 




700 


1.68 


1.45 


.84 




800 


2.00 


1.73 


1.00 




900 


2.34 


2.03 


1.17 




1,000 


2.67 


2.30 


1.33 





[324] 



400 

Winds blowing from XII and VI o'clock directions have no 
deviating influence on the flight of the bullet, but these winds have 
the effect of shortening (in the case of XII-o 'clock wind) or lengthening 
the range (in the case of VI-o 'clock wind). The correction necessary 
to apply in the case of such winds is inappreciable. (69) 

Remarks. — If the soldier is well drilled in appl;^^ng the windage 
and elevation corrections necessary to bring an assumed hit into the 
bull's-eye or figure, using in turn each of the targets at which he fires 
on the range, he will need very little further instruction in applying 
the necessary corrections. The instructor should assure himself that 
the men understand the reasons for these corrections, and they should 
never forget that they must move the rear-sight movable base into the 
wind and in the same direction they wish to move the point struck. (70) 

Gallery Practice 

400. After the soldier has been thoroughly instructed in sighting, and 
in the position, aiming, deflection, and elevation-correction drills, he 
will be exercised in firing at short ranges with reduced charges. (71) 

Value of Gallery Practice. — Notwithstanding the value of the 
position and aiming drills, it is impossible to keep up the soldier's inter- 
est if these exercises are unduly prolonged. By gallery practice, how- 
ever, the interest is easily maintained and further progress, especially 
in teaching the trigger squeeze, is made. Many of the external influences, 
which on the range affect the firing, being absent, the soldier is not 
puzzled by results for which, at this stage of his education, he could not 
account were he advanced to firing with full charges. Furthermore, 
as there is no recoil to induce nervousness or flinching, the soldier soon 
finds that he can make good scores, and this success is the surest stimu- 
lus to interest. 

Not only to the beginner is gallery practice of value; to the good 
shot it is a means of keeping, to a certain extent, in practice, and 
practice in shooting, as much as in anything else, is essential. Since it 
can be carried on throughout the year, gallery practice is of much value 
in fixing in the men the habit of aimed fire, than which nothing in his 
training is of more importance. (72) 

Gallery Practice. — During the month preceding range practice 
the minimum number of scores given in the following table must be 
fired by all who are required to fire under the provisions of paragraph 89: 



[325] 



401 



Range 
(feet). 


Target. 


Position. 


Scores. 














Kneeling. 


u 0.0 








^^^-g 


50 




Standing. 


U (A 




, !- r^ W G^ V 




?H*.ja . 


75 


le iroi 
get is 
Ordna 
ment, 
lar th 
paper 


Prone. 


mini] 
(4) a 
In eac 

sitions 


75 


- H 


Sitting. 


< 

(73) 



Scores. — Gallery practice will be conducted in scores of fiVe shots. 
The number of scores to be fired by any man at a single practice is 
determined by the company commander. 

No reports of the results of the firing will be required, although a 
record of it should be kept in the company for the instruction and guid- 
ance of the soldier. (74) 

Additional Practice. — In addition to the minimum number of 
scores prescribed in paragraph 73, practice in this class of firing should 
be carried on throughout the year when practicable, the amount and 
details of the practice being left to the discretion of the company com- 
mander. The practice should be varied as much as possible. It should 
include exercises in slow and rapid fire, in assuming the various firing 
positions and opening fire quickly, and \n finding the correct adjustment 
of the rear sight without unnecessary loss of time. Moving or disap- 
pearing targets can easily be improvised and the instruction made as 
interesting as possible. (75) 

Matches. — Matches in gallery firing between the men, partic- 
ularly the recruits, and between teams of the same or different com- 
panies, should be promoted and encouraged. While such matches in- 
crease the interest of the men in their practice, they at the same time 
afford experience in the conditions of competitive firing. (76) 

Estimating-Distance Test 
401. Importance. — Ability to estimate distances correctly is an import- 
ant element in the education of the soldier. 

While it is true that fire on the battle field will usually be by 
groups and the ranges given by officers or noncommissioned officers, 
the battle field is reached only after a long series of experiences in scout, 
patrol, and outpost duty, in which the soldier is frequently placed in 
positions where it is essential that he shall determine for himself the 
¥ange to be used in order that the fire may be effective. It is, therefore, 
here made a prerequisite to qualification that the soldier shall be pro- 
ficient in estimating distances by eye. 

[326] 



401 (contd.) 

During the estimating-distance drills advantage should be taken 
of every opportunity to train the soldier in observing his surround- 
ings from positions and when on a march. He should be practiced 
in pointing out and naming different features of the ground; in dis- 
covering and describing different objects; in counting different objects 
or beings. Especially should noncommissioned officers be trained in 
describing the location, with reference to other objects, of objects dif- 
ficult to see and in imparting information of this kind quickly and 
accurately. (77) 

Distances can be estimated by the eye or by sound; they can 
be determined by range-finding instruments, by trial shots or volleys, 
or from maps. (78) 

Estimation of Distance by Eye. — To estimate distance by the 
eye with accuracy, it is necessary to be familiar with the appearance, 
as to length, of a unit of measure which can be compared mentally with 
the distance which is to be estimated. The most convenient unit of 
length is 100 yards. To impress upon the soldier the extent of a stretch 
of 100 yards two posts 100 yards apart, with short stakes between to 
mark each 25 yards, should be placed near the barracks, or on the drill 
ground, and the soldier required to pace off the marked distance several 
times counting his steps. He will thus learn how many of his steps make 
100 yards and will become familiar with the appearance of the whole dis- 
tance and of its fractional parts. 

Next a distance of more than 100 yards will be shown, him and 
he will be required to compare this distance with the 100-yard unit and 
to estimate it. Having made this estim^ate, he will be required to verify 
its accuracy by pacing the distance. 

A few minutes each day should be spent in this practice, the 
soldier often being requi^-ed to make his estimate by raising his rear- 
sight leaf and showing it to the instructor. After the first drills the 
soldier should be required to pace the distance only when the estimate is 
unusually inaccurate. 

The soldier should be taught that, in judging the distance from 
the enemy, his estimate may. be corrected by a careful observation of 
the clearness with which details of dress, the movements of limbs or of 
the files in a line may be seen. In order to derive the benefit of this 
method, the soldier will be required to observe closely all the details 
noted above in single men or squads of men posted at varying distances, 
which will be measured and announced. 

Although the standing and kneeling silhouettes used in field prac- 
tice afford good objects upon which to estimate distances, the instructor 
should make frequent use of living figures and natural objects, as this is 
the class of targets from which the soldier will be compelled to estimate 
his range in active service. (79) 

[327] 



401 (contd.) 

Methods of Estimating Long Distances by the Eye. — The follow- 
ing methods are found useful. 

(a) The soldier may decide that the object can not be more than a 
certain distance away nor less than a certain distance; his estimates 
must be kept within the closest possible limits and the mean of the 
two taken as the range. 

(b) The soldier selects a point which he considers the middle point 
of the whole distance, estimates this half distance and doubles it, or he 
similarly divides the distance into a certain number of lengths which 
are familiar to him. 

(c) The soldier estimates the distance along a parallel line, as a road 
on one side, having on it well-defined objects. 

(d) The soldier takes the mean of several estimates made by different 
persons. This method is not applicable to instruction. (80) 

Appearance of Objects: How Modified by Varying Conditions of 
Light; Difference of Level, etc. — During instruction the men should be 
taught the effect of varying conditions of light and terrain upon the 
apparent distance of an object. 

Objects seem nearer — 

(a) When the object is in a bright light. 

(b) When the color of the object contrasts sharply with the 

color of the background. 

(c) When looking over water, snow, or a uniform surface like 

a wheat field. 

(d) When looking from a height downward. 

(e) In the clear atmosphere of high altitudes. 
Objects seem more distant — 

(a) When looldng over a depression in the ground. 

(b) When there is a poor light or a fog. 

(c) When only a small part of the object can be seen. 

(d) When looking from low ground upward toward higher 

ground. (81) 

Estimating Distance by Sound. — Sound travels at the rate of 
about 1,100 feet, or 366 yards, per second. If a gun is fired at a distance, 
a certain time elapses before the sound is heard. If the number of 
seconds or parts of seconds between the fiash and the report be carefully 
taken and multiplied by 366, the product will be approximately the dis- 
tance in yards to the gun. This method will be of doubtful use of the 
battle field, owing to the difficulty of distinguishing the sound of the 
gun, whose flash is seen, from that of any other. It will probably be 
useful in determining the range to a hostile battery when it first opens 
fire. (82) 

Detennining Distance by Range-Finding Instruments. — Accuracy 
in determining distance by range-finding instruments depends upon care 

[328] 



401 (contd.) 

and facility in use of the instrument and clearness of definition of the ob- 
jective. Knowledge of the use of the instrument issued is essential to 
all company officers and should be imparted to sergeants when time is 
available. (83) 

Determination of Distance by Trial Shots or Volleys. — If the 
ground is so dry and dusty that the fall of the bullets is visible through 
a glass or with the naked eye, a method of determining the distance is 
afforded by using a number of trial shots or volleys. 

The method of using trial volleys is as follows: 

The sights are raised for the estimated range and one volley is 
fired. If this appears to hit but little short of the mark an increase of 
elevation of 100 yards will be used for the next volley. When the 
object is inclosed between two volleys, a mean of the elevations will be 
adopted as the correct range. 

The range may be obtained from a near-by battery or machine 
gun. This is the best method where available. (84) 

Estimating Distance Test. — When instruction shall in the opinion 
of the company commander, have progressed to such an extent as to 
enable the soldier to judge distances with the eye with fair accuracy, he 
will be tested for proficiency. 

As the "danger space is continuous for a man kneeling within a 
range of 547 yards (battle-sight range), and as individual fire and the 
fire of small squads will ordinarily be limited to 1,200 yards, the soldier 
will be tested for proficiency at distances between these two ranges. 

The rules governing this test are as follows: 

(a) The test will be supervised by an officer. 

(b) Each soldier will be tested separately. 

(c) The ground shall be other than that over which he fired or has 
previously estimated distances. 

(d) The use of any device to mark the limits within which dis- 
tances are tested (550 and 1,200 yards), at the time the test is given, 
so that this device can be seen from the estimating point is prohibited. 

(e) The objectives will be natural objects, men standing, ImeeKng, or 
prone, or silhouettes. 

(f) For objectives, ^ve or more natural objects will be selected, or 
single men or groups of men stationed or silhouettes placed within the 
ranges indicated above. The distances of the objectives will not be 
measured until all who are to estimate on them have made their estimates. 

The men to be tested are conducted to a point near that from 
which the estimates are to be made, and remain facing away from the 
objectives or hidden therefrom by some feature of the ground. They are 
not permitted to know what objects are to be used in the test until they 
are called up to the estimating point. 

[329] 



402 

The officer conducting the test calls up one man at a time, points 
out to him an objective and causes him to estimate the distance thereto. 
This is continued until the soldier ^s estimates on five objectives have 
been obtained. When the test for the day is completed by any man, 
he will not be allowed to join the squad awaiting test. After all the 
men have made estimates of distances to a given series of objectives, 
ranges thereto will be measured. 

(g) Proficiency for the expert rifleman and for the sharpshooter 
shall consist in making in five consecutive estimates an average degree 
of accuracy of 90 per cent. 

Similarly for proficiency, marksmen, first-class men, and second- 
class men are required to make in ^ve consecutive estimates an average 
degree of accuracy of 85 per cent. 

Not more than three trials will be given, and should the soldier 
fail three times to make the required percentage, his final qualification 
will be reduced one grade below that obtained in firing. (85) 

Uange Finders. — The estimating test having been completed, five 
or six enlisted men, selected by the company commander from the most 
accurate estimators, will be designated as '^Eange finders." These 
men will be given practice in estimating distances throughout the year. 
The practice will be on varied ground and at distances up to 2,000 yards. 
(86) 

Known Distance Practice 

402. General Description.— When gallery practice has been completed 
as required, the soldier is advanced to known-distance firing. - The general 
scheme for firing is as follows: 



[3S0] 



403 



u 

H 
U 

u 

c/3 



o 



, ^ r Slow fire, targets A and B. 

I Instruction practice-^ Slow fire, target D. 
r rx ^'n .' I Rapid fire, target D. 

Qualification course -j 

-Rpo^r^ r.ro,^f;^** I ^^°^^ ^^^» targcts A and B. 
L Record practice .. | Rapid fire, target D. 

Long-distance piac- | glow fire 1800 yards, target C 

"^ • ^ I 1,000 yards, target C. 

Practice with tele- ( Target B. 
scopic sights. I Target C. 

Supplementary Course — Special Course A, Instruction Practice. 

{Slow fire, target A. 
Slow fire, target D. 
Rapid fire, target D. 



r Special course A. 



[. Record practice 



f Slow fire, target A. 
1 Rapid fire, target D. 



f Qualification course. 



Courses for Organ- I 
ized Militia . . . . ^ 



Instruction 
practice. 



Record prac- 
tice. 



Slow fire, tar- 
gets A and B. 

Slow fire, tar- 
get D. 

Rapid fire, tar- 
L get D. 

Slow fire, tar- 
gets A and B. 

Rapid fire, tar- 
get D. 



Long-distance prac- ( 800 yards, target C. 
I tice, slow, fire ... 1 1,000 yards, target C. 

I Practice with tele- J Target B. 
t scopic sights ... I Target C. 

Special Courses 



(87^ 



403. Preliminary Drills. — Special courses will be preceded by the re- 
quired preliminary instruction and sighting drills. (119) 

Special Course A 

When Used. — When a complete range is not provided and a range 
of 200 and 300 yards is available, practice may be conducted, if authorized 
by the department commander, as prescribed in the following special 
course A. This practice is also prescribed for the Coast Artillery Corps 
and for bands in the Philippine Islands when required to fire. The in- 
struction practice, special course A, will be followed for the supplementary 
firing for recruits and others who join too late to fire in the regular season. 
(120) 

Special course A shall consist of instruction and record practice 
as follows: 

Instruction practice. — Slow fire, target A; slow fire, target D; 
rapid fire, target D. 

[331] 



403 (contd.) 

Record practice. — Slow fire, target A; rapid fire, target D. 
The details of tliis practi-ce are as prescribed in the tables given 
below, which have the force of written regulations. 

Instruction Practice 

V Table 1. — Slow fire, target A 



Range. 


Time. 


Shots. 


Position. 


200 
300 


o 
1 


15 

10 


r 5 prone. 
\ 5 kneeling. 
L5 standing. 

S 5 prone. 
1 5 sitting. 



Table 2. — Slow fire, target D 
(Battle sight only will be used.) 



Range. 


Time. 


Shots. 


Position. 


200 
300 


No limit. 


10 
10 


S 5 kneeling. 
1 5 standing. 

1 5 pfone. 
1 5 sitting. 



Table 3. — Rapid fire, target D 
(Battle sight only will be used.) 



Range. 


Time. 


Shots. 


Position. 


200 
300 


1 minute. 

1 minute, 
10 seconds. 


10 
10 


Kneeling from standing. 
Prone from standing. 



RECORD PRACTICE 

Table 4. — Slow fire, target A 



Range. 


Time. 


^ Shots. 


Position. 


200 
300 


No limit. 


10 
10 


i 5 kneeling. 
1 5 standing. 

1 5 prone. 
1 5 sitting. 



Rapid fire as given in Table 3. 



[332] 



404 
All practice in special course A will be conducted according to 
the rules prescribed for the firing at the same ranges in the instruction 
and record firing in the qualification course. 

For qualification see paragraph 242. (121) 

The courses for Organized Militia are prescribed in Part V. (122) 

Except as indicated in paragraphs 115 and 117 the Philippine 

Scouts will fire the course prescribed for the Eegular Arany, and will 

be subject to the same rules in regard to qualification and classification. 

(123) 

Advice to Riflemen 
404. For purposes of instruction, all firing may be divided into three 
classes, viz: 

1. Slow fire at 600 yards and under. 

2. Slow fire at ranges over 600 yards. 

3. Eapid fire. (124) 

Short-Range Practice. — In the first class of fire, slight changes of 
wind, light, and temperature may be almost disregarded. The principal 
things to be learned are: Setting the sight properly at the beginning 
of a score; aiming properly; squeezing the trigger properly; holding the 
rifle. These constitute probably 90 per cent of the work at ranges under 
600 yards, and if the soldier performs these actions correctly with each 
shot, he will make a good, score regardless of small changes in the 
atmospheric conditions. It is very important that the piece be held 
firmly and sighted uniformly. (125) 

Long Range Practice. — In the second class of firing (at distances 
greater than 600 yards) a large part of the work is in the holding, but 
changes of wind, temperature, and light must be studied in order to make 
good scores. (126) 

Wind. — "Wind is the most important factor to be considered in 
long range known distance practice. It is unnecessary to teach recruits 
and others who never shoot beyond 600 yards more than the adjustment 
of the wind gauge for a right or left wind and how to change the wind 
gauge when a hit is made. 

The direction of the wind is shown by considering the range as 
a clock face, the firer being in the center and the target at 12 o'clock." 
The direction is then indicated as a 10 o VJock wind, 2 o 'clock wind, etc. 

The force of the wind is indicated in miles" per hour and is shown 
accurately by the anemometer, and is estimated by observation of flags, 
by throwing up leaves, grass, or bits of paper, and by the '^feeP' of the 
wind on the hands or face. 

At long-distance ranges, after firing a shot and before firing 
again, the firer should look carefully for any change in direction 
and force of the wind. A change of 4 miles in force or of one hour in 
direction will make a decided difference in the location of a hit. 

[333] 



404 (contd.) 

Any wind deflects the bullet from its course in the direction the 
wind is blowing. The amount of deflection varies with the direction 
and force of the wind. 

The wind guage is graduated in points, and 1 point will move 
the bullet approximately 4 inches for each 100 yards of distance the 
firer is from the target and in the direction the movable base of the 
wind guage is moved: 

At 200 yards 1 point equals 8 inches. 

At 600 yards 1 point equals 24 inches. 

At 800 yards 1 point equals 32 inches. 

At 1,000 yards 1 point equals 40 inches. 

The amount of windage to be taken is determined by estimating 
the force and direction of the wind. 

A simple rule for determining the approximate windage at any 

range is as follows: 

Eange V Velocitv , , . -. « 
— :r i-equals quarter points required for 3 or 9 o^clock 

winds. Winds one hour away from 3 and 9 o'clock require only slightly 

less windage. Winds one hour away from 12 or 6 o'clock require half 

as much windage as 3 or 9 o'clock winds. 

Example: Eange 800 yards: 5-mile wind blowing from 9 o'clock. 

8 V 5 

—^ — equals 4 quarter points, or 1 point of windage. (127) 

Temperature. — After the proper adjustment of the sight has 
been determined, it will rarely happen while firing a single, or even 
several consecutive scores, that such changes can occur in the temperature 
as to make further corrections necessary. If the first shot has been fired 
from a .clean, cool gun, the subsequent fouling and heating of the barrel 
and the different vibrations of the latter, which are caused by the heat- 
ing, will generally make necessary a slight increase in elevation for the 
second shot, and often an additional increase for the third shot. This 
should be followed, in some cases, where a number of shots are fired 
without cleaning or without any considerable interval, by a slight lower- 
ing of the elevation after additional shots. 

A decided increase in the temperature will cause the bullet to 
strike high; a decided drop in temperature will cause the bullet to 
strike low. (128) 

Light. — Changes of light do not effect the flight of the bullet; 
they do affect the manner in which the aim is taken. As all men are 
not affected alike by changes of light, each man must determine for 
himself how changes of light affect, him. 

Using the peep sight, the bull's-eye of a bright target is more 
clearly defined than the bull's-eye of a dark one, and the firer will usually 
hold closer to the briglit bull's-eye than to a dark one. If the target 
changes from bright to dark, the next shot will usually go low. 



404 (contd.) 

With the open sight, as the light changes from bright to dark 
and the rear notch fills with shadow, more front sight is seen, and the 
shot goes high. 

If occasional shadows drift across the face of the target, do not 
fire until the target is bright. 

In a permanent change of light, let the eye accustom itself to the 
change before firing. Then the aim will be the same as before and there 
will be no change in the position of the hit. 

In rapid firing with open sights, on very dark days shots seem 
to go liigh, due entirely to the firer taldng more front sight than on 
bright days. (129) 

Mirage. — This is the term applied in target practice to heated air 
in motion, as seen through telescopes or field glasses on clear days with 
winds of from 2 to 14 miles per hour. Through the telescope, waves 
appear to be moving across the face of the target in the direction the 
wind is blowing. 

These waves indicate the general direction and speed of the wind. 
As to direction, they indicate a right or left wind only, and not one 
from 11, 1, 5, or 7 o'clock. 

In a light 6 o'clock wind or with no wind at all, the waves will 
go straight up or *^boil. " 

With a light wind the mirage moves slowly across the face with 
a decided vertical motion, giving a saw-tooth appearance. As the wind 
increases, the vertical motion of the mirage decreases until, with a 12 to 
14 mile wind, the waves seem nearly flat and run across the target with 
very little vertical motion. 

On hot days, with no wind, or a very light wind from 6 o'clock, 
the mirage will rise straight from the bottom to the top of the target. 
This condition seldom lasts long, and in a very short time the mirage 
will run from one side to the other. 

Never fire while the mirage is * 'boiling," for there is usually a 
slight drift toward one side or the other, invisible to the firer, and 
if a shot is fired with no windage in a **boil," it will usually be out 
of the bull's-eye. Wait for the mirage to move from one side. (130) 

Rapid Firing. — Success in rapid firing depends upon catching a 
quick and accurate aim, holding the piece firmly and evenly and in 
squeezing the trigger without a jerk. 

In order to give as much time as possible for aiming accurately, 
the soldier must practice taking position, loading with the clip, and 
working the bolt so that no time will be lost in these operations. With 
constant practice all these movements may be made quickly and without 
false motions. 

When the bolt handle is raised it must be done with enough force 
to start the shell from the chamber; and when the bolt is pulled back it 

[335] 



404 (contd.) ^ 

must be with sufficient force to throw the empty shell well away from the 
chamber, and far enough to engage the next cartridge. 

In loading, use force enough to load each cartridge with one 
motion. 

The aim must be caught quickly, and once caught must be held, 
and the trigger squeezed steadily. Rapid firing, as far as holding the 
aim and squeezing the trigger are concerned, should be done with all 
the precision of slow fire. The gain in time should be in getting ready 
to fire, loading, and working the bolt. 

Constant practice will increase the accuracy of aim, and any 
exervise that will strengthen arms and hands will enable one to hold 
better through a long string of shots. (131) 

Firing at Moving Targets. — In firing at moving targets, the rifle 
must move with the target. If the target moves across the front, the 
aim must be a certain distance in front of it, depending on the distance 
of the target and its speed. If it moves toward the firer he must hold 
below it; if away from him, he must hold over it. 

The following table shows the approximate distance necessary to 
aim ahead of the body of a man or horse moving across the range at 
various distances and various rates of speed: 



bis- 

tance 
(yards). 


Man 
walking. 


Man 
double 
timing. 


Horse 
walking. 


Horse 
trotting. 


Horse 
running. 


100 


Ft. Jn. 
Front edge 


Ft. 


In. 
6 


Ft. In. 
Front edge of 

body. 
Front edge of 

body. 
Front of body. 
Front of body. 

2 !! 


Ft. 1 In. 
Front of body. 


Ft. \ In. 
Front edge of 


200 


.. 


8 


1 


8 


Front of body. 


1 


4 


300 
400 
500 
600 


1 
2 
3 
4 


5 
2 

1 


3 
4 
5 
7 


's 

11 
7 


1 
3 
5 
7 


6 

4 
4 
7 


3 

6 

9 

12 


10 
6 
6 

10 



(132) 
Firing with Rests. — In the ordinary positions for firing with piece 
supported by hands, arms, and shoulder, the explosion of the powder 
charge sets up in the barrel of the rifle certain vibrations which become 
disturbed and altered somewhat when the rifle is fired with the additional 
support of a solid rest applied at some point of the barrel. 

Using the same elevations and aiming point the effect of a rest 
is exhibited in a changed point of strike of the bullet. 

The vertical vibrations of the barrel are the more pronounced, and 
as these are. interfered with by a point of rest under the barrel this 
species of support will usually change the point of strike more than in 
the case of a side rest against a vertical surface. In the latter case the 
piece is steadied rather than rested. 

[M6] 



404 (contd.) 

With a rest beneath the balance, or near that point, the tendency 
is to shoot above and to the right of the point of strike that would be 
attained without a rest, using the same elevation and point of aim. 

The tendency is the same and more pronounced when the rest is 
under a point near the muzzle. The change in the point of strike in any 
case is slight and insufficient to carry the shot off the target from the 
center of target D at 600 yards. 

In order that the shooting may be uniform, the piece should al- 
ways be rested at the same point. 

A side rest will cause no appreciable change in the point of strike. 

In firing with the bayonet fixed, usually a lower point on the 
target will be struck corresponding to a reduction in the range of about 
50 yards. (133) 

Cleaning the Rifle. — After firing, the bore of the rifle is covered 
with fouling. This is of two kinds, a black deposit covering the entire 
bore, caused by the burning powder and easily removed with rags, and 
a metallic fouling, caused by particles of the metal jacket of the bullet 
adhering to the barrel and which can be removed only by the use of 
ammonia solution. 

The powder fouling must be removed first. Then the metallic foul- 
ing can be seen in patches on the lands. 

To remove the powder fouling use a cleaning rod long enough to 
clean from the breech; Hoppers Powder Solvent No. 9; rags about 1^4 
inches square, of thin flannel or any other soft material. 

A cleaning rack should be provided for every barrack. 

Eifles should always be cleaned from the breech, thus avoiding 
any possible injury to the muzzle. Any injury to the rifling at the muzzle 
will affect the shooting adversely. If the bore for a length of 6 inches 
at the muzzle is perfect, a minor injury near the chamber will have little 
effect on the accuracy of the rifle. 

The rifle should be cleaned as soon as the flring for the day is com- 
pleted. The fouling is easier to remove then, and if left longer it will 
corrode the barrel. 

Take a couple of rags soaked in No. 9 and run them through the 
barrel until they have removed all the powder fouling; run clean rags 
through to dry the barrel; clean with ammonia solution as directed and 
finish by wiping out with a greased rag or a clean rag soaked in No. 9. 
For grease, use vaseline, cosmic, or *'3 in 1'' oil. After the barrel is 
cleaned, wipe out the chamber, the cams, bolt, and all visible worldng 
parts. Occasionally clean out the magazine and wipe off magazine sprinjg, 
then wipe all working parts with a greased rag. 

After cleaning the working parts, wipe off stock and outside of 
barrel with oiled rag. 

m7] 



405 

Before firing again, wipe all oil out of barrel, but leave chamber 
and working parts sligMy oily. This will prevent shells binding in 
chamber and will make parts work easier. Wipe all oil from outside of 
barrel and stock. 

To remove metallic fouling, use ammonia solution. This is made 
as follows: Take ammonia persulphate, 1 ounce; ammonium carbonate, 
200 grains; ammonia (28 per cent), 6 ounces; water, 4 ounces. One 
rounded tablespoonful equals 1 ounce of persulphate or 200 grains of 
carbonate. i 

Powder the persulphate and carbonate separately. Dissolve per- 
sulphate in the ammonia and the carbonate in the water and then pour 
the mixture in a strong bottle, and cork. If mixed in this manner, it 
may be used in an hour. 

To use. — After the barrel has been cleaned with No. 9 and wiped 
dry, cork up breech with a small cork, put a piece of rubber tubing about 
an inch long on the muzzle, and fill the barrel with the solution. It wiU 
boil up instantly with a white foam, very slightly blue. Let the solution 
stay in the barrel not more than 10 minutes and then pour out. If there 
was any metal fouling, the solution will be dark blue. 

Fill the barrel with water to remove any remaining ammonia, 
pour oui. and then remove the cork and rubber tube, wipe barrel perfectly 
dry, and then rub with oiled rag. 

Care should be used in mixing and using this solution, for if im- 
properly mixed or used it will injure the rifle. If the solution, after 
being used, is brown, it is bad and should be thrown away. The propor- 
tions of persulphate and carbonate should be the same in bulk. Too much 
persulphate will injure the barrel. 

Keep the barrel filled. If the solution evaporates, it will leave a 
deposit of persulphate on the surface of the bore and will injure it. 

An experienced noncommissioned officer should mix the solution 
and supervise its use. 

Care should be taken not to spill the solution on the barrel or 
in the mechanism. (134) 

Pistol and Eevolver Practice; Preliminary Drills; Position and Aiming 

Drills^ 
405. Nomenclature and Care of the Weapon; Handling and Precau- 
tions against Accidents. — The soldier will first be taught the nomen- 
clature of those parts of the weapon necessary to an understanding of its 
action and use and the proper measures for its care and preservation. 
Ordnance pamphlets Nos. 1866 (description of the Colt's Automatie 
Pistol), 1919, and 1927 (descriptions of the Colt's revolver, calibers .38 

* Whenever in these regulations the word "pistol" appears, the regulation applies 
with equal force to the revolver, if applicable to that weapon. 



405 (contd.) 

and .45, respectively), contain full information on this subject and are 
furnished to organizations armed with these weapons. 

Careless handling of the pistol or revolver is the cause of many 
accidents and results in broken parts of the mechanism. The follow- 
ing rules will, if followed, prevent much trouble of this character: 

(a) On taking the pistol from the armrack or holster, take out the 
magazine and see that it is empty before replacing it; then draw back 
the slide and make sure that the piece is unloaded. Observe the same 
precaution after practice on the target range, and again before replac- 
ing the pistol in the holster or in the armrack. When taking the 
revolver from the armrack or holster and before returning it to the 
same, open the cylinder and eject empty shells and cartridges. Before 
beginning a drill and upon arriving on the range observe the same pre- 
caution. 

(b) Neither load nor cock the weapon until the moment of firing, nor 
until a run in the mounted course is started. 

(c) Always keep the pistol or revolver in the position of Raise 
pistol (Par. 156, Cavalry Drill Regulations) j except when it is pointed 
at the target. (The position of Lower pistol is authorized for mounted 
firing only.) 

(d) Do not place the weapon on the ground where sand or earth can 
enter the bore or mechanism. 

(e) Before loading, the pistol, draw back the slide and look through 
the bore to see tha-t is is free from obstruction. Before loading the 
revolver, open the cylinder and look through the bore to see that it 
is free from obstruction. When loading^ the pistol for target practice 
place 5 cartridges in the magazine a,nd insert the magazine in the handle; 
draw back the slide and insert the first cartridge in the chamber and 
carefully lower^ the hammer fully down. 

170 LOAD PISTOL: Being at Raise Pistol (Right hand grasping stock at the 
height of and 6 inches in front of the point of the right shoulder, forefinger alongside 
barrel, barrel to the rear and inclined forward about 30°). 

Without deranging position of the hand, rotate the pistol so the sights move to 
the left, the barrel pointing to the right front and up. 

With the thumb and forefinger of the Left hand (thumb to the right), grasp the 
slide and pull it towards the body until it stops and then release it. The pistol is 
thus loaded, and the hammer at full cock. 

If the pistol is to be kept in the hand and not to be fired at once, engage the 
safety lock with the thumb of the Right hand. 

If the pistol is to be carried in the holster, remove safety lock, if on, and lower 
the hammer fully down. 

2 70 LOWER THE HAMMER: Being at the loading position at full cock, 

I. Firmly seat thumb of Right hand on the hammer; insert forefinger inside trig- 
ger guard. 

II. With thumb of Left hand exert a momentary pressure on the grip-safety to 
release hammer from sear. 

III. At the same instant exert pressure on the trigger and carefully and slowly 
lower the hammer fully down. 

IV. Remove finger from trigger. 

V. Insert pistol in holster. 

(Caution) The pistol must never be placed in the holster until hammer is 
fully down. . 

[339] 



405 (contd.) 

In loading the revolver place 5 cartridges in the cylinder- and 
let the hammer down on the empty chamber. 

(f) Whenever the pistol is being loaded or unloaded, the muzzle 
must be kept up. 

(g) Do not point the weapon in any direction where an accidental 
discharge might do harm. 

(li) After loading do not cock the pistol or the revolver until ready 
to fire. 

(i) Keep the worldng parts properly lubricated. (135) 

Position, Dismounted. — Stand firmly on both feet, body perfectly 
balanced and erect and turned at such an angle as is most comfortable 
when the arm is extended toward the target; the feet far enough apart 
to insure firmness and steadiness of position (about 8 to 10 inches) ; 
weight of body borne equally upon both feet; right arm fully extended, 
left arm hanging naturally. 

Remarks. — The right arm may be slightly bent, although the 
difficulty of holding the pistol uniformly and keeping it as well as the 
forearm in the same vertical plane makes thisii^jectionable. (136) 

The Grip. — Grasp the stock as high as possible with the thumb 
and last three fingers, the forefinger alongside the trigger guard, the 
thumb extended along the stock. The barrel, hand, and forearm should 
be as nearly in one line as possible when the weapon is pointed toward 
the target. The grasp should not be so tight as to cause tremors of 
the hand or arm to be communicated to the weapon, but should be 
firm enough to avoid losing the grip when the recoil takes place. 

Eemarks.— The force of recoil of the pistol or revolver is exerted 
in a line above the hand which grasps the stock. The lower the stock 
is grasped the greater will be the movement or **jump'' of the muzzle 
caused by the recoil. This not only results in a severe strain upon the 
wrist, but in loss of accuracy. 

If the hand be placed so that the grasp is on one side of the 
stock, the recoil will cause a rotary movement of the weapon toward 
the opposite side. 

The releasing of the sear causes a slight movement of the muzzle, 
generally to the left. The position of the thumb along the stock over- 
comes much of this movement. The soldier should be encouraged to 
practice this method of holding until it becomes natural. 

To do uniform shooting the weapon must be held with exactly 
the same grip for each shot. Not only must the hand grasp the stock at 
the same point for each shot, but the tension of the grip must be uni- 
form. (137) 

(a) The Trigger Squeeze.— The trigger must be squeezed in the 
same manner as in rifle firing. (See Pars. 44 and 46.) The pressure of 
the forefinger on the 'trigger should be steadily increased and should 

[340] 



405 (contd.) 
be straight back, not sideways. The pressure should continue to that 
point beyond which the slightest movement will release the sear. Then, 
when the aim is true, the additional pressure is applied and the pistol 
fired. 

Only by much practice can the soldier become familiar with the 
trigger squeeze. This is essential to accurate shooting. It is the most 
important detail to master in pistol or revolver shooting. 

(b) Self-Cocking Action. — The force required to squeeze the trigger 
of the revolver when the self-cocking device is used is considerably 
greater than with the single action. To accustom a soldier to the use 
of the self -cocking mechanism, and also to strengthen and develop the 
muscles of the hand, a few minutes' practice daily in holding the un- 
loaded revolver on a mark and snapping it, using the self-cocking 
mechanism, is recommended. The use of the self -cocking device in 
firing is not recommended except in emergency. By practice in cocking 
the revolver the soldier can become sufficiently expert to fire very rapidly, 
using single action, while his accuracy will be greater than when using 
double action. (138) 

Aiming. — Except when delivering rapid or quick fire, the rear 
and front sights of the pistol are used in the same manner as the rifle 
sights. The normal sight is habitually used (See PI. VI), and the line 
of sight is directed upon a point just under the bulPs-eye at '*6 o'clock." 
The front sight must be seen through the middle of the rear-sight 
notch, the top being on a line with the top of the notch. Care must be 
taken not to cant the pistol to either side.^ 

1 The instructor should take cognizance of the fact that the proper aiming point is 
often affected by the personal and fixed peculiarities of the firer, and if unable to 
correct such abnormalities, permit firer to direct sight at such point as promises 
effective results. 



[341] 



405 (contd.) 




t/vvWv\AM4 




If the principles of aiming have not been taught, the soldier's 
instruction will begin with sighting drills as prescribed for the rifle 
so far as they may be applicable. The sighting bar with open sight will 
be used to teach the normal sight and to demonstrate errors likely to 
be committed. 

To construct a sighting rest for the pistol (See PI. VI) take a 
piece of wood about 10 inches long, ll^ inches wide, and 9/16 inch thick, 
shape one end so that it will fit snugly in the handle of the pistol 
when the magazine has been removed. Screw or nail this stick to the" 
top of a post or other object at such an angle that the pistol when placed 
on the stick will be approximately horizontal. A suitable sighting 
rest for the revolver may be easily improvised. (139) 

(a) How to Cock the Pistol. — The pistol should be cocked by the 
thumb of the right hand and with the least possible derangement of 
the grip. The forefinger should be clear of the trigger when cocking 
the pistol. Some men have difiiculty at first in cocking the pistol with 
the right thumb. This can be overcome by a little practice. Jerking 
the pistol forward while holding the thumb on the hammer will not 
be permitted. 

[342] 



405 (contd.) 

(b) How to Cock the Eevolver. — The revolver should be cocked by 
putting the thumb on the hammer at as nearly a right angle to the 
hammer as possible, and by the action of the thumb muscles alone bring- 
ing the hammer back to the position of full cock. Some men with large 
hands are able to cock the revolver with the thumb while holding it in 
the position of aim or raise pistol. Where the soldier's hand is small 
this can not be done, and in this case it assists the operation to give 
the revolver a slight tilt to the right and upward (to the right). Par- 
ticular care should be taken that the forefinger is clear of the trigger 
or the cylinder will not revolve. Jerking the revolver forward while 
holding the thumb on the hammer will not be permitted. (140) 

Position and Aiming Drills, Dismounted. — For this instruction 
the squad will be formed with an interval of 1 pace between files. 
Black pasters to simulate bulPs-eyes will be pasted opposite each man 
on the barrack or other wall, from which the squad is 10 paces distant. 

The squad being formed as described above, the instructor gives 
the command, 1. Raise, 2. PISTOL (Par 156, Cavalry Drill Regulations) 
and cautions, "Position and Aiming Drill, Dismounted.** The men take 
the positions described in paragraph 136, except that the pistol is held 
at Raise pistol. 

The instructor cautions, "Trigger squeeze exercise. '' At the 
command Ready, cock the weapon as described in paragraph 140. At 
the Command, 1. Squad, 2. FIRE, slowly extend the arm till it is nearly 
horizontal, the pistol directed at a point about 6 inches below the bull's- 
eye. At the same time put the forefinger inside the trigger guard and 
gradually "feeP' the trigger. Inhale enough air to comfortably fill the 
lungs and gradually raise the piece until the line of sight is directed 
at the point of aim, i. e., just below the bull's-eye at 6 o'clock. While 
the sights are directed upon the mark, gradually increase the pressure 
on the trigger until it reaches that point where the slightest additional 
pressure will release the sear. Then, when the aim is true, the additional 
pressure necessary to fire the piece is given so smoothly as not to de- 
range the alignment of the sights. The weapon will be held on the 
mark for an instant after the hammer falls and the soldier will observe 
what effect, if any, the squeezing of the trigger has had on his aim. 

It is impossible to hold the arm perfectly still, but each time the 
line of EJgfct is directed on the point of aim a slight additional pressure is 
applied to the trigger until the piece is finally discharged at one of the mo- 
ments when the sights are correctly aligned upon the mark. 

When the soldier has become proficient in taking the proper 
position, the trigger squeeze should be executed at will. The instructor 
prefaces the preparatory comm.and by "At will'* and gives the command 
Halt at the conclusion of the exercise, when the soldier will return 
to the position of "Raise pistol.** 

[343] 



405 (contd.) 

At first this exercise should be executed with deliberation, but 
gradually the soldier will be taught to catch the aim quickly and to 
lose no time in beginning the trigger squeeze and bringing it to the 
point where the slightest additional pressure will release the sear. 

Remarks. — In service few opportunities will be offered for slow 
aimed fire with the pistol or revolver, although use will be made of 
the weapon under circumstances when accurate pointing and rapid manip- 
ulation are of vital importance. 

In delivering a rapid fire, the soldier must keep his eyes fixed 
upon the mark and, after each shot, begin a steadily increasing pressure 
on the trigger, trying at the same time to get the sights as nearly on the 
mark as possible before the hammer again falls. The great difficulty 
in quick firing with the pistol lies in the fact that when the front sight 
is brought upon the mark, the rear sight is often found to be outside 
the line joining the eye with the mark. This tendency to hold the pistol 
obliquely can be overcome only by a uniform manner of holding and 
pointing. This uniformity is to be attained only by acquiring a grip 
which can be taken with certainty each time the weapon is fired. It 
is this circumstance which makes the position and aiming drills so im- 
portant. The soldier should constantly practice pointing the pistol until 
he acquires the ability to direct it on the mark in the briefest interval 
of time and practically without the aid of sights. 

The soldier then repeats the exercises with the pistol in the left 
hand, the left side being turned toward the target. (141) 

To Draw and Fire Quickly — Snap Shooting. — With the squad 
formed as described in paragraph 141 except that the pistol is in the 
holster and the flap, if any, buttoned, the instructor cautions ''Quick 
fire exercise.'^ And gives the command, 1. Squad, 2. FIRE. At this 
command, each soldier, keeping his eye on the target, quickly draws 
his pistol, cocks it as in paragraph 140, thrusts it toward the target, 
squeezes the trigger and at the instant the weapon is brought in line 
with the eye and the objective, increases the pressure, releasing the 
sear. To enable the soldier to note errors in pointing, th% weapon will 
be momentarily held in position after the f^H of the hammer. Efforts 
at deliberate aiming in this exercise must be discouraged. 

Eemarks under paragraph 141 are specially applicable also to 
this type of fire. When the soldier has become proficient in the details 
of this exercise, it should be repeated at will; the instructor cautions 
''At will; quick fire exercise." The exercise should be practiced until 
the mind, the eye, and trigger finger act in unison. 

To simulate this type of fire mounted, the instructor places the 
squad so that the simulated bulPs-eyes are in turn, to the Right, to the 
Left, to the Right Front, to the Left Front, to the Right Rear. With the 
squad in one. of these positions, the instructor cautions "Position and 

[344] 



405 (contd.) 

aiming drill, mounted." At this caution the right foot is carried 20 
inches to the right and the left hand to the position of the bridle hand 
(Par. 246, Cavalry Drill Regulations), The exercise is carried out as 
described for the exercise dismounted, using the commands and means 
laid down in paragraphs 161 to 168, inclusive, Cavalry Drill Regulations, 
for firing in the several directions. The exercise is to be executed at 
will when the squad has been sufficiently well instructed in detail. 

When firing to the left the pistol hand will be about opposite 
the left shoulder and the shoulders turned about 45° to the left; 
when firing to the right rear the shoulders are turned about 45° to the 
right. 

When the soldier is proficient in these exercises with the pistol 
in the right hand, they are repeated with the pistol in the left hand. 
(142) 

Position and Aiming Drill — Mounted 

Preliminary Training of Horses. — This course must be preceded 
necessarily by much work during the year, having for its object the 
training of the horses to the sight of the targets and to the noise of 
discharge of pistols. In addition to work on the riding track, much can 
be accomplished in this line by having blank cartridges fired while the 
horses are being groomed, and by placing targets just outside the corral 
or in such position that the horses will pass near them when being led 
to water or to the stables. During the dismounted practice the horses 
may be picketed near the firing point. (143) 

Quick Aim Drill. — The soldier must be instructed and practiced 
in taking rapid aim while the horse is in motion. To this end, fre- 
quent practice should be had with the pistol throughout tire year when 
drilling on the riding track, going through the motions of aiming and 
firing (at will) at silhouette targets and other objects placed along the 
track and 5 yards from it. This practice should be conducted at a walk, 
trot, and gallop. In quick-aimed fire at a gallop the soldier must en- 
deaver to discharge his pistol at the moment when the horse is in the act 
of rising in the leap. This can best be done by holding the pistol pointed 
toward the targets and moving the arm up and down in unison with the 
motion of the horse. With the eyes fixed on the target, point the pistol 
just as it starts on the upward motion and squeeze the trigger. The sol- 
dier will be taught to exchange magazines and to load his weapon with 
facility at all gaits. (144) 

Preliminary Range Practice Drills. — The pointing and snapping 
exercises outlined above for the riding school will, in the target season, 
be extended to and amplified on the range where a track will be laid 
out, as illustrated in Plate VIII, with a barrier in front of each target 

[345] 



406 

to preserve a uniform distance from the horse to the targets. Parallel 
to, 10 yards distant from, and facing this track will be placed 5 standing 
silhouette figures 10 yards apart. The squad in column of troopers, with 
a distance between troopers of about 10 yards, will move around the track 
at a walk, trot, and gallop, each trooper pointing and snapping his pistol 
at each target as he arrives opposite it. (145) 

(a) Practice as With Ball Cartridges, Mounted. — As soon as the 
horses have become sufficiently accustomed to the targets and to the 
noise of firing, the trooper mounted will be practiced in the details of 
procedure laid down for the several types of fire prescribed for Eange 
Practice with ball cartridges. In firing to the left and left front, the 
weapon may be held in the left hand. 

(b) Quick Fire. — Target: Silhouette of standing figure arranged to 
revolve as a bobbing target and to be operated by means of ropes laid 
under the track. This type of target is used for firing at the halt and 
at the walk. For any given individual, the target is turned before 
firing commences, edge of target toward the firing point. The targets 
are operated by revolving the target through an arc of 90° so that face 
and edge are alternately turned toward the firing point. Exposures are 
for a specified length of time with an interval 3 to 5 seconds between 
exposures. The individual who is to fire takes position at the firing point 
with his weapon in the holster and loaded as prescribed in paragraph 
135 (e) ; flap of holster, if any, buttoned. At the first appearance of 
the target the trooper draws and fires, or attempts to fire, one shot at his 
target before it disappears. Prior to firing of this type the soldier 
should have been thoroughly instructed in quick pointing to eliminate, 
so far as practicable, personal errors. For purpose of instruction, the 
instructor may cause each shot to be marked and the procedure of firing 
the first shot to be repeated for each shot of the score. (Plate XL) 
(146) 

COURSES FOR ORGANIZED MILITIA • 

406. The following courses in small-arms firing are prescribed for the 
Organized Militia: 

General Scheme 

The general scheme of instruction for the Organized Militia em- 
braces: First, a certain amount of instruction in the preliminary drills 
and exercises, followed by gallery practice, with a prescribed test before 
the soldier can be advanced to practice on the target range; second, 
a definite course of instruction practice, under which, by selected scores 
of five shots each, a soldier must attain a certain proficiency before he 
can be advanced ta fire the record practice. Organized Militia, or the 
qualification course. Regular Army; third, a definite test, either the 

[346] 



407 

qualification course, Organized Militia, or the qualification course, Eegu- 
lar Army, at the discretion • of the State authorities, under which the 
soldier attains a certain grade in marksmanship; fourth, long-range 
practice. (345) 

Preliminary Drills and Instruction 

(a) The period for indoor instruction will be determined by the 
State authorities and may extend into or include the entire range practice 
season: 

(b) The essentials of indoor instruction will include — 
Nomenclature, covering the most important parts and elements. 
Manipulation and use of the various working parts. 

Care of the arm. 

Sighting, aiming, positions, and trigger squeeze. 
Gallery practice. 

The course to be followed in indoor instruction is laid down in 
Part II, Chapters I, II, III, IV; but in the discretion of the State 
authorities, any course embracing the elements given above may be 
adopted and followed. The recording rifle rod outfit or any other suit- 
able device may be used in such a course. (346) 

Gallery Practice 
407. The principal objects of gallery practice are to continue in 
a different manner the instruction in aiming, positions, and trigger 
squeeze, and to determine, in certain cases, whether or not the indi- 
vidual shall be advanced to range practice. 

(a) The following course in gallery practice is prescribed: 

Table I 



Range. 

Feet. 
50 

50 
50 


Targets. 


Position. 


Minimum number 
of shots. 


The iron gallery target issued by 
the Ordnance Department or one 
similar thereto, or paper targets. 

do 

do 


Prone 

f Sitting 

i Kneeling . . 
Standing . . 


10 

10 ( 5 sitting. 

\ 5 kneeling. 
10 



Where it is impracticable to use ranges of 50 feet, gallery practice 
may be conducted at a greater distance at a target whose dimensions 
and divisions have been proportionately increased. Firing will be by 
scores of five consecutive shots. Except in case 'of accident, a score 
once begun will be completed. 

Qualification in Gallery Practice 
(b) No officer or enlisted man who has failed to qualify as first class 
or better in a previous season shall be advanced to range practice until 
he has attained at least 90 points out of a possible 150 in the gallery 
practice course, by selecting his two best scores of five shoti at each 
range. If a gallery range be not available, the recording rifle rod out- 

[147] 



408 

fit or subtarget gun machine may be used to determine eligibility for 
range practice, under similar conditions, when specially authorized by 
the State authorities. (347) 

Known Distance Firing 
408. The qualification course is divided into Instruction Practice and 
Eecord Practice. 

(a) Instruction practice embraces: 

1. A prescribed course in which a certain proficiency must be 
attained in certain cases, before qualification practice is undertaken; 
this course may be shot through as many times as is necessary to insure 
proper instruction. 

2. Such further preliminary practice at any range as is considered 
necessary to prepare the individual for the Eecord Practice. 

3. Firing for recruits may be held at 100 yards in any position 
except standing, but does not count in determining proficiency in the 
instruction practice. 

(b) The instruction practice and the number of shots at each range, 
upon which eligibility to advance to record practice is determined, are 
given in the following tables : 

Instruction Practice 
Table 2 



Range. 


Kind of 
fire. 


Time. 


Shots. 


Targets. 


.t^csition. 


Possible. 


200 

300 
500 


Slow fire. 

Slow fire. 
Slow fire. 


No limit. 

No limit. 
No limit. 


10 

5 
10 


A 

A 
B 


5 sitting. 
. 5 kneeling. 
Prone. 
Prone. 


50 

25 
50 




Tai 
(Battle sight only 


LE 3. — Tare, 
will be us 


Jet D 

ed with thi 


s target.) 




Range. 


Kind of 
fire. 


Time. 


Shots. 


Targets. 


Position. 


Possible. 


200 
200 

300 
300 


Slow. 
Rapid. 

Slow. 
Rapid. 


No limit. 
1 minute. 

No limit. 
1 minute. 


5 
5 

5 

5 


D 
D 

D 
D 


Kneeling. 
Kneeling 

from 

standing. 
Prone. 
Prone from 

standing. 


25 
25 

25 

25 



Total, 225. 

1. Each shot is marked in slow fire on target D. Eapid fire is con- 
ducted as prescribed in paragraph 110 except as to scores. At each 
range a total of 60 per cent of the possible must be attained before 
advancement to the next range. 

[348] 



408 (contd.) 

2. After eligibility to fire-record practice has been determined ac- 
cording to the provisions of paragraphs (d) and (e), the record practice 
may be preceded by further preliminary practice in the discretion of 
the State authorities. 

3. Firing in instruction practice will be by scores of five consecu- 
tive shots. A score once begun will be completed, unless accident or 
conditions of range weather interfere- 

(c) The following grades of classification are obtained in instruction 
practice by selective scores of five consective shots each. 

First-classman, 150; possible, 225. 
Second-classman, 130; possible, 225. 
Unqualified, below 130. 

(d) No individual shall be advanced to record practice until he has 
attained the grade of first-classman, except as provided in paragraph (e). 

(e) Instruction practice will be optional with the State authorities 
for all who have qualified as marksmen or better in the season immediate- 
ly preceding. (348) 

Record Practice 

After completing the instruction practice, those who qualify as 
first-classmen are eligible to fire record practice, Organized Militia, or 
the qualification course, Eegular Army. 

The choice of courses shall be determined by the State authori- 
ties. Both courses may be pursued in the same state in the same season, 
but the course in regiments or in separate smaller tactical units shall 
be uniform; provided that an individual, who qualifies in record practice, 
Organized Militia course, as sharpshooter or expert rifleman, may be 
permitted to fire the Kegular Army qualification course and qualify 
therein at the discretion of the State authorities. (349) 

Qualification Course 

(o) Table 4. — Slow fire 



Range. 



300 
500 
600 



Time. 



No limit. 
No limit. 
No limit. 



Shots. 



10 

10 

10 

(2 s. s.) 



Targets. 



A 
B 
B 



Position. 



Prone. 
Prone. 
Prone, sandbag rest.^ 



1 In firing with sandbag rest, either rifle or back of hand must rest on sandbag. 
Table 5. -^Target D, rapid fire, battle sight 


Range. 

200 
300 


Time. 


Shots. 


Targets. 

D 
D 


Position. 


154 minutes. 
2 minutes. 


10 
10 • 


Kneeling from standing. 
Prone from standing. 



This course may be fired three times in any target season, the 
individual's classification being determined by the best of his three 

£149] 



408 (contd.) 

trials, but this provision shall not be constructed to permit the forma- 
tion of a record based on scores selected from two or more trials — 
the basis of classification must be the result of one complete course 
in each case. 

(b) Coaching is prohibited in record practice after the individual 
has taken his position at the firing point. 

(c) Instruction and record practice may be fired on the same day, 
but record practice once begun must be completed without further in- 
struction firing. (350) 

Qualification Course, Regular Army. — The qualification course of 
the Eegular Army shall be carried out by the Organized Militia with 
a strict adherence to all conditions and provisions required for the Eegu- 
lar Army, except that instruction and record practice may be fired on 
the same day, but record practice once begun must be completed without 
further instruction firing. (351) 

Practice For Coast Artillery Reserves. — Special course "A," as 
described in paragraph 121, will be fired by coast artillery reserves of 
the Organized Militia, unless other courses be prescribed by the State 
authorities. (352) 

Long-Distance Practice. — After the qualification course has been 
completed, those men who have qualified as experts and sharpshooters 
may be given long distance practice, at the discretion of the State 
authorities. 

Practice for record may be preceded by instruction practice. 
Record practice will consist of any selective score of 10 consecutive 
shots each. The practice will be conducted as set forth for slow fire 
known distance. 

Table 6. — Target C 



Range. ^ 


Shots. 


Position. 


800 
. 1,000 


10 
10 


Prone. 
Prone. 



No one will be advanced to practice at 1,000 yards until he has 
attained a minimum total of 40 points at 800 yards in any score of 10 
consecutive shots. 

When an individual has attained a total of 85 points at 800 and 
1,000 yards, including a minimum of 40 at 800 yards, by selective scores 
of 10 consecutive shots, he shall be considered to be qualified in long- 
distance practice but is not included in the table of classification nor 
in the computation of the figure of merit. He may be rewarded by 
suitable medal§ or, other devices at the discretion of the State authori- 
ties. (353) 

[350] 



408 (contd.) 

Practice with Telescopic Sights. — Practice with telescopic sights 
may be held at the discretion of the State authorities and, when held, 
will be conducted in accordance with paragraph 117. (354) 

Miscellaneous. — (a) The conditions and requirements governing 
the conduct of target practice, except as modified in Part V, shall be 
the same for the Organized Militia as for the Eegular Army. 

(b) Dress and Equipment. — The dress and equipment of officers and 
men participating in target practice shall be prescribed by the State 
authorities. The cartridge belt will be worn at all times. 

(c) Marking. — The provisions of these regulations governing mark 
ing which are impracticable for the Organized Militia may be modified 
by the State authorities except for the qualification course, Eegular 
Army. 

(d) Scoring. — Such provisions of these regulations as are impractic- 
able for the Organized Militia may be modified by the State authorities 
except for the qualification course. Regular Army. 

(e) Estimating Distance. — Estimating distance will not be required 
for the Organized Militia except when firing the Regular Army course, 
in which case paragraph 85 will be complied with. State authorities may 
require commissioned officers to qualifiy in estimating distance in the 
qualification course, Organized Militia. 

(f) Practice Season. — The practice season will be determined by the 
State authorities. 

(g) Who Will Fire.— 

Required to Fire 

1. Infantry, cavalry, and engineers: 

Battalion and squadron staff officers, company and troop officers, 
inspectors small-arms practice, all enlisted men of companies and troops 
except cooks. 

2. Coast artillery reserves: 

Special course ^^A'^ — Company officers, all enlisted men of com- 
panies except cooks. 

Authorized But Not Required to Fire 

1. All other officers and enlisted men except those of the Medical 
Department and Chaplains. 

2. All officers enumerated in the above table with more than 10 
years commissioned or commissioned and enlisted service. 

(h) Amount of Fire. — The amount of firing in one day for any in- 
dividual is not restricted for the Organized Militia in any course. 

(i) Qualification. — Qualification will be based on the results obtained 
in either one of the qualification courses or in the instruction practice, 
as set forth in the following table: 

[351] 



408 (contd.) 



Table 7. — Points required in qualification 







u 


















o 




to 
2 


i 


'-3 


jS 


Insignia. 


Courses. 


t 


(0 


s 




1 

a 


3 




1. Qualification course; 






1 












instruction practice, 












J Below 
1 300 


)225 


None. 


Organized Militia. 


. . . 






150 


130 




2. Qualification course; 


















record practice, Or- 


















ganized Militia. 


210 


190 


160 








250 


Bronze. 


3. Qualification course; 


















Regular Army. 


253 


238 


202 


177 


152 




300 


Regular 
Army. 


4. Special course "A," 














1 




coast artillery re- 


















serves. 




... 


ISO 


120 


100 




200 


Bronze. 



1 All who fire the qualification course, instruction practice, Organized Militi^ ; 
the qualification course Regular Army; the special course "A"; and who in any 
course fail to qualify as second class or better; and all who fail to complete a 
course, or fail to fire. 

1. If in case authority is given to fire the qualification course, 
Eegular Army, after a grade of qualification has been attained in the 
qualification course, Organized Militia, the higher qualification shall 
be used as the basis of record, and medals will be issued in each case. 

2. If an individual fails to qualify as marksman or higher in firing 
the record practice, Organized Militia, his grading shall be first-class. 
In the Eegular Army course and special course '*A'' the qualification 
shall be determined by the result of the firing in that course alone. 

(j) Holdover Qualifications. — Holdover qualifications for the Organized 
Militia in the qualification courses (Organized Militia and Regular 
Army) will be limited to expert riflemen. An individual having at- 
tained this grade will retain that qualification for three consecutive 
target years, including the target season in which qualification was 
made. An individual entitled to a holdover qualification as an expert 
rifleman may be authorized by the State authorities to fire the qualifica- 
tion courses, in which case he forfeits no rights to such holdover quali- 
fication. If during such subsequent firing he again qualifies as an ex- 
pert rifleman, his holdover privileges will begin from his latest qualifica- 
tion. 

(k) Insignia^ — For the qualification course, Organized Militia, bronze 
badges and pins.. 

For the qualification course, Eegular Army, insignia similar to 
those issued to the Eegular Army. 

For special course ''A,*' coast artillery reserves, bronze pins, 
marksmen only, when firing this course. 

[352] 



409 

An individual qualifying as marksman, sharpshooter, or expert 
rifleman, will wear his badge or pin so long as he retains such a quali- 
fication. 

(1) Requalification Bars. — No requalification bars are issued for marks- 
men. 

Sharpshooters. — Eequalification bars shall be issued at the rate 
of one bar for each three qualifications (not necessarily consecutive) 
as sharpshooter. The bar bears the last year of qualification. 

Expert Riflemen. — Eequalification bars are issued at the rate of 
one bar for each three qualifications as expert rifleman, holdover quali- 
fications included, provided that when an individual requalifies as expert 
rifleman during a holdover period he is entitled to a bar for each three 
years of actual requalification. The bar bears the last year of qualifica- 
tion. 

(m) Combat Practice. — Combat practice may be held by the Organized 
Militia whenever so directed by the State authorities. When held, it 
will be conducted in accordance with Part III, Small Arms Firing Manual. 

(n) Reports. — A report of target firing shall be forwarded to the 
chief. Division of Militia Affairs, as soon after the close of the prac- 
tice season as practicable, but not later than March 31 of the following 
year. 

(o) Figure of Merit. — In each State there will be a company and 
regimental figure of merit to be calculated by the methods laid down 
by the Division of Militia Affairs. A proficiency test similar to that 
prescribed for the Eegular Army is authorized at the discretion of the 
State authorities. (355) 

Pistol Practice 
409. Preliminary Drills. — (a) All officers and enlisted men belonging 
to organizations armed with the revolver or pistol shall be instructed 
in the care, preservation, and use of these arms, following the provisions 
of paragraphs 135-146, modified only as existing circumstances demand, 
in any case, in the discretion of the State authorities. 

(b) The following course in pistol range practice is prescribed for 
officers and men armed with the Colt's revolver cal. .38, or the Smith 
& Wesson, cal. .38, as issued by the Ordnance Department: 



[353] 



409 (contd.) 



Table 8 





Instruction practice. 


Record practice.^ 


Target L. 






Range 
(yards). 




Target L, 


Target L, Target L, 




Slow fire. Rapid fire. 


rapid fire. 


rapid fire, rapid fire. 






J-" .\ 








^ \ 














<u o 




a, o 




<u o 




tJ o 










^S5 




^% 




O.^ 




^^ 






*i 




.^fl 




.|c 




•^ a 




•3 fl 






'f, 




s- 








S--^ 




6"^ 








CO 


'^^^ 


m 


^^^4?* 


\o 


"^-S* 


CO 


'"^^* 


M 




B 


V 

o 


C «3 O 


O 


C w O 


o 


C CO O 


o 


bPA 


4> 

o 






u 




o 




o 




o 




o 




H 


CA) 


H 


m 


H 


CM 


H 


C/3 


H 


C/3 




^ 


CO 




15 




O bo 

c 

e2 


30 


O bo 


IS 


O bo 







15 


2 


25 


♦: 


30 


s- 


15 


s^' 


30 


2 


15 


2 




's 


N 




n 




P-s 














•2 rt 




.S 0] 




.i5 rt 










50 


i 




30 









30 


2 





... 



* The record course will be fired but once. 

A score consists of five consective shots. 

(c) Eapid fire shall be conducted as prescribed in paragraph 172. 

(d) The dismounted course prescribed in paragraphs 167-175 will be 
substituted for that prescribed above for any organization or individual 
of the Organized Militia armed with the Colt automatic pistol, cal. .45. 
The mounted course prescribed in paragraphs 176-199 is authorized but 
not required. 

(f) Who wax Fire. 



Arm or corps. 

Cavalry 

Field artillery 

Infantry 

Engineers 

Coast artillery 

Staff departments except 
medical and chaplain. 



To fire. 



i All officers and enlisted men armed with 
J- the pistol, except field officers for whom 
j the course is authorized but not required. 



J 



Authorized but not required 



Course. 



■ Dismounted. 
Do. 



(g) Qualification and Insignia. — Qualification and insignia for firing 
the revolver course shall be as given in the following table: 



[354] 





Table 9 




409 (contd.) 


Grade. 


Points. 


Possible. 


Insignia. 


Expert pistol shot 

First classman 

Second classman 


320 
300 
250 


400 
400 
400 


Bronze badge. 
Bronze pin. 
Do. 



The qualifications and insignia for firing the courses prescribed in 
paragraphs 167-175 or paragraphs 176-199 shall be as provided for in 
paragraphs 248 and 249. 

(h) Reports. — The number of officers and enlisted men taking pistol 
practice will be reported on the report of small-arms firing. (356) 



[355] 



PART II 



MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS PERTAINING 

TO COMPANY TRAINING AND 

INSTRUCTION 



410-411 

CHAPTER I 

THE GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION OF A 

COMPANY 

410. The proper performance of the duty of COMPANY COM- 
MANDER, like the proper performance of any other duty, requires 
work and attention to "business. 

The command of a company divides itself into two kinds of duty: 

government and administration. 

The government includes the instruction, discipline, contentment, 
and harmony of the organization, involving, as it does, esprit de corps, 
rewards, privileges, and punishments. 

The administration includes the providing of clothing, arms, 
ammunition, equipage, and subsistence; the keeping of records, includ- 
ing the rendition of reports and returns; and the care and accountability 
of Government and company property, and the disbursement of the 
company fund. 

System and care are prerequisites of good administration. 

The efficient administration of a company greatly facilitates its 
government. 

THE CAPTAIN 

411. With regard to his company the captain stands in the same 
light as a father to a large family of children. It is his duty to provide 
for their comfort, sustenance, and pleasure; enforce strict rules of obedi- 
ence, punish the refractory and reward the deserving. 

He should be considerate and just to his officers and men and 
should know every soldier personally and make him feel that he so 
knows him. 

He should by word and act make every man in the company feel 
that the captain is his protector. 

The captain should not be indifferent to the personal welfare of 
his men, and when solicited, being a man of greater experience, educa- 
tion, and information, he should aid and counsel them in such a way as 
to show he takes an interest in their joys and sorrows. 

When any men are sick he should do everything possible for them 
until they can be taken care of by the surgeon. He can add much to 
the comfort and pleasure of men in the hospital by visiting them from 
time to time and otherwise showing an interest in their condition. 

In fact, one of the officer ^s most important duties is to look after 
the welfare of his men — to see that they are well fed, well clothed and 
properly cared for in every other way — to see that they are happy and 
contented. The officer who does not look after the welfare of his men 
to the best of his ability, giving the matter his earnest personal atten- 
tion, neglects one of the principal things that the Government pays 
him to do. 

The soldier usually has a decided feeling for his captain, even 
though it be one of hatred. With regard to the higher grade of officers, 
he has respect for them according to regulations; otherwise, for the most 

[357] 



411a 

part, he is indifferent. At the very most, he knows whether his post or 
regimental commander keeps him long at drill, and particularly 
whether he has any peculiar habits. The average soldier looks upon 
his captain as by far the most important personage in the command. 

There is no other position in the Army that will give as much satis- 
faction in return for an honest, capable and conscientious discharge of 
duty, as that of captain. There is a reward in having done his full 
duty to his company that no disappointment of distinction, no failure, 
can deprive him of; his seniors may overlook him in giving credits, 
unfortunate circumstances may defeat his fondest hopes, and the crown 
of laurel may never rest upon his brow, but the reward that follows 
upon the faithful discharge of his duty to his company he can not be 
deprived of by any disaster, neglect or injustice. 

He is a small sovereign, powerful and great, within his little 
domain. 

411a. Devolution of Work and Responsibility. The company com- 
mander should not attempt to do all the work — to look after all the details 
in person — he should not try to command directly every squad and every 
platoon. The successful company commander is the one who distributes 
work among his subordinates and organizes the help they are supposed 
to give him. By War Department orders, Army Regulations and cus- 
toms of the service, the lieutenants and noncommissioned officers are 
charged with certain duties and responsibilities. Let every one of them 
carry the full load of their responsibility. The company commander 
should not usurp the functions of his subordinates — he should not relieve . 
them of any of their prescribed or logical work and responsibility. On the 
contrary, he should give them more, and he should see that they ''deliver 
the goods.'' Skill in distributing work among subordinates is one of 
the first essentials of leadership, as is the ability to get work out of 
them so that they will fill their functions to the full within the limits 
of their re^onsibility. Not only does devolution of work and responsi- 
bility cause subordinates to take more interest in their work (it makes 
them feel less like mere figure-heads), but it also teaches them initiative 
and gives them valuable experience in the art of training and handling 
men. Furthermore, it enables the company commander to devote more 
time to the larger and more important matters connected with the disci- 
pline, welfare, training, instruction and administration of the company. 

The captain who allows his lieutenants to do practically nothing 
makes a mistake — he is doing something that will rob his lieutenants 
of all initiative, cause them to lose interest in the company, and make 
them feel like nonentities — like a kind of ^' fifth wheeP' — it will make 
them feel that they are not, in reality, a part of the company — it will 
prevent them from getting a practical, working knowledge of the govern- 
ment and administration of a company. 

By allowing his lieutenants to participate to the greatest extent 
possible in the government and administration of the company, and 
by not hampering and pestering them with unnecessary instructions 
about details, the captain will get out of his lieutenants the ver}' 
best that there is* in them. 

[358] 



412 

The captain should require EESULTS from his lieutenants, and 
the mere fact that a lieutenant is considered inefficient and unable to 
do things properly, is no reason why he should not be required to do 
them. The captain is by Army Regulations responsible for the efficiency 
and instruction of his lieutenants regarding all matters pertaining to 
the company, and he should require them to perform all their duties 
properly, resorting to such disciplinary measures as may be considered 
necessary. The lieutenant who can not, or who will not, perform his 
duties properly is a drag on the company, and such a man has no busi- 
ness in the Army, or in the Organized Militia. 

THE LIEUTENANT 
412. To be able to perform well the duties of captain when the re- 
sponsibility falls upon him, should be the constant study and ambition 
<if the lieutenant. 

He is the assistant of the captain and should be required by the 
captain to assist in the performance of all j company duties, including 
the keeping of records and the preparation of the necessary reports, 
returns, estimates and requisitions. The captain should give him lots 
to do, and should throw him on his own responsibility just as much as 
possible. He should be required to drill the comminy, attend the daily* 
inspection of the company quarters, instruct the noiacommissioned officers, 
brief communications, enter letters in the Correspondence Book, make 
out ration returns, reports, muster and pay rolls, etc., until he shows 
perfect familiarity therewith. 

Whenever told to do a thing by your captain, do it yourself or 
see personally, that it is done. Do not turn it over to some noncommis- 
sioned officer and let it go at that. If your captain wants some non 
commissioned officer to do the thing, he himself will tell him to do it — he 
will not ask you to do it. 

It is customary in the Army to regard the company as the prop- 
erty of the captain. Should the lieutenant, therefore, be in temporary 
command of the company he should not make any changes, especially in 
the reduction or promotion of noncommissioned officers without first 
having consulted the captain's wishes in the matter. 

It is somewhat difficult to explain definitely the authority a 
lieutenant exercises over the men in the company when the captain is 
present. In general terms, however, it may be stated the lieutenant can 
not make any changes around the barracks, inflict any punishment or 
put men on, or relieve them from, any duty without the consent of the 
captain. It is always better if there be a definite understanding 
between the captain and his lieutenants as to what he expects of them, 
how he wishes to have certain things done and to what extent he will 
sustain them. 

If the lieutenant wants anything from the company in the way 
of working parties, the services of the company artificer or company 
clerk, the use of ordnance stores or quartermaster articles, he should 
always speak to the captain about the matter. 



[359] 



413-413a 

THE CAPTAIN AND THE LIEUTENANTS 
413. The company officers should set an example to their men in 
dress, military bearing, system, punctuality and other soldierly qualities. 
It should be remembered that the negligence of superiors is the cue 
for juniors to be negligent. 

If the men of a company are careless and indifferent about salut- 
ing and if they are shabby and lax in their dress, the company com- 
mander is to blame for it — company officers can always correct defects 
of this kind, if they will only try. 

The character and efficiency of officers and the manner in which 
they perform their duties are reflected in the conduct and deportment 
of their men. 

Of course, courage is a prerequisite quality for a good officer, and 
every officer should seek to impress his men that he would direct them 
to do nothing involving danger that he would not himself be willing 
to do under similar circumstances. 

If a company officer be ignorant of his duties, his men will soon 
find it out, and when they do they will have neither respect for, nor 
confidence in, him. 

Company officers should take an active interest in everything that 
'affects the amusement,, recreation, happiness and welfare of their men. 

An officer just joining a company should learn without delay the 
names of all the men. A roll of the organization should be gotten and 
studied. 

While an officer can gruffly order a soldier to do a thing and have 
his order obeyed, it should be remembered that, as a rule, human 
nature, especially American human nature, responds best to an appeal 
to pride, fairness, justice, reason, and the other nobler instincts of man. 
It is only in rare instances that the average man will give the best 
there is in him under coercion or pressure of authority. 

There are but few men who have ^ot some good in them, and 
this good can generally be gotten at, if one only goes about it in the 
right way. Study your men and try to arouse in them pride and 
interest in their work. 

The soldier first learns to respect, then to honor and finally to 
love the officer who is strict but just; firm but kind — and this is the 
officer who will draw out of his men the very best there is in them. 

413a. Treat your men like men, and remember there is nothing that 
will so completely take the spirit out of a man as to find fault with him 
when he is doing his best. 

Young officers sometimes run to one of two extremes in the 
treatment of their men — they either, by undue familiarity, or otherwise, 
cultivate popularity with the men; or they do not treat them with 
sufficient consideration — the former course will forfeit their esteem; 
the latter, ensure their dislike, neither of which result is conducive to 
commanding their respect. 

Treat your soldiers with proper consideration, dignity, and jus- 
tice — remember they are members of your profession, the difference 
being one of education, rank, command, and pay — but they are men, 
like yourself, and, should be treated as such. 

[3601 



414 

Under no circumstances should you ever swear at a soldier — not 
only is this taking a mean, unfair advantage of your position, but it is 
also undignified, ungentlemanly and unmilitary. It is even more 
improper for you to swear at a soldier than it is for a superior to swear 
'at you — in the latter case the insult can be properly resented; in the 
former, it must be borne in humiliating silence. 

Remember, that if by harsh or unfair treatment you destroy a 
man's self-respect, you at the same time destroy his usefulness. 

Familiarity is, of course, most subversive of discipline, but you 
can treat your men with sympathetic consideration without being 
familiar with them. 

In dealing with enlisted men, do not use the same standard of 
intellect and morals that apply in the case of officers. And remember, 
too, that a thing that may appear small and trivial to an officer may 
mean a great deal to an enlisted man — study your men, learn their 
desires, their habits, their way of thinking, and then in your dealings 
with them try to look at things from their standpoint also. In other 
words in your treatment of your men be just as human as possible. 

The treatment of soldiers should be uniform and just^ and under 
no circumstances should a man be humiliated unnecessarily or abused. 
Reproof and punishment must be administered with discretion and 
judgment, and without passion; for the officer who loses his temper 
and flies into a tantrum has failed to obtain his first triumph in disci- 
pline. He who can not control himself can not control others. 

Every officer should study himself carefully, he should analyze 
himself, he should place himself under a microscopic glass, so as to dis- 
cover his weak points — and he should then try with his whole might and 
soul to make these weak points strong points. If, for instance, you 
realize that you are weak in applied minor tactics, or that you have no 
''bump of locality,'' or that you have a poor memory, or that you have 
a weak will, do what you can to correct these defects in your make-up. 
Remember ''Stonewall" Jackson's motto: "A man can do anything 
he makes up his mind to do." 

The Progress Company, Chicago, 111., publishes "Mind Power," 
"Memory," "The Will," "The Art of Logical Thinking" (all by W. 
W. Atkinson), and several other books of a similar nature, that are 
both interesting and instructive. "The Power of the Will," by Had- 
dock, for sale by Albert Lewis Pelton, Meriden, Conn., is an excellent 
book of its kind. 

THE FIRST SERGEANT 

414. It has been said the captain is the proprietor of the company 
and the first sergeant is the foreman. 

Under supervision of the captain, he has immediate charge of all 
routine matters pertaining to the company. 

In some companies in the Regular Army, it is customary for sol- 
diers, except in cases of emergency, to get permission from the first 
sergeant to speak to the company commander at any time. In other 
organizations soldiers who wish to speak to the company commander 
away from the company quarters must first obtain the first sergeant's 

[361] 



415 

permission, but it is not necessary to get this permission to speak to 
the company commander when he is at the barracks. 

The first sergeant is sometimes authorized to place noncommis- 
sioned officers in arrest in quarters and privates in confinement in the 
guardhouse, assuming such action to be by order of the captain, to 
whom he at once reports the facts. However, with regard to the 
confinement of soldiers by noncommissioned officers, attention is invited 
to the Army Regulations on the subject. 

THE NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS 

(The status, duties, etc., of noncommissioned officers are covered 
in greater detail in Noncommissioned Officers' Manual, by the author. 
General agents: George Banta Publishing Co., Menasha, Wis.) 

415. The efficiency and discipline of a company depend to such an 
extent on the noncommissioned officers that the greatest care and 
judgment should be exercised in their selection. They should be men 
possessing such soldierly qualities as a high sense of duty, cheerful 
obedience to orders, force of character, honesty, sobriety and steadiness, 
together with an intelligent knowledge of-drills, regulations and orders. 

They should exact prompt obedience from those to whom they 
give orders, and should see that all soldiers under them perform their 
military duties properly. They must not hesitate to reprove them 
when necessary, but such reproof must not be any more severe than 
the occasion demands. 

The company officers must sustain the noncommissioned « officers 
in the exercise of their authority, except, of course, when such author- 
ity is improperly or unjustly exercised. If they do wrong, they should be 
punished the same as the privates, but if it be simply an error of 
judgment they should merely be admonished. A noncommissioned 
officer should never be admonished in the presence of privates. 

Judicious praising of noncommissioned officers in the presence of 
privates is not only gratifying to the noncommissioned officer, but it 
also tends to enhance the respect and esteem of the privates for him. 

In addition to dividing the company into squads, each squad 
being under a noncommissioned officer as required by the Army Regu- 
lations, the company should also be divided into sections, each section 
being in charge of a sergeant. The squads and sections should, as far 
as possible, be quartered together in barracks, and the chiefs of squads 
and the chiefs of sections should be held strictly responsible for the 
conduct, dress, cleanliness, and the care of arms of the members of 
their respective squads and sections. Not only does this throw the 
corporals and the sergeants upon their own responsibility to a certain 
extent, but it also impresses upon them the importance of their posi- 
tion, and gets the privates in the habit of realizing and appreciating, 
the authority exercised by noncommissioned officers. 

When practicable, the noncommissioned officers should have sepa- 
rate rooms or tents, and should mess together at tables separate from 
the privates; for, everything that conduces to familiarity with inferiors 
tends to lower the dignity of the noncommissioned officers' position. 

1362} 



415 (contd.) 

Throw your noncommissioned officers upon their own responsi- 
bility — throw them into deep water, so to speak, where they will either 
have to swim or sink. You can never tell what a man can really do 
until you have given him a chance to show you — until you have put 
him on his mettle — until you have tried him out. And very often men 
who seem to have nothing in them, men who have never before been 
thrown upon their own responsibility, will surprise you. 

Do all you can to make your noncommissioned officers realize 
and appreciate the importance of their position. Consult them about 
different matters — get their opinions about various things. When going 
through the barracks at Saturday morning inspection, for instance, as 
you come to the different squads^ have the squad leaders step to the 
front and follow you while you are inspecting their respective squads. 
If you find anything wrong with a man's bunk, speak to the squad 
leader about it. Also ask the squad leaders various questions about 
their squads. _ 

Not only does such treatment of noncommissioned officers make 
them appreciate the importance, responsibility and dignity of their 
position, but it also gives them more confidence in themselves and 
raises them in the eyes of the privates. 

Noncommissioned officers should always be addressed by their 
titles, by both officers and soldiers. 

Noncommissioned officers are forbidden to act as barbers, or as 
agents for laundries, or in any other position of a similar character. 
(Cir. 34, '07.) 

Everything possible should be done by the company officers to 
instruct the noncommissioned officers properly in their duties.^ 

So far as the company is concerned, the noncommissioned offi- 
cers are expected to assist the company commander in carrying out his 
own orders and those of his superiors — they should see that all company 
orders are obeyed and that the known wishes of the captain are carried 
out. If, for instance, the captain should tell the first sergeant that the 
men in the company may play cards among themselves, but that non- 
commissioned officers are not to play with privates and that men from 
other companies are not allowed to take part in, or to be present at 
the games, then it is the duty of the first sergeant to see that these 
instructions are carried out — it is his duty to make frequent inspections 
of the tables at which the men may be playing to see that no noncom- 
missioned officers are playing and that no outsiders are present. The 
first sergeant who confined himself to publishing the order to the com- 
pany and then doing nothing more, would be neglectful of his proper 
duty. 

Noncommissioned officers clothed in the proper uniform of their 
grade are on duty at all times and places for the suppression of dis- 
orderly conduct on the part of members of the company in public places. 
Men creating disorder will be sent to their quarters in arrest and the 
facts reported to the company commander without delay. 

^ Silicate Roll Blackboards, which are perfectly flexible and can be rolled tightly, 
like a map, without injury, may be obtained from the New York Silicate Book Slate 
Co., 20 Vesey St., New York. They are made in various sizes, but about the most 
convenient for use in noncommissioned officers' school is No. 3, three by four feet — 
price $2. 



416 

Noncommissioned officers can do much to prevent tlie commission 
of offenses by members of their commands, both when on and when 
off duty, and such prevention is as much their duty as reporting offenses 
after they are committed; in fact, it is much better to prevent the 
offense than to bring the offender to trial. 

Company commanders should drill their noncommissioned officers 
thoroughly in the principles of discipline. 

Noncommissioned Officers Authorized to Confine Enlisted Men. A 
company or detachment commander may delegate to his noncommis- 
sioned officers the authority to confine enlisted men in the guardhouse 
and to place them in arrest in quarters, provided the case is immediately 
reported to the company or detachment commander, who confirms the 
act of the noncommissioned officer and adopts it as his own. — W. B. 
decision^ December, 1905. 

Reduction and Resignation. A noncommissioned officer should 
never be reduced to ranks, except for grave and sufficient reasons. 
Nothing demoralizes the noncommissioned officers of a company so 
much and upsets discipline to such an extent as the feeling that upon 
the slightest pretext or fancy one is to be sent back to the ranks, to 
associate with the privates he has been required to discipline. 

In some regiments noncommissioned officers are permitted to 
send in formal resignations, while in other regiments they are not, 
but, with the approval of the company commander, they may ask for 
reduction, giving proper, satisfactory and specific reasons. Of course, 
resignations submitted in a spirit of accepted insubordination or pique 
should not be considered, nor should they ever be in substitution for de- 
served disciplinary punishment. If a noncommissioned officer has good 
reasons for requesting reduction and the granting of the request would not 
result in detriment to the company, there is no reason why his applica- 
tion should not be favorably considered. However, in such a case, the 
noncommissioned officer should consult his company commander before 
submitting his request in writing. It is thought the preponderance of 
custom is against considering formal resignations. 

Contentment and Harmony 
416. The officers of the company should do everything possible to 
make the organization contented and harmonious. Contentment and 
harmony are not only conducive to good discipline and efficiency, but 
they also make the government of the company easy and reduce deser- 
tions to a minimum. 

The showing of favoritism on the part of the captain is always 
a cause of great dissatisfaction amongst the soldiers in the company. 
Soldiers do not care how strict the captain is, just so he is fair and 
impartial, treating all men alike. 

The Mess. The captain should give the mess his constant per- 
sonal attention, making frequent visits to the kitchen and dining room 
while the soldiers are at meals so as to see for himself what they are 
getting, how it is served, etc. 

It is not saying too much to state that, in time of peace, a good 
mess is the real basis of the contentment of a company. 

[3643 



417-418 

Ascertain what the soldiers like to eat and then gratify their 
appetites as far as practicable. 

Be careful that the cook or the mess sergeant doesn't fall into a rut 
and satiate the soldiers day after day with the same dishes. 

Give the ration your personal attention — know yourself what the 
company is entitled to, how much it is actually getting, what the sav- 
ings amount to, etc. 

Library and Amusement Room. A library and an amusement 
room, supplied with good books, magazines, papers, a billiard or pool 
table, and a phonograph, are a source of much pleasure and contentment. 

Athletic Apparatus. A judicious investment of the company fund 
in base balls, bats, dumb bell^ Indian clubs, boxing gloves and other 
athletic goods, and the encouragement of baseball, basketball, quoits, 
etc., are in the interest of harmony and happiness. 

Rewards and Privileges 
417. 1. Deny all passes and requests for privileges of men, whose 
conduct is not good, and on the other hand grant to men whose con- 
duct is good, as many indulgences as is consistent with discipline. 

2. Judicious praise in the presence of the first sergeant, a few 
noncommissioned officers, or the entire company, depending upon cir- 
cumstances, very often accomplishes a great deal. After the according 
of such praise, let your action toward the nian show that his good con- 
duct is appreciated and that it has raised him in your estimation, and 
make him feel you are keeping your eye on him to see whether he will 
continue in his well doing. 

3. Publication of commendatory orders, desirable special duty 
details, etc. 

4. Promotion, and extra duty details which carry extra pay. 

5. Meritorious conduct of importance should be noted in the soldier's 
military record and also on his discharge. 

6. At the weekly company inspection, each chief of squad picks 
out the neatest and cleanest man in his squad — the captain then inspects 
the men so selected, the neatest and cleanest one being excused from 
one or two tours of kitchen police, or some other disagreeable duty; 
or given a two days' pass. 

NOTE : Some officers do not think that good conduct should be especially re- 
warded, but that if all soldiers be held strictly accountable for their actions by a 
system of strict discipline, good conduct attains its own reward in the immunities 
it enjoys. 

418. Trials by Court-Martial. As stated in the Army Eegulations 
(Par. 953, '13), commanding officers should not bring every dereliction of 
duty before a court for trial, but in the case of minor offenses^ the ends 
of discipline can often be served fully as well, if not even better, by 
requiring extra fatigue or by withholding privileges. If the soldier de- 

^ For example, noisy or disorderly conduct in quarters, failure to salute officers, 
slovenly dressed at formations, rifle equipments not properly cleaned at inspection 
or other formations, overstaying pass, short absences without leave and absences 
from formations (especially for first offense.) 

CliS] 



419-420 • 

mands a trial, lie cannot be given extra fatigue, although there is noth- 
ing in the Eegulations preventing the giving of some other form of 
company punishment. This right to demand a trial must in every case 
be made known to the soldier before awarding extra fatigue. 

Some Eflacacious Forms of Company Punishment 

419. 1. Extra fatigue under the Q. M. sergeant or the Qoncommis- 
sioned officer in charge of quarters, cleaning up around and in the 
company quarters, scrubbing pots, scouring tin pans, polishing stoves, 

-cutting wood, policing the rears, cutting grass, pulling weeds, polishing 
the brass and nickel parts in the water closets and bath rooms, washing 
and greasing leather, cleaning guns, boiling greasy haversacks, and, 
in camp, digging drains and working around slop holes. 

If the work be done well the offender maj be let off sooner — if 
the work be not done well, he may be tried for it. 

2. Men may not be allowed to leave the immediate vicinity of 
the barracks for periods ranging from one to ten days, during which 
time they are subject to all kinds of disagreeable fatigue, and required 
to report to the IST. C. O. in charge of quarters at stated hours. 

3. Breaking rocks for a given number of days. For every man 
so punished, a private of the same company is detailed as a sentinel 
and for every four men a corporal is detailed in addition — the idea 
being to cause every man in each organization to take an interest in 
preventing his own comrades from violating rules and regulations. 

4. When two soldiers get into a row that is not of a serious 
nature, a good plan is to set them at work scrubbing the barrack 
windows — one on the outside and one on the inside, making them 
clean the same pane at the same time. They are thus constantly looking 
in each other ^s faces and before the second window is cleaned they 
will probably be laughing at each other and part friends rather than 
nursing their wrath. 

5. Confinement to barracks, reporting to the noncommissioned officer 
in charge of quarters once every hour, from reveille to, say, 9 P. M. 

NOTE: Some company commanders follow, for moral effect, the practice of 
publishing to their companies all summary court convictions of soldiers belonging 
to the organization. 

Witliliolding of Privileges 

1. Withholding of passes and of credit at the post exchange. 

2. Withholding of furloughs. 

420. Control of Drunken and Obscene Men. In order to control 
drunken and -obscene men, they have been bucked and gagged until 
sufficiently sober to regain self-control and quiet down. The use of a 
cold water hose in such cases has been known to accomplish good results. 
Great care and judgment, however, should be exercised and no more 
force used than is absolutely necessary. 

It may also be said that persistently filthy men hav@ been 
washed and scrubbed, 

mm 



421-422 

421. Saturday morning and other company inspections are intended 
to show the condition of the organization regarding its equipment, 
military appearance and general fitness for service, and the condition 
of the quarters as regards cleanliness, order, etc. Usually everyone 
except the guard, one cook, and others whose presence elsewhere can 
not be spared, are required to attend inspections, appearing in their best 
clothes, their arms and accoutrements being shipshape and spick and 
span in every respect. 

A man appearing at inspection with arms and equipments, not in 
proper shape, especially if he be a recruit or if it be his first offense, 
may be turned out again several hours later, fully armed and equipped, 
for another inspection, instead of being tried by summary court. 

Property Responsibility 

422. Special attention should be given to the care and accountability 
of all company property. 

1. All property (tents, axes^ spades, chairs, hatchets, etc.), should 
be plainly marked with the letter of the company. - 

2. Keep a duplicate copy of every memorandum receipt given 
for property, and when such property is turned in or another officer's 
memorandum receipt is given covering the property, don't fail to get 
your original memorandum from the quartermaster. 

3. See that the quartermaster gives you credit for all articles 
turned in, or property accounted for on statement of charges, proceed- 
ings of a surveying officer or otherwise. 

4. Have a settlement with the quartermaster at the end of every 
quarter as required by Army Kegulations, taking an inventory of all 
property held on memorandum receipt and submitting to the quarter- 
master a statement of charges and a certified list of the china and 
glassware unavoidably broken during the quarter. 

5. Keep an account of all articles issued to the men, turned in 
to the quartermaster, condemned, expended, lost, stolen or destroyed. 

6. Worn out and unserviceable property should be submitted to 
the action of an inspector as soon as practicable. If the time of the 
annual visit of the inspector be not near at hand and such property 
has accumulated to such an extent as to make the case one of emer- 
gency, application may be made to the department commander for the 
appointment of a special inspector, in which case a copy of the Inventory 
and Inspection Report, duly accomplished and signed, will be forwarded 
with the application. 

7. Property that is to be submitted to the action of a surveying 
officer or an inspector should always first be carefully examined by the 
responsible officer in person, who should be prepared to give all necessary 
information in regard to it. 

The property should be arranged in the order of enumeration in the 
survey or the inventory report, and should be arranged in rows of five, 
ten, or some other number, so that the numbers of the various articles 
can be counted at a glance. 

The Army Regulations require that the responsible officer shall be 
present at the inspection of property by a regular inspector. He should 
also be pfese^f. yirhen property is acte(i o^ by a surveying ofl^cer, 

[367] 



423 

Books and Becords 
423. The following books and records are required by Army Regu- 
lations to be kept in every company: 

1. Morning Eeport, which shows the exact status of every mem- 
ber of the company. Changes that have occurred since the preceding 
reports are noted in figures and by name. 

2. Sick Report, on which are entered the names of all enlisted 
men requiring medical attention and such officers as are excused from 
duty because of illness. 

3. Duty Roster. A form on which is kept a record of all de- 
tails for service in garrison and in the field, except the authorized special 
and extra duty details. For instructions regarding rosters, see ^^ Ros- 
ters and Detachments/^ Manual of Interior Guard Duty. 

4. Order File, consisting of a file of all orders received and issued. 

5. Company Fund Book, in which are entered all receipts to, and 
expenditures from the company fund, together with the proceedings of 
the Company Council of Administration. 

6. The Company Target Records consist partly of a series of 
sheets bound by the loose-leaf plan, one for each soldier, on which are 
entered his record practice and qualifications for each season of his 
three years' enlistment. An-oi;her part of the Company Target Record 
is given to a record of the collective fire and the figure of merit of the 
company. 

7. Correspondence Book, with index, in whicji is entered with 
ink or indelible pencil a brief of each item of correspondence in respect 
to which a record is necessary and a notation of the action taken 
thereon. 

8. Document File, containing the original documents or communi- 
cations when these are retained, and carbon, letter press or other legible 
copies of all letters, indorsements or telegrams sent with regard to same. 
The file also contains similar copies of all letters, indorsements or tele- 
grams originating in the company office. 

9. Descriptive List, Military Record and Clothing Account, on 
which is kept a full description of every man, including the date of 
enlistment, personal description, a record of deposits, trials by court- 
martial, etc., also clothing allowances due soldier and amounts due 
IT. S. for clothing drawn. The clothing account of every soldier is 
balanced June 30 and December 31 of each year, and when his service 
with an org^anization is terminated. 

Every year the War Department publishes a 'general order giving 
the clothing allowance for the next fiscal year. 

10. A Record of Sizes of Clothing for every man in the company 
as ascertained by measurements. 

11. Delinquency Book, in which are noted disciplinary punish- 
ments awarded by the company commander. 

12. Property Book, in which are entered all ordnance and quar- 
termaster property in the possession of the members of the company 



[M8] 



424 

CHAPTER II 
DISCIPLINE 

424. Definition. Discipline is not merely preservation of order, faith- 
ful performance of duty, and prevention of offenses — in other words, 
discipline is not merely compliance with a set of rules and regulations 
drawn up for the purpose of preserving order in an organization. This 
is only one pha^e of discipline. In its deeper and more important sense 
discipline may be defined as the habit of instantaneous and instinctive 
obedience under any and all circumstances — it is the habit whereby the 
very muscles of the soldier instinctively obey the word of command, so 
that under whatever circumstances of danger or death the soldier may 
hear that word of command, even though his mind be too confused to 
work, his muscles will obey. It is toward this ultimate object that all 
rules of discipline tend. In war, the value of this habit of instantaneous 
and instinctive obedience is invaluable, and during time of peace every- 
thing possible should be done to ingrain into the very blood of the 
soldier this spirit, this habit, of instantaneous, instinctive obedience to 
the word of command. 

Methods of Attaining G-ood Discipline. Experience shows that 
drill, routine, military courtesy, attention to details, proper rewards for 
good conduct, and invariable admonition or punishment of all derelic- 
tions of duty, are the best methods of attaining good discipline — that 
they are the most effective means to that end. 

Importance. History shows that the chief factor of success in 
war is discipline, and that without discipline no body of troops can hold 
their own against a well-directed, well-disciplined force. 

Sound System. We must bear in mind that what may be consid- 
ered a sound system of discipline at one epoch or for one nation, may 
be inapplicable at another epoch or for another nation. In other words, 
sound discipline depends upon the existing state of civilization and edu- 
cation, the political institutions of the country, the national trait and the 
national military system. For example, the system of discipline that 
existed in the days of Frederick the Great, and which, in modified form, 
exists today in certain European armies, whereby- the soldier was so 
inured to a habit of subjection that he became a sort of machine — a 
kind of automaton. Such a system of discipline, while answering admir- 
ably well its purpose at that time and for those nations, would not do 
at all in this day and generation, and with a people like ours, in whom 
the spirit of personal freedom and individual initiative are born. Of 
course, the discipline that will insure obedience under any and all con- 
ditions — the discipline that will insure prompt and unhesitating obedi- 
ence to march, to attack, to charge — is just as important today as ii 
was a thousand years ago, but we can not attain it by the machine- 
making methods of former times. The system we use must be in 
keeping with the national characteristics of our people and the tactical 
necessities of the day, the latter requiring individual initiative. Accord- 
ing to the old system, the company commander imposed his will upon a 
body of submissive units; under the new system the company commander, 

[369] 



424 (contd.) 

backed by authority and greater knowledge, leads obedient, willing units, 
exacting ready, obedience and loyal co-operation. The company com- 
mander used to drive; now he leads. 

What are the means of attaining and maintaining such discipline? 

1. Explain to the men the importance of discipline and its value 
on the field of battle, and give the reasons that makes it necessary to 
subject soldiers to restrictions that they were not subjected to in civil 
life. 

2. Do not impose unnecessary restrictions or hardships on your 
men, nor issue orders that have no bearing on their efficiency, health, 
cleanliness, orderliness, etc. 

3. Demand a high standard of excellence in the performance of 
all duties whatsoever, and exact the utmost display of energy. 

A system of discipline based on the above principles develops 
habits of self-control, self-reliance, neatness, order, and punctuality, and 
creates respect for authority and confidence in superiors. 

Punishment. In maintaining discipline, it must be remembered 
the object of punishment should be two-fold: (a) To prevent the com- 
mission of offenses, and (b) to reform the offender. Punishment should, 
therefore, in degree and character depend upon the nature of the offense. 
Punishment should not be debasing or illegal, and the penalty should be 
proportionate to the nature of the offense. If too great, it tends to 
arouse sympathy, and foster friends for the offender, thus encouraging 
a repetition of the offense. A distinction, therefore, should be made 
between the deliberate disregard of orders and regulations, and offenses 
which are the result of ignorance or thoughtlessness. In the latter case 
the punishment should be for the purpose of instruction and should not 
go to the extent of inflicting unnecessary humiliation and discouragement 
upon the offender. 

General Principles 

In the administration of discipline the following principles should 
be observed: 

1. Every one, officers and soldiers, should be required and made 
to perform their full duty. If the post commander, for instance, requires 
the company commanders to do their full duty, they will require their 
noncommissioned officers to do their full duty, and the noncommissioned 
officers will in turn require the men to do the same. 

2. Subordinates should be held strictly responsible for the proper 
government and administration of their respective commands, and all 
changes or corrections should be made through them. 

3. Subordinates should have • exclusive control of their respective 
commands, and all orders, instructions and directions affecting their 
commands should be given through them. 

4. If, in case of emergency, it be not practicable to make certain 
changes or corrections, or to give certain orders, instructions or direc- 
tions, through the subordinates, they should be notified at once of what 
has been done. 

5. After a subordinate has been placed in charge of a certain 
duty, all instructions pertaining thereto should be given through him, 

[370] 



424 (contd.) 

and all meddling and interfering should be avoided. Interference by 
superiors relieves the subordinate of responsibility, and causes him to lose 
interest, become indifferent, and do no more than he is obliged to do^ 

6. The certainty of reward for, and appreciation of, meritorious 
conduct, should equal the certainty of punishment for dereliction of 
duty. 

7. It is the duty of an officer or noncommissioned officer who 
gives an order to see that it is obeyed; carrying out orders received by 
him does not end with their perfunctory transmission to subordinates — 
this is only a small part of his duty. He must personally see that the 
orders so transmitted are made effective. 

8. The treatment of soldiers should be uniform and just, and 
under no circumstances should a man be humiliated unnecessarily or 
abused. Eeproof and punishment must be administered with discretion 
and judgment, and without passion; for an officer or noncommissioned 
officer who loses his temper and flies into a tantrum has failed to obtain 
his first triumph in discipline. He who can not control himself can not 
control others. 

9. Punishment should invariably follow dereliction of duty^ £or 
the frequency of offenses depends, as a general rule, on the degree of 
certainty with which their commission is attended with punishment. 
When men know- that their derelictions and neglects will be observed 
and reproved, they will be much more careful than they would be 
otherwise — that^s human nature. 

A strict adherence to the above general principles will instill into 
the minds of those concerned, respect for authority and a spirit of 
obedience. 



[371] 



425-426 

CHAPTER III 

GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF COMPANY TRAINING 
AND INSTRUCTION* 

425. Object of Training and Instruction. The object of training and 
instructing a company is to thoroughly knit together its different parts, 
its various elements (individuals, squads and platoons), into a complete, 
homogeneous mass, a cohesive unit, that will under any and all conditions 
and circumstances respond to the will of the captain — a cohesive unit 
that knows how to march, that knows how to live properly in camp, 
that knows how to fight and that can be readily handled tactically on the 
field of battle. In short, the object of training and instruction is to 
make out of the company an efficient, wieldy fighting weapon, to be 
manipulated by the captain. There is but one way this object can be 
obtained, and that is by work, work, work — and then more work — by 
constant care, attention and pains — by co-operation, by team work, 
among the officers, the noncommissioned officers and the privates. 

426. Method and Progression. Arrangement is an essential of sound 
teaching. Training and instruction in order to be easily understood and 
readily assimilated — in order to give the greatest results in the short- 
est time — must be carried on according to a methodical and progres- 
sive plan. Each subject or subjects upon a knowledge of which depend 
the proper understanding and mastering of another, should be studied 
and mastered before taking up the other subject, and the elementary 
and simpler aspects of a given subject must be mastered before taking 
up the higher and more difficult phases of the subject, which means that 
individual training and instruction must precede, and provide a sound 
foundation for, collective training and instruction — that is to say, for 
the higher tactical training and instruction of the company as a unit. 
These basic, fundamental principles of successful training and instruc- 
tion apply to practical as well as theoretical training. For instance, in 
the subject of entrenchments we would first instruct the men individually 
in the use of the tools and in the construction and use of trenches, after 
which we would pass on to the tactical use of entrenchments by the 
company. Also, in training and instructing the company in fire disci- 
pline, we would first explain to the men the power and tactical value of 
the rifle, and instruct them in their duties on the firing line as regards 
adjustment of sights, attention to commands, economy of ammunition, 
etc.; we would explain to the platoon commanders and guides their duties 
as regards control of fire, enforcement of fire discipline, etc., after 
which we would practice the company as a unit in fire action, and fire 
control, ending up with an exercise showing the tactical application of 
the rules and principles explained. And again, in the training and 
instruction of the company in the attack, we would first train and 

. * This chapter is based on "Company Training", by General Haking, British Army, 
which is the best book the author has ever seen on the subject of company training. 
"Field Training of a Company of Infantry'*, by Major Craufurd, British Army, 
an esccellent litde bodk, was also consulted. 



427-428-429-430 

instruct the company in all the formations and operations that naturally 
precede an attack (patrolling, outposts, advance guard, rear guard), 
and also in those that form an inherent part of an attack (extended 
order, field firing, use of cover, etc.). 

427. Program. The training and instruction of a company, whether 
practical or theoretical, should be carried on in accordance with a fixed, 
definite program, in which the subjects are arranged in a natural, 
progressive order. 

428. Simultaneous Instruction and Training. The next question that 
presents itself is: Should instruction and training in each branch be 
completed before proceeding to the next, or should instruction and train- 
ing be carried on simultaneously in two or more different subjects, as 
one, for example, are taught mathematics, French and -history at the same 
time, a dift'erent hour of the day being devoted to each subject? In 
other words, should we, for instance, devote one hour of the day to attack, 
one hour to defense, and one hour to the service of security, thus pre- 
venting the soldier from getting weary of doing the same thing that 
whole day? Our answer is: 

1st. If the instruction and training is being given on the ground 
where the application of the principles of any given subject i§ varied 
so much by the type of the ground and the nature of the situation, each 
type of ground affording a diff'erent solution of the problem, it is thought 
the best results can be obtained by finishing each subject before pro- 
ceeding to the next, thus not losing the " atmosphere '^ of one subject 
by switching to the next, and also confusing the minds of the men 
with different principles. 

2nd. However, if the instruction and training be theoretical and 
the time available each day be several hours, better results can be 
obtained by studying two or more subjects simultaneously. This would 
also be the case if the work be practical, but if it be such that the type 
of the ground and the nature of the situation will not of themselves afford 
variety in the application of the same principles. 

429. Responsibility. The Army Regulations and War Department 
orders hold the company commander responsible for the training and 
instruction of the company. The subject is a most important one and 
should receive serious thought and study. Before admonishing one of 
your men for not knowing a subject, always ask yourself, ''Have I made 
an effort to teach it to him?^^ 

430. Interest. Special effort should be made to make the training 
and instruction of the company interesting, so that the work will not 
become monotonous and irksome, and thus cause the men to lose interest 
and get stale. To accomplish this, these points should be borne in 
mind: 

Variety, Inject variety into the work. Do not keep the men 
too long at one thing. 

Clearness. Every exercise, lesson or lecture should have in view 
a well-defined object, the meaning and importance of which must be 
explained to, and understood by, the men at the beginning of the exercise, 
lesson or lecture. In other words, at the beginning, explain the main, 
governing idea of the subject, and then take pains to explain in a simple, 

[373] 



431-432 

conversational way each phase as you come to it. Give the reasons for 
everything. You can not expect men to take an interest in things the 
meaning of which they do not understand and the reason for which 
they do not see. Make sure by asking questions of different ones as 
you go along that your explanations are understood. 

Thoroughness. Every lecture, talk, drill or exercise should be 
carefully planned and arranged before hand. Kemember, that the men 
who are going to listen to your talk — the men who are going to go through 
the exercise — have the right to expect this of you, and you have no 
right to compel them to listen to lots of disconnected, half-baked state- 
ments, or make them go through a disjointed exercise or drill. In the 
case of tactical exercises always, if practicable, visit and examine the 
terrain beforehand. -Of course_, all this will mean work — additional work 
— but remember the government pays you to work. 

Reality. Make all practical work as real as possible — do not per- 
mit the commission of absurdities — do not let men do things which 
manifestly they would not be able to do in actual practice — and you 
yourself be sure to make your exercises ancl tactical scheme as like real 
conditions of warfare as possible. 

431. Individual Initiative. The effective range and great power of 
modern firearms cause troops in battle to be spread out over large areas, 
thus decentralizing control over men and operations, and consequently 
increasing the value and importance of individual initiative. The 
company commander should, therefore, practice, accustom and encourage 
the privates, noncommissioned officers and lieutenants in the development 
and exercise of individual initiative and responsibility. This should' be 
borne in mind in all training and instruction. 

Officers, noncommissioned officers and privates must not ''lay 
down'' just because they have no specific orders. Remember, the one 
thing above all others that counts in war, is action, initiative. 
Indeed, 'tis better to have acted and lost than never to have acted at 
all. Listen to what the Chief of Staff of the Army has to say about 
this in the preface to the Field Service Eegulations: "Officers and men 
of all ranks and grades are given a certain independence in the execu- 
tion of the tasks to which they are assigned and are expected to show 
initiative in meeting the different situations as they arise. Every indi- 
vidual, from the highest commander to the lowest private, must always 
remember that inaction and neglect of opportunities will warrant more 
severe censure than an error in the choice of means." 

432. Determination and Individual Intelligence. While the value of 
discipline can hardly be overestimated, there are two other factors in 
battle that are fully as important, if not more so, and they are, 
determination to win, and individual intelligence, which, in war, 
as in all other human undertakings, almost invariably spell success. 
Therefore, make these two factors one of the basic principles of the 
instruction and training of the company, and do all you can to instill 
into your men a spirit of determination, and to develop in them 
individual intelligence. Every human being has in his soul a certain 
amount of determination, even though it be only enough to determine 
upon the small thimgs of life. Some people are born with more determi- 

[374] 



433-434 

nation than others, but it is a mistake to suppose that a man must remain 
through life with the same amount of determination that he brought 
into it. The attributes of the human mind, such as determination, 
bravery, ambition, energy, etc., are all capable of improvement and also 
of deterioration. It is essential, therefore, for us to endeavor by all 
means in our power to improve our strength of character — our determi- 
nation. It is, of course, useless for us to learn the art of war if we 
have not sufficient determination, when we meet the enemy, to apply 
the principles we have studied. There is no reason, however, why every 
officer, noncommissioned officer and private should not improve his deter- 
mination of character by careful training in peace. It can only be done 
by facing the difficulties, thoroughly understanding the dangers, and 
asking ourselves repeatedly whether we are prepared to face the ordeal 
in war. Let us not think, in a vague sort of a way, that in war we 
shall be all right and do as well as most people. We know that we are 
not gifted with tremendous personal courage, and we know that, whatever 
happens, we shall not run away. But that is not enough. We must 
train ourselves to understand that in the hour of trial we can 
harden our hearts, that we can assume the initiative, and retain it by 
constant advance and constant attack; unless we can fill our hearts 
with the determination to win, we can not hope to do our full duty 
on the field of battle and acquit ourselves with credit. 

433. The Human Element. No system of training and instruction 
that does not take into account human nature, can be thoroughly effec- 
tive. The human element probably enters into war more than it does 
into any other pursuit. The old idea of turning a human being into a 
machine, by means of discipline, and making him dread his captain more 
than the enemy, died long ago, especially with the American people. In 
modern war success depends to a great extent upon the initiative, the indi- 
vidual action of the soldier, and this action is greatly influenced by the 
soldier's state of mind at the moment, by the power that can be exercised 
over his mind by his comrades and those leading him. The company 
commander should, therefore, study the characteristics of the human 
mind with the object of ascertaining how he can influence the men 
under his command, so that in battle those human attributes which are 
favorable to success, may be strengthened and those which are favorable 
to defeat may be weakened. Of the former, courage, determination, 
initiative, respect, cheerfulness, comradeship, emulation and esprit de 
corps, are the principal ones; of the latter, fear, surprise, disrespect, and 
dejection, are the leading ones. By means of good, sound discipline, we 
can create, improve and foster the qualities mentioned that are favorable 
to success, and we can eliminate to a considerable extent, if not 
entirely, those that are detrimental to success. 

434. Fear. The emotion of fear acts more powerfully upon the 
feelings of the individual soldier than any other emotion, and it is also 
probably the most infectious. Fear in a mild form is present in every 
human being. Nature wisely put it there, and society could not very 
well get along without it. For example, we stop and look up and down 
a crowded street before starting to cross, for fear of being run over; in 
going out in the cold we put on our overcoats, for fear of catching cold. 

[375] 



434 (contd.) 

In fact, we hardly do anything in life without taking a precaution of 

some kind. These are all examples of reasonable fear, which, within 
bounds, is a perfectly legitimate attribute of a soldier in common with 
other human beings. For example, we teach the men to take advantage of 
cover when attacking^ and we dig trenches when on the defense, in both 
cases for fear of being shot by the enemy. It is the unreasoning type 
of fear that plays havoc in warj and the most deadly and common forn* 
of it is a vague, indefinite, nameless dread of the enemy. If the average 
man was to analyze his feelings in war and was to ask himself if he were 
actually afraid of being killed, he would probably find that he was not. 
The ordinary soldier is prepared to take his chance, with a comfortable 
feeling inside him, that, although no doubt a number of people will be 
killed and wounded, he will escape. If, then, a man is not unreasonably 
afraid of being killed or wounded, is it not possible by proper training 
and instruction to overcome this vague fear of the enemy? Experience 
shows that it is. If a soldier is suffering from this vague fear of the 
enemy, it will at least be a consolation to him to know that a great 
many other soldiers, including those belonging to the enemy, -are suffer- 
ing in a similar manner, and that they are simply experiencing one of 
the ordinary characteristics of the human mind. If the soldier in battle 
will only realize that the enemy is just as much afraid of him as he is 
of the enemy, reason is likely to assert itself and to a great extent over- 
come the unpleasant feelings inside him. General Grant, in his Memoirs, 
relates a story to the effect that in one of his early campaigns he was 
seized with an unreasonable fear of his enemy, and was very much 
worried as to what the enemy was doing, when, all at once, it dawned 
upon him that his enemy was probably worrying equally as much 
about what he. Grant, was doing, and was probably as afraid as he was, 
if not even more so, and the realization of this promptly dispelled all of 
his. Grant ^s, fear. Confidence in one's ability to fight well will also do 
much to neutralize fear, and if a soldier knows that he can shoot better, 
march better, and attack better, than his opponent, the confidence of 
success that he will, as a result, feel will do much to dispel physical fear. 
By sound and careful training and instruction make your men efficient 
and this efficiency will give them confidence in themselves, confidence 
in their rifles, confidence in their bayonets, confidence in their comrades 
and confidence in their officers. 

The physical methods of overcoming fear in battle are simply to 
direct the men's minds to other thoughts by giving them something for 
their bodies and limbs to do. It is a well-known saying that a man in 
battle frequently regains his lost courage by repeatedly firing off his 
rifle, which simply means that his thoughts are diverted by physical 
movements. This is no doubt one of the reasons why the attack is so 
much more successful in war than the defense, because in the attack 
the men are generally moving forward and having their minds diverted by 
physical motion from this vague dread of the enemy. 

Courage. Courage, like all other human characteristics, is very 
infectious, and a brave leader who has no fear of the enemy will always 
get more out of Ijis men than one who is not so well equipped in that 
respect. However, it is a well-known fact that a man may be brave 

[376] 



435-436 

far above his fellows in one calling or occupation, and extremely nervous 
in another. For example, a man may have greatly distinguished him- 
self in the capture of a fort, who would not get on a horse for fear of 
being kicked off. Courage of this kind is induced chiefly by habit or 
experience — the man knows the dangers and how to overcome them, 
he has been through similar experiences before and he has come out of 
them with a whole skin. This type of courage can be developed by 
careful training during peace, and it can be increased by self-confi- 
dence — by so training the soldier that he knows and feels he will 
know what to do in any emergency which may arise, and how to do 
it; he will not be surprised by the unexpected event, which invariably 
occurs, and he will understand others besides himself are being troubled 
by unpleasant feelings, which it is his duty as a man and a soldier to 
overcome. 

435. Surprise. Surprise may be said to be the mother of a panic, 
which is the worst form of fear. In such a case unreasoning fear some- 
times turns into temporary insanity. Panic is most infectious, but, on 
the other hand, a panic can often be averted or stayed by the "courageous 
action of one or more individuals, who can thus impose their will on 
the mass and bring the people to a reasonable state of mind. Teach 
every man in the company that when surprised the only hope of suc- 
cess is to obey at once and implicitly the orders of his immediate 
commander. 

Surprises in war are not limited to the ordinary acceptance of 
the term, such as a sudden attack from an unexpected direction. The 
soldier who goes into battle, for instance, and hears the whiz of a 
bullet, or sees a shell burst in front of him, is surprised if he has not 
been taught in peace that these things have to be faced, and that for 
one bullet that hurts anyone thousands have to be fired. Similarly, a 
man sees a comrade knocked over: the horrors of war are immediately 
brought to him, and his courage begins to ebb — he has been surprised, 
because he has not realized in peace that men are bound to be killed 
in war. The whole atmosphere of the battle-field is a surprise to the 
average soldier with no previous experience — the enemy is everywhere, 
behind every bush, and lurking in every bit of cover, the air is full of 
bullets, and any advance towards the formidable-looking position held 
by the enemy is suicidal. However, if the soldier is properly trained 
and instructed in peace, he will not be greatly surprised at his novel 
surroundings; he will know that the enemy is not everywhere, and 
that one bullet sounds much more dangerous than it really is. A bullet 
sounds quite close when it is fifty yards away, and there is a popular 
saying that a man^s weight in lead is fired for every man that is killed 
in war. 

436. Respect. It is a mistake to imagine that all that is required 
from a soldier is respect to his officers and noncommissioned officers. 
Self-respect is fully as important. A soldier is a human being; if he 
possesses self-respect he will respect all that is good in his comrades, 
and they will respect all that is good in him. A man who respects 
himself knows how to respect other people. These are the men that 
form the backbone of the company, and are the best material on which 

[377] 



437-438-439 

to work in order to raise the general standard of courage in battle. 
From a purely military point of view, it is absolutely necessary for an 
officer, noncommissioned officer^ or private to possess some marked 
military qualifications in order to gain respect from others. 

This respect engenders confidence in others. Self-respect in the 
individual can be encouraged, not by fulsome praise, but by a quiet ap- 
preciation of the good military qualities displayed by him, and by 
making use of those qualities whenever an opportunity occurs. For 
example, if a soldier is seen to do a good piece of scouting or patrol- 
ling, the first opportunity should be taken to give him a similar task, 
if possible in a more responsible position or on a more important ' occa- 
sion. Knowledge is a powerful factor in creating respect, and is prob- 
ably second only to determination of character. It is essential, there- 
fore, that all officers and noncommissioned officers should have a thor- 
ough knowledge of their duties — that they should be "on to their 
jobs." 

437. Cl^eerfulness. Cheerfulness is a valuable military asset in war, 
and like all other characteristics of the human being, is very infectious, 
and in times of depression, such as during a long siege, or after the 
failure of an attack, it does more than anything else to restore the 
fighting power of the men. 

438. Contentment. Contentment amongst troops in war is dependent 
upon these main factors: good leading, good food, and sufficient shelter 
and sleep. Of these, good leading is by far the most important, because 
it has been proved time and again that badly fed and badly quartered 
troops, who have suffered great hardships, will still be content and 
will fight in the most gallant and vigorous manner, provided they are 
well led. Although good leading emanates in the first instance from 
the highest military authorities, a great deal depends upon the com- 
pany officers and noncommissioned officers. A good leader as a rule 
is careful of the comforts of his men; he obtains the best food and 
best shelter available, he does not wear out the men by unnecessary 
movements or unnecessary work, either in the field or in camp, and 
consequently when he does order them to do anything they know at 
once that it is necessary and they do it cheerfully. 

439. Oomradeshlp. Comradeship is a very valuable military charac- 
teristic. What a world of meaning there is in the words, '*Me and 
my bunkie." A soldier .may have many acquaintances and a number 
of friends, but he has but one "bunkie. " In times of great danger 
two men who are ''bunkies" will not shirk so easily as two independent 
men. The best in one man comes out to the surface and dominates 
any bad military points in the other. They can help each other in 
countless ways in war, and if one is unfortunately killed or wounded, 
the other will probably do his best to get even with the enemy at the 
earliest possible opportunity. This spirit may not be very Christian- 
like, but it is very human and practical, and helps to win battles, and 
to win battles is the only reason why soldiers go to war. 



[378] 



440-441 

AET OF INSTRUCTION ON THE GROUND 

440. Advantages. Whenever practicable, training and instruction 
should, in whole or in part, be imparted on the ground, as this gives the 
instruction a practical aspect that is most valuable, and enables the 
soldier to grasp and apply principles that he would not otherwise under- 
stand. Knowledge that a man can not apply has no value. 

Different Methods. Instruction on the ground may be given ac- 
cording to one ofx these three methods: 

1st Method. By means of a talk or lecture prepare the minds 
of the men for the reception and retention of the subject to be ex- 
plained later on the ground. In other words, first explain the prin- 
ciples of the subject and then put a "clincher'' on the information 
thus imparted by taking the men to some suitable ground, assuming 
certain situations and then by quizzing different men see how they 
would apply the principles just explained in the talk or lecture. For 
example, after a lecture on the selection of fire-positions take the men 
to some suitable near-by place and explain to them that the com- 
pany is attacking toward that house and is being fired upon from that 
direction. Then continue: 

Captain: Remember what I told you about the selection of good 
fire-positions during the advance. We want to use our rifles with 
effect, so we must be able to see the position of the enemy. On the 
other hand, we want to avoid being hit ourselves, if possible; so, we 
would like to get as much cover as possible. Now, Smith, do you 
think where we are at present standing is a good place for a fire- 
position f 

Smith: No, sir. 

Captain: Why not? 

Smith: We can see the enemy from here, but he can see us better 
than we can see him, and can hit us easier than we can hit him. 

Captain: Jones, can you choose a better place, either to the front 
or rear of where we are now standing? 

Jones: I would choose a position along that row of bushes, about 
fifty yards to the front. 

Captain: Why? 

Jones: Because, etc., etc. > 

Twenty minutes' instruction in this manner, after a lecture, will 
firmly ^n in the brains of the men the principles explained in the 
lecture. 

It is a good plan to repeat the salient points of the lecture in the 
questions, as was done in the first question asked above, or to do so 
in some other way. 

If a man can not give an answer, or choose a suitable place, 
explain the requirements again and help him to use his common sense. 

2d Method. By practising the men on the ground in the sub- 
ject about which the talk or lecture was delivered. 

441. 3d Method. This may be called the ocular demonstration 
method, which consists in having a part of the company go through 
the exercise or drill, while the rest of the company observes what is 
being done. This method is illustrated by the following example: 

[379] 



441 (contd.) 

Attack. The company commander has just delivered a talk to 
the company on the second stage of the attack (See Par. 647), and has 
marched the company to a piece of ground suitable for practising this 
particular operation, and which the company commander has himself 
visited beforehand. (The ground should always be visited beforehand 
by the company commander, who should be thoroughly familiar with it. 
If possible, ground suitable for practising the operation in question 
should always be selected.) The operation should begin about 1200 
yards from the enemy's position. After pointing out the enemy's posi- 
tion to the company, the particular part of his line it is intended to 
assault and the direction the company is to advance, the company 
commander would then proceed something like this: ''We are part of 
a battalion taking part in a battle, and there are companies to our 
right and left, with a support and reserve in our rear. So far we have 
been advancing over ground that is exposed to hostile artillery fire 
(or not exposed to hostile artillery fire, according to the actual coun- 
try). We have just come under the enemy's infantry fire also, and 
consequently we must change our method of advancing. Our imme- 
diate object is to get forward, without expending more ammunition 
than is absolutely necessary, to a position close enough to the enemy 
to enable us to use our rifles with such deadly effect that we will be 
able to gain a superiority of fire. Now, is this place sufliciently close 
for the purpose? No, it is not — it's entirely too far away. Is that 
next ridge just in front of us close enough? No, it is not; it is at 
-least 1,000 yards from the enemy's position. As a rule, we must get 
from eight to six hundred yards from the enemy's position before the 
real struggle for superiority of fire begins. 

The following are the main points to which attention must be paid 
during this part of the advance: 

1. We must halt in good fire-position from which we can see and 
fire at the enemy, and from which we can not be seen very clearly. 

2. We must advance very rapidly over any open ground that is 
exposed to the enemy's artillery or rifle fire. 

3. We must find halting places, if possible under cover, or under the 
best cover available, so as to avoid making our forward rushes so 
long that the men will get worn out, and begin to straggle long before 
they get close enough to the enemy to use their rifles with deadly 
effect. 

4. Whenever possible, company scouts should be sent on ahead to 
select fire-positions. 

Of course the above points will have been explained already in 
the lecture, but this short summary is given in order to focus the minds 
of the men upon the actian that must be taken by the privates, and squad 
leaders and the platoon commanders. 

We now take one platoon and the remainder of the company looks 
on. The platoon commander is reminded that he is under artillery 
and infantry fire, and is then directed to advance, in proper formation, 
to the first fire-pesition available. 

We will suppose there is a gentle slope up to the next ridge or 
undulation of the ground, and that there are no obstructions to the view 

[380] 



441 (conta.) 

except those afforded by the ground itself. The platoon now advances, 
the captain remaining with the rest of the company, pointing out mis- 
takes as well as good points, and asking the men questions, such as: 

Captain: Corporal Smith, should the whole platoon have gone 
forward together, or would it have been better to advance by squads! 

Corporal Smith: I think it should have advanced by squads. 

Captain: No; it was all right to advance as they did. At this 
distance the enemy's infantry fire would not be very deadly, the platoon 
is well extended as skirmishers, it would take considerably longer to 
go forward to the next position by successive squads and we want to 
advance at this stage as rapidly as possible; for, the longer we took, the 
longer would the men be exposed to fire, and consequently the greater 
would be the number of casualties. 

Captain: Sergeant Jones, why did the platoon advance at a run 
when moving down the slope, and begin to walk just before reaching 
the foot of the slope? 

Sergeant Jones: Because the slope is exposed and it was necessary 
to get over it as quickly as possible. They began to walk just before 
reaching the foot of the slope, because they struck dead ground and 
were covered from the enemy's fire by the ridge in front. 

Captain: Corporal Adams, shouldn't the platoon have halted when 
it reached cover, so as to give the men a rest? 

Corporal Adams: JSTo, jgir; the men had not run very far and 
walking gave them sufficient rest. It would have been an unnecessary 
loss of time to halt. 

Captain: Harris, why did that man run on ahead as soon as the 
platoon halted? 

Pvt. Harris: So he could creep up the crest of the ridge and 
lie" down in exactly the spot that is the best fire-position — that is, where 
he can just see to fire over the crest and where the enemy can not 
see him. 

Captain: Yes, that's right. All the men in the platoon might not 
stop at the best fire-position and in the hurry and excitement of the 
moment the platoon commander might also fail to do so, but if a man 
goes forward and lies down, the whole platoon knows that they must 
not go beyond him. Individual men who, owing to slight undulations of 
ground, may not be able to fire when they halt in line with this man, 
can creep up until they can see. Others who, for the same reason as 
regards the ground, find that if they get up on a line with the man 
they will be unduly exposed, will halt before that time. 

Captain: Sergeant Roberts, is it necessary for another platoon to 
provide covering fire during the advance of the platoon? 

Sergeant Roberts: No, sir. At this range the enemy's infantry 
fire would not be very effective, and it is important to husband our 
ammunition for the later stages of the attack. 

Having asked any other questions suggested by the situation or 
the ground, the captain will then take the rest of the company forward 
over the ground covered by the platoon, halting at the place where the 
platoon changed its pace from a rush to a walk, so that the men can see for 
themselves that cover from fire has been reached. He will then move 

[381J 



441 (contd.) 

tlie rest of the company forward and tell them to halt and lie down in 
what each man considers to be the best fire-position, not necessarily adopt- 
ing the same position as that chosen by the leading platoon. The platoon 
commanders will then go along their platoons and point out any mistakes. 

The leading platoon will now join the company and another 
platoon will be deployed in the fire position, the platoon commander 
being directed to advance to the next fire-position. 

As we are now about 1,000 yards from the enemy's position the 
question will again arise as to whether covering fire is necessary. 

If the enemy's rifle fire were heavy and accurate it might be 
necessary, but it should be avoided if possible, on account of the ex- 
penditure of ammunition. 

We will suppose that the ground falls gently towards the enemy 
and is very exposed to view for about 300 yards, and half this distance 
away there is a low bank running parallel to the front of the attack 
and with a small clump of three or four trees on the bank directly in 
front of the platoon. Four hundred yards away is the bottom ^of the 
valley covered with bushes and shrub. On the far side the' ground 
rises with small undulations and low foot hills to the high ground occu- 
pied by the enemy. 

There appears to be no marked fire-position which will afford any 
cover except the bank 150 yards away. The second platoon advances 
in the same manner as did the first and the captain with the commanders 
of the remaining platoons will continue to ask questions and point out 
what has been done right or wrong by the leading platoon. The first 
question which will arise is whether the platoon can reach the fire 
position offered by the bank in one rush, and secondly whether the bank 
is a good fire-position. A former question will again crop up as to 
whether the whole platoon should go forward at once or whether the 
advance should be made by squads. 

A hundred and fifty yards is a long way to advance without a 
halt, and if a halt is made on such exposed ground fire must be opened. 
Probably three advances, each of about fifty yards, would be made, 
covering fire being provided by the other platoons, which will be occu- 
pying the fire-position which the leading platoon has just left. This 
covering fire would not endanger the leading platoon as it would be 
delivered from just behind the crest and the leading platoon would be 
over the crest and out of sight and therefore out of fire from the platoon 
in rear. 

The selection of a fire-position during this advance would depend 
upon very minute folds of the ground^ or very low bushes, grass, etc., 
which might give a certain amount of cover from view, and therefore 
make it difficult for the enemy to aim or range accurately. We will 
suppose that the leading platoon has halted to fire about fifty yards 
in front, the remaining platoons, in turn, should then be taken for- 
ward, examining the ground very carefully as they go, and each platoon 
commander asked to halt his platoon in what he considers to be the 
best place. 

The possibility of using a scout to select a fire-position would be 
considered, and a fire-position selected by one platoon would be com- 
pared with that selected by another. 



441 (contd.) 

The third platoon would then lead during the advance to the 
next fire-position, and so on with the fourth platoon, if necessary, until 
the bank was reached. The bank will afford a good deal of material 
for discussion. Is it a good fire-position or is it not, should it be occu- 
pied as such or should it be avoided altogether? 

If we ask an artillery officer his opinion about the matter, he 
will tell us that by means of the clump of trees the defenders' artil- 
lery will be able to range with absolute accuracy on that bank. The 
direction of the bank is parallel to their front, and therefore they 
can fire at any part of it for some distance right and left of the clump 
without materially altering their range, and if any infantry occupy 
the bank they can bring a very deadly fire to bear against them. 

There appears to be no doubt, from an artillery point of view, 
that our platoon should avoid occupying it and get out of its neigh- 
borhood as rapidly as possible. 

There is another drawback as regards the bank: it is some 850 
yards from the enemy's position and may be expected to be under an 
effective rifle fire. It is no doubt a good mark for the enemy, and, 
now we come to the crux of the whole matter: his artillery and infantry 
fire might not do us much damage so long as we remain behind the 
bank, but they might make it very unpleasant for us directly we try 
to leave this cover and advance further. 

Before finally deciding what to do we must consider human na- 
ture, which is entirely in favor of halting behind the bank, and if 
allowed to remain there long, will be opposed to leaving it. We cannot 
hope to gain superiority of fire over the enemy at a range of 850 yards, 
so that a long halt at the bank is out of the question. But it appears 
to be an extraordinary thing, when we are searching everywhere for 
cover, that we should be doubtful about occupying such good cover 
when we find it. 

If we decifle not to occupy it, the logical conclusion is that, when 
preparing a position for defense, we should construct a good fire posi- 
tion for the attack some 850 yards away, which is the last thing we 
should think of doing. 

There is no doubt about it, that with badly-trained troops such 
a fire-position would be liable to become a snare, and that if they once 
occupied it, there would be great difficulty in getting them forward 
again, and probably the attack would be brought to a standstill at a 
critical time. 

The answer appears to be found in the simple solution of good 
training. We must teach our men that when they get into such posi- 
tions they must use the cover afforded, but for no longer than any 
other fire-position, and that they must get into the habit in peace of 
looking upon such localities with suspicion, and with the knowledge 
that they are not suitable for lengthy occupation in war, if the battle 
is to be won. 

We now come to a still more difficult question of training, namely, 
how far can the company get forward from the bank without being 
compelled to stop in order to gain superiority of fire over the defence t 
In wat we want to get as close as possible; the moral fefftfct on the ^e- 

[3K3] 



441 (eoiitd.) 

fence is greater, our fire is more effective, and we are likely to gain our 
object more rapidly. In peace there is no fire to stop us, and we move 
forward to ridiculous positions which we could not possibly reach in war 
without first gaining superiority of fire. The result of this is that we 
try to do the same thing when first we go to war, and we are stopped, 
probably much further back than we should have been if we had studied 
the question in peace. 

Even on the most open ground we must get to within 600 yards 
of the enemy, and if the ground affords any cover in front, the ex- 
posed space must be rushed and the more forward position gained. 
Having pointed out this difiiculty to the company during the previous 
lecture; and reminded them of it on the ground, we can now extend 
the whole company and move forward from the bank, using covering 
fire and letting each platoon commander decide how far he can get to 
the front after a series of rushes, the company acting as a whole. 

The captain can then go down the line and discuss with each 
platoon the position it has reached. Whilst he is doing tnis, the remain- 
ing platoons can be trained in fire direction and control, whicTi should 
be carefully watched and criticized by the platoon commanders. One 
platoon, owing to the nature of the ground in front of it, can get for- 
ward further than other platoons, and this should be brought home to 
each platoon, so as to avoid the possibility of playing the game of 
follow your leader, and one platoon halting merely because another has 
halted. 

If there is still time available, and the ground is suitable, the 
company can be moved to a fiank to choose a similar fire-position where 
the ground is more favorable to an advance, and where the company 
could get within 300 yards of the enemy, or even less, before it would 
be absolutely necessary to stop in order to gain superiority of fire. 

If there is still time available, and the ground is suitable, the 
whole operation can be carried out in the opposite direction or in 
some other direction, and the ]3latoons can thus be trained to appreciate 
that fire-positions which are good in one place are bad in another. A 
more thorough investigation of fire-positions which will suggest sub- 
jects for discussion on the ground will be found beginning with para- 
graph 649, dealing with this stage of the attack. . 

Defense. Demonstrations in defense can be carried out in a similar 
manner, the captain explaining to the company the general line of defense 
to be taken up, the portion allotted to the company, and the probable 
direction of the enemy ^s attack. 

The co-operation of the artillery and infantry will have been 
pointed out in the previous lecture: how some part of the enemy's 
advance will be dealt with by artillery alone, some part by both 
artillery and infantry, and some part by infantry alone. 

This can now be pointed out to the men on the ground. Having 
considered the assistance provided by the artillery, the next point to 
decide upon is the exact position of the fire trench. The best way to 
proceed is to allot a certain portion of the front occupied by the com- 
pany to each platoon and to let the platoon commanders take charge of 
the operations. The platoon commander can direct one of his squads to 

P84] 



441 (contd.) 

select a position for the trencli, and that squad can lie down there. The 
remaining squads will then select a position in turn. If two squads select 
the same they can lie down together. The platoon commander will then 
fall in his platoon, and make them lie down in the most retired position 
chosen; he will ask the squad leader why the squad chose that locality in 
preference to any other, why they did not go ten yards further forward 
or ten yards further back; and he will explain to the whole platoon the 
advantages and disadvantages of selecting this locality. He will then 
move the whole platoon forward to the next position chosen by another 
squad and deal with that locality. Finally, he will select the position 
he thinks the best, giving his reasons why he has decided upon it, and 
place the whole platoon on it. When all the platoons have decided upon 
their line of defense, the captain will move the whole company in turn 
from the ground occupied by one platoon to that occupied by another, 
asking the platoon commander in each case to explain why the position 
was chosen in preference to any other. 

He will give his decision as regards each platoon, and he will 
finally arrange for the position to be occupied by the whole company. 
One platoon, for some good reason, may have chosen a place which it 
would not be safe to occupy, owing to the fire of another platoon on the 
flank. Another platoon may have chosen a place which was very good 
as regards the field of fire in a direction which was already adequately 
defended by another platoon, but which had a bad field of fire over 
ground which no other platoon could fire upon. The company com- 
mander would adjust all these matters, and in the end one or more 
platoons might not be placed in the best position as regards their own 
particular front, but in the best as regards the whole company. 

Having decided upon the exact site of the trenches and the general 
distribution of fire^ the next matter to consider is the amount of clear- 
ing that is necessary, and the position and nature of any obstacles which 
may be required. Each platoon commander having been allotted a 
definite fire zone, can point out to his platoon what clearance is neces- 
sary; he can then ask each squad, as before, to choose the position for 
the obstacle. The company commander can then take the whole com- 
pany to the position occupied by each platoon and tell the platoon 
commander to explain what ground they propose to clear, where they 
propose to place their obstacle, the material available for its construc- 
tion, and in every case the reason why the^ decision has been arrived 
at. If digging is permitted, the trenches will now be constructed, and 
care will be taken that they are actually finished. It is far better to 
work overtime than to cons^truct trenches which would be of little use 
in war and could not be properly defended. It is the exception rather 
than the rule to see trenches properly finished, fit for occupation, and 
capable of resisting a heavy attack. If the trenches cannot be dug 
the company can be taken to another part of the same position, where 
the ground in front is totally different, and the exercise can be re- 
peated, the platoon and company commanders pointing out why a 
fire trench which was well sited in the first case would be badly sited 
if a similar position was selected in the second case. 

[385] 



441 (contd.) 

Many other points which would come up for discussion, according 
to the nature of the ground in front, are dealt with in Chapters X and 
XI, Part III, '^The Company in Defense.'' 

Outpost. We can now turn to the method of training the com- 
pany in outpost duty, making use of the same system of demonstration. 
Having pointed out to the company the locality where the main body 
is bivouacked, the fighting position which the main body will occupy 
in case a heavy attack is made against the outposts, and the general 
line of the outposts, the company commander will indicate on the 
ground the extent of front which is to be guarded by his company, 
stating whether imaginary companies continue the position on one or 
both flanks. He will point out the possible avenues of approach from 
the direction of the enemy to that portion of the position to be occupied 
by the company, and state from which direction the enemy is most 
likely to advance and why. 

The first point to decide is the number of outguards and their 
exact position. In war this would alwaya be done by the company 
commander, but if it is desired to give the junior officers of the com- 
pany some instruction in this important detail, they should be sent 
out before the company arrives on the ground to reconnoiter the posi- 
tion and make their decisions. The exact siting of the trenches for the 
outguards, the construction of obstacles, and the clearance of the fore- 
ground having been decided upon and the positions selected for each 
outguard discussed, and a definite site selected, the next question to 
decide is the number and position of the sentries. 

The platoon commander would then take each scheme in turn, 
visit with the whole platoon each position selected for the sentry, and 
decide finally what it would be best to do, giving, as usual, his reasons. 

Having decided upon the positions of the sentries, and their line 
of retreat, so as not to mask the fire of the outguard, the next matter 
to consider would be the number of patrols that are required,^ and the 
particular areas of ground that must be examined by them periodically. 
The necessary trenches, obstacles, etc., would then be constructed. 

Finally, the whole company should be assembled, marched to the 
position chosen for each outguard and the reasons for selecting the 
position explained by the company commander. The company should 
then be told off as an outpost company, and divided into outguards, 
supports, if any, and the necessary sentries over arms, patrols, etc., and 
marched to their respective posts. 

If there is still time available each platoon commander can 
reconnoiter the ground for suitable positions for his outguards by 
night, take the outguards there, explain why the change of position is 
desirable, and direct the outguard commanders with their outguards to 
select positions for the sentries, following the same procedure as by day. 

Although it is quite correct to select positions for night outposts 
during daylight, when possible, they should never be definitely occu- 
pied by the company before dark, when the forward movement could 
not be observed by the enemy. To practice night outposts by day is 
bad instruction, outguards and sentries are placed in positions which 
appear ridiculous to the ordinary mind, and the men g6t confused ideas 

[386] 



441 (conta.) 
«n the subiect. When it is desired to practice day and night outposts 
.^ «T, Xanced exercise it is advisable to commence work m the 
afternoon establish the day outposts, reconnoiter for the night out- 
Jostsmak the change after dark and construct the necessary trencher, 
obstacles etc after dark^^ _^ ^^^^^^ ^^^^ the patrols should get 
to know their way 'about the country in front during daylight, when 
posS so that they will have some practice m recognizing land 
marks by night. ^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^ *^V'«'\tP.«f* 

duties that periods elapse during which the outguards aie doing 
nothing These opportunities should be taken to instruct the men in 
their duties when ordered to patrol to the front, the same system of 
demonstration being employed. For instan«.Vthe officer or noncommiB- 
£ed office? commfndini a piquet can select three men, point out certain 
2round in front which the sentries cannot see and which must be examined 
by a patrol, and proceed to instruct the whole picket in the best manner 
SJcarryTng out this work. We will suppose that the Patrol is wortang 
by day^and that the ground to be visited is behind a small hill some 
500 yards in front of the sentry. The commander of the Pie^et ^^i" 
?hen explain to the men that the first object of the patrol J? to reach 
the ground to be examined without being seen by any hostile patros 
which may be moving about in front. Before proceeding further it is 
necessary for the patrol to decide upon the best Ime of adv^^^e The 
various lines of advance will be discussed and the patrol asked to decide 
which they would select. Three other men can then be asked to give 
Uiek opinion, and so on until all the men of the picket have expressed 
their /lews. The commander of the picket will then state which he 
considers the best line and give his reasons. „^„r>f^/i 

The next matter to decide is the method of advance to be adopted 
by the patrol. Are the three men to march past the sentry m one body 
and walk straight over the hill in front? If they do this there may be 
a hostile patrol hiding just behind the crest, watching the movements 
of our patrol, and directly the latter reach the hill they will be covered 
by the rifles of the hostile patrol at a few yards' range and will be 

captured or shot. , , , . .^ i. tu rri,^^^ 

If the patrol is not to advance in one body how is it to acU mere 
is plenty of time available, so that there are no objections to deliberate 
methods. The patrol should advance from cover to cover with one 
man always going forward protected by the rifles of the remaining two 
men who have halted in a good position to fire on any eneniy that can 
fire on the leading man. The leading man having reached the cover in 
front will signal back all clear, and the two men in the rear will join mm. 
They will then make their next advance in a similar manner. 

By looking at the hill the patrol can make a good guess at the 
locality which a hostile patrol would select if it was on the hill, it 
would be a place where it could get a good view towards our outpost 
line, and where the patrol could not be seen itself from the outpost 
line. If the hill was quite bare -with nothing but grass on it and flat 
round top, the best place for the enemy's patrol would be exactly on the 
top just behind the crest. In such a position he could not be seen by 

[387] 



442 

any sentry to the right or left of our picket. For example, if the 
hostile patrol chose a place on the side of the bare slope of the hill 
and looked over the crest line it would not be seen by our sentry, but it 
might be seen by another one on the flank. 

The object of our patrol would be to approach the hill, not direct 
f]h?m the outguard, but either from the left or right of the hill and 
thu^ come on the flank of the enemy ^s patrol if he was there. 

^rhe whole picket can then be taken out to the front and fol- 
low the iii-Qvements of the patrol from cover to cover until the hill 
is reached. 

The next step will be to ascertain if there is any one on the 
top of the hill. If the hill is perfectly bare with a somewhat convex 
slope, it would be best to-J?^ the three men to extend to about twenty 
yards interval and move forward together, prepared to drop on the 
first sign of the enemy^ so that tiiey can creep up and open fire on 
him without exposing themselves. Three men with magazine rifles, 
extended in this manner, opposed to a hostile patrol collected in one 
party, should be able to deal with the latter without much difficulty. 
Their fire would be converging, and coming from different directions 
would confuse the hostile patrol, especially if the advance was made 
from a flank. The men of the patrol when creeping up the hill should 
avoid exposing themselves in the direction of the ground behind the 
hill, if possible, because they want to examine that ground later on, 
and if seen by the enemy they might fall into an ambuscade. If it is 
impossible to avoid being seen from the ground beyond, it would be 
best for the patrol to retire as though they were going back to the out- 
posts, and then move round the flank of the hill and advance to the 
ground beyond from an unexpected direction. All this would be con- 
sidered by the oflicer or noncommissioned officer commanding the picket, 
together with many other points. 

Sufficient has been said to explain how this system of demon- 
stration can be worked in connection with any class of operation in 
the field. It is certainly slow, and takes a long time, but no one is ever 
idle and every one is constantly learning something fresh, for the 
simple reason that, although one may know every detail of the subject, 
the ground constantly differs and requires to be dealt with in a com- 
mon-sense and skilful manner. The men are- interested throughout, 
and one morning spent on this kind of work is worth several days of 
practice in the ordinary manner. 

It should be remembered that this system of demonstration is 
only required to teach the men their work; when they have once learned 
it and thoroughly understand the necessary details they must be prac- 
ticed in it, the company or platoon commander indicating what has been 
well done, what has been badly done, and what requires improve- 
ment. (See ''Outposts,^' Par. 514.) 

OTHER EXAMPLES OF THE OCULAE DEMONSTRATION METHOD 

442. The following illustrations will suggest other exam.ples of the 
employment of the ocular demonstration method of instruction: 

The advantages and disadvantages of close and extended order. 
Send a lieutenant or a noncommissioned officer with two or three 
squads of the older soldiers some distance to the front of the company, 



443-444 

and have them advance toward the comj^any, first in close order and 
then in extender order. 

By ocular demonstration show the men who are watching the 
approach of the company how easy it would be even for the poorest shots 
to land bullets in the thick of a closed body, but how much of a less dis- 
tinct target the extended order offers and how many spaces there are in 
the skirmish line for the bullets to pass through; -also, how much more 
easily cover can be em.ployed and the rifle used in the extended order. 
Let them see also how much more difficult it is for officers and non- 
commissioned officers to maintain control over the movements of troops 
in extended order, and the consequent necessity and duty of every soldier, 
when in extended order, doing all he can, by attention and exertion, to 
keep order and help his officers and noncommissioned officers to gain 
success. 

The Use of Cover. Send a lieutenant or noncommissioned officer 
with a couple of squads of old soldiers a few hundred yards to the 
front and have them advance on the company as if attacking, first 
without taking advantage of cover and then taking advantage of all 
available cover, the part of the company that is supposed to be attacked 
lying down and aiming and snapping at the approaching soldiers. Then 
reverse the operation — send the defenders out and have them advance 
on the former attackers. Explain that the requisites of good cover are: 
Ability to see the enemy; concealment of your own body; ability to use 
the rifi.e readily. Then have a number of men take cover and snap 
at an enemy in position, represented by a few old soldiers. Point out 
the defects and the good points in each' case. 

443. Practice in Commanding Mixed Squads. In order to practice 
noncommissioned officers in commanding mixed firing squads, and in 
order to drill the privates in banding themselves together and obeying 
the orders of anyone who may assume command, it is good training for 
two or more companies to practice re-enforcing each other by one com- 
pany assuming a given fire-position and the other sending up r^-enforce- 
ments by squads, the men being instructed to take positions anywhere 
on the firing line where they may find an opening. However, explain 
to the men that whenever possible units should take their positions on 
the firing line as a whole, but that in practice it is very often impossi- 
ble to do this, and that the drill is being given so as to practice the non- 
commissioned officers in commanding mixed units on the firing line and 
also to give the privates practice in banding themselves into groups 
and obeying the command of any noncommissioned officer who may be 
over them. 

444. Operating Against Other Troops. There is no better way of 
arousing interest, enthusiasm, and pride in training troops than by 
creating a feeling of friendly rivalry and competition amongst the men, 
and the best way to do this is to have one part of the company operate 
against tbo other in all such practical work as scouting, patrolling, 
attacldng, etc. AVhenever practicable, blank ammunition should be used. 
One of the sides should wear a white handkerchief around the hat or 
some other distinguishing mark. The troops that are sent out must "be 
given full and explicit instructions as to just ^exactly what they are to 
do, so that the principles it is intended to illustrate may be properly^ 
brought out. 



445-446-446a 

CHAPTER IV 

GENERAL COMMON SENSE PRINCIPLES OF AP- 
PLIED MINOR TACTICS^ 

445. To begin with, you want to bear in mind tbat tbere is nothing 
difficult, complicated or mysterious about applied minor tactics — ^it is 
just simply the application of plain, every-day, common horse sense — 
the whole thing consists in familiarizing yourself with certain general 
principles based on common sense and then applying them with common 
sense. Whatever you do, don't make the mistake of following blindly 
rules that you have read in books. 

446. One of the ablest officers in the Army has recently given this 
definition of the Art of War: . 

One-fifth is learned from books; 

One-fifth is common sense; 

Three-fifths is knowing men and how to lead them. 

The man who would be successful in business must understand 
men and apply certain general business principles with common sense; 
the man who would be a successful hunter must understand game and 
apply certain general hunting principles with common sense, and even 
the man who would be a successful fisherman must understand fish and 
apply certain general fishing principles with common sense. And so 
likewise the man who would lead other men successfully in battle 
must understand men and apply certain general tactical principles 
with common sense. 

Of course, the only reason for the existence of an army is the pos- 
sibility of war some day, and everything the soldier does — his. drills, pa- 
rades, target practice, guard duty, schools of instruction, etc. — has in 
view only one end: The preparation of the soldier for the field of 
battle. 

446a. While the responsibilities of officers and noncommissioned offi- 
cers in time of peace are important, in time of battle they are much 
more so: for then their mistakes are paid for in human blood. 

What would you think of a pilot who was not capable of piloting 
a boat trying to pilot a boat loaded with passengers; or, of an engineer 
who was not capable of running a locomotive trying to run a passenger 
train? You would, of course, think him a criminal — ^but do you think 
he would be more criminal than the noncommissioned officer who is 
not capable of leading a squad in battle but who tries to do so, thereby 
sacrificing the lives of those under him? 

You can, therefore, appreciate the importance, the necessity,* of 
every officer and noncommissioned officer doing everything that he 
possibly can during times of peace to qualify himself for his duties and 
responsibilities during times of war. 

^ In the preparation of the first part of this chapter, extracts of words and of 
ideas, were made from a paper on Applied Minor Tactics read before the St. Louis 
Convention of the National Guard of the United States in 1910. by Major J. F. 
Morrison, General Staff, U. S^. Army. 

[390] 



447-448-449-450 
If we are going to have a good army we must have good regi- 
ments; to have good regiments we must have good battalions; to have 
good battalions we must have good companies — but to have good com- 
panies we must have efficient company officers and noncommissioned 
officers. 

As stated before, everything in the life of the soldier leads to the 
field of battle. And so it is that in the subject of minor tactics all in- 
struction leads to the battle. First we have map problems; then ter- 
rain exercises; next the war game; after that maneuvers, and finally 
the battle. 

447. Map Problems and Terrain Exercises. In the case of map prob- 
lems you are given tactical problems to solve on a map; in the case of 
terrain exercises you are given problems to solve on the ground. (The 
word ''Terrain," means earth, ground.) These are the simplest forms 

' of tactical problems, as you have only one phase of the action, your 
information is always reliable and your imaginary soldiers always do 
just exactly what you want them to do. 

448. War Game. Next comes the war game, which consists of prob- 
lems solved on maps, but you have an opponent who commands the 
enemy — the phases follow one another rapidly and the conditions change 
— your information is not so complete and reliable. However, your men 
being slips of cardboard or beads, they will, as in the case of your 
imaginary soldiers in the map problems and terrain exercises, go where 
you wish them to and do what you tell them to do — they can't misunder- 
stand your instructions and go wrong — they don't straggle and get care- 
less as real soldiers sometimes do. 

Map problems, terrain exercises and war games are but aids to 
maneuvers — their practice makes the maneuvers better; for you thus 
learn the principles of tactics and in the simplest and quickest way. 

449. Maneuvers. In the case of the maneuver the problem is the 
same as in the war game, except that you are dealing with real, live 
men whom you can not control perfectly, and there is, therefore, much 
greater chance for mistakes. 

The Battle. A battle is only a maneuver to which is added great 
physical danger and excitement. 
General rules and principles that must be applied in map problems, 
terrain exercises, the war game and maneuvers 

450. Everything that is done must conform in principle to what 
should be done in battle — otherwise your work is wasted — your ti'me is 
thrown away. 

In solving map problems and in the war game, always form in 
your mind a picture of the ground where the action is supposed to be 
taking place — imagine that you see the enemy, the various hills, streams, 
roads, etc., that he is firing at you, etc. — and don't do anything that you 
would not be able to do if you were really on the ground and really 
in a fight. 

Whether it be a corporal in command of a squad or a general in 
command of an army, in the solution of a tactical problem, whether it 
be a map problem, a terrain exercise, a war game, maneuver or battle, 
he will have to go through the same operation: 

[3911 



451-452 

1st. Estimate the situation; 

2d. Decide what he will do; 

3d. Give the necessary orders to carry out his decision. 

At first these three steps of the operation may appear difficult 
and laborious, but after a little practice the m.ind, which always works 
with rapidity in accustomed channels, performs them with astonishing 
quickness. 

The child beginning the study of arithmetic, for example, is very 
slow in determining the sum of 7 and 8, but later the answer is an- 
nounced almost at sight. The same is true in tactical problems — the 
process may be slow at first, but with a little practice it becomes quick 
and easy. 

451. Estimating the Situation. This is simply '^sizing up the situa- 
tion,'' finding out what you're *'up against," and is always the first 
thing to be done. It is most important, and in doing it the first step 
is to determine your MISSION — ^what you are to do, what you are to 
accomplish — the most important consideration in any military situation. 

Consider next your own forces and that of the enemy — that is, 
his probable strength and how it compares with yours. 

Consider the enemy's probable MISSION^ and what he will 
probably do to accomplish it. 

Consider the geography of the country so far as it affects the 
problem — the valleys to cross, defiles to pass through, shortest road to 
follow, etc. 

Now, consider the different courses open to you with the ad- 
vantages and disadvantages of each. 

You must, of course, in every case know what you're up against 
before you can decide intelligently what you're going to do. 

In making your plan always bear in mind not only your own 
MISSION, but also the general mission of the "command of which you 
form a part, and this is what nine men out of ten forget to do. 

You are now ready to come to a decision, which is nothing more 
or less than a clear, concise determination of what you're going to do 
and how you're going to do it. 

452. The Decision. It is important that you should come to a clear 
and correct decision — that you do so promptly and then execute it vig- 
orously. 

The new Japanese Field Service Eegulations tell us that there 
are two things above all that should be avoided — inaction and hesita- 
tion. ^'To act resolutely even in an erroneous manner is better than 
to remain inactive and irresolute ' ' — that is to say do something. 
Frederick the Great, expressed the same idea in fewer words: ''Don't 
haggle. ' ' 

Having settled on a plan, push it through — don't vacillate, don't 
waver. Make your plan simple. No other has much show. Compli- 
cated plans look well on paper, but in war they seldom work out. They 
require several people to do the right thing at the right time and this 
under conditions of excitement, danger and confusion, and, as a re- 
sult, they generally fail. ' 

^ The word ^^^mission" is used a great deal in this text. By your "mission" is 
meant your business, what you have been told to do, what you are trying to accomplish. 

[392] 



458 

Tlie Order. Having completed your estimate of the situation 
and formed your plan, you are now ready to give the orders necessary 
to carry it out. 

You must first give your subordinates suflScient information of 
the situation and your plan, so that they may clearly understand their 
mission. 

The better everyone understands the whole situation the better 
he can play his part. XJnexpected things are always happening in war — 
a subordinate can act intelligently only if he knows and understands 
what his superior wants to do. 

Always make your instructions definite and positive — vague in- 
structions are sometimes worse than none. 

Your order, your instructions, must be clear, concise and definite 
— everyone should know just exactly what he is to do. 

A Few G-eneral Principles 

453. The man who hunts deer, moose, tigers and lions, is hunting big 
game, but the soldier operating in the enemy's territory is hunting big- 
ger game — he's hunting for human beings — but you want to remember 
that the other fellow is out hunting for you, too; he's out ''gunning" 
for you. So, don't fail to be on the alert, on the look out, all the time, 
if you do he'll ''get the drop" on you. Eemember what Frederick the 
Great said: "It is pardonable to be defeated, but never to be taken by 
surprise. ' ' 

Do not separate your force too much; if you do, you weaken 
yourself — you take the chance of being "defeated in detail" — that is, 
of one part being defeated after another. Eemember the old saying: 
"In union there is strength." Undue extension of your line (a mistake, 
by the way, very often made) is only a form of separation and is 
equally as bad. 

While too much importance can not be attached to the proper 
use of cover, you must not forget that sometimes there are other con- 
siderations that outweigh the advantages of cover. Good sense alone 
can determine. A certain direction of attack, for instance, may afford 
excellent cover but it may be so situated as to^mean ruin if defeated, 
as where it puts an impassable obstacle directly in your rear. And don't 
forget that you should always think in advance of what you would 
do in case of defeat. 

What is it, after all, that gives victory, whether it be armies or 
only squads engaged? It's just simply inflicting on the enemy a loss 
which he will not stand before he can do the same to you. Now, what 
is this loss that he will not stand? What is the loss that will cause 
him to break? Well, it varies; it is subject to many conditions — dif- 
ferent bodies of troops, like different timbers, have different breaking 
points. However, whatever it may be in any particular case it would 
soon come if we could shoot on the battlefield as we do on the target 
range, but we can not approximate it. 

There are many causes tending to drag down our score on the 
battlefield, one of the most potent being the effect of the enemy's 
fire. It is cited as a physiological fact that fear and great excitement 

[393] 



453 (contd.) 

cause the pupil of the eye to dilate and impair accuracy in vision and 
hence of shooting. It is well established that the effectiveness of the 
fire of one side reduced proportionately to the effectiveness of that of- 
the other. 

Bear in mind then these two points — we must get the enemy's 
brealdng point before he gets ours, and the more effective we make our 
fire the less effective will be his. 

Expressed in another way — to win you must gain and keep a 
fire superiority. 

This generally means more rifles in action, yet a fire badly con- 
trolled and directed, though great in volume, may^be less effective than 
a smaller volume better handled. 

The firing line barring a few exceptional cases, then, should be 
as heavy as practicable consistent with the men's free use of their 
rifles. 

This has been found to be about one man to the yard. In this 
way you get volume of fire and the companies do not cover so much 
ground that their commanders lose their power to direct and control. 

If it becomes necessary to hold a line too long for the force 
available, it is then better to keep the men close together and leave gaps 
in the line. The men are so much better controlled, the fire better 
directed, the volume the same, and the gaps are closed by the cross fire 
of parties adjacent. 



[394] 



454 

CHAPTER V 

GENERAL PLAN OF INSTRUCTION IN MAP PROB- 
LEMS FOR NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS AND 
PRIVATES— INSTRUCTION IN DELIVER- 
ING MESSAGES 

(The large wall map to be used for this instruction can be obtained 
from the George Banta Publishing Co., Menasha, Wis., at a cost 
of $1.50.) 

454. The noncommissioned officers and the privates of the squad, sec- 
tion, platoon or company are seated in front of the instructor, who, 
with pointer in hand, is standing near the map on the wall. 

The instructor assumes certain situations and designates various 
noncommissioned officers to take charge t)f squads for the purpose of 
accomplishing certain missions; he places them in different situations, 
and then asks them what they would do. He, or the noncommissioned 
officer designated to perform certain missions, designates certain pri- 
vates to carry messages, watch for signals, take the place of wounded 
noncommissioned officers, etc. For example, the instructor says: '*The 
battalion is marching to Watertown (see Elementary Map in pocket at 
back of book) along this road (indicating road) ; our company forms 
the advance guard; we are now at this point (indicating point). Cor- 
poral Smith, take your squad and reconnoiter the woods on the right 
to see if you can find any trace of the enemy there, and rejoin the 
company as soon as you can. Corporal Jones, be on the lookout for 
any signals that Corporal Smith may make.'' 

Corporal Smith then gives the command, '^1. Forward, 2. 
March,'' and such other commands as may be necessary. 

Instructor: Now, when you reach this point (indicating point), 
what do you see? 

(Corporal Smith holds his rifle horizontally above his head.) 

Corporal Jones: Captain, Corporal Smith signals that he sees a 
small body of the enemy. 

Corporal Smith: Lie down. Range, 700. 1. Ready; 2. AIM; 3. 
Squad; 4. FIRE. 1. Forward; Double time; 2. MARCH, etc. 

The noncommissioned officers and the privates who are thus 
designated to do certain things must use their im^agination as much as 
possible. They must look at the map and imagine that they are right 
on the ground, in the hostile territory; they must imagine that they see 
the streams, hills, woods, roads, etc., represented on the map, and they 
must not do anything that they could not do if in the hostile terri- 
tory, with the assumed conditions actually existing. 

The general idea of this system of instruction is to make the 
noncommissioned officers and the privates think, to make them use com- 
mon sense and initiative in handling men in various situations, in 
getting out of difficulties. By thus putting men on their mettle in the 
presence of their comrades and making them bring into play their com- 
mon sense and their powers of resourcefulness, it is comparatively easy 
to hold the attention of a whofe squad, section, platoon or company, 

[395] 



454 (contd.) 

for those who are not actually taking part in the solution of a particu- 
lar problem are curious to see how those who are taking part will 
answer different questions and do different things — how they will 
''pan out." 

Everything that is said, everything that is done, should, as far 
as practicable, be said and done just as it would be said and done in 
the field. The commands should be actually given, the messages actually 
delivered, the reports actually made, the orders and instructions actually 
given, the signals actually made, etc., just the same as they would be ii 
the operations were real. Of course, sometimes it is not practicable 
to do this, and again at other times it would be advisable not to do so. 
If, for instance, in the solution of a problem there were a great many 
opportunities to give commands to fire, to make signals, to deliver mes- 
sages, etc., and if these things were actually done every time, it would 
not only become tiresome but it would also delay the real work and in- 
struction. Common sense must be used. Just bear this in mind: In the 
solution of map problems the noncommissioned officers and the privates 
are to be given proper and sufficient instruction in giving commands, 
making signals, sending and delivering messages, making reports, etc., 
the instructor using his common sense in deciding what is proper and 
sufficient instruction. In carrying out this feature of the instruction 
it would be done thus, for instance: 

Instead of a platoon leader saying, ''I would give the order for 
the platoon (two, three or four squads) to fire on them," he would 
say, for instance, *'I would then give the command, 'AT LINE OF 
MEN. RANGE, 600. FIRE AT WILL,' and would continue the firing 
as long as necessary." Should the instructor then say, for instance, 
"Very well; the enemy's fire has slackened; what will you do nowt" 
The platoon leader would answer, for instance, "I would signal: 1. 
By squads from the right; 2. RUSH." 

Instead of saying, for instance, "I would advance my squad to 
the top of this hill at double time," the squad leader should say, "I 
would give the command: '1. Forward, double time; 2. MARCH,* and 
upon reaching the top of this hill, I would command, '1. Squad; 2. 
HALT,* cautioning the men to take advantage of cover." 

Instead of saying, "I would signal back that we see the enemy 
in force," the squad leader should take a rifle and make the signal, and 
if a man has been designated to watch for signals, the man would say 
to the captain (or other person for whom he was watching for signals): 
"Captain, Corporal Smith has signaled that he sees the enemy in force." 

Instead of saying, "I would send a message back that there are 
about twenty mounted men just in rear of the Jones' house; they are dis- 
mounted and their horses are being held by horseholders, " say, "Smith, 
go back and tell the captain (or other person) there are about twenty 
mounted men just in rear of the Jones' house. They are dismounted and 
their horses are being held by horseholders. " Private Smith would 
then say to the captain (or other person), "Captain, Corporal Harris 
sends word there are about twenty men just in the rear of the Jones' 
house. They are dismounted and their horses are being held by -horse- 
holders. ' ' 

[396] 



454 (contd.) 

For problems exemplifying this system of instruction, see Par. 509. 

The instruction may be varied a little by testing the squad leaders 
in their knowledge of map reading by asking, from time to time during 
the solution of the problem, such questions as these: 

Captain: Corporal Smith, you are standing on Lone Hill (See Ele- 
mentary Map), facing north. Tell me what you see? 

Corporal: The hill slopes off steeply in front of me, about eighty 
feet down to the bottom land. A spur of the hill runs off on my right 
three-fourths of a mile to the north. Another runs off on my left the 
same distance to the west. Between these two spurs, down in front of 
me, is an almost level valley, extending about a mile to my right front, 
where a hill cuts off my view. To my left front it is level as far as I 
can see. A quarter of a mile in front of me is a big pond, down in the 
valley, and I can trace the course of a stream that drains the pond off 
to the northwest, by the trees along its bank. Just beyond the stream 
a railroad runs northwest along a fill and crosses the stream a mile and 
a half to the northwest, where I can see the roofs of a group of houses. 
A wagon road runs north across the valley, crossing the western spur of 
this hill 600 yards from Lone Hill. It is bordered by trees as far as the 
creek. Another road parallels the railroad, the two roads crossing near 
a large orchard a mile straight to my front. 

Captain: Can you see the Chester Pike where the railroad crosses 
it? 

Corporal: No, sir. 

Captain: Why? 

Corporal: Because the hill '^62/^ about 800 yards from Lone 
Hill, is so high that it cuts off my view in that direction of everything 
closer to the spur *'62'^ than the point in the Salem-Boling road, where 
the private lane runs off east to the Gray house. 

Captain: Sergeant Jones, in which direction does the stream run 
that you see just south of the Twin Hills? 

Sergeant: It runs south through York, because I can see that 
the northern end starts near the head of a valley and goes down into 
the open plain. Also it is indicated by a very narrow line near the 
Twin Hills which becomes gradually wider or heavier the further south 
it goes. Furthermore, the fact that three short branch streams are shown 
joining together and forming one, must naturally mean that the direction 
of flow is towards the one formed by the three. 

Captain: Sergeant Harris does the road from the Mason farm to 
the Welsh farm run up or down hill? 

Sergeant: It does both, sir. It is almost level for the first half 
mile west of the Mason farm; then, as it crosses the contour marked 20 
and a second marked 40, it runs up hill, rising to forty feet above the 
valley, 900 yards east of the Mason farm. Then, as it again crosses a 
contour marked 40 and a second marked 20, it goes down hill to the 
Welsh farm. That portion of the road between the points where it 
crosses the two contours marked 40, is the highest part of the road. It 
crosses this hill in a '^ saddle,^' for both north and south of this summit 
on ther road are^ contours marked 60 and even higher. 

[397] 



454a 

Captain: Corporal Wallace, you are in Salem with a patrol with 
orders to go to Oxford. There is no one to tell you anything about this 
section of the country and you have never been there before. You 
have this map and a compass. What would you do? 

Corporal: I would see from my map and by looking around me 
that Salem is situated at the crossing of two main roads. From the map 
I would see that one leads to Boling and the other was the one to take 
for Oxford. Also, I would see that the one to Boling started due north 
out of Salem and the other, the one I must follow, started due west out 
of Salem. Taking out my compass, I would see in what direction the 
north end of the needle pointed; the road running off in that direction 
would be the one to Boling, so. I would start off west on the other. 

Captain: Suppose you had no compass? 

Corporal: I would look and see on which side of the base of the 
trees the moss grew. That side would be north. Or, in this case, I 
would probably not use a compass even if I had it; for, from the map, I 
know that the road I wish to start off on crosses a railroad track within 
sight of the crossroads and on the opposite side of the crossroads from 
the church shown on the map; also, that the Boling road is level as far 
as I could see on the ground, while the Chester Pike crosses the spur of 
Sandy Eidge, about a half mile out of the village. 

Captain: Go ahead, corporal, and explain how you would follow 
the proper route to Oxford. 

Corporal: I would proceed west on the Chester Pike, knowing I 
would cross a good sized stream, on a stone bridge, about a mile and a 
half out of Salem; then I would pass a crossroad and find a swamp on 
my right, between the road and the stream. About a mile and a half 
from the crossroad I just mentioned, I would cross a railroad track and 
then I would know that at the fork of the roads one-quarter of a mile 
further on I must take the left fork. This road would take me straight 
into Oxford, about a mile and three-quarters beyond the fork. 

Captain: Sergeant Washington, do the contours about a half* 
mile north of the Maxey farm, on the Salem-Boling road, represent a 
hill or a depression? 

Sergeant: They represent a hill, because the inner contour has 
a higher number, 42, than the outer, marked 20. They represent sort of a 
leg-of-mutton shaped hill about 42 feet higher than the surrounding 
low ground. 

Variety and interest may be added to the instruction by assum- 
ing that the squad leader has been killed or wounded and then designate 
some private to command the squad; or that a man has been wounded 
in a certain part of the body and have a soldier actually apply his first 
aid packet; or that a soldier has fainted or been bitten by a rattlesnake 
and have a man actually render him first aid. 

454a. The privates may be given practical instruction in delivering 
messages by giving them messages in one room and having them deliver 
them to someone else in another room. It is a good plan to write out a 
number of messages in advance on slips of paper or on cards, placing 
them in unsealed envelopes. An officer or a noncommissioned officer in 
one room reads one of the messages to a soldier, then seals it in an 

[398] 



454a (contd.) 

envelope and gives it to the soldier to hand to the person in another 
room to whom he is to deliver the message. The latter checks the 
accuracy of the message by means of the written message. Of course, 
this form of instruction should not be given during the solution of map 
problems by the men. (For model messages, see page 51.) 

The same slips or cards may be used any number of times with 
different soldiers. A soldier should never start on his way to deliver a 
message unless he understands thoroughly the message he is to deliver. 



[399] 



455-456-457 

CHAPTER VI 

THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION 

(Based on the Field Service Regulations.) 

PATEOLLING 

455. Patrols are small bodies of infantry or cavalry, from two men 
up to a company or troop, sent out from a command at any time to gain 
information of the enemy and of the country, to drive off small hostile 
bodies, to prevent them from observing the command or for other stated 
objects, such as to blow up a bridge, destroy a railroad track, communi- 
cate or keep in touch with friendly troops, etc. Patrols are named 
according to their objects, reconnoitering, visiting, connecting, exploring, 
flanking patrols, etc. These names are of no importance^ however, 
because the patroPs orders in each case determine its duties. 

456. The size of a patrol depends upon the mission it is to accomplish; • 
if it is to gain information only, it should.be as small as possible, allowing 
two men for each probable message to be sent (this permits you to send 
messages and still have a working patrol remaining) ; if it is to fight, it 
should be strong enough to defeat the probable enemy against it. For 
instance, a patrol of two men might be ordered to examine some high 
ground a few hundred yards off the road. On the other hand, during the 
recent war in Manchuria a Japanese patrol of 50 mounted men, to 
accomplish its mission marched 1,160 miles in the enemy ^s country and 
was out for 62 days. 

457. Patrol Leaders, (a) Patrol leaders, usually noncommissioned 
officers, are selected for their endurance, keen eyesight, ability to think 
quickly and good military judgment. They should be able to read a 
map, make a sketch and send messages that are easily understood. Very 
important patrols are sometimes lead by officers. The leader should 
have a map, watch, field glass, compass, message blank and pencils. 

(b) The ability to lead a patrol correctly without a number of 
detailed orders or instructions, is one of the highest and most valuable 
qualifications of a noncommissioned officer. Since a commander order- 
ing out a patrol can only give general instructions as to what he desires, 
because he cannot possibly forsee just what situations may arise, the 
patrol leader will be forced to use his own judgment to decide on the, 
proper course to pursue when something of importance suddenly occurs. 
He is in sole command on the spot and must make his decisions entirely 
on his own judgment and make them instantly. He has to bear in mind 
first of all his mission — ^what his commander wants him to do. 

Possibly something may occur that should cause the patrol 
leader to undertake an entirely new mission and he must view the new 
situation from the standpoint of a higher commander. 

(c) More battles are lost through lack of information about the 
enemy than from any other cause, and it is the patrols led by noncom- 
missioned officers who must gather almost all of this information. A 
battalion or squadron stands a very good chance for defeating a regi- 

[400] 



458-459-460-461 

ment if the battalion commander knows all about the size, position and 
movements of the regiment and the regimental commander knows but a 
little about the battalion; and this will all depend on how efliciently 
the patrols of the two forces are led by the noncommissioned officers. 

458. Patrols are usually sent out from the advance party of an 
advance guard, the rear party of a rear guard, the outguards of an 
outpost, and the flank (extreme right or left) sections, companies or 
troops of a force in a fight, but they may be sent out from any part 
of a command. 

The commander usually states how strong a patrol shall be. 

459. Orders or Instructions — (a) The orders or instructions for a 
patrol must state clearly whenever possible: 

1. Where the enemy is or is supposed to be. 

2. Where friendly patrols or detachments are apt to be seen or 
encountered and what the plans are for the body from which the patrol 
is sent out. 

3. What object the patrol is sent out to accomplish; what informa- 
tion is desired; what features are of especial importance; the general 
direction to be followed and how long to stay out in case the enemy is 
not met. 

4. Where reports are to be sent. 

(b) It often happens that, in the hurry and excitement of a sudden 
encounter or other situation, thei^e is no time or opportunity to give a 
patrol leader anything but the briefest instructions, such as ^'Take 
three men, corporal, and locate their (the enemy's) right flank.'' Iil 
such a case the patrol leader through his knowledge of the general 
principles of patrolling, comibined with the exercise of his common 
sense, must determine for himself just what his commander wishes 
him to do. 

460. Inspection of a Patrol Befo;:e Departure. Whenever there is 
time and conditions permit, which most frequently is not the case, a 
patrol leader carefully inspects his men to see that they are in good 
physical condition; that they have the proper equipment, ammunition 
and ration; that their canteens are full, their horses (if mounted) are 
in good condition, not of a conspicuous color and not given to neighing, 
and that there is nothing about the equipment to rattle or glisten. The 
patrol leader should also see that the men have nothing with them (maps, 
orders, letters, newspapers, etc.) that, if captured, would give the enemy 
valuable information. This is a more important inspection than that 
regarding the condition of the equipment. 

Whenever possible the men for a, partol should be selected for 
their trustworthiness, experience and knack of finding their way in a 
strange country. 

461. Preparing a Patrci for the Start. The patrol leader having 
received his orders and having asked questions about aiiything he 
does not fully understand, makes his estimate of the situation (See Par. 
451). He then selects the number of men he needs, if this has been left 
to him, inspects them and carefully explains to them the orders he has 
received and how he intends to carry out these orders, making sure the 
men understand the mission of the patrol. He names some prominent 

[401] 



461a-462 



llllL^Yl t'^^/O'^te they are going to follow where every one will 
hasten if the patrol should become scattered. 

Ynrlr rs«J V^!:^'^^V ^T i^.^^'^^^y company has arrived at the town of 
R iL^fr ^^^^^^^t^^y M^P)- Captain A, at 2 P. M., calls up Corporal 
B and three men of his squad. ^ 

n.f..^^*xT*i?- "*■• Corporal hostile infantry is reported to be at 
Oxford. Nothing else has been heard of the enemy. The company 
remains here tonight. You will take these three men and reconnoiter 
about two miles north along this road (indicates the Valley Pike) for 
signs of a hostile advance in this direction. ^ 

Stay out until dusk. 

county toK*' ^ ^^^ ^^^"^ ^^°* ""* *^^* ^"^^ ^P°^°*' ^^'* ^^"""S the 
Send messages here. Do you understand? 

r,^t„- ^fP*"^^^^ ^- .J^!l ^'"'5 ^ ^"^ to— (here he practically repeats 
Captain A 's orders the three men listening). Is Corporal C to cover that 
hill (points toward Twin Hills)? f v lo i,uver xnat 

Captain A: No; you must cover tliat ground. Move out at 

?hev'h3°tf •■ ^^'"^'''' ^ '^''''^'y S^^^-^^^ ^* ^^« ">«° and sees tha 
tney have their proper equipment.) 

will rr.f^J^r^^^/l''-,?'^ "".^"^^ ^""^ ^^^""'^ tJ^e captain's orders. We 
1 Un /°' ^''f ^'" ^1°'°*' *'' '^^^'^ Hills). Jones, I want you to 
go 150 yards in advance of me; Williams, follow me at 100 yards; Sth 
you 11 stay with me. Jones, you'll leave this road after crossinTthe 

to be on the alert and watch me every minute for signals. In case we 
become scattered, make for that hill (points to Twin Hills) 

^.n V f Ik ^""^l' ,. Corporal, shall I keep 150 yards from you or will 
you keep the correct distance? •' 

Jones. *'°''*'°''^^ ^= ^""^ ^''^P ^^^ <=0''>-eet distance from me. Forward, 

i,o„ fj^^' rr""^®' ^^\P*^'°' .leader makes all these preparations if he 
has time; but, as we have said before, there will be a great many occa 
sions when he is required to start out so promptly that he wiH not have 
any time for the inspection described and he will have to make an 

H^/Ti' ^""f "^-"'^ '"^'^ '^"''^^ ^'^^ "« ^y«^ and ears opln all the 
time. Before leaving an outpost position or other place to which it is 

Luld «„"' ^l"" n*''^ commander should " co-ordinate " hTmself-he 
,W^if .1,^"^ ^? " ^'^^ '■^'P^'^* t" certain mountains, high build 
ings and other prominent objects, and after the patrol has left he should 
l^lfr/rn™^ l""™ his head around and see what the starting Lint looks 
dScuU^ "" """ ''■ ^'^^ ^"' "^^'P ^^"^ *° fl'^d his way L^ck without 
THE PRINCIPLES OF PATROLLING 
462. Paragraphs 462 to 507 describe the methods of leadino- a Datrol 
the points a patrol leader should fully understand. ?n other words th^; 

[402] ' ^ 



463 

state the principles of patrolling. When you first study this chapter, 
simply read over these principles without trying to memorize any of them. 
Whenever one of the principles is applied in the solution of any of the 
problems on patrolling given in this book you will generally find the 
number of the paragraph which states that principle enclosed in 
brackets. Turn back and study the paragraph referred to until you 
thoroughly understand its meaning and you feel sure that you know 
how to apply that principle whenever the occasion might arise in actual 
patrolling. Try to impress its common sense meaning (never the mere 
words) on your mind, so that when a situation arises requiring the sort 
of action indicated in the principle, YOU WILL NOT FAIL TO 
RECOGNIZE IT. 

463. Formation of Patrols, (a) Figure 1 gives some examples of 
various ways of forming patrols. These are merely examples for the 
purpose of giving a general idea of the arrangement of the men. In 
practice common sense must dictate to the patrol leader the best forma- 
tion in each case. 



2 Men 



B 3 Men 




D * 4 Men 



O ' • 




6 Men 







L \ Sqijadl 



2 Sq^iiads \ 




Passing 
a de-file 



\Pas5in(j 
I a wood 



\\ S<}uad 



2 Squads, 



/% Mer 



) S^uad 



Figure I 

O - PATROL LEADER 
• = MEN 

WIDTH OF ROADS 
EXAGGERATED 



464-465-466-467 



(b) In very small patrols the leader is usually in advance where 
he can easily lead the patrol, though not always (See E, Figure 1.) The 
distance between men depends upon the character of the country and the 
situation. In L, Figure 1, it might be anywhere from 150 to 400 yards 
from the leading man to the last, the distance being greater in level or 
open country. Some such formation ~ as G, Figure 1, could be used in 
going through high brush, woods, or over very open country. 

^ (c) The men must be so arranged that each man will be within 
signaling distance of some member of the patrol and the escape of at 
least one man, in case of surprise, is certain. 

It must be remembered that the patrol may have to march a long 
distance before it is expected that the enemy will be encountered, or it 
may have a mission that requires it to hurry to some distant point 
through very dangerous country. In such cases the patrol will probably 
have to follow the road in order to make the necessary speed, and it 
will not be possible for flankers to keep up thi's rate marching off the 
road. The formation in such cases would be something like those shown 
m F, H and O. 

Marching off the road is always slow work,* so when rapidity 
IS essential, some safe formation for road travel is necessary, as in F 
L and O. j i j 

If, from the road the country for, say one-half mile on each side, 
can be seen, there is absolutely no use in sending out flankers a few 
hundred yards from the road. Use common sense. 

464. Bate of March, (a) Patrols should advance quickly and quietly 
be vigilant and make all practicable use of cover. If rapid marching is 
necessary to accomplish the mission, then little attention can be paid 
to cover. - ^ 

(b) Eeturning patrols, near their own lines, march at a walk, unless 
pressed by the enemy. A patrol should not, if possible, return over its 
outgoing route, as the enemy may have observed it and be watching 
for its return. ^ 

465.^ Halts. A patrol should be halted once every hour for about 
ten minutes, to allow the men to rest and relieve themselves. Whenever 
a halt is made one or two members of the patrol must advance a short 
distance ahead and keep a sharp lookout to the front and flanks 

466. Action Upon Meeting Hostile Patrol. If a patrol should see a 
hostile patrol, it is generally best to hide and let it go by, and afterwards 
loo^k out tor and capture any messenger that may be sent back from it 
with messages for the main body. And when sent back yourself with 
a message, be careful that the enemy does not play this trick on you— 
always keep your ears and eyes open. 

467. Scattered Patrols. A scattered patrol reassembles at some point 
previously selected; if checked in one direction, it takes another: if cut 
off It returns by a detour or forces its way through. As a last resort it 
scatters, so that at least one man may return with information 

Occasionally it is advisable for the leader to conceal his patrol 
and continue the reconnaissance with one or two men; in case of cavalry 
the leader and men thus detached should be well mounted. If no point 
of assembly was previously agreed upon, it is a good general rule to 
reassemble, if possible, at the last resting place 

[404] 



468-469-470-471-472-473 

468. Return by Different Route. A patrol should always make it a 
rule to return by a different route, as this may avoid its being cap- 
tured by some of the enemy who saw it going out and are lying in wait 
for it. 

469. Guard Against Being Cut Off. When out patrolling always 
guard against being cut off. Always assume that any place that affords 
good cover is held by the enemy until you know that it is not, and be 
careful not to advance beyond it without first reconnoitering it; for, if 
you do, you may find yourself cut off when you try to return. 

470. Night Work. Patrols far from their commands or in contact 
with the enemy, often remain out over night. In such cases they seek a 
place of concealment unknown to the inhabitants, proceeding thereto 
after nightfall or under cover. Opportunities for watering, feeding and 
rest must not be neglected, for there is no assurance that further oppor- 
tunities will present themselves. When necessary the leader provides 
for subsistence by demand or purchase. 

471. Civilians: In questioning civilians care must be taken not to 
disclose information that may be of value to the enemy. Strangers must 
not be allowed to go ahead of the patrol, as they might give the enemy 
notice of its approach. Patrol leaders are authorized to seize telegrams 
and mail matter, and to arrest individuals, reporting the facts as soon 
as possible. 

472. Patrol Fighting, (a) A patrol sent out for information never 
fights unless it can only get its information by fighting or is forced 
to fight in order to escape. This principle is the one most frequently 
violated by patrol leaders, particularly in peace maneuvers. They forget 
their mission — the thing their commander sent them out to do — and 
begin fighting, thus doing harm and accomplishing no important results. 

(b) A patrol sent out to drive off hostile detachments has to fight 
to accomplish its mission. Sometimes a patrol has orders both to gain 
information and to drive back hostile patrols. In this case it may be 
proper to avoid a fight at one moment and to seek a fight at another. 
The patrol leader must always think of his mission when deciding on 
the proper course to follow, and then use common sense. 

473. Signals. The following should be clearly understood by mem- 
bers of a patrol: 

Enemy in sight in small numbers: Hold the rifle above the head 
horizontally. 

Enemy in force: Same as preceding, raising and lowering the 
rifle several times. 

Take cover: A downward motion of the hand. 

Other signals may be agreed upon before starting, but they must 
be simple and familiar to the men; complicated signals must be avoided. 
Signals must be used cautiously, so as not to convey information to the 
enemy. 

The patrol leader should see that all his men thoroughly under- 
stand that whenever they are away from the center of the patrol they 
must look to the nearest man for signals at least once every minute. It 
should never be necessary for the patrol leader to call to a man in order 
to get his attention. All movements of men at a distance should be 

[405] 



474 (contd.) 

regulated by signals and the men should constantly be on the lookout 
for these signals. 

474. Messages, (a) The most skillful patrol leading is useless unless 
the leader fully understands when to send a message and how to write it. 

(b) A message, whether written or verbal, should be short and clear, 
reseml3ling a telegram. If it is a long account it will take too much 
time to write, be easily misunderstood, and if verbal, the messenger will 
usually forget parts of it and confuse the remainder. 

(c) Always state when and where things are seen or reported. If 
haste is required, do not use up valuable moments writing down the 
day of the month, etc. These data are essential as a matter of future 
record for formal telegrams and should be put in patrol messages only 
when time is abundant, but never slight the essential points of informa- 
tion that will give valuable help to your chief. Always try to put your- 
self in his place — not seeing what you see and read your message — and 
then ask yourself. What will he want to know? 

(d) The exact location of the enemy should be stated; whether 
deployed, marching or in camp, his strength, arm of the service (cavalry, 
infantry or artillery), and any other detail that you think would be 
valuable information for your chief. In giving your location do not 
refer to houses, streets, etc., that your chief in the rear has no knowledge 
of. Give your direction and distance from some point he knows of or, if 
you have a map like his, you can give your map location. 

(e) Be sure your message is accurate. This does not mean that 
something told you should not be reported, but it should be reported, 
not as a fact, but as it is — a statement by somebody else. It is well to 
add any information about your informant,* such as his apparent 
honesty, the probability of his having correct information, etc.— this 
may help your chief. 

(f) A message should always end with a short statement of what 
you are going to do next. For example: ''Will remain in observation,'' 
**Will continue north," ''Will work around to their rear,'' etc. Time 
permitting, the bearer of a verbal message should always be required 
to repeat it before leaving. 

(g) The following is a reproduction of a message blank used in field 
service. The instructions on the envelope are also given. A patrol 
leader will usually be furnished with a pad of these blanks: 



[406] 







474 (contd.) 


U. S. ARMY FIELD MESSAGE 


No. 


Sent by Time Rec'd by Time Check 
[These spaces for Signal Operators only) 


Communicated by 

Buzzer, Phone, Telegraph, 
Wireless, Lantern, Helio, 
Flag, Cyclist, Foot Messen- 
ger, Mounted Messenger. 

Underscore means used 


From 
At .... 


(Name of sending detachment) 
(Location of sending detachment) 


Date.. 


Hour No - 


To 














Received « - - - - 




1 



The lieading "From" is filled in with the name of the detachment sending the 
information; as "Officer's Patrol, 7th Cav." Messages sent on the same day from the 
same source to the same person are numbered consecutively. The address is written 
briefly; thus, "Com^manding Officer, Outpost, 1st Brigade." In the signature the ' 
writers surname only and rank are given. 

This blank is four and a half by eight inches, including the margin on the left 
for binding. The back is ruled in squares and provided with scales for use in making 
simple sketches explanatory of the message. It is issued by the Signal Corps irt 
blocks of forty with duplicating sheets. The regulation envelope is three by five and 
one fourth inches and is printed as follows: 

U. S. ARMY FIELD MESSAGE 



To. 



When sent 



Rate of speed -. 

Name of Messenger 

When and by whom rec'd . 



No 

(For Signal operators only) 
- _....J\ro 



THIS ENVELOPE WILL BE RETURNED TO BEARER 

MODEL MESSAGES 

1. Verbal. ''Four hostile infantrymen one mile north of our camp, 
moving south. I will continue north. ^' 

2. Verbal. "About one hundred hostile infantrymen two miles 
north of our camp at two o ^clock, marching south. Will observe them. ' ' 

[407] 



474 (contd.) 

3. Verbal. ''Long column of troops marching west in Sandy Creek 
Valley at two o'clock. Will report details later.'' 

4. Verbal. ''Just fired on by cavalry patrol near Baker's Pond. 
Will work to their rear." 

5. Written. Patrol from Support No. 2, 

Lone Hill, 
26 Mch. 11, 8-15 A. M., No. 1. 
C. O., 

Support No. 2. 

See hostile troop of cavalry halted at x-roads, one mile S. of our 
outguards. Nothing else in sight. Will remain here in observation. 

James, 
Corporal. 

6. V/ritten (very hurriedly). Lone Hill, 8-30, No. 2. 
C. O., 

Support No. 2. 

Column of about 300 hostile cavalry trotting north towards hostile 
troop of cavalry now halted at x-roads one mile south of our outguards. 
Will remain here. 

James, 

Cpl. 

7. Written. Patrol from 5th Inf., 

S. E. corner Boling Woods, 
3 Apl. 11, 2-10 P. M., No. 2. 

Adjutant; 

5th Inf., near Baker House. 
Extreme right of hostile line ends at R. R. cut N. E. of BAKER'S 
POND. Entrenchments run S. from cut along crest of ridge. Line 
appears to be strongly held. Can. see no troops in rear of line. Will 
reconnoiter their rear. 

Smith, 
Sergeant. 

8. Written (from cavalry patrol far to front). 

Patrol from Tr. B, 7th Cav., 

Boling, 
14 June, 12, 10 A. M., No. 3. 

To C. O., 

Tr. B, 7th Cav., 

S. on Chester Pike. 
No traces of enemy up to this point. Telegraph operator here 
reports wires running north from Boling were cut somewhere at 8-30 
A. M. Inhabitants appear friendly. Will proceed north. 

Jones, 
Sergeant. 

r408] 



474a 

9. Written (from , cavalry patrol far to front). 

Patrol from Tr. B, Tth Cav., 

Oxford, 
8 July, 12, 10-15 A. M., No. 2. 
To C. O., 

1st Sq. Tth Cav., 

On Valley Pike, S. of York. 
Bearer has canteen found in road here, marked '^85 CAV. — III 
CORPS. ^' Inhabitants say no enemy seen here. They appear hostile 
and unreliable. No telegraph operator or records remain here. Roads 
good macadam. Water and haystacks plentiful. Will move rapidly 
on towards CHESTER. 

Lewis, 
Sergeant. 

Patrol from Support No. 3, 
On Ry. % mi. N. of County Road, 

2 Aug. 12, 9-15 P. M., No. 1. 
C. O., 

Support No. 2, 

Near Maxey House. 
R. R. crosses creek here on 80-foot steel trestle. Hostile detach- 
ment is posted at N. end. Strength unknown. Creek 5 ft. deep by 
60 ft. wide, with steep banks, 5 ft. high. Flows through meadow land. 
Scattered trees along banks. R. R. approaches each end of trestle on 
10-foot fill. R. R. switch to N. E. 700 yds. S. of bridge. (See sketch on 
back.) I will cross creek to N. of bridge. 

Brown, 
Corporal. 

474a. A message should be sent as soon as the enemy is first seen 
or reported. Of course, if the enemy is actually known to be in the 
vicinity and his patrols have been seen, etc., you must by all means 
avoid wasting your men by sending them back with information about 
small hostile patrols or other things you know your chief is already 
aware of and did not specifically tell you to hunt for. 

If you have properly determined in your own mind what your 
mission is then you will have no trouble in deciding when to send mes- 
sages. For example, suppose your orders are ''To reconnoiter along that 
ridge and determine if the enemy is present in strength, ^^ and you sight 
a patrol of eight men. You would waste no time or men sending back 
any message about the patrol, for your mission is to find out if strong 
Jbodies of the enemy are about. But suppose that while working under 
the above orders you located a hostile battalion of infantry — a large 
body of troops. In this case you would surely send a detailed message, 
as your mission is to determine if the enemy was present in strength. 

Again, suppose that while moving towards the ridge indicated 
by your chief in his orders, you saw his force suddenly and heavily 
fired on from a new and apparently unexpected quarter, not a great 
distance from you, but not on the ridge referred to. You know or 
believe none of your patrols are out in that neighborhood. In this case 

[409] 



475 

you should realize instantly, without any order, that your mission had 
changed and you should hasten to discover the size and position of this 
new enemy and send the information back to your chief, first notifying 
him of your intended change of direction. 

Never forget your mission in the excitement of leading your 
own little force. 

Absence of the Enemy. It is frequently just as important to 
send a message to your chief that the enemy is not in a certain locality 
as it is to report his actual whereabouts. You must determine from your 
mission when this is the case. For example, if you were ordered **To 
patrol beyond that woods and see if any hostile columns are movitig in 
that direction,'' and on reaching the far side of the woods you had a 
good view of the country for some distance beyond, it would be very 
important to send a message back telling your chief that you could see, 
say, one-half mile beyond the woods and there was no enemy in sight. 
This information would be of the greatest importance to him. He 
might feel free to move troops immediately from that vicinity to some 
more dangerous place. You would then continue your reconnaissance 
further to the front. 

Suggestions for Gaining Information About the Enemy 
475. Enemy on the March. (a) The patrol should observe the 
march of the column from a concealed position that hostile patrols or 
flankers are not apt to search (avoid conspicuous places). Always try to 
discover if one hostile detachment is followed by another — if what can 
be seen appears to be an advance guard of a larger body not yet in 
view. The distance between the detachments, their relative size, etc., 
is always important. 

(b) Estimating Strength of Column. The strength of a column 
may be estimated from the length of time it takes to pass a selected 
point. As infantry in column of squads occupies half a yard per man, 
cavalry one yard per horse and artillery in single file twenty yards per 
gun or caisson (ammunition wagon), a selected point would be passed 
in one minute by 175 infantry; 110 cavalry (at a walk); 200 cavalry 
at a trot and 5 guns or caissons. If marching in columns of twos, take 
one-half of the above figures. 

(c) Dust. The direction of march, strength and composition 
(infantry, cavalry or artillery) of a column can be closely estimated 
from the length and character of the cloud of dust that it makes. Dust 
from infantry hangs low; from cavalry it is higher, disperses more 
quickly, and, if the cavalry moves rapidly, the upper part of the cloud 
is thinner; from artillery and wagons, "Tt is of unequal height and dis- 
connected. The effect of the wind blowing the dust must be considered. 

(d) Trail of Column. Evenly trodden ground indicates infantry; 
prints of horseshoes mean cavalry and deep and wide wheel tracks 
indicate artillery. If the trail is fresh, the column passed recently; if 
narrow, the troops felt secure and were marching in column of route; 
if broad they expected an action and were prepared to deploy. A 
retreating army makes a broad trail across fields, especially at the start. 

Always remember that the smallest or most insignificant things, 
such as the number of a regiment or a discarded canteen or collar orna- 

[410] 



476-477-478 

ment, may give the most valuable information to a higher commander. 
For example, the markings on a discarded canteen or knapsack might 
prove to a general commanding an army that a certain hostile division, 
corps, or other force was in front of him v^hen he thought it had not 
been sent into the field. The markings on the canteen would convey 
little or no meaning to the patrol leader, but if he realized his duty he 
would take care to report the facts. Cavalry patrols working far ahead 
of the foot troops should be most careful to observe and report? on such 
details. 

(e) Reflection of Weapons. If brilliant, the troops are marching 
toward you, otherwise they are probably marching away from you. 

Enemy in Position, (a) If an outpost line, the patrol locates the 
line of sentinels, their positions, the location and strength of the out- 
guards and, as far as possible, all troops in rear. The location of the 
flanks of the line, whether in a strong or weak position, is of the utmost 
importance. Places where the line may be most easily penetrated should 
be searched for and the strength and routes of the hostile patrols 
observed. 

As outposts are usually changed at dawn this is the best time to 
reconnoiter their positions. 

(b) A hostile line of battle is usually hard to approach, but its 
extent, where the flanks rest and whether or not other troops are in 
rear of these flanks, should be most carefully determined. 

Information as to the flanks of any force, the character of the 
country on each flank, etc., is always of the greatest importance, because 
the flanks are the weakest portions of a line. In attacking an enemy an 
effort is almost, always made to bring the heaviest fire or blow to bear 
on one of his flanks. Naturally all information about this most vulner- 
able part of an enemy is of great importance. 

476. Prisoners. When a patrol is ordered to secure prisoners they 
should be questioned as soon as captured, while still excited and their 
replies can in a way be verified. Their answers should be written down 
(unknown to them) and sent back with them as a check on what they 
may say on second thought. 

Prisoners should always be questioned as to the following points: 
What regiment, brigade, division, etc., they belong to; how long they 
have been in position, on the march, etc.; how much sickness in their 
organization; whether their rations are satisfactory; who commands their 
troops, etc. Always try to make the prisoners think the questions are 
asked out of mere curiosity. 

477. Camp Noises. The rumble of vehicles, cracking of wMps, neigh- 
ing of horses, braying of mules and barking of dogs often indicate the 
arrival or departure of troops. If the noise remains in the same place 
and new fires are lighted, it is probable that reenforcements have arrived. 
If the noise grows more indistinct, the troops are probably withdrawing. 
If, added to this, the fires appear to be dying out, and the enemy seems 
to redouble the vigilance of the outposts, the indications of retreat are 
strong. 

478. Abandoned Camps, (a) Indications are found in the remains of 
camp fires. They will show, by their degree of freshness, whether much 

[411] 



479-480 

or little time elapsed since the enemy left the place, and the quantity of 
cinders will give an indication of the length of time he occupied it. They 
will also furnish a means of estimating his force approximately, ten men 
being allowed to each fire. 

(b) Other valuable indications in regard to the length of time the 
position was occupied and the time when it was abandoned may be found 
in the evidence of care or haste in the construction of huts or shelters, 
and in the freshness of straw, grain, dung or the entrails of slaughtered 
animals. Abandoned clothing, equipments or harness will give a clue to 
the arms and regiments composing a retreating force. Dead horses 
lying about, broken weapons, discarded knapsacks, abandoned and 
broken-down wagons, etc., are indications of the fatigue and demorali- 
zation of the command. Bloody bandages lying about, and many fresh 
graves, are evidences that the enemy is heavily burdened with wounded 
or sick. 

479. Flames or Smoke. If at night the flames of an enemy ^s camp 
fires disappear and reappear, something is moving between the observer 
and the fires. If smoke as well as fiame is visible, the fires are very 
near. If the fires are very numerous and lighted successively, and if 
soon after being lighted they go out it is probable the enemy is preparing 
a retreat and trying to deceive us. If the . fires burn brightly and 
clearly at a late hour, the enemy has probably gone, and has left a 
detachment to keep the fires burning. If, at an unusual time, much 
smoke is seen ascending from an enemy ^s camp, it is probable that he is 
engaged in cooking preparatory to moving off. 

If lines of smoke are seen rising at several points along a railway 
line in the enemy ^s rear, it may be surmised that the railroad is being 
destroyed by burning the crossties, and that a retreat is planned. 

480. Limits of vision, (a) On a clear day a man with good vision 
can see: 

At a distance of 9 to 12 miles, church spires and towers; 
At a distance of 5 to 7 miles, windmills; 
At a distance of 2 to 2% miles, chimneys of light color; 
At a distance of 2,000 yards, trunks of large trees; 
At a distance of 1,000 yards, single posts; 

At 500 yards the panes of glass may be distinguished in a 
window. 

(b) Troops are visible at 2,000 yards, at which distance a mounted 
man looks like a mere speck; at 1.200 yards infantry caii be distinguished 
from cavalry; at 1,000 yards a line of men looks like a broad belt; at 600 
yards the files of a squad can be counted, and at 400 yards the move- 
ments of the arms and legs can be plainly seen. 

(c) The larger, brighter or better lighted an object is, the nearer it 
seems. An object seems nearer when it has a dark background than 
when it has a light one, and closer to the observer when the air is clear 
than when it is raining, snowing, foggy or the atmosphere is filled with 
smoke. An object looks farther off when the observer is facing the sun 
than when he has his back to it. A smooth expanse of snow, grain fields 
or water makes distances seem shorter than they really are. 

[4123 



481-482-483-484-485-486-487-488 
Suggestions for the Reconnaissance of Various Positions and Localities 

481. Cross roads should be reconnoitered in each direction for a dis- 
tance depending on how rapidly the patrol must continue on, how far 
from the main road the first turn or high point is, etc. The main body 
of the patrol usually remains halted near the crossroads, while flankers 
do the reconnoitering. 

482. Heights. In reconnoitering a height, if the patrol is large enough 
to admit of detaching them, one or two men climb the slope on either 
flank, keeping in sight of the patrol, if possible. In any case, one man 
moves cautiously up the hill, followed by the others in the file at such 
distance that each keeps his predecessor in view. 

483. Defiles. On approaching a defile, if time permits, the heights on 
either side are reconnoitered by flankers before the patrol enters. If the 
heights are inaccessible or time is urgent, the patrol passes through, in 
single file at double time. The same method is adopted in reconnoitering 
a railroad cut or sunken road. 

484. Bridges and Fords. At a bridge or ford, the front of the patrol 
is contracted so as to bring all the men to the passage. The leading 
patrolers cross first and reconnoiter the far side to prevent the possibility 
of the enemy surprising the main body of the patrol as it is crossing 
the bridge. The patrol then crosses rapidly, and takes up a proper 
formation. A bridge is first examined to see that it is safe and has 
not been tampered with by the enemy. 

485. Woods. The patrol enters a wood in skirmishing order^ the 
intervals being as great as may be consistent with mutual observation 
and support on the part of the members of the patrol. On arriving at the 
farther edge of the wood, the patrol remains concealed and carefully 
looks about before passing out to open ground. When there is such a 
growth of underbrush as to make this method impracticable, and it is 
necessary to enter a wood by a road, the road is reconnoitered as in 
case of defile, though not usually at double time. 

486. Enclosures. In reconnoitering an enclosure, such as a garden, 
park or cemetery, the leading patrolers first examine the exterior, to 
make sure that the enemy is not concealed behind one of the faces of 
the enclosure. They then proceed to examine the interior. Great care 
is taken in reconnoitering and entering an enclosure to avoid being 
caught in a confined or restricted space by the enemy. 

487. Positions. In approaching a position, but one man advances 
(one is less liable to be detected than two or more), and he crawls 
cautiously toward the crest of the hill or edge of the wood or opening 
of the defile, while the others remain concealed in the rear until he 
signals them to advance. 

488. Houses. When a house is approached by a patrol, it is first 
reconnoitered from a distance, and if nothing suspicious is seen, it is 
then approached by one or two men, the rest of the party remaining 
concealed in observation. If the patrol is large enough to admit of it, 
four men approach the house, so as to examine the front and back 
entrances at the same time. Only one man enters the door, the others 
remaining outside to give the alarm, should a party of the enemy be 
eoppe^jed in the house. The patrol does not remain in the vicinity of 

[413] 



489 

the house any longer than-necessary, as information relative to its num- 
bers and movements might be given to the enemy, if a hostile party 
should subsequently visit the place. Farmhouses are searched for news- 
papers and the inhabitants questiv.^ned. If necessary to go up to a 
building, v^'ood or hill, where an enemy is likely to be concealed, run 
for the last couple of hundred yards, having your rifle ready for instant 
use, and make for some point that will afford you cover when you get 
close up. In the case of a building, for instance, you would make for 
one of the corners. Such a maneuver would probably be disconcerting 
to anyone who might be lying in wait for you, and would be quite likely 
to cause them to show themselves sooner than they intended, and thus 
give you a chance to turn around and get away. If they fired on you 
while you were approaching at a run, they would not be very likely to 
hit you. "^ 

489. Villages, (a) In approaching a small village one or two men 
are sent in to reconnoiter and one around each flank, but the main body 
does not enter until the scouts have reported. In small patrols of three" 
to six men so much dispersion is not safe and only one section of the 
village can be reconnoitered at a time. 

(b) If the presence of the enemy is not apparent, the patrol enters 
the village. A suitable formation would be in single file at proper dis- 
tance, each man being on the opposite side of the street from his prede- 
cessor, thus presenting a more difficult target for hostile fire and enabling 
the men to watch all windows. 

(c) If the patrol is strong enough, it seizes the postoffice, telegraph 
oflice and railroad stations, and secures all important papers, such as files 
of telegrams sent and received, instructions to postmasters, orders of 
town mayor, etc., that may be there. If the patrol is part of the advance 
guard, it seizes the mayor and postmaster of the place and turns them 
over to the commander of the vanguard with the papers seized. 

(d) While searching a village sentinels are placed at points of depar- 
ture to prevent any of the inhabitants from leaving. Tall buildings and 
steeples are ascended and an extensive view of the surrounding country 
obtained. 

(e) At night a village is more cautiously approached by a small 
party than by day. The patrol glides through back alleys, across gardens, 
etc., rather than along the main street. If there are no signs of the 
enemy, it makes inquiry. If no light is seen, and it seems imprudent 
to rouse any of the people, the patrol watches and captures one of the 
inhabitants, and gets from him such information as he may possess. 

(f) The best time for the patrol to approach a village it at early 
dawn, when it is light enough to see, but before the inhabitants are up. 
It is dangerous in the extreme for a small patrol to enter a village 
unless it is certain that it is not occupied by the enemy, for the men 
could be shot down by fire from the windows, cellarways, etc., or 
entrapped and captured. As a rule large towns and cities are Jiot 
entered by small patrols, but are watched from the outside, as a small 
force c^n not effectively reconnoiter and protect itself in such a place. 



[414] 



490-491-492-493-494-495-496-497-498-499-500-501-502 

Facts Which Should Be Obtained by Patrols Regarding 
Certain Objects 

490. Roads. Their direction, their nature (macadamized, corduroy, 
plank, dirt, etc.), their condition of repair, their grade, the nature of 
crossroads, and the points where they leave the main roads; their 
borders (woods, hedges, fences or ditches), the places at which they 
pass through defiles, cross heights or rivers, and where they intersect 
railroads, their breadth (whether suitable for column of fours or 
platoons, etc.). v 

491. Railroads. Their direction, gauge, the number of tracks, sta- 
tions and junctions, their grade, the length and height of the cuts, 
embankments and tunnels. 

492. Bridges. Their position^ their width and length, their con- 
struction (trestle, girder, etc.), material (wood, brick, stone or iron), 
the roads and approaches on each bank. 

493. Rivers and Other Streams. Their direction, width and depth, 
the rapidity of the current, liability to sudden rises and the highest and 
lowest points reached by the water, as indicated by drift wood, etc., fords, 
the nature of the banks, kinds, position and number of islands at suitable 
points of passage, heights in the vicinity and their command over the 
the banks. 

494. Woods. Their situation, extent and shape; whether clear or 
containing underbrush^ the number and extent of ''clearings" (open 
spaces); whether cut up by ravines or containing marshes^ etc.; nature 
of roads passing through them. 

495. Canals. Their direction, width and depth; condition of tow- 
paths; locks and means of protecting or destroying them. 

496. Telegraphs. Whether they follow railroads or common roads; 
stations, number of wires. 

497. Villages. Their situation (on a height, in a valley , or on a 
plain); nature of the surrounding country; construction of the houses, 
nature (straight or crooked) and width of streets; means' of defense. 

498. Defiles. Their direction; whether straight or crooked; whether 
heights on either side are accessible or inaccessible; nature of ground at 
each extremity; width (frontage of column that can pass through). 

499. Ponds and Marshes. Means of crossing; ' defensive use that 
might be made of them as obstacles against enemy; whether the marshy 
grounds are practicable for any or all arms. 

500. Springs and Rivulets. Nature of approaches; whether water is 
drinkable and abundant. 

501. Valleys. Extent and nature; towns, villages, hamlets, streams, 
roads and paths therein; obstacles offered by or in the valley, to the 
movement of troops. 

602. Heights. Whether slopes are easy or steep; whether g'ood 
defensive positions are offered; whether plateau is wide or narrow; 
whether passages are easy or difficult; whether the ground is broken ot 
smooth, wooded or clear. 

[415] 



503-504-505-506-507-508 

Suggestions for Patrols Employed in Executing Demolition 
(Destruction or blocking of bridges, railroads, etc.) 

503. Patrols never execute any demolition unless specifically ordered 
to do so. Demolition may be of two dija^erent characters: Temporary 
demolition, such as cutting telegraph wires in but a few places or merely 
burning the flooring of bridges, removing a few rails from a track, etc., 
and permanent demolition, such as cutting down an entire telegraph line, 
completely destroying bridges, blowing in tunnels, etc. Only temporary 
demolition will be dealt with in this book. ^ 

504. Telegraph Line. To temporarily disable telegraph lines, connect 
up different wires close to the glass insulators, wrap a wire around all 
the wires and bury its ends in the ground (this grounds or short circuits 
the wire), or cut all the wires in one or two places. 

505. Railroads. To temporarily disable railroads remove the fish 
plates (the plates that join the rails together at the ends) at each end 
of a short section of track, preferably upon an embankment, then have 
as many men as available raise the track on one side until the ties 
stand on end and turn the section of track so that it will fall down the 
embankment; or, cut out rails by a charge of dynamite or gun cotton 
placed against the web and covered up with mud or damp clay. Eight to 
twelve ounces of explosive is sufficient. Or blow in the sides of deep 
cuts or blow down embankments. Bridges, culverts, tunnels, etc., are 
never destroyed except on a written order of the commander-in-chief. 

506. Wagon Road. — (a) Bridges can be rendered temporarily use- 
less by removing the flooring, or, in the case of steel bridges, by burning 
the flooring (if obtainable, pour tar or kerosene on flooring), particularly 
if there is not time to remove it. 

Short culverts may sometimes be blown in. 

A hastily constructed barricade across a bridge or in a cut of 
tre^; wagons, etc., may be sufficient in some cases where only the tempo- 
rary check of hostile cavalry or artillery is desired. 

(b) The road bed may be blocked by digging trenches not less than 
thirty feet wide and six feet deep, but as this would take a great deal of 
time patrols would rarely be charged with such work. 

507. Report on Return of Patrol. On returning the patrol leaders 
should make a short verbal or written report, almost always the former, 
briefly recounting the movements of the patroJ, the information obtained 
of the enemy, a description of the country passed over and of friendly 
troops encountered. Of course, this is not practicable when the situation 
is changing rapidly and a returning patrol is immediately engaged in 
some new and pressing duty. 

508. Model Reports of Patrol Leaders 
1. Verbal. 

Patrol Leader (Corporal B) : Sir, Corporal B reports back with 
his patrol. 

Captain A: I received two messages from you, corporal. What 
else did you discover? 

Corporal B: That was a regiment of infantry, sir, with one bat- 
talion thrown out as advance guard. The main body of two battalions 

[416] 



508 (contd.) 

went into bivouac at the crossroads and the advance guard formed an 
outpost line along the big creek two miles south of here. 

Captain A: Give me an account of your movements. 

Corporal B: We followed this main road south to the creek, 
where we avoided a mounted patrol moving north on the road at 1-45 
P. M., and then reconnoitered the valley from a ridge west of the road. 
We followed the ridge south for, half a mile to a point where we could 
see a road crossing the valley and the main road at right angles, three 
miles south of here. There we halted, and at 2:20 what seemed to be 
the point and advance party (about forty men) of an infantry advance 
guard appeared, marching north up this road, the head at the crossroad. 
I then sent you message No. 1 by Private Brown. 

In fifteen minutes three companies had appeared 600 yards in 
rear of the advance party, and I could see a heavy, low column of dust 
about one-half mile further to the rear. Message No. 2 was then sent in 
by Privates Baker and Johnson, and to avoid several hostile patrols, I 
drew Oif further to the northwest. 

The advance guard then halted and established an outpost line 
along the south of the creek, two miles from here. The cloud of dust 
proved to be tw^o more battalions and a wagon train. These two bat- 
talions went into bivouac on opposite sides of this road at the crossroads 
and sent out strong patrols east and west on the crossroad. Five wagons 
went forward to the outpost battalion and the reserve built cook fires. 

As Private Eush, here, was the only man I had left, we started 
back, sketching the valley, ridge and positions of the main body and 
outpost. Here is the sketch, sir. The fields are all cut crops or meadow. 

We sighted two foot patrols from the outpost, moving north • 
about a mile from here, one following the road and one further east. 

I did not see any of our patrols. 

That is all, sir. 
2. Written. 

Report of Sergeant Wm. James' Patrol of Five Men 

Support No. 1, 
Outpost of 6th Inf., Near Dixon, 

22 Aug. 12, 2-30 to 5 P. M. 

The patrol followed the timber along the creek for one mile S. 
from our outguards and leaving the creek bottom moved % mile S. E. 
to the wooded hill (about 800 ft. high), visible from our lines. 

From this hill top the valley to the east (about one mile wide) 
could be fairly well observed. No signs of the enemy were seen and a 
message. No. Ij was sent back by Private Russell. 

A wagon road runs N. and S. through the valley, bordered by 
four or five farms with numerous orchards and cleared fields. Both 
slopes of the valley are heavily wooded. 

The patrol then moved S. W., until it struck the macadam pike 
which runs N. and S., through our lines. Proceeding S. 400 yds. on this 
pike to a low hill a farmer, on foot, was met. Said he lived one mile 
further S.; was looking for some loose horses; that four hostile cavalry- 
men, from the east, stopped at his farm at noon, drank some milk, took 
oats for their horses, inquired the way to Dixon and rode off in that 

[417] 



509 

direction witMn fifteen minutes. He said they were tlie first hostiles 
he had seen; that they told nothing about themselves, and they and 
their horses looked in good condition. Farmer appeared friendly and 
honest. 

The patrol then returned to our lines following the pike about 
two miles. Eoad is in good condition, low hedges and barbed wire 
fences, stone culverts and no bridges in the two miles. Bordering country 
is open and gently rolling farming country and all crops are in. A 
sketch is attached to this report. None of our patrols was seen. 
Kespectftilly submitted, 

^ Wm. James, • 

Sergeant, Co. A, 6th Infy. 

509. Problem in Patrol Leading and Patrolling 

In studying or solving tactical problems on a map you must 
remember that unless you carefully work out your own solution to the 
problem before looking at the given solution, you will practically make 
no progress. 

It is best, if your time permits, to write out your solutions, and 
when you read over the given solutions, compare the solution of each 
point with what you thought of that same point when you were solving 
the problem, and consider why you did just what you did. Without this 
comparison much of the lasting benefit of the work is lost. 

In some of these problems both the problem and solutions are 
presented in dialogue form so as to give company officers examples of 
the best method of conducting the indoor instruction of their men in 
minor tactics. It also gives an example of how to conduct a tactical 
walk out in the country, simply looking at the ground itself, instead 
of a map hanging on the wall. The enlarged Elementary Map referred 
to in Par. 454, is supposed to be used in this instruction as well as in 
the war games. 

Problem ITo. 1. (Infantry) 

The Elementary Map (scale 12 inches to the mile) being hung on 
the wall, about two sergeants and two squads of the company are 
seated in a semicircle facing it, and the captain is standing beside the 
map with a pointer (a barrack cleaning rod makes an excellent pointer). 

Captain: We will suppose that our company has just reached the 
village of York. The enemy is reported to be in the vicinity of Boling 
and Oxford (he points out on the map all places as they are mentioned). 
We are in the enemy's country. 

Corporal James, I call you up at 3 P. M. and give you these orders: 
"Nothing has been seen of the enemy yet. Our nearest ' troops are 
three miles south of here. Take four men from your squad and 
reconnoiter along this road (County Eoad) into the valley on the 
other side of that ridge over there (points to the ridge just beyond 
the cemetery), and see if you can discover anything about the enemy. 
Report back here by 5 o'clock. I am sending a patrol out the Valley 
Pike.'' Now, Corporal, state just what you would do. 

Corporal James: I would go to my squad, fall in Privates Amos, 
Barlow, Sharp and Brown; see that they had full canteens; that their 

[418] 



509 (contd.) 

arms were all right; that they were not lame or sick and I would have 
them leave their blanket rolls, haversacks and entrenching tools with 
the company. (Par. 460.) 

I "would then give these orders (Par. 459) ; ' * We are ordered out 
on patrol duty. Nothing has been seen of the enemy yet. Our nearest 
troops are three miles south of here. We are ordered to reconnoiter 
along this road into the valley on the other side of that ridge, and 
see if we can discover anything about the enemy. Another patrol is 
going up the Valley Pike. Reports are to be sent- here. In case we 
are scattered we will meet at the woods on the hill over there (indi- 
cates the clump of trees just west of Mills' farm). 

'*I will go ahead. Amos, follow about fifty yards behind me. 
Barlow, you and Sharp keep about 100 yards behind Amos, and Brown 
will follow you at half that distance. All keep on the opposite side 
of the road from the man ahead of you." (Par. 463.) 

Captain: All right. Corporal, now describe what route you will 
follow. 

Corporal James: The patrol will keep to the County Road until 
the crest of the ridge near the stone wall is reached, when what I see 
in the valley beyond will decide my route for me. 

Captain: How about the woods west of the stone walls? 

Corporal James: If I did not see anyone from our patrol on the 
Valley Pike reconnoitering there, I would give Barlow these orders 
just after we have examined the cemetery, when the patrol would have 
temporarily closed up somewhat: ^'Barlow, take Sharp and examine 
that little woods over there. Join us at the top of this hill.'' I would 
then wave to Brown to close up and would proceed to the hill top. • 

Captain: Barlow, what do you do? 

Private Barlow: I would say, ''Sharp, out straight across for 
that woods. I will follow you." I would follow about 100 yards be- 
hind him. When he reached the edge of the woods I would signal him 
to halt by holding up my left hand. After I had closed up to about 
fifty yards I would say to him, ''Go into the woods and keep me in 
sight." I would walk along the edge of the woods where I could 
see Sharp and the corporal's patrol on the road at the same time. 

, Captain: That is all right, Barlow. Corporal, you should have 
instructed Amos or Brown to keep close watch on Barlow for signals. 

Corporal James: I intended to watch him myself. 

Captaiji: No, you would have enough to do keeping on the alert 
for what was ahead of you. Now describe how you lead the patrol to 
the top of the hill, by the stone wall. 

Corporal James: When I reached the crest I would hold up my 
hand for the patrol to halt and would cautiously advance and look 
ahead into the valley. If I saw nothing suspicious I would wave to 
the men to close up and say, "Amos, go to that high ground about 250 
yards over there (indicates the end of the nose made by the 60-foot 
contour just north of the east end of the stone wall), and look around 
the country." I would keep Brown behind the crest, watching Bar- 
low's movements. 

[419] 



509 (contd.) , _ 

Captain: Now, Corporal^ Amos reaches tlie point you indicated 
and Barlow and Sharp join yon. What do you do? 

Corporal James: Can I see the Steel Bridge over Sandy Creek? 

Captain: No, it is three-fourths of a mile away and the trees 
along the road by Smith's hide it. You can see the cut in the road east 
of the bridge and the Smith house, but the cross roads are hidden by 
the trees bordering the roads. You see nothing suspicious. It is a 
clear, sunny afternoon. The roads are dusty and the trees in full 
foliage. The valley is principally made up of fields pf cut hay, corn 
stubble and meadow land. 

Corporal James: 'Does Private Amos give me any information? 

Captain: No, he makes you no signals. You see him sitting be- 
hind a bush looking northwest, down the valley. 

Corporal James: I would say, '' Barlow, head straight across 
to where that line of trees meets the road (indicates the point where 
the lane from Mills ^ farm joins the Chester Pike). Sharp, keep about 
fifty yards to my right rear.'' I would follow Barlow at 150 yards and 
when I had reached the bottom land I would wave to Amos to fol- 
low us. 

Captain: How about Brown? 

Corporal James: I had already given him his orders to follow 
as rear guard and he should do so without my telling him. 

Captain: Amos, what do you do when you see the corporal wave 
to you? 

Private Amos: I would go down the hill and join him. 

Captain: No, you could do better than that. You are too far 
/rom the corporal for him to signal you to do much of anything except 
stay there or join him. You should join him, but you should not go 
straight down to him. You should head so as to strike the Mills' Lane 
about ^00 yards east of the house and then go down the lane, first 
looking along the stone wall. In this way you save time in reconnoiter- 
ing the ground near the Mills' farm and protect the patrol against 
being surprised by an enemy hidden by the line of trees, or the wall 
along the lane. You are not disobeying your orders but just using 
common sense in following them out and thinking about what the cor- 
poral is trying to do. 

Now, Corporal, why didn'^'t you go to the Smith house and find out 
if the people there had seen anything of the enemy? 

Corporal James: You said we were in the enemy's country, sir, 
so I thought it best to avoid the inhabitants until I found I could not 
get information in any other way. I intended first to see if I could 
locate any enemy around here, and if not, to stop at houses on my re- 
turn. In this way I would be gone before the people could send any 
information to the enemy about my patrol. 

Captain: Barlow reaches the Chester Pike where the Mills' lane 
leaves it. You are about 150 yards in his rear. Sharp is 50 yards off 
to your right rear, Amos 100 yards to your left rear and Brown 50 yards 
behind you. Just as Barlow starts to climb over the barbed wire fence 
into the Chester Pike you see him drop down on the ground. He signals, 
"Enemy in sight." Tell me quickly what would you do? 

[420] 



509 (contd.) 

Corporal James': I would wave my hand for all to lie down, 
and I would hasten forward, stooping over as I ran, until I was about 
twenty yards from him, when I would crawl forward to the fence, close 
by him. Just before I reached him I would ask him what he saw. 

Captain: He replies, ''There are some hostile foot soldiers com- 
ing up this road.'' 

Corporal James: I would crawl forward and look. 

Captain: You see three or four men, about 500 yards north of 
you, coming up the Chester Pike. They are scattered out. 

Corporal James: I would say, ''Crawl into the lane, keep behind 
the stone wall, watch those fellows, and work your way to that farm" 
(indicates the Mills' farm). I would start towards the Mills' farm 
myself, under cover of the trees along the lane and would wave to 
the otheT men to move rapidly west, towards the hills. 

Captain: Why didn't you try to hide near where you were and 
allow the hostile men to pass? 

Corporal James: There does not seem to be any place to hide 
near there that a patrol would not probably examine. 

Captain: What is your plan now? 

Corporal James: I want to get my patrol up to that small 
woods near the Mills' farm, but I hardly expect to be able to get them 
up to that point without their being seen. In any event, I want them 
well back from the road where they can lie down and not be seen by 
the enemy when he passes. 

Captain: You succeed in collecting your patrol in the woods 
without their being seen, and you see four foot soldiers in the road at 
the entrance to the land. One man starts up the lane, the others re- 
maining on the road. 

Corporal James: I say, "Brown, go through these woods and 
hurry straight across to York. You should be able to see the village 
from the other side of the woods. Eeport to the captain that a hostile 
patrol of four foot men is working south up the valley, two miles north- 
east of York. We will go further north. Eepeat what I have told 
you." (Par. 474.) 

Captain: Why didn't you send this message before? 
Corporal James: Because we were moving in the same direction 
that the messenger would have had to go, and, by waiting a very few 
minutes, I was able to tell whether it was a mere patrol or the point of 
an advance guard. 

Captain: Do you think it correct to send a messenger back 
with news about a small patrol? 

Corporal James: Ordinarily it would be wrong, but as nothing 
has been seen of the enemy until now, this first news is important 
because it proves to the Captain that the enemy really is in this neigh- 
borhood, which it seems to me is a very important thing for him to 
know and what ray mission required me to do. (Par. 474a.) 

Captain: What are you going to do now. Corporal? 

Corporal James: We have traveled about two miles and stopped 
frequently, so it must be about 4 o'clock. It is one and one-third miles 
back to York, where I should arrive about 5 o'clock. It would take 

[421] 



509 (contd.) 

me twenty-five minutes to go from here to York, so I have about 
thirty-five minutes left before 5 o'clock. This will permit me to go 
forward another mile and still be able to reach York on time. It is 
two-thirds of a mile to the Mason farm, and if the hostile patrol appears 
to be going on, I will start for that point. Did anyone at the Mills' 
farm see us? 

Captain: No, but tell me first why you do not go along this high 
ground that overlooks the valley? 

Corporal James: Because our patrol that started out the Valley 
Pike is probably near Twin Hills and I want to cover other country. 
The orchard at Mason's would obstruct my view from the hills. 

Captain: The hostile patrol goes on south. Describe briefly 
your next movements. 

Corporal James: I lead my patrol over to Mason's and, con- 
cealing two of the men so that both roads and the house can be watched, 
I take one man and reconnoiter around the farm yard and go up to 
the house to question the inhabitants. (Par. 488.) 

Captain: You find one woman there who says some other sol- 
diers, on foot, passed there a few minutes ago, marching south. She 
gives you no other information about the enemy or country. '' 

Corporal James: I would send Amos over to see how deep and 
wide Sandy Creek is (Par. 493.) When he returned I would take the 
patrol over to Twin Hills, follow the ridge south to the stone wall on 
the County Eoad, watching the valley for signs of the hostile patrol, 
and follow the road back to York; then make my report to the Cap- 
tain, telling him where I had gone, all I had seen, including a descrip- 
tion of the country. If I had not been hurried, I would have made 
a sketch of the valley. I can make a rough one after I get in. 
(Par. 507.) 

Captain: Suppose on your way back you saw hostile troops ap- 
pearing on the County Road, marching west over Sandy Ridge. Would 
you stay out longer or would you consider that you should reach Ox- 
ford by 5 o'clock? 

Corporal James: I would send a message back at once, and remain 
out long enough to find out the strength and probable intention of the 
new enemy. 

Captain (to one platoon of his troop of cavalry) : We will sup- 
pose that this troop has just (9 A. M.) arrived in Boling (Elementary 
Map) on a clear, dry, summer day. The enemy is supposed to be near 
Salem and we hat^e seen several of his patrols this morning on our 
march south to Boling. Sergeant Allen, I call you up and give you these 
instructions: '^Take Corporal Burt's squad (eight men) and recon- 
noiter south by this road (indicates the Boling-Morey house road) to 
Salem. I will take the troop straight south to Salem and you will 
join it there about 10:15. It is four and one-half miles to Salem. Start 
at once. ' ' (You have no map.) 

Sergeant Allen: I would like to know just what the Captain 
wishes my patrol to do. (Par. 461.) 

Captain: We will suppose that this is one of the many occasions 
in actual campaign where things must be done quickly. Where there 

[422] 



509 (contd.) 
is no time for detailed orders. You Imow tliat the troop has been 
marching south towards Salem where the enemy is supposed to be. You 
also know we have seen several of his patrols. I have told you what 
the troop is going to do, and from all this you should be able to decide 
what your mission is in this case. We will, therefore, consider that 
there is no time to give you more detailed orders, and you have to de- 
cide for yourself. Of course, if you had failed to hear just what I 
said, then, in spite of the necessity for haste, I would repeat my in- 
structions to you. [Par. 459(b).] 

Sergeant Allen: I would ride over to Corporal Burt^s squad 
and lead it out of the column to the road leading to the Morey house, 
and say, *'The troop is going on straight south to Salem, four and one- 
half miles away. This squad will reconnoiter south to Salem by this 
road, joining the troop there about 10:15. In case we become separated, 
make for Salem. Corporal, take Brown and form the point. I will fol- 
low with the squad about 300 yards in rear. Kegulate your gait on me 
after you get your distance. Move out now at a trot." [Par. 459(5,).] 

After Corporal Burt had gotten 150 yards out I would say, * * Car- 
ter, move out as connecting file.'' I would then say, *' Downs, you will 
follow about 150 yeards behind us as rear guard.'' When Carter had 
gone 150 yards down the road I would order, '^1. Forward; 2. trot; 
3. March/* and ride off at the head of the four remaining men (in 
column of twos.) (Par. 463.) 

Captain: Sergeant, tell me briefly what is your estimate of 
the situation — that is, what sort of a proposition you have before you 
and how you have decided to handle it. 

Sergeant Allen: As the enemy is supposed to be near Salem 
■and we have already seen his patrols, I expect to encounter more patrols 
and may meet a strong body of the enemy, on my way to Salem. As 
I have no map, I cannot tell anything about the road, except that it 
is about four and one-half miles by the direct road the troop will 
follow, therefore my route will be somewhat longer. I have been given 
an hour and fifteen minutes in which to make the trip, so, if I move at 
a trot along the safer portions of the road, I will have time to proceed 
very slowly and cautiously along the dangerous portions. My patrol 
will be stretched out about 500 yards on the road, which should make 
it difficult for the enemy to surprise us and yet should permit my con- 
trolling the movements of the men. (Par. 463.) 

I consider that my mission is to start out on this road and find 
my way around to Salem in about an hour and, particularly, to get word 
across to the Captain on the othei^-road of anything of importance about 
the enemy that I may learn. 

Captain: Very well. When you reach the cut in the road across 
the south nose of Hillt 38, your point has almost reached the Morey 
house. Do you make any change in your patrol? 

Sergeant AUen: I order, ''1, Walk, 2. MARCH,*' and watch 
to see if the connecting file observes the change in gait and comes to 
a walk. 

Captain: Suppose he does not come to a walk? 

Sergeant Allen: I would say, '* Smith, gallop ahead and tell 
Carter to walk and to keep more on the alert." 

[4231 



509 (contd.) • 

Captain: Corporal Burt, you reach the road fork at Morey^s. 
What do you do? 

Corporal Burt: I say, ''Brown, wait here until Carter is close 
enough to see which way you go and then trot up to me.'' I would 
walk on down the road. 

Captain: Wouldn't you make any inspection of the Morey house? 

Corporal Burt: Not unless I saw something suspicious from 
the road. I would expect the main body of the patrol to do that. 

Captain: Don't you make any change on account of the woods 
you are passing? 

Corporal Burt: No, sir. It has very heavy underbrush and 
we would lose valuable time trying to search through it. A large force 
of the enemy would hardly hide in such a place. 
^' Captain: Sergeant Allen, you reach the road fork. What do 

you do? 

Sergeant Allen: I would have two men go into the Morey 
house to question anyone they found there. I would order one of the 
other two men to trot up (north) that road 200 yards and wait until I 
signaled to him to return. With the other man I would await the re- 
sult of the inspection of the Morey house. Corporal Burt should have 
gone ahead without orders to the cut in the road across Long Eidge, 
leaving Brown half way between us. (Pars. 481 and 488.) 

Captain: You find no one at the Morey house. 

Sergeant Allen: I would signal the man to the north to come in. 
I would then order two men to ''find a gate in the fence and trot up on 
that hill (indicating Long Eidge), and look around the country and 
join me down this road." (Par. 463.) I would then start south at a 
walk, halting at the cut to await the result of the inspection on the 
country from the hill. 

Captain: Foster, you and Lacey are the two men sent up on 
Long Eidge. When you reach the hill top you see four hostile cavalry- 
men trotting north on the Valley Pike, across the railroad track. 

Private Foster: I signal like this (enemy in sight), and wait to 
see if they go on north. (Par. 473.) Do I see anything else behind or 
ahead of them? 

Captain: You see no other signs of the enemy on any road. 
Everything looks quiet. The hostile cavalrymen pass the Baker house 
and continue north. 

Private Foster: I would then take Lacey, trot down the ridge 
to Sergeant Allen, keeping below the crest and report, "Sergeant, 
we saw four hostile mounted men trotting north on the road about 
three-quarters of a mile over there (pointing), and they kept on north, 
across that road (pointing to the Brown-Baker-Oxford road). There 
was nothing else in sight." I would then tell him what the country 
to the south looked like, if he wanted to know. 

Captain: Sergeant Allen, what do you do now? 

Sergeant Allen: I would continue toward the Brown house at 
a trot. I would send no message to you as you already know there are 
hostile patrols about and therefore this information would be of little 
or no importance to you. (Par. 474a.) 

[424] 



609 (contd.) 

Captain: You arrive at Brown ^s house. 

Sergeant Allen: I would send two men in to question the people 
and I would continue on at a walk. I would not send any one up the 
road towards Oxford as Foster has already seen that road. 

Captain: You should have sent a man several hundred yards out the 
Farm Lane. (Par. 481.) If he moved at a trot it would only have taken 
a very short time. Continue to describe your movements. 

Sergeant Allen: I would halt at the railroad track until I saw 
my two 'men coming on from the Brown house. I would then direct 
the other two men who were with me to go through the first opening 
in the fence to the west and ride south, along that ridge (62 — Lone 
Hill — Twin Hills' ridge) until I signaled them to rejoin. I would tell 
them to look out for our troop over to the east. If there were a great 
many fences I would not send them out until we were opposite the 
southern edge of that woods ahead of us. There I would send them to 
the high ground to look over the country, and return at once. 

Captain: There are a great many fences west of the road and 
practically none east of the road to Sandy Creek. Just as you arrive 
opposite the southern edge of those woods and are giving orders for 
the two men to ride up the hill, you hear firing in the direction of Bald 
Knob. In the road at the foot of the south slope of Bald Knob, where 
the trail to the quarry starts off, you can see quite a clump of horses. 
You see nothing to the west of your position or towards Mason's. What 
do you do? 

Sergeant Allen: I signal *'EALLY'' to Carter and Downs. If 
there is a gate nearby I lead my men through it. If not, I have them 
cut or break an opening in the fence and ride towards the railroad fill 
at a fast trot, having one man gallop ahead as point. 

When we reach the fill, the point having first looked beyond it, 
I order, * 'DISMOUNT. Lacey, hold the horses. 1. As skirmishers along 
that fill, 2. MARCH.'' When Corporal Burt, Brown, Carter and Downs 
come up Lacey takes their horses and they join the line of skirmishers. 
Captain, what do I see from the fill? 

Captain: There appear to be about twenty or thirty horses 
in the group. The firing seems to come from the cut in the road just 
north of the horses and from the clump of trees by the Quarry. You 
can also hear firing from a point further north on the road, apparently 
3^our troop replying to the fire from Bald Knob. You see nothing in 
the road south of the horses as far as Hill 42, which obstructs your 
view. What action do ^ou take? 

Sergeant Allen: I order, ^'AT THE FEET OF THOSE HORSES. 
RANGE, 850. CLIP FIRING.'' 

Captain: What is your object in doing as you have done? 

Sergeant Allen: I know the captain intended to go to Salem with 
the troop. From the fact that he is replying to the hostle fire I judge 
he still wishes to push south. I was ordered to reconnoiter along this 
road, but now a situation has arisen where the troop is being prevented 
or delayed in doing what was desired and I am in what appears to be 
a very favorable position from which to give assistance to the troop 
and enable them to push ahead. I am practically in rear of the enemy 

[425] 



509 (contd.) 

and within effective range of their lead horses. I therefore think my 
mission has at last temporarily changed and I should try and cause 
the twenty or thirty hostile troopers to draw off [Par. 457(b)]. Be- 
sides, I think it is my business to find out what the strength of this 
enemy is and whether or not he has reinforcements coming up from 
Salem, and send this information to the captain. From my position I 
can still watch the Chester Pike. 

Captain: After you have emptied your clips you see the enemy 
running down out of the cut and from among the trees mount their 
horses and gallop south. What do you do? 

Sergeant Allen: I would send Foster across the creek above the 
trestle (south of trestle), to ride across to that road (pointing towards 
the cut on Bald Hill) and tell the captain, who is near there, that 
about thirty men were on the hill and they have galloped south, and 
that I am continuing towards Salem. I would have Foster repeat the 
message that I gave him. I would then trot back to the Chester Pike 
and South to Mason's, taking up our old formation. 

Captain: You see nothing unusual at Mason's and continue 
south until you reach the cross roads by the Smith farm. Corporal 
Burt and Private Brown are near the stone bridge south of Smith's; 
Private Carter is half way between you and Corporal Burt; and Private 
Downs is 100 yards north of Smithes. You have three men with you. 
What do you do? 

Sergeant Allen: What time is it now? 

Captain: It is now 9:45 a. m. 

Sergeant Allen: I would say, ^'Lacey, take Jackson and gal- 
lop as far as that cut in the road (points east) and see if you can 
locate the enemy or our troop in the valley beyond. I will wave my 
hat over my head when I want you to return." I would then say to 
Private Moore, ^ ^ Gallop down to Corporal Burt and tell him to fall back 
in this direction 100 yards, and then you return here bringing the other 
two men with you." I would then await .the result of Private Lacey's 
reconnaissance, sending Carter to the turn in the road 200 yards west 
of the cross roads. 

Captain: Lacey, what do you do? 

Private Lacey: I order Jackson, ^'Follow 75 yards behind me 
and watch for signals from Sergeant Allen," and I then gallop across 
the steel bridge and half way up the hill. I then move cautiously up to 
the cut and, if the fences permit, I ride up on the side of the cut, dis- 
mounting just before reaching the crest of the ridge, and walk forward 
until I can see into the valley beyond. 

Captain: You see no signs of the enemy in the valley, but you 
see your own troop on the road by the Gibbs farm with a squad in ad- 
vg,nce in the road on Hill 42. 

Private Lacey: I look towards Sergeant Allen to see if he is 
signaling. I make no signals. 

Captain: What do you do. Sergeant? 

Sergeant Allen: I wave my hat for Private Lacey to return. 
I wave to Private Downs to join me and when Private Lacey arrives 
I signal '^ ASSEMBLE" to Corporal Burt and then say, '* Lacey, join 

[426] 



509 (contd.) 

Corporal Burt and tell him to follow me as rear guard. Martin, join 
Carter and tell him to trot west. We will follow. You stay with him.'' 
After he got started I would order, '^ Follow me. 1. Trot; 2. MARCH.*' 

Captain: When Private Carter reaches the crest of the ridge 
about one-half mile west of Smith's he signals, ^' Enemy in sight in 
large numbers," and he remains in the road with Martin fifty yards 
in rear. (Par. 473.) 

Sergeant Allen: I order, ^^1. Walk; 2. MARCH. 1. Squad; 2. 
HALT," and gallop up to Private Carter, dismount just before reach- 
ing the crest, give my horse up to Private Martin, and run forward. 

Captain: Carter points out what appears to be a troop of cavalry 
standing in the road leading north out of York, just on the edge of the 
town. You see about four mounted men 200 yards out of York on your 
road, halted, and about the same number on the Valley Pike near 
where it crosses the first stream north of York. What do you do? 

Sergeant Allen: I wait about three minutes to see if they are 
going to move. 

Captain: They remain halted, the men at York appear to be dis- 
mounted. 

Sergeant Allen: I write the following message: 

Hill 1/2 mile N. E. of York, 

10 A. M. 
Captain X: 

A hostile troop of cavalry is standing in road at YOEE (west 
.of SALEM) with squads halted on N. and N. E. roads from YORK. 
Nothing else seen. Will remain in observation for the present. 

Allen, 
Sgt. (Pars. 474 and 474a.) 

I would give the message to Martin, who had previously brought 
my horse up close in rear of the crest, and would say to him, ^'Take this 
message to the captain, straight across to the road the troop is on, and 
turn south towards Salem if you do not see them at first. Take Lacey 
with you. Tell him what you have seen. He knows where the troop is." 
I would have Carter hold my horse, and watch the remainder of the 
patrol for signals, while I observed the enemy. 

Captain: At the end of five minutes the hostile troop trots north 
on the Valley Pike, the patrol on your road rides across to the Valley 
Pike and follows the troop. 

Sergeant Allen: I would wait until the troops had crossed the 
creek north of York and would then face my patrol east and trot to 
the cross roads at Smith's, turn south and continue to Salem, sending 
one man to ride up on Sandy Eidge, keeping the patrol in sight. 

Captain: We have carried out the problem far enough. It fur- 
nishes a good example of the varying situations a patrol leader has to 
meet. Good judgment or common sense must be used in deciding on 
the proper course to follow. You must always think of what your chief 
is trying to do and then act in the way you think will best help him 
to accomplish his object. If you have carefully decided just what mis- 
sion you have been given to accomplish, you cannot easily go wrong. 
In handling a mountcfd patrol you must remember that if thtf men be- 

[427] 



509 (contd.) 

come widely separated in strange country, or even in country they are 
fairly familiar with, they are most apt to lose all contact with each 
other or become lost themselves. 

Problem No. 3. (Infantry) 
Captain (to one platoon of Ms company) : We will suppose it is 
about half an hour before dawn. One platoon of the company is de- 
ployed as skirmishers, facing north, in the cut where the County Eoad 
crosses Sandy Kidge. It is the extreme right of a line of battle extend- 
ing west along the line of the County Eoad. The fight has not com- 
menced. This platoon is resting in a wheat field between the railroad 
and the foot of the slope of Sandy Eidge, 200 yards south of the 
County Eoad. Sergeant Allen, I call you up and give you these in- 
structions: ''The enemy's line is off in that direction (pointing north- 
west). Take six men and work north along the railroad until it is 
light enough to see; then locate the hostile line and keep me informed 
of their movements. I will be in this vicinity. You have a compass. 
Start at once.'' Describe briefly the formation of your patrol while 
it is moving in the dark. 

Sergeant Allen: One man will lead. A second man will follow 
about fifteen yards in rear of him. I will follow the second man at the 
same distance with three more men, and the last man will be about 
twenty yards in rear of me. All will have bayonets fixed, loaded and 
pieces locked. One short, low whistle will mean. Halt, two short 
whistles will mean, Forward, and the word ''Sandy" will be the 
countersign by which we can identify each other. 

Captjain: Very well. We will suppose that you reach the steel 
trestle over Sandy Creek just at dawn and have met no opposition and 
heard nothing of the enemy. On either side of Sandy Creek are fields 
of standing corn about six feet tall. In the present dim light you can 
only see a few hundred yards off. 

Sergeant Allen: The patrol being halted I would walk forward 
to the leading man (Brown) and say, "Brown, take Carter and form 
the point for the patrol, continuing along this railroad. We will follow 
about 150 yards in rear." I would then rejoin the main body of the 
patrol and order the man in rear to follow about 75 yards in rear of 
us. When the point had gained its distance I would move forward -vyith 
the main body, ordering one man to move along the creek bank (west 
bank), keeping abreast of us until I signaled to him to come in. 

Captain: Just as you reach the northern end of the railroad fill 
your point halts and you detect some movement in the road to the west 
of you. It is rapidly growing lighter. 

Sergeant Allen: I would move the main body by the left flank 
into the corn, signaling to the man following the creek to rejoin, and 
for the reiar guard to move off the track also. I would expect Bi>^wn 
to do the same, even before he saw what we had done. I would then 
close up on the point until I could see it and, halting all the patrol, I 
would order Foster to take Lacey and work over towards the road to 
see what is there and to report back to me immediately. 

Captain: In a few minutes Foster returns and reports, "The 
enemy is moving south in the road and in the field beyond, in line of 

[428] 



509 (contd.; 

squads or sections. A hostile patrol is moving southeast across the 
field behind us. We were not seen.'' 

(Note: This situation could well have been led up to by requir- 
ing Private Foster to explain how he conducted his reconnaissance and 
having him formulate his report on the situation as given.) 

Sergeant Allen: I would then work my patrol closer to the 
road, keeping Foster out on that flank, and prepare to follow south in 
rear of the hostile movement. 

Captain: The information you have gained is so important 
that you should have sent a man back to me with a verbal message, 
particularly as you are in a very dangerous position, and may not be 
able to send a message later. While you have not definitely located 
the left of the enemy's line, you have apparently discovered what 
appears to be a movement of troops forward to form the left of the 
attacking line. Your action in turning south to follow the troops just 
reported, is proper, as you now know you are partly in rear of the 
hostile movement and must go south to locate the hostile flank that your 
mission requires you to report on. 

You men must picture in your mands the appearance of the 
country the sergeant is operating through. His patrol is now in a field 
of high standing corn. Unless you are looking down between the 
regular rows of corn you can only see a few yards ahead of you. The 
road has a wire fence and is bordered by a fairly heavy growth of 
high weeds and bushes. The ground is dry and dusty. Sergeant, how 
do you conduct your movement south? 

Sergeant Allen: As my patrol is now in a very dangerous 
neighborhood and very liable to be caught between two hostile lines, 
with a deep creek between our present position and our platoon, I think 
it best to move cautiously southeast until I reach the creek bank (I 
cannot see it from where I now am), and then follow the creek south. 
I think I am very apt to find the enemy's left resting on this creek. 
Besides, if I do not soon locate the enemy, I can hold the main body 
of my patrol close to the creek and send scouts in towards the road to 
search for the enemy. It will also be much easier to send information 
back to the platoon from the creek bank, as a messenger can ford it 
and head southeast until he strikes the railroad and then follow that 
straight back to our starting point. It would thus be very difficult 
for him to get lost. 

Captain: You move southeast and strike the creek bank jusc 
south of the railroad trestle. You now hear artillery fire off to the 
west and rifle fire to the southwest which gradually increases in volume. 
You. see a high cloud of dust hanging over the road on the hill west of 
Mason's and south of this road on the north slope of the northern- 
most knoll of the Twin Hills, you can occasionally see the flash of a 
gun, artillery, being discharged. There seems to be no rifle firing 
directly in your front. 



[4»] 



509 (contd.) ' 

Sergeant Allen: I hurriedly write the following message: 

At Ry. trestle 1 mi. N. of Platoon, 

5:15 A. M. 
Captain X: 

Can see arty, firing from position on N. slope of knoll on high 
ridge to W. of me, and % mi. S. of E. and W. road. ^Hostile line is S. 
of me. Have not located it. Will move S. 

Allen, 
Sgt. (Par. 474.) 

I hand this to Private Smith and say to him, ' ^ Carry this quickly 
to the captain. Follow the railroad back until you cross a wagon road. 
Our platoon should be to the west of the track just beyond the road.*' 
I also read the message to Smith and point out the hostile artillery. 
I have considered that I sent a message before telling about the 
hostile advance. 

I then continue south, moving slowly and with great caution. 
I instruct the remaining four men that in case we are surprised to 
try to cross the creek and follow the railroad back to the platoon. 

Captain: Your information about the hostile artillery position 
was important and should have been sent in, provided you think your 
description of the hostile position was suflSiciently clear to be under- 
stood by an observer within your own lines. 

There is some question as to the advisability of your remaining 
on the west bank of the creek. Still you would not be able to tell 
from where you were what direction the creek took, so you probably 
would remain on the west bank for the present. 

You continue south for about 150 yards and your leading man 
halts, comes back to you, and reports that the corn ahead is broken 
and trampled, showing it has been passed over by foot troops. About 
the same time you hear rifle fire to your immediate front. It sounds 
very close. 

Sergeant Allen: I say, ''Cross this creek at once,'* and when 
we reach the other bank and the patrol forms again, we move slowly 
south, all the men keeping away from the creek bank, except myself, 
and I march opposite the two men constituting the main body. 

Captain: About this, time you detect a movement in the corn 
across the creek in rear of the place you have just left. You think 
it is a body of troops moving south. The firing in front seems to be 
delivered from a point about two or three hundred yards south of you 
and you can hear heavy firing from off in the direction of your com- 
pany, a few bullets passing overhead. There are scattered trees along 
the creek and some bushes close to the edge. 

Sergeant Allen: I would conceal myself close to the bank, the 
patrol being back, out of sight from the opposite bank, and await 
developments. 

Captain: Sergeant, your patrol is in a dangerous position. 
The enemy will very likely have a patrol or detachment in rear and 
beyond his flank. This patrol would probably cross the railroad trestle 
and take ;^ou in rear. Jou stiould have giye,n the last men in ydur 
patfrol parheular instructions to watch the riailroa'd to the north. It 

[430] 



509 (contd.) 
would have been better if you had sent one man over to the railroad, 
which is only a short distance away, and had him look up and down the 
track and also make a hurried survey of the country from an elevated 
position on the fill. 

I also think it would be better not to await developments where 
you now are, but to push south and make sure of the position of the left 
of the enemy's firing line, later you can devote more time to the 
movements in rear of the first line. You are taking too many chances in 
remaining where you are. I do not mean that you should leave merely 
because you might have some of • your men killed or captured, but 
because if this did occur you would probably not be able to accomplish 
your mission. Later you may have to run a big chance of sacrificing 
several of your men, in order to get the desired information, which would 
be entirely justifiable. Tell me how your men are arranged and what 
your next movement would be. 

Sergeant Allen: I have four men left. I am close to the 
stream's bank, under cover; two men are about 25 yards further away 
from the stream; Private Brown is up stream as far off as he can get 
and still see the other two men, and Private Foster is down stream the 
same distance. Both Brown and Foster are well back from the stream. 
The two men in the middle, the main body of the patrol, make their 
movements conform to mine, and Brown and Foster regulate their 
movements on the main body. I will move south until I can locate the 
enemy's advance line. 

Captain; When you are about opposite the Mason house, Brown 
comes back to you, having signaled halt, and reports he can see the 
enemy's firing line about 100 yards ahead on the other side of the 
stream, and that a small detachment is crossing the stream just beyond 
where he was. What do you do? 

Sergeant Allen: I creep forward with Brown to verify his 
report. The remainder of the patrol remains in place. 

Captain: You find everything as Brown reported. You see that 
the firing line extends along the southern edge of the cornfield, facing 
an uncultivated field covered with grass and frequent patches of weeds 
two or three feet high. You cannot determine how strong the line is, 
but a heavy fire is being delivered. You cannot see the detachment that 
crossed the creek south of you because of the standing corn. 

Sergeant Allen: I crawl back to the main body, leaving Brown, 
and write the following message: 

5/6 mi. N. of Platoon, 

5:32 A. M. 
Captain X: 

Enemy's left rests on creek % mile to your front, along S. edge 
of cornfield. Creek is 5 ft. deep by 60 ft. wide. Hostile patrols have 
crossed the creek. Will watch their rear. 

Allen, 
Sgt. 

I give this to Private James and say, ''Go over to the railroad 
(pointing), then turn to your right and follow the track until you cross 
a wagon road. Our platoon i6 just beyond that, on thils sTdie of the 
track. Crive this messag-e to the captain. Huriry." 

[431] 



609 (contd.) 

Captain: You should have either read the message to James or 
had him read it. You should also have cautioned him to watch out 
for that hostile detachment. It might be better to send another man 
off with a duplicate of the message, as there is quite a chance that 
James may not get through and the message is all-important. James, 
you get back to the wagon road here (pointing) and find yourself in 
the right of your battle line, but cannot locate me or the company 
right away. 

Private James: I would show the note to the first officer I saw 
in any event, and in this case, I would turn it over to the officer who 
appeared to be in command of the battalion or regiment on the right 
of the line, telling him what company the patrol belonged to, when we 
went out, etc. 

Captain: What do you do, sergeant? 

Sergeant Allen: I start to move north a short distance in orfer 
to find out what reenforcements are in rear of the bostile line. 

Captain: After you have moved about 75 yards you are suddenly 
fired into from across the creek, and at the same time from the direction 
of the railroad trestle. Your men break and run east through the corn 
and you follow, but lose sight of them. When you cross the railroad fill 
you are fired on from the direction of the bridge. You finally stop 
behind the railroad fill on the quarry switch, where two of your men 
join you. 

Sergeant Allen: I would start south to rejoin the company and 
report. 

Captain: That would be a mistake. It would require a long 
time for a second patrol to make its way out over unknown ground, . 
filled with hostile patrols, to a point where they could observe anything 
in rear of the hostile flank. You are now fairly familiar with the 
ground, you also know about where the hostile patrols are and you 
have two men remaining. After a brief rest in some concealed place 
nearby, you should start out again to make an effort to determine the 
strength of the troops in rear of the hostile flank near you, or at -least 
remain out where you could keep a sharp lookout for any attempted 
turning movement by the enemy. Should anything important be observed 
you can send back a message and two of you remain to observe the 
next developments before returning. The information you might send 
back and the additional information you might carry back, would pos- 
sibly enable your own force to avoid a serious reverse or, obtain a 
decided victory. 

Your work would be very hazardous, but it is necessary, and 
while possibly resulting in loss of one or two of your men, it might 
prevent the loss of hundreds in your main force. 



[432] 



510-511 

CHAPTER VII 
THE SERVICE OF SECURITY 

(Based on the Field Service Regulations.) 

General Principles 

510. The Service of Se^ity embraces all those measures taken by a 
military force to protect itself against surprise, annoyance or observa- 
tion by the enemy. On the march, that portion of a command thrown 
out to provide this security is called an advance, flank or rear guard, 
depending on whether it is in front, to the flank or in rear of the main 
command; in camp or bivouac, it is called the outpost. 

The principal duties of these bodies being much the same, their 
general formations are also very similar. There is (1) the cavalry 
covering the front; next (2) a group (4 men to a platoon) or line of 
groups in observation; then (3) the support, or line of supports, whose 
duty is to furnish the men for the observation groups and check an 
enemy ^s attempt to advance until reinforcements can arrive; still farther 
in rear is (4) the reserve. 

In small commands of an infantry regiment or less there usually 
will not be any cavalry to cover the front, and the reserve is generally 
omitted. Even the support may be omitted and the observation group 
or line of groups be charged with checking the enemy, in addition to 
its regular duties of observation. But whatever the technical designation 
of these subdivisions, the rearmost one is always in fact a reserve. 
For example, if the command is so small that the subdivision formally 
designated at the reserve is omitted, the rear element (squad or platoon 
or company, etc.,) is used as a reserve. As this text deals principally 
with small commands and only those larger than a regiment usually 
have the subdivision termed the reserve, this distinction between the 
element in the Field Service Regulations called the reserve and the actual 
reserve, must be thoroughly understood. 

The arrangements or formations of all detachments thrown out 
from the main force to provide security against the enemy, are very 
flexible, varying with every military situation and every different 
kind of country. The commander of such a detachment must, there- 
fore, avoid blindly arranging his men according to some fixed plan and 
at certain fixed distances. Acquire a general understanding of the prin- 
ciples of the service of security and then with these principles as a 
foundation use common sense in disposing troops for this duty. 

ADVANCE GUARD 

511. Definition and Duties. An advance guard is a detachment of a 
marching column thrown out in advance to protect the main column 
from being surprised and to prevent its march from being delayed or 
interrupted. (The latter duty is generally forgotten and many irritat- 
ing, short halts result, which wear out or greatly fatigue the main 
body, the strength of which the advance guard is supposed to conserve.) 

[433] 



511 (contd.). 

In detail the duties of the advance guard are: 

1. To guard against surprise and furnish information by reconnoit- 
ering to the front and flanks. 

2. To push back small parties of the enemy and prevent their 
observing, firing upon or delaying the main body. 

3. To check the enemy's advance in force long enough to permit 
the main body to prepare for action. 

4. When the enemy is met on the defensive, to seize a good position 
and locate his lines, care being taken not to*T)ring on a general engage- 
ment unless the advance guard commander is authorized to do so. 

5. To remove obstacles, repair the road, and favor in every way 
possible the steady march of the column. 

Strength: The strength of the advance guard varies from one- 
ninth to one-third of the total command. The larger the force the 
larger in proportion is the advance guard, for a larger command takes 
relatively longer to prepare for action than a small one. For example, 
a company of 100 men would ordinarily have an advance guard of 
from one to two squads, as the company could deploy as skirmishers 
in a few seconds. On the other hand, a division of 20,000 men would 
ordinarily have an advance guard of about 4,500 men, all told, as it 
would require several hours for a division to deploy and the advance 
guard must be strong enough to make a stubborn fight. 

Composition. The advance guard is principally composed of 
infantry, preceded if possible, by cavalry well to the front. When there 
is only infantry, much more patrolling is required of the front troops 
than when cavalry (called ^^ Advance cavalry '') is out in advance. 
This book does not deal with large advance guards containing artillery 
and engineers. Machine guns, however, will be frequently used in small 
advance guards to hold bridges, defiles, etc. 

Distance From Main Body. The distance at which the advance 
guard precedes the main body or the main body follows the advance 
guard depends on the military situation and the ground. It should 
always be great enough to allow the main body time to deploy before it 
can be seriously engaged. For instance, the advance guard of a com- 
pany, say 1 squad, should be 350 to 500 yards in advance of the company. 
The distance from the leading man back to the principal group of the 
squad should generally be at least 150 yards. This, added to the dis- 
tance back to the main body or company, makes a distance of from 500 
to 650 yards from the leading man to the head of the main body. 
Examples: 

Command. . Advance Guard. Distance (yds.). 

Patrol of 1 squad 2 men 100 to 300 

Section of 3 squads 4 men 200 to 400 

Inf. platoon of 50 men 1 squad 300 to 450 

Cav. platoon of 20 men 4 men 300 to 450 

Inf. company of 108 men 1 to 2 squads 350 to 500 

Cav. troop of 86 men % platoon 450 to 600 

Inf. battalion % to 1 company 500 to 700 

Cav. i^qusedron t^ to 1 troop 600 to gOt> 

[434] 



511a-511b 

These are not furnished as fixed numbers and distances, but are 
merely to give the student an approximate, concrete idea. 

511a. Connecting Files. It should be remembered that between the 
advance guard and the main body, and between the several groups 
into which the advance guard is subdivided, connecting files are 
placed BO as to furnish a means of communicating, generally by signals, 
between the elements (groups) of the column. There should be a con- 
necting file for at least every 300 yards. For example, suppose the 
advance guard of a platoon is 300 yards in front of the main body. In 
ordinary rolling country, not heavily wooded, a connecting file would be 
placed half way between the two elements — 150 yards from each one. 

It is generally wiser, to use two men together instead of one, 
because this leaves one man free to watch for signals from the front 
while the other watches the main body. However, in very small com- 
mands like a company, this is not practicable, as the extra man could 
not be spared. 

FOEMATION OF ADVANCE GUARDS 

Subdivisions. The advance guard of a large force like a brigade 
or division is subdivided into a number of groups or elements, gradually 
increasing in size from front to rear. The reason for this is that, as has 
already been explained, a larger group or force requires longer to deploy 
or prepare to fight than a smaller one, therefore the small subdivisions 
are placed in front where they can quickly deploy and hold the enemy 
temporarily in check while the larger elements in rear are deploying. The 
number of these subdivisions decreases as the strength of the advance 
guard decreases, until we find the advance guard of a company consists 
of one or two squads, which naturally cannot be subdivided into more 
than two groups; and the advance guard of a squad composed of two 
men, which admits of no subdivision. 

Distance to next ele- 
ment ill rear. 

Advance Cavalry 1 to 5 mile? 

f Advance party C Point 150 to 300 yds. 

Support -{ (furnishes patrols) (Advance party proper 300 to 600 yds. 

[ Support proper 400 to 800 yds. 

Reserve (usually omitted in small commands) 500 yds. to 1 mile 

The distances vary principally with the size of the command — 
slightly with the character of the country. 

The advance cavalry is that part of the advance guard going in 
front of all the foot troops. It is generally one to five miles in advance 
of the infantry of the advance guard, reconnoitering at least far enough 
to the front and flanks to guard the column against surprise by artillery 
fire — 4,500 yards. 

511b. Support, (a) The support constitutes the principal element or 
group of all advance guards. It follows the advance cavalry, when there 
is any, and leads the advance guard when there is no cavalry. The sup- 
port of a large command is subdivided within itself in much the same 
manner as the advance guard as a whole is subdivided. It varies in 
strength from one-fourth to one-half of the advance guard. 

[4351 



511c 

(b) Advance Party. As the support moves out it sends forward an 
advance party several hundred yards, the distance varying with the nature 
of the country and size of the command. For example, the advance party 
of a support of one company of 108 men, would ordinarily be composed 
of one section of three squads, and would march about 300 yards in 
advance of the company in open country, and about 200 yards in wooded 
country. 

The advance party sends out the patrols to the front and flanl^ to 
guard the main body of the support from surprise by effective rifle fire. 
Patrols are only sent out to the flanks to examine points that cannot 
be observed from the road. As a rule they will have to rejoin some 
portion of the column in rear of the advance party. As the advance party 
becomes depleted in strength in this manner, fresh men are sent forward 
from the main body of the support to replace those who have fallen 
behind while patrolling. When there is advance cavalry, much less 
patrolling is required of the infantry. 

(c) The point is a patrol sent forward by the advance party. 150 to 
300 yards. When the advance party is large enough the point should 
ordinarily consist of a complete squad, commanded by an officer or 
experienced noncommissioned oflicer. It is merely a patrol in front of the 
column and takes the formation described for patrols. 

(d) The commander of the support ordinarily marches with the 
advance party. He should have a m.ap and control .of the guide, if any 
is present. He sees that the proper road is followed; that guides are left 
in towns and at crossroads; that bridges, roads, etc., are repaired 
promptly so as not to delay the march of the column and that information 
of the enemy is promptly sent back to the advance guard commander; 
he verifies the correctness of this information, if possible. 

511c. (a) A thorough understanding of the arrangement of the sup- 
port and the duties of the leaders of its subdivisions — point, flank patrols, 
advance party and main body (of the support) — is of the greatest impor- 
tance to a noncommissioned officer. For example, the ignorance of one 
noncommissioned officer leading the advance party of a column of 
troops six miles long can cause the entire column to be delayed. If he 
halts because a few shots are fired at his men, and conducts a careful 
reconnaissance before attacking (instead of pushing right in on the 
enemy, forcing him to fall back quickly, if a weak detachment; or, to 
disclose his strength, if strong), the entire column, six miles long, is 
halted, the march interrupted, valuable time lost, and what is more 
important, the men irritated and tired out. 

(b) The leader of the point m_ust understand that as the principal 
duty of an advance guard is to secure the safe and uninterrupted march 
of the main body, he is the first man, to discharge this duty. If, for 
example, his squad receives a volley of shots from some point to the 
front, he cannot take the time and precautions the commander of a 
larger body would take to reconnoiter the enemy's position, determine 
something about his strength, etc., before risking an attack. If he did he 
would not be securing the uninterrupted march of the main body. He 
has to deploy instantly and press the enemy hard until the hostile opposi- 
tion disappears or the advance party comes up and its commander takes 

[436] 



511c (contd.) 

charge. The point will lose men in this way, but it is necessary, for 
otherwise one small combat patrol could delay the march time after time. 

(c) The same problem must be met in much the same manner by the 
leader of the advance party. In this case there is more time to think, as 
the point, being in advance, will have begun the fight before the advance 
party arrives; but the leader of the advance party must use his men 
freely and quickly to force the enemy to ^'show his hand,'' thus pre- 
venting small harassing or combat detachments from delaying the march. 

(d) As the subdivisions of the advance guard become larger their 
leaders act with increasing caution, for as soon as it develops that the 
enemy in front is really present in some strength, then a halt becomes 
obligatory and a careful reconnaissance necessary. 

(e) The leader of every subdivision must always start a reconnais- 
sance the instant the enemy develops. He may, as in the case of the 
point, only send one man around to discover the enemy's strength; or, 
if the leader of the main body of the support, he may send an entire 
squad. In almost every case the instant he has given his orders for 
deploying and firing at or rushing the enemy, he sends out his man or 
men to work around to a position permitting a view of the hostile force. 
Every noncommissioned officer should impress this on his memory so 
that he will not forget it in the excitement of a sudden engagement. 

(f) No attempt should be made to subdivide the advance guard of a 
small force into all the elements previously described. For example, the 
advance guard of a squad is simply a point of one or two men; the 
advance guard of a company is usually no more than a squad acting as a 
*J)oint, the squad actually having several men from 100 to 150 yards in 
advance, who really constitute a point for the squad; the advance guard 
of a battalion would usually consist of a company^ or less distributed as an 
advance party proper and a point. The advance guard of a regiment <• 
would have no reserve — if ^ for example, a battalion were used as the 
advance guard of a regiment, there would be only a support, which would 
be distributed about as follows: A support proper of about three com- 
panies and an advance party (point included) of about one company. 

(BATTAUON ACT/NG AS ADMNCE 6l/A/?D. AV /?£3£Rl^£) 

SUPPORT 

—J^ 



/ Support proper ?. Adi^ance party 

(3 Cos.) (/ Co.) 

/.Ac/yance 2. Point 

party proper 

(33fuad5) f/S^^acf) 

sao ras. zoo yos- ^^ 



[437] 



r 



511c (contd.) 

Reserve. An advance guard large enough to have a reserve 
would be distributed as follows: 

ADVANCE GUARD 

_^A 



/ Reseri^e' 2. Support 

A _^ 

7 Support 2. Adi^ance. 
proper party 

A^ ^ 

Z -M=ZZ=}- Y -^HZZD- X --0 

/.Ac/yance Z Point 
party proper 

The distance Z would be greater than Y and Y would be greater 
than X. For exampL^i, a regiment acting as the advance guard of a brigade 
would, under ordinary conditions, be distributed about as follows : 

ADVANCE GUARD 
"/ Reserve 2, Support 

(2 battalions) (/ battalionj 

A r 

/ Support 2 Advance 
proper party 

(3 Cos.) Oca) 

A 

eoo * ^00 f /SO -7N 

I — 1 1 -~K »- TO — M u — TO — HZI3-* — fo --Hj 

^ ' QOOrOS. 600Y£>S. 300 r OS. 



I.Ad/ance Z Point 
part/proper 

As only large commands have a reserve, which would always be 
commanded by an officer, noncommissioned officers need not give this 
much consideration, but it must be understood that while this fourth 
subdivision of the advance guard is the only one officially termed 
reserve, the last subdivision of any advance guard actually is a reserve, 
no matter what its official designation. 

The advance guard of a cavalry command adopts formations 
similar to those described above, except that the distances are increased 
because of the rapidity with which the command can close up or deploy. 
An advance party with a few patrols is usually enough for a squadron, 
and precedes it from 600 to 1,000 yards. 

Reconnaissance. In reconnaissance the patrols are, as a rule, small 
(from two to six men). 

[438] 



511d 

The flanking patrols, whether of the advance cavalry or of the 
advance party, ^re sent out to examine the country wherever the enemy 
"might be consealed. If the nature of the ground permits, these patrols 
^ march across country or along roads and trails parallel to the march of 
the column. For cavalry patrols this is often possible; but with infantry 
patrols and even with those that are mounted, re'^ionnaissance is best done 
by sending the patrols to high places along the line of march to overlook 
the country and examine the danger points. These patrols signal the re- 
sults of their observations and, unless they have other instructions, join 
the columns by the nearest routes, other patrols being sent out as the 
march proceeds and as the nature of the country requires. 

Deserters, suspicious characters and bearers of flags of truce (the 
latter blindfolded), are taken to the advance guard commander. 

Advance Guard Order. On receipt of the order for a march des- 
ignating the troops for the* advance guard, the commander of the latter 
makes his estimate of the situation; that is, he looks at the map or makes 
inquiries to determine what sort of a country he must march through and 
the nature of the roads; he considers what the chances are of encounter- 
ing the enemy, etc., and then how he should best arrange his advance 
guard to meet these conditions, and what time the different elements of 
his advance guard must start in order to take their proper place in the 
column. He then issues his order at the proper time — the evening before 
if possible and he deems it best, or the morning of the march. 

The order for a large advance guard would ordinarily be written; 
for a small command it would almost invariably be verbal, except that 
the commander or leader of each element should always make written 
notes of the principal points, such as the road to be followed, time to 
start, distances, etc. 
511d. Written advance guard order: 

(See Fort Leavenworth map in pocket at back of book.) 

Field Orders . Det. Amb. Co. No. 1 

No. 1, (x) Advance Guard. Det 1st Div. 

Troops Leavenworth, Kansas, 

(a) Advance Cavalry . ^ ', . P ^"?- '^^' ^'^^ ^- ^' 

Captain B 1. A Red force of all arms is reported to have camped near 

Tr. A 1st Cav ATCHISON^ last night. Its cavalry patrols were seen near 

(iess 1 sqiiad) KICKAPOO yesterday. 

^^ ?}^PP?^^^' Our main body will follow the advance guard at one- 

1 . ^^^"T?! * lialf mile. 

1st Bn. 1st Inf. 

1 Squad Tr. A, 2. This advance guard will march on KICKAPOO. 

1st Cav. 

Det. Co. A, Engrs. 3, (a) The advance cavalry will leave camp at once and 

(c) Reserve— in march via ATCHISON CROSS to KICKAPOO, SHERI- 

order of march: DAN'S DRIVE and the country west of the line of march 
will be carefully observed. 
Hq. and 2nd Bn, 

1st Inf. (b) The point of the support will start at 5:45 A. M. 

Btry. B, 5th and march by the ATCHISON CROSS-FRENCHMAN- 

F. A. KICKAPOO road. 
3d Bn. 1st Inf. (c) The reserve will follow the support at 800 yards. 

(x) This order is issued pursuant to a previous "march order," and assumes that 
the troops designated for the advance guard have been notified when and where to 
assemble. 

lAbout fourteen miles northwest of Ft. Leavenworth. 

[439] 



512 

4. The field train will assemble near 70 at 7 A. M. under Captain X, Quarter- 
master, 1st Inf., and join the field train of the main body as that train passes. 

5. I shall be at the head of the reserve. 

Y. 

Colonel, 
Commanding. 

Delivered verbally to assembled troop, battalion and battery 
commanders and staff; copy to det. commander by Lt. N. 

Note: The paragraphs on the left lettered (a), (b), (e), etc., 
are called the distribution, and those on the right numbered 1, 2, 3, etc., 
are called body. 

In issuing his order to an advance guard a noncommissioned officer 
should follow the form above, except that it should be verbal, and the 
troops in each part of the advance guard should be named in the body 
of the order. For example, in giving an advance guard order for one 
platoon, the noncommissioned officer would say, for instance, to his 
platoon: 

'^A Eed battalion is reported to have camped near Atchison last 
night. Our battalion will march towards Kickapoo this morning. 

^'This platoon will form the advance guard and will march out the 
Atchison Pike, followed by the main body at 500 yards. 

'^The point will start at 5:45 A. M. and move by the Atchison 
Cross-Prenchman-Kickapoo road. The remainder of the advance guard 
will follow at 300 yards. 

'^I will march with the point.'' 

ADVANCE GUAED PEOBLEMS 

Problem No. 1. (Infantry) 
512. Captain (to one platoon of his company) : We will assume that 
our battalion camped last night at Oxford (Elementary Map) in the 
enemy's country. It is now sunrise, 5:30 A. M.; camp has been broken 
and we are ready to march. The officers have returned from reporting 
to the m^ajor for orders and I fall in the company and give the follow- 
ing orders: 

''A regiment of the enemy's cavalry is thought to be marching 
towards Salem from the south. Our battalion will march at once towards 
Salem to guard the railroad trestle over Sandy Creek, following this road 
(jjointing southeast along the road out of Oxford) and the Chester Pike, 
which is one and three-quarters miles from here. 

''This company will form the advance gnard. 

''Sergeant Adam.s, you will take Corporal Baker's squad and form 
the point, followed by the remainder of the company at about 400 yards. 
Patrols and connecting files will be furnished by the company. 

' ' The company wagon will join the wagons of the battalion. 

"I will be with the company. 

"Move out at once." 

The weather is fine and the roads are good and free from dust. 
It is August and nearly all the crops are harvested. Bushes and weeds 
form a considerable growth along the fences bordering the road. 



[440] 



512 (contd.) 

Sergeant, give your orders. 

Sergeant Adams: 1st squad, 1. Right, 2. FACE, 1. Forward, 2. 
MARCH. Corporal Baker, take Carter (Baker ^s rear rank man) and go 
ahead of the squad about 200 yards. Move out rapidly until you get 
your distance and then keep us in sight. 

I would then have the two leading men of the rest of the squad 
follow on opposite sides of the road, as close to the fence as possible 
for good walking. This would put the squad in two columns of files of 
three men each, leaving the main roadway clear and making the squad 
as inconspicuous as possible, without interfering with ease of marching 
or separating the men. [Par. 511b (c).] What sort of crops are in the 
fields on either side of the road? 

Captain: The field on the right (south) is meadow land; that on 
the le^ as far as the railroad, is cut hay; beyond the railroad there is 
more meadow land. 

Sergeant Adams: I would have told Corporal Baker to wait at 
the cross roads by the Baker house for orders and — 

Captain: If you were actually on the ground you probably could 
not see the cross roads from Oxford. In solving map problems like these 
do not take advantage of seeing on the map all the country that you 
are supposed to go over, and then give orders about doing things at 
places concerning which you would not probably have any knowledge 
if actually on the ground without the map. 

Besides, in this particular case, it was a mistake to have your 
point wait at the cross roads. If there was any danger of their taking 
the wrong road it would be a different matter, but here your mission re- 
quires you to push ahead. (Par. 511c.) The major is trying to get south 
of the trestle towards Salem before the cavalry can arrive and destroy it. 

Sergeant Adams: I would march steadily along the road, ordering 
the last man to keep a lookout to the rear for signals from the connect- 
ing file (Par. 511a), and I would direct one of the leading men to watch 
for signals from Corporal Baker. 

Captain: You should have given the direction about watching for 
signals earlier, as tKis' is very important. You also should have ordered 
two men to follow ialong the timber by the creek to your south until you 
signaled for them to come in. The trees along the creek would obstruct 
your view over the country beyond the creek. 

Sergeant Adams: But I thought. Captain, that the patrolling 
was to be done by the company. 

Captain: Yes, the patrolling is to be done by the company, but 
the creek is only a quarter of a mile, about 400 yards, from the road you 
are following and the men sent there are merely flankers, not a patrol. 
You have eight men under your command and you are responsible for 
the ground within several hundred yards on either side of your route of 
march. Long Ridge is almost too far for you to send your men, because 
they would fall far behind in climbing and descending its slopes, but 
it would not be a great mistake if you sent two men there. As Long 
Ridge affords an extended view of the valley through which the Chester 
Pike runs, a patrol should go up on i.t and remain there until the battalion 
passes, and this would be more than the leading squad could be expected 

[441] 



512 (contd.) 

to attend to. The creek is almost too far from the road in places, but 
as it is open meadow land you can keep the men within easy touch of you 
and recall them by signal at any moment you desire. In this work you 
can see how much depends on good judgment and a proper understand- 
ing of one's mission. 

Corporal Baker, explain how you would move out with Carter. 

Corporal Baker: We would alternate the walk and double time 
until we had gotten about 200 yards ahead of the squad. I would then 
say, *^ Carter, walk along this side of the road (indicates side), keeping 
on the lookout for signals from the squad. I will go about fifty yards 
ahead of you. ' ' I would keep to the opposite side of the road from 
Carter, trying to march steadily at the regular marching gait, and 
keeping a keen watch on everything in front and to the flanks. 

Captain: Yery good. When you arrive at the cross roads you see 
a man standing in the yard of the Baker house. 

Corporal Baker: I would not stop, but would continue on by the 
cross roads, as I have no time to question the man and the Sergeant will 
want to do that. I would call to him and ask him if he had seen any of 
the enemy about and how far it was to the Chester Pike. If anything 
looked suspicious around the house or barnyard, 1 would investigate. 

Captain: Sergeant, you arrive at the cross roads, and see the 
Corporal and Carter going on ahead of you. 

Sergeant Adams: I would have already signaled to the two men 
following the creek to come in and would send a man to meet them with 
the following order: *'Tell Davis to move along the railroad fill with 
Evans, keeping abreast of us. Then you return to me." I would then 
say, 'Tiske, look in that house and around the barn and orchard and 
then rejoin me down this road (pointing east).'' I would have the civi- 
lian join me and walk down the road with me while I questioned him. 

Captain: Do you think you have made careful arrangements for 
searching the house, etc., by leaving only one man to do the work? 

Sergeant Adams: I have not sufficient men nor time enough to 
do much more. I simply want to make sure things are reasonably safe 
and I thought that a couple of men from the main body of the advance 
guard would do any careful searching, questioning, etc., that might be 
deemed necessary. I must not delay the march. 

Captain: That is right. You learn nothing from the civilian and 
he does not arouse any suspicion on your part. You continue along the 
road. The fields to the north of the road are in wheat stubble; the 
ground to the south, between your road and the railroad, is rough, rocky 
grass land with frequent clumps of bushes. Davis and Evans, your right 
flankers on the railroad fill, are just approaching the cut; Fiske has 
rejoined; Corporal Baker and his men are about 200 yards from the road 
forks at Brown's, and you and your four men are 200 yards in their 
rear, at the turn of the road. At this m^oment a half dozen shots are fired 
down the road in your direction from behind the wall along the edge of 
the orchard on the Brown farm. This firing continues and your two 
leading men are lying down at the roadside returning the fire. Tell me 
quickly just what you are going to do? 

Sergeant Adams: I order my four men to deploy as skirmishers 
in that field (pointing to the rough ground south of the road); I go under 

[442] 



512 (contd.) 
the fence with the men and lead them forward at a fast run, unless the 
fire is very heavy. 

Captain (interrupting the Sergeant) : Davis, you had just reached 
the cut on the railroad when this happened. What do you do? 

Private Davis: I take Evans forward with me at a run through 
the cut. What do I see along the Chester Pike or Sandy Creek? 

Captain; You see no sign of the enemy any place, except the 
firing over the wall. 

Private Davis: I run down the south side of the fill and along 
towards the road with Evans to open fire on the enemy from their flank, 
and also to see what is in the orchard. I will probably cross the road 
so that I can see behind the stone wall. 

Captain: That^s fine and shows how you should go ahead at such 
a time without any orders. There is usnally no time or opportunity at 
such a moment f o» sending instructions and you must use common sense 
and do something. Generally it would have been better to have tried 
to signal or send work back that there was nothing in sight along the 
road or in the valley, but in this particular case you could probably do 
more good by going quickly around in rear as you did, to discover what 
was there and assist in quickly dislodging whatever it was. If there 
had been no nose of the ridge to hide you as you came up and a con- 
venient railroad fill to hurry along behind as you made for the road, 
your solution might have been quite different. 

Sergeant, continue with your movements. 

Sergeant Adains: I would attempt ta rush the wall. If the fire 
were too heavy, I would open fire (at will) with all my men, and, if I 
seemed to get a little heavier fire than the enemy's, I would start half 
of my men forward on a rush while the others fired. I would try to rush 
in on the enemy with as little delay as possible, until it developed that 
he had more than a small detachment there. I assumed it was a delay- 
ing patrol in front of me, and as my mission requires me to secure the 
uninterrupted march of the main body, I must not permit any small de- 
tachment to delay me. If, however, it proves to be a larger force, for 
instance, the head of an advance guard, I will lose some men by plung- 
ing in, but as I understand it, that is the duty of the point. Then again, 
if it be the head of a hostile advance guard, I will want to rush them out 
of their favorable position under cover of the stone wall, buildings and 
orchard, before any more of their force can come up. This would give 
the favorable position to our force; by acting too cautiously we would 
lose the valuable moments in which the enemy's reenforcements (next 
elements of the advance guard) were coming up, with this desirable posi- 
tion being weakly held by a small part of the enemy. 

Captain: That is all correct. What messages would you have 
sent? 

Sergeant Adams: Up to the present time I would not have sent 
any. I could not have sent any. I could not afford to take the time to 
send a man back, nor could I spare the man. Besides, all I could say 
was that we were fired on, and you should be able to see and hear that 
from where the company is. 

[4431 



512 (contd.) 

Captain: About the time you reached the position of Corporal 
Baker the firing ceases, and when you reach the wall you see five mounted 
men galloping northeast up Farm Lane. The Brown farm appears to be 
deserted. 

Sergeant Adams: I would turn to one of the men and say, '^Run 
back to the Captain and tell him we were fired on from this orchard by 
a mounted patrol of five men who are galloping off up a lane to the 
northeast. I am going south/' When he had repeated the message I 
would start south down the Chester Pike, directing Corporal Baker to 
follow this road south and to tell Davis to follow the high ridge west 
of the road, going through the clump of woods just ahead, i would 
send one man as a left flanker to follow the west bank of Sandy Creek. 
This would leave me with two men, one watching for signals from the 
front and along Sandy Creek, the other from Davis and from the rear. 
I would expect to see a patrol from the company moving across towards 
Boling Woods. Had I not been mixed up in a fight as I approached the 
Brown farm I would have sent two men as left flankers across country 
to the cut on the Chester Pike on the western edge of the Boling Woods. 

Captain: Very good. That is sufficient for this problem. All of 
you should have caught the idea of the principal duties of the point and 
flankers of an advance guard. You must watch the country to prevent 
being surprised and you must at the same time manage to push ahead 
with ,the least possible delay. The point cannot be very cautious so far 
as concerns its own safety, for this would mean frequent halts which 
would delay the troops in rear, but it must be cautious. about reconnoiter- 
ing all parts of the ground near the road which might conceal large 
bodies of the enemy. 

The leader of the point must be careful in using his men or he will 
get them so scattered that they will become entirely separated and he 
will lose all control of them. As soon as the necessity for flankers on 
one side of the line of march no longer exists, signal for them to rejoin 
and do not send them out again so long as you can see from the road 
all the country you should cover. 

Problem No. 2. (Infantry) 

Captain (to one platoon of his company): Let us assume that 
this platoon is the advance party of an advance guard, ntarching through 
Salem along the Chester Pike [Par. 511b (b)]. One squad is 350 yards in 
front, acting as the point. The enemy is thought to be very near, but 
only two mounted patrols have been seen during the day. The com- 
mand is marching for Chester. The day is hot, the roads are good but 
dusty, and the crops are about to be harvested. 

Sergeant Adams, explain how you would conduct the march of the 
advance party, beginning with your arrival at the cross roads in Salem. 

Sergeant Adams: The platoon would be marching in column of 
squads and I would be at the head. Two pairs of connecting files would 
keep me in touch with the point. (Par. 511a.) I would now give this 
order: ''Corporal Smith, take two men from your squad and patrol north 
along this toslI (pointing up the Tracy-Maxey road) for a mile and then 
rejoin the column on this road (Chester Pike), to the west of you.'' I 
would then say to Private Barker, ''Take Carter and cut across to that 

[444] 



512 (contd.) 

railroad fill and go along- the top of that (Sandy) ridge, rejoining the 
column beyond the ridge. Corporal Smith with a patrol is going up this 
road. Keep a lookout for him/^ When we reached the point where the 
road crosses the south nose of Sandy Kidge and I saw the valley in front 
of me with the long high ridge west of Sandy Creek, running parallel 
to the Chester Pike and about 800 yards west of it, I would give this 
order: '* Corporal Davis, take the three remaining men in Corporal Smith's 
squad, cross the creek there (pointing in the direction of the Barton 
farm) go by that orchard, and move north along that high ridge, keep- 
ing the column in sight. Make an effort to keep abreast of the advance 
guard, which will continue along this road.'' 

I gave Corporal Davis the remaining men out of Corporal Smith's 
squad because I did not want to break up another squad and as this is, 
in my opinion, a very important patrol, I wanted a noncommissioned 
officer in charge of it. Unless something else occurs this will be all the 
patrols I intend sending out until we pass the steel railroad trestle over 
Sandy Creek. 

Captain: Your point about not breaking up a squad when you 
could avoid it by using the men remaining in an already broken squad, 
is a very important one. Take this particular case. You first sent out 
two pairs of connecting files between the advance party and your point — 
four men. This leaves a corporal and three men in that squad. If we 
assume that no patrols were out' when we passed through Salem, this 
corporal and two of his men could have been sent up the Tracy-Maxey 
road, leaving one man to be temporarily attached to some squad. From 
the last mentioned squad you would pick your two men for the Sandy 
Ridge patrol and also the corporal and three men for the Barton farm, 
etc., patrol. This would leave three men in this squad and you would 
have under your immediate command two complete squads and three 
men. As the patrols return, organize new squads immediately and con- 
stantly endeavor to have every man attached to a squad. This is one 
of your most important duties, as it prevents disorder when some serious 
situation suddenly arises. Also it is one of the duties of the detachment 
commander that is generally overlooked until too late. 

The direction you sent your three patrols was good and their 
orders clear, covering the essential points, but as you have in a very short 
space of time, detached nine men, almost a third of your advance party, 
don't you think you should have economized more on men? 

Sergeant Adams: The Sandy Ridge patrol is as small as you can 
make it — two men.^ I thought the other two patrols were going to be 
detached so far from the column that they should be large enough to 
send a message or two and still remain out. I suppose it would be 
better to send but two men with Corporal Davis, but I think Corporal 
Smith should have two with him. 

Captain: Yes, I agree with you, for you are entering a valley 
which is, in effect, a defile, and the Tracy-Maxey road is a very danger- 
ous avenue of approach to your main body. But you must always bear 
in mind that it is a mistake to use one more man than is needed to ac- 
complish the object in view. The more you send away from your ad- 
vance party, the more scattered and weaker your command becomes, and 

[445] 



512 (contd.) 

this is dispersion, whick constitutes one of the^ravest, and at the same 

time, most frequent tactical errors. 

To continue the problem, we will suppose you have reached the 
stone bridge over Sandy Creek; the point is at the cross roads by the 
Smith house; you can see the two men moving along Sandy Eidge; and 
Corporal Davis' patrol is just entering the orchard by the Barton farm. 
Firing suddenly commences well to the front and you hear your point 
reply to it. 

Sergeant Adams: I halt to await information from the point. 

Captain: That is absolutely wrong. You command the advance 
party of an advance guard; your mission requires you to secure the un- 
interrupted march of the main body; and at the first contact you halt, 
thus interrupting the march (Par. 511). The sooner you reach the 
point, the better are your chances for driving off the enemy if he is not 
too strong, or the quicker you find out his strength and give your com- - 
. mander in the rear the much desired information. 

Sergeant Adams: Then I push ahead with the advance party, 
sending back the following message — 

Captain (interrupting) ; It is not time to send a message. You 
know too little and in a few minutes you will be up with the point 
where you can hear what has happened and see the situation for your- 
self. Then you can send back a valuable message. When but a few 
moments delay will probably permit you to secure much more detailed 
information, it is generally best to wait for that short time and thus 
avoid using two messengers. When you reach the cross roads you find 
six men of the point deployed behind the fence, under cover of the tree^ 
along the County Koad, just west of the Chester Pike, firing at the stone 
wall along the Mills' farm lane. The enemy appears to be deployed be- 
hind this stone wall, from the Chester Pike west JPor a distance of fifty 
yards, and his fire is much heavier than that of your point. You think 
he has at least twenty rifles there. You cannot see down the Chester Pike 
• beyond the enemy's position. Your patrol on Sandy Eidge is midway 
between the 68 and 66 knolls, moving north. The ground in your front, 
west of the road, is a potato field; that east of ^the road as far as the 
swamp, is rough grass land. 

Sergeant Adams: I give order, '^ Corporal Gibbs, deploy your 
squad to the right of the Pike and push forward between the Pike and 
the swamp. Corporal Hall (commands the point), continue a heavy fire. 
Here are six more men for your squad. ' ' I give him the four connecting 
files and two of the three men in the advance party whose squad is on 
patrol duty. ^'Corporal Jackson, get your squad under cover here. 
Lacey, run back to the major and tell him the point has been stopped by 
what appears to be twenty of the enemy deployed behind a stone wall 
across the valley 500 yards in our front. I am attacking with ad- 
vance party." 

Captain: Corporal Davis (commands patrol near Barton farm), 
you can hear the firing and see that the advance is stopped. What 
do you do? 

Corporal Davis: I would head straight across for the clump of 
woods on the ridge just above the Mill's farm, moving as rapidly 
as possible. 

[446] 



512 (contd.) 

Captain: That is all right. Sergeant, Corporal Hall's squad keeps 
up a heavy fire^ Corporal Gibb's squad deploys to the right of the pike, 
rushes forward about 75 yards, but is forced to lie down by the enemy's 
fire, and opens fire. Corporal Gibbs, what would your command for 
firing be? 

Corporal Gibbs: AT THE BOTTOM OF THAT WALL. BAT- 
TLE SIGHT. CLIP FIEING. 

Captain: Why at the bottom of the wall? 

Corporal Gibbs: The men are winded and excited and will prob- 
ably fire high, so I gave them the bottom of the wall as an objective. 

Captain: The enemy's fire seems as heavy as yours. Sergeant, 
what do you do? 

Sergeant Adams: I give this order, '^Corporal Jackson, deploy 
your squad as skirmishers on the left of Corporal Hall's squad and open 
fire." What effect does this additional fire have on the enemy? 

Captain: His bullets seem to go higher and wider. You appear 
to be getting fire superiority over him. 

Sergeant Adams: If I do not see any signs of the enemy being 
reenforced, dust in the road behind his position, etc., I take immediate 
c"ommand of the squads of Corporals Hall and Jackson, and lead them 
forward on a rush across the potato field. 

Captain: Corporal Gibbs, what do you do when you see the other 
two squads rush? 

Corporal Gibbs: I order, FIRE AT WILL, and urge the men 
to shoot rapidly in order to cover the advance. 

Captain: Sergeant Adams' squads are forced to halt after ad- 
vancing about 150 yards. 

Corporal Gibbs: I keep up a hot fire until they can re- 
sume their firing, when I lead my squad forward in a rush. 

Captain: What do you do, Sergeant? 

Sergeant Adams: I would have the Corporals keep up a heavy 
fire. By this time I should think the support would be up to the cross 
roads. 

Captain: It is, but have you given up your attack? 

Sergeant Adams: If it looks as if I could drive the enemy out 
on my next rush, I do so, but otherwise I remain where I am, as I have 
no reserve under my control and the action has gotten too serious for me 
to risk anything more when my chief is practically on the ground to make 
the next decision. He should have heard something about what is on the 
Pike behind the enemy, from the patrol on Sandy Kidge. 

Captain: Your solution seems correct to me. Why did you send 
Corporal Gibbs' squad up between the pike and the swamp? 

Sergeant Adams: It looked as if he would strike the«nemy from 
a better quarter; there appeared to be better cover that way, afforded by 
the turn in the road, which must have some weeds, etc., along it, and the 
swamp would prevent him from getting too far separated from the re- 
mainder of the advance party. 

Captain: The Sergeant's orders for the attack were very good. 
He gave his squad leaders some authority and attached his extra men to 
a squad. He did not attempt to assume direct control of individual men, 

[447] 



512 (contd.) 

but managed the three squads and made the squad leaders manage the 
individual menv This is the secret of successful troop leading. His 
orders were short, plain and given in proper sequence. 
Problem No. 3 (Infantry) ^ 
(See Fort Leavenworth map in pocket at back of book.) 
Situation. 

A Blue battalion, in hostile country, is in camp for the night, 
August 5-6, at Sprong (ja'). At 9:00 P. M., August 5th, Lieutenant A, 
Adjutant gives a copy of the following order to Sergeant B: 

1st Battalion, 1st Infantry, 

Sprong, Kansas, 

5 Aug., '09. 
Field Orders No. 5. 

1. The enemy ^s infantry is six miles east of FORT LEAVENWOETH. 
His cavalry patrols were seen at F (qg') today. 

Our regiment will reach FRENCHMAN'S (oc') at noon tomorrow. 

2. The battalion will march tomorrow to seize the ROCK ISLAND 
BRIDGE (q) at FORT LEAVENWORTH. 

3. (a) The advance guard, consisting of 1st platoon Co. A and 
mounted orderlies B, C, and D, under Serge^ant B, will precede the main 
boJy at 400 yards. 

(b) The head of the main body will march at 6:30 A. M., from 19, 
via the 17 (jC)— 15 (jg') 1—5 (Im')— FORT LEAVENWORTH (om') 
road. 

4. The baggage will follow close behind the main body under escort 
of Corporal D and one squad, Co. B. 

5. Send reports to head of main body. 

C, 
Major, Comdg. 
Copies to the company commanders, to Sergeant B and Corporal D. 
A. Eectuired, 1. Give Sergeant B's estimate of the situation. (The 
estimate of the military situation includes the following points: 

1. His orders or mission and how much discretion he is allowed. 

2. The ground as it influences his duty. 

3. The position, strength and probable intentions of the enemy. 

4. Sergeant B's decision.) 

Answer. 1. The size of the advance guard, its route and the dis- 
tance it is to move in front of the main body are prescribed by Major C. 
Sergeant B is free to divide up the advance as he sees fit, to use the 
various parts so as to best keep open the way of the main body, main- 
tain the distance of 400 yards in front of itj and protect it from surprise 
by the enemy. 

2. The ground may be such as to make easy or to hinder reeonnais- 
sance, such as hills or woods; to impede or hasten the march, such as 
roads, streams, defiles; t0 offer good or poor defensive positions; to offer 
good or poor opportunities for an attack. Sergeant B sees from his map 
that the ground is rolling and open as far as Kem (ji') with good 
positions for reconnaissance and forvdefense or attack. There is a bridge 
over Salt Creek, (ig') which has steep banks and will be a considerable 
obstacle if the bridge has been destroyed. From this creek to Kern the 



512 (contd.) 

advance would be under effective fire from Hancock Hill (ki'), so that 
these heights must be seized before the main body reaches 15 (jg')- 

Beyond Kern the heavy woods make reconnaissance difficult and 
must be treated somewhat like a defile by the point. (Par. 483.) 

3. There is little to fear from the main body of the enemy which is 
1^4 miles farther from the Kock Island bridge than we are, but we 
know the enemy has cavalry. The size of the cavalry force is not known, 
and may be sufficient to cause us considerable delay, especially in the 
woods. The enemy's evident intention is to keep us from seizing the 
bridge. 

4. Having considered all these points. Sergeant B comes to the fol- 
lowing decision: * * * (Before reading the decision as contained in 
the following paragraph, make one of your own.) 

Answer: To have .only an advance party with which to throw 
forward a point of 5 men 200 yards to the front and send out flankers, as 
needed (Par. 483) ; to send the three mounted orderlies well to the front 
of the point to gain early information of the enemy, especially on Han- 
cock Hill (ji') and the ridge to the north of 11 (jj')' 

Eequired, 2. Sergeant B's order. (Par. 459.) 

Answer. Given verbally to the platoon and mounted orderlies, at 
9:30 P. M. 

"The enemy's cavalry patrols were seen at F (qh') today; no 
hostile infantry is on this side of the Missouri river. The battalion will 
move tomorrow to Fort Leavenworth, leaving 19 (ja') at 6:30 A. M. 

"This platoon and orderlies B, C, and D will form the advance 
guard, and will start from the hedge 400 yards east of 19 at 6:30 A. M. 
via the 17 (jc')— 15 (ig')—5 (Im') road. 

"The point, Corporal Smith and 4 men of his squad, will precede 
the remainder of the advance guard at 200 yards. 

"I will be with the advance party. Private X and Y will act as 
connecting files with the main body." 

The flankers will be sent out from time to time by Sergeant B as 
necessary. 

Required, 3. The flankers sent out by Sergeant B between 19 
(ja') and 15 (jg-). 

Answer. A patrol of 3 men is sent to Hill 900 southeast of 19 
(ja'), thence by Moss (kc') and Taylor (Ic') houses to Hill 840 east of 
Taylor, thence to join at 15 (jg')- 

Two men are sent from the advance party as it passes Hill 875.5 
(ie') to the top of this hill to reconnqiter to the front and northeast. 
These men return to the road and join after the advance party has 
reached Salt Creek. Two men are sent ahead of the advance party at a 
double time to take position on 'Hill 875 northeast of J. E. Daniels' 
place (jf) and reconnoiter to the northeast and east. 

Reasons. The patrol sent out on the south moves out far enough 
to get a good view from the hills which an enemy could observe or fire 
into the column. There is no necessity of sending out flankers north of 
the road at first, because from the road itself a good view is obtained. 
Hills 875.5 and 875 give splendid points for observing all the ground to 
the north and east. (Don 't send flankers out unless they are necessary.) 

[449] 



512 (contd. ) 

Kequired, 4. When the advance party reaches J. E. Daniels' house 
(je') a civilian leaves the house and starts toward 15. What action 
does Sergeant B take? 

Eequired, 5. When the advance party reaches Salt Creek bridge 
(jg') the point signals '* enemy in sight/' and Private H reports that he 
saw about 6 or 8 mounted men ride up to the edge of the woods at Kern, 
. halt a moment, and disappear. What action does Sergeant B take? 

Answer. He at once sends a message back by Private H stating 
the facts. He then orders the advance party to move forward, hastens 
up to the point and directs it to continue the march, seeking cover of 
fences and ravines and hill top. 

Bequired, 6. When the point reaches Schroeder (jh') it receives 
fire from the orchard at Kern. What action is taken? 

Answer. The men in the point are moved rapidly down the hill 
and gain shelter in the ravines leading toward Kern. Two squads are 
rapidly placed in line along the ridge west of Schroeder and under cover 
of their fire the remainder of the advance party run down the hill at 10 
yards distance to join the point. A squad of this force is then hurried 
forward to the Kern house. Here the squad is stopped by fire and Ser- 
geant B deploys two more squads which advance by rushes and drive out 
the enemy, found to be 10 cavalrymen. The squads left at Schroeder now 
join at double time and the advance party moves forward, without having 
delayed the march of the main body. 

ProJ)lem No. 4 (Infantry) 
Situation: 

A Blue force of one regiment of infantry has outposts facing south 
on the line Pope Hill (sm') — National cemetery (pk') — E (qh'). A Red 
force is reported to have reached Soldiers' Home (3 miles south of 
Leavenworth) from the south at 7:00 o'clock this morning. Corporal A 
is directed by Sergeant B, in command of the left support at Rabbit 
Point (tn'), to take out a patrol toward the waterworks and south along 
the Esplanade (xo') to the Terminal bridge. 

Bequired, 1. Give Sergeant B's orders to Corporal A. 

Answer. "The enemy, strength unknown, was at Soldiers' Home 
at 7:00 o'clock this morning. Another patrol will advance along Grant 
avenue (tm'). 

*'Our outposts will remain here for the day. 

"Select from the first section a patrol and reconnoiter this road 
(Farragut avenue) as far as the waterworks (vn'), thence by Esplanade 
to the Terminal bridge, and report on the ground in our front. When 
you reach the Terminal bridge return if no enemy is seen. 

"Send reports here." 

Beqnired, 2, How many men does Corporal A select, and why? 
(Par. 456.) 

Answer, Five men are taken because the patrpl is to reconnoiter, 
not to fight, and on account of the distance to go and lack of information 
of the enemy, 2 or 3 messages may have to be sent. 

Bequired, 3. What equipment should Corporal A have? (Par. 457.) 

Beqnired, 4. State the points to be noted by Corporal A in select- 
ing his patrol and what inspection does he make? (Par. 460.) 

[450] 



512 (contd.) 

Answer. He selects Privates C, D, E, F and G, on account of 
their bravery, attention to duty and discretion. He directs them to carry 
one meal in their haversacks, full canteen and fifty rounds of ammuni- 
tion. He then inspects them as to their physical condition, sees that they 
have proper equipment and that nothing to rattle or glisten is carried. 

Required, 5. What does Corporal A next dot (Par. 461.) 

Answer. He gives them their instructions as follows: *'The 
enemy, strength unknown, was at Soldiers' Home (about three miles 
south of Leavenworth) at 7 o'clock this morning. There will be a 
friendly patrol along that road (pointing to Grant avenue). We are to 
reconnoiter along this road and down toward that bridge (pointing). Be 
very careful not to be seen, take advantage of all cover, and keep touch 
with C and myself on this road at the point of the patrol. In case we 
get separated meet at the waterworks (vn').'' 

He then explains the signals to be used, and moves the patrol in 
close order out along the road until it passes the sentinel at the bridge 
XV (un'), to whom he gives the direction to be taken by the patrol. 

Required, 6. Upon leaving XV, what formation would the patrol 
take, and reasons for same. (Par. 463.) 

Answer. Corporal A and Private C form the point on the road 
leading southwest of the waterworks; Private D moves on the left over- 
looking the railroad; Private E moves promptly up Corral creek (um') to 
the top of Grant Hill (urn') to observe the country toward the south- 
west; Private F moves about 50 yards in rear of the point, followed at 
50 yards by Private G. 

Corporal A forms his patrol as stated because of the necessity of 
getting a view from the hill on each side. Only one man is sent out on 
each side because they can be plainly seen by the patrol on the road, and 
no connecting file is necessary. The distances taken along the road assure 
at least one man's escape, and Corporal A is in front to get a good view 
and to signal the flankers. 

Problem No. 5 (Infantry) 
Situation: 

The head of the patrol is now at the bridge, XVI (un') northwest 
of the waterworks. 

Private E has reached the top of Grant Hill and signals the 
enemy in sight; the patrol halts and Corporal A moves out to meet 
Private E who is coming down toward the patrol. He says he saw three 
mounted men ride up to Grant and Metropolitan avenues (wm') from 
the south and after looking north a moment move west. 

Required, 1. Corporal A's action. (Pars. 474 and 474a.) 
Answer. Corporal A at once writes the following message and 
sends it back by Private E: 
"No. 1. Patrol, Company B, 

Farragut Avenue, 
Northwest of Waterworks, 
To Commander Blue Left Support, 10 May, '09, 8:30 A. M. 

Rabbit Point. 
Three mounted Reds, seen by Private E, just now reconnoitered at 

[451] 



612 (contd. ) 

Grant and Metropolitan avenues; they are moving west on Metropolitan 
avenue; the patrol will continue toward the Terminal bridge. 

A, 
Corporal. ' ' 

Reasons. The message is sent because this is the first time the 
enemy has been seen, and they have not been reported north of Soldiers' 
Home before. The message should state who saw the enemy, and the man 
seeing them should always carry the message telling of the facts. The 
patrol would not allow this small hostile patrol to stop .its advance, but 
would proceed on its route cautiously to avoid being seen, and to see if 
the Eed cavalrymen are followed by others of the enemy. 

Required, 2. Give the method of reconnoitering the buildings at 
the waterworks and coal mine. (Par. 488.) 

Answer. Private D carefully examines the east side of the 
enclosures and buildings, while Private C examines the west side. The 
remainder of the patrol halts concealed in the cut west of the north 
enclosure, until C and D signal no enemy in sight, whereupon the patrol 
moves forward along the road (XV — 3rd St.), C and D advancing rapidly 
between the buildings to the town where they join the patrol. 

Required, 3. Give the route followed by E from Grant Hill to 
edge of Leavenworth. 

Answer. He moves down the east slope of Grant Hill to the ravine 
just east of the old E. E. bed (un/), being careful to keep concealed 
from the direction of Leavenworth. He moves up the ravine, keeping a 
sharp lookout to the front, and moving rapidly until abreast, if he has 
fallen behind. He takes the branch ravine lying just west of Circus 
Hill (vm'), and moves up to its end. Here he halts and makes careful 
inspection of Metropolitan avenue and the street south into the city. 
Being sure the coast is clear, he darts across the narrow ridge south of 
Circus Hill to the ravine to the east and then joins the patrol. He 
reports to Corporal A any indication of the enemy he may have seen. 

Problem No. 6 (Infantry) 
Situation: 

A Blue force holds Fort Leavenworth (om') in hostile country. 
Outposts occupy the line Salt Creek Hill (gh'j — 13 (ij') — Sheridan's 
Drive, (mi') against the Eeds advancing from the northwest. 

At 4:30 P. M., June 25th, Sergeant A is given the following orders 
by Captain B, commanding the support: 

"The enemy will probably reach Kickapoo late today. Our out- 
posts extend as far north as Salt Creek Hill. There were six of our men 
prisoners at 45 (dc') this afternoon at 1 o'clock, being held by 15 home 
guards at Kickapoo. Take . . . men from the company and move to 
Kickapoo, recapture the prisoners and gain all the information you can 
of the enemy north of there.'' 

Required, 1. How many men does Captain B name, and why? 
(Par. 456.) 

Answer. Thirty men are assigned. 

Reason. This is twice as many as the enemy holding the prisoners, 
and to secure secrecy no larger force than is absolutely necessary should 

[452] 



512 (contd.) 

bo taken. This force will allow men to surround the enemy while the 
remainder rush them. 

Bequired, 2. Give the order of Sergeant- A to his patrol. (See 
6th requirement, Problem 4.) 

Required, S. What route will the patrol take? 

Answer, 11 (jj')— 13 (ij')— Salt Creek Hill (gh')— and along the 
edge of the woods east of the M. P. K. E. (fg') as far as the bridge 
opposite Kickapoo Hill — thence up Kickapoo Hill toward 45 (dc'). 

Reasons. Since the patrol's orders do not require any reconnais- 
sance before reaching Kickapoo the shortest and most practical route 
is chosen. The route as far as Salt Creek Hill lies behind our outpost 
line and is thus protected. The main roads are avoided because they 
will be carefully* watched by the enemy. The edge of the woods east of 
the M. P. Ry. (beginning about ff') gives good cover and by moving to 
the bridge the patrol can probably sneak close in on the enemy and 
capture them by surprise. 

Problem No. 7 (Infantry) 
Situation: 

The patrol reaches the top of Kickapoo Hill (cd')- Sergeant A 
and Private O move cautiously to the top and see the six prisoners in the 
cemetery (cd') just west of Kickapoo Hill, and a Red sentinel at each 
corner. Just west of the cemetery are about 10 more Reds. No others 
are visible. 

Required, 1. What decision does Sergeant A make and what 
does he do? 

Answer. He decides to capture the enemy by surprise. He leaves 
Private C to watch and, moving cautiously back to his patrol, makes the 
following dispositions: Corporal D with 10 men to move up to Private G 
and cover the enemy, remaining concealed. He takes the remainder of the 
patrol with fixed bayonets around the northeast slope of Kickapoo Hill 
in the woods and moves up the ravine toward 29. When his detachment 
arrives within about 100 yards of the enemy, they charge bayonet and 
rush them. Corporal D's party at the same time rush in from the 
opposite side. (Note: The enemy are demoralized by the surprise and 
are captured without a shot being fired.) 

Required, 2. What action does Sergeant A now take? 

Answer. He causes the enemy to be kept apart while he and his 
noncommissioned officers question them separately. He "tlien questions 
the Blue prisoners, and furnishing them the guns taken from the Reds, 
sends them and the captured Reds back to our line under Corporal D, 
with a written message giving the information secured from his ques- 
tions. (Par. 476.) 

Required, 3. What does he then do? 

Answer. Places his main body in concealment at the Cemetery 
(cd') and sends a patrol under Corporal H via 35—41 — 43, and one under 
Corporal F via 29 — 27 — 23 west to learn further of the enemy in execution 
of the second part of his orders. 



[453] 



512 (contd. ) 

The patrol under Corporal H sends back the following message: 
''No 1. Patrol Company A, 1st Infantry, 

21 June, '09; 5:30 P. M. 
Commander Expeditionary Patrol at 45: 

A column of infantry is moving east about 1 mile west of 
Schweizer (aa'),* about 800 yards in front of this body is another small 
body with 8 to' 10 men 300 yards still farther east. It took the main 
body 2 min., 45 sec. to pass a point on the road. I remain in observation. 

H, 
Corporal." 

Eeciulred, 3. The size of the command reported by Corporal H 
and its formation. (Par. 475b.) 

Answer. One battalion infantry (512 men), preceded by 1 section 
at advance guard. The advance guard having only advance party and 
point, 2% minutes x 175 = 481 men in the main body, leaving about 
32 men for the ad^'ance men for the advance guard. 

Problem No. 8 (Infantry) 
General Situation: 

A Blue force of one regiment of infantry has outposts facing 
south on the line Pope Hill (sm'), National Cemetery (qk') — E (qi')» A 
Red force moving north reached Soldiers ' Home at 7 o 'clock this morning. 
Special Situation: 

Corporal B is chosen by Sergeant A, commander of the right sup- 
port at the National Cemetery, to take a patrol south as far as 20th street 
(yf) and Metropolitan avenue (wh'), to report on the ground along the 
route, and to reconnoiter the enemy A friendly patrol moves along 
Sheridan's Drive (i) — Atchison Hill (rg') — Southwest Hill (ue'), and 
one on Prison Lane (rk'). 

Required, 1. Sergeant A's rrders, verbatim (that is, w^rd for 
word). 

2. Give the various details attended to by Corporal B. 

before he moves out with his patrol. 

3. What is the formation of the patrol when its point 

is at E (qh'). 

4. When the patrol reaches 14 (ug'), how are the inter- 

secting roads reconnoitered? 

5. Four mounted men are seen riding Vest at a walk at 

64 (wh'). What action does Corporal A takef 

6. Describe the ground passed over by the patrol. 

Problem No. 9 (Infantry). 
Situation: 

The enemy is moving east toward Frenchman (oc') and is 
expected to reach there early tomorrow. A company at 72 (uj') forms 
the left support of an outpost in hostile country, on the line 70 (vj') — 
National Cemetery (qj')- At 4 P. M. Sergeant A is ordered to take a 
patrol of 12 men and go to Frenchman and destroy the bridge there, and 
remain in observation in that vicinity all night. 
Required, 1. His orders to the patrol. 

2. The route the patrol will follow, and its formation 
crossing the Atchison Hill — Government Hill 
ridge. 



512 (contd.) 
3. Give the conduct of the patrol from Atchison Hill 
(rg') — Government Hill (tf) to its position at the 
, bridge at Frenchman. 
General Situation: 

A Blue squadron is camped for the night at Waterworks (vn'), 
Fort Leavenworth, and has outposts on the line XIV (un') — Grant Hill 
(um') — Prison Hill (wk'). A Eed force is reported to be advancing from 
the north on Kickapoo (cb'). 

Problem No. 10 (Cavalry) • 
Special Situation: 

Lieutenant A, commanding the left support on Prison Hill, at 5 
P. M., directs Sergeant Jones to take a patrol of 5 men from his platoon 
and move via Atchison Cross (ug') to the vicinity of Kickapoo and secure 
information of any enemy that may be in that locality. Another patrol 
is to go via Fort Leavenworth (ol'). 

Required, 1. The order given by Lieutenant A, verbatim. 
(Pars. 459 and 461.) 

Answer, ** Sergeant Jones, the enemy is north of Kickapoo, mov- 
ing on that place. The squadron will remain here tonight; Sergeant B 
will take a patrol through Fort Leavenworth. 

*' Select a patrol of 5 men from your platoon and move out via 
Frenchman's (oc') toward Kickapoo. 

''Secure any information you can of the enemy in that locality. 

''Report on the condition of the bridges between here and 47 (fd')* 

"You may have to stay out over night. 

"Send messages here.'' 

Sergeant Jones selects five good men, directs them to take one 
cooked ration each and canteen full of water. He inspects the men and 
horses carefully; sees that no horse of conspicuous color or that neighs 
is taken. Explains the orders to his men, etc., as was done in the 
infantry patrol. 

RecLUired, 2. What route does the patrol take, and why? 

Answer. Metropolitan avenue (w) — 70 (vj') — 72 (vj') — 14 (ug') 
—Frenchman (oc')— 17 (jc') — 47 (ec'). 

Reasons. The enemy is distant and Kickapoo, the objective of 
the patrol, is seen from the map, which Sergeant Jones has, to be over an . 
hour's ride at a walk and trot. It is not at all probable that the enemy 
will be met until the patrol reaches the vicinity of Kickapoo and Sergeant 
Jones decides to take the shortest and best road though it is a main high- 
way, instead of Sheridan's Drive (j) of the F (qg') — 15 (jg') lane. 

It is always well for a patrol to avoid main highways when the 
enemy is near, especially in hostile country, but here the time saved 
more than justifies the use of the direct route. 

Problem No. 11 (Cavalry) 
Same situation as Problem 1. 

Required, 1. The formation and conduct of the patrol as far as 
Frenchman 's. 

Answer. Sergeant Jones determines to move at a walk and trot 
(5 miles per hour) in order to reach the vicinity of Kickapoo and take 

[455] 



512 (contd. ) 

up a position of observation before night. Sergeant Jones and Private 
B are in the lead, 2 men about 100 yards to the rear, the remaining 2 
men about 75 yards in the rear of these. They move out at a trot along 
the road until Atchison Cross is reached. The two cross roads are 
reconnoitered without halting the patrol, inasmuch as from the cross roads 
a good view is had north and south. 

From Atchison Cross to 16 (sf) the patrol moves at a walk, 
being up a slope from 4 to 6 degrees. Usually such" a place would be 
rushed through, but the distance of the enemy makes this unnecessary. 
No scouting is done off the road through the woods, because of the dis- 
tance of the enemy. On reaching the top of the hill the patrol is halted 
while Sergeant Jones moves up to the high ground south of the road at 
the crest, and in concealment searches with his glasses the road as far as 
Frenchman's, especially the village beyond G (qf)* Seeing no signs 
of the enemy he moves the patrol down the hill at a walk until the cut 
is passed and there takes a fast trot, so as to avoid being long in a 
position where they could be seen from the direction of Kickapoo. The 
same formation and gait are maintained as far as Gauss' (pd')? where a 
walk is taken to rest the horses and to gain opportunity to see if any 
enemy are holding the bridge at Frenchman's. 
Situation: 

Just as the patrol comes to a walk Sergeant Jones sees what 
appears to be a dismounted patrol moving south over the ridge about 
650 yards north of Frenchman's. He can see three men. 

Required, 2. Action taken by Sergeant Jones. 

Answer. Tjie patrol is moved into the orchard just off the road, 
while Sergeant Jones moves quickly to the top of the hill and, con- 
cealed by the trees, examines the road north to see if the 3 men are 
followed by others forming a part of a larger patrol or of a column. He 
finds the three men are not followed. 

Required, 3. What does he do next? ^ 

Answer. He determines to capture the patrol by surprise. He 
has the horses led over south of the orchard hill so as not to be visible 
to the enemy. He then distributes his men along the north edge of the 
orchard, himself nearest the bridge, 2 men 75 yards back along the road 
toward G (qf); then 2 m.en 75 yards farther along toward G. As the 
third man comes opposite him, Sergeant Jones cries **Halt", which is 
the signal for the other parties to similarly hold up their men. 

Reasons. Sergeant Jones might either capture the hostile patrol 
or let it pass, and then proceed on his road. Since they are the first 
enemy seen 'and there is such a good chance to capture them, and as 
they may furnish definite information of the enemy's main force, he 
decides as stated. There is an objection in capturing them that he will 
have to send one or two men to take them to camp. The patrol is placed 
as described above so as to have the two men opposite each of the 
enemy, except for Sergeant Jones, who is alone. By thus covering each 
man of the hostile patrol by two of our men, they will at once see the 
folly of an effort to escape and no shot need be fired. One .man is 
holding the horses. 

[456] 



512 (contd.) 
Problem No. 12 (Cavalry) 

Same situation as Problem 10. 
Required: 

1. What action does Sergeant Jones take before leaving the vicinity 
of Frenchman's? 

2. Give the formation and conduct of the patrol after leaving here. 

3. Give the report submitted by Sergeant Jones under his instruc- 
tions in regard to bridges. (Par. 492.) 

At 6:30. P. M. (it is^dark at 7:30) the patrol reaches 17 (jc'). 

4. Give the route followed from here and the disposition of the 
patrol made for the night. 

Problem No. 13 (Cavalry) 

Situation 

The Missouri river is the boundary between hostile countries. 

A Blue separate brigade (3 regiments infantry, 1 squadron cavalry, 
1 battery field artillery) is moving from Winchester (19 miles west of 
'Leavenworth) to seize the Eock Island bridge (q) across the Missouri 
river at Fort Leavenworth. The cavalry squadron is camped at Lowe- 
mont, 8 miles west of Leavenworth, for night June 4-5. At 3 P. M. 
Sergeant Jones is directed to take a patrol of s'x men and move via the 
Eock Island bridge into Missouri and gain information of the enemy 
reported to be now just east of the river. 

Required, 1. Give the formation of the patrol when it first 
comes on the map. 

Rectuired, 2. Give the conduct of the pal:rol from Mottin's (oa') 
to G (qf). 

At Frenchman's^ Sergeant Jones m.et a farmer coming from Fort 
Leavenworth, who said about 200 hostile cavalry were seen just east of 
the Missouri about 2 P. M., moving towards the Terminal Bridge (z). 

Rectuired, 3. Action of Sergeant Jones. (Does he hold the man? 
Does he send a message? Does he change his plans or direction of 
march?) 

The patrol reaches the top of the hill, Sheridan's Drive — Govern- 
ment Hill (tr). 

Required, 4. What action does Sergeant Jones take before pro- 
ceeding east? 

FLANK GUARDS 

The flanks of a column are ordinarily protected by the advance 
guard, which sends out patrols to carefully examine the country on both 
sides of the line of march. In some cases, however, the direction of 
march of the column is such that there is a great danger of the enemy's 
striking it in flank and some special provision is necessary to furnish 
additional s'ecurity on the threatened flank. This is done by having a 
detachment, called a flank guard, march off the exposed flank. The flank 
guard usually follows a road, parallel to the one on which the column is 
marching and at least 1,000 yards (effective rifle range) beyond it. If 
hostile artillery is feared this distance is much greater. 

The flank guard regulates its march so as to continue abreast of 
the advance guard of the main column. It takes a formation similar 
to an advance guard, does most of its patrolling to the front and on the 
exposed flank, and keeps in constant touch with the main column by 
means of mounted or dismounted messengers. 



513 

In case the enemy is encountered the flank guard drives him off 
if practicable or takes up a defensive position, protecting the march 
of the main column, and preventing the enemy from disturbing the 
latter 's march. . 

BEAE GUARD 
513. Definition and Duties. A rear guard is a detachment of a 
marching column following in rear to protect the main column from 
being surprised and to prevent the march from being delayed or 
interrupted. 

When the main column is marching toward the enemy the rear 
guard is very small and its duties relatively unimportant. It is princi- 
pally occupied in gathering up stragglers. 

When the main column is marching away from the enemy 
(retreating) the rear guard is all important. It covers the retreat of the 
main body, preventing the enemy from harassing or delaying its march. 

Strength. The strength of a rear guard is slightly greater than 
that of an advance guard, as it cannot expect, like the latter, to be 
reinjforced in case it is attacked, as the main column is marching away 
from it and avoiding a fight. 

Form of Order. The rear guard commander, on the receipt of the 
retreat order, issues a rear guard order, according to the following 
general form: 

Field Orders (Title) 

No (Place) (Date and hour) 

Troops 1. (Information of enemy and of our supporting troopO 
2, (Plan of commander — duty of rear guard.) 
(fl) Reserve — in 3. (a) (Instructions for reserve — place and time of de- 
order of march parture, or approximate distance from main body — recon- 
(Troops) naissance.) 

(b) Support: (b) (Instructions for support — place and time of de- 
(Commander) parture or distance from reserve — any special reconnais- 

(Troops) sance.) 

(c) Rear Cavalry: (c) (Instructions for rear cavalry — place and time of 
(Commander) departure, road or country to be covered — special mission.) 

(Troops) 

(d) Right (left) (d) (Instructions for flank guard — place and ,time of 

Flank Guard: departure, route, special mission.) 
(Commander 
(Troops) 

4. (Instructions for field train when necessary — usually to join train of 
main body.) 

5. (Place of commander or where messages may be sent.) 
(How and to whom issued.) (Signature.) 

The distance of a rear guard from the main body and its forma- 
tion are similar to those of an advance guard. The elements corre- 
sponding to the advance cavalry, the point, and the advance party of an 
advance guard are termed the rear cavalry, rear point and rear party, 
respectively. The support and reserve retain the same designations. 

A rear guard formed during an engagement to cover the with- 
drawal or retreat of the main body, may first be compelled to take 
up a defensive position behind which the main body forms up and moves 
off. It may be forced to withdraw from this position by successive skir- 
mish lines, gradually forming up in column on the road as it clears itself 
from fighting contact with the enemy. 

[45^3 



514 

The rate of march of the rear guard depends upon that of the 
main body. The main body may be much disorganized and fatigued, 
necessitating long halts and a slow marching rate. 

Action of the Rear Guard. The withdrawal of defeated troops 
is delayed, if possible, until night. If it becomes necessary to begin a 
retreat while an engagement is in progress, the rear guard is organized 
and takes up a defensive position generally behind the fighting line; the 
latter then falls back and assembles under cover of the rear guard. 

The rear cavalry gives away before the enemy ^s pursuit only 
when absolutely necessary, maintains communication with and sends 
information to the rear guard commander, and pays special attention to 
the weak points in the retreat, namely, the flanks. It makes use of every 
kind of action of which it is capable, according to the situation, and 
unless greatly outnumbered by hostile cavalry, it causes considerable 
delay to the enemy. 

When the enemy is conducting an energetic pursuit the rear guard 
effects its withdrawal by taking up a succession of defensive positions 
(that is, where the nature of the ground enables the rear guard to defend 
itself well) and compelling the enemy to attack or turn them. (It should 
be understood that these successive defensive positions must, in the 
case of a large force, be from two to four miles apart and in the case of a 
small force at least one-half mile apart — not a few hundred yards as is 
frequently attempted in peace maneuvers.) 

When the enemy's dispositions for attack are nearly completed, 
the rear guard begins to fall back, the cavalry on the flanks being usually 
the last to leave. The commander designates a part of the rear guard 
to cover the withdrawal of the remainder; the latten then falls back to a 
new position in rear, and in turn covers the withdrawal of the troops in 
front. These operations compel the enemy continually to deploy or 
make turning movements, and constantly retard his advance. 

The pursuit may be further delayed by obstacles placed in the 
enemy's path; bridges are burned or blown up; boats removed or de- 
stroyed; fords and roads obstructed; tracks torn up; telegraph lines cut, 
and houses, villages, woods and fields fired. Demolitions and obstructions 
are prepared by engineers, assisted, if necessary, by other troops detailed 
from the reserve, and are completed by the mounted engineers of the rear 
party at the last moment. 

The instructions of the supreme commander govern in the demoli- 
tion of important structures. 

OUTPOSTS 

(See ''Outpost,'' Par. 441) 
514. Definition and Duties. Outposts are detachments thrown out to 
the front and flanks of a force that is in camp or bivouac, to protect the 
main body from being surprised and to insure its undisturbed rest. Ih 
fact, an outpost is merely a stationary advance guard. Its duties, in 
general, are to ohsei've and resist — to observe the enemy, and to resist 
him in case of attack. Specifically its duties are: 

(a) To observe toward the front and flanks by means of stationary 
sentinels and patrols, in order to locate the enemy's whereabouts and 
learn promptly of his movements, .thus making it impossible for him 
to surprise us. 

[459] 



515-516 

(b) To prevent the main body from being observed or disturbed. 

(c) In case of attack, to check the enemy long enough to enable 
the main body to prepare for action and make the necessary dispositions. 

Size. The size of the outpost will depend upon many circum- 
stances, such as the size of the whole command, the nearness of the 
enemy, the nature of the ground, etc. A suitable strength for an outpost 
may vary from a very small fraction to one-third of the whole force. 
However, in practice it seldom exceeds one-sixth of the whole force — as 
a rule, if it be greater, the efficiency of the troops will be impaired. For 
a single company in bivouac a few sentinels and patrols will suffice; for 
a large command, a more elaborate outpost system must be provided. The 
most economical form of outpost is furnished by keeping close contact with 
the enemy by means of outpost patrols, in conjunction with resisting 
detachments on the avenues of approach. 

Troops at a halt are supposed to be resting, night or day, and 
the fewer on outpost the more troops will there be resting, aiTd thus 
husbanding their strength for approaching marches and encounters with 
the enemy. Outpost duty is about the most exhausting and fatiguing 
work a soldier performs. It is, therefore, evident that not a man or 
horse more than is absolutely necessary should be employed, and that 
the commander should use careful judgment in determining the strength 
of the outpost, and the chiefs of the various outpost subdivisions should 
be equally careful in disposing their men so as to permit the greatest 
possible number to rest and sleep undisturbed, hut at the same time 
always considering the safety of the Tnain body as the chief duty. 

515. Composition. The composition of the outpost will, as a rule, 
depend upon the size and composition of the command, but a mixed out- 
post is composed principally of infantry, which is charged with the duty 
of local observation, especially at night, and with resisting the enemy, 
in case of attack, long enough for the main body to prepare for action. 

The cavalry is charged with the duty of reconnaissance, and is 
very useful in open country during the day. 

Artillery is useful to outposts when its fire can sweep defiles or 
large open spaces and when it commands positions that might be occupied 
by hostile artillery. 

Machine guns are useful to command approaches and check sudden 
advances of the enemy 

Engineers are attached to an outpost to assist in constructing 
entrenchments, clearing the field of fire, opening communication laterally 
and to the rear. The outpost should be composed of complete organiza- 
tions. For example, if the outpost is to consist of one company, do not 
have some of the platoons from one company and the others from another, 
and if it is to consist of one battalion, do not have some of the companies 
from one battalion and others from another, etc. 

FORMATION OF OUTPOSTS 

516. Subdivisions. As in the case of an advance guard, the 
outpost of a large force is divided into elements or parts, that grad- 
ually increase in size from front to rear. These, in order from the main 
body, are the reserve, the line of supports, the line of outguards, and the 

[460] 



517 

advance cavalry, and their formation, as shown by the drawing below, 
may be likened to an open hand, with the fingers apart and extended, 
the wrist representing the main body, the knuckles the line of supports, 



t 



O. 






C3 



"0, 



t 



Afol 









#:., 



► OUTPOST" 
I 

I 



to 



Distance Depends On Object 5ob6HT, 
5i2.£ Of Command And Terraim. 






ff 



KErSEEVEr 



\i 



\^ 



DisrAHCE Great Enouom To Hoi.D.ENti-iv Bexoajo Effective 
Rifle Or Artillery FiREjDtPENoiNfij Om "WHSTftER To/nrtANo 
Is Small Or Large . 



/^Al^f BODV, 



the first joints the line of outguards, the second joints the line of sentinels 
and the finger tips the advance cavalry. 

In case of attack each part is charged with holding the enemy in 
check until the larger element, next in rear, has time to deploy and 
prepare for action. 

517. Distances Between the Subdivisions. The distances separating 
the main body, the line of supports, the line of outguards, the line of 
sentries and the advance cavalry, will depend upon circumstances. There 
can be no uniformity in the distance between supports and reiferves, nor 
between outguards and supports, even in the same outpost. The avenues 
of approach and the important features of the ground will largely 

[461] 



518-519-520 

control the exact positions of the different parts of the outposts. The 
basic principle upon which the distances are based, is: The distance 
between any two farts of the outpost must be great enough to give the 
one in rear time to deploy and prepare for action in case of attack, and 
the distance of the whole outpost from the main body m^ust, in the case 
of small com.mamdSj be sufficiently great to hold the enemy beyond effec- 
tive rifle range until the m/iin body can deploy, and, in case of large 
commands, it mMst be sufficiently great to hold the enemy beyond effective 
artillery range until the main body can deploy. 

It is, therefore, evident that the distances will be materially 
affected not only by the size of the main body, but also by the nature 
of the cover afforded by the ground. 

The following is given merely as a very general guide, subject 
to many changes: 

Distance to next 
element in rear. 

Advance cavalry 2 to 6 miles 

Supports r Sentinels (furnished by outguard) 20 to 40 yds. 

(Generally I Outguards (furnished by support) 200 to 500 yds. 

two or y Support proper furnishes majority of patrols. 400 to 800 yds. 

Beserve (usually omitted in small commands) % to 2 miles 

518. Advance Cavalry. The advance cavalry is that part of the out- 
post sent out in front of all foot troops. It generally operates two to six 
miles beyond the outpost infantry, reconnoitering far to the front and 
flanks in order to guard the camp against surprise by artillery fire and 
to give early information of the enemy's movements. 

After dusk the bulk of the cavalry usually withdraws to a camp 
in rear of the outpost reserve, where it can rest securely after the day's 
hard work and the horses can be fresh for the next day. Several mounted 
patrols are usually left for the night at junctions or forks on the princi- 
pal roads to the front, from one to four miles beyond the infantry line of 
observation. 

519. Supports. The supports constitute a line of supporting and resist- 
ing detachments, varying in size from a half a company to a battalion. In 
outposts consisting of a battalion or more the supports usually comprise 
about one-half of the infantry. Supports are numbered numerically con- 
secutively from right to left and are placed at the more important points 
on the outpost line, on or near the line on which resistance is to be 
made in case of attack. 

As a rule, roads exercise the greatest influence on the location 
of supports, and a support will generally be placed on or near a road. 

Each support has assigned to it a definite, clearly-defined section 
of front that it is to cover, and the support should be located as centrally 
as possible thereto. 

520. Outguards. The outguards constitute the line of small detach- 
ments farthest to the front and nearest to the enemy, and their duty is 
to maintain uninterrupted observation of the ground in front and on the 
flanks; to report promptly hostile movements and other information 
relating to^the enemy; to prevent unauthorized persons from crossing the 
line of observation; td drive off small parties of the enemy, and to make 

[462] 



521-522-523-524 

temporary resistance to larger bodies. For convenience outgnards are 
classified as pickets, sentry squads, and cossack posts. They are num- 
bered consecutively from right to left in each support. 

521. A picket is a group consisting of two or more squads, ordinarily 
not exceeding half a company, posted in the line of outguards to cover a 
given sector. It furnishes patrols and one or more sentinels, double 
sentinels, sentry, squads, or cossack posts for observation. 

Pickets are placed at the more important points in the line of 
outguards, such as road forks. The strength of each depends upon the 
number of small groups required to observe properly its sector. 

522. A sentry squad is a squad posted in observation at an indicated 
point. It posts a double sentinel in observation, the remaining men rest- 
ing near by and furnishing the reliefs of sentinels. In some cases it may 
be required to furnish a patrol. 

523. A cossack post consists of four men. It is an observation group 
similar to a sentry squad, but employs a single sentinel. 

At night, it will sometimes be advisable to place some of the out- 
guards or their sentinels in a position different from that which they 
occupy in the daytime. In such case the ground should be carefully 
studied before dark and the change made at dusk. However, a change in 
the position of the outguard will be exceptional. 

524. Sentinels are generally used singly in daytime, but at night 
double sentinels will be required in most cases. Sentinels- furnished by 
cossack posts or sentry squads are kept near their group. Those furnished 
by pickets may be as far as 100 yards away. 

Every sentinel should be able to communicate readily with the 
body to which he belongs. 

Sentinel posts are numbered consecutively from right to left in 
each outguard. Sentry squads and cossack posts furnished by pickets 
are counted as sentinel posts. 

If practicable, troops on outpost duty are concealed and all 
movements made so as to avoid observation by the enemy; sentinels are 
posted so as to have a clear view to the front and, if practicable (though 
it is rarely possible); so as to be able, by day, to see the sentinels of the 
adjoining outguards. Double sentinels are posted near enough, to each 
other to be able to communicate easily in ordinary voice. 

Sentinels are generally, on duty two hours out of six. For every 
sentinel and for every patrol there should be at least three reliefs; 
therefore, one-third the strength of the outguards gives the greatest 
number of men that should be on duty as sentinels and patrols at one 
time. 

Skillful selection of the posts of sentinels increases their field of 
observation. High points, under cover, are advantageous by night as 
well as by day; they increase the range of vision and afford greater 
facilities for seeing lights and hearing noises. Observers with good 
field glasses may be placed on high buildings, on church steeples or in 
high trees. 

Glittering objects on uniform or equipment should be concealed. 
It is seldom necessary to fix bayonets, except at night, in dense fog, or in 
very close country. 

Reliefs, visiting patrols, and inspecting oflicers, approach sentinels 
from, the rear, remaining under cover if possible. 



525-526 

For the usual orders of a sentry on the line of observation, see 
Par. 699. 

525. Reserve. The reserve forms a general support for the Jine of 
resistance. It is, therefore, centrally located near the junction of roads 
coming from the direction of the enemy, and in concealment if practicable. 

Of the troops detailed for outpost duty, about one-half of the 
infantry, generally all of the artillery, and the cavalry not otherwise 
employed, are assigned to the reserve. If the outpost consists of less 
than two companies the reserve may be omitted altogether. 

The arms are stacked and the equipments (except cartridge belts) 
may be removed. Roads communicating with the supports are opened. 

When necessary, the outpost order states what is to be done in 
case of attack, designates places of assembly and provides for interior 
guards. Interior guards are posted in the camp of the reserve or main 
body to maintain order, and furnish additional security. Additional 
instructions may be given for messing, feeding, watering, etc. In the 
vicinity of the enemy or at night a portion of the infantry may be 
required to remain under arms, the cavalry to hold their horses (cinches 
loosened), and the artillery to remain in harness, or take up a combat 
position. 

In case of alarm, the reserve prepares for action without delay, 
and word is sent to the main body. In combat, the reserve reinforces the 
line of resistance, and if unable to check the enemy until the arrival 
of the main body, delays him as much as possible. 

The distance of the reserve from the line of resistance varies, but 
is generally about half a mile; in outposts of four companies or less this 
distance may be as small as 400 yards. 

526. Patrols. Instead of using outguards along the entire front of 
observation, part of this front may be covered by patrols only. These 
should be used to cover such sections of the front as can be crossed by 
the enemy only with difficulty and over which he is not likely to attempt 
a crossing after dark. 

In daylight much of the local patrolling may be dispensed with 
if the country can be seen from the posts of the sentinels. However, 
patrols should frequently be pushed well to the front unless the ground 
in that direction is exceptionally open. 

Patrols must be used to keep up connection between the parts 
of the outpost except when, during daylight, certain fractions or groups 
are mutually visible. After dark this connection must be maintained 
throughout the outpost except where the larger subdivisions are provided 
with wire communication. 

The following patrols are usually sent out from the main bodies 
of the supports: 

(a) Patrols of from three men to a squad are sent along the roads 
and trails in the direction of the enemy, for a distance of from one to 
five miles, depending on how close the enemy is supposed to be, whether 
or not there is any advance cavalry out, and how long the outpost has 
been in position. The extreme right and left supports send patrols well 
out on the roads to the flanks. These patrols generally operate contin- 
uously; as soon as one returns from the front, or possibly even before 

[464] 



526 (contd.) * 

it returns, another goes out in the same general direction to cover the 
same country. Frequently a patrol is sent out along a road to the front 
for two or three miles with orders to remain out until some stated time — 
for example, 4 P. M., dusk or dawn. It sends in important information, 
and remains out near the extremity of its route, keeping a close watch 
on the surrounding country. 

An effort should always be made to secure and maintain contact 
with the enemy, if within a reasonable distance, in order that his move- 
ments or lack of movement may -be constantly watched and reported on. 
The usual tendency is towards a failure to send these patrols far enough 
to the front and for the patrol leader to overestimate the distance he has 
traveled. A mile through strange country with the ever-present possi- 
bility of encountering the enemy seems three miles to the novice. 

At night the patrols generally confine their movements to the 
roads, usually remaining quietly on the alert near the most advanced 
point of their route to the front. 

The majority of such patrols are sent out to secure information 
of the enemy — reconnoitering patrols — and they avoid fighting and hostile 
patrols, endeavoring to get in touch with the enemy's main force. Other 
patrols are sometimes sent out to prevent hostile detachments from 
approaching the outposts; they endeavor to locate the hostile patrols, 
drive them back, preventing them from gaining any vantage point from 
which they can observe the outpost line. These are called combat patrols 
and have an entirely different mission from reconnoitering patrols. 

(b) Patrols of from two men to a squad, usually two men, are sent 
from the support around the line of its outguards, connecting with the 
outguards of the adjacent supports, if practicable. These are *' visiting 
patrols," and they serve to keep the outguards of a support in touch 
with it and with each other; to keep the commander of a support in touch 
with his outguards and the adjacen.t supports; and to reconnoiter the 
ground between the outguards. Since a hostile force of any size is practi- 
cally forced to keep to the roads, tliere are rarely ever any supports and 
very few outguards posted ofC tlie roads, the intervals being covered by 
patrols, as just described. 

When going out a patrol will always inform the nearest sentinel 
of the direction it will take and its probable route and hour of return. 

Detail for Patrols. Since for every patrol of four men, twelve 
are required (3 reliefs of 4 men oacli), the importance of sending out 
just enough men and not one more than is actually needed, can readily 
be understood. As fast as one visiting patrol completes its round, another 
should usually be sent out, possibly going the rounds by a slightly dif- 
ferent route or in the reverse direction. The same generally applies to 
the reconnoitering and combat patrols, though frequently they are sent 
out for the entire day, afternoon or night, and no 2d and 3d relief is 
required. Three reliefs are required for the sentinel or sentinels at the 
post of the supports, so care should be taken to establish but one post, if 
it can do all that is required. It should not be considered that every man 
in the support should be on duty or on a relief for an outguard, a patrol 
or sentinel post. There should be as many men as possible in the main 
body of a support (this term is used to distinguish this body from the 

[465] 



527-528-529-530-531 



support proper which includes the outguards and their sentinels) who 
Z-^^^^,'"'' duty other than being instantly available in case of attack 
will It o^of Lrf T'- ^^""^ f ' approach of a flag of truce, the sentry 
Will at once notify the commander of the outguard, who will in turn send 
word to the commander of the outpost and ask fo'r instructions One or 
more men will advance to the front and halt ^he nartv !,t Zoh aYJ^ 
as to prevent any of them from overlooking the Outposts Is soo'n as 
halted, the party will be ordered to face in the opposite direction It 

llZZfMJ7.f^'°, ^'f ''^ P"'*^ *^''"^g'' '"^^ outpost ifne^'ttywx" 
.LJ i-^ ^""^ '®1 "''<^®' ^^'^''^t t<> tlie commander of the outpost Nn 
conversation, except by permission of the outpost commander ^°s to be 

flarof truc^ "''''''' '^"'^ ''^"^ P^^*^^*' ^''^ t^« persons b^arLgtS: 

528. Entrenchments and Obstacles. The Dositionci >,p3/i i... +i,« -u 
ti:fT:'f''' r'P^* ^^^"'"^ g^^^^-^^ly be Itrn" Ced S' tS construe.' 
unnecessary""'"'"'' ''"' °'^*^<='^^' ^^* <^-'^«°- -^^ rLder *this 

529. Concealment. Troops on outpost must keep concealed as much 

530. Detached Posts. In addition to ordinary outguards the outnoat 
oov.^?nf/ ""^ detail from the reserve one or'^more^detaeheS poS to 
cover roads or areas not in general line assigned to the supports 
^o^o.i, A *^ fanner the commander of the whole force may order 
detached posts to be sent from the main body to cover important roads 
or localities not included in the outpost line. important roads 

in,^..,?^^^l\i P°^^^ ""^y ^® ^®°* °"* to hold points which are of 
n^Pf r. ^ " t'l? °"tP0«t «a^alry, such as a ford or a junction of roads 
tn fh.itT. ^r -'T f ?*'.''^''"y *^^"^^I« fo^ observation, but too far 
to the front to be included in the line of observation; or to protect flanks 
of the outpost position. Such posts are generally established by the out 
post commander, but a support commander might find it necessarv to 
establish a post practically detached from the rest of his command Thev 
T^fZy^^V .'''. '*r!?S*^ *'°'" ^ «<l"^d t° « platoon ThHumber and 
Etfon. ''''''"' P"*' ''' '^•'""^•^ *° *^« -^-I-t« needs 'of tSe 

und?r"th?'c^m^f.^°/*'- t° examining post is a small detachment, 
unaer the command of an officer or a noncommissioned officer stationpH 
at some convenient point to examine strangers and to re cSve 'bearers of 
flags of truce brought in by the outguards or patrols. ° 

ihough the employment of examining posts is not ffeneral in fi^l^ 
operations, there are many occasions when their use °s fmportait- fn^ 
example: When the outguards do not speak the anJLge oTthe co^ntrv 
or of the enemy; when preparations are beinp- made for a movpLnrcl^ 

brought^-toTn r^i^'^g^ PosT-pt'onirs^tT^delr^ *" T^- 
Bent under guard to the rear. ^^^^oners and deserters are at once 



[466] 



532-533 

532. Cavalry Outpost. Independent cavalry covering a command or 
on special missions, and occasionally the advance cavalry of a mixed 
command, bivouac when night overtakes them, and in such cases furnish 
their own outposts. The outposts are established, in the main, in accord- 
ance with the foregoing principles, care being taken to confine outpost 
work to the lowest limits consistent w^ith safety. No precaution, however, 
should be dmitted, as the cavalry is generally in close proximity to the 
enemy, and often in territory where the inhabitants are hostile. 

The line of resistance is occupied by the supports, the latter 
sending ont the necessary outguards and patrols. Each outguard fur- 
nishes its own vedettes (mounted sentinels), or sentinels. Due to the 
mobility of cavalry, the distances are generally greater than in an oul- 
post for a mixed command. An outguard of four troopers is convenient 
for the day time, but should be doubled at night, and at important points 
made even stronger. The sentinels are generally dismounted, their horses 
being left with those of the outguards. 

Mounted cavalry at night can offer little resistance; the supports 
and outguards are therefore generally /dismounted, the horses being under 
cover in rear, and the positions are strengthened by intrenchments and 
obstacles. By holding villages, bridges, defiles, etc., with dismounted 
rifle fire, cavalry can greatly delay a superior force. 

There should always be easy communication along the line of re- 
sistance to enable the cavalry to concentrate at a threatened point. 

A support of one squadron covers with its outposts a section 
rarely longer than two miles. 

As such a line is of necessity weak, the principal reliance is placed 
on distant patrolling. If threatened by infantry, timely information 
enables the threatened point to be reinforced, or the cavalry to withdraw 
to a place of safety. If there is danger from hostile cavalry, the roads 
in front are blocked at suitable points, such as bridges, fords, defiles, etc., 
by a succession of obstacles and are defended by a few dismounted men. 
When compelled to fall back these men mount and ride rapidly to the next 
obstacle in rear and there take up a new position. As the march of 
cavalry at night is, as a rule, confined to roads, such tactics seriously 
delay its advance. 

In accordance with the situation and the orders they have received, 
the support commanders arrange for feeding, watering, cooking, resting 
and patrolling. During the night the horses of the outguards remain sad- 
dled and bridled. During the day time cinches may be loosened, one- 
third of the horses at a time. Feeding and watering are done by re- 
liefs. Horses being fed are removed a short distance from the others. 

Independent cavalry generally remains in outpost position for the 
night only, its advance being resumed on the following day; if stopped 
by the enemy, it is drawn off to the flanks upon the approach of its 
own infantry. 

ESTABLISHING THE OUTPOST 

533. The outpost is posted as quickly as possible, so that the troops 
can the sooner obtain rest. Until the leading outpost troops are able to 

[467] 



5S4 

assume their duties, temporary protection, known as the march outpost, 
is furnished by the nearest available troops. 

Upon receipt of the halt order from the commander of the main 
column, the outpost com.mander issues the outpost order with the least 
practicable delay. 

The halt order, besides giving the necessary information and as- 
signing camp sites to the parts of the command, details the troops to 
constitute the outpost, assigns a commander therefor, designates the 
general line to be occupied, and, when practicable, points out the posi-* 
tion to be held in case of attack. 

The outpost order gives such available information of the situa- 
tion as is necessary to the complete and proper guidance of subordinates; 
designates the troops to constitute the supports; assigns their location and 
the sector each is to cover; provides for the necessary detached posts; 
indicates any special reconnaissance that is to be made; orders the loca- 
tion and disposition of the reserve; disposes of the train if the same is 
ordered to join the outpost; and informs subordinates where information 
will be sent. In large commands it may often be necessary to give the 
order from the map, but usually the outpost commander will have to make 
som.e preliminary reconnaissance, unless he has an accurate ^nd detailed 
map. 

Generally it is preferable for the outpost commander to give 
verbal orders to his support commanders from some locality which over- 
looks the terrain. The time and locality should be so selected that the 
support commanders may join their commands and conduct them to their 
positions without causing unnecessary delay to their troops. The reserve 
commander should, if possible, receive his orders at the same time as 
the support comm^anders. Subordinates to whom he gives orders separate- 
ly should be informed of the location of other parts of the outpost. 

In large outposts written orders, which .are issued in the following 
form, are frequently most convenient: 
534. 

(Title) 

(Place) 

(Date and hour) 
1. (Information of the enemy and of our supporting troops.) 

2. (Plan of commander — to establish outpost, approximate 
line of resistance.) 

3. (a) (Instructions for advance cavalry— contect with 
enemy, roads or country to be specially watched, special 
mission.) ""^ ~ 

(b) (Instructions for support — positions, they are to 
occupy, and sections of line of resistance, which they are to 
hold, intrenching, etc.) 

(c) Detached Post: (c) (Instructions for detached posts — position to be 
(Commander) occupied, duties, amount of resistance.) 

(Troops) 

(d) Reserve: (d) (Instruction for reserves — location, observation of 
(Commander) flanks, conduct in case of attack, duties of special troops.) 

(Troops) 
No. 4 (Instruction for field train if it has accompanied the outpost.) 
No. 5 (Place of commander or where messages may be sent.) 

(Signature.) 
(How and to whom issued.) 



Field 


Orders 


Nc 


) ^ 




Troops 


(a) 


Advance Cavalry: 




(Commander) 




(Troops) 


(b) 


The Support: 


No. 


1 (Commander) 




(Troops) 


No. 


2 (Commander) 




(Troops) 


No. 


3 (Commander) 




(Troops) 



534 (contd.) 

(Note: In the case of a small outpost the order is usually verbal.) 

After issuing the initial orders, the outpost commander inspects 
the outpost, orders the necessary changes or additions, and sends his 
superior a report of his dispositions. 

The resei-ve is marched to its post by its commander, who then 
sends out such detachments as have been ordered and places the rest in 
camp or bivouac, over which at least one sentinel should be posted. Con- 
nection must be maintained with the main body, the supports, and 
nearby detached posts. 

The supports march to their posts, using the necessary covering de- 
tachments when in advance of the march outpost. A support com- 
mander's order should fully explain the situation to subordinates, or to 
the entire command, if it be small. It should detail the troops for the 
different outguards and, when necessary, define the sector each is to cover. 
It should provide the necessary sentinels at the post of the support, the 
patrols to be sent therefrom, and should arrange for the necessary in- 
trenching. 

In posting his command the support commander must seek to cover 
his sector (the front that he is to look after) in such manner that the 
enemy can not reach, in dangerous numbers and unobserved, the posi- 
tion of the support or pass by it within the sector intrusted to the 
support. On the other hand, he must economize men on observation and 
patrol duty, for these duties are tjnusually fatiguing. He must prac- 
tice the greatest economy of men consistent with the requirements of 
practical security. 

As soon as the posting of the support is completed, its commander 
carefully inspects the dispositions and corrects defects, if any, and re- 
ports the disposition of his support, including the patrolling ordered, to 
the outpost commander. This report is preferably made by means of a 
Bketch. 

By day the outpost will stack arms and the articles of equipment, 
except the cartridge belt and canteen, will be placed by the arms. At 
night the men will invariably sleep with their arms and equipment near 
them. 

In addition to the sentinel posted over the support, a part of the 
support, say one-third or one-fourth, should always be awake at night. 

Each outguard is marched by its commander to its assigned station, 
and especially in the case of a picket, is covered by the necessary pa- 
trolling to prevent surprise. 

Having reached the position, the commander explains the situation 
to his men and establishes reliefs for each sentinel, and, if possible, for 
each patrol to be furnished. Besides these sentinels and patrols, a picket 
must have a sentinel at its post. 

The commander then posts the sentinels and points out to them 
the principal features, such as towns, roads, and streams, and gives their 
names. He gives the direction and location of the enemy, if known, 
and of adjoining parts of the outpost. 

He gives to patrols the same information and the necessary orders 
as to their routes and the frequency with which the same shall be cov- 
ered. Each patrol should go over its route once before dark. 

[469] 



535-536-537 

Each picket should maintain connection by patrols with the 
outguards on its right and left. 

535. Intercommunication. It is most important that communication 
Bhould be maintained at all times between all parts of the outpost, and 
between the outpost and the main body. This may be done by patrols, 
messengers, wire or signal. 

The commander of the outpost is responsible that proper com- 
munication be maintained with the main body, and the support com- 
manders keep up communication with the outguards, with the adjoining 
supports and with the reserve. The commander of a detached post will 
maintain communication with the nearest outguard. 

536. Changes for the Night. In civilized warfare, it is seldom neces- 
sary to draw the outpost closer to the main body at night in order to di- 
minish the front; nor is it necessary to strengthen the line of observa- 
tion, as the enemy's advance in force must be confined to the roads. 
The latter are therefore strongly occupied, the intervening ground being 
diligently patroled. 

In very open country or in war with savage or semi-civilized 
people familiar with the terrain, special precautions are necessary. 

537. Relieving the Outpost. Ordinarily outposts are not kept on duty 
longer than twenty-four hours. In temporary camps or bivouac they are 
generally relieved every morning. After a day's advance the outpost 
for the night is usually relieved the following morning when the sup- 
port of the new advance guard passes the line of resistance. In retreat 
the outpost for the night usually forms the rear guard for the following 
day, and is relieved when it passes the line of observation of the new 
outpost. 

Outguards that have become familiar with the country during 
the day time should remain on duty that night. Sentinels are relieved once 
in two hours, or oftener, depending on the weather. The work of patrols 
is regulated by the support commander. 

Commanders of the various fractions of an outpost turn over their 
instructions and special orders, written and verbal, to their successors, 
together with the latest information of the enemy, and a description of 
the important features of tne country. When practicable the first patrols 
sent out by the new outposts are accompanied by members of the old out- 
post who are familiar with the terrain. When relieved the old outguards 
return to their supports, the supports to the reserve and the latter to the 
main body; or, if more convenient, the supports and reserves return to the 
main body independently, each by the shortest route. 

When relieved by an advance guard, the outpost troops ordinarily 
join their units as the column passes. 

Evening and shortly before dawn are hours of special danger. The 
enemy may attack late in the day in order to establish himself on cap 
tured ground by intrenching during the night; or he may send forwarc* 
troops under cover of darkness in order to make a strong attack at earlj^ 
dawn. Special precaution is therefore taken at those hours by holding 
the outpost in readiness, and by sending patrols in advance of the liii<" 
of observation. If a new outpost is to be established in the morning 
it should arrive at the outpost position at daybreak, thus doubling the 
outpost strength at that hour. 

[470] 



538 
538. OUTPOST PROBLEMS 

Problem No. 1 (Infantry) 

Lieutenant (to two squads of his company) : Two battalions of 
our regiment have camped by Baker's Pond (Elementary Map) for the 
night. It is now 3 P. M. on a rainy day in August. The enemy is 
thought to be about five miles to the south of us. Our platoon is the left 
support of the outpost and is stationed at the road fork on the Chester 
Pike, by the Mason house. The Twin Hills-Lone Hill ridge is taken care 
of by other troops. Corporal Baker, where do you think I should place 
outguardsf 

Corporal Baker: One at the junction of the Mills farm lane and 
the Chester Pike, and one at the steel railroad trestle over Sandy Creek. 

Lieutenant: Those positions are both too far from the support, 
almost a half mile, but they cover the two main avenues of approach 
and there is no good place for a position nearer the support. A position 
farther north of the Mills farm lane would have its view obstructed by 
the wall and trees along the lane and the wall would be a bad thing to 
leave unoccupied such a short distance to your front. So in this case, 
in spite of the excessive distances from the support, I think the two posi- 
tions are well chosen. Each should be an outguard of a squad, for In the 
day time, in addition to furnishing a sentinel to observe to the front, 
they should have some power of resistance, particularly at the trestle. 
At night they should each have one double sentinel post. This requires 
three reliefs of two men each, which, with the corporal, only leaves one 
extra man, who can be used as a messenger. 

. Corporal Baker, I order you to take your squad and post it as 
Outguard No. 1, at the junction of this (Chester) pike and that farm lane 
(Mills farm) in front. Corporal Davis' squad will be Outguard No. 2, at 
the railroad trestle over there (pointing). Friendly troops will be on the 
ridge to the east of your position. Your meals will be cooked here and 
sent to you. 

Explain how you post your squad. 

Corporal Baker: I order Smith to double time 150 yards to the 
front and act as point for the squad. I then march the squad down to its 
position, keeping Smith about 200 yards in front until I have arranged 
everything. I then post Brown under cover of the trees along the lane 
where -he can look down the road as far as possible and I tell him, 
"Brown, you are to take post here, keeping a sharp lookout to the front 
and flanks. The enemy is thought to be about five miles south (pointing) 
of us. This is the Chester Pike. That creek over there is Sandy Creek. 
Salem is about a mile and three-quarters down this pike in that (S. E.) 
direction. York is a mile and a half in that (S. W.) direction. Our 
troops are on that ridge (Twin Hills) and a squad is at the trestle over 
there. It is Outguard No. 2. You are in Outguard No. 1. You know 
where we left our platoon. It is our support. Signal Smith to come in." 
I then have the squad pitch their shelter tents along the northern side of 
the wall, where they will be hidden to view from the front by 
the trees along the lane and the wall. 'I want the men to get shelter from 
the rain as soon as possible. I then instruct the men of the squad, in the 
same manner that I did Brown; I notice the time, and detail Davis as 
second relief and Carter as third relief for Brown 's post. 



538 (contd.) 

I then direct two men to take all the canteens and go over to that 
farm (Mills) and fill them, first questioning the people about the enemy 
and about the country around here. I also direct these two men to get 
some straw or hay for bedding ip the shelter tents, and instruct them 
to return with as little delay as possible. 

I wait until they return and order two other men to go down to 
the cross roads, question the people there, look the ground over and re- 
turn here. I caution them not to give any information about our force 
or the outguard. I would see that the sentinel's position was the best 
available and that the men had as comfortable quarters as possible, with- 
out being unduly exposed to view and without interfering with their 
movements in case of attack. They would keep their rifles at their sides 
at all times and not remove their equipments. After dark I put two 
men on post at the same time. To do this I arrange three reliefs of two 
men each. They are posted in pairs for two hours at a time. 

If no patrol from the support appeared within a half hour after I 
first took position I would send a messenger back to you to see if every- 
thing was all right and tell you what I had done. 

Lieutenant: I think the two men sent to the crossroads should 
have been started out before sending anyone to the Mills house as this 
was a more important point. The Field Service Eegulations state that 
outguards do not patrol to the front, but what you did was entirely cor- 
rect. You were securing yourself in your position and should be familiar 
with your immediate surroundings. You should have told the crossroads 
patrol to determine how much of an obstacle Sandy Creek was. I sup- 
pose you assumed the swamp was impassable. 

The sentinel in this case is, I suppose, across the lane from the 
outguard about ten or fifteen yards in advance. After dark the double 
sentinel post should be posted on the pike about thirty yards in advance 
of the outguard. 

Very frequently it would not be wise to put up your shelter tents 
on outguard. But here, considering the rain and the protection the 
trees and wall furnish, it was wise to do so. 

The noncommissioned officer in charge of an outguard should be 
very precise in giving his orders and in making his arrangements, details, 
etc. The discipline must be strict; that is, the men must be kept. under 
absolute control, so that in case of sudden attack there will be no chance 
of confusion and the outguard commander will have his men absolutely in 
hand and not permit any independent action on their part. This is 
often not the case, owing to the familiar relations that usually exist in 
our army between a corporal and the members of his squad. 

We will not have time to go into the arrangements for Outguard 
No. 2 other than to say that the conditions there are somewhat different 
from those Corporal Baker has had to deal with. The outguard should 
be posted on the west bank ol Sandy Creek and the sentinel at the south- 
eastern end of the trestle. A skirmish trench should be dug down the 
western slope of the fill west of the creek, and extended across the track 
by throwing up a parapet about two and one-half feet high, slightly bent 
back towards the northeast so as to furnish cover from fire from the east 
bank of the creek, north of the trestle. The shelter tents could be pitched 

[472] 



538 (contd.) 

as '^ lean-tos'^ against the western slope of tlie fill, and hidden by bushes 
and branches of trees. 

(Note: The details of commanding this outguard, its action in 
case of attack, what should be done with a passing countryman, etc., can 
be profitably worked out in great detail.) 

Problem No. 2 

Lieutenant (to six squads) : We will take the same situation as 
we had in Problem 1, with squad outguards as before. 

Sergeant Adams, you have command of the platoon and have sent 
out the two outguards. Explain your arrangements for the support. 

Sergeant Adams: I have the men fall out by squads and rest 
on the side of the road while I look the ground over. I then tell Sergeant 
Barnes, ''You will have immediate charge of the guard, cooking, visiting 
patrols, etc., here at the support. -Oetail three men from Corporal Evan's 
squad as first, second and third relief for the sentinel over the support. 
Post your sentinel at the road fork and give him the necessary instruc- 
tions as to the outguards, the adjacent support which is on this road 
(pointing west) on top of that ridge, etc. I will give you further in- 
structions later.'' I then fall in the remainder of the support (one 
sergeant, one cook, four corporals and twenty-seven privates, three 
squads being intact and one man on duty as sentinel) and have shelter 
tents pitched under cover of the orchard and Mason house. While this 
is being completed I select a line for a trench, about thirty-five yards 
long, behind the fence on the east and west road and extending east 
of the Chester Pike about fifteen yards, slightly bent back towards the 
northeast. No trench in the road. I then say to Sergeant Foss, ''Take 
Graves' squad and construct a shelter trench along this line (indicating), 
having the parapet concealed. Cut the fences so as to furnish easy 
access." 

I then say to Corporal Evans, "Take three men from your squad 
and, as a reconnoitering patrol, cross the trestle there (pointing), -and 
follow that road (pointing to the Boling-Salem road) into Salem, recon- 
noitering that village. Then take up a position on that ridge (pointing to 
Sandy Eidge) and remain out until dusk. Send me a message from 
Sandy Ridge with a sketch and description of the country." 

I assum.e that* Corporal Evans is familiar, with the information 
about the enemy, the location of our outguards, etc. 

Selecting five men from Corporal Geary's squad and the remaining 
man of Corporal Evans' squad (three having been detailed for sentinel 
duty, and three sent out on patrol duty with Corporal Evans), I turn 
them over to Sergeant Barnes, saying, "Here are six men to furnish 
three reliefs for a visiting patrol of two men. Have this patrol visit 
Outguard, No. 2 and cross the trestle, going south down the east bank of 
the creek; thence recross the creek at the road bridge, visiting Outguard 
No. 1; thence across to the adjacent outguard of the support on our left, 
which is somewhere on that ridge (pointing to the Twin Hills-Lone Hill 
Eidge) ; and thence to the starting point. Have them locate that sup- 
port on their first trip. You can reverse the route and make such minor 
changes from time to time as you think best. Eeport to me after they 

[473] 



538 (contd.) 

have completed the first round. Make arrangements for sending supper 
to the outguards. Take two men from Corporal Jackson 's squad to carry 
it out. Be careful that the cook fire is not visible. I am going out to 
visit Outguard No. 1 and then No. 2. You will have charge until I 
return.'^ 

The men have stacked arms in front of the tents and have removed 
all equipment but their belts. 

I would now visit the outguards, taking a man with me, and see if 
they are properly located. I would instruct the outguard commanders 
as to. what to do in case of attack, in case strangers approach, point out 
their line of retreat in case of necessity, etc. I would make a sketch 
of the position and send it, with a description of my dispositions, to the 
commander of the outpost. • 

Lieutenant: Your arrangements and dispositions appear satisfac- 
tory. You should have been more pronipt in sending Corporal Evans out 
with his patrol. Why didn't you send a patrol towards York, or south 
along the Chester Pike? 

Sergeant Adams: I considered that the support on my right 
would cover that ridge (Twin Hills-Lone Hill\- n,nd that the route I laid 
out for Corporal Evans would cover the Chester Pike and the country 
east of Sandy Creek at the same time, thus avoiding the necessity for 
two patrols. 

Lieutenant: That seems reasonable, but you should have given 
some specific orders about reporting on the width, depth, etc., of Sandy 
Creek, which might prove a very* valuable or dangerous obstacle. You 
can readily see how quickly a command becomes broken up and depleted 
in strength, and how important it is to make only such detachments as 
are necessary. It looks as if your outguards might have been made smaller 
considering the size of your platoon (6 squads), but I think the squad 
outpost is so much better than one not composed of a complete unit, that 
it is correct in this case. With Corporal Evans' patrol of three men, 
the visiting patrol requiring six men, the sentinel post requiring three 
men. Sergeant Barnes, and the two outguards, you have thirty men actu- 
ally on duty or detailed for duty, out of fifty-one. Of course, the men 
constituting the outguards, the man detailed for the visiting patrol and 
support sentinel, have approximately two hours on duty and four hours 
off duty, so they get some rest. Furthermore, you .should have a three- 
man patrol watching the crossroads at Salem during the night, Corporal 
Evans' patrol having returned. This patrol should be relieved once dur- 
ing the night, at a previously stated hour, which means six more men 
who do not get a complete night's rest. 

Sergeant Adams: Isn't Salem rather far to tlfe front to send a 
patrol at night? 

Lieutenant: Yes, it is, but unless you touch the crossroads there 
you would have to have two patrols out, one near Maxey's farm and 
one on the Chester Pike. As it is you are leaving the road from York 
to the crossroads in front of Outguard No. 1, uncovered, but you should 
find that this is covered by a patrol from the adjacent support. The cross- 
roads in front of Outguard No. 1 is the natural place for a stationary, 
.night patrol, but it is so close to the outguard that the benefit derived 
from a patrol there would be too small to justify the effort. 



538 (contd.) 

(^te: Further details of the duties of this support can be gone 
into. The messages should be written, and patrols carried through their 
tour of duty with the resulting situations to be dealt with; the sentinels 
tested as to their knowledge of their duties, etc. Also note carefully the 
manner in which the support commander uses his noncommissioned offi- 
cers for carrying out his intentions, and thus avoids the most objection- 
able and inefficient practice of dealing directly with the privates.) 

Problem No. 3 (Infantry) 

(See Fort Leavenworth map in pocket at back of book.) 
Situation: 

A Blue force; Companies A and B, 1st Infantry, under Captain A, 
in hostile country, is covering the Rock Island Bridge and camped for 
the night, April 20-21, on the south slope of Devin ridge (rm'). The 
enemy is moving northward from Kansas City (30 miles south of Leaven- 
worth). At 3:30 P. M. Captain A receives a message from Colonel X at 
Beverly (2 miles east of Eock Island Bridge, (qo'), stating that two or 
three companies of hostile infantry are reported five miles south of 
Leavenworth at 2:30 P. M. No enemy is west of Leavenworth. Captain 
A decides to place one platoon on outpost. 

Required, 1. Captain A's order. 

Answer. Verbally: *^Two or three Red companies were five 
miles south of Leavenworth at 2:30 P. M. today. No enemy is west of 
Leavenworth. We will camp here. 1st Platoon, 'A' company, under 
Sergeant A, will form the oulpost, relieving the advance guard (2d 
Platoon Co. A). The line, Pope Hill (sm') — Rabbit Point (tn') will be 
held. Detached posts will be placed on Hill 880, west of Merritt Hill (rl'), 
and on Engineer Hill (ql'). In case of attack the outpost line will be 
held. 

''The baggage will be at the main camp. 

"Messages will reach me on Devin Ridge (rm')." 

Issued verbally to officers and Sergeant A. 

Eequired, 2. Give verbatim (word for word) the order issued 
by Sergeant A. 

Answer. "Two companies of the enemy were five miles south of 
Leavenworth at 2:30 P. M. today. Our camp is to be here. This platoon 
will be the outpost on the line, Rabbit Point (im') — Pope Hill (sm'). 

"The right support, 1st section, less 1 squad, under Sergeant B, 
will take position north of Pope Hill and ^cover the following front: the 
ravine (XIX — Merritt Hill) west of Grant avenue to the ravine about 
midway between Grant Avenue and Rabbit Point (tn'). 

"The left support, 2d section, less 1 squad under Sergeant H, will 
take position on north slope of Rabbit Point and will cover the follow- 
ing front: The ravine midway between Grant Avenue and Rabbit Point 
to Missoliri River. 

"Corporal D, you will take* the eight men of your squad and form 
a detached post on Engineer Hill (qk'). 

"Corporal E, take your squad and form a detached post on Hill 
880 west of Merritt Hill (rl'). 

[475] 



538 (contd.) 

"If attacked hold your front. Each support and detached post 
will entrench. < 

"Send messages to me at right support/' 

The outpost moves out, each support and detached post separately, 
without throwing out covering patrols, because the advance guard is 
now holding the front. There is no reserve. 

Required, 3. What does Sergeant A do now? 

Required, 4. What does Sergeant B do as soon as he reaches 
Pope Hill? 

(Note: During the remainder of the afternoon one man up in a 
tree on Grant Avenue will be the only observing post necessary for this 
support. At night an outguard would be placed on Grant Avenue with 
continuous patrols along the front, because the open ground furnishes 
easy approach to the enemy. A post of four men might also be placed 
on the bridge over Corral Creek (um'). 

Required, 5. The location of supports and the main body of de- 
tached post on Engineer Hill. 

Required, 6. What patrolling would be done from the left sup- 
portt 



[476] 



539-540 

CHAPTER VIII 
MAP READING 

INTEODUCTION 

539. This chapter on map reading presents two phases of the subject. 
In order that the beginner may grasp the rudimentary principles without 
difficulty, the subject is first considered in the most elementary manner, 
and later, for the benefit of the student who has already acquired a 
slight knowledge of the subject, the same ground is covered in a less ele- 
mentary way. 

For some unknown reason, military map reading has always been 
considered a very difficult subject to master, and the beginner, starting 
out with this idea, tries to find it difficult. Therefore, it is not strange 
that he finds the subject hard to understand and laborious to study. As 
a matter of fact, it is far easier to learn to read a map than it is to learn 
to patrol, write messages, give proper orders, etc. 

The most ignorant tourist easily uses the complicated maps in the 
guide books to find his way about; men, women and children, riding in 
automobiles, use the road maps of the country without a thought of hav- 
ing acquired the knowledge of some difficult art; but as soon as the mili- 
tary student considers map reading, he decides he has a most difficult 
subject to master, and he proceeds, -unconsciously, to make it difficult. 

PART I 

A military map is a drawing, made to represent some section of 
country, showing the things that are of military importance, such as 
roads, streams, bridges, houses^ and hills. The map must be so drawn that 
you can tell the distance between any two points, the heights of hills, 
and the relative positions of everything shown. 

Map Reading 
By map reading is meant the ability to get a clear idea of the 
ground represented by the map with the same ease one reads a book or 
newspaper. This means to grasp at once the distance on the ground cor- 
responding to a given distance on the map, to get a correct idea of the 
network of streams and roads, heights, slopes, depressions, and all forms 
of military cover and obstacles. The first thing necessary in map read- 
ing, therefore, is to have a thorough knowledge of the scale of maps. 

The Scale of a Map 

540. In order that you may be able to tell the distance between any 
two points, for instance, between Salem and Boling on the Elementary 
Map (in back of book), the map must be so drawn that a certain dis- 
tance, say one inch^ on the map always represents a certain distance on 
the ground, say one mile. 

Suppose Boling is five miles from Salem, and one inch on the 
map is to represent one mile on the ground; then on the map Boling would 
b© showQ five incl^^s from Salem, and any person knowing the scale of 

[477] 



540 (contd.) 

that map (1 inch^l mile), could at once determine the distance from 
Salem to Boling. He would measure the number of inches between the 
two towns and know that the actual distance on the ground was as many 
miles as he had measured inches. Suppose, for example, he found it 
was three and one-half inches to Boling; then he would know that the two 
places were three and one-half miles apart. 

Another example, suppose the scale of your map reads 6 inches=l 
mile and you wish to know the distance you have to march from a farm 
to a certain crossroads. You measure the distance between these two 
points on the map and find it to be nine inches, you at once know that 
the actual distance, ground distance, is one and one-half miles. For, if 
six inches on the map equals one mile on the ground, nine inches must 
equal one and a half miles — just as twelve inches would equal two miles, 
and twenty-four inches would represent four miles on the ground. 

Instead of writing the scale on the map thus, 6 inclies=:l mile or 
6 inches to the mile (which means the same thing), you may find the scale 
represented by a long line or pair of lines divided into numbered lengths. 
Thus: 

l-l I I ! \— — \ \ \ \ — 

00 50 100 200 300 400 500 600 yards' 

Figure 1. 

In fact, this is even a simpler method of indicating the scale of 
a map. You do not have to convert measurements of inches into miles, 
yards, feet, or whatever inches on the map represent on the ground. No 
ruler of inches is necessary. From the on the scale shown in Figure 1 
to the 600, is 600 yards. This means that this length on the map rep- 
resents 600 yards on the ground, and as the scale has seven subdivisions 
of 100 yards each, and one of these again subdivided into four parts of 
twenty-five yards each, you can quickly find out the ground distance be- 
tween points on the map. 

It must be noted here that each subdivision of the scale is marked, 
not with its actual length, but with the distance which it represents on ^ i 
the ground. This is ordinarily known as a graphical scale, and is the 1 j 
most frequent method of indicating the scale of a map. 

Example. If you wish to determine the distance from A to B, 
along the road shown in Figure 2, 

41 . _^l 



. Si 



-I 



too 9o o too 20Q 3oo -K>^ Too d09y4rd8 

Figure 2. 

take a piece of paper and lay its edge along the road^ mark the edge op- | j 
posite A and opposite B; lay the edge of the paper along the scale (shown ' 

in Figure 2), and it shows the distance to be 675 yards. When you have 
to determine several distances from the map, it is more convenient first 
to lay the edge of the paper along the scale and mark off divisions liko 
tjiose of the scale. You then have a copy of the scale which you can 4 

[478] 



540a-541 

quickly apply to any portion of the map and read off the ground distances 
instantly. This has supposedly been done in Figure 2, where a rough copy 
of the actual scale is shown applied to the road between A and B. 

Example. Along the lower border of the Elementary Map is a 
graphical scale of miles and a second graphical scale, reading in yards. 
How far is it from York to Oxford by the most direct road (Valley Pike) ? 
Take a piece of paper and lay its edge along the scale of miles; mark o'ff 
similar divisions on the edge of the paper. This gives you a length of 
one mile. Apply this along the Valley Pike, starting at York. You will 
find the distance is four times the length of the paper and about one- 
half mile over. Therefore, as the scale length you used represents one 
mile, the distance is four and one-half miles. If you desired to know 
the distance in yards from York to the Cemetery on the County Road, 
you would repeat the same process, taking your distances from the 
graphical scale reading yards, and you would find the distance to he 
750 yards. 

Using the scale of miles, you can find the distance from York to 
Salem by road (three miles), from Salem to Boling by road (four miles), 
and so on. 

The distances between points on a map represent corresponding 
Ground distances measured on the level (horizontal distances). For ex- 
ample, the distance from York to Boling that you would walk would in- 
clude the extra distance required in ascending and descending the hill 
and valley between these two points. The distance on the map, however, 
represents the distance between the towns, measured as though the inter- 
vening ground were absolutely level. 

54:0a. Direction. In order that the map may correctly show the posi- 
tions of the different roads, streams, hills, houses, etc., with respect to 
one another, they must be given the same relative locations on the map 
that they occupy on the ground. The map must also show the points 
of the compass. 

541. Meridians. If you look along the upper left hand border of the 
Elementary Map you will see two arrows pointing towards the top of 
the map, thus: 



[479] 



64:1 (contd. 



They are pointing in the direction that is north on this map. The 
arrow with a full barb points toward the north pole of the earth. The 
arrow with but half a barb points toward what is known as the magnetic 
pole of the earth. This magnetic pole is a point up in the arctic regions 
near the geographical or true north pole, which, on account of its mag- 
netic qualities, attracts one end of all compass needles and causes them 
to point towards it. As it is near the true north pole, this serves to 
indicate the north direction to a person using a compass. The arrow 
with the full barb is called the true meridian, as it points to the true 
north pole. The arrow with the half barb is called the magnetic meri- 
dian as it points, not accurately towards the true north pole, but towards 
the magnetic pole. When you are using a compass^ the needle points 
toward the magnetic pole, which is close enough to the true north for 
your purposes. 

You now know from the meridians that in going from York to 
Oxford you travel north; from Boling to Salem you must travel south; 
going from Salem to York requires you to travel west; and from York 
to Salem you travel east. Suppose you are in command of a patrol at 
York and are told to go to Salem by the most direct line across country. 
You look at your map and see that Salem is exactly east of York. Next 
you take out your field compass (Figure 16, Par. 551), raise the lid, hold 
the box level, allow the needle to settle and see in what direction the 
north end of the needle points (it would point towards Oxford). You 
then know the direction of north from York, and you can turn your right 
and go due east towards Salem. 

Having once discovered the direction of north on the ground, 
you can go to any point shown on your map without other assistance. If 

[480] 



542-542a 

you stand at York, facing north and refer to your map, you need no 
guide to tell you that Salem lies directly to your right; Oxford straight 
in front of you; Boling in a direction about halfway between the direc- 
tions of Salem and Oxford, and so on. 

542. Contours. So far we have only dealt with the methods of repre- 
senting the horizontal (level) distances between points, and the direc- 
tions with regard to the different points of the compass (north, south, 
east and west). In order to show on a map a correct representation of 
-ground, the differences in elevation (vertical distances) of the terrain 
(ground) — the hills, valleys, ravines and flat land — must be indicated. 
This is usually done by means of contours. 

A contour is a line on a map which shows the route one might 
follow on the ground and walk on the absolute level. If you went half 
way up the side of a hill and, starting there, walked entirely around the 
hillj neither going up any higher nor down any lower, and you made a. 
sketch of the route you had followed, the line representing your path 
around the hill would be, in effect, a contour. By means of these contour 
lines at different vertical (up and down) elevations, the hills, valleys, 
etc., can be graphically shown on a map. 

For example, on the Elementary Map, ^andy Eidge and Long 
Eidge are two isolated hills: Suppose this country were flooded with 
water twenty feet above the lowest point (Sandy Creek), the lines (con- 
tours) around Sandy Eidge and Long Eidge marked, 20, would then 
mark the edge of the water (water line) around the lower slopes of these 
hills. The * ^ 20 ' ' means that the contours so marked show the lines of the 
same elevation on the ground that are just twenty feet vertically above 
the lowest point in the section of country shown by this map. Now sup- 
pose the water rose twenty feet more, that is, to a height of forty feet. 
Then the contours marked 40 would indicate the water line around these 
hills — all the ground towards the 20-foot contour and below would be in- 
undated. If the water rose to sixty feet, then all of Long Eidge would 
be under water, but the two small knolls on Sandy Eidge outlined by 
the sixty-foot contour, would still be out of water, as their crests are 
shown to be slightly higher (66, 68 and 65). Contours are taken at a 
fixed vertical distance apart. In this case it is twenty feet. 

542a. An excellent idea of what is meant by contours and contour- 
lines can be gotten from Figures 4 and 5. Let us suppose that formerly 
the island represented in Figure 4 was entirely under water and that by a 
sudden disturbance the water of the lake fell until the island stood 
twenty feet above the water, and that later several other sudden falls 
of the water, twenty feet each time, occurred, until now the island stands 
100 feet out of the lake, and at each of the twenty feet elevations a dis- 
tinct water line is left. These water lines are perfect contour-lines 
measured from the surface of the lake as a reference (or datum) plane. 
Figure 5 shows the contour-lines in Figure 4 projected, or shot down, on 
a horizontal (level) surface. It will be observed that on the gentle 
slopes, such as F-H (Fig. 4), the contours (20, 40) are far apart. But 
on«the steep slopes, as E-0, the contours (20, 40, 60, 80, 100) are close 
together. Hence, it is seen that contours far apart on a map indicate 
gentle slopes, and contours close together, steep slopes. It is also seen 

[481] 



542a (contd.) 

that the shape of the contours gives an accurate idea of the form of the 
island. The contours in Fig. 5 give an exact representation not only of 



Figure 




Figure 4. ^ 

the general form of the island, the two peaks, O and B, the stream, M-N, 
the Saddle, M, the water shed from F to H, and steep bluff at K, but 
they also give the slopes of the ground at all points. From this we see 
that the slopes are directly proportional to the nearness of the contours — 
that iS; the nearer the contours on a map are to one another, the steeper 
is the slope, and the farther the contours on a map are from one another, 
the gentler is the slope. A wide space between contours, therefore, rep- 
resents level ground. 



[482] 



452a (contd.) 




Fig. 7. 



The contours of a cone (Figure 6) are circles of different sizes, 
one within another, and the same distance apart, because the slope of a 
cone is at all points the same. 

The contours of a half sphere (Figure 7), are a series of circles, far 
apart near the center (top), and near together at the outside (bottom), 
showing that the slope of a hemisphere varies at all points, being nearly 
flat on top and increasing in steepness toward the bottom. 

The contours of a concave (hollowed out) cone (Figure 8) are close 
together at the center (top) and far apart at the outside (bottom). 

The following additional points about contours should be re- 
membered: 

(a) A Water Shed or Spur, along with rain water divides, flowing 
away from it on both sides, is indicated by the higher contours bulging 
out toward the lower ones (F-H, Fig. 5). 

(b) A Water Course or Valley, along which rain falling on both sides 
of it joins in one stream, is indicated by the lower contours curving in 
toward the higher ones (M-N, Fig. 5). 

(c) The contours of different heights which unite and become a single 
line, represent a vertical cliff (K, Fig. 5)< 

(d) Two contours which cross each other represent an overhang- 
ing cliff. 

(e) A closed contour without another contour in it, represents either 
an elevation or a depression, depending on whether its reference number 
is greater or smaller than that of the outer contour. A hilltop is shown 
when the closed contour is higher than the contour next to it; a depres- 
sion is shown when the closed contour is lower than the one next to it. 

If the student will first examine the drainage system, as shown by 
the courses of the streams on the map, he can readily locate all the val- 

[483] 



543-544 

leys, as the streams must flow through valleys. Knowing the valleys, 
the ridges or hills can easily be placed, even without reference to the 
numbers on the contours. 

For example: On the Elementary Map, Woods Creek flows north 
and York Creek flows south. They rise very close to each other, and the 
ground between the points at which they rise must be higher ground, 
sloping north on one side and south on the other, as the streams flow 
north and south, respectively, (see the ridge running west from Twin 
Hills.) - 

The course of Sandy Creek indicates a long valley, extending al- 
most the entire length of the map. Meadow Creek follows another valley, 
and Deep Eun another. When these streams happen to join other streams, 
the valleys must open into each other. 

543. Scale of Map Distances (or, Scale of Slopes). On the Elementary 
Map, below the scale of miles and scale of yards, is a scale similar to 
the following one: 

I '^^* t *' t »* t »« !<' iiMO'Hfl 

M.D 

Figure 9. 

The left-hand division is marked %°; the next division (one-half 
as long) 1°; the next division (one-half the length of the 1° division) 
2°, and so on. The %° division means that where adjacent contours on 
the map are just that distance apart, the ground has a slope of % a de- 
gree between these two contours, and slopes up toward the contour with 
the higher reference number; a space between adjacent contours equal to 
the 1° space shown on the scale means a 1° slope, and so on. 

What is a slope of 1°? By a slope of 1° we mean that the sur- 
face of the ground makes an angle of 1° with the horizontal (a level sur- 
face. See Figure 14, Par. 550). The student should find out the slope 
of some hill or street and thus get a concrete idea of what the different 
degrees of slope mean. A road having a 5° slope is very steep. 

By means of this scale of M. D. 's on the map, the map reader can 
determine the slope of any portion of the ground represented, that is, 
as steep as %"* or steeper. Ground having a slope of less than %° is 
practically level. 

544. Conventional Signs. In order that the person using a map may 
be able to tell what are roads, houses, woods, etc., each of these features 
are represented by particular signs, called conventional signs. In other 
words, conventional signs are certain marks or symbols shown on a map 
to designate physical features of the terrain. (See diagram. Par. 555.) 
On the Elemxcntary Map the conventional signs are all labeled with the 
name of what they represent. By examining this map the student can 
quickly learn to distinguish the conventional signs of most of the ordinary 
features shown on maps. These conventional signs are usually graphical 
representations of the ground features they represent, and, therefore, can 
usually be recognized without explanation. 

For example, the roads on the Elementary Map can be easily dis- 
tinguished. They are represented by parallel lines ( -). The 
student should be able to trace out the route of the Valley Pike, the 
Chester Pike, the County Road, and the direct road from Salem to 
Boling. 

[484] 



545 

Private or farm lanes, and unimproved roads are represented by 
broken lines (=i=r=zr=). Such a road or lane can be seen running from 
the Barton farm to the Chester Pike. Another lane runs from the Mills 
farm to the same Pike. The small crossmarks on the road lines indicate 
barbed wire fences; the round circles indicate smooth wire; the small, 
connected ovals (as shown around the cemetery) indicate stone walls, 
and the zigzag lines (as shown one mile south of Boling) represent 
wooden fences. 

Near the center of the map, by the Chester Pike, is an orchard. 
The small circles, regularly placed, give the idea of trees planted in 
regular rows. Each circle does not indicate a tree, but the area covered 
by the small circles does indicate accurately the area covered by the or- 
chard on the ground. 

Just southwest of Boling a large woods (Boling Woods) is shown. 
Other clumps of woods, of varying extent, are indicated on the map. 

The course of Sandy Creek can be readily traced, and the arrows 
placed along it, indicate the direction in which it flows. Its steep banks 
are indicated by successive dashes, termed hachures. A few trees are 
shown strung along its banks. Baker ^s Pond receives its water from 
the little creek which rises in the small clump of timber just south of 
the pond, and the hachures along the northern end represent the steep 
banks of a dam. Meadow Creek flows northeast from the dam and then 
northwest tovrard Oxford, joining Woods Creek just south of that town. 
York Creek rises in the woods 1% miles north of York, and flows south 
through York. It has a west branch which rises in the valleys south of 
Twin Hills. 

A railroad is shown running southeast from Oxford to Salem. The 
hachures, unconnected at their outer extremities, indicate the fills or em- 
bankments over which the track runs. Notice the fills or embankments 
on which the railroad runs just northwest of Salem; near the crossing 
of Sandy Creek; north of Baker ^s Pond; and where it approaches the 
outskirts of Oxford. The hachures, connected along their outer ex- 
tremities, represent the cut through which the railroad passes. There 
is only one railroad cut shown on the Elementary Map— about one- 
quarter of a mile northeast of Baker ^s Pond — where it cuts through the 
northern extremity of the long range of hills, starting just east of York. 
The wagon roads pass through numerous cuts — west of Twin Hills, north- 
ern end of Sandy Eidge, southeastern end of Long Kidge, and so on. 
The small T's along the railroad and some of the wagon roads, indi- 
cate telegraph or telephone lines. 

The conventional sign for a bridge is shown where the railroad 
crosses Sandy Creek on a trestle. Other bridges are shown at the points 
the wagon roads cross this creek. Houses or buildings are shown in 
Oxford, Salem, York and Boling. They are also shown in the case of 
a number of farms represented — Barton farm. Wells farm. Mason's, 
Brown's, Baker's and others. The houses shown in solid black are sub- 
stantial structures of brick or stone; the buildings indicated by rectangu- 
lar outlines are "out buildings," barns, sheds, etc. 

545. Example of Method Followed in Reading a Map. Suppose you 
are out in the field in a campaign and are ordered to march to the sec- 

[485] 



545 (contd.) 

tion of country represented by the Elementary Map and take military 
control of it. You are given a copy of this map to study over the situa- 
tion and familiarize yourself with the country. How would you go about 
reading this map? ^^^ 

You would first look at the scale at the bottom of the map and 
see about how much distance on the map represented a mile on the 
ground. Then you would look for the meridian and see which direction 
was north. 

Oxford, Boling, Salem and York are the only towns or villages — 
all small. Oxford is about four miles due north of York and about 
two and one-half miles west of Boling, and Boling is about four miles 
north of Salem. A direct road connects Salem and Boling. The Chester 
Pike runs northwest out of Salem^ and then due north, furnishing, with 
the crossroads, means of communication between Oxford and Boling, 
Oxford and Salem, York and Boling, and York and Salem. A rail- 
road passes through Oxford and Salem. 

There are numerous streams in the country, but Sandy Creek, 
f^VQ feet deep and sixty feet wide, is the only one of any size. It passes 
about halfway between Salem and York, flows north for about three miles, 
. turns east, and disappears off the map about a mile south of Boling. The 
course of this creek and the smaller ones, mark the valleys in the dis- 
trict. Baker's Pond, two miles southeast of Oxford, is the only large 
body of water. 

There are several prominent hills or ridges. Just east of York 
a range of hills commences, and runs north about three miles, with 
several east and west spurs. It reaches a height of eighty feet in sev- 
eral places, and completely commands the Chester and Valley Pikes and 
the valley through which Sandy Creek flows. East of Sandy Creek and 
nearly a mile northwest of Salem, is a long, " hog-backed '^ hill (Sandy 
Ridge), a little over a mile long, rising sixty feet out of the valley, and 
running north and south. From its crest an extensive view of the valley 
through which Sandy Creek, the Chester Pike and the railroad run can 
be obtained. Between Oxford and Boling is a similar hill (Long Ridge) 
about forty feet high. About two-thirds of the way between Salem and 
Boling, the western extremity of a high ridge is shown, with Bald Knob 
rising to a height of 100 feet above the surrounding low ground. It is 
the highest point shown on the map. A quarry has been cut into its 
southern face, to which a switch runs from the railroad. There are 
several small knolls, notably the one between Bald Knob and Salem. 

The country is dotted with farms and orchards, but is lightly tim- 
bered, except for the extensive Boling Woods. Some of the roads and 
lanes are bordered by lines of trees, and the majority of the fences 
along the roads are of barbed or smooth wire. Telegraph or telephone 
lines follow the railroad and the principal highways. There are a few 
stone walls and two swamps. 

Three highway bridges span Sandy Creek, one stone, one steel and 
one of wood. The railroad crosses this creek on a steel trestle about 
200 yards long; the track approaching each end of the trestle on a high 
fill or embankment. The width, depth and steep banks of this creek make 
these bridges of considerable importance. 

[486] 



546 
PART II 

(Note: Part II presents the subject of Map Reading in a more 
eomprehensive manner than Part I.) 

A Map is a representation on paper of a certain portion of the 
earth's surface. 

A Military Map is one which shows the relative distances, direc- 
tions and elevations of all features of military importance on the ground 
represented. 

546. Scale of Maps. A map is drawn to scale, that is, each unit of 
distance on the map must bear a fixed proportion to the corresponding 
distance on the ground. If one inch on the map, for instance, equals one 
mile (63,360 inches) on the ground, then one-third inch equals one-third 
of a mile, or ®^^°/s=21,120 inches on the ground, etc. The term distance 
in this book means horizontal distance; vertical distance is called eleva- 
tion or depression, depending on whether the point spoken of is higher 
or lower than another. 

Fox example (see Fort Leavenworth map in back of book), the 
distance from Frenchman's (oc') in a straight line to McGuire (qh') is 
2,075 yards, but to walk this distance would require the ascent and 
descent of Sentinel Hill, so that the actual length of travel would be 
considerably greater than the horizontal distance between the two points. 
In speaking of distance between towns, boundaries, etc., horizontal dis- 
tance is always meant. The fixed relation between map distances and 
corresponding ground distances must be constantly kept in mind. 

Methods of Representing Scales. There are three ways in which 
the scale of the map may be represented: 

1st. By words and figures, as 3 inches=l mile; 1 inch=:200 feet. 

2d. By Representative Fraction (abbreviated R.F.), which is a 

fraction whose numerator represents units of distance on the map and 

whose denominator, units of distance on the ground. 

_ , T^ T^ 1 inch (on map) , . , . . , . . ^ -r. 

For example, R. F.=- — -r^ ^4^- which is equivalent to R. F.= 

1 mile (on ground) ^ 

1/63360, since I mile=63,360 inches. So the expression, "R. F. 1/63360'* 
on a map merely means that 1 inch on the map represents 63,360 inches 
(or 1 mile) on the ground. This fraction is usually written with a numer- 
ator 1, as above, no definite unit of inches or miles being specified in 
either the numerator or denominator. In this case the expression means 
that one unit of distance on the map equals as many of the same units 
on the ground as are in the denominator. Thus, 1/63360 means that 
1 inch on the map=63,360 inches on the ground, 1 foot on the map= 
63,360 feet on the ground; 1 yard on the map=63,360 yards on the 
ground, etc. 

3d. By Graphical Scale, that is, a drawn scale. A graphical 
scale is a line drawn on the map, divided into equal parts, each part being 
marked not with its actual length, but with the distance which it repre- 
sents on the ground. Thus, in Figure 1, page 26, the distance from to 50 
represents 50 yards on the ground; the distance from to 100, 100 yards 
on the grounds, etc. And if the scale were applied to road running from 
A to B (Figure 2, Par. 540), it would show that the length of the road 
is 675 yards. 

[487] 



546a 

It will readily be seen that a map scale must be known by the 
student in order that he may have a correct idea of the distances between 
objects represented on the map. This is necessary in determining lengths 
of marches, ranges of small arms and artillery, relative lengths of roads 
to a given point, etc. Therefore, if under service conditions one should 
have only a map without a scale, or one with only an B. F. on it, he 
would first of all be compelled to construct a graphical scale to read 
yards, miles, etc., or one showing how many miles one inch represents. 
Fortunately, almost every map has a graphical scale, and there will be 
but few occasions on which it will be necessary to construct a graphical 
scale. 

546a. Construction of Scales. The following are the most usual prob- 
lems that arise: 

1. Having given the E. F. on a map, to find how many miles on the 
ground are represented by one inch on the map. Let us suppose that the 
E. F. is 1^1120. 

Solution 
Now, as previously explained, ^1120 simply means that one inch on 
the map represents 21,120 inches on the ground. There are 63,360 inches 
in one mile. 21,120 goes into 63,360 three times — that is to say, 21,120 
is % of 63,360, and we, therefore, see from this that one inch on the map 
represents 3^ of a mile on the ground, and consequently it would take 
three inches on the map to represent one whole mile on the ground. So, 
we have this general rule: To find out how many miles one inch on the 
map represents on the ground, divide the denominator of the E. F. by 
63,360. 

2. Being given the E. F. to construct a graphical scale to read yards. 
Let us assume that ^^1120 is the E. F. given — that is to say, one inch on 
the map represents 21,120 inches on the ground, but, as there are 36 
inches in one yard, 21,120 inches=2ii2%g yds.=:586.66 yds. — that is, one 
inch on the map represents 586.66 yds. on the ground. Now, suppose about 
a 6-inch scaie is desired. Since one inch on the map = 586.66 yards on 
the ground, 6 inches (map) =:: 586.66 X 6 = 3,519.96 yards (ground). 
In order to get as nearly a 6-inch scale as possible to represent even 
hundreds of yards, let us assume 3,500 yards to be the total number to 
be represented by the scale. The question then resolves itself into this: 
How many inches on the map are necessary to represent 3,500 yards on 
the ground. Since, as we have seen, one inch (map) = 586.66 yards 
(ground), as many inches are necessary to show 3,500 yards as 586.66 
is contained in 3,500; or ^^^%8Qm = 5.96 inches. 



f-^^ii y^ y. 



-/- 



'HrZ^U.^ ^ _ ^^^ ^^^ ^ -^ J 

[488] 



R- F. -^^:r} rr-^ ^» »^^ ...... ^ — ^/^4480- 



546a (eontd.) 

Now lay off with a scale of equal parts the distance A-I (Figure 
10) 3= 5.96 inches (about 5 and 9^2 tenths), and divide it into 7 equal 
parts by the construction shown in figure, as follows: Draw a line A-H, 
making any convenient angle with A-I, and lay off 7 equal convenient 
lengths (A-B, B-C, C-D, etc.), so as to bring H about opposite to I. 
Join H and I and draw the intermediate lines through B^ C, etc., parallel 
to H-I. These lines divide A-I into 7 equal parts, each 500 yards long. 
The left part, called the Extension, is similarly divided into 5 equal parts, 
each representing iOO yards. 

3. To construct a scale for a map with no scale. In this case, meas- 
ure the distance between any two definite points on the ground repre-' 
sented, by pacing or otherwise, and scale off the corresponding map dis- 
tance. Then see how the distance thus measured corresponds with the 
distance on the map between the two points. For example, let us sup- 
pose that the distance on the ground between two given points is one mile 
and that the distance between the corresponding points on the map is 
% inch. We would, therefore, see that % inch on the map = one mile on 
the ground. Hence % inch would represent % of a mile, and 4-4, or one 
inch, would represent 4 X % = 4-3 = ly^ miles. 

The E. F. is found as follows: 

1 inch 1 inch 

li^Tmile "~63^360'^<~i%" inches 

From this a scale of yards is constructed as above (2). 

4. To construct a graphical scale from a scale expressed in unfamiliar 
units. There remains one more problem, which occurs when there is a 
scale on the map in words and figures, but it is expressed in unfamiliar 
units, such as the meter (=39.37 inches), strides of a man or horse, rate 
of travel of column, etc. If a noncommissioned officer should come into 
possession of such a map, it would be impossible for him to have a 
correct idea of the distances on the map. If the scale were in inches to 
miles or yards, he would estimate the distance between any two points on 
the map to be so many inches and at once know the corresponding dis- 
tance on the ground in miles or yards. But suppose the scale found on the 
map to be one inch = 100 strides (ground), then estimates could not be 
intelligently made by one unfamiliar with the length of the stride used. 
However, suppose the stride was 60 inches long; we would then have this: 
Since 1 stride = 60 inches, 100 strides = 6,000 inches. But according to 
our supposition, 1 inch on the map^lOO strides on the ground; hence 1 
inch on the map=:6,000 inches on the ground, and we have as our E. F., 

'———-- — ■■■ = ^^000- A graphical scale can now be constructed 

6,000 inches (ground) ^ 

as in (2), 

Problems in Scales 

The following problems should be solved to become familiar with 
the construction of scales: 

Problem No. 1. The E. F. of a map is liooo- Eequired: 1. The 
distance in miles shown by one inch on the map; 2. To construct a 
graphical scale of yards; also one to read miles. 

[4891 



547-548 

Problem No. 2. A map has a graphical scale on which 1.5 incheu 
reads 500 strides. 1. What is the K. F. of the map? 2. How many 
miles are represented by 1 inch? 

Problem No. 3. The Leavenworth map in back of this book has a 
graphical scale and a measured distance of 1.25 inches reads 1,100 yards. 
Kequired: 1. The R. F. of the map; 2. Number of miles shown by 1 
inch on the map. 

Problem No. 4. 1. Construct a scale to read yards for a map of 
R. F. == ^^1120' 2. How many inches represent 1 mile? 

547. Scaling Distances From a Map. There are four methods of scal- 
ing distances from maps: 

1st. Apply a piece of straight edged paper to the distance between 
any two points, A and B, for instance, and mark the distance on the 
paper. Now, apply the paper to the graphical scale, (Figure 2, Par. 540), 
and read the number of yards on the main scale and add the number 
indicated on the extension. For example: 600 + 75 = 675 yards. 

2nd. By taking the distance off with a pair of dividers and applying 
the dividers thus set to the graphical scale, the distance is read. 

3rd. By use of an instrument called a map measurer, Figure 11, set 
the hand on the face to read zero, roll the small wheel over the distance; 
now roll the wheel in an opposite direction along the graphical scale, 
noting the number of yards passed over. Or, having rolled over the 
distance, note the number of inches on the dial and multiply this by the 
number of miles or other units per inch. A map measurer is valuable 
for use in solving map problems in patrolling, advance guard, outpost, etc. 




Figure 11. 
4th. Apply a scale of inches to the line to be measured, and multiply 
this distance by the number of miles per inch shown by the map. 

Having learned how to take off distances on the map, the next 
step in map reading is to determine differences of elevation. 

548. Method of Representing Differences of Elevation. Since maps 
are representations on paper of ground which has size not only in a 
horizontal (level) but in a vertical (up and down) direction, it is neces- 
sary to have some means of rapidly determining elevations. This is 
accomplished in one of three ways: 

1st. By means of contours. A contour line is the line in which a hori- 
zontal (level) plane cuts the surface of the ground. It may also be said 

[4901 



549 

that a contour line is a line that joins points on the surface of the earth, 
which are the same height — that is, which are in the same level plane. 
The projection of a contour line on a horizontal surface (a map) is called 
a contour. Elevations and depressions may, therefore, be represented on 
maps by imagining the surface of the ground being cut by a number of 
horizontal planes that are the same distance apart^ and then projecting 
(or shooting) on a horizontal plane the lines so cut on the earth's surface. 
(Npte: Eead over Par. 542a, before studying what follows.) 
549. Map Distances. The horizontal distance between contours on a 
map (called map distance, or M. D.) is inversely proportional to the slope 
of the ground represented — that is to say, the greater the slope of the 
ground, the less is the horizontal distance between the contours; the less 
the slope of the ground represented, the greater is the horizontal distance 
between the contours. 



S/ope of I Degree 



- ^QQ IN. 



Figure 12. 



Slope 
(degrees) 


Rise 
(feet) 


Horizontal 
Distance 
(inches) 


1 deg. 




688 


2 deg. 




688 

— = 344 

2 


3 deg. 




688 

— = 229 
3 


4 deg. 




688 

— = 172 
4 


5 deg. 




688 

— = 138 
5 



Figure 13. 

It is a fact that 688 inches horizontally on a 1 degree slope gives 
a vertical rise of one foot; 1376 inches, two feet, 2064 inches, three feet, 
etc., from which we see that on a slope of 1 degree, 688 inches multiplied 
by vertical rises of 1 foot, 2 feet, 3 feet, etc., gives us the corresponding 
horizontal distance in inches. For example, if the contour interval (Ver- 
tical Interval, V. I.) of a map is 10 feet, then 688 inches x 10 equals 
6880 inches, gives the horizontal ground distance corresponding to a rise 
of 10 feet on a 1 degree slope. To reduce this horizontal ground distance 
to horizontal map distance, we would, for example, proceed as follows: 

Let us assume the E. F. to be 1/15840 — that is to say, 15,840 inches 
on the ground equals 1 inch on the map, consequently, 6880 inches on the 
ground equals 6880/15840, equals .44 inch on the map. And in the case 
of 2 degrees, 3 degrees, etc., we would have: 

[491] 



550 

M. D. for 2° 



M.D.for3°=^ 



6880 



15840 X 2 

6880 



: .22 inch; 



: .15 inch, etc. 



15840 X 3 
From the above, we have this rule: 

To construct a scale of M. D. for a map, multiply 688 by the con- 
tour interval (in feet) and the R. F. of the map, and divide the results by 
1, 2, 3, 4, etc., and then lay off these distances as shown in Figure 9, Par. 
543. 

FORMULA 



M. D. (inches) 



_ 688 XV. I. (feet) X R. F. 



Degrees (1, 2, 3, 4, etc.) 
550. Slopes. Slopes are usually given in one of three ways: 1st, in 
degrees; 2nd in percentages; 3rd, in gradients .(grades). 

1st. A one degree slope means that the angle between the horizontal 
and the given line is 1 degree (1°). See Figure 12, Par. 549. 

2d. A slope is said to be 1, 2, 3, etc., per cent, when 100 units hori- 
zontally correspond to a rise of 1, 2, 3, etc., units vertically. 



I Per Oeni Slope 



/oofi. 



ZUfft, 



2 Per Cen^ Slope 



iOOft. 

/oPejiCiniJJoB^ 



Zi2ft, 




3d.- A slope is said to be on one (^y{), two on three, (%), etc., when 
one unit horizontal corresponds to 1 vertical; three horizontal correspond 
to two vertical, etc. The numerator usually refers to the vertical dis- 
tance, and the denominator to the horizontal distance. 




Figure 15. 



551 

Degrees of slope are usually used in military matters; percentages 
are often used for roads, almost always of railroads; gradients are used of 
steep slopes, and usually of dimensions of trenches. 

Effect of Slope on Movements 

60 degrees or % inaccessible for infantry; 

45 degrees or ^| difficult for infantry; 

30 degrees or ^ inaccessible for cavalry; 

15 degrees or ^ inacessible for artillery; 
5 degrees or 1^2 accessible for wagons. 

The normal system of scales prescribed for U. S. Army field 
sketches is as follows: For road sketches, 3 inches = 1 mile, vertical 
interval between contours (V. I.) = 20 ft.; for position sketches, 6 
inches = 1 mile, V. L = 10 ft.; for fortification sketches, 12 inches =, 1 
mile, V. I. = 5 ft. On this system any given length of M. D. corresponds 
to the same slope on each of the scales. For instance, .15 inch between 
contours represents a 5° slope on the 3-inch, 6-inch and 12-inch maps of 
the normal system. Figure 9, Par. 543, gives the normal scale of M. D.'s 
for slopes up to 8 degrees. A scale of M. D/s is usually printed on the 
margin of maps, near the geographical scale. 

Directions on Maps 
551. Having given the means used for determining horizontal distances 
and relative elevations represented on a map, the next step is the deter- 
mination of horizontal directions. When these three facts (distance, 
height and direction) are known of any point with respect to any other 
point, its position is then fully determined. For instance (see map in 
pocket at back of book), Pope Hill (sm') is 800 yards from Grant Hill 
(um') (using graphical scale), and it is 30 feet higher than Grant Hill, 
since it is on contour 870 and Grant Hill is on contour 840; Pope Hill is 
also due. north of Grant Hill, that is, the north and south line through 
Grant Hill passes through Pope Hill. Therefore, the position of Pope 
Hill is fully determined with respect to Grant Hill. 

The direction line from which other directions are measured is 
usually the true north and south line (known as the True Meridian) or 
the plane of the magnetic needle, called the Magnetic Meridian. These 
two lines do not usually have the same positions, because at all points of 
the earth's surface the true meridian is the straight line joining the 
observer's position and the North Pole of the earth, whereas the direction 
of the magnetic needle varies at different points of the earth, at some 
places pointing east of and at others west of, the True Pole. At th« 
present time the angle which the magnetic needle (called Magnetic 
Declination) makes with the True Meridian, is at Fort Leavenworth, 
8° 23' east of north. 



[493] 



552 




Figure 16. 

4.x. m ^^}f important to know this relation because maps usually show 
the True Meridian and an observer is generally supplied with a magnetic 
compass. Figure 16 shows the usual type of Box Compass. It has 4 
cardinal points, N, E, S and W marked, as well as a circle graduated in 
degrees from zero to 360°, clockwise around the circle. To read the 
magnetic angle (called magnetic azimuth) of any point, from the 
observer s position the north point of the compass circle is pointed toward 
the object and the angle indicated by the north end of the needle is read. 

Orientation 
552. In order that directions on the map an^ on the ground shall 
correspond, it is necessary for the map to be oriented, that is, the true 
meridian of the map must lie in the same direction as the true meridian 
through the observer's position on the ground, which is only another way 
o± saying that the lines that run north and south on the map must run in 
the same direction as the lines north and south on the ground. Every 
road stream or other feature on the map will then run in the same 
direction as the road, stream or other feature itself on the ground, and 
all the objects shown on the map can be quickly identified and picked 
out on the ground. * ^ f ^^^^ 

Methods of Orienting a Map 
rr.Jvl'ii By magnetic needle: If the map has a magnetic meridian 
St. 1 •* A^. '^ ''i^ *^^ Leavenworth map (in pocket at back of book), 
place the sighting Ime, a-b, of the compass (Fig. 16) on the magnetic 



[494] 



552 (contd.) 



J^af irue J/orih 



^-^W.. 



T-S- ^ 




"aq,^. 



/ 



/ 
/ 



/ 
/ 



m\ 






iru6 



SoiM 

Figure 17. 



meridian of the map and move the map around horizontally until the 
north end of the needle points toward the north of its circle, whereupon 
the map is oriented. If there is a true meridian on the map, but not a 
magnetic meridian, one may be constructed as follows, if the magnetic 
declination is known: 

(Figure 17): Place the true meridian of the map directly tinder 
the magnetic nepdle of the compass and then move the compass box until 
the needle reads an angle equal to the magnetic declination. A line in 
extension of the sighting line a'-b' will be the magnetic meridian. If the 
magnetic declination of the observer's position is not more than 4'' or 5°, 
the orientation will be given closely enough for ordinary purposes by 
taking the true and magnetic meridians to be identical. 

2d. If neither the magnetic nor the true meridian is on the map, but 
the observer's position on the ground is known: Move the map horizon- 
tally until the direction of some definite point on the ground is the 
same as its direction on the map; the map is then oriented. For 
example, suppose you are standing on the ground at 8, q k' (Fort Leaven- 
worth Map), and can see the U. S. penitentiary off to the south. Hold 
the map in front of you and face toward the U. S. penitentiary, moving 
the map until the line joining 8 and the U. S. penitentiary (on the map) 
lies in the same direction as the line joining those two points on the 
ground. The map is now oriented. 

Having learned to orient a map and to locatje his position on the 
map, the noncommissioned officer should then practice moving over the 

[495] 



553-554 

ground and at the same time keeping his map oriented and noting each 
ground feature on the map as it is passed. This practice is of the 
greatest value in learning to read a map accurately and to estimate 
distances, directions and slopes correctly. 

True Meridian 
553. The position of the true meridian may be found as follows (Fig. 
18) : Point the hour hand of a watch toward the sun; the line joining the 
pivot and the point midway between the hour hand and XII on the dial, 
will point toward the south; that is to say,. if the observer stands so as 
to face the sun and the XII on the dial, he* will be looking south. To 
point the hour hand exactly at the sun, stick a pin as at (a) Fig. 18 and 
bring the hour hand into the shadow. At night, a line drawn toward the 
north star from the observer's position is approximately a true meridian. 

SOUTH 



t^ 




Figure 18. 
The line joining the /'pointers'' of the Great Bear or Dipper, 
prolonged about five times its length passes nearly through the North 
Star, which can be recognized by its brilliancy. 



Dipper 



/ 



He 

Figure 19. 

Conventional Signs 
554. Elvers, lakes, mountains, forests, roads, houses, telegraph lines, 
etc., are represented on maps by symbols called Conventional Signs, in 

[496] 



555 

which an effort is made to imitate the general appearance of the objects 
as seen from a high point directly overhead. On account of this similar- 
ity of the object to its sign or symbol on the map, the noncommissioned 
officer will usually have no trouble in deciding at once the meaning of a 
new symbol. Fig. 21 gives Conventional Signs used on military maps, 
and they should be thoroughly learned so that their meaning will be 
known at a glance. 

There is a constant tendency to simplify the Conventional Signs, 
and very often simply the outline of an object, such as. a forest, culti- 
vated ground, etc., is indicated with the name of the object printed 
within the outline. Thus: 




Figure 20. 

Such means are used very frequently in rapid sketching, on 
account of the time that they save. 

By reference to the map of Fort Leavenworth, the meaning of all 
its symbols is at once evident from the names printed thereon; for 
example, that of a city, woods, roads, streams, railroad, etc.; where no 
Conventional Sign is used on any area, it is to be understood that any 
growths thereon are not high enough to furnish any cover. As an 
exercise, pick out from the map the following conventional signs: Unim- 
proved road, cemetery, railroad track, hedge, wire fence, orchard, 
streams, lake. The -numbers on the various road crossings have no 
equivalent on the ground, but are placed on the maps to facilitate descrip- 
tion of routes, etc. Often the numbers at road crossings on other maps 
denote the elevation of these points. 

Visibility 
555. The problem of visibility is based on the relations of contours 
and map distances previously discussed, and includes such matters as the 
determination of whether a point can or can not be seen from another; 
whether a certain line of march is concealed from the enemy; whether a 
particular area is seen from a given point. 

On account of the necessary inaccuracy of all maps it is impossible 
to determine exactly how much ground is visible from any given point — 
that is, if a correct reading of the map shows a certain point to be just 
barely visible, then it would be unsafe to say positively that on the 
ground this point could be seen or could not be seen. It is, however, of 
great importance for the noncommissioned officer to be able to determine 

[497] 



Trees 



Isolated 






Palms 



1^* ^ ^ ^ 

, *' ' Banana \ I 



OrchaTcl^ 



Pine 



Gctmboo '.' 



6rass .^_ 



Cul li vaied 



Streams 



louder' JS 'trie/e 

ForiiaJbJe, 

[Tnfordalile 

Infantry 

Cavalrjr 

ArtWery 

Sentrjr 

Videtfe, 

Hospital 

Trench 

Cowp 



I in mri III i-n 



•l> III 

6 



^ A A A 



JgigliiiiliMaiMfc 



Corn 



* I »> 



Vineyard y < 



'"^^J^ice "^ ^il 



^.00° Collon'i'^o 



Railroads 



Single Track 
Double Track 
TJleclric 

Improved 

Unimproved 

Trail 



Church 
Post office 
Ji^a/erworAs 

He doe. 

Stone. 

IVoriij 

IVire bcerhed 

PP^ire smooth 



I I I I I » I I I 



Roads 



» Cemefary 

■*■ + + + *<+ 



Fences 



Obstacles 

Ahaitis ^ h^^s^J 

fV/re enlano/emeaf ^^^^ 
Palisades 

Demolitions 



Depression 

Cliffs 

Ravine 

Fitt 

Cut 







'^■^^il^f^^i^:-:i^.S^'^^^' 



'"'^"''*""i'/^''^'iiiii4*'iiiitgi'(iiuitfi'i^mi't'w*iiiiiiii>'" 



Fig. 21. 



555 (contd.) 

at a glance, within about one contour interval, whether or not such and 
Buch a point is visible 5 or whether a given road is generally visible to a 
certain scout, etc. For this reason no effort is made to give an exact 
mathematical solution of problems in visibility further than would be 
useful in practical work with a map in the solution of map problems in 
patrolling. 

In the solution of visibility problems, it is necessary that the 
Figure 22, 




Fig. 23 

noncommissioned officer should thoroughly understand the meaning of 
profiles and their construction. A profile is the line supposed to be cut 
from the surface of the earth by an imaginary vertical (up and down) 
plane. (See Fig. 23.) The representation of this line to scale on a sheet 

[499] 



555 (contd.) 

of paper is also called a profile. Figure 23 shows a profile on the line 
D-y (Figure 22) in which the horizontal scale is the same as that of the 
map (Figure 22) and the vertical scale is 1 inch = 40 feet. It is custom- 
ary to draw a profile with a greater vertical than horizontal scale in 
order to make the slopes on the profile appear to the eye as they exisjk on 
the ground. Consequently, always note especially the vertical scale in 
examining any profile; the horizontal scale is usually that of the map 
from which the profile is taken. 

A profile is constructed as follows: (Fig. 23) : Draw a line D' — ^y' 
equal in length to D — y on the map. Lay off on this line from D' distances 
equal to the distances of the successive contours from D on the map. At 
each of these contour points erect a perpendicular equal to the elevation 
of this particular contour, as shown by the vertical scale (960, 940, 920, 
etc.) on the left. Join successively these verticals by a smooth curve, 
which is the required profile. Cross section paper with lines printed 
1/10 inch apart horizontally and vertically simplifies the work of construc- 
tion, by avoiding the necessity of laying off each individual distance. 

Visibility Problem. To determine whether an observer with his 
eye at D can see the bridge at XX (Figure 22) . By examining the profile 
it is seen that an observer, with his eye at D, looking along the line 
D-XX, can see the ground as far as (a); from (a) to (b), is hidden from 
view by the ridge at (a); (b) to (c) is visible; (c) to (d) is hidden by 
the ridge at (c). By thus drawing the profiles, the visibility of any 
point from a given point may be determined. The work may be much 
shortened, by drawing the profile of only the observer's position (D) of 
the point in question, and of the probable obstructing points (a) and (c). 
It is evidently unnecessary to construct the profile from D to x, because 
the slope being concave shows that it does not form an obstruction. 

The above method of determining visibility by means of a profile 
is valuable practice for learning slopes of ground, and the forms of the 
ground corresponding to different contour spacings. 

Visibility of Areas 

To determine the area visible from a given point the same method 
is used. First mark off as invisible all areas hidden by woods, buildings, 
high hills, and then test the doubtful points along lines such as D — XX, 
Figure 22. With practice the noncommissioned officer can soon decide by 
inspection all except the very close cases. 

This method is a rapid approximation of the solution shown in the 
profile. In general it will not be practicable to determine the visibility 
of a point by this method closer than to say the line of sight pierces the 
ground between two adjoining contours. 



[500] 



556 
CHAPTER IX 
MILITARY SKETCHING 

(While this chapter presents the principal features of military sketching in a 
simple, clear manner, attention is invited to the fact that the only way that any one 
who has never done any sketching can follow properly the statements made, is to 
do so with the instruments and the sketching material mentioned at hand. In fact, 
the only way to learn how to sketch is to sketch.) 

556. A military sketch is a rough map showing the features of the 
ground that are of military value. 

Military sketching is the art of making such a military sketch. 

Military sketches are of three kinds: 

Position sketches, Fig. 1; 

Outpost sketches; 

Eoad sketches. 

All kinds of military sketches '^are intended to give a military 
commander detailed information of the ground to be operated over, when 
this is not given by the existing maps, or when there are no maps of the 
area. 

The general methods of sketching are: 

(1) The location of points by intersection. 

(2) The location of points by traversing. 

(3) The determination of the heights of hills, shapes of the ground, 
etc., by contours. 

(1) To locate a point by intersection proceed as follows: Set up, 
level and orient the sketching board (Par. 552), (or Sketching Case, 
Fig. 3), at A, Fig. 1. The board is said to be oriented when the needle 
is parallel to the lines across the face of the compass, Fig. 3, of the cavalry 
case, or parallel to the sides of the compass through of the drawing board, 
Fig. 4. (At every station the needle must have this position, so that 
every line on the sketch will be parallel to the corresponding line or 
direction on the ground.) Assume a point (A) on the paper, Fig 1 Y, in 
such a position that the ground to be sketched will fall on the sheet. Lay 
the ruler on the board and point it to the desired point (C), all the while 
keeping the edge of the ruler on the point (A), Fig. 1 Y. Draw an 



[501] 



556 (contd.) 



X 



<*'-«*€J^ 



Y 



X 





/d- 










' "-^\ 






• 


"^^ \ 




/ 






a 




/ 






/ 








/ 




MAP I 




b^ 


























> 










ic 







MQSO) 



(Note: This diagram represents 
the sketching board.) 



Fig.l 



vr- 



indefinite line along the edge. Now move to (B), Fig. 1 X, plotted on 
the map in (b), Fig. 1 X, and having set up, leveled and oriented as at 
(A), Fig. 1 Y, sight toward (C) as before. The intersection (crossing) 
of the two lines locates (C) on the sketch at (c), Fig. 1 X. 

(2) To locate a point by traversing is done as follows: With the 
board set up, leveled and oriented at A, Fig. 1 Y, as above, draw a line 
in the direction of the desired point B, Fig. 1 X, and then move to B, 
counting strides, keeping record of them with a tally register, Fig. 5, if 
one is available. Set up the board at B, Fig. 1 X, and orient it by laying 



[502] 



556 (contd.) 

the ruler along the line (a) -(b), Fig. 1 X, and moving the board until 
the ruler is directed toward A, Fig. 1 Y, on the ground; or else orient 
by the needle as at A. With the scale of the sketcher^s strides on the 




(Sketching Case) — Figure 3. 

ruler, Fig. 3, lay off the number of strides found from A, Fig. 1 Y, to B, 
Fig. 1 X, and mark the point (b), Fig. 1 X. Other points, such as C, D, 
etc., would be located in the same way. 

[503] 



556 (contd.) 

(3) To draw in contours on a sketch, the following steps are 
necessary: 

(a) From the known or assumed elevation of a located station as A, 
Fig. 1 Y, (elevation 890), the elevations of all hill tops, stream junctures, 
stream sources, etc., are determined. 




(b) Having found the elevations of these critical points the contours 
are put in by spacing them so as to show the slope of the ground along 
each line such as (a) -(b), (a) -(c), etc.. Fig. 1 Y, as these slopes actually 
are on the ground. 

To find the elevation of any point, say C (shown on sketch as c), 
proceed as follows: 

[504] 



557 





(Tally Register) — Figure 5. (Clinometer) — Figure 6. 

Read the vertical angle with slope board. Fig. 4, or with a 
clinometer, Fig. 6. Suppose this is found to be 2 degrees; lay the scale 
of M. D.* (ruler, Fig. 4) along (a)-(c), Fig. 1 Y, and note the number of 
divisions of — 2 degrees (minus 2°) between (a) and (c). Suppose there 
are found to be 5^2 divisions; then, since each division is 10 feet, the 
total height of A above C is 55 feet (51/2 X 10). C is therefore 835 ft. 
elev. which is written at (c). Fig. 1 Y. Now looking at the ground along 
A-C, suppose you find it to be a very decided concave (hollowed out) slope, 
nearly fiat at the bottom and steep at the top. There are to be placed 
in this space (a)-(c). Fig. 1 Y, contours 890, 880, 870, 860 and 850, and 
they would be spaced close at the top and far apart near (c), Fig. 1 Y, to 
give a true idea of the slope. 

The above is the entire principle of contouring in making sketches 
and if thoroughly learned by careful repetition under different conditions, 
will enable the student to soon be able to carry the contours with the 
horizontal locations. 
557. Position Sketching 

Instruments used in Position and Outpost sketching: 

1. Drawing board with attached compass. Fig. 4. 

2. Loose ruler (on board. Fig. 3 and 4). 

3. Rough tripod or camera tripod. 

4. Scale of M. D.'s (shown on ruler, Fig. 4). 

5. Scale of the sketcher^s strides (at 6" to 1 mile), shown on ruler. 
Fig. 3. 

6. Clinometer (not absolutely necessary if board has slope board); 
Fig. 6. 

7. Scale of hundreds of yards (shown on ruler. Fig. 3). 
Methods to be used: 

1. Select a Base Line, that is, a central line % to % mile long in 
the area to be sketched. The base should have at its end some plainly 
marked objects, such as telegraph poles, trees, corners of buildings, etc., 
and from its ends a good view of the area should be possible. 

*The con=;truction of a scale of M. D.'s is described under map reading, par. 543. 
Scales of M. D.'s can be obtained from the Secretary, Army Service Schools, Fort 
Leavenworth, Kans. 

[505] 



558-559 

2. Set up, level and orient the drawing board at one end of the base 
(A), Fig. 1 Y. Draw a meridian on the sheet parallel to the position of 
the magnetic needle. 

Assume a point (A), Fig. 1 Y, corresponding to the ground point 
(A), 890, on the sheet in such a position that the area to be sketched 
will lie on the sheet. 

3. Sight at hill tops, stream junctures, stream heads, etc., to begin 
the location of these points by intersection. 

4. Traverse to B and complete the locations by intersection as 
previously explained. 

5. Draw the details of country between A and B and in the vicinity 
of this line, using the conventional signs for roads, houses, etc. 

6. The lines from station (b). Fig. 1 X, to any of the other located 
points may now be used as a new base line to carry the work over 
additional area. 

7. In case parts of the area are not visible from a base line, these 
parts are located by traversing as before explained. 

8. Having learned by several repetitions the above steps, the 
sketcher will th^n combine contouring (see contouring above) with his 
horizontal locations. 

558. Outpost Sketching 

The methods of Outpost Sketching are the same as for position 
sketching, except that the sketcher can not advance toward the supposed 
position of the enemy beyond the outpost line. Therefore a base line 
must be selected on or in rear of the line of observation. From this base 
line all points visible toward the enemy are located by intersection or by 
traverse along the base line, details being shown by conventional signs 
and contours as for the position sketch. 

559. Road Sketching 

Instruments used: 

1. Drawing board or sketching case. 

2. Loose ruler. 

3. Scales of strides, if made dismounted; scale of time, trotting or 
walking, if mounted. 

4. Scale of hundreds of yards, at 3" to 1 mile. 
• 5. Scale of M. D. 

6. Clinometer (if slope board not available). 



[506] 



559 (contd.) 




Methods: 

1. At station 1, Fig. 7, orient the board as described under ''To 
locate a point by intersection/' page 501, holding the board in the hands 
in front of the body of the sketcher who faces toward station 2. 

2. Important points in the vicinity, such as the railroad bridge, the 
stream juncture, hill tops, are sighted for intersections, lines drawn as 
shown and the sketcher traverses (as under traverse above) to station 2. 

3. At station 2, he locates and draws in all details between station 1 
and 2 to include about 300 yards on each side of the road. 

4. The traverse is then continued forward as described for 1 and 2. 

5. After some practice in horizontal sketching, as just described, the 
sketcher will be able to take up contouring in combination. The methods 
are as described in paragraph on contouring. 

6. Method to follow when the traverse runs off the paper as at A, 
Fig. 7; re-orient the board so that the road forward will lie across the 
long dimensions of the paper; draw a meridian parallel to the compass 
needle and assume a point on the new sheet corresponding to the last 
point (A) plotted on the first sheet. 

7. On completion of the sketch the various sections will be pasted 
together, so that all the meridians are parallel. 

Construction of Working Scales.* The construction of scales has 
already been explained under Map Eeading. To make a working scale 
(one that is used by the person making a sketch), construct a scale of 
convenient length, about 6 inches, as described in Par. 546a, to read in 
the units you intend to measure your distance with (your stride, pace, 

•Sheets of working scales reading in paces, strides, minutes, etc., at a scale of 3 
and 6 inches to the mile, can be obtained at little cost from the Secretary, Army 
Service School, Fort Leavenworth, Kansas. 

[507] 



560 

stride of a horse; etc.), to the scale on which you intend to make 

your sketch. 

For example, suppose your stride is 66 inches long (33-inch pace) 

and you wish to make a sketch on a scale of 3 inches = 1 mile. The R. P. 

« ., . ■• . ^ inches 3 inches 1 rr^i ^ • -. • i 

of this scale is -.^ rr— ^^»^^ . — r — onon - That is 1 inch on 

1 mile 63360 inches = 21120 

your sketch is to represent 21,120 inches on the ground. As you intend to 
measure your ground distances by counting your strides of 66 inches 
length, 1 inch on the sketch will represent as many of your strides on 
the ground as 66 is contained into 21,120 = 320 strides. For convenience 
in sketching you wish to make your scale about 6 inches long. Since 1 
inch represents 320 strides, 6 inches will represent 6 X 320 = 1,920 
strides. As this is an odd number, difficult to divide into convenient 
subdivisions of hundreds, fifties, etc., construct your scale to represent 
2,000 strides, which will give it a length slightly in excess of 6 inches — 
6.25. Lay off this length and divide it into ten main divisions of 200 
strides each, and subdivide these into 50 stride divisions as explained in 
Par. 540. 

Conventional Signs Usually Used in Sketching 
560. The following are the conventional signs and abbreviations used 
in military sketching, that are authorized by the Field Service 
Regulations: 



l3C8i 



560 (contd.) 



The followinf abbreviations eu^e authonzed fbr use on field maps and sketches. 
When these words arc used the^ must be written m full or abbreviated as shown. Tb^ 
abbreviations must not be used for words other than those in the table. Word^ notin 
the table are not asa pule abbreviiated. 



abut 


^ibutment 


PO. 


post Office 


Bt> 


black smith shop 


Pt 


point 


bot. 


bottom 


Q, 


quarry 


Cr 


creeK 


qp 


Cjueenpost 


cul. 


culvert 


R 


nver 


cult. 


cultivated 


R.H. 


round house 


d 


deep 


RR 


-roil road 


t 


east 


S. 


^outh 


f 


fordabie 


s. 


steel 


gir 


girder 


S.H 


^hool house 


G.M. 


|ri3tmill 


5.M. 


saw mill 


i. 


iron 


Stec 


station 


1 


island 


St 


atone 


JQi 


junction 


str 


stream 


»^P-, 


king-post 


tree 


trestle 


L- 


lake 


tr 


-truss 


Wt 


mountain 


W.T 


water toinK 


N 


north 


WW 


water works 


n.f. 


not fordaWe 


W 


west 


F 


pier 


wd 


wide 


?^ 


plank 


w. 


wood 



Telegraph 
feilroatcte 

Roads 
Fenced 



T T r TTT.TTTT 



(^tn^le track TT"^^ 

i Double track m m i m n n i > ; i i iin 1 1 tnmiTt 



.Trolley 
Improved 
Unin^roved 
Trail 

tairbed wire 
smooth wire 
wood 
stone 
hedge 



..yy?-. 



»«5>cq5?'«3»<3? 



[509] 



560 (contd.) 



Brid^ 



+ 



Indicate character and span by abbreviations. 
Example: V_j|fillii^ 



- vJ^llM 



40x20 



Meaninl wooden kingpost brid§B,40feet long. 20 feet wide» 
and K) feet above the water 



Streams -^ 



Indicate character by abbreviations 
Example: — -^^<y_^ey^^^ 

Meaninga^tream 15 feet wide, 8 feet de^, and not fordabte. 
House • ijiupch* School house "Stli 

Woocfe {^^^ Orchard^ irni Cultivated LandlCdtl 

If boundary lines are fences the^ are..indicated as such. 
Brush, crops or Ipass. important as cover or forage |^g»^l 
Cemetery | ^^ *» •*^^| TreeMSolated •o^o 

Cut and fill- : ^"^ ; cut 10 feet deep 

; ^2 ) fill 10 feet hi|h 
For more elaborate map work the authorized conventional signs are ueed 



[510] 



561 (contd.) 

Points for Beginners to EememlDer 
561. 1. Always keep your pencils sharpened and have an eraser handy. 
No one but an expert can sketch with a dull pencil. 

2. Use hard pencils when learning to sketch — 4H to 6H — and go 
over your work afterwards with a softer pencil — 2H. 

3. Bo not try to put down on your sketch a mass of small details 
that are too small to "be shown on the scale at which you are sketching. 
For example, if you are making a sketch on a scale of 3 inches = L milO; 
do not try to show each house in a row of houses; simply indicate that 
there is a row of houses, by putting down several distinct conventional 
signs for houses in a row; nor should you try to show every little 
**cut" through which the road may run. Only use about one sign to the 
inch for telegraph or telephone lines, for wire fences, etc. 

4. When first practicing sketching only plot the route over which you 
walk, indicating it by a single line. When you can do this with facility, 
go back over one of these plotted routes and fill in the woods, houses, 
streams and the other large features. 

5. The beginner should sketch the same ground several times over— 
at least three or four times. Practice alone will make perfect. 

6. Always try to compare your finished sketch with an accurate map 
of the ground, if one is obtainable. Try to practice on ground of which 
you can obtain a map. 

7. Make each course (the distance you go between points where the 
direction of your route changes) as long as possible. 

8. Do not try to contour until you are expert at making a sketch 
showing all the flat details (roads, streams, woods, houses, etc.). 

9. Never try to ^^ sketch in'/ the contours until you have plotted the 
stream lines or the direction of the valleys, ravines, etc. The contours 
are fitted to or sketched around the drainage system; not the drainage 
system to the contours. 

10. Always '^size up'' ground before you sketch it; that is, take a 
general view of it, noticing the drainage system (the direction in which 
the streams flow or ravines run), the prominent hills and ridges, the 
direction the roads run, etc. 



[511] 



562 

CHAPTER X 

LOADING WAGONS 

562. The property to be loaded should be carefully inspected before 
any is loaded, to see that everything is in good order and properly boxed, 
crated or tied. 

Large, heavy boxes should be avoided. 

The following general rules must be observed: 

1. Heavy stuff must go on the bottom (and forward rather than 
rear) and light stuff on top — ^thus, heavy articles will not crush light 
ones and the center of gravity will be nearer the axles, making the 
turning over of the load more difficult. 

2. Things needed first upon reaching camp must be placed on top 
or in rear. 

The following method of loading a wagon is in accordance with 
the general principles cited above: 

Ammunition. Ordinarily just back of the forward axle. In case 
of possible need, however, the ammunition should be placed where it 
could be gotten at immediately. 

Axes, Spades, Shovels, and (Unhandled) Picks. Should be out- 
side of wagonbed, in leather pockets or strong bags, or stood on end 
at rear of wagon. They should not be placed between the sides of the 
wagon and the load. 

Blanket RoUs. If to be carried on wagon, they should be rolled 
tightly and left straight — not tied in a circle— and loaded on top, 
crosswise. 

Camp Kettles and Buckets. Under the wagon, suspended from 
the reach pole. 

Field Desk. To be placed on or near bottom and well forward, 
as it is seldom required early. 

Field Range. On bottom, at rear of wagon. (The Infantry 
Equipment Board recommended that the field range be carried on tail 
gate of the wagon, lowered to a position of about 30 degrees from the 
horizontal.) 

Forage. If to be carried on wagon, in front of ammunition. 

Laslilng. Use two pieces of %-inch rope about 75 feet long, 
passing over load first from front to rear diagonally, and finally secured 
by being tied to rings on the rear bolster standards — never to the end 
gate rods. The rope should be passed through strong hooks securely 
clinched to the body of the wagon, and not passed around the ends of 
the bows. 

Officers' Bedding Bolls. To be on top of load. 

Bations. Surplus rations (not required for next camp) in bot- 
tom of wagon, between ammunition and ration box. 

Bacon should be on the bottom of wagon, where the grease 
will dp no harm. 

^Ration Box. Next to field range, toward front of wagon. After 
the field range has been unloaded, the ration box is readily accessible 
^nd x^eed not be unloaded. 

(512] 



562 (contd.) 

At every camp the ration box should be restocked for the next 
camp. 

SiWey Stoves. Slung on chain, just outside of feed box and 
below the Buzzacott oven. 

Stove Pipe. Should be crated and lashed on in rear of a wagon. 

Tentage. Should be rolled and not folded, except in places 
where absolutely necessary — and placed across wagon, on top of boxes, 
etc. 

(Attention is invited to the fact that canvas becomes unserviceable 
more from handling and transportation than from wear when in actual 
use in sheltering troops.) 

The tents, properly dried out, should be laid out smoothly on the 
ground; the part of the wall appearing uppermost should be folded over 
toward the peak of the tent; that underneath should be (by lifting the 
lower part of the tent) in like manner folded under and toward the peak; 
then by commencing at the peak, at the final folding, the wall of the tent 
will appear on the outside of the completed roll. 

Ropes not required for securing the bundle should be folded 
inside. 

Tent Pins. On top, in sacks. 

Tent Poles. Should be tied with a rope and placed just inside 
the bows so as to extend above the wagon bed side; or carried in two 
iron hooks suspended from side of wagon bed, about four feet apart. 

NOTES 

1. Pots and Kettles. Should be in gunny sacks so as not to dirty 
everything. 

2. The quartermaster sergeant should ride on one of the wagons. 

3. A noncommissioned officer should personally superintend the 
loading of every wagon, the same noncommissioned officer always having 
charge of the same wagon. 

4. The jockey box should be left entirely for use of teamster, and 
in which should be kept wrench, grease, spare bolts, mule shoes, etc. 

5. A detail of men, the size of which depends upon the number of 
wagons, should accompany the train. Often the guards or old guard 
performs this duty, but it is preferable to detail men who know how to 
meet emergencies such as a wagon tipping over on a hillside, wagons 
requiring repacking, mule down and hurt, etc. 



[513] 



563 

CHAPTER XI 
MARCHES 

(Based on Infantry Drill Eegulations) 
^63. Marching constitutes the principal occupation of troops in cam- 
paign and is one of the heaviest causes of loss. This loss may be mate- 
rially reduced by proper training and by the proper conduct of the march. 

The training of infantry should consist of systematic physical 
exercises to develop the general physique and of actual marching to 
accustom men to the fatigue of bearing arms and equipment. 

Before mobilization troops should be kept in good physical condi- 
tion and so practiced as to teach them thoroughly the principles of march- 
ing. At the first opportunity after mobilization the men should be 
hardened to cover long distances without loss. 

With new or untrained troops, the process of hardening the 
men to this work must be gradual. Immediatisly after being mustered 
into the service the physical exercises and marching should be begun. 
Ten-minute periods of vigorous setting-up exercises should be given three 
times a day to loosen and develop the muscles. One march should be 
made each day with full equipment, beginning with a distance of 2 or 3 
miles and increasing the distance daily as the troops become hardened, 
until a full day's march under full equipment may be made without 
exhaustion. 

A long march should not be made with untrained troops. If a long 
distance must be covered in a few days, the first march should be short, 
the length being increased each succeeding day. 

Special attention should be paid to the fitting of shoes and the 
care of feet. Shoes should not be too wide or too short. Sores and 
blisters on the feet should be promptly dressed during halts. At the end 
of the march feet should be bathed and dressed; the socks and, if prac- 
ticable, the shoes should be changed. 

The drinking of water on the march should be avoided. The 
thirst should be thoroughly quenched before starting on the march 
and after arrival in camp. On the march the use of water should, in 
general, be confined to gargling the mouth and throat or to an occasional 
small drink at most. 

Except for urgent reasons, marches should not begin before an 
liiour after daylight, but if the distance to be covered necessitates either 
breaking camp before daylight or making camp after dark, it is better to 
do the former. 

ISTight marching should be avoided when possible. 

A halt of 15 minutes should be made after the first half or three- 
quarters of an hour of marching, thereafter a halt of 10 minutes is made 
in each hour. The number and length of halts may be varied, according 
to the weather, the condition of the roads, and the equipment carried 
by the men. When the day's march is long a halt of an hour should be 
made at noon and the m.en allowed to eat. 

The rate of march is regulated by the commander of the leading 
company of each regiment, or, if the battalions be separated by greater 
than normal distances, by the commander of the leading company of each 
battalion. He should maintain a uniform rate, uninfluenced by the move- 
mentB of troops or mounted men in front of him. 

[514] 



563 (contd.) 

The position of companies in the battalion and of battalions in 
the regiment is ordinarily changed daily so that each in turn leads. 

The marching efficiency of an organization is judged by the 
amount of straggling and elongation and the condition of the men at 
the end of the march. 

An officer of each company marches in its rear to prevent undue 
elongation and straggling. 

When necessary for a man to fall out on account of sickness, he 
should be given a permit to do so. This is presented to the surgeon, who 
will admit him to the ambulance, have him v/ait for the trains, or follow 
and rejoin his company at the iirst halt. 

Special attention should be paid to the rate of march. It is 
greater for trained than for untrained troops; for small commands than 
for large ones; for lightly burdened than for heavily burdened troops. 
It is greater during cool than during hot weather. With trained troops, 
in commands of a regiment or less, marching over the average roads, the 
rate should be from 2% to 3 miles per hour. With larger commands 
carrying full equipment, the rate will be from 2 to 2i/^ miles per hour. 

The marching capacity of trained infantry in small commands is 
from 20 to 25 miles per day. This distance will decrease as the size 
of the command increases. For a complete division the distance can 
seldom exceed 12% miles per day unless the division camps in colurnxU. 

In large commands the marching capacity of troops is greatly 
reduced by faulty march orders and poor march discipline. 

The march order should contain such instructions as will enable 
the troops to take their proper places in column promptly. Delay or con- 
fusion in doing so should be investigated. On the other hand, organization 
commanders should be required to time their movements so that the 
troops will not be formed sooner than necessary. 

The halts and starts of the units of a column should be regulated 
by the watch and be simultaneous. 

Closing up during a halt, or changing gait to gain or lose distance 
should be prohibited. 

Quartermaster sergeants, cooks, artificers, and company clerks 
march with the field train, under command of the supply officer in 
charge of the train. 

(All of the above is from the Infa.ntry Drill Eegulations.) 

In time of war protection for troops on the march is provided by 
means of advance guards, fla.nking parties, and rear guards. 

When practicable, marches should begin in the morning^ after 
the men have had their breakfast, and the following general rules 
should be observed: 

1. The canteens should be filled before the march begins. 

2. The pace at the head of the column must be steady and the 
column must be kept closed up throughout its length. 

3. After the first half or three-quarters of an hour's march, the 
command should be halted for about fifteen minutes to allow the men to 
relieve themselves and to adjust their clothing and accoutrements. 

^ If considerable distance is to be marched without water, the start should be made 
late in the afternoon and continued until night and then again early the next morning, 
halting before the sun gets hot. 



563 (contd.) 

4. After the first rest, there should be a halt of ten minutes every 
hour. 

Immediately upon halting, the company should be cautioned, ' * Any 
man wishing to relieve himself, do so at once ' ' — otherwise some will wait 
until the halt is nearly over. 

5. Indiscriminate rushing for water upon halting should not be 
allowed — one or more men from every squad should be designated to fill 
the canteens of the squad. 

6. No man should be allowed to leave the ranks without permission 
of his company commander. 

Men allowed to fall out on account of sickness should be given 
notes to the surgeon. If a man be very sick a noncommissioned officer 
or reliable private should fall out with him. 

7. Whenever a stream is forded or any obstacle passed, the head of 
the column should be halted a short distance beyond, so as to enable 
the rest of the column to close up. 

8. In crossing shallow streams, the men should be kept closed up 
and not allowed to pick their way. 

9. All men should be made to keep their places in column. 

10. A lieutenant or the first sergeant should march in rear of the 
company to look after stragglers. 

11. Nibbling while actually marching should be prohibited. 

12. When the troops march for the greater part of the day, a halt 
of an hour should be made about noon, near wood and water, if 
practicable. 

13. The halt for the night should be made in plenty of time to allow 
tents to be pitched, supper cooked, etc., before dark. 

14. Since marching at the rear of the column is more disagreeable and 
fatiguing than marching at the front, organizations should take daily 
turns in leading. 

ARTICLES OF WAR 

Art. 54. Every officer commanding in quarters, garrison or on 
the march, shall keep good order, and, to the utmost of his power, redress 
all abuses or disorders which may be committed by any officer or soldier 
under his command; and if, upon complaint made to him of officers or 
soldiers beating or otherwise ill-treating any person, disturbing fairs or 
markets, or committing any kind of riot, to the disquieting of the citizens 
of the United States, he refuses or omits to see justice done to the 
offender, and reparation made to the party injured, so far as part of the 
offender's pay shall go toward such reparation, he shall be dismissed 
from the service, or otherwise punished as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 55. All officers and soldiers are to behave themselves orderly 
in quarters and on the march; and whoever commits any waste or spoil, 
either in walks or trees, parks, warrens, fish ponds, houses, gardens, grain 
fields, inclosures, or meadows, or maliciously destroys any property what- 
soever belonging to inhabitants of the United States (unless by order of a 
general officer commanding a separate army in the field) shall, besides 
such penalties as he may be liable to by law, be punished as a court 
martial may direct. 

[516] 



564 

CHAPTER XII 

CARE OF THE HEALTH AND FIRST AID TO THE 
SICK AND INJURED 

CARE OF THE HEALTH * 

564. 1. A soldier should endeavor to be always at his best. He 
should avoid all exposures, not in line of duty, which he knows would 
be likely to injure his health, for if he is from any cause below par he 
is liable to break down under influences which otherwise might have 
had but little effect on him. 

2. Even in garrison, in time of peace, soldiers often expose them- 
selves unnecessarily by going out without overcoats when the weather 
is such as to require their use, or by failing to remove damp socks or 
other clothing on their return to barracks. 

3. At rests on the march one should sit down or lie down if the 
ground is suitable, for every minute so spent refreshes more than five 
minutes standing or loitering about. 

4. At the midday rest lunch should be eaten, but it should always 
be a light meal. 

5. On the march or during exercise in hot weather the body loses 
water continuously by the skin and lungs and this loss must be replaced 
as it occurs to keep the blood in proper con'lition. Only a few swallows 
should be taken at a time, no matter how plentiful the water supply 
may be. When exceedingly thirsty after a long, dry stretch, water should 
not be taken freely at once, but in smaller drinks at intervals, until 
the desire for more is removed. 

6. Smoking in the^ heat of the day or on the march is depressing 
and increases thirst. 

7. On hot marches water should be taken quite frequently, but as 
already stated, in small quantities at a time, to replace the loss by perspi- 
ration. This will often prevent attacks of heat exhaustion and sunstroke. 

8. On a hurried or forced march, particularly in sultry weather, 
a soldier may become faint and giddy from the heat and fatigue. His 
face becomes pale, his lips lead-colored, his skin covered with clammy 
perspiration, and he trembles all over. His arms and equipments should 
be removed and his clothing loosened at the neck, while he is helped to 
the nearest shade to lie down, with his head low, until the ambulance 
train or wagons come up. Meanwhile, fan him, moisten his forehead and 
face with water and, if conscious, make hfm swallow a few sips from 
time to time. 

9. If the soldier comes into camp much exhausted, a cup of hot 
coffee is the best restorative. WJien greatly fatigued it is dangerous 
to eat heartily. 

10. When the tents have been arranged for the night and the duties 
of the day are practically over, the soldier should clean himself and his 



* From The Soldier's Handbook, by N. Hershler, Chief Clerk, General Staff 
Corps, U. S. Army. 

[517] 



564 (contd.) 

clothes as thoroughly as the means at hand will permit. No opportunity 
of taking a bath nor of washing socks and underclothing should be lost. 
In any event the feet should be bathed or mopped with a wet towel 
every evening to invigorate the skin^ 

11. In the continued absence of opportunity for bathing it is well 
to take an air bath and a moist or dry rub before getting into fresh under- 
clothes and, in this case, the soiled clothes should be freely exposed to the 
sun and air, when the blp.nket roll is unpacked. 

12. By attention to cleanliness of the person and of the clothing, 
the discomforts of prickly heat, chafing, cracking, blistering, and other 
irritations of the skin will be avoided. If chafings do occur apply to the 
surgeon for a healing remedy, for, if neglected, they may fester and 
cause much trouble. 

13. A hearty meal should be ea.ten when the day^s worTi is over, but 
the soldier should eat slowly, chewing every mouthful into a smooth 
pulp before swallowing; and it is good when one can rest a while after his 
meal. Hard bread and beans w^hen not thoroughly chewed give rise to 
diarrhoea, one of the most dangerous of camp diseases. Fresh meat should 
be eaten sparingly when used for the first time after some days on salt 
rations. 

14. The soldier would do well to restrict himself to the company 
dietary. Particularly should he avoid the articles of food or drink for 
sale by hawkers and peddlers. Green fruit and overripe fruit are dan- 
gerous, as is also fruit to which the individual is unaccustomed. Unpeeled 
fruit should never be eaten, for it may have been handled by persons 
suffering from dangerous infectious diseases. 

15. It should be unnecessary to speak of the danger from the use of 
intoxicating liquors, for every soldier knows something of this. The mind 
of a man under the influence of these liquors is %o befogged that he is 
unable to protect himself from accidents and exposures. How many men 
have passed from this world because of exposures during intoxication! 
How many have lost their health and strength and become wretched 
sufferers during the remainder of a shortened existence! Besides, for 
days after indulgence in liquor the system is broken down and the 
individual less able to stand the fatigues, exposures or wounds of the 
campaign. 

16. If filtered or condensed water is not furnished to the troops, and 
spring water is not to be had, each soldier should fill his canteen over 
night with weak coffee or tea for the next day^s march. This involves 
boiling, and the boiling destroys all dangerous substances in water. 
Typhoid fever, cholera, and dysentery are cau.sed by impure water. 

' 17. All the belongings of the soldier should be taken under shelter 
at night to protect them from rain or heavy dews. 

18. When not prevented by the military conditions, soldiers should 
sleep in their shirts and drawers, removing their shoes, socks, and 
other clothing. 

19. In the morning wash the head, face and neck with cold water. 
With the hair kept closely cut, this can be done even when the water 
supply is limited. 

[518] 



564 (contd.) 

20. In, hot climates, where marches are made or other military work 
performed in the early morning or late in the evening, a sleep should be 
taken after the midday meal to make up for the shortened rest at night. 
Everyone, to keep in good condition, should have a total of eight hours' 
sleep in the twenty-four. 

21. If the march is not to be resumed^ the soldier should take the 
first opportunity of improving his sleeping accommodations by building 
a bunk, raised a foot and a half, or more, from the ground. This 
is of the first importance when the ground is damp. The poncho, or 
slicker, must be relied upon as a protection in marching camps, but when 
the camp is to be occupied for some days, bunks should be built. 

22. In hot climates this raising of the bunks from the ground lessens 
the danger from malarial fevers. 

23. When malarial fevers are prevalent, hot coffee should be taken 
in the morning immediately after roll call, and men going on duty at 
night should have a lunch and coffee before starting. 

24. The soldier should never attempt to dose himself with medicine. 
He should take no drugs except such as are prescribed by the surgeon. 

25. No matter how short a time the camp is to be occupied its 
surface should not be defiled. The sinks should be used by every iffSin, 
and the regulations concerning their use should be strictly complied with. 
Waste water and refuse of food should be deposited in pits or other re- 
ceptacles designed to receive them. Attention to these points will prevent 
foul odors and flies. 

26. When there are foul odors and flies in a camp the spread of 
typhoid fever, cholera, dysentery, and yellow fever is likely to occur. 

27. When any of these diseases" are present in a command every care 
should be taken to have the hands freshly washed at meal times. 

28. In the camps of field service the interior of tents should be sunned 
and aired daily, and efforts should be made by every soldier to have his 
bunk, arms, equipments, and clothing in as neat and clean condition as 
if he were in barracks at a permanent station. 

29. Harmful exposures are more frequent in hot than in cold weather. 
Soldiers seek protection against cold, but in seeking shade, coolness, and 
fresh breezes in hot weather they often expose themselves to danger from 
diarrhoea, dysentery, pneumonia, rheumatism, and other diseases. A 
chill is an exciting cause of these affections; it should be avoided as 
much as possible. 

30. When the feet become wet the first opportunity should be taken 
of putting on dry socks. 

31. When the clothing becomes wet in crossing streams or in rain 
storms there is little danger so long as active exercise is kept up, but 
there is great danger if one rests in the wet clothing. 

32. When the underclothes are wet with perspiration the danger is 
from chill after the exercise which caused the perspiration is ended. If 
the soldier can not give himself a towel rub and a change of underclothing, 
he should put on his blouse and move about until his skin and clothes 
become dry. 

[519] 



565-566 

33. To rest or cool off, and particularly to fall asleep, in a cool, 
shady place in damp clothes is to invite suffering, perhaps permanent 
disability or death. 

34. When an infectious disease is known to be present among the 
civil population in the neighborhood of a military camp or station, care 
should be taken by every member of the command to avoid exposure to 
the infection. Scarlet fever, measles, and diphtheria, are met with in 
the United States, but in some localities our troops may have to guard 
against smallpox, yellow fever, cholera, and bubonic plague. The care- 
less or reckless individual will be the first to suffer, but he may not 
suffer alone; many of his comrades may become affected and die through 
his fault. 

35. Such infections prevail mostly among the lower classes of a 
community who have no knowledge of the difference between healthful 
and unhealthful conditions of life. Communication with them should there- 
fore be avoided. 

36. The soldier should remember that association with lewd women 
may disable him for life. 

THE CARE OF THE FEET 

565. The feet should be kept clean and the nails cut close and square. 
An excellent preventative against sore feet is to wash them every night 
in hot (preferably salt) water and then dry thoroughly. 

Eubbing the feet with hard soap, grease or oil of any kind before 
starting on a march is also good. 

Sore or blistered feet should be rubbed with tallow from a 
lighted candle and a little common spirits (whiskey or alcohol in some 
other form) and the socks put on at once. 

Blisters should be perforated and the water let out, but the skin 
must not be removed. 

A little alum in warm water is excellent for tender feet. 

Two small squares of zinc oxide plaster, one on top of the other, 
will prevent the skin of an opened blister from being pulled off. Under 
no circumstances should a soldier ever start off on a march with a 
pair of new shoes. 

FIRST AID TO THE SICK AND INJURED 

666. In operating upon a comrade, the main things are to keep cool, 
act promptly, and make him feel that you have no doubt that you can 
pull him through all right. Place him in a comfortable position, and 
expose the wound. If you cannot otherwise remove the clothing 
quickly and without hurting him, rip it up the seam. First stop the 
bleeding, if there is any; then cleanse the wound; then close it, if a cut 
or. torn wound; then apply a sterilized dressing; then bandage it in 
place. 

As for the patient himself, let him never say die. Pluck has car- 
ried many a man triumphantly through what seemed the forlornest hope. 

As most of the first-aid work in war under present conditions 
will be done by the individual soldier acting alone and not by a squad of 

[520] 



566 (contd.) 




Making Temporary Splice. 



two or more men, it is important that bis training should be largely 
individual and such as will develop self-reliance and resourcefulness. 

[521] 



567 

The object of any teaching upon first aid, or early assistance 
of the injured or sick, is not only to enable one person to help another, 
but in some measure to help himself. The purpose of these directions is 
to show how this may be done by simple means and by simple methods. 
It is a mistake to think that you must know many things to be helpful, 
but you must understand a few things clearly in order to assist the 
patient in the severest eases until he can be seen by the surgeon or 
those who are thoroughly trained. In ordinary cases what you can do 
may often be all that is necessary. 

WOUNDS 

567. When a ball enters or goes through the muscles or soft parts of 
the body alone, generally nothing need be done except to protect the 
wound or wounds with the contents of the first-aid packet, used as follows: 

1. If there is one wound, carefully remove the paper from one of 
the two packages without unfolding compress or bandage and hold by 
grasping the outside folds between the thumb and fingers. 

When read}^ to dress wound, opjen compress by pulling on the 
two side folds of bandage, being careful not to touch the inside of the 
compress with the fingers or a^nything else. 

Still holding one roll of the bandage in each hand, apply the com- 
press to the wound and wrap the ends of the bandage around the limb 
or part until near the ends, when the ends may be tied together or 
fastened with safety pins. The second compress and bandage may be 
applied over the first or may, if the arm is wounded, be used as a sling. 

2. If there are two wounds opposite each other, use one compress 
opened out — but with the folded bandage on the back — for one wound, and 
hold it in place by the bandage of the compress used to cover the other 
wound. 

3. If there are two wounds, not opposite each other, apply a com- 
press to each. 

4. If the wound is too large to be covered by the compiess, find and 
break the stitch holding the compress together, unfold it, and apply as 
directed above. 

Be careful not to touch the wound with your fingers nor handle 
it in any way, for the dirt of your hands is harmful and you must disturb 
a wound as little as possible. Never wash the wound except under the 
orders of a medical officer. 



[522] 



567 (contd.) 



SLINGS 




BANDAGES AND SLINGS 

In addition to the slings made 
with the bandage, two forms of 
slings furnished by the ordinary 
clothing are here shown. (Figs. 1 
and 2.) 



Fig. 1. — Sleeve As Sling. 

The bandaging will stop all 
ordinary bleeding. Generally this is 
all that is necessary for the first 
treatment, and sometimes it is all 
that is needed for several days. 
The importance of the care with 
which this first dressing is made 
can not be too seriously insisted 
upon. It is better to leave a wound 
undressed than to dress it carelessly 
or ignorantly, so that the dressing 
must soon be removed. 




Fig. 2. — Flap of Coat As Sling. 



[523] 



567 (contd.) 



BLEEDING FROM. WOUNDS 



Now and then a wound will bleed very freely, because a large 
blood vessel has been wounded, and you must know how to stop the bleed- 
ing, or hemorrhage as it is called. Remember that all wounds bleed a 
little, but that as a rule this bleeding will stop in a few minutes if 
the patient is quiet, and that the firm pressure of the pads and bandage 
will keep it controlled. Occasionally, but not often, something else must 
be done. 




Fig. 3. 

Looldng upon the heart as a pump, you will understand that to 
stop the current of blood pumped through the arteries you must press upon 
the blood vessel between the wound and the heart. This pressure stops 
the current of blood in the same way that you would stop the flow of 
water in a leaky rubber hose or tube by pressing upon it between the 
leak and the pump, or other source of power. The points or places where 
you can best do this for the different parts of the body are illustrated in 
the woodcuts. These points are chosen for pressure because the blood 
vessels which you wish to control there lie over a bone against which 
effective pressure can be made. 

POINTS FOR COMPRESSION WITH THUMB AND FINGERS 

The temporal artery is reached by pressure in front of the 
ear just above where the lower jaw can be felt working in its socket. 
A branch of this artery crosses the temple on a line from the upper 
border of the ear to above the eyebrow. 

The carotid artery may be compressed by pressing the thumb or 
fingers deeply into the neck in front of the strongly marked muscle 

[524] 



567 (contd.) 

which reaches from behind the ear to the upper part of the breastbone. 
Fig. 3 shows pressure on the carotid of the left side. 




Fig. 4. — Subclavian Right Side. 

In bleeding from wounds of the shoulder or armpit the sub- 
clavian artery may be reached by pressing the thumb deeply into the 
hollow behind the middle of the collar bone. 




Brachial, Left Side. 



In bleeding from any part of the arm or hand the brachial artery 
should be pressed outwards against the bone just behind the inner border 
of the larger muscle of the arm. 

[525] 



567 (contd.) 




In bleeding from the 
thigh, leg, or foot press 
backward with the 
thumbs on the femoral 
artery at the middle of 
the groin where the art- 
ery passes over the 
bone. The point is a 
little higher up than 
that indicated in Fig. 6. 

There are two other 
simple means for help- 
ing to stop bleeding — 
such as elevating or 
holding an arm or leg 
upright when those 
parts are wounded, and 
by applying cold to the 
wound; but you will 
find the compress and 
bandage, or the pressure made by your fingers, as described to be most 
useful in the great majority of cases. 



IMPROVISED TOURNiaiXET 




Fig. 7. — Comfression of Right Brachial. 



When, however, the bleeding continues after you have used these 
simpler means, or your fingers become tired in making the pressure, 

[526] 



567 (contd.) 

which they may do after ten or fifteen minutes, you will have to use 
what is called a ''tourniquet/' and generally will be obliged to im- 
provise one out of material at hand. The principle of such a tourniquet 
is easily understood — a pad or compress placed on the line of the artery 
and a strap or band to go over the pad and around the liifib so that, 
when tightened, it will press the padd down upon the artery and in- 
terrupt the flow of the blood. In the arm apply the tourniquet over 
the point shown for compression by the fingers; in the thigh, four or 

IMPROVISED TOURNIQUET 




Fig. 8. — Compression of Left Femoral. 



dve inches below the groin, as it can not be applied higher up. (See 
Fig. 8.) 

The pad or compress may be made of such an object as a 
cork, or smooth round stone wrapped in some material to make it less 
rough; the bandage folded, a handkerchief, or a cravat being used for 
the strap. After tying the band closely around the limb any degree of 
pressure may be made by passing under it a stick, bayonet, or some- 
thing of that kind, and twisting or turning it around so that the pad 

[527] 



568 

w 

is pressed firmly in place. Turn the stick slowly and stop at once when 
the blood ceases to flow, fixing the stick in place m another bandage. 
Kemember that you may do harm in two ways in using this rough 
tourniquet. First by bruising the flesh and muscles if you use too 
much force, and, second, by keeping this pressure up too long and 
thus strangling the limb. It is a good rule to relax or ease up on this 
or any other tourniquet at the end of an hour, and allow it to remain 
loose but in place, if no bleeding appears. By watching you can 
tighten the tourniquet at any time if necessary. 

Fractures 
568. The next injury you must know how to help is a broken bone. 
The lower extremities, thigh and leg, are more frequently wounded 
than the upper arm and forearm; and so you will find more fractures 
of the thigh and leg bones than of the arm and forearm. You will 
usually know when one of these long bones is broken by the way the 
arm or leg is held, for the wounded man loses power of control over 
the limb, and it is no longer firm and straight. What you must do 
is much the same in all cases — straighten the limb gently, pulling upon 
the end of it firmly, and quietly, when this is necessary, and fix or retain 
it in position by such splints or other material as you may have. This 
is called ''setting'' the bone. If you have none of the splint material 
supplied, many common materials will do for immediate and temporary 
use — a shingle or piece of board, a carbine boot, a scabbard, a tin 
gutter or rain spout cut and fitted to the limb, a bunch of twigs, etc. 
Whatever material you chose must be well padded upon the side next to 
the limb, and afterwards secured or bound firmly in place, care being 
taken never to place the bandage over the frac- 
ture, but always above and below. Some of 
these methods are shown in the following figures: 



Fracture of the arm: Apply two splints, 
one in front, the other behind, if the lower part 
of the bone is broken; or to the inner and outer 
sides, if the fracture is in the middle or upper 
part; support by sling as in Fig. 9. 




Fig. 9. 



[528] 




568 (contd.) 



Fracture of the forearm: Place 
the forearm across the breast, thumb 
up, and apply a splint to the outer 
surface extending to the wrist, and to 
the inner surface extending to the tips 
of the fingers; support by slings as in 
Fig. 10. 




Fig. 11. 

Fracture of the thigh: Apply a long splint, reaching from the 
armpit to beyond the foot on the outside, and a short splint on the 
inside (Fig. 11). The military rifle may be used as an outside splint, but 
its application needs care. A blanket rolled into two rolls, forming a 
trough for the limb, is useful. 



[529] 



568 (contd.) 




The carbine boot may be used to 

advantage in splinting fractures of the 

thigh and leg, as illustrated in Figs. 12 
and 13. 



Fig. 12. 





Fracture of the leg: Apply two splints, one on 
the outside, the other on the inside of the limb. When 
nothing better can be had, support may be given by 
a roll of clothing and two sticks, as shown in Fig. 14. 



1«"IG. 14. 



[530] 



568 (contd.) 




Fig. 15. — Fracture of Left Leg, Supported by Sound Leg. 

Many surgeons think that the method of fixing the wounded leg 
to its fellow, and of binding the arm to the body, is the best plan for 
the field, as the quickest and as serving the immediate purpose. 

The object of all this is to prevent, as far as possible, any mo- 
tion of the broken bone, and so limit the injury to the neighboring 
muscles, and to lessen the pain. 

Be very careful always to handle a broken limb gently. Do 
not turn or twist it more than is necessary to get it straight, but secure 
it quickly and firml}^ in one of the ways shown, and so make the patient 
comfortable for carriage to the dressing station or hospital. Time is 
not to be wasted in complicated dressings. 

OTHER WOUNDS 

There are, of course, many wounds of the head, face, and of the 
body, but for the most part you will have little to do with these except 
to protect the wound itself with the contents of the first-aid packet, or, 
if bleeding makes it necessary, use in addition several of the packet 
compresses to control it. As the surface blood vessels of the head 
and face lie over the bones and close to them, it will generally not be 
difficult to stop the bleeding by this means or by the pressure with the 
fingers, as already shown. Eemember, as you were told, to make the 
pressure between the heart and the bleeding point. 

With wounds about the body, the chest and abdomen, you must 
not meddle, except to protect them, when possible without much hand- 
ling, with the material^ of the packet. 

CAUTIONS 

You have already been warned to be gentle in the treatment of 
the wounded, and the necessity for not touching the wound must al- 
ways be in your mind; but there are some other general directions which 
you will do well to remember: 

1. Act quickly but quietly. 

2. Make the patient sit down or lie down. 

3. See an injury clearly before treating it. 

4. Do not remove more clothing than is necessary to examine the 
injury, and keep the patient warm with covering if needed. Always 

[531] 



569-570-571-572 

rip, or, if you can not rip, cut the clothing from the injured part, and 
pull nothing off. 

5. Give alcoholic stimulants cautiously and slowly, and only when 
necessary. Hot drinks will often suffice when obtainable. 

6. Keep from the patient all persons not actually needed to help 
him. 

The Diagnosis Tag 

569. The diagnosis tag is very important in preventing unnecessary 
handling of the wounded man and interference with his dressing on 
the field. When available, it is to be attached by the person who ap- 
plies the first dressing and is not to be removed until the patient reaches 
the field hospital. When a patient has a tag on it is to be carefully 
read before additional treatment is given, and will usually indicate 
that no further treatment is needed before reaching the hospital. 

Poisoned Wounds 

570. When a wound is known to be poisoned, such as one infected 
by the venom of a snake or a rabid animal, the treatment should be 
directed toward preventing the passage of the poison into the circula- 
tion. In snake bites the poison acts quickly; to prevent its absorption a 
bandage should be carried around the limb between the wound and the 
heart, tight enough to compress the veins; then get the poison out of 
the wound by laying it open and sucking the poison out (if there is 
no crack in the mouth or lips) and destroying what is left -by cau- 
terization with fire or caustic. Stimulants may be freely given if the 
heart is weak. 

In the bite of a rabid animal the poison is for a long time 
localized in the wound and there is no danger of immediate absorption. 
Do not use a tourniquet, but use the other local measures advised for 
snake bite. 

571. Bite of Rabid Animal. The bite of a mad dog^ wolf, skunk, or 
other animal subject to rabies, requires instant and heroic treatment. 
Immediately twist a tourniquet very tight above the wound, and then 
cut out the whole wound with a knife, or cauteriz^ it to the bottom with 
a hot iron; then drink enough whiskey to counteract the shock. 

572. Bruises. Ordinary bruises are best treated with cold, wet 
cloths. Raw, lean meat applied to the part will prevent discoloration. 
Severe bruises, which are likely to form abscesses, should be covered with 
cloths wrung out in water as hot as can be borne, to be reheated as 
it cools; afterwards with hot poultices. 

Bums. If clothing sticks to the burn, do not try to remove it, 
but cut around it and flood it with oil. Prick blisters at both ends with 
a perfectly clean needle, and remove the water by gentle pressure, being 
careful not to break the sldn. A good application for a burn, including 
sun burn, is carron oil (eqiial parts linseed oil and limewater). Drug- 

[532] 



573 

gists supply an ointment known as *^ solidified carron oil" that is easier 
to carry. A three per cent solution of carbolic acid, applied with absor- 
bent cotton or a bandage, is an excellent application. Better still is the 
salve known as ungentine. Lacking these, the next best thing is com- 
mon baking soda. (Baking soda is the bicarbonate; washing soda, or 
plain soda, is the carbonate; do not confuse them.) Dissolve in as little 
water as is required to take it up; saturate a cloth with this and apply. 
Another good application for burns is the scrapings of a raw potato, 
renewed when it feels hot. If you have none of these, use any kind of 
clean oil or unsalted grease, or dust flour over the burn, or use moist 
earth, preferably clay; then cover with cotton cloth. Do not remove 
the dead sldn until new skin has formed underneath. 

573. Burning CJlothes, particularly that of females, has been the un- 
necessary cause of many horrible deaths, either from ignorance of the 
proper means of extingushing the flames, or from lack of presence of 
mind to apply them. A person whose clothing is blazing should (1) 
immediately be made to lie down — be thrown if necessary. The tendency 
of flames is upward, and when the patient is lying down, they not only 
have less to feed upon, but the danger of their reaching the face, with 
the possibility of choking and of ultimate deformity, is greatly dimin- 
ished. (2) The person should then be quickly wrapped up in a coat, 
shawl, rug, blanket or any similar article, preferably woolen, and never 
cotton, and the fire completely smothered by pressing and patting upon 
the burning points from the outside of the envelope. 

The flames having been controlled in this way, when the wrap is 
removed, great care should be taken to have the slightest sign of a 
blaze immediately and completely stifled. This is best done by pinching 
it, but water may be used. Any burns and any prostration or shock 
should be treated in the manner prescribed for them. 

It is always dangerous for a woman to attempt to smother the 
burning clothing of another, on account of the danger to her own cloth- 
ing. If she attempts it, she should always carefully hold between them 
the rug in which she is about to wrap the sufferer. 

Chigers. Apply sodium hyposulphate (''Hypo"). Bacon is also 
excellent. 

Choking. Foreign Body in the Throat. The common practice of 
slapping the back often helps the act of coughing to dislodge choking 
bodies in the pharynx or windpipe. 

When this does not succeed, the patient's mouth may be opened 
and two fingers passed back into the throat to grasp the object. If 
the effort to grasp the foreign body is not successful, the act will pro- 
duce vomiting, which may expel it. 

A wire, such as a hairpin, may be bent into a loop and passed 
into the pharynx to catch the foreign body and draw it out. The ut- 
most precautions must be taken neither to harm the throat nor to 
lose the loop. 

In children, and even in adults, the expulsion of the body may 
be facilitated by lifting a patient up by the heels and slapping his 
back in this position. 

Summon a physician, taking care to send him information as to 
the character of the accident, so that he may bring with him the in- 
struments needed for removing the obstruction. 



574-575-576-577-578-579-580-581 

574. Colds. Put on warm, dry clothing. Drink freely of hot ginger 
tea; cover well at night; give dose of quinine every six hours; loosen the 
bowels* 

575. Constipation. Give doses compound cathartic pills, eat freely 
of preserves; drink often. 

576. Convulsions. Give hot baths at once; rub well the lower parts 
of the body to stimulate; keep water as hot as possible without scald- 
ing, then dry and wrap up very warm. 

577. Cramps and Chills. Mix pepper and ginger in very hot water 
and drink. Give dose of cramp tablets. 

A hot stone makes a good foot warmer. 

578. Diarrhoea. Apply warm bandages to stomach; fire brown a 
little flour to which two teaspoonfuls of vinegar and one teaspoonful 
of salt are added; mix and drink. This is a cure^ nine cases out of 
ten. A tablespoonful of warm vinegar and teaspoonful of salt will cure 
most severe cases. Don't eat fruit. A hot drink of ginger tea is good. 
Repeat every few hours the above. 

579. Dislocations. A dislocation of a finger can generally be re- 
duced by pulling strongly and at the same time pushing the tip of the 
finger backward. 

If a shoulder is thrown out of joint, have the man lie down, place 
a pad in his arm pit, remove your shoe, and seat yourself by his side, 
facing him; then put your foot in his armpit, grasp the dislocated arm 
in both hands, and simultaneously push with your foot, pull on his arm, 
and swing the arm toward his body till a snap is heard or felt. 

For any other dislocation, if you can possibly get a surgeon, do 
not meddle with the joint, but surround it with flannel cloths, wrung 
out in hot water, and support with soft pads. 

580. Fainting. Lay the patient on his back, with feet higher than 
his head. Loosen tight clothing, and let him have plenty of fresh air. 
Sprinkle his face with cold water and rub his arms with it. When 
consciousness returns, give him a stimulant. For an attack of dizziness 
bend the head down firmly between the knees. 

581. Drowning. Being under water for four or ^Ye minutes is 
generally fatal, but an effort to revive the apparently drowned should 
always be made unless it is known that the body has been under water 
for a very long time. The attempt to revive the patient should not be 
delayed for the purpose of removing his clothes or placing him in the 
ambulance. Begin the procedure as soon as he is out of the water, on 
the shore or in the boat. The first and most important thing is to start 
artificial respiration without delay. 

The Schaefer method is preferred because it can be carried out 
by one person without assistance, and because its procedure is not ex- 
hausting to the operator, thus permitting him, if required, to continue 
( it for one or two hours. Where it is known that a person has been under 
water for but a few minutes, continue the artificial respiration for 
at least one and a half to two hours before considering the case hope- 
less. Once that patient has begun to breathe, watch carefully to see 
that he does not stop again. Should the breathing be very faint, or 
should he stop breathing, assist him again with artificial respiration. 
After he starts breathing do not lift him, nor permit him to stand until 
the breathing has become full and regular. 



581 (contd.) 




Fig. 16. 
As soon as the patient is removed from the water, turn Mm 
face to the ground, clasp your hands under his waist and raise the body 
so any water may drain out of the air passages while the head remains 
low. (Fig. 16.) 

Schaefer Method 

The patient is laid on his stomach, arms extended from his 
body beyond his head, face turned to one side so that the mouth and 
nose do not touch the ground. This position causes the tonglie to fall 
forward of its own weight and so prevents its falling back into the air 
passages. Turning the head to one side prevents the face coming into 




Fig. 17. 
contact with mud or water during the operation. This position also 
facilitates the removal from the mouth of foreign bodies such as to- 
bacco, chewing gum, false teeth, etc., and favors the expulsion of 
mucus, blood; vomitus, serum, or any liquid that may be in the air 
passages. (Fig. 17.) 



581 (contd.) 

The operator kneels, straddles one or both of the patient ^s thighs, 
and faces his head. Locating the lowest rib, the operator, with his 
thumbs nearly parallel to his fingers, places his spread hands so that 
the little finger curls over the twelfth rib. If the hands are on the pelvic 
bones the object of the work is defeated; hence the bones of the pelvis 
are first located in order to avoid them. The hand must be free from 
the pelvis and resting on the lowest rib. By operating on the bare back 
it is easier to locate the lower ribs and avoid the pelvis. The nearer the 
ends of the ribs the hands are placed without sliding off, the better. The 
hands are thus removed from the spine, the fingers being nearly out of 
sight. 

The fingers help some, but the chief pressure is exerted by the 
heels (thenar and hypothenar eminences) of the hands, with the weight 
coming straight from the shoulders. It is a waste of energy to bend the 
arms at the elbows and shove in from the sides, because the muscles 
of the back are stronger than the muscles of the arms. 

The operator's arms are held straight, and his weight is brought 
from his shoulders by bringing his body and shoulders forward. This 
weight is gradually increased until at the end of the three seconds of 
vertical pressure upon the lower ribs of the patient the force is felt 
to be heavy enough to compress the parts; then the weight is suddenly 
removed; if there is danger of not returning the hands to the right 
position again they can remain lightly in place, but it is usually better 
to remove the hands entirely. If the operator is light, and the patient 
an overweight adult, he can utilize over 80 per cent of his weight by 
raising his knees from the ground, and supporting himself entirely on 
his toes and the heels of his hands, the latter properly placed on the 
ends of the floating ribs of the patient. In this manner he can work as 
effectively as a heavy man. 

A light feather, or a piece of absorbent cotton drawn out thin 
and held near the nose by some one^ will indicate by its movements 
whether or not there is a current of air going and coming with each 
forced expiration and spontaneous inspiration. 

The natural rate of breathing is 12 to 15 times per minute. The 
rate of operation should not exceed this; the lungs must be thoroughly 
emptied by three seconds of pressure, then refilling takes care of itself. 
Pressure and release of pressure, one complete respiration, occupy about 
five seconds. If the operator is alone he can be guided in each act by 
his own deep, regular respiration, or by counting, or by his watch lying 
by his side. If comrades are present, he can be advised by them. 

The duration of the efforts at artificial respiration should or- 
dinarily exceed an hour; indefinitely longer if there are any evidences 
of returning animation, by way of breathing, speaking, or movements. 
There are liable to be evidences of life within 25 minutes in patients 
who will recover from electric shock, but where there is doubt, the 
patient should have the benefit of the doubt. In drowning, especiaJly, 
recoveries are on record after two hours or more of unconsciousness; 
hence, the Schaefer method, being easy of operation, is more likely to 
be persisted in. 

Aromatic spirits of ammonia may be poured on a handkerchief 
and held continuously within three inches of the face and nose; if other 



584-585-586-587-588 

ammonia preparations are used, they should be diluted or held farther 
away. Try it on your own nose first. 

When the operator is a heavy man it is necessary to caution him 
not to bring force too violently upon the ribs, as one of them might 
be broken. 

Do not attempt to give liquids of any kind to the patient while 
unconscious. Apply warm blankets and hot water bottles as soon as 
they can be obtained. 

The Schaefer method of artificial respiration is also applicable 
in cases of electric shock, asphyxiation by gas, and of failure of 
respiration following concussion of the brain. 

584. Drunkenness. Cold water dashed in the face often proves a 
most satisfactory awakener. 

Cause vomiting by tickling the pharynx with a feather or some- 
thing of the kind; by administering a tablespoonful of salt or mustard 
in a cup of warm water. Aromatic spirits of ammonia is very efficient 
in sobering a drunken man — a teaspoonful in half a cup of water. 

A cup of hot coffee after vomiting will aid to settle the stomach 
and clear the mind. 

Lay' the subject in a comfortable position, applying hot, dry 
fomentations, if there is marked coldness. 

585. Ear, Foreign Body in. In case of living insect, (a) hold a 
bright light to the ear. The fascination which a light has for insects 
will often cause them to leave the ear to go to the light. If this fails, 
(b) syringe the ear with warm salt and water, or (c) pour in warm oil 
from a teaspoon, and the intruder will generally be driven out. 

If the body be vegetable, or any substance liable to swell, do 
not syringe the ear, for the fluid will cause it to swell, and soften 
and render it much more difficult to extract. In a case of this kind, 
where a bean, a grain of corn, etc., has gotten into the ear, the body 
may be jerked out by bending the head to the affected side and jump- 
ing repeatedly. 

If the body is not liable to swell; syringing with tepid water 
will often wash it out. 

If these methods fail, consult a medical man. The presence of 
a foreign body in the ear will do no immediate harm, and it is quite 
possible to wait several days, if a surgeon cannot be gotten before. 

586. Earache. A piece of cotton sprinkled with pepper and moist- 
ened with oil or fat will give almost instant relief. Wash with hot 
water. 

587. Eyes, inflamed. Bind on hot tea leaves or raw fresh meat. 
Leave on over night. Wash well in morning with warm water. 

588. Eye, Foreign Body in. Close the eye for a few moments and 
allow the tears to accumulate; upon opening it, the body may be washed 
out by them. Never rub the eye. 

If the body lies under the lower lid, make the patient look up, 
and at the same time press down upon the lid; the inner surface of 
the lid will be exposed, and the foreign body may be brushed off with 
the corner of a handkerchief. 

[537] 



^89-590-591-592-593-594: 

If the body lies under the upper lid, (1) grasp the lashes of the 
upper lid and pull it down over the lower, which should at the same 
time, with the other hand, be pushed up under the upper. Upon 
repeating this two or three times, the foreign body will often be- 
brushed out on the lower lid. (2) If this fails, the upper lid should 
be turned up; make the patient shut his eye and look down; then with 
a pencil or some similar article press gently upon the lid at about its 
middle, and grasping the lashes with the other hand, turn the lid up 
over the pencil, when its inner surface w411 be seen, and the foreign 
body may readily be brushed off. 

If the body is firmly imbedded in the surface of the eye, a care- 
ful attempt may be made to lift it out with the point of a needle. 
If not at once successful, this should not be persisted in, as the sight 
may be injured by injudicious efforts. 

After the removal of a foreign body from the eye, a sensation 
as if of its presence often remains. People not infrequently complain 
of a foreign body when it has already been removed by natural means. 
Sometimes the body has excited a little irritation, which feels like a 
foreign body. If this sensation remains over night, the eye needs at- 
tention, and a surgeon should be consulted; for it should have passed 
away if no irritating body is present. 

After the removal of an irritating foreign body from the eye, 
some bland fluid should be poured into it. Milk, thin mucilage of gum 
arable, sweet oil, or salad oil are excellent for this purpose. 

589. Famishing. Do not let a starved person eat much at a time. 
Prepare some broth, or a gruel of corn meal or oatmeal thoroughly 
cooked, and feed but a small spoonful, repeating at intervals of a few 
minutes. Give very little the first day, or there will be bloating and 
nausea. 

590. Fatigue, excessive. Take a stimulant or hot drink when you 
get to camp (but not until then), and immediately eat something. Then 
rest between blankets to avoid catching cold. 

591. Fevers. Give doses of quinine tablets; loosen bowels if neces- 
sary; keep dry and warm. 

592. Freezing. Keep away from heat. To toast frost bitten fingers 
or toes before the fire would bring chilblains, and thawing out a badly 
frozen part would probably result in gangrene, making amputation nec- 
essary. Eub the frozen part with snow, or with ice cold water, until 
the natural color of the skin is restored. Then treat as a burn. 

Chilblains should be rubbed with whiskey or alum water. 

Freezing to Death. At all hazards keep awake. Take a stick and 
beat each other unmercifully; to restore circulation to frozen limbs 
rub with snow; when roused again don't stop or fall asleep — it is cer- 
tain death. Eemember this and rouse yourself. 

593. Head, How to Keep Cool. By placing wet green leaves inside 
of hat. 

594. Insect Stings. Extract the sting, if left in the wound, and apply 
a solution of baking soda, or a slice of raw onion, or a paste of clay, 
mixed with saliva, or a moist quid of tobacco. Ammonia is the com- 
mon remedy, but oil of sassafras is better. A watch key or other 

[538] 



595-596-597-593-599-60 -601-602 

small hollow tube pressed with force over the puncture and held there 
several minutes will expel a good deal of the poison. 

595. Ivy Poison. Relieved with solution of baking soda and water; 
use freely as a cooling wash. Keep the bowels open. 

596. Lightning, Struck by. Dash cold water on body continually; 
if severe case, add salt to water; continue for hours if necessary. If 
possible submerge body in running water up to neck. 

597. Nose, Foreign Body in. Close the clear side of the nose by 
pressure with a finger, and make the patient blow the nose hard. This 
will usually dislodge the object. 

If this- fails, induce sneezing either by tickling the nose with 
a feather or something of the kind, or by administering snuff. 

The nasal douche, where a syringe or a long rubber tube suit- 
able for a siphon is available, may be used in case the body is not 
liable to swell, injecting hike warm water into the clear nostril with 
the expectation that it will push the body out of the other. 

If these fail, and the body can be seen clearly, an effort may be 
made to fish it out by passing a piece of wire, bent into a little hook, 
back into the nostril close to the walL and catching the body with 
it. A hairpin may be bent straight and the hook formed at one end. 
Do not continue these maneuvers very long nor let them be rough in 
the slightest degree. 

All simple efforts having failed, send for a physician. There 
is no danger in leaving the foreign body in place for some days if it 
is impossible to consult a physician in less time. 

598. Nosebleed is sometimes uncontrollable by ordinary means. Try 
lifting the arms above the head and snuffing up alum water or salt 
water. If this fails, make a plug by rolling up part of a half -inch strip 
of cloth, leaving one end dangling. Push this plug as far up the nose 
as it will go, pack the rest of the strip tightly into the nostril, and 
let the end protrude. If there is leakage backward into the mouth, 
pack the lower part of plug more tightly. Leave the plug in place sev- 
eral hours; then loosen with warm water or oil, and remove very gently. 

599. Ointment for Bruises, Etc. Wash with hot water; then anoint 
with tallow or candle grease. 

600 Piles. Men with piles should take special pains to keep their 
bowels open and to bathe the parts with cold water. 

601. Poisons. In all cases of poisoning there should be no avoid- 
able delay in summoning a physician. The most Important thing is 
that the stomach should be emptied at once. If the patient is able 
to swallow this may be accomplished by emetics, such as mustard and 
water, a teaspoonful of mustard to a glass of water, salt and water, 
powdered ipecac and copious draughts of luke warm water. Vomiting 
may also be induced by tickling the back of the throat with a feather. 
When the patient begins to vomit, care should be taken to support the 
head in order that the vomited matter may be ejected at once, and not 
swallowed again or drawn into the wind pipe. 

602. Poultices. Poultices may be needed not only for bruises but 
for felons, boils, carbuncles, etc. They are easily made from corn meal 

[539] 



603-604-605-606-607-608 

or oat meal. Mix by adding a little at a time to boiling water and 
stirring to a thick paste; then spread on cloth. Eenew from time to 
time as it cools. 

To prevent a poultice from sticking, cover the under surface with 
clean mosquito netting, or smear the bruise with oil. It is a good 
idea to dust some charcoal over a sore before putting the poultice on. 
The woods themselves afford plenty of materials for good poultices. 
Chief of these is slippery elm_, the mucilaginous innerbark of which, 
boiled in water and kneaded into a poultice, is soothing to inflamma- 
tion and softens the tissues. Good poultices can also be made from 
the soft rind of tamarack, the rootbark of basswood or cottonwood, and 
many other trees or plants. Our frontiersmen, like the Indians, often 
treated wounds by merely applying the chewed fresh leaves of alder, 
striped maple (moosewood), or sassafras. 

603. Salves. Balsam obtained by pricking the little blisters on the 
bark of balsam firs is a good application for a wound; so is the honey 
like gum of the liquidambar or sweet gum tree, raw turpentine from 
any pine tree, and the resin procured by ''boxing^' (gashing) a cypress 
or hemlock tree, or by boiling a knot of the wood and skimming off the 
surface. All of these resins are antiseptics and soothing to a wound. 

604. Scalds. Relieve instantly with common baking soda and soak- 
ing wet rags — dredge the soda on thick and wrap wet clothes thereon. 
To dredge with flour is good also. 

605. Shock. In case of collapse following an accident, operation, 
fright, treat first as for fainting. Then rub the limbs with flannel 
stroking the extremities toward the heart. Apply hot plates, stones, or 
bottles^ of hot water, wrapped in towels, to the extremities and over 
the stomach. Then give hot tea or coffee, or if there is no bleeding, a 
tablespoonful of whiskey and hot water, repeating three or four times 
an hour. 

606. Skin, protection of, in cold weather. Smear the face, ears 
and hands with oil or grease. The eyes may be protected from the 
reflection of the sun on snow by blackening the nose and cheeks. 

607. Snake Bite. When a man is bitten he should instantly twist 
a tourniquet very tightly between the 'wound and the heart, to keep 
the poison, as far as possible, from entering the system. Then cut 
the wound wide open, so it may bleed freely, and suck the wound, if 
practicable (the poison is harmless if swallowed, but not if it gets into 
the circulation through an abrasion in the mouth or through a hol- 
low tooth). Loosen the ligature before long to admit fresh blood to the 
injured part, but tighten it again very soon, and repeat this alternate 
tightening and loosening for a considerable time. The object is to ad- 
mit only a little of the poison at a time into the general circulation. 
Meantime drink whiskey in moderate doses, but at frequent intervals. 
If a great quantity is guzzled all at once it will do more harm than 
good. Whiskey is not an antidote; it has no effect at all on the venom; 
its service is simply as a stimulant for the heart and lungs, thus help- 
ing the system to throw off the poison, and as a bracer to the victim's 
nerves, helping him over the crisis. 

608. Snow or Sun Blindness. Smear the nose and face about the 
eyes with charcoal. 



609-610-611-612-613-614 

609. Sore Throat. Fat bacon or pork tied on with a dry stocking; 
keep on until soreness is gone then remove fat and keep covering on 
a day longer. Tincture of Iron diluted; swab the throat. Gargling 
with salt and hot water is effective. Listerine, used as a gargle, is 
also good. 

610. Sprains. The regular medical treatment is to plunge a sprained 
ankle, wrist or finger, into water as hot as can be borne at the start, 
and to raise the heat gradually thereafter to the limit of endurance. 
Continue for half an hour, then put the joint in a hot, wet bandage, re- 
heat from time to time, and support the limb in an elevated position^ 
the leg being stretched as high as the hip, or the arm carried in a 
sling. In a day or two begin gently moving and kneading the joint, 
and rub with liniment, oil, or vaselin. 

Sprains may also be treated by the application of cold water and 
cloths. 

As a soothing application for sjjrains, bruises, etc., the virtues 
of witch hazel are well known. A decoction (strong tea) of the bark 
is easily made, or a poultice can be made from it. TBe inner bark 
of kinnikinick, otherwise known as red willow or silky cornel, makes 
an excellent astringent poultice for sprains. The pain and inflamma- 
tion of a sprained ankle are much relieved by dipping tobacco leaves 
in water and binding them around the injured part. 

611. Stunning. Concussion of the brain: lay the man on his back, 
with head somewhat raised. Apply heat as for shock, but keep the 
head cool with wet cloths. Do not give any stimulant — that would 
drive blood to the brain, where it is not wanted. 

612. Sunstroke. Lay the patient in a cool place, position same as 
for stunning. If the skin is hot, remove clothing, or at least loosen it. 
Hold a vessel or hat full of cold water four or five feet above him and 
pour a stream first on his head, then on his body, and last on his ex- 
tremities. Continue until consciousness returns. Eenew if symptoms 
recur. 

If the skin is cool (a bad sign) apply warmth, and give stimu- 
lating drinks. 

613. Thirst. Allow the sufferer only a spoonful of water at a time, 
but at frequent intervals. Bathe him if possible. 

To quench thirst. Don't drink too often, better rinse out the 
mouth often, taking a swallow or two only. A pebble or button kept 
in the mouth will help quench that dry and parched tongue. 

614. Toothache. Warm vinegar and salt. Hold in mouth around 
tooth until pain ceases, or plug cavity with cotton mixed with pepper 
and ginger. 

NOTE 

The only way to learn how to use bandages, slings and splints; 
how to make tourniquets, and how to handle fractures, is to have some- 
one who thoroughly understands these things show you in person how to 
do them and then for you to do them yourself. It is, therefore, sug- « 
gested that, if practicable, such instruction be received from some 
noncommig^iop^d officer of the Hospital Corps, 

[541] 



615-616-617 



CHAPTER XIII 




MILITARY COURTESY 

615. Its Importance. Some soldiers do not 
see the necessity for saluting, standing at atten- 
tion, and other forms of courtesy, because they 
do not understand their significance — their ob- 
ject. It is a well-known fact that military cour- 
tesy is a very important part of the education 
of the soldier, and there are good reasons for it. 

General Orders No. 183, Division of the 
Philippines; 1901, says: '^In all armies the man- 
ner in which military courtesies are observed and 
rendered by officers and soldiers, is the index to 
the manner in which other duties are per- 
formed. ^ ' 

The Army Eegulations tells us, "Courtesy 
among military men is indispensable to discipline; 
respect to superiors will not be confined to obedi- 
ence on duty, but will be extended on all occa- 
sions/^ 

THE NATURE OF SALUTES AND THEIR 

ORIGIN 

The Civilian Salute 

616. When a gentleman raises his hat to^ a 
lady he is but continuing a custom that had its 
beginning in the days of knighthood, when every 
knight wore his helmet as a protection against 
foes. However, when coming among friends, es- 
pecially ladies, the knight would remove his hel- 
met as a mark of confidence and trust in his 

friends. In those days failure to remove, the helmet in the presence 
of ladies signified distrust and want of confidence— today it signifies 
impoliteness and a want of good breeding. 

The Military Salute 
617. From time immemorial subordinates have always uncovered 
before superiors, and equals have always acknowledged each other's 
presence by some courtesy — this seems to be one of the natural, nobler 
instincts of man. It was not so many years ago when a sentinel 
saluted not only with his gun but by taking off his hat also. However, 
when complicated headgear like the bearskin and the helmet came into 
use, they could not be readily removed and the act of removing the 
hat was finally conventionalized into the present salute— into the move- 
ment of the hand to the visor as if the hat were going to be removed. 
Every once in a while a man is found who has the mistaken 
idea that he smothers the American spirit of freedom, that he sacrifices 
his independence, by saluting his officers. Of course, no one but an 
anarchist or a man with a small, shrivelled-up mina can have such 
ideas. 




617 (contd.) 

Manly deference to superiors, which in military life is merely rec- 
ognition of constituted authority, does not imply admission of in- 
feriority any more than respect for law implies cowardice. 

The recruit should at once rid himself of the idea that saluting 
and other forms of military courtesy are un-American. The salute is 
the soldier's claim from the very highest in the land to instant recog- 
nition as a soldier. The raw recruit by his simple act of saluting, com- 
mands like honor from the ranking general of the Army — aye, from 
even the President of the United States. 

While the personal element naturally enters into the salute to 
a certain extent, when a soldier salutes an officer he is really saluting 
the office rather than the officer personally — the salute is rendered as a 
mark of jespect to the rank, the position that the officer holds, to the 
authority with which he is vested. A man with the true soldierly in- 
stinct never misses an opportunity to salute his officers. 

As a matter of fact, military courtesy is just simply an applica- 
tion of common, every-day courtesy and common sense. In common, 
every-day courtesy no man with the instincts of a gentleman ever thinks 
about taking advantage of this thing and that thing in order to avoid 
paying to his fellow-man the ordinary, conventional courtesies of life, 
and if there is ever any doubt about the matter, he takes no chances 
but extends the courtesy. And this is just exactly what the man who 
has the instincts of a real soldier does in the case of military courtesy. 
The thought of '^ Should I salute or should I not salute '' never enters 
the mind of a soldier just because he happens to be in a wagon, in a 
post office, etc. 

In all armies of the world, all officers and soldiers are required 
to salute each other whenever they meet or pass, the subordinate salut- 
ing first. The salute on the part of the subordinate is not intended in 
any way as an act of degradation or a mark of inferiority, but is 
simply a military courtesy that is as binding on the officer as it is on 
the private, and just as the enlisted man is required to salute the officer 
first, so is the officer required to salute his superiors first. It is a bond 
uniting all in a common profession, marking the fact that above them 
there is an authority that both recognize and obey — the Country! In- 
deed, by custom and regulations, it is as obligatory for the ranking 
general of the Army to return the salute of the recruit, as it is for 
the latter to give it. 

Let it be remembered that the military salute is a form of greet- 
ing that belongs exclusively to the Government — to the soldier, the 
sailor, the marine — it is the mark and prerogative of the military man 
and he should be proud of having the privilege of using that form of 
salutation — a form of salutation that marks him as a meiiiber of the 
Profession of Arms — the profession of Napoleon, Wellington, Grant, Lee, 
Sherman^ Jackson and scores of others of the greatest and most famous 
men the world has ever known. The military salute is ours, it is ours 
only. Moreover, it belongs only to the soldier who is in good standing, 
the prisoner under guard, for instance, not being allowed to salute. Ours 
is a grand fraternity of men-at-arms, banded together for national de- 
fense, for the maintenance of law and order — we are bound together 

[543] 



618-619 

by the love and respect we bear the flag — ^we are pledged to loyalty, 
to one God, one country^ — our lives are dedicated to the defense of our 
country's flag — the officer and the private belong to a brotherhood whose 
regalia is the uniform of the American soldier^ and they are known to 
one another and to all men, by an honored sign and symbol of knight- 
hood that has come down to us from the ages— THE MILITARY 
SALUTE! 

Whom To Salute 

618. When covered, all enlisted men within saluting distance and not 
in ranks, salute all officers (if uncovered, a soldier stands at attention, 
without saluting). 

Soldiers at all times and in all situations pay the same compli- 
ments to officers of the Army, Navy, Marine Corps, and volunteers, and to 
officers of the Organized Militia in uniform as to officers of their own 
regiment, corps, or arm of service. 

The commander of a body of troops salutes all general officers 
and his regimental, post, battalion, or company commander, by bring- 
ing his command to attention and saluting in person. The troops are 
brought to attention in time to permit the salute to be rendered at the 
prescribed distance; they are held at attention until after the salute 
has been acknowledged. 

When an officer entitled to the salute passes in rear of a body 
of troops, it is brought to attention while he is opposite the post of 
the commander. 

The commander of a body of troops salutes in person all other 
officers senior to him in rank; the troops are not brought to attention 
except that a noncommissioned officer commanding a detachment less 
than a company will bring it to attention before saluting an officer. 

The commander of a body of troops exchanges salutes with the 
commanders of other bodies of troops; the troops are brought to atten- 
tion during the exchange. 

An officer commanding a body of troops is saluted by all officers 
junior to him in rank and by all enlisted men. He acknowledges the 
salutes in person; the command is not brought to attention. 

The commanding officer is saluted by all commissioned officers in 
command of troops or detachments. Troops under arms will salute 
as prescribed in drill regulations. 

The Manual of Interior Guard Duty requires sentinels to salute 
foreign naval and military officers, but there are no instructions about 
other enlisted men saluting them. However, as an act of courtesy 
they should be saluted the same as our own officers. 

Eespect to Be Paid the National Air, the Flag and Colors 
and Standards 

619. The National Air. Whenever ''The Star Spangled Banner" is 
played at a military station, or at any place where persons belonging 
to the military service are present in their official capacity or present 
unofficially but in uniform, all officers and enlisted men present will 
stand at attention, facing toward the music, except at retreat, when they 
will face toward the flag, retaining that position until the last note of 

[544] 



620-621-622 

the air, and then salute. With no arms in hand the salute will be the 
hand salute. The same respect will be observed toward the national 
air of any other country, when it is played as a compliment to official 
representatives of such country. 

620. Tlie Flag. The flag is lowered at the sounding of the last note 
of the retreat, and while it is being lowered the band plays '^The 
Star Spangled Banner, '^ or, if there is no band present, the field music 
sounds ''to the color.'' 

When ''to the color'' is sounded by the field music while the flag 
is being lowered the same respect will be observed as when "The Star 
Spangled Banner" is played by the band, and in either case officers and 
enlisted men out of ranks will face toward the flag, stand at attention, 
and render the prescribed salute at the last note of the music. Flags 
on flag staffs and other permanent poles are not saluted. 

621. Colors and Standards. The prescribed salute must always be 
rendered when passing the national or regimental color or standard 
uncased. Colors and standards that are cased, that is to say, that are in 
their waterproof case, are not saluted. (Note: By "the prescribed 
salute" is meant, if unarmed, the "hand salute;" if armed with the 
rifle, the "rifle salute" (for sentries on post the "present arms"); if 
armed with a drawn saber, the "present saber;" if wearing a sheathed 
saber or other side arm, the "hand salute." 

By "Colors" and "Standards" is meant the national flags and the 
regimental flags that are carried by regiments and also by engineer 
battalions. They may be of either silk or bunting. In the Army 
Regulations the word "color" is used in referring to regiments of infan- 
try, battalions of engineers and Philippine scouts, and the coast artillery, 
while "Standard" is used in reference to regiments of cavalry and 
field artillery. 

By "Flag" is meant the national emblem that waves from flag 
staffs and other stationary poles. They are always of bunting. 

When to Salute 

622. Soldiers salute officers day and night, and whether either or both 
are in uniform or civilian dress. 

Salutes are not rendered when marching in double time or at the 
trot or gallop. The soldier must first come to quick time or walk 
before saluting. 

When making or receiving official reports all officers will salute, if 
covered; if uncovered, they stand at attention. When under arms, the 
salute is made with the sword or saber, if drawn; otherwise with the hand. 

On meeting, all officers salute when covered; when uncovered, they 
exchange the courtesies observed between gentlemen. Military courtesy 
requires the junior to salute first, but when the salute is introductory to a 
a report made at a military ceremony or formation to the representative 
of a common superior — as, for example, to the adjutant, officer of the day, 
etc. — the officer making the report, whatever his rank, will salute first; 
the officer to whom the report is made will acknowledge, by saluting, if 
covered, or verbally, if uncovered, that he has received and understood 
the report. 

■^ [545] 



623-624 

How to Salute 

623. For the manner of maldng the hand salute, see Par. 82; the rifle 
salute, Par. 124; and the saber salute, Par. 322a. 

In saluting, the hand or weapon is held in the position of salute 
until the salute has been acknowledged or until the officer has passed 
or has been passed. 

On all occasions outdoors, and also in public places, such as stores, 
theaters, railway and steamboat stations, and the like, the salute to any 
person whatever by officers and enlisted men in uniform, with no arms in 
hand, whether on or off duty, shall be the hand salute, the right hand 
being used, the headdress not to be removed. 

When an enlisted man with no arms in hand passes an officer he 
salutes with the right hand. Officers are saluted whether in uniform or not. 

An enlisted man, armed with the saber and out of ranks, salutes 
all officers with the saber if drawn; otherwise he salutes with the hand. 
If on foot and armed with a rifle, he makes the rifle salute. 

A noncommissioned officer or private in command of a detachment 
without arms salutes all officers with the hand, but if the detachment 
be on foot and armed with the rifle, he makes the rifle salute, and if 
armed with a saber he salutes with it. 

Enlisted men out of doors and armed with the rifle, salute with 
the piece on the right shoulder; if indoors, the rifle salute is rendered 
at the order or trail. 

In approaching or passing each other within saluting distance 
(about 30 paces), individuals or bodies of troops exchange salutes when 
at a distance of about 6 paces. If they do not approach each other that 
closely the salute is exchanged at the point of nearest approach. 

If the officer and soldier are approaching each other on the same 
walk, for instance, the hand is brought up to the headdress when six 
paces from the officer. If they are on opposite sides of the street, the 
hand is brought up when about ten paces in advance of the officer. If 
the officer and soldier are not going in opposite directions and the officer 
does not approach within six paces, the salute is rendered when the officer 
reaches the nearest point to the soldier. If a soldier passes an officer from 
the rear, the hand is raised as he reaches the officer; if an officer passes a 
soldier from the rear, the soldier salutes just as the officer is about to 
pass him. 

A soldier salutes with the "present arms'' only when on post as 
a sentinel. At all other times when armed with the rifle he salutes with 
the prescribed rifle salute. If in the open, he renders the "rifle salute;" 
if indoors, he salutes from the order. 

Prisoners do not salute officers. They merely stand at attention. 
It is customary for paroled prisoners and others who are not under the 
immediate charge of sentinels, to fold their arms when passing or 
addressing officers. 

Miscellaneous 

624. Saluting distance is that within which recognition is easy. In 
general it does not exceed 30 paces. 

"Eyes right*' and "present arms" are not executed by troops 
except in the ceremonies and in saluting the color. 

[546] 



624 (contd.) 

It is very unmilitary to salute with the hand in the pocket, or a 
cigarette, cigar or pipe in the mouth. 

Officers should at all times acknowledge the courtesies of enlisted 
men by returning, in the manner prescribed, the salutes given, and salutes 
should be returned smartly and promptly. When several officers in com- 
pany are saluted, all return it. 

Soldiers actually at work do not cease work to salute an officer 
unless addressed by him. 

Before addressing an officer, an enlisted man makes the prescribed 
salute with the weapon with which he is armed, or, if unarmed and 
covered, with the right hand. He also makes the same salute after 
receiving a reply. If uncovered, he stands at attention without saluting. 

Indoors, an unarmed enlisted man uncovers and stands at attention 
upon the approach of an officer. If armed, he salutes as heretofore 
prescribed. 

(According to custom, the term "indoors" is interpreted as meaning military offices, 
barracks, quarters and similar places — it does not mean such places as- stores, store- 
houses, riding halls, stables, post exchange buildings, hotels, places of amusement, 
depots and exhibition halls, etc. In such places an unarmed soldier remains either 
covered, or uncovered according to the custom of the place, and whether or not he 
salutes depends upon circumstances, the occasion for saluting being determined by 
common sense and military spirit. 

For instance, an enlisted man riding in a street car, or in the act of purchasing 

goods in a store, or eating in a hotel, would not salute unless addressed by the officer. 

However, in case of a soldier occupying a seat in a crowded street car, if he recognized 

a person standing to be an officer, it would be but an act of military courtesy for 

him to rise, salute and offer the officer his seat.) 

When an officer enters a room where there are soldiers, the word 
Attention is given by some one who perceives him, when all rise and 
remain standing in the position of a soldier until the officer leaves the 
room. Soldiers at meals do not rise. 

An enlisted man, if seated, rises on the approach of an officer, faces 
toward him, and, if covered, salutes; if uncovered, he stands at attention. 
Standing, he faces an officer for the same purpose. If the parties remain 
in the same place or on the same ground, such compliments need not . 
be repeated. 

Uncovering is not a form of the prescribed salute, and the hand 
salute is executed only when covered. 

A soldier, if covered, should always salute before addressing an 
officer. Likewise he should always salute if addressed by an officer. 

A soldier salutea an officer passing in double time or at a trot or 
gallop — the question of gait applies to the one who salutes and not the 
one who is saluted. 

When an officer approaches a number of enlisted men out of 
doors, the word ATTENTION should be given by someone who 
perceives him, when all stand at attention and all salute. It is customary 
for all to salute at or about the same instant, taking the time from the 
soldier nearest the officer, and who salutes when the officer is six paces 
from him. 

A soldier riding in a wagon should salute officers that he passes. 
He would salute without rising. Likewise, a soldier driving a wagon 
should salute, unless both hands are occupied. 

[547] 



624 (contd.) 

A junior who is mounted dismounts before addressing a senior who 
is^ dismounted. 

A junior walks or rides on the left of a senior and keeps step 
with him. A soldier accompanying an oflScer walks on the officer's left 
and about one pace to his rear. 

The following are the mistakes usually made by soldiers in render- 
ing salutes: — 

1. They do not begin the salute soon enough; often they do not 
raise the hand to the headdress until they are only a pace or two from 
the officer — the salute should always begin when at least six paces 
from the officer. 

2. They do not turn the head and eyes toward the officer who is 
saluted — ^the head and eyes should always be turned toward the officer 
saluted and kept turned as long as the hand is raised. 

3. The hand is not kept to the headdress until the salute is acknowl- 
edged by the officer — the hand should always be kept raised until the 
salute has been acknowledged, or it is evident the officer has not seen 
the saluter. 

5. The salute is often rendered in an indifferent, lax mani^er — the 
salute should always be rendered with life, snap and vim; the soldier 
should always render a salute as if he MEAISTT IT. 

For salutes by the guard and detachments of the guard, see Par. 
368a. 

No honors are paid by troops when on the march or in trenches, 
except that they may be called to attention, and no salute is rendered 
when marching in double time or at the trot or gallop. 



[548] 



625 
CHAPTER XIV 

MILITARY DEPORTMENT AND APPEARANCE— PERSONAL 
CLEANLINESS— CARE OF CLOTHING AND OTHER EQUIP- 
MENT—CARE AND PRESERVATION OF SHOES— FORMS OF 
SPEECH— DELIVERY OF MESSAGES, ETC. 

625. Military Deportment and Appearance. The enlisted man is no 
longer a civilian but a soldier. He is, however, still a citizen of the 
United States and by becoming a soldier also he is in no way relieved 
of the responsibilities of a citizen; he has merely assumed in ad'dition 
thereto the responsibilities of a soldier. For instance, if he should visit 
an adjoining town and become drunk and disorderly while in uniform, 
not only could he be arrested and tried by the civil authorities, but he 
could also be tried by the summary court at his post for conduct to the 
prejudice of good order and military discipline. Indeed, his uniform is 
in no way whatsover a license for him to do anything contrary to law 
and be protected by the government. 

Being a soldier, he must conduct himself as such at all times, 
that he may be looked upon not only by his superior officers as a soldier, 
but also by the public as a man in levery way worthy of the uniform of 
the American soldier. 

Whether on or off duty, he should always look neat and clean, 
ever remembering that in bearing and in conversation he should be every 
inch a soldier — shoes must be clean and polished at all times; no chewing, 
spitting, gazing about, or raising of hands in ranks — he should know his 
drill, his orders and his duties — he should always be ready and willing 
to learn all he can about his profession — he should never debase himself 
with drink. 

It should be remembered that the soldiers of a command can 
make the uniform carry distinction and respect, or they can make it a 
thing to be derided. 

The soldier should take pride in his uniform. 

A soldier should be soldierly in dress, soldierly in carriage, 
soldierly in courtesies. 

A civilian owes it to himself to be neat in dress. A soldier owes 
it to more than himself — he owes it to his comrades, to his company — 
he owes it to his country, for just so far as a soldier is slack so far 
does his company suffer; his shabbiness reflects first upon himself then 
upon his company and finally upon the entire Army. 

It is a fact known to students of human nature that just in 
proportion as a man is neatly and trimly dressed is he apt to conduct 
himself with like decency. The worst vagabonds in our communities 
are the tramps, with their dirty bodies and dirty clothes; the most 
brutal deeds in all history were those of the ragged, motley mobs of 
Paris in the days of the French revolution; the first act of the mutineer 
has ever been to debase and deride his uniform. 

It is also a well known fact that laxity in dress and negligence 
iji military courtesy run hand in hand with laxity and negligence in 

[5491 



626 



almost everything else, and that is why we can always look for certain 
infallible sysmptoms in the individual dress, carriage and courtesies 
of soldiers. 

Should a soldier give care and attention to his dress? 

Yes, sir, not only should a soldier be always neatly dressed, but 
he should also be properly dressed— that is, he should be dressed as 
required by regulations. A soldier should always be neat and trim, 
precise in dress and carriage and punctilious in salute. Under lao cir- 
cumstances should the blouse or overcoat be worn unbuttoned, or tlie 
cap back or on the side of the head. His hair should be kept properly 
trimmed, his face clean shaved or beard trimmed and his shoes polished, 
his trousers pressed, the belt accurately fitted to the waist so that it does 
not sag, his leggins cleaned, his brass letters, numbers and crossed rifler 
polished, and his white gloves immaculate. 

Should a man ever be allowed to leave the post on pass if not 
properly dressed? 

No, sir; never. The Army Regulations require that chiefs of squads 
shall see that such members of their squads as have passes leave the 
post in proper dress. 

Should a soldier ever stand or walk with his hands in his 
pockets? 

No, sir; never. There is nothing more unmilitary than to see a 
soldier standing or walking with his hands in his pockets. 

The real soldier always stands erect. He never slouches. 

Is it permissible, while in uniform, to wear picture buttons, 
chains, watch charms, etc., exposed to view? 

No, sir; it is not. 

May the campaign hat or any other parts of the uniform be 
worn with civilian dress? 

No, sir; this is prohibited by the uniform order, which especially 
states that when the civilian dress is worn it will not be accompanied by 
any mark or part of the uniform. 

May a mixed uniform be worn— for example, a khaki coat g,nd 
olive drab trousers? 

No, sir; under no circumstances. 
626. Personal Cleanlinesss. Is personal cleanliness a matter of 
importance? 

Yes, and the army regulations require soldiers to bathe fre- 
quently. In this company soldiers are required -to bathe at least once 
a week. They are also required to brush their teeth and comb 
their hair daily. The Army Regulations require that the hair be 
kept short and the beard neatly trimmed, and that all soiled clothing 
be kept in the barrack bag. It is also required that in garrison, and 
whenever practicable in the field, soldiers wash their hands thoroughly 
after going to the latrines and before each meal, in order to prevent the 
transmission of typhoid fever and other diseases by germs taken into the 
mouth with food from linclean hands. 

What may be done to a soldier who persists in being filthy? 

He may be scrubbed by order of the captain. 

Who is immediately responsible for. the cleanliness of the soldiers?, 

[550] 



627-623 

According to the Army Eegulations, each chief of squad is held 
responsible for the cleanliness of his men. 

627. Care of Clothing and Other Equipment. These articles are given 
the soldier by the government for certain purposes, and he has, there- 
fore, no right to be in any way careless or neglectful of them. 
Clotliing, Ornaments and Buttons. 

Every article of clothing in the hands of an enlisted man should 
receive as much care as he gives to his person. 

Spots should always be removed as soon as possible. Prepara- 
tions for this purpose can always be obtained from any drug store ^t 
small cost. 

I'urpentine will take out paint. Grease spots can be removed by 
placing a piece of brown paper, newspaper, or other absorbent paper 
over the stain, and then pressing with a hot iron. 

Chevrons and stripes can be cleaned by moistening a clean woolen 
rag with gasoline and rubbing the parts and then pressing with a hot 
iron. 

Blue clothing should be thoroughly brushed and pressed once a 
week — two pressing irons and boards in a company, troop or battery 
will provide for this. 

All gilt ornaments and buttons should be polished once a week — 
one button stick and brush per squad should be provided for this purpose. 
''Polishine'' is recommended as a suitable polish — although there are 
many others just as good, but none better. Olive drab clothing should 
also be pressed weekly. This will stimulate a desire in the men to take 
better care of their clothing, as a wrinkled or soiled article is thrown 
around carelessly — while a pressed article is laid away to prevent its 
wrinkling, thus lasting longer. 

Soiled khaki clothing and leggings should be washed by the men — 
they can generally do it better than the laundry. Khaki and leggings 
require little or no pressing, if not wrung out before being placed out 
to dry. Khaki so washed wears about twice as long as when washed by 
a steam laundry. 

The service hat and blue and olive drab cap require nothing but 
brushing. The cover for the khaki cap should be washed as often as 
necessary — not oftener, perhaps, than every two weeks and always in 
cold water and dried^n the cap itself. 

No article should be worn without first being brushed. 

Shirts, underwear, socks, etc., should be laid away neatly. Articles 
of clothing soiled from wear or from long standing in the locker should 
be sent to the laundry immediately. 

A special suit of clothing should be set aside for inspections, 
paradeS; and other ceremonies and the uniform worn at these formations 
should not be worn in barracks — each man invariably has sufficient old 
garments for barrack use. A change of clothing after formation will be 
found to be a great help in preserving clothing. The special suit men- 
tioned should be kept well brushed, pressed and neatly folded. 
Russet Leather Equipment 

628. To preserve the life of russet leather equipments they should be 
cleaned whenever dirt, grit or dust has collected on them or when they 

[551] -1 



629-630 

have become saturated with the sweat of a horse. In cleaning them the 
parts should first be separated and each part sponged, using a lather of 
castile soap and warm water. When nearly dry a lather of Crown soap 

and warm water should be used. If the equipment is cared for frequently 
this method is sufficient; but if the leather has become hard and dry a 

little neatsfoot oil should be applied after washing with castile soap. 
When the oil is dry the equipments should be sponged lightly with Crown 

soap and water, which will remove the surplus remaining on the surface. 

If a polish is desired a thin coat of russet leather polish issued by the 

Ordnance Department should be applied and rubbed briskly with a 

(fry cloth. 

Particular care should be taken not to use too much Crown soap 
or water, as the result will be detrimental to the life of the leather. In 
no case should leather be dipped in water or be placed in the sun to 
dry. 

Special care should be taken to use as little water as possible and 

in applying the lather of soap and warm water to have the sponge 

moistened only. 

Camp Equipment 

629. The shelter tent half should never be scrubbed with soap and 
brush — the lye in the soap eats the fiber, thus causing the tent to leak. 
Rinsing in cold water will accomplish all that is necessary and never 
render the tent unserviceable. 

All articles of equipment, viz: the shelter tent half, haversack, 
canteen, field belt and suspenders should be neatly marked, with the let- 
ter of the company, number of the regiment and company number of 
man in whose possession the articles are placed and when turned in and 
reissued this number should become the number of the man to whom 
they are issued. The soldier is thus inspired to neatness by the fact 
that his eye falls upon a neatly marked set of equipments and he will 
give accordingly more care to his equipment. 

The pins and pole should be washed in hot water — ^never scraped — 
immediately upon return from a march where they have been used. 

The mess pan, tin cup, knife, fork and spoon should be sterilized 
in hot water after each meal in camp and weekly in garrison. 

The Care and Preservation of Shoes 

630. Shoes should at all times be kept polished, by being so kept they 
are made more pliable and wear longer. 

Shoes must withstand harder service than any other article worn, 
and more shoes are ruined through neglect than by wear in actual service. 

Proper care should be taken in selecting shoes to secure a proper fit, 
and by giving shoes occasional attention much discomfort and complaint 
will be avoided. 

Selection. A shoe should always have ample length, as the foot 
will always work forward fully a half size in the shoe when walking, 
and sufficient allowance for this should be made. More feet are 
crippled and distorted by shoes that are too short than for any other 
reason. A shoe should fit snug yet be comfortable over ball and instep. 
and when first worn should not lace close together over instep. Leather 
always stretches and loosens at instep and can be taken up by lacing. 



630 (contd.) 

The foot should always be held firmly but not too tightly in proper 
position. If shoes are too loose, they allow the foot to slip around, 
causing the foot to chafe; corns, bunions, and enlarged joints are the re- 
sult. 

Repairs. At the first sign of a break shoes should be repaired, if 
possible. Always keep the heels in good condition. If the heel is allowed 
to run down at side, it is bad for the shoe and worse for the foot; it also 
weakens the ankle and subjects the shoe to an uneven strain, which 
makes it more liable to give out. Shoes if kept in repair will give 
double the service and comfort. 

Shoe Dressing. The leather must not be permitted to become 
hard and stiff. If it is impossible to procure a good shoe dressing, neats- 
foot oil or tallow are the best substitutes; either will soften the leather 
and preserve its pliability. Leather requires oil to preserve its pliability, 
and if not supplied will become brittle, crack, and break easily under 
strain. Inferior dressings are always harmful, and no dressing should be 
used which contains acid or varnish. Acid burns leather as it would 
the skin, and polish containing varnish forms a false skin which soon 
peels off. spoiling the appearance of the shoe and causing the leather to 
crack. Paste polish containing turpentine should also be avoided. 

Perspiration. Shoes becoming damp from perspiration should Be 
dried naturally by evaporation. It is dangerous to dry leather by 
artificial heat. Perspiration contains acid which is harmful to leather, 
and shoes should be dried out as frequently as possible. 

Wet Shoes. Wet or damp shoes should be dried with great care. 
When leather is subjected to heat, a chemical change takes place, 
although no change in appearance may be noted at the time. Leather 
when burnt becomes dry and parched and will soon crack through like 
pasteboard when strained. This applies to leather both in soles and 
uppers. When dried, the leather should always be treated with dressing 
to restore its pliability. Many shoes are burned while on the feet 
without knowledge of the wearer by being placed while wet on the rail 
of a stove or near a steam pipe. Care should be taken while shoes are 
being worn never to place the foot where there .is danger of their being 
burned. 

Keep Shoes Clean. An occasional application of soap and water 
will remove the accumulations of old dressing and allow fresh dressing 
to accomplish its purpose. 

IDirections for Polishing. Eusset calf leather should be treated 
with great care. Neither acid, lemon juice, nor banana peel should be 
used for cleaning purposes. Only the best liquid dressing should be 
used and shoes should not be rubbed while wet. 

Black calf shoes should be cleaned frequently and no accumula- 
tion of old blacking allowed to remain. An occasional application of 
neatsfoot oil is beneficial to this leather, and the best calf blacking 
only should be used to obtain polish. 

Liquid "Dressing. Care should be taken in using liquid dressing. 
Apply only a light even coat and allow this to dry into the leather before 
rubbing with a cloth. When sufliciently dry to rub, a fine powdery 
substance remains on the surface. This, when rubbed with a soft cloth, 

[553] 



631-632-633 

produces a high polish that lasts a long time and which is quickly 
renewed by an occasional rubbing. Too much dressing is useless and 
injurious. (Quartermaster GeneraPs OflS.ce, June 16, 1889.) 

631. Forms of Speech. In speaking to an ofl&cer it is not proper for 
a soldier to say, **You, etc.,*' but the third person should always be 
used, as, for example, ''Does the captain want his horse this morning?'' — 
do not say, ''Do you want your horse this morning?" 

In beginning a conversation with an oflScer, a soldier should use 
the third person in referring to himself instead of the pronouns ''I" and 
"me." However, when the conversation has commenced, it is perfectly 
proper, and usual, for the soldier to use the pronouns <'I" and "me," 
but an oflficer is always addressed in the third person and never as ' ' you. ' ' 

In speaking to an oflScer, an enlisted man should refer to another 
enlisted man by proper title, as, "Sergeant Eichards," "Corporal 
Smith," "Private Wilson." 

Privates and others should always address noncommissioned officers 
by their titles. For example, ' ' Sergeant Smith, " " Corporal Jones, ' ' etc., 
and not "Smith," "Jones," etc. 

"When asked his name, a soldier should answer, for 'nstance, "Pri- 
vate Jones, sir" 

When given an order or instructions of any kind by an officer, 
a soldier should always say, "Yes, sir," thus letting the officer know 
that the soldier understands the order or instructions. 

Short, direct answers should be made in the form of, "I^o, sir," 
"Yes, sir," "I don't know, sir," "I will try, sir," etc. 

After a soldier has finished a thing that he was ordered to do, he 
should always report to the officer who gave him the order. For example, 
"The captain's message to Lieutenant Smith has been delivered." 

If ordered to report to an officer for any purpose^ do not go away 
without first ascertaining if the officer is through with you, as it often 
happens he has something else he would like to have you do. After 
having finished the work given in the beginning, report, for instance, 
"Sir, is the captain through with me?" 

When an officer calls a soldier who is some distance away, the 
soldier should immediately salute, and say, "Yes, sir," and, if necessary, 
approach the officer with a quickened step. If the officer is waiting on 
the soldier, the latter should take up the double time. 

MISCELLANEOUS 

632. How to Enter an Office. In entering an office a soldier should 
give two or three knocks at the door (whether it be open or closed); 
when told to come in, enter, taking off the hat (if unarmed), close the 
door and remain just inside the door until asked what is wanted; then 
go within a short distance of the officer, stand at attention, salute (if 
covered) and make known your request in as few words a^ possible. On 
completion, salute, face toward the door, and go out, being careful to close 
the door if it was closed when you entered. If it was not closed, leave 
it open. 

633. Complaints to the Captain. Complaints* must never be made 
directly to the captain unless the soldier has the captain's permission 
to do so, or the first sergeant refuses to have the matter reported. If 

[554] 



634-635-636 

dissatisfied with his food, clothing, duties, or treatment, the facts should 
be reported to the first sergeant, with the request, if necessary, to see 
the captain. 

It is also customary for soldiers who wish to speak to the captain 
about anything to see the first sergeant first, and when speaking to the 
captain to inform him that he has the first sergeant ^s permission to do so. 
Thus: ^'Private Smith has the first sergeant ^s permission to speak to 
the captain,'' etc. 

634. How the Soldier is Paid. As soon as the company is formed in 
column of files, take oft' your right hand glove, and fold it around your 
belt in front of the right hip. AVhen your name is called, answer ' 'Here, " 
step forward and halt directly in front of the paymaster, who will be 
directly behind the table; salute him. When he spreads out your pay 
on the table in front of you, count it quickly, take it up with your un- 
gloved hand, execute a left or right face and leave the room and build- 
ing, unless you wish to deposit, in which case, you will remain in the 
hall outside the pay-room, until the company has been paid, when you 
enter the pay-room. Men wishing to deposit money with the paymaster, 
will always notify the first sergeant before the company is marched to 
the pay table. 

635. Delivery of Messages. When an enlisted man receives a message, 
verbal or written, from an officer for delivery, he will in case he does not 
understand his instructions, ask the officer to repeat them, saying, for 
instance, ''Sir, Private Smith does not understand; will the captain 
please repeat?'' When he has received his instructions, and understands 
them, he will salute, and say: ''Yes, sir," execute an about face, and 
proceed immediately to the officer for whom the message is intended. He 
will halt three or four paces directly in front of the officer and if the 
officer be junior to the officer sending the message, he will say, "Sir, 
Captain Smith presents his compliments," etc., and then deliver the 
message, or, "The commanding officer* presents his compliments to 
Lieutenant Smith and would like to see him at headquarters." He will 
salute immediately before he begins to address the officer and will hold 
his hand at the position of salute while he says, "Sir, Captain Smith 
presents his compliments," or "The commanding officer presents his com- 
pliments to Lieutenant Smith." If the officer sending the message be 
much junior to the one receiving it, the soldier will not present his com- 
pliments, but will say, for instance, "Sir, Lieutenant Smith directed me 
to hand this letter to the captain," or "Sir, Lieutenant Smith 
directed me to say to the captain," etc. As soon as the message has 
been delivered, the soldier will salute, execute an about face, and proceed 
at once to the officer who sent the message, and will similarly report to 
him, "Sir, the lieutenant's m.essage to Captain Smith has been delivered," 
and leave. 

Before leaving always ascertain whether there is an answer. 

636. Appearance as Witness. The uniform is that prescribed, with side 
arms and gloves. Proceed to the courtroom and remain outside. When 
you are notified that you are wanted enter the room. Then take off your 
cap and right hand glove, and raise your right hand above your head, 
palm to the front, to be sworn. After the judge advocate reads the oath, 

[555] 



636 

say, '*I do'' or '^So help me God.'' Then sit down in the chair indicated 
by the judge advocate. Do not cross your legs, but sit upright. When 
asked, '^Do you know the accused? If, so, state who he is," answer, '*I 
do; Corporal John Jones, Co. 'B' 1st Infantry." Be sure you thoroughly 
understand every question before you start to reply, answering them all 
promptly, in a loud, distinct, deliberate voice, and confining your answers 
strictly to the questions asked and telling all you know. 



[556] 



637 

CHAPTER XV 

THE CARE, DESCRIPTION AND MANAGEMENT OF 

THE RIFLE 

637. As the bore of the rifle is manufactured with great care in order 
that a high degree of accuracy may be obtained, it should be carefully 
cared for. What remains from smokeless powder tends to eat and wear 
away the bore and should, therefore, be removed as soon after firing 
as practicable. 

The proper way of cleaning a rifle is from the breech. For this, 
purpose the barrack cleaning rod should be used. 

To clean a rifle use rags, preferably canton flannel, cut them into 
squares of such size that they may be easily run through the barrel. 
Remove the bolt from the rifle, place the muzzle on the floor and do not 
remove it therefrom while the cleaning rod is in the bore. Wrap a rag 
that has been thoroughly soaked in a saturated solution of soda and water 
around the point of the cleaning rod, insert it into the bore and work 
back and forth in the bore. Follow with dry rags until the bore is 
thoroughly dry, then remove the muzzle from the floor and with a small 
stick and a new rag, soaked in the same solution, proceed to clean the 
muzzle end of the bore. This should find the bore free from dirt, rust, 
etc. Clean again with rags dipped in oil, preferably "3 in 1," dry 
thoroughly and apply a thin coating of the same oil. Repeat the process 
of cleaning with oil daily and the bore will at all times be thoroughly 
clean. Five minutes work a day will accomplish this. 

To clean the bolt, dismount it, clean all parts thoroughly with an 
oily rag, dry, and before assembling lightly oil the firing pin, the barrel 
of the sleeve, the striker, the well of the bolt and all cams. 

The stock and hand guard should receive a light coat of raw lin- 
seed oil once a month, or after any wetting from rain, dew, etc. — this 
should be thoroughly rubbed in with the hand. 

The chamber, magazine and other parts require very little care — 
wiping, drying, brushing and coating with a thin coat of oil, as in the 
bore, is sufficient to keep these parts clean. 

Unless the rifle is to be stored away, ©r not used for any length of 
time, the use of cosmic oil should be discouraged — it is thick and sticky, 
which makes it hard to remove without the use of gasoline or chloroform. 
Pomade is valueless in the care of the rifle; pomade is of use only 
in the burnishing and polishing of brasses and coppers, and even then 
it is not as good as ' ' Polishine. ' ' 

Never, under any circumstances, should a recruit be permitted to 
use em^ry paper on any part of his rifle — the use of the burnisher 
likewise should be prohibited. 

In the place of emery paper or the burnisher an ordinary rubber 
eraser will be found very serviceable. 

The Bayonet 
The bayonet need not be taken apart in order to clean it. With a 
small stick — small enough to be used inside the cut for the scabbard 

[557] 



637 (contd.) 

catch, hook and clearance cut — an oily rag and a rubber eraser, the 
bayonet can be thoroughly cleaned. 

The rawhide cover of the bayonet scabbard should be w^hed once 
a month with castile soap and water, then rub a small quantity of leather 
dressing all over and into the leather, with a brush, sponge or rag; then 
wipe with a damp rag or sponge. This will remove all dirt and stains. 
Allow to dry and next apply a light coat of some cream paste. Wait a 
moment for this to dry, then polish with a clean brush or rag. 

The metallic parts require nothing but an occasional wiping oflf 
with an oily rag — these parts should then be dried. 

Are enlisted men allowed to take their arms apart? 

No, not unless they have the permission of a commissioned officer, 
and even then only under proper supervision and in the manner prescribed 
in the descriptive pamphlet issued by the ordnance department. 

(Except when repairs are needed, the following named parts 
should never be dismounted by the soldier, and whenever they are taken 
apart they should be removed only by the artificer, or some one else 
familiar with the handling of tools and delicate mechanisms: Bolt stop, 
cut off, safety lock, sleeve lock, front sight, front sight movable stud, 
lower band, upper band and stacking swivel screws. 

Unless the screw driver is handled carefully and with some skill 
the screws are sure to be injured either at the head or thread.) 

Is the polishing of blued and browned parts permitted? 

No, and rebluing. rebrowning, putting any portion of an arm in 
fire, removing a receiver from a barrel, mutilating any part by firing or 
otherwise, and attempting to beautify or change the finish, are prohibited. 
However, the prohibition of attempts to beautify or change the finish of 
arms, is not construed as forbidding the application of raw linseed oil 
to the wood parts of arms. This oil is considered necessary for the 
preservation of the wood, and it may be used for such polishing as 
can be given when rubbing in one or more coats when necessary. The 
use of raw linseed oil only is allowed for redressing and the application 
for such purpose of any kind of wax or varnish, including heelball, is 
strictly prohibited. 

Is the use of tompions* in small arms permitted! 

No, it is prohibited by regulations. 

Should pieces be unloaded before being taken to quarters or tents t 

YeS; unless it is otherwise ordered. They should also be unloaded 
as soon as the men using them are relieved from duty. 

Should a loaded or unloaded rifle or revolver ever be pointed at 
anyone in play? 

No, sir; under no circumstances whatsover. A soldier should never 
point a rifle or revolver at a person unless he intends to shoot him. 

NOTES 
It is easier to prevent than to remove rust. 

Oil to be used only to remove rust or after firing or when going 
out in damp weather. When occasion for its use has passed, it should be 
carefully wiped off, so as not to collect dust and sand. 

^Wooden stoppers or plugs that are put in the muzzles of rifles and other arms 
to keep out dirt and water. 

[5581 



637 (contd.) 

To remove rust, apply oil with rag and let it stand for awhile so 
as to soften rust — weapon then wiped clean with dry rag. Emery paper 
should never be used to remove rust. 

To prevent dust and rust in bore, a good strong gun string should 
be frequently used. 

All articles of brass to be kept brightly polished. 

Never put away arms and equipment before cleaning. 

Emery paper, burnisher and sand are used only on sabers, 
bayonets, mess kits and other bright metal. Under no circumstances 
should they ever be used on blued or browned metal. 

Cosmic oil and emery paper may generally be gotten from the 
company quartermaster-sergeant. Polishine, burnisher, chamois skin, 
machine oil (''S-in-l'') and button stick must be bought by the soldier. 

The Front Sight, Fig 42, is secured in its slot in the front sight 
movable stud by the front sight pin. Fig. 43; the pin is tapering, and 
its small end is driven in from the right and the ends upset to prevent 
accidental removal. 

Fig. 43. 



Fig. 42. 





Fig. 45. 




The Front Sight Fixed Stud and Front Sight Movable Stud, with 
front sight in place, are shown assembled. Fig. 44, right side view, and 
Fig. 45, front view. The front sight fixed stud, A, has a slot, B, which, 
bearing, on a lug on the upper side of the barrel, prevents lateral dis- 
placement of the stud; and hole, C, for the front sight stud pin, which 
prevents longitudinal displacement of the stud. The front sight movable 
stud, D, has the front sight pin hole, E. It is held by the undercut slot 
in the front sight stud and secured from lateral displacement by the 
front sight screw, F. The recess for this screw is not drilled in the 
movable stud until the rifle has been targeted and the correct position 
of the movable stud determined. The rear face, G, of both the front 
sight fixed stud and front sight movable stud is serrated to prevent any 
reflection of light from this surface interfering with the aiming. 

The Rear Sight Fixed Base, Fig, 4b, rear end view, and Fig. 47, 
right side view, has the holes, A and B, for the base pin and base spline, 

. _ [559] 



637 (contd.) 



Fig. 46. 



Fig. 47. 




r e s p e c lively, by 
which it is firmly 
secured to the 
barrel and lateral o 
and longitudinal 
movement pre- 
vented; the under- 
cut, D, for the 
tenon of the hand 
guard; the lighten- 
ing cuts, E; the 
barrel hole, F; the 
pivot lug, G, for 
the movable base; 

the undercut, H, for the lip on the rear end 

of the movable base; the undercut, I, for the 

windage screw and the lip on the front end 

of the movable base; the lug, J, on the top 

of which are two zero marks for the wind 

gauge graduations; and the chamfer, K, 

the seat for the windage screw collar. This 

chamfer is carried to the rear to permit of 

the assembling of the fixed base and the 

windage screw. On the left side of the 

front lug the chamfer corresponding to K 

is merely a conical recess for the head of the 

windage screw. ^ 

The Base Spline locates and prevents 

the base from turning on the barrel. 

The Base Pin, similar to the base spline, prevents longitudinal 

movement of the base on the barrel. 

The Movable Base, Fig. 48, top view, and Fig. 49, right side view, 

has the ears. A, in which are the holes, B, for the joint pin, which serves 




Fig. 48. 




as a hinge for the 
leaf; the wind gauge 
graduations, C, each 
point of which cor- 
responds to a lateral 
deviation of four 
inches for each 100 
vards; the lip, D, 
which fits in the un- 
-dercut in the rear 
end of the fixed 
base; the spring 
opening, E; the 



[560] 



spring seat, F, which is undercut to admit 
the lip on the front end of the base 
spring, the lip, G, in which is a worm gear 
for the engagement of the windage screw; 
the pivot hole, H, for the pivot lug on the 
fixed base; and the shoulders, I, on which 
the front end of the leaf rests when 
down. The hole, K, is made for conveni- 
ence in manufacture. 

The Leaf, Fig. 50, top view (when 
down), and Fig. 51, right side view, has 
the joint, Aj in which is the joint pin 
hole; the rib, B; the undercut, C, for the 
drift slide and the sighting notch, D. The 
free end of the base spring bears against 
Fig. 52. the lower end of the leaf and 
maintains it in either its lowered 
or raised position. The leaf is 
C graduated from 100 to 2,850 
yards. The lines extending 
across one or both branches of 
the leaf are 100-yard divisions, 
the longer of the short lines are 
50-yard and the shorter lines 
25-yard divisions. 






Fig; 50 




D 


-■IF 


_ji 




2-/ 


26 




3- 


~2 <3 


25 


24 




E- 


-i 




23 


E 




IT- 


-: 




z\ 


20 










13 


18 










17 


16 




n 


-=: 




[is 


14 




p:-. 




^ 


•3 


i^ 




=r 


T?r 






fi" 




=2. 


-^ 




-if- 


1 


y 


r 



637 (contd.) 
Fig. 51. 



[561] 



637 (contd.) 

Fig. 53. . Fig. 54. 




The Drift Slide, Fig. 52, top view (leaf down) 
has the peephole, A; the field view, B; the drift slide 
pin, C, riveted to the slide in manufacture; and the 
peep notches, D. The lines on either side of the 
peephole and lower peep notch enable the drift slide 
to be accurately set at any desired graduation on 
the leaf. 

As the slide is moved up or down on the leaf 
the drift slide moves with it and at the same time 
has a lateral movement in the undercut between the 
branches of the leaf, thus automatically correcting 
for drift. This movement corrects for all drift up 
to 600 yardS; but for only part of the drift beyond 
that range. 

With the leaf up, ranges from 100 to 2,350 
yards can be obtained through the peephole; from 
100 to 2,450 yards through the lower peep notch at 
the bottom of field view; and from 1,400 to 2,750 
yards through the upper peep notch in the upper 
edge of the drift slide. 

The 2,850-yard range is obtained through the 
sighting notch in the upper end of the leaf. 

With the leaf down and using the open notch 
in slide cap the sights are set for 530 yards or battle 
line firing for the down position of the slide. 

The stock is shown in Pig. 53, top view, and 
Fig. 54, right side view. The parts are the butt. A; 
small, B; magazine well, C; barrel bed, D; air 
chamber, E, which reduces the charring effect of 
a heated barrel on the stock; small butt plate 
screw hole and seat for the butt plate tang, F; 
butt swivel plate seat, G; mortise for receiver 
tang lug and hole for rear guard screw, fl; 
mortise for sear and slot for trigger, I; cut-off 
thumb-piece recess, J; mortise for recoil on 
receiver, K; bed for fixed bage, L; grasping 
grooves, N; shoulder for lower band, O; bed 
for band spring, P; shoulder for upper band, 
Q; channels for decreasing weight, E; upper 
band screw hole, S; and the stock screw hole, 
T. The large hole in the butt is for decreas- 
ing weight, and the smaller one is a pocket 
for the combination oiler and thong 



Fig. 84 



tig. 83 



637 (contd.) 



i 


m 


i 


m^^k 


C5 

1- 




m 


InM 


S V/ 


y/v/M 


^ 


nM 


|M 




I© 


^1 


'//' k- - — - 


'^^ M 


^^1 


y/^^"^^ 


^ 11 


Pi 


^^^rt 


VI 


1 


m//k 


w^i- - — 




637 (contd.) 

THE ASSEMBLED PAETS AND THEIR OPEEATIONS 

Most of the operating parts may be included under the bolt 
mechanism and magazine mechanism. 

The Bolt Mechanism consists of the bolt, sleeve, sleeve lock, 
extractor, extractor collar, cocking piece, safety lock, firing pin^ firing 
pin sleeve, striker, and mainspring. It is shown, assembled, in Fig. 82. 
The parts shown in the cut are handle. A; sleeve, B; safety lock, C; 
cocking piece, D; safety lug, E; extractor, F; extractor collar, G; locking 
lugs, H; extractor tongue groove, I^ and gas escape hole, J. 

The bolt moves backward and forward and rotates in the well of 
the receiver; it carries a cartridge, either from the magazine, or one 
placed by hand in front of it, into the chamber and supports its head when 
fired. 

The sleeve unites the parts of the bolt mechanism, and its rotation 
with the bolt is prevented by the lugs on its sides coming in contact with 
the receiver. 

The hook of the extractor engages in the groove of the cartridge 
case and retains the head of the latter in the countersink of the bolt until 
the case is ejected. 

The safety lock, when turned to the left, is inoperative; when 
turned to the right — ^which can only be done when the piece is cocked — 
the point of the spindle enters its notch in the bolt and locks the bolt; 
at the same time its cam forces the cocking piece slightly to the rear, 
out of contact with the sear, and locks the firing pin. 

The bolt mechanism operates as follows: To open the bolt, raise 
the handle until it comes in contact with the left side of the receiver and 
pull directly to the rear until the top locking lug strikes the cut-off. 

Raising the handle rotates the bolt and separates the locking lugs 
from their locking shoulders in the receiver, with which they have been 
brought into close contact by the powder pressure. This rotation causes 
the cocking cam of the bolt to force the firing pin to the rear, drawing 
the point of the striker into the bolt, rotation of the firing pin being 
prevented by the lug on the cocking piece projecting, through the slot 
in the sleeve, into its groove in the receiver. As the sleeve remains 
longitudinally stationary with reference to the bolt, this rearward motion 



[5641 



Fig. 82 



637 (contd.) 
of the firing pin, and consequently of 
the striker, will start the compression 
of the mainspring, since the rear end 
of the latter bears against the front 
end of the barrel of the sleeve and its 
front end against the rear end of the 
firing pin sleeve. 

When the bolt handle strikes 
the receiver^ the locking lugs have 
been disengaged, the firing pin has 
been forced to the rear until the sear 
notch of the cocking piece has passed 
the sear nose, the cocking piece nose 
has entered the cock notch in the rear 
end of the bolt, the sleeve lock has 
engaged its notch in the bolt, and the 
mainspring has been almost entirely 
compressed. 

During the rotation of the bolt 
a rear motion has been imparted to it 
by its extracting cam coming in con- 
tact with the extracting cam of the 
receiver, so that the cartridge case will 
be started from the chamber. 

The bolt is then drawn directly 
to the rear, the parts being retained 
in position by the cocking piece nose 
remaining in the cock notch and locked 
by the sleeve lock engaging its notch 
in the bolt. 

To close the bolt, push the han- 
dle forward until the extracting cam 
on the bolt bears against the extract- 
ing cam on the receiver, thereby un- 
locking the sleeve from the bolt, and 
turn the handle down. As the han- 
dle is turned down the cams of the 
locking lugs bear against the locking 
shoulders in the receiver, and the bolt 
is forced slightly forward into its 
closed position. As all movement of 
the firing pin is prevented by the sear 
nose engaging the sear notch of the 
cocking piece, this forward movement 
of the bolt completes the compression 
of the mainspring, seats the cartridge 
in the chamber, and, in single loading, 
forces 4he hook of the extractor into 
the groove of the cartridge case. 
In loading from the magazine the hook of the extractor, rounded at its 

1565] 




637 (coiitd.) 

lower edge, engages in the groove of the top cartridge as it rises from the 
magazine under the action of the follower and magazine spring. 

The position then occupied by the parts is shown in Fig. 83 and 
Fig. 84^ and the piece is ready to fire. 

To pull the trigger, the ^nger piece must be drawn to the rear until 
contact with the receiver is transferred from its bearing to the heel, 
which gives a creep to the trigger, and then until the sear nose is with- 
drawn from in front of the cocking piece. 

Just before the bolt is drawn fully to the rear, the top locking lug 
strikes the heel of the ejector, throwing its point suddenly to the right 
in the lug slot. As the bolt moves fully to the rear, the rear face of the 
cartridge case strikes against the ejector point and the case is ejected, 
slightly upward and to the right, from the receiver. 

Double loading from the magazine is prevented by the extractor 
engaging the cartridge case as soon as it rises from the magazine and 
holding its head against the face of the bolt until ejected. 

Fig. 85 It will be noted that in this system of 

bolt mechanism the compression of the main- 
spring, the seating of the cartridge in and the 
starting of the empty case from the chamber 
are entirely done by the action of cams. 

The piece may be cocked either by 
raising the bolt handle until it strikes the left 
side of the receiver and then immediately 
turning it down or by pulling the cocking 
piece directly to the rear. 

In firing, unless the bolt handle is 
turned fully down the cam on the cocking 
piece will strike the cocking cam on the bolt, 
and the energy of the mainspring will be ex- 
pended in closing the bolt, instead of on the 
primer; this prevents the possibility of a car- 
tridge being fired until the bolt is fully 
closed. 

The opening and closing of the bolt should each be done by one 
continuous motion. 

The magazine mechanism includes the floor plate, follower, maga- 
zine spring, and cuf-off. 

Fig. 85 represents a cross section through the ejector with the 
magazine loaded. The parts shown are receiver, A; bolt, B; firing pin, 
C; ejector, D; clip slots, E; bolt locking lug channels, F; magazine, G; 
follower, H; magazine spring, I; and floor plate, J. 

Fig. 86 shows a cross section through the magazine with the maga- 
zine empty, and with cut-off *^on,'' shown in projection. The parts are 
receiver, A; bolt, B; firing pin, C; cut-off, D; rear lug slot, E; bolt lock- 
ing lug channels, F; magazine, G; follower, H; magazine spring, I; and 
floor plate, J. ^ 




—G 



[566] 




637 (conti.) 
To charge the magazine, see that the cut-off is turned up showing 
* * on, ' ' draw the bolt fully to the rear, insert 
the cartridge from a clip, or from the hand, 
and close the bolt. To charge the magazine 
from a clip, place either end of a loaded clip 
in its seat in the receiver and, with the 
thumb of the right hand, press the cart- 
ridges down into the magazine until the top 
cartridge is caught by the right edge of the 
receiver. The manner in which the cart- 
ridges arrange themselves in the magazine 
and the position of the follower and com- 
pressed magazine spring are shown in Fig. 
85. The cartridge ramp guides the bullet 
and cartridge case into the chamber. The 
magazine can be filled, if partly filled, by 
inserting cartridges one by one. 
Pushing the bolt forward, after charging the magazine, ejects 
the clip. 

When the cut-off is turned down, the magazine is ' ' off. ' ' The bolt 
can not be drawn fully back, and its front end projecting over the rear 
end of the upper cartridge holds it down in the magazine below the 
action of the bolt. The magazine mechanism then remains inoperative, 
and the arm can be used as a single loader, the cartridges in the maga- 
zine being held in reserve. The arm can readily be used as a single- 
loader with the magazine empty. 

When the cut-off is turned up, the magazine is *'on; '' the bolt can 
be drawn fully to the rear, permitting the top cartridge to rise high 
enough to be caught by the bolt in its forward movement. As the bolt is 
closed this cartridge is pushed forward into the chamber, being held up 
during its passage by the pressure of those below. The last one in the 
magazine is held up by the follower, the rib on which directs it into 
the chamber. r 

In magazine fire, after the last cartridge has been fired and the bolt 
drawn fully to the rear,^^e follower rises and holds the bolt open to 
show that the magazine is^mpty. 

PKECAUTIONS 

If it is desired to carry the piece cocked, with a cartridge in the 
chamber, the bolt mechanism should be secured by turning the safety 
lock to the right. Under no circumstances should the firing pin be let 
down by hand on a cartridge in the chamber. 

To obtain positive ejection, and to insure the bolt catching the top 
cartridge in magazine, when loading from the magazine, the bolt must 
be drawn fully to the rear in opening it. 

When the bolt is closed, or slightly forward, the cut-off may be 
turned up or down, as desired. When the bolt is in its rearmost position, 
to pass from loading from the magazine to single loading it is necessary 
to force the top cartridge or followed below the reach of the bolt, to 
pi^p'^ the bolt slightly forward and to turn the cut-off down, showing ^off." 

[567] 



637 (contd.) 

In case of a misfire it is unsafe to draw back the bolt immediately, 
as it may be a case of hangfire. In such cases the piece should be 
cocked by drawing back the cocking piece. 

It is essential for the proper working and preservation of all cams 
that they be kept lubricated. 

DISMOUNTING AND ASSEMBLING BY SOLDIER 
The bolt and magazine mechanism can be dismounted without 
removing the stock. The latter should never be done, except for making 
repairs, and then only by some selected and instructed man. 

Fig. 87. 




TO DISMOUNT BOLT MECHANISM 
Place the cutoff at the center notch; cock the arm and turn the 
safety lock to a vertical position, raise the bolt handle and draw out the 
bolt (Fig. 87). 




Fig. 88 



637 (contd.) 

Hold bolt in left hand, press sleeve lock in with thumb of right 
hand to unlock sleeve from bolt, and unscrew sleeve by turning to the 
left (Fig. 88). 

Hold sleeve between forefinger and thumb of the left hand, draw 
cocking piece back with middle finger and thumb of right hand, turn 
Bafety lock down to the left with the forefinger of the right hand, in 
order to allow the cocking piece to move forward in sleeve, thus partially 
relieving the tension of mainspring; with the cocking piece against the 
breast, draw back the firing pin sleeve with the forefinger and thumb of 
right hand and hold it in this position (Fig. 89) while removing the 
. striker with the left hand; remove firing pin sleeve and mainspring; pull 
firing pin out of sleeve; turn the extractor to the right, forcing its tongue 
out of its groove in the front of the bolt, and force the extractor for- 
ward (Fig. 90) and off the bolt. 

Fig. 89. 



STBIKR.^ 




TO ASSEMBLE BOLT MECHANISM 

Grasp with the left hand the rear of the bolt, handle up, and turn 
the extractor collar with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand 
until its lug is on a line with the safety lug on the bolt; take the ex- 
tractor in the right hand and insert the lug on the collar in the under- 
cuts in the extractor by pushing the extractor to the rear until its tongue 
comes in contact with the rim on the face of the bolt (a slight pressure 
with the left thumb on the top of the rear part of the extractor assists 

[569] 



637 (contd.) 



Fig. 90. 




BOLT.' 



in this operation) ; turn the extractor to the right until it is over the right 
lug; take the bolt in the right hand and press the hook of the extractor 
against the butt plate (Fig. 91) or some rigid object, until the tongue on 
the extractor enters its groove in the bolt. 

Fig. 91. 




GROOVE, 



/ 
BOLT. / liAiiiAuiwii./ 

EXTRACTOE COLLAR. SAFETY LUG, 



With the safety lock turned down to the left to permit the firing 
pin to enter the sleeve as far as possible, assemble the sleeve and firing 
pin; place the cocking piece against the breast and put on mainspring 
firing pin sleeve, and striker (See Fig. 91). Hold the cocking pin be- 
tween the thumb and forefinger of the left hand, and by pressing the 
striker point against some substance, not hard enough to injure it, force 
the cocking piece back until the safety lock can be turned to the vertical 
position with the right hand; insert the firing pin in the bolt and screw up 
the sleeve (by turning it to the right) until the sleeve lock enters its 
notch on the bolt. 

See that the cut-off is at the center notch; hold the piece under 
floor plate in the fingers of the left hand, the thumb extending over the 
left side of the receiver; take bolt in right hand with safety lock in a 
vertical position and safety lug up; press rear end of follower down with 
left thumb and push bolt into the receiver; lower bolt handle; turn 
safety lock and cut-off down to the left with right hand. 

[570] 



637 (contd.) 
TO DISMOUNT MAGAZINE MECHANISM 

With the bullet end of a cartridge press on the floor plate catch 
(through the hole in the floor plate), at the same time drawing the bullet 
to the rear; this releases the floor plate. 

Eaise the rear end of the first limb of the magazine spring high 
enough to clear the lug on the floor plate and draw it out of its mortise; 
proceed m the same manner to remove the follower. 

To assemble magazine spring and follower to floor plate, reverse 
operation of dismounting. 

Insert the follower and magazine spring in the magazine, place the 
tenon on the front end of the floor plate in its recess in the magazine, 
then place the lug on the rear end of the floor plate in its slot in the 
guard, and press the rear end of the floor plate forward and inward at 
the same time, forcing the floor plate into its seat in the guard. 



PART III* 

COMPANY FIELD TRAINING 

IN THE ATTACK, THE DEFENSE, THE SEEVICE 
OF SECURITY, THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION, 
NIGHT OPERATIONS, INTRENCHMENTS, OBSTACLES, 
FIELD FIRING, CAMPING, AND INDIVIDUAL COOKING. 



•Part ni is based on "Company Training", by General flaking, 
British Army, whicli is the best book the author has .ever seen on the 
subject of company training. 

[572] 



6S8-6S9 

CHAPTER I 
THE COMPANY IN ATTACK 

THE IMPORTANCE OF THE ATTACK RULES AND PRINCIPLES OF ATTACK PLAN 

FOR ILLUSTRATING THE APPLICATION OF THESE RUIJ:S AND PRINCIPLES 
THE FIV^E STAGES OF THE ATTACK 

638. Importance of the Attack. Decisive results are obtained only 
by the offensive. Aggressiveness wins battles. (Par. 121, Field Service 
Regulations). Indeed, it may be said there is but one way to win 
battles, and that is by attacking, by going after the other fellow with 
hammer and tongs. The defense, the service of security, and the service 
of inforn»ation are important only because, with an efficient commander, 
they are merely means that enable him to bring every possible man in 
the best possible condition, physically and morally, on the field of 
battle at a vital point, and there attack the enemy with a smashing force 
and determination that will drive him from the field in defeat. This 
is really the greatest principle of war, and it applies to squads as well 
as to armies. 

Of course, it is easier to defend, to sit back and wait for develop- 
ments, but, remember, that such tactics never have won, nor ever will 
win battles. 

Let every officer, noncommissioned officer and private become 
imbued with the dominating spirit of attack, realizing that the best 
way to defeat the enemy, is to *'go after'' him, and to do so with your 
whole heart and soul — as if you meant it. Strike hard with the utmost 
speed and force and keep on striking to the limit of human endurance. 

A famous general once said a soldier should know three things: 
First, obedience; second, obedience; third, obedience. This might well 
be changed to, ** First, attack; second, attack; third, attack*** 

RULES AND PRINXIPLES OF ATTACK 

639. Advantages of the Attack. The attackers can choose the point 
of attack, while the defenders must be prepared to resist at all points. 
The fact of advancing in spite of the defenders' fire gives the attackers 
the idea they are succeeding, and on the other hand it gives the defenders 
the idea that the other fellows are getting the better of them. Another 
moral advantage is that the attackers leave their dead and wounded 
behind them as they advance, while the casualities of the defenders 
usually remain in the trenches and the defenders must undergo the de- 
moralizing ordeal of fighting amongst them. 

Superiority of Fire. It is an established fact in modern warfare 
that it is imposible to shoot an enemy out of an entrenched position — 
he must be driven out with the bayonet. Now, there is only one way you 

[573] 



640 

can get near enough to his position to charge it and drive him out, 
and that is by keeping down his fire, which you can do only by gaining 
and maintaining what is called * * Superiority of fire ' \ We, therefore, see 
that '^Superiority of Fire^' is the key to the situation. Eemember, the 
more effective your fire is, the less effective will that of the enemy be. 
640. Do not Open Fire Until it is Absolutely Necessary — that is to 
say, continue to advance without firing as long as you can do so without 
ruinous losses. Eemember, you must husband your ammunition as much 
as possible for the struggle for superiority of fire that is yet to come, 
and remember, too, after the attack begins the chances are you will not 
be able to get any more ammunition that day, except what may be got- 
ten from the dead and wounded, and what is brought by the supports 
when they come up to reenf orce the firing line. It is very demoralizing 
to the enemy to see you continue your advance on him without even 
returning his fire. 

Make every effort by using cover or inconspicuous formations to 
arrive, if you possibly can, to within about 800 yards of the enemy before 
opening fire. 

Direction of Advance. Get the direction in which you are to 
advance well fixed in your mind and, when operating with other com- 
panies, do not change it; for, if you do, you will interfere with the com- 
panies on your right or left. You may be tempted to change the direction 
of your advance so as to take advantage of a more covered approach, 
but, with other companies on your right and left, this will result in 
confusion. 

Deplojrment. Do not deploy until it is necessary to do so. If 
the cover will enable y^u to do so, do not deploy until you get within 
effective rifle range of the enemy. Deployed troops are unwieldy and 
difficult to handle as compaied with those in close order. 

Who Indicates the Point or Time for Opening Fire. The major 
should indicate the point or time for opening fire. He may do this in 
his order for deployment or he may follow the firing line close enough 
to give the order at the proper time. If it be impracticable for him 
to do so, the senior officer of the battalion with the firing line selects 
the time for opening fire. 

Assignment of the Objective. At the beginning of the attack the 
major assigns the objective. Unless a particular target has been assigned 
the company, it takes as its target that part of the general objective 
which lies in its front. 

Protection of Flanks. Flanks must always be protected, and 
their protection is the duty of the commanders of all flank units down 
to the lowest, whether specifically enjoined in orders or not. » 

Close with the Enemy as soon as Possible; the longer you 
delay doing so, the longer will you be under his fire and consequently the 
greater will be your casualties. 



641-642 

641. Size of the Fractions that Hush. In the rushes, make the ad- 
vanciDg fractions as large as the hostile fire and the necessity for main- 
taining superiority of fire, will permit. Kemember, the smaller the rush- 
ing fractions are, the slower will the advance be — the longer will you 
be exposed to the enemy ^s fire and consequently the greater will your 
casualties be. The size of the rushing fraction will, of course, depend 
upon the cover available, the volume and accuracy of the hostile fire and 
other circumstances. It may sometimes be advisable to begin the rushes 
with a company and then change to half a ccmpauy or platoon, and finally 
to a squad or file. No opportunity should be lost to increase the size of 
the rushing fraction. 

642. Rushes to be Made Under Covering Fire. Every rush m^ust be 
made under the covering fire of the adjoining fraction or fractions. As 
a fraction is about to rush forward the adjoining fraction or fractions 
must increase the rate of fire; for, when the enemy sees a fraction rushing 
forward he will very likely increase his fire, and we must keep it down as 
much as possible. 

The commander of the fraction that is about to rush should not 
start until the remainder of the line is delivering a vigorous fire, and if 
necessary, he should, in case of delay, call out to the commanders of the 
adjoining fraction or fractions to increase their fire. 

Length of Rushes. The length of the rush generally varies from 
30 to SO yards, depending upon the existence of cover, positions for firing, 
and the volume and accuracy of the hostile fire. 

Companies to be Kept Closed on Their Centers. In order to facili- 
tate control by the company commander, also to provide intervals on the 
firing line in which reenforcements may be placed, the company must be 
kept closed in on its center as it becomes depleted by casualties; for, 
squads and other units coming up from the support should take their 
place on the firing line in their entirety and should not be divided up 
and mingled with the individuals of the line. 

Fixing Bayonets for the Assault. The major or senior officer in 
the firing line decides when bayonets shall be fixed, and gives the proper 
order or signal, which is repeated by all parts of the firing line. Bayonets 
are generally fixed before or during the last, or second last advance pre- 
ceding the charge. 

The Charge. The firing line having reached the position from 
which the charge is to be made, the major causes the ** Charge" to be 
sounded, and the signal is repeated by all the musicians. The company 
officers lead the charge, and the skirmishers spring forward shouting, 
running with bayonets at charge, and closing with the enemy. 

The support fixes bayonets when the firing line does. 

After the Charge. The conduct of the charging troops after the 
charge will depend upon circumstances; they may halt and engage in 

[575] 



643 

bayonet combat or in pursuing fire; they may advance a short distance 
to obtain a field of fire, or to drive the enemy from the vicinity; they may 
assemble, or they may reorganize to repel a counter-attack by the enemy. 

Plan for Illustrating the Application of the Rules and Principles of 
Attack. The application of the rules and principles of attack will be 
shown by taking the company through the following types of attack, 
which constantly occur in war: 

1st. The company forming a part of a larger force that is attack- 
ing an enemy occupying a defensive position, the attacking force being 
compelled to advance for a considerable distance exposed only to hostile 
artillery fire, and subsequently to both artillery and infantry fire before 
the assault can be delivered. This is what may be called the stereotyped 
form of attack. 

2nd. Same as above, excepting that the company is exposed to 
both artillery and infantry fire from the beginning. (^^ Meeting en- 
gagement''.) 

3rd. The advance guard attack. 

4th. The company, originally on the defense, goes out and attacks 
a force that has been attacking it. 

643. The Five Stages of the Attack. The following diagram shows 
the ^ve stages of the stereotyped form of attack. This simple outline 
of attack should be well fixed in the mind of every man in the company: — 



[576] 



643 (contd.) 



FIRST STAGE 
(advance of the company under artillery fire, but not 
yet near enough to the enemy to be subjected to his infantry 
fire). 

Leading FeaPiires: 
Formations to be adopted; use of cover; pace in advancing; 
selection of halting-places; artillery action. 

SECOND STAGE 

(advance of THE COMPANY UNDER BOTH ARTILLERY AND LONG- 
RANGE INFANTRY FIRE). 

Leading Features: 
The selection of fire-positions; the use of covering fire. 

THIRD STAGE 

(struggle for superiority of fire). 

Leading Features: 
Fire direction; fire control; fire discipline. 

FOURTH STAGE 

(advance after superiority of fire has been GAINED TO A 
POSITION CLOSE ENOUGH TO CHARGE THE ENEMY). 

Leading Features: 
Maintenance of superiority of fire; rapid advance. 

FIFl-tl STAGE 

(the charge). 

Leading Features: 
A vigorous, simultaneous rush with a heavy line. 



When does one stage of the attack end and the other begin? 

Ot course, the lines of demarcation betvreen the different stages 
of the attack are not sharp and well-defined, like the lines on a tennis- 
court, for instance, but the different stages gradually blend into one an- 
other. However, each stage has its own characteristics, its own "ear 
marks", and there v^ll be no trouble in recognizing them. 

For Example — 

First Stage, As long as we are subjected to only artillery fire we 
are in the first stage. 

[577] 



643 (contd.) 

Second Stage* When the first rifle bullets begin to whiz through 
the air, we then know the first stage is ending and the second commencing. 

Third Stage* When we commence to see that, because of the 
enemy's infantry fire, we are beginning to advance more slowly, we then 
know that the second stage is ending and the third is beginning. And 
when we find that it is impossible to advance any further unless we 
can reduce the enemy's infantry fire, we know that the third stage has 
been reached, and that the struggle for superiority of fire is on. 

Fourth Stage. When the enemy's infantry fire begins to subside 
and we find that we are able to resume the advance, we then know that 
we are gaining superiority of fire — that is to say, the fourth stage has 
been reached, and we must now advance to a fire position close enough 
to the enemy to enable us to charge from it. 

Fifth Stage, The charge. 



[5783 



644 
CHAPTER II 

THE COMPANY IN ATTACK 

THE FIRST STAGE OF THE ATTACK 

THE ADVANCE OF THE COMPANY UNDER HOSTILE ARTILLERY FIRE, BUT NOT YET 
NEAR ENOUGH TO THE ENEMY TO BE SUBJECTED TO HIS INFANTRY FIRE 

644. The Situation. Let us suppose the company is assembled un- 
der cover of some hill or wood from four to five thousand yards from the 
enemy ^s position, which we are going to attack and that as soon as the 
company leaves this cover and begins to advance, it will be fired upon 
by the hostile artillery, but not by the infantry. Let us suppose, fur- 
ther, that we are taking part in a big battle, and consequently have other 
companies on our right and left and also supports and reserves in rear. 

Importance of the Attack. Impress upon the company the im- 
portance of the attack, (see Par. 638.) 

The Object of this Stage of the Attack. What are we trying 
to do when the company commences the attack? We are going to try 
to smash the enemy — to attack him so quickly and vigorously that we 
will drive him from his position in confusion and disorder. The enemy 
is entrenched, and experience has shown that you canH shoot an 
enemy out of trenches — you've got to get close in on him and drive him 
out with the bayonet, but before we can do this we will have a long way 
to go. In the beginning of our advance, which we will call the first- 
stage of the attack, we will probably be subjected only to artillery fire, 
and will be too far awa^^ to use our rifles with effect. Our immediate ob- 
ject then, is to get over ground in our immediate front as rapidly as pos- 
sible and without losing any more men than we can help. 

Before the company goes into an action always tell the men: 

1st. The point of attack. 

2nd. The general situation — whether there are any of our troops 
to the front, on our -flank or rear. 

3rd. What part the company is to take in the fight — whether 
to form part of the firing line, the support or the reserve.. 

If the men know these things, they will be able to act more in- 
telligently, especially in case of confusion on separation from the rest 
of the company. 

HOW TO ACCOMPLISH OUR OBJECT 

The Pace. We will suppose that there are large patches of open 
ground in front of us, which the enemy can see from his position, and 
which he can fire upon effectively with his artillery. We can not avoid 
these open patches, because we are taking part in an extensive attack, 
with other companies on our right and left, and if each company changed 

[579] 



644 (contd.) 

its original direction of advance and sought a more covered approach, con 
fusion and disorder v/ould result. 

Let us consider the ground. Some of it will be open and exposed 
to the enemy's artillery fire, and some of it will be hidden from his view 
and merely exposed to badly-aimed artillery fire, or what is called ^ * search- 
ing fire'', but which is rarely effective. The result is that during this 
stage of the attack the company will be advancing a part of the time over 
open and exposed ground and a part of the time over ground that is hidden 
from the enemy's view and fire. Of course, we want to advance as rapidly 
as possible; for, apart from the advantage of rapidity and vigor in the 
attack, which alarms the enemy almost as much as our bullets and shells, 
the less time it takes us to cover the ground in front of us, the less time 
will we be under the enemy's fire. But there are two things that will 
hinder the rapidity of our advance: first, we must not exhaust the men 
at this early stage of the fight by too rapid an advance, because if we 
do they will not be in fhe best condition to continue the fight when they 
are close enough to the enemy to use their rifles. Secondly, the enemy's 
artillery is apt to stop us, because if, when we are crossing an exposed 
area the sky above us suddenly becomes full of bursting shells, it is 
the natural inclination of the ordinary hum.an being to lie down and 
wait until the fire slackens. This means loss of tim.e, and it is also just 
what the enemy's gunners want, as it gives them a stationary target to 
shoot at. As we all know, it is much easier, especially with artillery, 
to shoot at a stationary target than at a moving one. We, therefore, 
seCvthat the company must — 

1st. Halt occasionally to rest the men, and select, when possible, 
halting places which are not exposed to the enemy's artillery fire. 

2nd. Advance as rapidly as possible over places that are exposed 
to fire, and resist the temptation to lie down, if suddenly it comes under a 
burst of artillery fire. 

From this it follows that the company must move at a run over 
exposed ground, and walk or halt, if necessary, in order to rest the men 
when reaching covered ground. 

Use of tlie Weapon. As we are at this stage of the attack too far 
away from the enemy's position to use our rifles with effect, to do any 
firing now would merely mean a waste of ammunition, every round of 
which, as you will see, we will need later on. 

Formations. "We must select a formation which is the most diffi- 
cult for the enemy's artillery to hit, and which at the same time will 
permit the immediate use of tie rifle, should the situation change and the 
enemy suddenly appear within rifle range. 

Our Drill Regulations describe the three following formations, any 
one of which, depending upon circumstances, may be used during this 
stage of the attack: — 

[580J 



645 

1. Platoon Columns (see Pars. 221-226), wLich are used when, 
due either to difficult ground or limited cover, there are only a few favor- 
able routes of advance; no two platoons should march within the burst of 
a single sharpnel (ordinarily about 20 yards wide). Aside from the ad- 
vantage of enabling the whole company to use the few favorable routes, 
this formation also enables the captain to maintain control over the 
.'onipany. 

2. Squad Coluians (see Pars. 221, 223, 225, 226), which are of 
value principally in facilitating the advance over rough or brush-broken 
ground. They afford no material advantage in securing cover: While 
the captain's control over the company in squad columns is somewhat less 
than in platoon column, still it is greater than when the company is 
deployed as skirmishers. 

3. A succession of thin lines, (see Par. 227), which is used in 
crossing a wide stretch swept by artillery fire, or by a heavy, long-range 
rifle fire which can not be profitably returned. This method results in 
a serious (though temporary) loss of control over the company. It also 
takes up time. Its advantage lies in the fact that it offers a less definite 
target. 

The two disadvantages of the skirmish line (see Par. 215) are — 

1st. It offers to the hostile artillery a target that is a continuous, 
straight line, and consequently simplifies the question of range. 

2nd. It results in a loss of control over the company. It should 
not, therefore, as a rule, be used until we are ready or about ready to 
open fire. 

645. The Hostile Artillery. This, the first stage of attack, may be 
called the "Artillery Stage''. Infantrymen should remember that the 
effect of artillery fire is moral rather than physical. Comparatively few 
of the casualties in a battle are caused by the artillery — the man who is 
really to be feared is the "dough boy" — he's the one who does the 
deadly work. 

A shell contains just enough powder to burst the case and not 
sufficient to send the bullets flying in all directions with a velocity suffi- 
cient to damage seriously any one standing at a distance. 

The velocity of the bullets in the shell depends upon the rate the 
shell is flying through the air at the moment it explodes, and the bullets 
soon lose their velocity. Should a shell, for instance, burst 200 yards in 
front of a soldier and one of the bullets should hit him, it would do him 
no serious injury, because it has not sufficient velocity left to penetrate 
his clothes and skin. A soldier is, therefore, practically safe 200 yards 
away from a shell that bursts directly in front of him. We see from this 
that a shell that bursts on the ground produces little or no damage — the 
shell muRt not only burst in the air, but it must burst in just exactly the 
right plnro. This is accomplished by putting a time-fuse in the shell. A 

[581] 



646 

mistake of only one second in the cutting of tlie time fuse will, at 3500 
yards, make a difference of about 120 yards. The rate that the shell 
travels is affected materially by the density of the air. It usually takes 
an artilleryman from five to ten minutes to find the range — so, we need 
expect no serious damage, except from a chance shot, for five or ten 
minutes after the artillery opens up on us, unless, of course, the gunners 
have gotten the range before hand. 

Localities to be Avoided. The enemy's artillery generally picks 
out certain localities where it appears likely a target will appear, and as- 
certains the range and determines the proper fuse cutting beforehand, so 
that they can open at once a heavy and eff'ective fire on any troops that 
may appear in those localities. Clumps of trees, edges of woods, exits 
from defiles, and approaches to bridges, are amongst the most common of 
such localities. Any object that is fairly isolated and stands up well, 
such as a building, a hay stack, etc., is an execellent object for the 
artiller}^ to range upon, and if they have not ascertained the range and 
cut the fuse beforehand, they can do so very rapidly with such range 
marks. Such localities should, therefore, be avoided, if possible, but if, 
as is usually the case, this is out of the question, then they should be 
passed as rapidly as possible. 

646. Our Artillery. Of course, during this stage of the attack our own 
artillery is helping us to advance by keeping down the hostile artillery 
as much as possible. Our artillery has these advantages over the hostile 
artillery: — 

1st. It has only one target (the hostile artillery) to fire at, while 
the hostile artillery has two (our artillery and our advancing infantry). 

2nd. Our artillery has a stationary target, while the hostile artil- 
lery has a moving target. 

3rd. Our artillery can disperse their guns and concentrate their 
fire much more than the enemy, since the latter are tied down to practi- 
cally the position selected for defense, whereas we have the whole country 
to the front and flanks in which we can place our guns. 

Conclusion. We, therefore, see that during this stage of the at- 
tack we are opposed only by the hostile artillery, over which, gun for 
gun, our own artillery possesses certain advantages, and consequently the 
enemy's artillery will probably be kept pretty busy looking after the 
attacking artillery. 

Our object must be to cross any area exposed to the enemy's artil- 
lery as rapidly as possible, halting in places that afford cover, and taking 
advantage of any temporary cessation of artillery fire to rush over ex- 
ceptionally exposed ground, thus avoiding a number of casualties, and 
thereby adding to the confidence of our men, whom we shall keep fresh, 
and thus bring them up to the second stage of the attack in excellent 
condition for the decisive fighting which is now approaching. 

[582] 



647-648 

CHAPTER III 

THE COMPANY IN ATTACK 
THE SECOND STAQE OF THE ATTACK 

THE ADVANCE OF THE COMPANY UNDER ARTILLERY AND LONG-RANGE INFANTRY 

FIRE 

647. Beginning of the Stage. The beginning of the second stage of the 
attack is marked by the sound of the enemy's rifle bullets and the desire 
of our own men to return the fire. 

648. Ammunition. However, everything possible must be done to have 
the company advance as far as we can without returning the enemy's 
fire; for, our fire would at this range be ineffective and would merely 
be a waste of ammunition, every round of which we will, as you will see, 
need later on. One of the few advantages of the defense is that the 
trenches can be filled with ammunition before the fight begins, or ammuni- 
tion in unlimited quantity can be brought up during the battle. The 
defense can, therefore, afford to waste a certain amount of ammunition in 
long-range firing, but it is quite different with us whose ammunition supply 
is practically limited to what we have taken into the fight on our persons^. 
However, we have a compensating moral advantage of the enemy's seeing 
that his fire is so ineffective that we do not even condescend to return it, 
and that we are coming right after him. Another moral advantage the 
attacker has over the defender, is that it's much more trying to remain 
in one place while the other fellow is hitting than it is to be hitting. 
This is human nature. As the fight progresses the company commander 
must keep himself informed as to the condition of the supply of ammuni- 
tion. ** Company commanders are responsible that the belts of the men 
in their companies are kept filled at all times, except when- the ammuni- 
tion is being expended in action. In the fire line the ammunition of the 
dead and wounded should be secured whenever practicable." (Par. 550, 
Infantry Drill Eegulations). 

"Ammunition in the bandoleers will ordinarily be expended first. 
Thirty rounds in the right pocket section of the belt will be held as a 
reserve, to be expended only when ordered by an offlcer'\ (Par. 551, Infan- 
try Drill Regulations.) 

^^jMen will never be sent back from the firing line for ammunition. 
Men sent forward with ammunition remain with the firing line". (Par. 
552, Infantry Drill Regulations.) 

According to the Field Service Regulations leach man armed with 
a rifle carries 220 rounds of ammunition into battle — 100 rounds in his 
belt and two bandoleers containing 60 rounds each. The bandoleers are 
distributed from the battalion combat wagon just before the troops go 
into action. 

[583] 



649 

Deploj^ment. The first sound of the enemy ^s bullets will be our 
signal to deploy as sldrmishers; for, we cannot afford to advance within 
zone of effective rifle fire in any column formation, lest a single shot 
might put two or more men out of business. 

Object of this Stage of the Attack. The object of this stage of 
the attack is to advance with the loss of as few men as possible to a 
fire position close enough to the enemy to enable us to use our rifles with 
such accuracy that we will be able to gain superiority of fire, which may 
be said to be three-fourths of the battle. 

How to Accomplish our Object. We will, in general terms, ac 
complish our object by endeavoring to find resting-places under cover after 
long rushes to enable the men to regain their breath, by finding fire-po- 
sitions from which an effective fire can be delivered, and by advancing 
as rapidly as is consistent with safety, without exhausting the energies 
of our men. 

649. The Use and Selection of Fire-Positions. It does not follow we 
should stop and fire from any good fire-position that happens to be in 
front of us. The distance between fire-positions should be as great 
as possible without exhausting^ the men in rushing over the distance. 
The more fire-positions we occupy the longer will it take us to advance, 
and the more will we be subjected to the enemy's fire. And again, if 
an estimate could be made of the comparative casualties, it would 
probably be found that more men are killed and wounded while halted 
in fire-positions than while rushing from fire-position to fire-position. It 
is, therefore, very important that our platoon and squad leaders should 
be well trained in the selection and use of fire-positions. Whenever 
practicable the sights should be adjusted and the magazines filled before 
coming up to a fire-position, so that fire may be oj^ened at once. For 
instance, if the company, platoon or squad were about to emerge from a 
wood or other cover, and the next fire-position were known, the sights 
should be adjusted and the magazines filled before leaving cover. 

Good Fire-Positions. Whether or not a location is a good fire 
position depends on whether it affords cover, and at the same time 
enables one to see the enemy, and depends, therefore, entirely upon 
the small features of the ground and any artificial cover that may be 
encountered. For example, a position just behind the crest of a hill, 
behind a bank of any kind, or a fold in the ground, from which th^ 
enemy can be seen, is a good fire-position. 

A bank running along a road is a good fire-position, but it has 
the disadvantage, because of the road itself, of being a pretty good mark 
for the enemy's fire. If there is a bank and ditch on both sides of the 
road, it is better to occupy the position on the far side; for, the hostile 
infantry will (louhilps.^ly fire at the road and bullets striking its hard 
gurfjice will ricoclint, wliilo tlioso Btrik'ntg in front of thn far l)ank will 
disappear. 



649 (contd.) 

BvLshea and Undergrowth that have no clearly defined border that 
makes them an easy target, are good fire-positions. While it is true they 
do not afford protection for fire, they conceal the attackers. If the 
bushes are on the side of a hill, they then make better fire-positions, as 
the men can then see over the bushes better without being themselves 
exposed. 

Bad Fire-Po3itions. The following are bad fire-positions: — 
Hedges without Cover from Fire. A hedge without cover from 
fire is a bad fire-position, not only because it affords a good target for 
both the hostile artillery and infantry, but also because it is not always 
an easy position to advance out of. A hedge, however, could be used to 
advantage if the ground in the rear rises slightly, or if the enemy's 
position is on high ground in front, in which case the men lying down 
a short distance in rear on the open ground, could see over the top 
of the hedge, but themselves be hidden from view. 

Villages f farms, cottages, etc. As a rule any kind of a building or 
inclosure, such as a village, farm, or cottage, is a bad fire-position in 
the attack. They are easy to get into, but hard to get out of; they are 
often subjected to artillery fire, and the casualities are much heavier 
than out in the open. 

Quarries and gravel pits, although possibly affording a good fire- 
position for a few men, are generally disastrous when occupied by a 
large number. While it is usually easy to. jump down into such places 
and get temporary shelter, it is very difficult to climb out and continue 
the attack. When such a place is encountered, the best thing to do is 
for the squad or platoon that strikes it to occupy a fire-position behind 
it, and thus provide covering fire for the forward movement of the other 
units on the right and left of it. 

Fire-positions that are not approximately parallel to the front of 
the attack are a source of trouble that often leads to a loss of direction. 
Such positions are generally to be found in the form of a bank, a he<5ge, 
ridge, or the border of a ,wood. If such a position is recognized before 
actual occupation, company and platoon commanders must take special 
steps to avoid the mistakes that arc likely to occur. To begin with, the 
true direction of the attack should be carefully noted, and steps taken to 
maintain it. It is impossible to give a fixed rule for the handling of all 
positions that are not parallel to the front of the attack. However, the 
following principles are general in their application, and together with 
the examples given, should assist one materially in handling other cases 
of the same general nature: 

First Principle. Every effort must be made to prevent (he occu- 
pation of a position that is cvfiJaded by the cnennj. 'Hie roMsoji for this 
is self evident. 

[515] 



6^9 (contd.) 

Second Principle. If necessary to occupy a fire-position that is 
not practically parallel to the front of the attack, occupy first that part 
which is nearest to the enemy. The reason for this is that if the farther 
portion is occupied first, there will be a natural tendency on the part 
of the attack to pass the remainder of the portion and come up in line 
with the leading platoon or squad, whereas, if the nearest portion is 
occupied first, it is practically certain that the men who are holding 
it will stay there until other troops come up on their outer flank; and 
these troops, with equal certainty, will conform to the fire position al- 
ready established, and thus throw out the direction of the attack. 

Third Principle. If the part of the fire-position nearest the enemy 
has been occupied, do not occupy the remainder at all; or, if human nature 
is too strong to prevent this, then occupy it for as short a time as possible. 

Example 1. An open ridge or undulation of ground that runs 
diagonally left to right from our front, towards the enemy's position and 
falls gradually to the ordinary level some six hundred yards from that 
position. 

Let us suppose that the ridge lies in front of an entire battalion. 



E JM t>\ y 



^ r^i & Ni y ' 






/ f.-J 









i^\ 






; : t : 

^ t '__t 

AT 7 ACK EK.S 



ATT ACKfcRS 



.WHAT Wt 5H0ULD NOJ DO.- "WHAT Wt. 5H0ULI> DO 

~ Fig. 1. 
(Fig. 1.) The company on the right, advancing ahead of the 
others, would go right over the end of the ridge nearest the enemy and 
occupy a fire-position beyond, parallel to the front of the attack. The 
company on the left of the first would do the same upon reaching the 
ridge, taking its position on the left of, and on line with, the right 
company. The remaining companies would follow suit in succession, 

[586] 

; 



649 (contd.) 

holding back until the ground beyond the ridge, on their right, had been 
gained. 

Failing this, each company would act as if it were the right com- 
pany, except that platoons instead of companies would be used, the right 
platoon of each company pushing over the top of the ridge, and occupy- 
ing beyond a position parallel to the front of the attack, the remaining 
platoons following suit and lining up on the left of the leading platoon. 

Example 2. A V-shaped fire-position, with the point toward the 
enemy, such as a low, semicircle ridge with the circumference towards the 
enemy. (Fig. 2.) The effect of such a feature of the ground is the same 
as in. the preceding case, except that the difficulties are greatly increased. 









JL 



ATTACKERS 



.^^^^ 






J L 






JL 



ATTACKER5 



WHAT Wt 5nOULD KOT DO, YTHAT Y[t SHOULD DO 

Fig. 2. 

If the troops occupy such ^ position, they will be sure, upon leaving the 
position, to find themselves advancing in divergent direction. A case 
like this should, if possible, be treated in the same manner as the 
preceding example, the portion nearest the enemy being occupied first. 

Example 3. A bank along a road that runs diagonally across the 
front of attack. Should be treated the same as Example 1. 

Pace of Advance. The advance from one fire-position to 
another is usually made by rushes, but when this method becomes imprac- 
ticable, any method of advance that brir^gs the attacker closer to the 
enemy, such as crawling, should be employed. The length of the rushes 

[587] 



649a 

depends on two things: 1st, the human element, which can only be ascer- 
tained by the unit commanders. on the spot; 2nd, the nature of the ground 
and the distance to the next firing-position. The most important details 
to be looked after are that the men rise together, dash forward without 
any straggling, and, upon halting, form a fairly straight and orderly fir- 
ing line. If the enemy is on the look out for rushes, and the chances are 
he will be, he will open fire, or increase his fire^ just as soon as a unit 
rushes forward, or as soon as he sees that it is preparing to rush. It is, 
therefore, important that the adjoining unit or units should begin to de 
liver a covering fire just before the rush begins. Impress upon every 
man that the devil, in the form of a bullet, is likely to catch the men 
w*ho fall behind. Promptness in rushing is greatly a matter of drill in 
time of peace, and, if properly instilled, will become a habit that will 
greatly assist the attack in war. 

649a. IVIixilig of Units. If the attack is made over broken ground, 
with undulations and confusing ridges and mounds, it will be found that 
the advancing units will get pretty badly mixed up as we get nearer to 
the enemy's position, and consequently fire-control and leadership will 
become difficult. And, again, we must not make the mistake of closing 
our eyes to human nature in battle and imagine that every one is going to 
do just exactly what he is told to do, and do it at once. However, platooii 
commanders and squad leaders should do everything in their power to 
delay confusion as long as possible, and then, when it does come, exert 
every effort to reduce it to a minimum. Impress upon the men the vital 
importance of obeying the commands of any platoon commander or squad 
leader, in whose unit they may happen to find themselves in case of con- 
fusion. 

Importance of Pushing Forward. Whenever a company or platoon 
reaches covered ground and has halted to reform or take breath, it is of 
vital importance, for two ^reasons, that a fire-position should be occupied 
to the front at the earliest possible moment. First, it is impossible to 
say when the enemy may decide to attack and himself suddenly occupy 
a fire-position in our immediate front — the one that we might have oc- 
cupied ourselves — and thus bring the attack in that locality to a stand- 
still; secondly, other units may be advancing over open ground on our 
right and left, and it will be of great assistance to them to find that a 
fire-position to their front has been occupied by us, — it will encourage 
them to pass forward. 

It can be laid down as a general rule in the attack that when 
any part of the line reaches cover, such as a wood, for instance, a part of 
the line should pass on and occupy a fire-position at the far end. How- 
ever, care must be taken not to press so far to the front as to become 
completely isolated, and run the risk of being shot into by your own men, 
or cut off by the enemy. 



650 

Use of Company Scouts. Cases constantly occur when platoon 
conmianders and squad leaders must make rushes to the front without 
being abje to see the ground which they will have to traverse, and, 
as a result^ at the end of the rush they may find themselves in a very 
bad position. A case of this kind may occur when a fire-position is oc- 
cupied just behind a crest from which the enemy ^s position can be seen, 
but when the ground immediately in front is covered by the top of the 
liill occupied by the attacker. It sometimes happens that the defense 
places an obstacle of some kind, under elfective artillery and infantry 
fire, on the defenders' side of a ridge or hill, and which the attacker 
rushing over this ridge would not see until he was right upon it. A com- 
pany scout sent on ahead would give warning of such an obstacle. It 
also sometimes happens that the unit rushes too far over a crest and 
occupies a fire-position that is exposed unnecessarily. There is no doubt 
that in cases of this land, it is well to send scouts forward to select the 
best positions, lie down in them, and wait until the line advances. Natur- 
ally enough, in open country and in cases where the advance of a scout 
would mask the fire of part of the company, this plan would be imprac- 
ticable. 

Guarding the Flanks. Special attention is invited to the import- 
ance of the flank companies guarding their flanks, especially in closed 
country. Arrangements must be made to keep in communication with 
these flank guards, and also to see that they do not get too far ahead of 
the line. In a big fight our cavalry will be operating on our flanks, but 
they will probably be a considerable distance away, and the flanking 
companies must, therefore, provide for local protection. 

Supports. According to our Drill Regulations a company act- 
ing alone may have a support, but if acting as part of a battalion, it has 
no support of its own. One or more companies of the battalion form the 
support for the battalion. The movements of the support as a whole and 
the dispatch of reenforcements from it to the firing line are controlled 
by the msLJox- If at any time during the advance a company commander 
sees that his company has been so depleted that it can advance no farther, 
he should ask for support. 

650. Obstacles. We will now consider the obstacles that are likely 
to be met during this stage of the attack, and the best means of passing 
them. These obstacles may be divided into three general classes. 
1. Those in which the attacker is exposed to the enemy's 
view and fire when he is approaching the obstacle, while get- 
ting across it, and while emerging from it on the far side, 
A stream in the open is an example of this class, and to pass 
such an obstacle, which is exposed to the enemy's fire throughout, it is 
first necessary to obtain fire superiority, if only temporarily, which means 
that a heavy infantry firing line must be deployed in a good fire position 

[589] 



650 (contd.) 

in rear of the obstacle. If possible, an artillery support should assist in 
subduing the hostile infantry fire. Of course, the fire-position should be 
so chosen that the field of fire will not be masked in part or in whole, 
by the men when approaching or crossing the obstacle, or when deploying 
beyond. If it be not possible to select such a fire-position, the situation 
becomes most difficult, and a second tier of fire will have to be formed 
in rear of that immediately behind the obstacle, and, if possible, machine 
guns should be used extensively to assist in gaining and maintaining su- 
periority of fire. The best formation to be used while actually crossing, de- 
pends upon the nature of the obstacle. In case of a shallow stream, for 
instance, which is easily f ordable at all points, the squads or platoons 
could be sent across in line of sldrmishers. On the other hand, if the 
passage were limited to a bridge across the stream, the command should 
be rushed across by successive squads or platoons, in column of files, or in 
column of twos, with increased intervals and distances between the men. 
It is most important that a firing line be established on the far 
side of the obstacle at the earliest moment possible. Consequently, the 
leading squad or platoon should deploy immediately upon clearing the 
obstacle, and occupy a firing position well to the front. If it be not 
practicable to occupy a position well to the front at once, then a second 
advance should be made as soon as possible so as to reduce the distance 
the succeeding squads or platoons will ha-fe to run with their flanks to the 
enemy. The leading squad or platoon should be careful not to spread 
out more than is necessary; for, the more it spreads out the greater dis- 
tance will the succeeding units have to run before getting on the line, 
to the right and left of the preceding squads. It must be distinctly 
understood beforehand which units are to go to the right and which to 
the left. If the crossing is being *made by squads, the company com- 
m^ander may, for instance, direct that the second squad go to the right 
of the leading squad, the third squad to the left, tlie fourth squad to the 
right, the fifth to the left, etc. And again, the ground just beyond the 
obstacle might be such that it would be better for the first .squad across 
to incline to the right (or left) upon reaching the far end of the obstacle, 
and the remaining squads form on its left (or right). 

Of course, the thing to do in every case is to pass around the ob- 
stacle, if possible. This may often be done in ease of small obstacles 
(those taking up only forty or fifty yards of front), but as a rule it is 
not possible to avoid the large ones. 

Q. The second class of obstacles is those in which the attacker 
is protected from the enemy's view and fire while approaching 
the obstacle, but is partly exposed to fire when passing through 
it, and may be subjected to heavy fire when emerging from the 
obstacle, 

[590] 



650 (contd.) 

A stream with trees and bushes, or a thin wood along its banks 
might be an example of this class of obstacles. The far edge of either 
of these makes an excellent mark for the enemy ^s artillery as well as for 
his infantry; 

It is a great mistake for a company to blunder into an obstacle 
without having had a reconnaissance made. The first thing to do then, 
is to send out a reconnoitering patrol in charge of an officer or noncom- 
missioned officer, to ascertain whether the obstacle, or the ground just 
beyond, is occupied by the enemy; also, to get information regarding the 
best way through or over the obstacle, and whether there is a good posi- 
tion in which the line can deploy and form preparatory to continuing 
the attack. Great care must be taken to see that the company does not 
come under a heavy fire near the far edge in unsuitable formation, and 
we must also see that the company is not exposed unnecessarily to the 
enemy's fire before everything is ready for an immediate advance. 

3. Those obstacles in which the attacker is protected from 

the enemy^s view and fire in approaching and crossing the ob- 
stacle, but may be subjected to a heavy fire when emerging 

from it, 

A thick wood is an example of an obstacle of this class. The fol- 
lowing points should be borne in mind: — 

Be careful not to lose your direction; connect with the companies 
on your right and left, and maintain the general alignment. 

Take every possible precaution to prevent the enemy from learn- 
ing that you have reached the obstacle, and especially that you are about 
to emerge on the far side. If he knows this, he will more than probably 
be waiting for you and will greet you with a heavy, well-directed fire 
just as soon as you appear on his side of the obstacle. 

Do not mistake any of your own troops for the enemy. 

Before reaching the far side of the obstacle ascertain by means of 
scouts or patrols whether it will be exposed to fire; also, if possible, locate 
a fire-position 50 or 100 yards beyond the obstacle. 

Arrange to rush out of the obstacle with as much of the company 
as can be conveniently handled at one time. Do not emerge in driblets, 
and don't make the common mistake of forming a firing line along the 
edge of the wood, thus occupying a well-defined line that stands out as 
an excellent mark for the enemy's fire. 

Cornfields, It is thought the best way of crossing a cornfield, 
is by a series of rushes in squad columns, or some other column of files. 
A line of skirmishers in a field of high corn is difficult to control; and, 
furthermore such a formation is conducive to skulking, men on the ground 
failing to rise and advance at the command and remaining undiscovered. 

Marshes, If impossible to go around wet, marshy ground, there 
is but one thing to do. Gp right through it, lying down in the mud and 

[591] 



650a 

water when ordered, and rising and advancing when the command is 
given. The formations to be adopted in crossing a marsh would be de- 
termined by the same general principles tluit applyin getting over level 
dry ground^ with such modifications as might be made necessary by 
deep poolS; difficult mud holes, etc. The main point to impress upon the 
men is that they must not be afraid of mud and water — they are much 
less dangerous than bullets. 

650a End of Stage. The culminating point of this stage of the attack 
is the establishment of a fire position close enough to the enemy to enable 
us to gain superiority of fire, and by ^ ' superiority of fire ' ' we mean that 
our fire must be so accurate, heavy and deadly that most of the enemy 
will be keeping their heads under cover, and, consequently we will be 
able to advance right up to them without a good part of the company 
getting put out of business. 

How near must this fire-position be to the enemy? 

The distance of this fire-position from the enemy will depend upon 
the effectiveness of the enemy's fire and nature of the ground in front of 
his position, which will determine the cover afforded the attack, the avail- 
ability of fire-positions and the field of view afforded the enemy. Of 
course, we will want to get as close as possible to the enemy before be- 
ginning the final struggle for fire-superiority — the closer the better. If- 
the ground to the front of the enemy is open, his fire and field of fire are 
good, and the attackers' fire-positions are poor, it will probably be im- 
possible to get any nearer than 800 yards or more without first gaining 
superiority of fire. On the other hand, if the ground in front of the enemy 
is broken, and affords cover and fire-positions to the attacker, it may be 
possible to get as near as one or two hundred yards before beginning the 
final struggle for fire superiority. Eemember, we must husband our energy 
and our ammunition for this struggle for fire superiority. 



[592] 



651 

CHAPTER IV 

THE COMPANY IN ATTACK 
THE THIRD STAGE OF THE ATTACK 

•THE STTtTTfiaiJ: FoR .SUrERTORiTv Ofr' FIRE OVER THE ENEftlY 

651. Situation. We have now reached a fire-position, say, within five 
or six hundred yards of the enemy, beyond which it is impossible to 
advance without reducing the hostile fire. In other words, our advance 
has been stopped. This stage of the attack is, necessarily, a stationary 
operation. 

Object of this Stage of the Attack. The object of this stage of 
the attack is to gain superiority of fire so that we can advance to a 
position so near to the enemy that we will be able to charge him, and 
every effort must be made to gain superiority of fire as soon as possible; 
for, if it is not gained within a reasonable time, the energies of the firing 
line will become exhausted and the attack die oat — hence, the vital im- 
portance of bringing this stage of the attack to a head as early as possible. 

How near should this 'position he? It should be as near as pos- 
sible — not over 800 yards — for, the shorter the distance the shorter will 
be the time that the attacker will be subjected to fire, and the less 
exhausted will he be upon reaching the defender's position, and, con- 
sequently, the better able will he be to cope with the enemy in the 
bayonet combat that is likely to take place. While this fire-position 
should be as near the enemy as possible, the company commander should 
not make the mistake, in case of open ground, of pushing too close to the 
hostile position without first gaining superiority of fire. If he does, he 
will probably find himself at the mercy of the enemy, who will have 
better cover, and will also, because of the open nature of the country, 
be able to prevent the arrival of reenforcements. On the other hand, if 
the fire-position is established too far back, the chances are that neither 
side will gain superiority of fire. The following principles should guide 
the company commander: 

1st. If the cover is good both for the firing line and the reenforce- 
ments, advance as far as you can, whether or not you have gained super- 
iority of fire. 

2nd. Whether the ground is broken or very open, the fire-posi- 
tion must in every case be near enough to insure a decision as regardi 
superiority of fire. 

3rd. The location of the fire position must be such that it will 
be possible to send up reenforcements without exposing them to fire too 
long on open ground. 

[S931 



651 (contd.) 

How to accomplish our Object. In order to accomplish our 
object it will be necessary for every one to put his shoulder to the wheel 
with the determination ^Ho do or die''. Eemember, that this is really 
the crucial stage of the fight— it is the test that is going to decide 
whether we are going to advance, and drive the enemy out of Jiis position, 
or whether he is going to stop us, and, if so, probably drive us back. 
Our salvation, our success, depends upon effective -fire — a heavy, deadly 
fire — in order to produce which: — 

1st. The soldier must shoot accurately; 

2nd. The fire must be well directed by the company commander, 
and properly controlled by the platoon commanders and squad leaders; 

3rd. There must be cooperation, teamwork, between the different 
companies of the firing line and between the different platoons and the 
different squads of the same company. 

This stage of the attack should bring home to every man the im- 
portance of being able to shoot well, and doing his level best in time of 
peace to become a fair shot, if not a good one; a good one, if not an 
excellent one. The knowledge of being able to hit what you shoot at 
gives you confidence in yourself. If you know that the men on your 
right and left can shoot well, it will give you confidence in your company, 
and when the hour of action comes you will find this confidence to be a 
wonderful bracer — a great tonic — a big courage producer/ This is 
also the stage of the fight that brings home to us the great importance 
and value of proper training in field firing. 

Reenforcements. When the battalion commander sees that the 
firing line has been halted and can advance no further without super- 
iority of fire, he will, of course, send up reenforcements. The Drill Eegu- 
lations prescribe that reenforcements shall take their places on the flanks, 
so as not to mix up the units, but experience has shown that in practice 
the men intermingle very much with those already on the firing line, and, 
as a result, there is considerable confusion. The men must be taught that 
they mu3t at once place themselves under the orders of the corporals whose 
squads they happen to join. There will always be lots for the arriving 
spare officers and noncommissioned officers to do in the way of assisting 
in the fire-control, encouraging the men, etc. When the company com- 
mander sees the reenforcements approaching he should start a vigorous 
covering fire. 

Artillery. Of course, during the struggle for superiority of fire, 
the company will probably be exposed to the enemy's artillery fire. How- 
ever, our artillery will make every endeavor to help us gain superiority 
of fire, and, as we have seen (Par. 646), it has certain advantages over 
the hostile artillery. 

[594] 



651a 



Counter-Attack. During this stage of tlie attack we must be on 
the look out for a counter-attack by the defense. ^'^^'fy^^'^J''^ 
attack is delivered by the reserve of the defense, on one of the flanks of 
the attack, but it may be made on the front of the attacldng hue. How- 
ever, whether made on our flank or front, a counter-attack should be met 
with vigor-we should move right out and go after the attackers and 
not make the mistake of remaining in our fire-position while they attack 
us, thus ourselves assuming a defensive attitude. 

651a How will we know when we have gamed supenonty of pe ana 
can resume the advance? Upon occupying the fire-position beyond 
which we can not go without gaining superiority of fire, something like 
the following will probably occur : Both sides will open up with a general 
u ilade, which will gradually subside; the burst of fire from one side 
is answered by a burst of about the same volume from the other, and 
his continues' for some time, until we find that when one -de opens 
fire the other answers with a heavier fire that reduces or actually 
silences the opponent's fire. This is the first sign that superiority of 
fire fs being gained. Tor a time this superiority of fire may be gained 
by one ^e and then by the other, and as time goes on we find that one 
side gains superiority of fire oftener than the other. Let us suppose that 
the fttack is in the ascendant. Finally we find that as soon as the 
enemy opens fire there is a terrific burst of fire from the attack, and 
the fire of the defense at once slackens or ceases altogether. We then 
know that we are approaching the end of this stage, and we must, there- 
fore, begin to make preparations to advance to the position from which 
we are going to charge. 



[595] 



652 

CHAPTER V 

THE COMPANY IN ATTACK 

THE FOURTH STAGE OF THE ATTACK 

THE ADVAIfCE AFTER SUPEEIORITY OF FIttE HAS BEEK GAIKED TO A POSITION CLOSE 

ENOUGH TO CHARGE 

652. Situation. We have gained superiority of fire and are now ready 
to advance to a position close enough to the enemy to assault. "^ 

The Object of this Stage of the Attack. As iust stated tho 
objec of this stage of the attack is to advance to a position close enouS 
to the enemy to assau t. The distance of this position from the enemy 
will as previously explained, depend upon various conditions. "It m^y 
be f-m 25 to 400 yards". (Par. 46.5, Infantry Drill Regulations) ' 
How to accomplish our Object. I„ order to accomplish our 
Srnd'witTti'f"*."" our superiority of fire, and cover the res of h 
ground with the least possible delay. Impress upon every one-officers 
tZTr"'"'"'"^ "t"' ^"'^ privates-the vital importance of moving 
Z7Z HwT ^' fi'.^^^P^^o^ty has been gained, and of covering the 
ground with the least delay practicable. Delay will only result in in 

eTct b,r-:'i*"\'"' "T*^" "°" "° longer depends entirely on fire 
Sblc '^^P<"^'^^«'' t''« '*««^"1*' which must de delivered as soon a« 

Who gives the Order to Advance? Tt is not necessary to wait 

for an order from the battalion commander to advance. As soon as any 

company commander sees that he has gained fire superiority he sho' Id 

. «t once commence the forward movement on his own responsibility An 

once'folloTdl "f." '^ ' ^•'"''^ ^'^^ "*^^" ''' - --"P'« tha was at. 
once followed by other parts of tho firing line, and that resulted in the 
prompt building up of a fire position considerably nearer the ene"ny 's 
position. Cases might arise when it would be better for the ori " na 
firing line not to advance from this position, but, instead, to have tho 

fiom that point under the covering fire of the firing line. Where the 
firing ii^e could fi,.e over the heads of (be support, would be a <-as. where 
this might be done. wneie 

h«vi«<, ?r^'f^ ^"'f- .^^'■'° *'^°"^'> ^^^''- "'^y ^^' "o <loubt about our 
having gained superiority of fire, we must not attempt to continue the 
advance without covering fire. There are two types^f covering fir 
(1) when the fire is delivered by troops in rear over he heads of those ad 
vancing, and (2) when the fire is delivored by units to cover tl advance 
of other un.ts to their right and left. The covering fire dclivererby a 

15961 - 



652 (contd.) 

unit that has already advanced, to support the advance of another unit 
in rear, is, of course, only a modification of the second type mentioned. 

The overhead fire delivered„by troops in rear is by far the best 
kind of covering fire, because it can be furnished by support or reserve 
companies, and this leaves the firing line free to move forward, further 
assisted by the second type of covering fire which it can provide for 
itself. Of course, the first type of covering fire can be used only when it 
is safe to shoot over the heads of the troops in front. If it is possible to 
fire over the heads of advancing squads and platoons, we might do one of 
three things: 

1st. Have the original firing line remain in it position and furnish 
a covering fire for the support, which is sent forward through the firing 
line to assault. 

Advantages. The men of the support being fresher, will doubtless 
possess more energy, especially for the assault, which is to follow soon, 
and when passing through the original firing line, they may take a part 
of it with them, thus increasing the strength of the assault. Again, the 
original firing line would probably be able to furnish a more eflicient 
covering fire than the troops in rear, because they know the range and are 
familiar with the points to aim at. 

Disadvantage, The possible disadvantage is that the original 
firing line might be short of ammunition, and ammunition would be re- 
quired for covering fire more than for the assaulting line. However, this 
disadvantage could be overcome by having the support drop part of itf_ 
;inimunition as it passes through. 

2nd. Have the original firing lino advance under cover of the 
sn}>porfc in rear. 

Disadvantage. The original firing line might not have enough 
on orgy left to carry out the assault. 

3rd. Eeenforce the firing line as heavily as possible, and then 
have it advance under its own covering fire. In case any part of the ad- 
vancing line is checked, then the company commander must open a rapid 
fire with the rest of the company and thus at once restore superiority of 
fire, and immediately rush the greater ])art of the company to the front. 

Formation. By this stage of the fight the firing line will have 
been well reenforced, so that the men will probably be as close together 
as is compatible with the proper use of their rifles. The advances 
must be made by rushes by squads and platoons. The length of the 
rushes will depend on the nature of the ground, but, remember, you must 
^et over the remaining ground as rapidly as possible — we must get up to 
the assaulting point at the earliest nioniont possible. 

Artillery. Our artillery will be assisting us with r;»pid burstB 
(»f lire, of wliicli we should take full ;i(hai)tago to ;ul\anco. 

15971 • 



653 

653. Obstacles. Any natural obstacles that may be encountered during 
this stage of the attack will be passed as explained in the second stage 
of the attack. They will present very little roore difficulty, if any, for, 
although we are now much nearer the enemy, we must remember that we 
have gained superiority of fire. The artificial obstacles that we may 
encounter are the ones that will give us trouble, because the enemy places 
them where we are apt to come up on them unexpectedly. As a rule, 
however, such obstacles will not be very extensive; for, it takes tim_e and 
material to make them, and extensive obstacles in front of a defensive 
position render a counter-attack very difficult, if not impossible. The 
same general principles that apply to the passage of natural obstacles are 
applicable to the crossing of artificial ones. 



'■598] 



^ 654 

CHAPTER VI 

THE COMPANY IN ATTACK 

THE FIFTH STAGE OF THE ATTACK 

THE CHARGE 

654. Situation. We have at last reached a position which is near 
enough for us to charge the enemy. 

The Object of this Stage of the Attack. The object of this stage 
of the attack is to close in on the enemy with fixed bayonets and drive 
him from his position in confusion and disorder. 

How to accomplish our Object. The charging line must be 
properly built up before the beginning of the charge, which must be 
delivered with the utmost vigor, and without any restraint whatsoever 
on the ardor of the charging troops by an attempt to maintain alignment. 
The charge" should be made simultaneously by all the units participating. 
Confidence in their ability to use the bayonet in combat is a great 
stimulus to assaulting troops. Impress upon your men the importance 
of becoming proficient in time of peace in the use of the bayonet. The 
charge is usually immediately preceded by clip fire. 

When to fix Bayonets. The major or senior officer in the firing 
line determines when bayonets shall be fixed, and gives the proper com- 
mand or signal. It is repeated by all parts of the firing line. Bayonets 
must be fixed at once, but in such a way that there will be no marked 
pause in the firing. A good plan is to have the even numbers fix bayonets 
first and then the odd numbers, the odd numbers increasing their rate 
of fire while the even numbers are fixing bayonets, and the even num- 
bers increasing their rate of fire while the odd numbers are fixing their 
bayonets. The support also fixes bayonets. Bayonets will be fixed gen- 
erally before or during the last, or second last, advance preceding the 
charge. 

When to Charge. Upon reaching the position from which the 
assault will be made, build up the line as rapidly as possible with the 
units arriving from the last fire-position, and before charging be sure 
to see that enough troops are on hand to make it a success. However, 
do not have too dense a mass; for, then the men will be in one another's 
way. Also, see whether the adjoining companies have yet built up their 
lines and are ready to charge. Reserves joining the firing line now will 
give the charge a strong impetus. It is impossible to give any fixed rule as 
to just when the charge should be started. ^'The psychological moment 
of the charge cannot be determined far in advance. The tactical in- 
stinct of the responsible officer must decide''. (Par. 464, Infantry Drill 

[599] 



654 (contd.) 

Regulations.) ''The. commander of the attacking line should indicate his 
approval, or give the order before the charge is made. Subordinate 
commanders, usually battalion commanders, whose troops are ready to 
charge signal that fact to the commander". (Par. 466, Infantry Drill 
Regulations.) However, history shows cases where a corporal or a 
drummer boy sprang forward at the ''psychological moment'', and was 
followed by the rest of the firing line in a charge that completely routed 
the enemy. '^Subject to orders from higher authority, the major deter- 
mines the point from which the charge is to be made. The firing line 
having arrived at that point and being in readiness, the major causes 
the charge to be sounded. The signal is repeated by the musicians of all 
parts of the line. The company officers lead the charge. The skirmish- 
ers spring forward shouting, run with bayonets at charge, and close with 
the enemy''. (Par. 319, Infantry Drill Regulations.) 

A charge to be successful must above all things have cohesion — 
the men must start together, keep together, and fight together — they 
must charge with vigor and determination. The charge must be started 
promptly, when ordered whether the men are one or one thousand yards 
from the enemy — ^^the distance has nothing to do with it so far as the men 
are concerned. 

Conduct after the Charge. The further conduct of the charging 
troops will depend upon circumstances; they may halt and engage in 
bayonet combat, or in pursuing fire; they may advance a short distance 
to obtain a field of fire or to drive the enemy from the vicinity; they 
may assemble or reorganize, etc. If the enemy vacates his position 
every effort should be made to open fire at once on the retreating mass, 
reorganization of the attacking troops being of secondary importance to 
the infliction of further losses upon the enemy and to the increase of 
his confusion. (Par. 319, Infantry Drill Regulations.) 

Our Artillery. Our Artillery will be on the look out for the , 
charge, and, about this time, will increase their range so as to burst their 
shells just beyond the enemy's position, so as to check the possible 
arrival of hostile supports or reserves. A premature charge by a part 
of the lino should be avoided, but if begun, the other p^ts of the line 
should join at once, if there is any prospect of success. Under excep- 
tional circumstances a part of the line may be compelled to charge with- 
out authority from the rear. The intention to do so should be signalled 
to, the rear. (Par. 470, Infantry Drill Regulations.) 

Supports and Reserves. At the signal for the charge the near- 
by supports and reserves rush forward. (Par. 466, Infantry Drill Regula- 
tions.) 

Counter-Attack. We must not forget that even at this stage 
of the fight the enemy may have enough energy left to leave his position 
and a,ttack us. However, such an attack must be met with vigor — we 

[600] 



654 (contd.) 

should go right after the enemy at once. To assume a defensive atti- 
tude at this stage of the attack would be suicidal. '*If the attack receives 
a temporary set back and it is intended to strengthen and continue it, 
officers will make every effort to stop the rearward movement, and will 
reestablish the firing line in a covered position as close as possible to 
the enemy.'' (Par. 474, Infantry Drill Regulations.) **If the attack must 
be abandoned, the rearward movement should continue with promptness 
until the troops reach a feature of the terrain that facilitates the task 
of checking and reorganizing them. The point selected should be so 
far to the rear as to prevent interference by the enemy before the troops 
are ready to resist. The withdrawal of the attacking troops should be 
covered by the artillery and bj^ the reserves, if any are available.'' Par. 
475, Infantry Drill Eegulations.) 

Conclusion. It must not, of course, be supposed every attack, or 
even the majority of them, will have ^ve separate stages, and will be 
conducted just as we have conducted this one; for, such will not be the 
case. Every attack has its own individual characteristics and must be 
handled according to the nature of the ground, and the tactical and other 
conditions involved. However, the stereotyped form of attack through 
which we have just taken you gives a very good, general idea of what 
an attack is like, and the general basic principles presented are applicable 
to any attack. 



[601] 



655 

CHAPTER VII 
THE COMPANY IN ATTACK 

THE COUNTER-ATTACK 

655. Glasses of Counter- Attacks. There are two general classes of 
coui!J;er-attacks — Avhat may be called the ^^ general counter-attack^', and 
the ^' local counter-attack '\ The general counter-attack is usually made 
by launching the reserve against one of the enemy ^s flanks when his 
attack is in full progress; by mxaldng a frontal attack with the firing 
line and supports after repulsing the enemy's attack and demoralizing 
him with pursuing fire; or, by the troops in rear of the firing line, when 
the enemy has reached the defensive position, and is in disorder. How- 
ever, as the general counter-attacks are made by large bodies of troops, 
under a higher commander and involve higher tactics, their principles do 
not directly concern company commanders, and, therefore, will not be 
discussed here. 

Local Counter-Attacks. The local counter-attack is the one in 
which the company is directly interested. Such an attack might be 
made to drive the enemy from an important position he has gained in 
our immediate front and from which he is doing us considerable damage, 
or to halt his advance during the third or fourth stage of the attack, or 
it might be m.ade to block the enemy's charge. For instance, let us sup- 
pose the enemy has gained superiority of fire and is moving up to a posi- 
tion from which to assault. What are we going to do? Are we going to 
turn tail and run, av^ait the assault in our trenches, or shall we go out 
of our trenches and assault the attackers? Is it better to sit in our own 
trenches and wait until the hostile troops come pouring over the parapet, 
shouting and yelling and digging their bayonets into us, or is it better 
to rush forward over the parapet ourselves, do the shouting and yelling 
ourselves, and do a little bayonet digging on our own hook? 

When to deliver the Counter-Attack. There would be no object 
in delivering a local counter-attack during the first two stages of the 
attack. It is ojily when the attack has been stopped temporarily by the 
fire of the defense and must gain superiority of fire before it can advance 
further, that the necessity for delivering a local counter-attack would 
arise. Naturally enough, some parts of the defender's position will be 
stronger than others; in the strong parts, where the defense has a good 
field of fire, the attack will be at a disadvantage in the struggle for 
superiority of fire and may never gain it sufficiently to assemble for the 
assault. This is not the part of the defender's position where the counter- 
attack is likely to be needed — ^it is likely to be needed in one of the 
weak parts of the defender's position, where, almost invariably owing 

[602] 



655 (contd.) 

to cover, the attacker will be able to get much closer. If the attacking 
line is allowed to remain in its fire-position and obtain superiority of fire, 
there is every chance that this part of the defender ^s line will be defeated. 
There are two ways of preventing this: One is for the defenders, while 
the struggle for superiority of fire is in the balance, to gain temporary 
superiority of fire and then attack the enemy, advancing in a thick line, 
covering the ground with as few halts as possible and charging the 
enemy with the bayonet. The other alternative, but a far more risky 
one for the safety of the position, is to wait until the attack has gained 
superiority of fire and is assembling for the assault. This form of 
counter-attack would be resorted to only when previous efforts as sug- 
gested above have failed. In this case the company would charge with 
bayonet straight over the trenches. 

In those parts of the defender's line where the main defense will 
depend upon the success of local counter-attacks, each company should 
be assigned an objective before the counter-attack is commenced. Also, 
a good fire-position in front of the general line of defense should be 
selected before hand, and even improved, so that when the blow has been 
delivered the companies will not find themselves lying out in a very ex- 
posed position where it is impossible for them to use their rifles with 
effect. Local counter-attacks have often failed to produce any perma- 
nent effect, either because they have gone too far, or because they have 
reached a position where they were unduly exposed to the enemy's fire; 
the enemy has then attacked and driven back the counter-attack, and 
practically followed it into the main position. 

When deciding upon the objective of a counter-attack, so far as 
it can be done by studying the ground in front of the position, a com- 
pany Commander should bear in mind — 

(1) The position which the enemy may reach before being 
brought to a standstill by the fire of the defense, and beyond which he 
cannot advance without first obtaining superiority of fire. 

(2) The line, perhaps in dead ground, where the attack, if it 
gains superiority of fire, is likely to assembly preparatory to the assault. 

(3) A suitable fire-position, always in advance of the last- 
mentioned line, which the counter-attack can reach, and which can be 
supported later by fire from the main position, if possible. 

By not aiming at too much it is probable that the blow will be 
more permanently effective, it will be much easier to deliver, the losses 
will be greatly reduced, and if superiority of fire is obtained at once 
over the enemy in front, often his leading troops will be driven back 
by the counter-attack. A further advance with a view to defeating the 
enemy and driving him back from this part of the battlefield can be 
easily initiated. 

[603] 



655 (contd.) 

The most important point to remember is that when everything 
else has failed, and the enemy, having gained superiority of fire, is as- 
sembling close in front of the trench for the final assault, he must be 
charged before he has time to charge himself. Furthermore, if one 
company commander sees another company on his right or left issuing 
from their trenches to charge, he must do the same with his company, 
whatever the situation in his immediate front may be. The only excep- 
tion will be when the attackers in front of his company have not been 
able to gain superiority of fire, in which case the company would remain 
in its trenches and turn its fire upon the enemy in front of the com- 
panies delivering the counter-attack. 



[604] 



656 

CHAPTER VIII 

THE COMPANY IN ATTACK 

MEETING ENGAGEMENT, IN WHICH THE COMPANY IS EX- 
POSED TO BOTH ARTILLERY AND IlIFANTRY FIRE 
FROM THE BEGINNING 

656. Meeting Engagement. ^* Meeting engagement'^ is the name given 
to an action when the opposing forces meet and commence to fight before 
either side has had time to make much preparation for the attack or 
defense. Such an engagement is characterized by the necessity for 
hasty reconnaissance, or the almost total absence of reconnaissance; by 
the necessity of rapid deployment, often under fire; and usually the 
absence of trenches or other artifical cover. It is, therefore, evident that 
the first and second stages of the attack described in the previous chap- 
ters either disappear entirel}^ or are greatly curtailed. 

Battlefield. The first thing to realize is that, as a rule, the ground 
has not been selected by either side as being especially suitable for either 
attack or defense, and, owing to the lack of time, it will contain few, if 
any, artificial obstacles; also, the entrenching, if any, will be hasty and 
limited. However, as a rule, there will be several important tactical 
features, such as streams, ridges, woods, hills, etc., the possession of one 
or more of which in particular will be an advantage to the side that holds 
it. The feature may not be very marked of itself, but it will be very 
important as compared with the rest of the features of the ground. Such 
a position will generally assist either the attack or defense. The thing 
to do, of course, is, if possible, to get possession of the feature without 
delay , 

Necessity to Attack. We see from the above that the conditions 
of a meeting engagement give the attack advantages in addition to 
those mentioned in previous chapters, and, also, that the conditions of 
such an engagement make it necessary to assume the offensive at once 
and attack with energy, vigor, and determination, so as to gain ground 
to the front and throw the enemy on the defensive at all costs. Every- 
thing must, therefore, be done to gain superiority of fire just as soon as 
possible. Hence the importance of deplojang and maintaining a strong 
firing line from the first. 

Final Stages. Having gained superiority of fire in the initial 
stage of the encounter, the final stages, including the maintenance of 
fire superiority, the advance to within charging distance, and the charge, 
would be carried out in a manner similar to that described in the stereo- 
typed form of attack, except that, the ground not having been especially 
selected for defensive action and being free of artificial obstacles, the 
last stages of the attack would not be so difficult. 

[605] 



657 



CHAPTER IX 
THE COMPANY IN ATTACK 

« . 

ADVANCE GUARD-ACTION 

657. Observation of Country While Marching. When the company is 
acting as an advance guard, as the troops are advancing through the 
country the captain must be constantly examining the ground in his 
vicinity, and planning in his own mind what he would do in case the 
enemy should be suddenly met in that particular neighborhood. All 
other officers, as well as the noncommissioned officers must also constantly 
observe the country as the column advances. 

Action preceding meeting Engagements. A m^eeting engagement 
is usually preceded by an action between the opposing advance guards, 
or between the opposing advance guard of one side and the outpost of 
the other. An advance guard m.oving in the direction of the enemy may 
meet a hostile advance guard of a body of troops sent forward to meet it, 
or it may meet an outpost line covering the enemy's main body. In 
either case the advance guard should attack and defeat the enemy's ad- 
vance detachments before they can be reenforced from the rear. 

Company Forming Part of Advance Guard Support 

Meeting Hostile Advance Guard, Let us suppose the company 
forms a part of the support of the advance guard. It will generally meet 
a detachment of the enemy that is hardly stronger than itself, and which 
should in every case be attacked immediately, with all possible vigor. 
Not far in rear of this hostile detachment we know more troops are 
following, and we must hit a good, strong blow before any of those troops 
can come up from the rear. The fact that the ground may be poor for 
attack, but good for defense, must not tempt us to assume a defensive 
attitude. Start right out after the enemy and strike him hard before 
he has time to realize what is happening. The question of committing 
the advance guard to a serious engagement without instructions from the 
commander of the main body, need not worry the commander of the sup- 
port. We know we have in our immediate front an enemy that cannot- 
be very strong for the moment, and if we can defeat him and drive him 
back on the rest of his advance guard, and perhaps even on the main body, 
the troops in his rear may be thrown on the defensive — such is the tremen- 
dous moral power of attack and initial success. Even if our attack on 
the support is brought to a standstill, we will have at least thrown the 
enemy on the defensive, and also will have more than likely caused him 
to greatly exaggerate our strength. 

[606] 



657 (contd.) 

If both sides should assume the offensive, the one that develops 
the most effective fire first and makes the best use of the ground will 
throw the other side on the defensive. We, therefore, see the vital im- 
portance of gaining superiority of fire as soon as possible and losing no 
time in gaining a position close, enough to assault. 

Protection of Flanks, The importance of protecting our flanks in 
advance guard action cannot be over estimated, and we should practice it 
diligently during times of peace. 

Meeting Hostile Outpost. If the company encounters a hostile out- 
post, we will find the enemy already occupying a defensive position. In 
view of the fact that his reenforcements would not be actually marching 
up in his rear, as in the case of an advance guard, a little more time would 
elapse before they could come up; also, his position would be well chosen 
and undoubtedly his supports will have occupied the best positions in 
the vicinity. Therefore, the enemy having already assumed the defensive, 
the speed and immediate application of all the force available to throw 
him on the defense would not be required. Our object would be to push 
forward, establish a fire-position in the best place available, and endeavor 
to gain superiority of fire over the defense. As a rule, this should not 
be very difl&cult, because we would probably be stronger than the out- 
post in our immediate front, and by such action we would disclose the 
enemy's position and to some extent his strength, and thus assist ma- 
terially the operations of the rest of the advance guard when it comes 
up to the firing line. On the other hand, should the company when it 
meets the hostile outpost, content itself with merely holding its ground 
and adopting a purely defensive attitude until the arrival of the rest 
of the advance ^uard, the enemy would probably be encouraged and we 
would not be able to get much, if any, information about him. In fact, 
it might not be at all clear what was in front of the advance guard, 
which, perhaps, was being held back by only a few dismounted men. It 
may be remarked here that it is a general rule always to make an effort 
to develop the strength and position of the enemy before planning your 
main attack, so that you may know what you are up against, and in 
order to accomplish this purpose it is sometimes necessary to send out 
combat patrols to draw the enemy's fire. 

Company Forming Part of the Advance Guard Reserve 
Meeting Hostile Advance Guard. Let us now suppose that the 
company forms a part of the reserve instead of the support of the advance 
guard. While a vigorous offensive is of the greatest value at all times, 
it is never more so than when in action against a hostile advance guard. 
As we form a part of the reserve, the plan of attack, of couri^e, will have 
been decided upon before we come into action, diu} 

[607] 



658 

he to reach a fire-position close enough to gain superiority of fire with 
the Jeast possibie delay. It Bhonld be borne in mind that the enemy may 
be reenforced at any time by troops in his rear, so that we must take 
advantage of every condition to push forward within assaulting distance. 
Protection of Flanks. We have already mentioned the importance 
of flank protection in advance guard action. If the company happens to 
be on the flank, two or three squads should be placed on the outer flank 
to protect the company, especially from mounted troops. This flank guard 
under certain conditions could be used to provide covering fire for the 
company. Scouts should be sent out beyond the flank. 

Company as Support to Artillery 

658. When artillery forms part of the advance guard it is sometimei 
necessary to detach a company to protect the guns. In such case, you 
should first ascertain the direction from which the enemy would be most 
likely to attack the artillery and then make your arrangements tc meet 
the attack. Of course, the enemy could not attack over the ground that 
is being used by the advance guard; consequently, the possible directions 
are from the two flanks and the rear. Should the general situation, or 
the nature of the terrain make an attack from one or more of these dir- 
ections impossible, it would, naturally enough, simplify the task of the 
infantry escort: 

If an attack were expected from one flank only, our main object 
would be to prevent the enemy from occupying any locality from which 
they could fire upon the flanks of the guns or against the wagons in 
rear. It is generally impossible for the company to occupy all such 
localities. However, if there is a position that commands the others, 
it should be occupied by the company, provided the enemy cannot get 
between the company and the artillery without being exposed to the 
fire of the former. The company commander should send out scouts or 
patrols to all dead ground in the vfcinity to give warning of a hostile 
advance. The company must not occupy a ]30sition too close to the 
artillery, because it might interfere with the working of the guns, and 
it would rJso probably sufter casualties from any hostile artillery fire 
that might be directed against our guns. 

The company commander should arrauge with the artillery com- 
mander to be informed at the earliest possible moment of any cliange in 
the position of the guns, because the infantry marches much slower than 
the artillery, and is apt to be left behind, especially when scouts or de- 
tachments must be called in. The compan^^ commander, in case the 
company is to follow the artillery to a new position^ should always ascer- 
tain from the artillery commander the exact location of the^ position, 
and, if possible, the beet road leading thereto. 

[608] 



658 (contd.) 

When the enemy may attack from either flank or from the rear, 
Miraiigemv nta similar to those already described to deal with each 
eventuality, must be made. In a case liiie this it would be best to 
keep the greater part of the company together in the most important po- 
sition, from which, perhaps, two or three possible lines of approach could 
be commanded. Should the enemy succeed in occupying a position from 
which their rifle fire would interfere with the service of our guns, the 
company, must promptl}^ attack thf jjostilf* )^osition and carry it by 
assault. 



[«W1 



659-660-661 

CHAPTER X 
THE COMPANY IN DEFENSE 

GENERAL RULES AND PRINCIPLES 

659. Necessity for defensive Action. As we have previously shown, 
the attack is the dominating spirit of war — ^it is the only spirit that 
wins battles. However, there are times when the defense is necessary — 
indeed, when there could be no successful attack without a preceding or 
simultaneous defense. 

660. Classes of Defense. There may be said to be two general classes 
of defense: 1st, the so-called passive defense, when a certain position 
is to be held only for a short time because of the vastly superior strength 
of tho enemy — for example, the action of a rear guard that is merely 
delaying the enemy so that the main body can get away, or the action, of 
an outpost that is driven in by the enemy. 

2nd, the so-called active defense, in which the spirit of attack domi- 
nates, and which is only resorted to as a stepping stone, as a means, to 
the attack. In other words, we start out with the intention, the deter- 
mination, of attacking the enemy, but we first delay his advance, make his 
attacking us as difficult as possible, cause him to lose more men than 
we do, break down as much as we can his power of attack, and finally 
attack him ourselves in turn. This is the usual form of defense, whose 
very soul should be the spirit of attack, but which, however, should 
never be resorted to unless the conditions make it absolutely necessary. 
Let us again repeat that the attack is the only thing that wins battles, 
and if compelled to assume the defensive we must not maintain that 
attitude any longer than is necessary, but must assume the offensive just 
as soon as we possibly can. 

661. Advantages of the Defense. The defense has these advantages 
over the attack: 

1. A larger amount of ammunition can be made available. 

2. The men undergo comparatively little fatigue and consequently 
can shoot better. 

3. The defense, usually having good cover, will suffer fewer losses 
than the attackers, and the use of smokeless powder makes it difficult 
for the attackers to locate the actual position of the defenders. 

4. The advancing attackers must sooner or later offer a good target. 
Disadvantages of the Defense. 1. The attacker can choose his 

point of attack, while the defender must be prepared against it at all 
points. 

2. The defender must generally fighr amongst his dead and wounded, 
which is demoralizing. 

[6101 



662 

3. Seeing the attacker continuing to advance in spite of the defend- 
er's fire has a bad moral effect on the defender. 

662. Requisites of a good defensive Position. The requisites to be 
sought in a good defensive position are: 

1. A good field of fire to the front and flanks, to distance of 600 to 
800 yards or more. 

2. Effective cover and concealment for the firing line as well as for 
the supports and reserves. 

3. Flanks that are naturally secure, or that can be made so by the 
use of reserves. 

4. Extent of ground suitable to the size of the force that is to 
occupy it. 

5. Good communications throughout the position — that is, between 
different parts of the firing line, between the firing line and the supports, 
and between the supports and the reserves. 

6. A good line of retreat. 

7. The position should be one that the enemy can not avoid, but must 
attack or give up his mission. 

Of course, a position having all these advantages will rarely, 
if ever, be found. The one should be taken which conforms closest to 
the description. 

Two of the most important requisites of a good defensive position, 
viz: cover for the men and a good field of fire, are conflicting; for, as a 
rule, the farther back we get on the top of a hill, the better will the cover 
be, but, on the other hand, the farther back we get the more ^^dead 
space'' will there be in front — that is to say, the poorer will the field 




of fire be. In selecting our fire position we must, therefore, balance 
these conflicting requirements and strike a compromise between the two. 
Straight Lines, best Form of Defense. Of course, the simplest and 
most effective form of defense is for the fite trench or trenches to be con- 
structed in a straight line. However, with a command of any size this 
will rarely be possible; for, we will find that, owing to the features of the 
ground, a straight line of any length will provide variable cover for 
the defense and a very ununiform field of fire to the front — ^in some parts 
the cover and field of fire will be excellent, and in others it will be 
very poor. We m.ust, therefore, bear in mind that in selecting our 
fire-positions, the position of the defense as a whole must be considered. 

[611] 



663-664 

663. Salients. By salients we mean hills, spurs, woods, buildings, etc., 
that jut out from the general line of defense, and thus form a. projecting 
object. Salients are always a weakness in a line, not only because it is 
easier for the enemy to concentrate a converging fire, especially artillery, 
on a small, projecting locality like a salient, which can often be enfiladed, 
but, generally, the number of men required to occupy a salient is out of 
proportion to the amount of the defenders' front covered by the salient. 
Hence, whenever possible, salients must be avoided and the space to their 
front and sides covered by the fire of troops occupying parts of the line 
adjoining the salients. But, if this can not be done, and the occupation of 
a salient can not be avoided, special pains must be taken to provide over- 
head and other cover (bomb-proofs and loop-holes), and to guard against 
being enfiladed by the enemy. 

664. Avoidance of the Skyline. Generally when we speak of the * * Sky- 
line'' in conversation, we mean the highest part of a hill or ridge — the 
''natural crest" — , and, roughly speaking, the skyline and the natural 
crest are often practically the same. However, s rictly speaking such 
is not the case; the exact position of the skyline is variable — it becomes 
nearer as one approaches the top of the hill and gets farther away as one 
goes away from the top of the hill. For instance, if standing at ''A'' 
the skyline would be at ''C", and if standing at '*B" it would be at 
"D^\ The thing to do then, is to ascertain the poini; beyond which the 
enemy will probably be unable to advance without gaining superiority 
of fire — that is to say, the position where he will make his fight for su 
periority of fire — and then fix the skyline with reference to that point. 
As we all know, objects seen on the skyline loom up as prominent targets. 
Purthermiore, it is evident the occupation of the skyline as a fire position 
would result in lots of ''dead space" in our front, and, again, it is a 
known fact that men will usually fire at this skyline rather than at any 
other part of a hill, if they cannot see the defenders' trenches. We 
should, therefore, if possible, avoid the skyline, and occupy a fire-position 
in front of it. However, there may be occasions when the occupation 
of the skyline cannot be avoided. For instance, in the case of a 
plateau, with sudden and steep slopes down to the valleys below. Because 
of the vast amount of time and labor involved in cutting down the sides 
of the slope before getting to the trench proper, the construction of 
trenches on the slopes would be impossible — also, their concealment 
would be very difficult. When such a skyline is occupied bushes should 
be placed along it — they will prevent the enemy from seeing the men 
when they rise to fire. 

If possible, before selecting a defensive position, go forward sev- 
cial hundred yards and oxarnhie it for the (liro<*ti()iJ in whirh the enpn.y 
will Mpproacb. 

1612J 



665-666-667-668-669 

665. Cover, Trenches, and Obstacles. The natural cover of the posi- 
tion should be fully utilized, and, in addition, it should be strengthened by 
trenches and obstacles, if the time permits. 

The best protection is afforded by deep, narrow, inconspicuoui 
trenches. If little time is available, as much as practicable must be 
done. That the trenches may not be needed should not cause their con- 
struction to be omitted, and the fact that they have been constructed 
should not influence the action of a commander, if conditions are found 
to be other than expected. 

The fire trenches should be well supplied with ammunition. 

Supports. When natural cover is not available for the supports, 
they are placed close at hand in cover trenches. 

Dummy Trenches frequently deceive the enemy and cause the 
hostile artillery as well as infantry to waste time and ammunition and to 
divert their fire. 

666. Advance Posts. As a rule, the occupation of positions in front 
of the general line of defense should be avoided, as they tend to dis- 
perse the power of the defender. However, there are times when it is 
desirable to occupy such positions in order to delay the enemy, deflect 
his course; make him deploy sooner, or for some other purpose. In such 
case, the number of troops used for the purpose should be no larger than 
is absolutely necessary, and care must be taken not to let them get cut 
off, special provision being made for their retreat. The commander of 
an advance post should always be given definite and explicit instructions 
as to just what he is to do and how long he is to occupy the position. 

Occupation of the Trenches. Unless the difficulty of moving the 
troops into the trenches be great, most of them should be held in rear 
until the infantry attack begins. The pos^^lon itself would be occupied 
by a small garrison only, with the necessary outguards or patrols in 
front. ' * 

667. Use of Bayonet. Fire alone cannot be depended upon to stop the 
attack. The troops must be determined to resort to the bayonet, if 
nocessary. 

668. Night Attack. If a night attack or close approach of the enemy 
is expected, patrols or outposts should be thrown out in front, troops in 
a pre])ared position should strengthen the outguards and firing line, 
and as many obstacles as possible should be constructed. Supports and 
reserves should move close to the firing line and should, with the firing 
line, keep their bayonets fixed. If practicable, the front should be 
illuminated, preferably from the fianks. , 

Orly short range fire is of any value in resisting night attacks. 
The bayonet is the chief reliance. 

669. Buildings, Farm Inclosures, Etc., should not be occupied by the 
<lefense, when it can ])c avoided, ospocinlly i^ tl'^W -'^rc to ])(» (»xj»oBod to 
artillery fire. 



670 

Buildings and farm inclosures are bad fire-positions, not only 
because they make excellent targets for the artillery, but also because 
the men in them are in a very confined place, usually crowded together, 
thus presenting a vulnerable target. If a building exposed to artillery 
fire must be defended, it can usually be done better from the outside 
than from the inside. The field of fire from the outside is generally 
better, and it is easier and quicker to dig good trenches, even with head 
cover, than it is to loop-hole and otherwise prepare a building for defense. 
Again, the effect of the hostile artillery will not be so demoralizing 
outside of a house as inside of it, and the defenders will not be driven 
out by the building catching fire. However, if a building is not ex- 
posed to artillery fire and it also affords a good field of fire, there is 
no doubt that it affords a good means of resistance, as it is very diffi- 
cult to assault a building, and by the use of sand bags and other ma- 
terial effective protection can be provided against infantry fire. In 
fighting inside a building the very strictest discipline must be main- 
tained and every man made to do his full duty; for, there is no doubt 
that many men who go into a building take no part in its defense. 
Men must be assigned to various rooms, and squad leaders and the 
one in general charge, must frequently visit the various parts of the 
building to see that every one is doing his duty. Precautions must be 
taken to guard against fire. In preparing a building for defense, improve 
the field of fire in the vicinity as much as possible; provide water and 
heaps of earth in the rooms; break and remove the glass in all the win- 
dows; doors and windows on the ground floor that are accessible must be 
blocked up and loop-holed; arrange for means- of communication 
throughout the building and for nleans of retreat. Ordinary furniture, 
chairs, tables, cupboards, bedsteads, etc., make good obstacles. Boxes, 
chests, trunks, sacks, mattresses, bags and pillow cases, when filled 
with earth, afford protection against rifle fire. 

However, it is generally safer to avoid buildings, and if they 
must be defended, then to defend them from the outside. . 

670. Edge of a Wood. If exposed to hostile artillery fire, the edge 
of a wood is not a good defensive position, because, as explained in the 
attack, it affords a good target for the enemy's artillery, and it also 
affords a good target for the hostile infantry. However, experience 
in war shows that such a position is not a bad fire position if not ex- 
posed to artillery fire, especially if the defenders happen to have some 
artillery to assist them. The trenches should be placed as far back 
as possible inside the wood, so. as to escape the heavy fire that is sure 
to be directed against the edge of the wood. However, care must be 
taken not to locate the trenches so far back that the field of fire will be 
obstructed. 

[614] 



• 671 

The principal advantage of such a position is that the supports 
can be brought up and the wounded removed from the trenches under 
the cover of the woods. 

671. Clearing in a Wood. A clearing in a wood, especially if it be 
two or three hundred yards w^ide and the farther side be exposed to' 
the defenders' fire, makes a good defensive position. This is not due 
so much to the fact that the defense has good cover and a good field 
of fire as it is to the fact that it is only with great difficulty that the 
attack can make an organized advance out of the wood. IIovvAever. 
such a position is better suited to a passive defense, as it is about as 
difficult for the defender to deliver a counter-attack from his edge of 
the wood as it is for the attacker to move forward from his side, but 
the defender has a slight advantage over the attacker in this respect, 
in that he can prepare beforehand paths for purposes of communication, 
and also in that he will not Jiave suffered the casualties and been sub- 
jected to the confusion which the attacker has experienced while pas- 
sing through the wood. 

If necessary to make a clearing in a wood, it nuist be done by 
cutting down trees and clearing out the undergrowth. Of course, aa 
a rule, it will not be possible to cut down all the trees and the largest 
ones will have to be left standing. However, the spaces between the 
trees left standing must be assigned to various units, so that our fire will 
be sure to be distributed along the entire front. Any logs that may be 
left should lie at right angles to the defenders' front so as not to 
afford any cover for the enemy. The enemy's side of the clearing should 
be cut in the shape of a W, with the pointed angles towards the defend- 
ers. This will cause the attackers to crowd into the pointed angles and 
to form along the edges of the angles, thus affording vulnerable tar- 
gets, exposed to an enfilading fire from the defender. This saw-tooth 
effect on the attackers' side, in order to reduce the amount of labor, 
would be produced as follows: After the clearing has been made, cut 
indentations, (A, B, C, D,) in the woods, a few yards apart. Place 




the limbs and other material from these indentations at W, X, Y, Z, in 
the form of angles. If the time and labor permit, and if we have a 
couple of machine-guns, so that one can be placed at each flank of the 
clearing, our position can be made almost impregnabljB by cutting two 
rides running like a "V, with the point towards the enemy, so that the 
machine-guns can shoot down the rides. Before being able to reach 
the edge of the clearing the enemy would have to cross the V-shaped 
paths and would be mowed down hj the machine guns. 

[615] 



672-673 

In maldng a clearing always begin on the defenders' side, and as 
the work progresses, keep the width of the eleariiig about the saiiie 
throughout its entire length; for, if compelled to stop suddenly before 
the desired width is reached, it is better to have a narrower clearing 
of uniform width than one with some points of the far side near the 
defenders ' position and others far away. 

When necessary to occupy a fire-position in a wood, with do 
clearing and without time to make one, whether or not the position is 
to be entrenched, always occupy the highest ground available. There 
is no theoretical reason for this, but experience shows that in wood 
fighting the severest struggles almost invariably take place on the 
highest ground, and success depends upon ability to hold such ground. 
It may be that this is due to the fact that in nearly all wood fighting 
the bayonet is a great factor, and it can be used with greater effect in 
rushing down hill than in charging up hill. 

672. Clearing Field of Fire. If there is not a good field of fire to the 
front, we must improve the field as much as possible by clearing away 
all obstructing objects. However, in clearing the ground close to the 
trench, we must be very careful not to create what will appear to the 
enemy like a straight line, because it will give him a good idea of the 
location of the trench, and probably unnecessarily expose the defenders 
to view. Bushes and scrub that do not interfere with the field of fire 
and which, when seen from the front, do not present a clearly defined 
line, should not be cut down, as the}'- make it difficult for the enemy 
to locate the trenches or see the defenders, when they put up their 
heads to fire. 

A Wood. The method of clearing a wood was explained above. 

Crops, Crops that cannot be burned may be trampled down by 
having troops march over them in close order. _ 

Streams running across the front within effective rifle range 
should be cleared of all obstructions to view, so that the defense will 
be able to fire on both banks and on the approaches. However, a few 
trees or bushes should be left here and there along the banks as aiming 
marks to assist the squad leaders and platoon commanders in directing 
and distributing the fire of their men. 

Ranges. The ranges to various points in front and on the 
flanks must be ascertained in advance. 

Obstacles. The extent to which artificial obstacles shall be used 
will depend upon the necessity therefor as determined by the nature 
of the ground, the extent to which it is intended to defend the position, 
and the time and material available. (See * ^Obstacles'', Par. 706.) 
673. Defense of Bridges and other Defiles. As a rule, a bridge, cause- 
way, ford, or other open defile, can be defended better from the near side — 
that is to say, from the defenders' side — by bringing a cross-fire upon the 

[616] 



674-675 

defile the enemy is attempting to pass. Everything possible must be 
done to prevent him from forming a fighting front on the defenders' 
side. 

In defending mountain passes or other defiles whose flanks are not 
open, such as village streets, it is usually better to dispute the passage 
itself, inch by inch, and prepare to receive the enemy with a strong, 
effective cross-fire should he succeed in reaching the open space at 
the defenders^ end of the defile. 

674. Defense of Villages. To prepare a village for defense: — 

1. Construct trenches controlling the principal avenues of apjjroach, 
which should, if practicable, be mined; station sharpshooters and expert 
riflemen in the belfries of churches and other commanding places, and 
construct barricades across the streets where heavy fighting is likely 
to occur. 

2. Divide the village into sections, with well defined lines of com- 
munication, each section being held by a separate tactical unit, which 
will provide for the care of the wounded. 

3. Prepare -the buildings for defense, provide for food, water and 
ammunition. (Buildings prepared for occupation must not be occupied 
if subjected to artillery fire.) 

Should the attackers penetrate the outer line of defense, the de- 
fenders must stubbornly contest every inch of the ground, fighting from 
buildings, barricades, and trenches. 

675. Defense against Cavalry. Infantry, unless taken by surprise or 
demoralized, need fear nothing from cavalry. All you need to do is not 
to lose your head, shoot straight and aim lov/. The kneeling position is 
usually the best. If attacked by a cavalryman with a drawn saber, try 
to get on the near side of the horse. The rider camot use his saber 
eflfectively against a dismounted man on his left. 



[617] 



676 

CHAPTER XI 
THE COMPANY IN DEFENSE 
USUAL TYPES OF DEFENSE 
676. Having discussed the general rules and principles of defense, we 
will now take the company through the usual types of defense, viz: 

1. The ordinary type of defense, where there are many companies 
assisted by artillery, occupying a position for the purpose of lighting en- 
tirely on the defensive; or, for the purpose of fighting on the defensive, 
with the view of taking the offensive later. 

2. An advance guard is suddenly thrown on the defensive by the 
action of the enemy. 

^ 3. An •attack is suddenly thrown on the defensive by the action 
of the enemy. 

4. An advance guard that has routed the enemy and captured the 
position is in turn attacked by the enemy and thrown on the defensive. 

5. An attack that has routed the enemy and captured the position, 
is, in turn, attacked by the enemy and thrown on the defensive. 

6. A rear guard covering the withdrawal of a force from the battle- 
field. 

7. Defense at night. 

8. Defense of a position by an outpost. 

the company commander should, therefore, ascertain, if possible, about 

Many Companies, Assisted by Artillery, Occupying A Position For the 
Purpose of Fighting Entirely on The Defensive; Or, For The Pur- 
pose of Fighting on the Defensive With the View of Taking the 
Offensive Later 

It may be assumed that in this type of defense there will be 
sufficient time to dig fire trenches, construct obstacles, and, clear the 
foreground. 

The location of the fire trenches will, to a great extent, depend 
upon the amount of time available; for, a fire trench that is well located 
when the foreground is cleared, or some obstacle constructed, may be 
very badly placed if there is not enough time to do more than to prepare 
hasty entrenchments. When allotted the amount of front he is to defend, 
the company commander should, therefore, ascertain, if possible, about 
how much time he will have to strengthen his position. 

The first thing for the company commander to decide, is whether 
he will begin work by digging his fire trench, clearing the foreground or 
constructing obstacles, and it is impossible to lay down any definite rule, 
except it may be said that, generally, artificial obstacles are luxuries, 
and as such would be the last to receive attention. However, it is not 
always easy to determine which should be done first — the fire trenches 
dug, or foreground cleared. 

[618] 



676 (contd.) 

For example, if the position should be taken up in the afternoon 
and our outposts were well out to the front, it is not likely that the enemy 
would make a decisive attack before the following day, even though our 
advance guard may have been in action against the enemy's advanced 
troops. In such a case it would be better to employ a few men to work on 
the position of the fire trenches and construct a certain amount of cover, 
while the rest of the company cleared the foreground, as it is comparative- 
ly easy to dig trenches at night, but it is not so easy to site them, or to 
clear the foreground in darkness. 

If the position selected for the fire trench is very exposed to the 
enemy's fire, which would mean that the ground in front must be fairly 
open, it would be best to begin work digging trenches with the majority 
of the company and let the remainder clear away the most serious 
obstacles. 

If the position selected for the fire trench is naturally strong and 
provides more cover for the defenders than the attackers could possibly 
get within five or six hundred yards of the position, it would then be 
better to improve the field of fire by clearing the foreground, before dig- 
ging any trenches, especially if there happened to be considerable obstruc- 
tion to our nre, and view. 

Should the section of the lin^ allotted to fhe company run through 
a wood, we should first make a clearing, then construct obstacles on the 
enemy's side of the clearing and dig the fire trench last. 

The one salient, important fact we must always bear in mind 
is this: The defender must prevent the attacker from gaining superiority 
of fire. In some cases the defender may accomplish this object better 
by digging his fire trenches first and in other cases by clearing the fore- 
ground first, depending upon circumstances, and in deciding which shall 
be done first, the company commander must use his judgment and com- 
mon sense. With regard to obstacles it may be said that they can only 
delay the attack, but will not prevent it from gaining superiority of 
fire. It is most important, therefore, that we should first determine as 
nearly as possible the position that the attacker can reach but can not 
pass without gaining; superiority of fire, and then plan accordingly with 
regard to locating the fire trench, clearing the foreground, and construct- 
ing obstacles, so that we may be in the best possible circumstances to 
prevent the enemy from subduing our fire. 

An Advance Guard Is Suddenly Thrown on the Defensive by 
The Action of the Enemy 
In this case the first thing to do is to occupy as soon as possible 
the best fire position available in the immediate neighborhood. It is 
all the better if this position should happen to be ahead — the very fact 
of the company advancing, even though a few yards, will help to im- 
prove the morale of the men. However, if it is out of the question 

[619] 



676 (contd.) 

to advance, and it is extremely probable that the position we occupv 
cannot be held without soon losing superiority of fire, then a fire-position 
must be occupied in rear, but we must not fall back a single foot more 
than is absolutely necessary. We must remember that reenforcements 
are close behind us, and that any wavering or hasty retreat on our part 
may easily lead to disaster. Every inch of ground must be stubbornly 
contested, and immediately upon reaching a good fire position, we must 
defend it to the last. Let the company commander and everyone else 
bear in mind that the safety of the whole of the main body in rear and 
the success of the subsequent battle may depend upon the vigorous, 
determined action of the advanced guard. 

An Attack is Suddenly Thrown on The Defensive By The Action 
of The Enemy 
If the attacking force should be suddenly throv\^n on the de- 
fensive by the enemy, the first object of the company commander should 
be to resume the offensive just as soon as he possibly can, seizing the very 
first opportunity to renew the attack, and then, at the earliest possible 
moment gain superiority of fire, advance to a position close enough to 
charge, and charge. Naturally enough, the ground will not be the same in 
front of all the companies, and those that are favored by the terrain 
should push forward and thus relieve the strain on those that are not 
so fortunate in that respect. The momentum of the companies that thus 
press forward will carry along other companies less fortunately situated. 
We should remember that the longer the company remains on the de- 
fensive the harder will it be to have it resume the attack. As in the 
case of the advance guard, we should not fall back, if it can possibly 
be avoided; for, if we do, other companies will probably follow suit — re- 
treating is very infectious, and it works on the cumulative principle of a 
snow-ball rolling down the side of a hill. Indeed, it is generally better to 
continue occupying an indifferent fire position than to seek a better 
one farther back. We must also remember that reenforcementi 
will be coming up as rapidly as jjossible to help us, and their arrival 
should be the signal for a forward move. An advance of only a few 
yards will often change the whole moral aspect of the situation. 

An Advance Guard That Has Bouted The Enemy And Captured 

thf^ Position, Is In Turn Attacked By The Enemy And 

thrown On The Defensive 

The situation is this: Our Advance guard has defeated the lead 
ing troops of the enemy, and is in possession of the ground; the leading 
troops of the enemy are being heavily rcenforced with the view of re- 
taking the ground they lost. How should we meet the situation? To 
begin with, our attack having been successful, not only is the morale 
of our troops very high, ^ut, also, the advance guard commander will 



676 (contd.) 

be able to make more elaborate airangemeuts than would be possible in 
any ordinary meeting engagement. 

When the advance guard drove the leading troops of the enemy 
from their position it did all that was required of it for the time being; 
it is now merely called upon to retain the ground it has taken from the 
enemy. 

Assuming that we made our attack as we should, it was a some- 
what rapid operation with a very strong firing line from the beginning — 
hence, it is not likely that the companies are badly mixed up. 

The first thing for the company commander to do is to reorganize 
his company, and get the squads and platoons under their proper com- 
manders. He must then choose and occupy the best fire position avail- 
able. Let us suppose the position where we now find ourselves is bad 
for defense and that any further attack would involve the advance guard 
in a premature action against the enemy's main body. It would be 
necessary for some of the companies to remain in the position gained 
and act as an outpost, wliile the rest of the companies would be with- 
drawn to a better defensive position shortly in rear. Of course, it would 
be quite impossible to improve any of the foreground that is exposed 
to the enemy's fire. However, other parts might be cleared. Also, as 
a rule, we would have to confine our entrenchments to such as the men 
can make with their entrei. zing tools while lying down. We, therefore, 
see we must so choose our fire position as to make the most of the ground 
as it exists, and, consequently, the chances are it will be most difficult 
to insure even a fairly straight line of defense. However, we should by 
all means avoid pronounced salients in our position. (See ''Salients", 
Par. 663.) 

If we are compelled to occupy a bad or indifferent fire-position, 
we must then make the best of the situation by assum.ing a very active 
defense with counter-attacks. Remember, fire-positions are bad, as a 
rule, because the terrain in front is such that it is easy for the attacker 
to advance under cover, gain superiority of fire, assemble close to the 
defenders and charge, — and these are the very advantages the defender 
will have when he assumes the offensive and delivers a counter-attack 
over the same ground; the tables being turned, the enemy will have a 
bad fire-position, and it will be easy for the defender to advance under 
•'over, gain superiority of fire, assemble close to the enemy, and charge. 

Any fire-position that may be selected must be improved by 
intrenching as much as the enemy's fire will permit. By means of 
scouts and patrols sent out to the front and flanks, we must get all the 
information we can about the enomy — his exact position, whether he is 
intrenching, etc. 

After our previous fight during the attack of the advance 'guard, 
the men will be badly in need of water, and the company commander 
should arrange as soon as possible for them to get water. 

[621] 



676 (contd.) 

There is one thing that every one (officers, noncommissioned offi- 
cers and privates) must understand: The safety of our mmn body and 
probably the success of th^ approaching battle will depend wpon the de- 
fense of the position we are now occiipyingy and vjhich toe secured at the 
sacrifice of many casualties. It must, therefore, be held at all cost. 
An Attack That Has Routed The Enemy And Captured The Position; 
Is In Turn Attacked By The Enemy And Thrown On 
The Defensive 
Although this situation is, in the main, but a modification of the 
one we have just discussed, it is easier to handle; for, the main body being 
involved, there are more troops available for the purpose, and the troops 
are even in higher spirits than in the preceding case. 

The first thing to do is to push forward with the men who have 
just charged, and secure a good fire-position on the enemy ^s side. We 
will find our companies badly disorganized and mixed up "^ with men of 
other companies and of other regiments. As we push forward the men, 
under^ the direction of officers and noncommissioned officers, should be 
grouping themselves into squads, platoons and companies, corporals tak- 
ing charge of squads, platoon leaders grouping two or three squads to- 
gether under their com_mand, and captains assuming control of several 
of these groups. A fire-position must be established on the enemy *s side 
of the locality, because he must' be pursued immediately by fire to pre- 
vent his reforming; we must be prepared to repulse without delay, by 
fire and assault, any hostile counter-attack that m^ay be attempted; ground 
must be gained to the front so that our artillery can come up in safety 
and assist us in the fire pursuit of the enemy, and in resisting any counter- 
attack; and time must be gained to enable our troops in rear to reform 
and prepare for further offensive operations, either by way of continuing 
the attack or pressing" the pursuit. 

Having secured a good fire-position, we must next fix aiming 
marks and take ranges, and complete the reorganization of the com- 
panies, getting the officers, noncommissioned officers and privates of the 
same regiment together in squads, platoons and companies. 

The replenishment of the ammunition will be looked after by the 
proper field and stafe officers. 

Let us all bear in m.ind that whatever the circumstances may be, 
it is the duty of each and every one of us in the front line to advance 
just as soon as the enemy is driven back, and occupy a fire-position 
that will secure the ground we have captured. 

A Rear Guard Covering The Withdrawal of a Force 
From The Battlefield 

This type of defense is different from the others we have so far 
discussed, in that it is strictly passive, and special attention must be 
given to the successful withdrawal of the company as soon as it has 
sceomplished its object. 



676 (contd.) 

The object of tlie operation is to give the main body time to 
reorganize and retire in good order. The procedure followed by a rear 
guard is quite simple. The companies are deploye^d on a wide front with 
few supports and no reserves. When the enemy has been made to deploy 
and attack us, or has been compelled to work around our flank, and we 
have occupied our position as long as is safe, a part of the rear guard 
retires under the covering fire of the other part, and occupies another 
position in rear, from which it can cover the retirement of the other 
part. AVhether the right of the line should retire first, to be followed 
later by the left, or whether the center should withdraw first, or whether 
both flanks should withdraw first, leaving the center to follow later — 
these are matters to be determined by the nature of the ground and 
the comparative pressure of the attack that is brought against different 
parts of the line. The decision as to which company should retire first 
will rest with the officer in local command of the companies, but in the 
absence of specific orders, a company that is defending the only locality 
from which the line of retreat is visible, or that is holding a position 
commanding part ^f the rest of the line, would be last to retire. As a 
rule, before retiring, an officer or well trained noncommissioned dfficer 
should be sent back to ascertain the general line of defense in the next 
position in rear, and to reconnoiter suitable fire-positions, thus enabling 
the company commander to take his new position without delay. In case 
of broken country and considerable distance between the companies, 
scouts should be posted on our flanks to let us know when the adjoining 
companies begin to withdraw. The actual withdrawal must be made 
in fighting formation, and as rapidl^^ as possible, so as to increase the 
distance between the enemy and ourselves. Also, rapid withdrawal and 
prompt occupation of the next position, will enable us to delay the 
enemy more than we could by a running fight. 

In selecting fire-positions we must remember that in addition to. 
the conflicting requirements of a good field of fire and good cover for the 
defenders, the position must also permit the company to withdraw 
easily. In other words, the fire-position must permit of such easy with- 
drawal that when the company falls back it will be able to gam cover 
in rear before the enemy can occupy the position that the company has 
just vacated, and this is something we want to remember; for, it makes 
unsuitable certain fire-positions which, under other circumstances, would 
be very desirable. For example, the foot of a slope in open country with 
a bare hillside in rear, although affording a fine field of fire and splendid 
cover for the defenders, would not be selected because of the difficulty 
of withdrawing over the hill and the casualties that would doubtless 
result. In such a case as this, the top of the hill, even with lots of dead 
ground immediately in front of it, would be a much more suitable posi- 
tion. The principle to work on is this: Our object is to delay the enemy 

[623] 



677 

in Ms advance, bring him to a standstill as far as possible from our 
position, and force him to obtain superiority of fire before getting any 
closer; we have no intention of sta:5^ing a charge and consequently 
dead ground in our immediate front is immaterial; for, we will have 
retired before the enemy reaches that dead space. What we must do, 
then, is to select fire-positions that command all ground from about two 
hundred to eight hundred yards in front of the locality we are defend- 
ing. 

Care must be taken, especially in open country, to protect our 
flanks against hostile cavalry. 

There is a great deal of ammunition expended in rear guard 
action, and the ammunition supply must receive the attention of the 
company commander. 

Defense At Night 
677. Level open ground is the best kind of ground over which to make 
a night attack; for, it is easy to traverse in the darkness. However, 
a defensive position with that land of ground in front of it will have 
by day a good field of fire and will require comparatively few troops to 
defend it. We, therefore, see that, as a rule, those parts of the defensive 
line that are strongest by day are the most liable to attack by night. Of 
course, there are some exceptions to this, because, for example, a morass, 
vineyard, or other natural obstacle in front of a portion of the line, may 
make that part of the ground as impassable by night as by day. 

Obstacles are useful for delajdng or breaking up night attacks, 
especially if their location is unluiown to the enemy and there are troops 
stationed close to prevent their destruction. 

The best way to guard against night attacks is to have the front 
of the position well patrolled, and to throw out outposts, protected by 
artificial obstacles. If the outposts are forced to retire, the enemy's 
advance will be discovered and a night attack can be made upon him. 
In connection with the use of obstacles for night work, it may be re- 
marked that they should not be visible by day. The company must, there- 
fore, be able to construct obstacles in. the darkness, and should be trained 
to do so in time of peace. 

Experience has showu that, taken all in all, the bayonet is tht 
most important and reliable weapon we have for night fighting. How 
ever, the bayonet cannot be used effectively behind entrenchments— its 
great power and value is when in the hands of well-trained men who are 
prepared to charge, without even firing a shot, as soon as the enemy has 
been located. If the enemy can attack at night, there is no reason why 
we cannot do the same, even though we niay be on the defensive for the 
time being. 

The whole situation nia}^, therefore, be summed up in these few 
words: When acting on the defensive at night the whole position must 

[624} 



677 (contd.) 

be watched by sentries and patrols; the most probable avenues of ap- 
proach must be obstructed by obstacles, with outposts behind them, ready 
to delay the enemy and prevent the destruction of the obstacles; and as 
soon as the enemy has been located, if advancing to attack us, companies 
must be sent out to attack him with the bayonet — from which we see 
that by far the most important part -of defense by night is an attack 
or counter-attack. 

Defense Of A Position By An Outpost 
This type of defense is treated in detail in the following chapter, 
"The Company on Outposf . 



[625] 



678 

CHAPTER XII 

THE COMPANY ON OUTPOST 
ESTABLISHING THE OUTPOST 

678. We will now apply some of the general principles of outposts 
(see Par. 514) to a company taking up its position on the line of out- 
posts. 

Let us suppose that our battalion has been detailed for outpost 
duty. 

In order to understand more fully the duties and functions of the 
company commander, we will first consider what the major does. To 
begin with, he and the battalion will have been detailed for outpost duty 
before the march was completed, and he will have been told, amongst 
other things, what is known of the enemy and also what is known of 
other bodies of our own troops, where the main body will halt, the general 
position to be occupied by the outpost, and what the commander intends 
doing in case of attack. 

The major verbally designates, say, two companies, as the re- 
serve, and the other two companies, including our own, as the support. 
He places the senior officer of the reserve companies in command of the 
reserve and tells him where he is to go, and he indicates the general 
line the outpost is to occupy and as'^signs the amount of front each of the 
other companies is to cover. The limits of the sector so assigned should 
be marked by some distineitive features, such as trees, buildings, woods, 
streams, etc., as it is important that each company should know the 
exact limits of its frontage. He tells the comxmny commanders what 
he knows of the enemy and of our own troops so far as they affect the 
outposts, he indicates the line of resistance and how much resistance 
is to be afforded in case of attack, states whether intrenchments and 
obstacles are to be constructed, gives instructions about lighting fires and 
cooking, and states where he can be found. 

Upon receiving his orders from the major, the company com- 
mander, with a 'proyer covering detachment, moves to the locality allotted 
him and as he arrives upon the ground he is to occupy, he sends out, 
^ as temporary security, patrols or skirmishers, or both, a short distance 
in front of the general position the outguards will occupy, holding the 
rest of the company back under cover. If practicable, the company 
commander should precede the company and make a rapid examination of 
the ground. He then sends out observation groups, varying in size from 
four men to a platoon, generally a squad, to watch the country in the 
direction of the enemy. These groups constitute the outguards, and are 
just sufficient in number to cover the front of the supports, and to con- 
nect where necessary with the outguards of adjoining supports. 

Cd263 



678 (contd.) 

The company commander next selects a defensive position on the 
general line of resistance, from which not only can he command the 
approaches, but where he can also give assistance to the adjoining sup- 
ports; he then gives instructions in regard to the intrenchnients and 
obstacles, after which he makes a more careful reconnaissance of the 
section assigned him; corrects the position of the outguards, if neces- 
sary; gives them instructions as to their duties in case of attack or when 
strangers approach their posts; tells them the number (if an^^) of their 
post, the number of the outguard and support and the numbers of 
the adjoining outguards and supports; ppints out lines of retreat in case 
they are compelled to fall back to the support, cautioning the men not 
to mask the fire of the support; he tells them the names of all villages, 
rivers, etc., in view, and the places to which the wagon roads and the 
railroads lead; selects, if necessary, places for additional posts to be 
occupied at night and during fog; sees that suitable connections are 
made between him and the adjoining outguards, and between his support 
and the adjoining supports; and questions siibordiEate commanders to 
test their grasp of the situation and knowledge of their duties, and on 
returning to the support he sends a report with a .sketch to the outpost 
commander, showing the dispositions made. 

After the line of observation has been established, the support 
stacks arms and the men are permitted to remove their equipments, 
except cartridge belts. One or more sentinels are posted over these 
supports, and they guard the property and watch for signals from the 
outguards. Fires are concealed as much as possible and the messing is 
done by reliefs. Mounted messengers ordinaril}^ do not unsaddle; tliey 
rest, water and feed as directed. 

After the major has received reports from both company com- 
manders, he will himself visit the outguaids and supports and make 
such changes as he may deem necessary, immediately after which he 
wilJ submit to the comiUiander of the troops a written report, accompanied 
by a combined sketch showing the positions of the different parts of 
the outpost. The major m.ight begin his inspection of the line of 'out- 
guards before receiving the reports of the company commanders. 

In training and instructing the company in outpost work, it is 
always best to send out a few patrols and scouts an hour or two in ad- 
vance, with definite instructions as to what they are to do, and have them 
operate against the company as hostile scouts and patrols. If the rest 
of the company know that patrols and scouts are operating in their front, 
and will try to work their way through the outpost line, they will natural- 
ly take a keener interest in their work. Exercises of this kind create 
a feeling of rivalry between the scouts and patrols, who, on the one 
hand, are trying to work their way through the line of outposts, and 
the outguards and patrols, who, on the other hand, are trying to prevent 
them from so doing. It makes the work much more human. 

[627] 



679-680 681-682 

CHAPTER XIII 
THE COMPANY IN SCOUTING AND PATROLLING 

679. The general principles of patrolling are explained in Par. 455- 
90 we need not repeat them here. ' 

Many of the principles of scouting are, in reality, nothing but 
the fundamentals of patrolling, and the main function of scouting, 
reconnoitering, is also the function of a certain class of patrols. So, we 
see that scouting and patrolling are inseparably connected, and ih^ 
importance of training the members of the company in the principles 
of scouting is, therefore, evident. - l i 

680. Requisites of a good Scout. A man, to make a good scout, 
should possess the following qualifications:— 

Have good eyesight and hearing; 
Be active, intelligent and resourceful; 
Be confident and plucky; 
Be healthy and strong; 

Be able to swim, signal, read a map, make a rough sketch, and, 
of course, read and write. ^ 

681. Eyesight and Hearing. To be able to use the eye and the ear 
quickly and accurately is one of the first principles of successful scout- 
ing. Quickness and accuracy of sight and hearing are to a great extent 
a matter of training and practice. The savage, for instance, almost 
invariably has quick eyesight and good hearing, simply from continual 
practice. 

Get into the habit of seeing, observing, things— your eyesight must 
never be resting, but must be continually glancing around, in every direc- 
tion, and seeing different objects. As you walk along through the country 
get into the habit of noticing hoof-prints, wheel-ruts, etc., and observing 
the trees, houses, streams, animals, men, etc., that you pass. 

Practice looking at distant objects and discovering objects in the 
distance. On seeing distant signs, do not jump at a conclusion as to what 
they are, but watch and study them carefully first. 

Get into the habit of listening for sounds and of distinguishing 
by what different sounds are made. 

682. Finding your Way in a strange Country. The principal means 
of finding one s way in a strange country are by map reading, asking the 
w^y, the points of the compass and land marks. 

Map Reading. This, of course, presupposes the possession of a 
map. The subject of map reading is explained in Pars. 539-555. 

Asking the Way. In civilized countries one has no trouble in 
finding his way by asldng, provided, of course, he speaks the language. 
If m a foreign co untry, learn as soon as you can the equivalent of such 

"a;^o * '^c*^ ^f^^ !?°°\ P^i scouting that the author has even seen, is Baden-Poweirs 
Aids to Scouting , which was consulted in the preparation of this chapter. 

[628] 




683-684 

expressions as ^^What is the way to V^ ** Where is f 

^'What is the name of this place"?'', and a few other phrases of a simi- 
lar nature. Remember, however, that the natives may sometimes de- 
ceive you in their answers. 

Points of the Compass, A compass is, of course, the best, quickest 
and simplest way of determining the directions, except in localities where 
there^is much iron, in which case it becomes very unreliable. 

For determining the points of the compass by means of the 
North Star and the face of a watch, see Par. 689. 

The points of the compass can also be as- 
certained by facing the sun in the morning and 
spreading out your arms straight from the body. 
Before you is east; behind you, west; to your right, 
south; to your left, north. 

The points of the compass can be deter- 
mined by noting the limbs and bark of trees. The 
bark on the north side of trees is thicker and 
rougher than that on the south side, and moss is 
most generally found near the roots on the north side. The limbs and 
branches are generally longer on the south side of trees, while the 
branches on the north are usually knotty, twisted and drooped. The tops 
of pine trees dip or trend to the north. 

683. Lost. In connection with finding your way through strange 
country, it may be said, should you find you have lost your way, do not 
lose your head. Keep cool — try not to let your brains get into your 
feet. By this we mean don't run around and make things worse, and 
play yourself out. First of all, sit down and think; cool off. Then climb 
a tree, or hill, and endeaver to locate some familiar object you passed, 
so as to retrace your steps. If it gets dark and you are not in hostile 
territory, build a good big fire. The chances are you have been missed 
by your comrades and if they see the fire, they will conclude you are 
there and will send out for you. Also, if not in hostile territory, dis- 
tress signals may be given by firing your rifle, but don't waste all your 
ammunition. 

If you find a stream, follow it; it will generally lead somewhere — 
where civilization exists. 

The tendency of people who are lost is to travekin a circle use- 
lessly. 

Remember this important rule: Always notice the direction of 
the compass v)hen you start out, and inhat changes of direction you maJce 
afterwards. 

684. Landmar]:s. Landmarks or prominent features of any kind are 
a great assistance in finding one's way in a strange country. In starting 
out, always notice the hills, conspicuous trees, high buildings, towers. 

[629] 



685 

rivers, etc. For example, if starting out on a reconnaissance you see 
directly to the north of you a mountain, it will act as a guide without your 
having to refer to your compass or the sun. If you should start from 
near a church, the steeple will serve as a guide or landmark when you 
start to make your way back. 

When you pass a conspicuous object, like a broken gate, a strange- 
ly shaped rock, etc., try to remember it, so that should you desire to return 
that way, you can do so by following the chain of landmarks. On pass- 
ing such landmarks always see what they look like from the other side; 
for, that will be the side from which you will first see them upon the 
return trip. 

The secret of never getting lost is to note carefully the original 
direction in which you start, and after that to note carefully all lan&marks. 
Get in the habit of doing this in time of peace — it will then become 
second nature for you to do it in time of war. 

It may sometimes be necessary, especially in difficult country, 
such as when travelling through a forest, and over broken mountains and 
ravines, for you to make your own landmarks for finding your way 
back by * ^blazing'' (cutting pieces of bark from the trees), breaking 
small branches off bushes, piling up stones, making a line across a cross- 
road or path you did not follow, etc. 

685. Concealment and Dodging. Both in scouting and patrolling it 
must be remembered not only that it is important you should get infor- 
mation, but it is also fully as important that the enemy should not know 
you have the information — hence, the necessity of hiding yourself. And 
remember, too, if you keep yourself hidden, not only will you probably 
be able to see twice as much of what the enemy is doing, but it .may 
also save you from being captured, wounded or killed. 

Should you find the enemy has seen you, it is often advisable to 
pretend that you have not seen him, or that you have other men with 
you by signalling to imaginary comrades. 

As far as possible, keep under cover by travelling along hedges, 
banks, low ground, etc. If moving over open country, make your way 
as quickly as possible from one clump of trees or bushes to another; or, 
from rocks, hollows or such other cover as may exist, to other cover. 
As soon as you reach new cover, look around and examine your sur- 
roundings carefully. 

Do not have about you anything that glistens, and at night be 
careful not to wear anything that jingles or rattles. And remember that 
at night a lighted match can be seen as far as 900 yards and a lighted 
cigarette nearly 300 yards. In looking through a bush or over the top 
of a hill, break off a leafy branch and hold it in front of your face. 

In selecting a tree, tower or top of a house or other look-out 
place from which to observe the enemy from concealment, always plan 
beforehand how you would make your escape, if discovered and pursued. 

[630] 



686 

A place with more than one avenue of escape should be selected, so that 
if cut off in one direction you can escape from the other. For example, 
should the enemy reach the foot of a tower in which you are, you would 
be completely cut off, while if he reached a house on whose roof you 
happened*^ be, you would have several avenues of escape. 

Although trees make excellent look-out places, they must, for 
the same reasons as towers, be used with caution. In this connection it 
may be remarked unless one sees foot marks leading to a tree, men are 
apt not to look up in trees for the enem^y — hence, be careful not to leave 
foot marks. When in a tree, either stand close against the trunk, or lie 
along a large branch, so that your body will look like a part of the trunk 
or branch. 

In using a hill as a look-out place, do not make the common 
mistake of showing yourself on the skyline. Eeach the top of the hill 
slowly and gradually by crouching down and crawling, and raise your 
head above the crest by inches. In leaving, lower your head gradually 
and crawl Siway by degrees, as any quick or sudden movement on the 
sky-line is likely to attract attention. And, remember, just because you 
donH happen to seen the enemy that is no sign that he is not about. At 
maneuvers and in exercises soldiers continually make the mistake of 
exposing themselves on the skyline. 

At night confine yourself as much as possible to low ground, ditch- 
es, etc. This will keep you down in the dark and will enable you, in turn, 
to see outlined against the higher ground any enemy that may approach 
you. 

At night especially, but also during the day, the enemy will 
expect you along roads and paths, as it is easier to travel along roads 
and paths than across country' and they also serve as good guides in find- 
ing your way. As a rule, it is best to use the road until it brings you 
near the enemy and then leave it and travel across country. You will 
thus be able better to avoid the outposts and patrols that will surely be 
watching the roads. 

Practice in time of peace the art of concealing yourself and ob- 
serving passers-by. Conceal yourself near some frequented road and 
imagine the people traveling over it are enemies whose numbers you 
wish to count and whose conversation you wish to overhear. Select a 
spot where they are not likely to look for you, and which has one or 
more avenues of escape; choose a position with a background that 
matches your clothes in color; keep quiet, sldn your eyes; stretch your 
ears. 

^ A mounted scout should always have wire cutters when operat- 
ing in a country where there are wire fences. 

686. Tracking. By ^ bracking'' we mean following up footmarks. The 
same as the huntsman tracks his game so should we learn how to track 

[631] 



686 (contd.) 

the enemy. One of tbe first things to learn in tracking is the pace at 
which the man or horse was traveling when the track was made. 

A horse walking makes pairs of footmarks, each hind foot be- 
ing close to the impression of the forefoot. At a trot the tracks are 
similar, but the pairs of footmarks are farther apart and deeper, the 
toe especially being more deeply indented than at the walk. At a canter 
there are two single footmarks and then a pair. At a gallop the foot- 
marks are single and deeply indented. As a rule, the hind feet are 
longer and narrower than the forefeet. 

In the case of a man walking, the whole flat of the foot comes 
equally on the ground, the footmarks usually about 30 inches apart. If 
running, the toes are more deeply indented in the ground, and the foot- 
marks are considerably farther apart than when walking. Note the 
difference between footmarks made by soldier's shoes and civilian's shoes, 
and those made by men and those made by women and children. 

Study the difference between the tracks by a gun, a carriage, an 
escort wagon, an automobile, a bicycle, etc., and the direction iu whicli 
they were going. 

la addition to being able to determine the pace of tracks, it 
is most important that, you should be able to tell how old they are. How- 
ever, ability to do this with any degree of accuracy, requires a vast 
amount of practice. A great deal depends on the kind and the state 
ot the ground and the weather. For example, if on a dry, windy day 
you tollow a certain track over varying ground, you will find that on 
light sandy soil, for instance, it ^ill look old in a very short time, be- 
cause liiyy damp earth that may have been kicked up from under the 
surface will dry very quickly to the same color as the rest of the sur- 
face, and the edge of the footmark will soon be rounded off by the breeze 
blowing over the dry du^t. The same track in damp ground will look 
much fresher, and in damp clay, in the shade of trees, a track which 
may be a day old will look quite fresh. 

The following are clues to the age of tracks: Spots of rain having 
fallen on them since they were made, if, of course, you know when the 
rain fell; the crossing of other tracks over the original ones; the 
freshness or coldness of the droppings of horses and other animals (due 
allowance being m^ade for the effect of the sun, rain, etc.), and, in the 
case of grass that has been trodden down, the extent to which it has since 
dried or withered. 

Having learned to distinguish the pace and age of tracks, the 
next thing to do is to learn how to follow them over all kinds of ground. 
This is a most difficult accomplishment and one that requires a vast 
amount of practice to attain even fair proficiency. 

In tracl%ing where it is difficult to sec the track, such as on hard 
g^round, or in the ^rass. note the dii'octinn of {lie last fool {n'iist Hnit 

[632] 



687 

you can see, then look on ahead of you a few yards, say, 20 or 30, in 
the same direction, and, in grass, you will probably see the blades bent 
or trodden, and, on ground, you will probably see stones displaced or 
scratched — or some other small sign which otherwise would not be 
noticed. These indistinct signs, seen one behind the other, give a 
track that can be followed with comparative ease. 

Tf you should lose the track, try to find it again by placing your 
handkerchief, hat, or other object on the last footmark you noticed, and 
then work around it in a wide circle, with a radius of, say, 30, 50, or 100 
yards, choosing the most favorable ground, soft ground, if possible. If 
with a patrol, only one or two men should try to find the onward track; 
for, if everyone starts in to find it, the chances are the track will be 
obliterated with their footmarks. In trying to find the continuation 
of a track this way, always place yourself in the enemy's position, look 
around the country, imagine what you would have done, and then 
move out in that direction and look for his tracks in soft ground. 

Practice 

In order to learn the appearance of tracks, get a suitable piece 
of soft ground, and across this have a man walk and then run, and have 
a horse walk, trot, canter and gallop. The next day make similar tracks 
alongside the first ones and then notice the difference between the two. 
Also, make tracks on ordinary ground, grass, sand, etc., and practice 
following them up. Finally, practice tracking men sent out for the pur 
pose. The work will probably be very difficult, even disheartening at 
first, but you will gradually improve, if you persevere. 

Above all things, get into the habit of seeing any tracks that 
may be on the ground. When out walking, when going through exer- 
cises at maneuvers, and at other times, always notice what tracks are 
on the ground before you, sind study them. 

The following exercises in scouting and patrolling afford excellent 
practice and training: — 

687. The Mouse and Cat Contest. 1. A section of country three or 
four miles square, with well-defined limits, is selected. The boundaries 
are made known to all contestants and anyone going outside of them 
will be disqualified. 

2. Two patrols of eight men each are sent out as ''mice*'. They 
occupy any positions they may wish within the boundaries named, and 
conceal themselves to watch for hostile patrols. 

3. Half an hour later two other squads, wearing white bands around 
their hats, or having other distinguishing marks, are sent out as ''cats" 
to locate, if possible, and report upon the position of the ''mice'^ 

4. An hour is fixed when tlic exercise slinll oud, .-uid if witbin tlio 
givpri time fh<? *S';i(s'' hnvo nni dis<*<)\ <M'rd \\\v ''iiii<*(»", fho ''mice" win. 



688 

5. The ''cats'' will write reports of any "mice" patrols they may 
see. 
^ Rules 

1. An umpire (officer or noncommissioned officer) goes with 
each patrol and his decisions as to capture and other matters are the 
orders of the company commander. The umpires must take every possible 
precaution to conceal them^selves so as not to reveal the position of the 
patrols with which they are. 

Each umpire will carry a watch, all watches being set with that 
of the company commander before the exercise commences. 

2. Any ''cat" patrol coming within 50 yards of a "mouse" patrol, 
without seeing the "mice," is considered captured. 

3. When the time is up, the umpires will bring in the patrols and 
report to the comj^any commander. 

688. Flag-Stealing Contest. 1. A section of country of suitable size, 
with well-defined limits, is selected, the boundaries being made known 
to the contestants. 

2. The contestants are divided into two forces of about 20 men each, 
and each side will establish three Cossack posts along a general line desig- 
nated by the company commander, the two positions being selected facing 
each other and being a suitable distance apart. The men not forming 
part of the Cossack posts will be used as reconnoitering patrols. 

3. About three-quarters of a mile in rear of the center of each line 
of outposts four flags will be planted, in line, about 30 yards apart. 

4. The scouts and patrols of each force will try to locate the out- 
posts of the other force, and then to work their way around or between 
them, steal the flags and bring them back to their own side. They will 
endeavor to prevent the enemy from doing the same. 

5. One scout or patrol will not carry away more than one flag at a 
time, and will have to return to their side safely with the flag before they 
can come back and capture another. 

6. Scouts may work singly or in pairs. Any scout or patrol coming 
within 80 yards of a stronger hostile party, or Cossack post, will be con- 
sidered as captured, if seen by the enemy, and if carrying a captured flag 
at the time, the flag will not count as having been captured. Of course, 
if a scout or patrol can pass within 80 yards of the enemy without being 
discovered, it may do so. 

7. An umpire (officer or noncommissioned officer) will be with each 
Cossack post, each patrol, and at the position of the flags. 

8. The hour when the exercise ends will be designated in advance 
and at that hour the umpires will bring in the Cossack posts and patrols. 
The same requirements regarding watches obtains as in the Mouse and Cat 
Contest. 

[634] 



688 (contd.) 

9. At the conclusion of the contest the commander of each side will 
hand in to the company commander all sketches and reports made by his 
men. 

10. Points will be awarded as follows: 

Each flag captured, 5. 

For each sketch and hostile report of the position of a Cossack 
post, 3. 

For each report of movements of a hostile patrol, 2. 
The side getting the greatest number of points will win. 

11. Umpires may penalize the contestants for a "Violation of the 
rules. 

The same contest may be carried out at night, substituting lighted 
Japanese lanterns for the flags. 



[OS] 



689 

CHAPTER XIV* 

NIGHT OPERATIONS 

689. Importance. Because of the long range and great accuracy of 
modern fire-arms there has been in recent years a marked increase in 
the practice of night operations. During the Russo-Japanese War both 
sides frequently resorted to night attacks, especially to cover ground that 
could not, because of hostile fire, be traversed by day. There is no doubt 
that in future wars night operations will be of common occurrence, not 
only for massing troops under cover of darkness in favorable positions 
for further action, but also for the actual assault of positions. 

GENERAL PRINCIPLES 
(From Infantry Drill Regulations. The paragraph numbers follow the 

paragraph.) 

The Attack. To enable large forces to gain ground towar<: 
the enemy, it may sometimes be cheaper and quicker in the end to 
move well forward and to deploy at night. In such case the area in 
which tae deployment is to be made should, if practicable, be occupied 
by covering troops before dark. 

The deployment will be made with great difficulty unless the 
ground has been studied by daylight. The deployment gains little unless 
it establishes the fixing line well within effective range of the enemy's 
main position. (450). 

Attack of Fortifications. If the enemy is strongly fortified and 
time permits, it may be advisable to wait and approach the charging 
point under cover of darkness. The necessary reconnaissance and ar- 
rangements should be made before dark. If the charge is not to be 
made at once, the troops intrench the advanced position, using sand bags 
if necessary. Before daylight the foreground should be cleared of 
obstacles. (482). 

If the distance is short and other conditions are favorable, the 
charge may be made without fire preparation. If made, it should be 
launched with spirit and suddenness at the break of day. (483). 

Deployment for Defense. If a night attack or close approach 
by the enemy is expected, troops in a prepared position should strengthen 
the outguards and tiring line and construct as numerous and effective 
obstacles as possible. Supports and local reserves should move close to 
the firing line and should, with the firing line, keep bayonets fixed. If 
practicable, the front should be illuminated, preferably from the flanks 
of the section. (509). 



*Many of the hints in this chapter were gathered from "Night Operations 
for Infantry", by Colonel Dawkins, British Army, and "Night Movements", trans- 
lated from the Japanese by Lieut. Burnett, U. S. Army. 

[636] 



689 (contd.) 

Only short range fire is of any value in resisting night attacks. 
Tlu' rrftyojiet is IIm^ <'hiot' reliance. (510). 

NIGHT 0PERAT10N8 

By employing night oi)eratious troops make use of the cover of 
darkness to minimize losses from hostile fire or to escape observation. 
Night operations may also be necessary for the purpose of gaining time. 
("Control is difficult and confusion is frequently unavoidable. 

It may be necessary to take advantage of darkness in order 
to assault from a point gained during the day, or to approach a point 
from which a daylight assault is to be made, or to effect both the ap 
proach and the assault. (558). 

Offensive and defensive night operations should be practiced 
frequently in order tiiat trooi)s may learn to cover ground in the dark 
and arrive at a destination quietly and in good order, and in order to 
train officers in the necessary preparation and reconnaissance. 

Only simple and well-appointed formations should be employed. 

Troops should be thoroughly trained in the necessary details — 
e. g., night patrolling, night marching, and communication at night. (559). 

The ground to be traversed should be studied by daylight and, 
if practicable, at night. It should be cleared of hostile detachments be- 
fore dark, and, if practicable, should be occupied by covering troops. 

Orders must be formulated with great care and clearness. Each 
unit must be given a definite objective and direction, and care must 
be exercised to avoid collision between units. 

Whenever contact with the enemy is anticipated, a distinctive 
badge should be worn by all. (56(M. 

Preparations must be made with secrecy. When the movement 
is started, -and not until then, the officers and men should be acquainted 
with the general design, the composition of the whole force, and should 
be given such additional information as will insure cooperation and 
eliminate mistakes. 

During the movement every precaution must be taken to keep 
secret the fact that troops are abroad. 

Unfriendly guides must frequently be impressed. These should 
be secured against escape, outcry, or deception. 

Fire action should be avoided in offensive operations. In general, 
pieces should not be loaded. Men must be trained to rely upon the 
bayonet and to use it aggressively. (561.) 

TiOng night marches should be made only over well-defined routes. 
March discipline must be rigidly enforced. The troops should be marched 
in as compact a formation as practicable, with the usual covering de- 
tachments. Advance and rear guard distances should be greatly reduced. 
They are shortest when the mission is an offensive one. T'le connecting 
files are numerous. (562). 

[637] 



689 (contd.) - 

A night advance made with a view to making an attack by day 
usually terminates with the hasty construction of intrenchments in the 
dark. Such an advance should be timed so as to allow an hour or more 
of darkness for intrenching. 

An advance that it to terminate in an assault at the break of day 
should be timed so that the troops will not arrive long before the assault 
is to be made; otherwise the advantage of partial surprise will be lost 
and the enemy will be allowed to reenforce the threatened point. (563). 

The night attack is ordinarily confined to small forces, or to minor 
engagements in a general battle, or to seizure of positions occupied by 
covering or advanced detachments. Decisive results are not often ob- 
tained. 

Poorly disciplined and untrained troops are unfit for night at- 
tacks or for night operations demanding the exercise of skill and care. 

Troops attacking at night can advance close to the enemy in com- 
pact formations and without suffering loss from hostile artillery or in- 
fantry fire. The defender is ignorant of the strength or direction of the 
attack. 

A force which makes a vigorous bayonet charge in the dark Vill 
often throw a much larger force into disorder. (564). 

Reconnaissance should be made to ascertain the position and 
strength of the enemy and to study the terrain to be traversed. Officers 
who are to participate in the attack should conduct this reconnaissance. 
Reconnaissance at night is especially valuable. Features that are dis- 
tinguishable at night should be carefully noted, and their distances from 
the enemy, from the starting point of the troops, and from other import- 
ant points should be made known. 

Preparations should have in view as complete a surprise as pos- 
sible. An attack once begun must be carried to its conclusion, even if 
the surprise is not as complete as was planned or anticipated. (565). 

The time of night at which the attack should be made depends 
upon the object sought. If a decisive attack is intended, it will generally 
yield the best results if made just before daylight. If the object is 
merely to gain an intrenched position for further operations, an earlier 
hour is necessary in order that the position gained may be intrenched un- 
der cover of darkness. (566). 

The formation for attack must be simple. It should be carefully 
effected and the troops verified at a safe distance from the enemy. The 
attacking troops should be formed in compact lines and with strong sup- 
ports at short distances. The reserve should be far enough in rear to 
avoid being drawn into the action until the commander so desires. Bayo- 
nets are fixed, but pieces are not loaded. 

Darkness causes fire to be wild and ineffective. The attacking 
troops should march steadily on the enemy without firing, but should be 
prepared and determined to fight vigorously with the bayonet. 



689 (contd.) 

In advancing to the attack the aim should be to get as close as 
possible to the enemy before being discovered, then to trust to the 
bayonet. 

If the assault is successful, preparations must be made at once 
to repel a counter-attack. (567). 

On the defense, preparations to resist night attacks should be 
made by daylight, whenever such attacks are to be feared. 

Obstacles placed in front of a defensive position are especially 
valuable to the defense at night. Many forms of obstacles which would 
give an attacker little concern in the daytime become serious hindrances 
at night. 

After dark the foreground should be illuminated whenever prac- 
ticable and strong patrols should be pushed to the front. 

When it is learned that the enemy is approaching, the trenches are 
manned and the supports moved close to the firing line. 

Supports fix bayonets, but do not load. Whenever practicable and 
necessary they should be used for counter-attacks, preferably against a 
hostile flank. 

The defender should open fire as soon as results may be expected. 
This fire may avert or postpone the bayonet combat, and it warns all 
supporting troops. It is not likely that fire alone can stop the attack. 
The defender must be resolved to fight with' the bayonet. 

Ordinarily fire will not be effective at ranges exceeding 50 yards 

A white rag around the muzzle of the rifle will assist in sighting 
the piece when the front sight is not visible. (568). 

TEAINING OF THE COMPANY 

Night movements are amongst the most diflficult operations of 
war, and, therefore require the most careful, painstaking and thorough 
training and instruction of troops in all matters pertaining thereto. The 
history of night fighting shows that in most cases defeat is due to dis- 
organization through panic. It is said that in daylight ihe moral is to 
the physical as three is to one. That being the case, it is hard to say 
what the ratio is at night, when a general atmosphere of mystery, uncer- 
tainty and fear of surprise envelops the operations, and, of necessity 
affects the nerves of the men. The vital importance, therefore, of ac- 
ctlstoming troops as much as we can in peace to the conditions that will 
obtain in night fighting, cannot be overestimated. The following out- 
line shows the subjects in which individual and collective instruction 
and training should be given: ^ 

INDIVinUAL TRAIXING 

General. The first thing to be done is to accustom the soldier 
to darkness and to teacli him to overcome the nervousness which is 
natural to the average man in darkness. 

[639] 




689 (contd.) 

The best way to do this is to begin by training him in the 
use of his powers of vision and hearing under conditions of darkness, 
which are strange to him. Th6 company should be divided into squads 
for this instruction. 

Vision. Take several men to ground with which they are familiar. 
Have them notice the different appearance which objects present at 
night, when viewed in different degrees of light and shade; the com- 
parative visibility of men under different conditions of dress, back- 
ground, etc.; the ease with which bright objects are seen; the difference 
between the visibility of men standing on a skyline and those stand- 
ing on a slope. Post the men in pairs at intervals along a line which the 
instructors will endeavor to cross without being seen. The instructors 
should cross from both sides, so as to compel observation in both direc- 
tions. Have a man (later, several) walk away from the rest of the 
men and when he is about to disappear from view, halt him, and estimate 
the distance. Send a man (later, several) outside the field of vision, to 
advance on the rest of the men. Halt him when he enters the field of 
vision and estimate the distance. Send a number of men outside the 
limit of vision and then let them advance on the rest of the men, using 
cover and seeing how near they can approach unobserved. 

Hearing. Place a number of men a few yards apart and make 
them guess what a noise is caused by, and its approximate position. The 
rattle of a meat can, the movement of a patrol, the worJdng of the bolt 
of a rifle, the throwing down of accoutrements, low talking, etc., may 
be utilized. Take special pains to impress upon the men the penetrat 
ing power of the human voice, and the necessity of preserving abso 
lute silence in night operations. Have blank cartridges fired and teach 
the men to judge their direction and approximate distance away. 



Finding Bearings. Show the men how 
to determine the points of the compass from 
the North Star. The Big Dipper constellation 
looks like this: 



The North Star is on the prolongation of a line joining the two 
"pointing" stars, and at above five times the distance between the two 
Rtars, At another tim_e have those same m.en individually locate the North 
Star. Using this star as a guide, practice the men moving in different 
directions, by such commands as, ''Smith, move southeast". ''Jones^ 
move northwest", etc. 

[640] 



689 (contd.) 

To test a man^s ability to keep a given direction when moving 
in the darkness, choose a spot from which no prominent land marks are 
visible, advance toward it accompanied. by a man, from a distance not 
less than 200 paces. While advancing the soldier must take his bear- 
ings. On arriving at the spot chosen the instructor will turn the 
soldier around rapidly two or three times and then have him continue to 
advance in the same direction as before. No prominent landmarks should 
be visible from the starting point. 

Moving in the Dark. Form four or five men in line with about 
one pace interval, the instructor being on one of the flanks. Place some 
clearly visible mark, such as a lantern, for the instructor to march on. 
Impress upon the men the importance of lifting their feet up high and 
bringing them to the ground quietly and firmly, and of keeping in touch 
with the guide and conforming to his movements without sound or signal. 
The pace should be slow and frequent halts should be made to test 
the promptness of the men in halting and advancing together. As the 
line advances, each man will in turn take his place on the flank and act 
as guide. The light ou which the men are marching should be hidden 
from view at intervals, in order to test the ability of the men to main- 
tain the original direction. Later on, the number of men in a line may 
be increased considerably. The rougher the ground, the darker the 
night and the longer the line, the slawer must the pace be and the more 
frequent the halts. After passing an obstacle men instinctively line up 
parallel to it, and consequently if the obstacle does not lay at right 
angle to the line of advance, the direction will be lost; so, bo sure to 
^:uard against this. ^*- 

Night Fencing. Practice the men in charging in the dark against 
a white cloth or the dummy figure of a man. In the beginning have the 
figure in a fixed place, but later have the soldier charge seeking the 
figure, and not knowing just exactly where it is beforehand. 

Night Entrenching. It is frequently necessary in time of war 
to dig trenches at night in front of the enemy, and while this work 
is easy in the moonlight, it is very difiicult in the dark. Bear in mind 
the following points: 

1. The tendency is to make the trench too narrow; hence, guard 
against this. 

2. Be careful not to throw tlje earth too far or too near. 
'^'. JJo not strike your neighbor's tools in working. 

4. Do not use the pick unless n«»ce8sary, because it makes consider 
able noise. 

5. Do not scrape the tools together in order to get off the dirt; uBf> 
a chip of wood or the toe of the shoe. 

6. Make as little noise ns [)ossi})1o in digging and handling your 
tools. 

[641] 



689 (contd.) 

7. If discovered by the enemy's searchlights, do not become exeited 
or confused; simply lie down. 

8. If attacked by the enemy, do not get rattled and throw your tools 
away — put them in some fixed place where they can be found again. 

EQLuipment. At first the men should be taken out without arms, 
but later on they should be trained to work in full equipment. Teach 
every man what parts of his equipment are likely to make a noise 
under special circumstances, such as lying down, rising, crossing ob- 
stacles, etc., and instruct him how to guard against it. Bayonets should 
always be fixed, but in order to avoid accidents the scabbard should be 
left on them. 

From the beginning of the training continually impress upon the 
men that it is absolutely criminal to fire without orders during a night 
operation and that the bayonet is the only weapon he can use with 
advantage to himself and safety to his comrades. 

IsTight Firing. As a rule men fire too high in the dark. They 
must, therefore, be cautioned not to raise the rifle above the horizontal, 
or incline the upper part of the body to the rear. When the firing is 
stopped be sure to turn on the safety-lock. Experience during the 
Eusso-Ja})anese War taught the Japanese the kneeling position is the 
most suitable for horizontal firing. The following method, to be con- 
ducted in daytime, may be employed in training the soldier to hold 
his rifle parallel to the ground while firing in the dark: — Have each 
soldier, kneeling, close his eyes and bring his rifle to the position of 
aim, barrel parallel to the ground. With the rifle in this position, let 
him open his eyes and examine it. Then have this done by squad, by 
command. When they become proficient in this movement, have them 
close their eyes and while the eyes are closed, put up a target and have 
them practice horizontal firing, opening their eyes each time after 
pulling the trigger and then exam.ining the position of the piece. 

C0LLECTI\^ TRAILING 

At first practice squads, then the platoons and later the com- 
pany in simple movem^ents, such as squads right and left, right and left 
oblique, etc., gradually leading up to more complicated ones in close 
and extended order, such as right and left front into line, advancing in 
platoon and squad columns, charging the enemy, etc. As far as possible 
the movements should be executed by simple prearranged signals from 
the unit commanders. The signals, which must not be visible to the 
enemy, may be made with a white* handkerchief or a white flag, if the | 
night be not too dark; with an electric flashlight, a dark lantern or 
luminous disk. The light of the flashlight or lantern must be screened, 
so it cannot be seen by the enemy. The following signals are suggested: 
To advance: Eaise vertically the lantern or other object with which 
the signal is made. 

[642] 



689 (contd.) 

To halt: Lower and raise the object several times. 

To lie down: Bring the object down near the ground. 

To form squad columns: Move the object several times to the right and 

left. 

To form platoon columns: Describe several circles. 

As skirmishers: Move the object front no rear several times. 

Night Marches. In acting as an adv^tnce guard to a column, the 
company would send out a point a few yards ahead, which would be 
followed by the rest of the company. Three or four scouts should be 
sent out a hundred yards or so ahead of the point. They should ad- 
vance at a quick pace, keeping in the shadow on the side of the road, 
being constantly on the alert, using their ears even more than their 
eyes. They will halt to listen at cross-roads and suspicious places, and 
move on again when they hear the company approaching. Should the 
enemy be discovered, one of the scouts will return to warn the advance 
guard— the others will conceal themselves and watch. Under no cir- 
cumstances must the scouts ever fire, unless it be for the purpose of 
warning the company and there is no other way of doing so. The fol- 
lowing is suggested as a good formation for a company acting as advance 
guard at night: 




DJJPOJinOM or A CO /I PA NY 

' APVANCt Ol/A^P-NJCTrtT, 

A company marching alone would move in the same formation as when 
acting as advance guard, except that, it would protect its rear with a 
few scouts. Of course, the nature of the country and proximity and 
activity of the enemy, will determine the best formation to be used, 
but whatever the formation may be, always remember to cover well 
your front, rear and flanks, with scouts, whose distance away will vary 
with the light and nature of the country. Don't forget that protection 
in rear is very important. 

The men must be warned against firing, smoldng, talldng, strik- 
ing matches, making noise, etc. They should also be informed of the 
object in view, direction of the enemy, etc. 

[643] 



690-691 

In night marches the rests should not exceed five minutes; other- 
wise, many men will fall asleep. 

OUTPOSTS 

Careful training in outpost duty at night is very harassing, but, 
in view of its importance, should not be neglected. This instruction 
should be given with the greatest thoroughness, strictness and attention 
to detail. — 

690. Sentries Challenging, fn challenging sentries must be careful 
to avoid any noise that would disclose their position. In fact, chal- 
lenging by voice should be reduced to a minimum by arranging a system 
of signals by which the officers of the day, patrols, etc., can be recognized. 
The following signals, any one of which may be decided upon, which 
would be made first by the sentry and then answered by the approaching 
party, are suggested: Clap the hands together twice; strike the ground 
twice with the butt of the rifle; strike the butt of the rifle twice with 
the hand; whistle softly twice. The replying signal would be the 
same as the sentry ^s signal, except that in case of the use of the butt 
of the rifle, an officer would reply by striking twice on his revolver 
holster. After repeating the signal once, if it is not answered, the 
sentry will challenge with the voice, but no louder than is necessary. In 
case of a patrol only one man will advance to be recognized after the 
signal has been answered. The sentry must always allow persons to 
approach fairly near before challenging. 

691. Sentries Firing. Anyone who has been through a campaign 
knows how nervous green sentries are, and how quick they are about 
firing. During the beginning of the Philippine Campaign the author 
heard of several cases where sentries fired on fire-flies several hundred 
yards away. Never fire unless it be absolutely necessary to give an 
alarm, or unless you can clearly distinguish the enemy and are fairly 
certain of hitting him. In the French Army in Algeria, there is a 
rule that any sentry who fires at night must produce a corpse, or be 
able to show by blood marks that he hit the person fired at. If he can do 
neither, he is punished for giving a false alarm. 

Marking of Route from Outguards to Supports. The route from 
the support to the outguards, and from pickets to their sentries, should, 
if necessary, be clearly marked with scraps of paper, green sticks with the 
bark peeled off, or in any other suitable way. 

Readiness for Action. The supports should always be ready for 
action. The men must sleep with their rifles beside them and in such 
places that they will be able to fall, in promptly in case of attack. Some 
men have a way of sleeping with their blankets over their heads. This 
should not be allowed — the ears must always be uncovered. The com- 
mander, or the second in command, with several men, should remain 

[6441 



691 (contd.) 

awake. When the commander lies down he should do so near the 
sentry, which is always posted over the support. 

GENERAL 

Connections. It is of the greatest importance that proper cou- 
nection be maintained between the different parts of a command engaged 
in night operations. It is astonishing with what facility units go 
astray and how difficult it is for them to find their way back where 
they belong. 

Preparation. It matters not what the nature of the night opera- 
tion may be, the most careful preparation is necessary. Success often 
depends upon the care and thoroughness with which the plans are made. 

All possible eventualities should be thought of and provided for 
as far as practicable. The first thing to do is to get as much informa- 
tion as possible about the ground to be covered and the position of the 
enemy, and care must be taken to see that the information is accurate. 
. Reconnaissance must be made by night as well as by day; for, ground 
looks very different at night from what it does during the day. 



[6451 



692-693-694-695-696 

CHAPTER XV 
FIELD ORDERS OF ENLISTED MEN 

692. The men of the company should learn the substance of the fol- 
lowing orders: 

Platoon Leaders 

693. In Battle 
My field orders are: — 

1. In battle I will do all I can to preserve the integrity of squads; 
I will designate new squad leaders to replace those disabled, and will 
organize new squads when necessary. 

2. On the firing line I will carry out faithfully and thoroughly the 
duties stated in paragraph 289. 

3. In battle, in camp, on the march , and at all other times, I will 
see that the guides, squad leaders and privates around me carry out 
their field orders, and that they comply with the known wishes and desires, 
of the company commander, and I will myself obey and carry out so much 
of the field orders of the privates as apply to me. 

694. Guides 
My field orders are: — 

1. I will endeavor, by assisting officers and platoon leaders and other- 
wise, to preserve the integrity of squads. 

2. On the firing line I will carry out faithfully and thoroughly the 
duties stated in paragraph 289. 

3. In battle, in camp, on the march, and at all other times, I will 
see that the squad leaders and privates around me carry out their field 
orders and that the known wishes and desires of the company commander 
are complied with, and I will myself obey and carry out so much of the 
field orders of the privates as apply to me. 

695. Squad Leaders 
My field orders are: — 

1. In battle I will do all I can to preserve the integrity of my squad. 

2. On the firing line I will carry out faithfully and thoroughly tho 
duties stated in paragraph 289. 

3. In battle, in camp, on the march, and at all other times, I will 
see that the privates around me carry out their field orders and that they 
comply with the known wishes of the company commander, and I will 
myself obey and carry out so much of the field orders of the privates 
as apply to me. 

696. Musicians 
My field orders are: — 

1. Whenever the company is deployed, I will at once join the cap- 
tain and remain with him until further orders. 

[646] 



697 

2. On the firing line I will carry out faithfully and thoroughly the 
duties stated in paragraph 235, and in case the company forms part 
of a battalion, I will be on the constant look out for orders and signals 
from the battalion commander. 

3. When the order to charge is sounded I will at once repeat it. 

4. I will obey and carry out as much of the field orders of a private 
as apply to me, and I will at all times faithfully comply with the known 
wishes and desires of the company commander. 

697. Privates 

IN BATTLE 

My battle orders are: — 

1. I will not straggle, nor will I under any circumstances skulk, 
but, at the command to advance, I will always do so at once. 

2. In advancing by rushes, or any other way, I will always endeavor 
to be the first man to start the advance. I am aware of the fact that 
in advancing by rushes the last men to reach the new position are ex- 
posed to the enemy's fire that much longer, and, consequently, are more 
apt to get hit than the others. 

3. I will not endeavor to carry any wounded to the rear. That is 
the business of the litter-bearers. My business is to remain on the 
firing liie and help with my rifle. 

4. I will not fail to change my sight when new ranges are announced, 
nor will I forget to change my sight when advancing by rushes, whether 
or not the new range is announced. 

5. I will never lose an opportunity to replenish my ammunition 
supply from the belts of the dead and wounded. The time may come 
before the fight is over when ammunition will be worth a hundred 
times its weight in gold. 

6. I will use a rest for my rifle whenever I can. It will improve 
my shooting. 

7. I will obey at once all the commands and orders of my squad 
leader, and platoon commander. 

8. In case of surprise, excitement or confusion, I will at once listen 
for the orders of my officers and noncommissioned officers, and I will obey 
them immediately and implicitly. 

9. I will take advantage of cover, but, if by so doing, I cannot see 
the enemy, I will then get where I can see him; for, it is much more 
important that I should be able to see the enemy so as to shoot at him, 
than it is for me to conceal myself from his sight. I will always take 
special pains to avoid the sky-line (the tops of hill§i and ridges) ; for, 
a man on the sky-line loojns up as a clear, distinct target. 

10. When on the firing line, I will be on the lookout for signals and 
orders from my squad leaders; I will exercise proper care in setting my 
sights and delivering my fire; I will aim deliberately; I will observe the 

[6471 



689-699 

enemy carefully, increase my fire when tlie target is favorable and cease 
firing when the enemy disappears; I will not neglect a target because it 
is not very distinct ; I will not waste my ammunition, but will be economical 
with it. 

(Sharpshooters and expert riflemen.) I will be on the lookout for 
the enemy's oflacers and will fire at every one I see. 

11. I will use the ammunition in bandoleers first. I will keep thirty 
(30) rounds in the right pocket section of my belt as a reserve to be 
used only when ordered by an officer. (Par. 551, Infantry Drill Regula- 
tions). 

12. When reenforcing the firing line I ^Yi^ find out at once the range 
and target from the men already there. 

13. I will at all times make every possible effort not to get separated 
from my squadT, but should I unavoidably become separated, I will im- 
mediately try to rejoin it. Should I fail in this, I will then join the 
nearest squad and put myself under the orders of its leader. Should I 
not. be able to do this, and thus find myself without a leader for the 

•time being, I will not lose my head, but will go on fighting on my own 
hook, remembering that the only way for us to win the battle is for each 
and every man to fight, fight, FIGHT for all that he is worth. To give 
up fighting will only make it just that much easier for the enemy to kill 
me and my comrades. 

689. NIGHT OPERATIONS 

My orders in night operations are:= — 

1. I will not talk or make other noise, but will preserve absolute 
silence. Nor will I smoke or strike matches, because the light might 
oe seen by the enemy. 

2. I will be constantly on the lookout for signals and orders from my 
officers and noncommissioned officers, and I will obey at once all signals 
and orders. 

3. If ordered to fire, I will be sure to hold my piece parallel to the 
ground, so as not to shoot high. 

4. Under no circumstances will I ever fire in a night movement un- 
less ordered by a superior, or unless I am placed in a position where I 
must fire in order to give the alarm. 

699. OUTPOST ORDERS 

My orders as a sentry on outpost are:— ^ 

1. The number of my post (if any) is No , of Outguard No. 

Outguard No is on my right, and No , on my left. 

2. The support of this outguard is located (define location), and 

if compelled to fall back, I will retreat (state line of retreat). 



699 (contd.) 

^ ^- (If any). There are advance detachments in front of me, 

^ located as follows (give location), and*. friendly patrols are oper- 
ating in my front. 

4. Should any friendly patrol attempt to cross the outpost line near 
me without teJling me who they are, where they are going, about how 

. long they will be out and how they will return, I will halt them and get 
this information before allowing them to proceed. 

5. The enemy is (or is supposed to be) (define location as 

, accurately as possible), and if he approaches us, he will very likely do 

80 by way of (state direction from which the enemy 

is expected). 

6. In case the enemy approaches, I will (state fully and speci- 
fically what you would do.) 

7. I know the names of all the villages, streams and other prominent 
features in sight and also where the roads lead. The village over yon- 
der (pointing) is ; this road (pointing) leads to ; that high 

mountain is called , etc. 

8. I will keep a constant watch to the front and flanks and will 
pay special attention to unusual or suspicious noises or occurrences. 

9. If I see any indications of the enemy, I will at once notify'thc 
outguard commander. In case of great and immediate danger or in case 
of attack, I will give the alarm by firing my piece rapidly. 

10. Officers, noncommissioned officers and detachments that I recog- 
nize as parts of the outposts, and officers that I know have authority 
to do so, will be allowed to pass in and out of the outpost line. 1 will 
detain all others and notify the commander of the outguard. 

11. I will fire upon individuals or detachments who fail to halt, or, 
otherwise disobey me after a second warning, or sooner, if they attempt 
to attack or escape. 

12. I will halt deserters approaching, order them to lay down their 
arms and notify the commander of the outguard. I will order deserters 
pursued by the enemy to drop their arms and will at once notify the 
commander of the outguard. Should deserters fail to lay down their 
arms after a second warning, I will fire upon them. 

13. I will halt bearers of flags of truce, cause them to face about, and 
will notify the commander of the outguard. 

14. I will salute only when I address, or am addressed by officers. 

15. In case of doubt as to what to do, I will call for the commander 
of the outguard. ^ 

ight I will allow persons to approach fairly close before 
and I will "-hallenge in a low voice so as not to reveal my 
he enemy. 

[649] 



700-701-702-703 

17. I will never fire at night unless I can clearly see the enemy and 
I am sure I can hit him, or unless it be absolutely necessary to fire in 
order to give the alarm. 

700. ADVANCE AlfD REAR GUARDS 

My orders when acting as connecting file on advance or rear 
guard duty, are: — 

1. I will be on the constant lookout for signals, which I will always 
transmit at once. 

2. I will always take distance from, and keep in sight of, the body 
in my rear. 

3. When the column halts, if I am not already in a position where 
I can see both bodies between which I am acting as connecting file, 
I will, if possible, place myself in such position, and will keep on the 
constant lookout ^or signals from both bodies. Should I receive a signal 
from one body when I cannot see the other, I will at once run to a position 
from which I can see the other and repeat the signal. 

701. PATROLLING 

My orders when patrolling are: — 

I will take special pains to remain concealed as much as possible; 
for, when seeking information about the enemy, it is often almost as 
important not to be seen as it is to see. 

702. ' MESSAGES 

1. When I am given a verbal message by a noncommissioned officer 
to carry, I will always repeat the message to the noncommissioned officer 
before leaving, to see that I understand it, and, as I am leaving, I will go 
over the message several times in my own mind. If given a message 
by an officer, and not directed by him to repeat it, I will before leaving 
ask, for instance, ''May I repeat the message so as to be sure that I 
understand it?'^ and, as I am leaving, I will go over the message several 
times in my own mind. 

2. I will always conceal in my shoe or elsewhere any written mes- 
sage I may be carrying, and, if captured, will try to destroy the 
message the very first chance' I get. 

70S. ON THE MARCH 

My orders on the march are: — 

1. I will fill my canteen before the march begins. 

2. I will not leave ranks to get water or for any other purpose with- 
out permission of my company commander, and during halts I will not 
leave the immediate vicinity of the company without permission. 

[650] 



704 

3. Should I wish to relieve myself when the company halts, I will 
do so as soon as the halt is made and not wait until it is nearly over. 

4. I will at all times keep my proper place in column. 

5. I will not nibble food while actually marching. 

6. I will not sit on damp ground during halts. 

7. I will not enter yards, orchards, or gardens, during halts, nor will 
I ever enter a house unless invited to do so by the occupants. 

8. When the command is given to fall in after a halt, I will fall 
in promptly. 

704. IN CAMP 

My orders in camp are: — 

1. Upon first reaching camp I will not leave camp until I find out 
from the First Sergeant what the orders are about the men leaving 
camp. 

2. I will not introduce liquor into camp. 

3. In camp and on the march I will take good care of my feet and 
look after my health according to the instruction received in garrison. 



1. In battle, in camp, on the march, and at all other times, I will 
comply faithfully with all the known wishes and desires of the company 
commander. 

2. If I see I am going to be captured, I will, if possible, throw away 
the bolt of my rifle and should I have field glasses in my possession I 
will break the glass. 

3. Should I be taken prisoner, I will not, under any circumstances 
give any information about our troops, and should I be compelled to an- 
swer questions, I will give misleading answers. Nor will I talk with any 
of our men about our own troops, what we were doing when captured, etc., 
because the chances are the enemy or some of their spies will overhear 
my conversation. I will take advantage of the first opportunity to 
make my escape and get back to our troops with all the information that 
T can get about the enemy. 



[651] 



705 



CHAPTER XVI 
INTRENCHMENTS 

705. Lying Trench. — When intrenching under fire, cover is first se- 
cured in the lying position, each man scooping out a depression for 
his body and throwing the earth to the front. Such a trench afforde 
limited protection against rifle fire and less against shrapnel. Soldiers 
should be taught to construct such trenches as rapidly as possible, 
avoiding all neatness, which takes time, having in view only the rapid 
construction of a row of pits. 

Sitting Trench. — If time permits, the orginal excavation may be 
enlarged and deepened until it is possible to assume a sitting position, 
with the legs crossed and the shoulder to the parapet. In such a posi- 
tion a man presents a smaller target to shrapnel bullets than in the 
lying position and can fire more comfortably and with less exposure 
than in the kneeling position. 

Standing Trench. — ^From the sitting trench the excavation may be 
continued until a standing position is possible. 
Classification of Trenches: — 

Trenches may be classified into fire trenches, cover trenches, and 
comTrmnicating trenches, the first named being occupied by the firing line, 
the second by the supports, and the last by troops passing between the 
first and second. 

.^ Firing Trench 




Fire Trenches: — 

The lessons learned from the Kusso-Japanese War have resulted 
in the discarding of the old-fashioned wide and shallow kneeling 
trenches. The simplest form of fire trench is deep and narrow and has 
a flat concealed parapet, as shown in Fig. 1. In ordinary soil, and on 
a basis of two reliefs and tasks of 5 feet, it can be constructed in about 
two hours with intrenching tools. This trench affords fair cover for 
troops subjected to artillery fire, but not actually firing. 

When it is probable that time will permit elaboration, the simple 
trench should be planned with a view to developing it ultimately into 
more complete forms, as shown in Pigs 2 and 3. 

[652] 



705 (contd.) 

In very difficult soil, if the time is short, it inav bo necessary 
to dig a wider, shallower trench with a higher parapet. 





roKj 




Planks or poles on^ 
brush bd before an^ i 
ofherworkonFigi^ ^ 

Chamber mintd a^'Cr complitia 
on Fig i 



Pockets may l?e cxca-'i 
voted for ammunition ^ 

(-4 



Fig5. 



If necessary ej(ca^te. 
^for feet ^ hen 
^sitting 

No parapet -waste the earth 
Fig.^. 



V — 

SQUAD TRENCH 



TRA 
/£RSL 



SQUAD TRCNCM 



JHA\ 1 

^ERSL SQUAD TRENCH \ 



A 



PASSAGE 



FigS 



PASSAGE 



A Trench without Parapet. — Where the excavated earth is easily 
removed, a fire trench without parapet, as shown in Fig. 4, may be the 
one best suited to the soil and other conditions affecting the choice of 
profile. The enemy's infantry, as well as his artillery, will generally 
have great difficulty in seeing this trench. 

It must be remembered that the type profiles given are not at 
all rigid and that they should be modified to suit the ground. 

Head cover is the term applied to any horizontal cover which may 
be provided above the plane of fire. It is obtained by notching or loop- 
holing the top of the parapet so that the bottoms of the notches or loop- 
holes are in the desired plane of fire. The extra height of parapet may 
be 12 to 18 inches and the loopholes may be 3 to 3% feet center to center. 

Head cover is of limited utility. It increases the visibility of the 
parapet and restricts the field of fire. At close range the loopholes serve 
as aiming points to steady the enemy's fire and may do more harm than 
good at longer ranges. This is especially the case if the enemy can see 
any light through the loophole. He waits for the light to be obscured, 
when he fires, knowing there is a man's head behind the loophole. A 
background must be provided or a removable screen arranged so that 

[653] 



705 (contd.) 



ITh roat ^ 




Cheek 


Throal 


Cheek 








.-i-ll_ 




So^t--^"'''""^ 



Fig. 2 



[6S4] 



705 (contd.) 

there will be no difference in the appearance of the loophole whether a 
man is looking through it or not. Head cover is advantageous only when 
the conditions of the foreground are such that the enemy can not get 
close up. 

Notches and loopholes, Figs. 1-3, are alike in all respects, except 
that the latter have a roof or top and the former have not. The bottom, 
also called floor or sole, is a part of the original superior slope. The sides, 
sometimes called cheeks, are vertical or nearly so. The plan depends upon 
local conditions. There is always a narrow part, called the throat, which 
is just large enough to take the rifle and permit sighting. From the 
throat the sides diverge at an angle, called the splay, which depends upon 
the field of fire necessary. 

The position of the throat may vary. If on the outside, it 
is less conspicuous but more easily obstructed by injury to the parapet 
and more difficult to use, since in changing aim laterally the man must 
move around a pivot in the plane of the throat. If the material of 
which the loophole is constructed presents hard surfaces, the throat 
should be outside, notwithstanding the disadvantages of that position, 
or else the sides must be stepped as in Fig. 3. In some cases it may 
be best to adopt a compromise position and put the throat in the mid- 
dle, Fig. 3. Figs. 4 to 7 show details and dimensions of a loophole of 
sand bags. 

A serviceable form of loophole consists of a pyramidal box of 
plank with a steel plate spiked across the small end and pierced for 
fire. Fig. 8 shows a section of such a construction. It is commonly 
known as the hopper loophole. The plate should be % in. thick, if of 
special steel; or % in., if ordinary metal. Fig. 9 shows the opening 
used by the Japanese in Manchuria and Fig. 10 that used by the Eussians. 

The construction of a notch reqjpfres only the introduction of 
some available rigid material to form the sides; by adding a cover the 
notch becomes a loophole. Where the fire involves a wide lateral 
and small vertical angle, loopholes may take the form of a long 
slit. Such a form will result from laying logs or fascines lengthwise on 
the parapet, supported at intervals by sods or other material. Fig. 12, or 
small poles covered with earth may be used, Fig. 11. 

Overhead cover. This usually consists of a raised platform of 
some land covered with earth. It is frequently combined with horizontal 
cover in a single structure, which protects the top and exposed side. 
The supporting platform will almost always be of wood and may vary 
from brushwood or light poles to heavy timbers and plank. It is better, 
especially with brush or poles, to place a layer of sods, grass down, or 
straw, or grain sacks over the platform before putting on the earth, 
to prevent the latter from sifting through. 

[655] 



705 (contd.) 

The thickness of overhead cover depends upon the class of fire 
against which protection is desired, and is sometimes limited by the 
vertical space available, since it must afford headroom beneath, and 
generally should not project above the nearest natural or artificial 
horizonal cover. For splinter proofs a layer of earth 6 to 8 ins. thick 
on a support of brush or poles strong enough to hold it up will suffice 
if the structure is horizontal. If the front is higher than the rear, less 
thiclaiess is necessary; if the rear is higher than the front, more is 
required. For bomb proofs a minimum thickness of 6 ins. of timber and 
3 ft. of earth is necessary against field and siege guns, or 12 ins. timber 
and 6 ft. of earth against the howitzers and mortars of a heavy siege 
train. 

In determining the area of overhead cover to be provided, allow 
6 sq. ft. per man for occupancy while on duty only, or 12 sq. ft. per man 
for continuous occupancy not of long duration. For long occupation 18 
to 20 sq. ft. per man should be provided. 




Types%f overhead cover. 

Lookouts. — To enable the garrison of a trench to get the greatest 
amount of comfort and rest, a lookout should be constructed and a 
sentinel stationed therein. 

The simplest form would consist of two sandbags placed on the 
parapet and splayed so as to give the required view, and carefully con- 
cealed. 

Better forms may be constructed, with one side resting on the 
berm by using short uprights with overhead cover, a slit on all sides 
being provided for observation. 

Location. — There are two things to be considered in locating 
trenches: (1) The tactical situation, and (2) the nature of the ground. 
The first consideration requires that the trenches be so located as to 
give the best field of fire. Locating near the base of hills possesses 
the advantage of horizontal fire, but, as a rule, it is difficult to support 

[656] 



705 (contd.) 

trenches so located and to retreat therefrom in case of necessity. While 
location near the crest of hills — on the '^military cresf — does not 
possess the advantage of horizontal fire, it is easier to support trenches 
so located and to retreat therefrom. Depending upon circumstances, 
there are times when it will be better to intrench near the base of hills ' 
and there are other times when it will be better to intrench on the *^ mili- 
tary crest'', which is always in front of the natural crest. The con- 
struction of trenches along the '^military cresf does not give any 
*'dead space'' — that is, any space to the front that can not be reached 
by the fire of the men in the trenches. 

Whether we should construct our trenches on high or low ground 
is a matter that should always be carefully considered under the par- 
ticular conditions that happen to exist at that particular time, and the 
matter may be summarized as follows: 
The advantages of the high ground are: 

1. We can generally see better what is going on to our front and 
flanks; and the men have a feeling of security that they do not enjoy 
on low ground. 

2. We can usually reenforce the firing line better and the dead and 
wounded can be removed more easil3^ 

3. The line of retreat is better. 

The disadvantages are:— 

1. The plunging fire of a high position is not as effective as a sweep- 
ing fire of a low one. 

2. It is not as easy to conceal our position. 

The advantages of low ground, are: — 

1. The low, sweeping fire that we get, especially when the ground 
in front is fairly flat and the view over the greater part of it is unin- 
terrupted, is the most effective kind of fire. 

2. As a rule it is easier to conceal trenches on low ground, especially 
from artillery fire. 

3. If our trenches are on low ground, our artillery will be able to 
find good positions on the hill behind us without interfering with the 
infantry defense. 

The disadvantages are: — 

1. As a rule it will be more difficult to reenforce the firing line and 
to remove the dead and wounded from the trenches. 

2. On a low position there will usually be an increase of dead space 
in our front. 

3. The average soldier acting on the defensive dreads that the enemy 
may turn his flank, and this feeling is much more pronounced on low 
ground than on high ground. Should the enemy succeed in getting a foot- 
ing on our flank with our trenches on top of the hill, it would be bad 
enough, but it would certainly be far worse if he got a footing on top 

[657] 



705 (contd.) 

of the hill, on the flank and rear, with our company on low ground 
in front. We, therefore, see there are things to be said for and against 
both high and low ground, and the most that can be said without ex- 
amining a particular piece of ground is: Our natural inclination is 
to select high ground, but, as a rule, this choice will reduce our 
fire effect, and if there is a covered approach to our fire trenches 
and very little dead ground in front of it, with an extensive field of 
fire, there is no doubt the lower ground is better. However, if these 
conditions do not exist to a considerable degree, the moral advantage 
of the higher ground must be given great weight, especially in a close 
country. 

With regard to the nature of the ground, trenches should, if 
practicable, be so located as to avoid stony ground, because of the 
difficult work entailed and of the danger of flying fragments, should 
the parapet be struck by an artillery projectile. 

To locate the trace of the trenches, lie on the ground at intervals 
and select the best field of fire consistent with the requirements of the 
situation. 

Trenches should be laid out in company lengths, if possible, and 
adjoining trenches should afford each other mutual support. The flanks 
and important gaps in the line should be protected by fire trenches 
echeloned in rear. 

Clearing the Foreground. — Time permitting, it is very important 
that the ground in front of the trenches should be cleared of brush- 
wood, high grass and everything else that might screen the enem.y. 

Concealment of Trenches. — The location of the trenches should 
be disguised by covering the side toward the enemy with grass, 
branches, leaves, etc. 

Obstacles. — It is sometimes desirable to place obstacles in front 
of trenches, so as to obstruct the advance of the enemy, break up his 
formation and detain him under the fire of the men in the trenches. 
See '^ Obstacles '^ Par. 706. 

Cover Trenches. — Where natural cover is not available for the 
support, each fire trench should have artificial cover in rear for its sup- 
port, — either a cover trench of its own or one in common with an ad- 
joining fire trench. 

The cover trench is simple and rectangular in profile. Conceal- 
ment is most im^portant, but when impossible, the trench should have 
substantial overhead cover. It is generally concealed by the contour 
of the ground or by natural features. 

Cover trenches should be made as comfortable as possible. It will 
often be advisable to make them extensive enough to provide cooking 
and resting facilities for the garrisons of the corresponding fire 
trenches. 

[658] 



706-707-708 
CHAPTER XVII 

OBSTACLES 

(From Engineer Department Manual on Field Fortifications.) 

706. Object. The main object in placing obstacles in front of 
defensive positions is to stop the enemy's advance, or to delay him while 
under the defenders' fire, thus causing him to lose more men than the 
defenders and maldng his attack as difficult as possible. 

Location. Obstacles must be so located that they will be exposed 
to the defender's fire, both artillery and infantry, and so that they will 
not obstruct the counter-attack on the part of the defender. They should 
also be invisible from the direction of the enemy's approach, should be 
difficult to destroy and should afford no screen or cover to the enemy. 

Kinds of Obstacles. The following are the most common kinds 
of obstacles: — 

707. Abatis consisting of trees lying parallel to each other with 
the branches pointing in the general direction of approach and inter- 
laced. All leaves and small twigs should be removed and the stiff 
ends of branches pointed. 

Abatis on open ground is most conveniently made of branches 
about 15 feet long. The branches are staked or tied down and the butts 
anchored by covering them with earth. Barbed wire may be interlaced 
among the branches. Successive rows are placed, the branches of one 
extending over the trunks of the one in front, so as to make the abatis 
5 feet high and as wide as desired. It is better to place the abatis in 
a natural depression or a ditch, for concealment and protection from 
fire. Tf exposed to artillery, an abatis must be protected either as above 
or else by raising a glacis in front of it. Fig. T shows a typical form 
of abatis with a glacis in front. An abatis formed by felling trees to- 
ward the enemy, leaving the butt hanging to the stump, the branches 
prepared as before, is called a slashing, Fig. 2. It gives cover, and should 
be well flanked. 

708. A Palisade'^ is a man-tight fence of posts. Eound poles 4 to 6 
inches in diameter at the large end are best. If the sticks run 5 to 8 in- 
ches, they may be split. If defended from the rear, palisades give f^ome 
shelter from fire and the openings should be made as large as possible 
without letting men through. If defended from the flank, they may be 
closer, say 3 to 4 inches apart. The top should be pointed. A strand or 
two of barbed wire run aloug the top and stapled to each post is a valu- 
able addition. 

Palisading is best made up in panels of 6 or 8 feet length, con- 
nected by a waling piece, preferably of plank, otherwise of split stuff. 
If the tops are free, two wales should be usedj both underground. If the 
tops are connected by wires, one will do. 

[659] 



708 (contd.) 




EMO] 



709-710.711 

Palisades should be planted to incline slightly to the front. Ae 
little earth should be disturbed in digging as possible, and one side of the 
trench should be kept in the desired plane of the palisade. If stones 
can be had to fit between the posts and the top of the trench, they will 
increase the stiffness of the structure and save time in ramming, or a 
small log may be laid in the trench along the outside of the posts. Figs. 
3 and 4 show the construction and placing of palisades. 

709. A Fraise is a palisade horizontal, or nearly so, projecting 
from the scarp or counterscarp. A modern and better form consists of 
supports at 3 or 4 feet interval, connected by barbed wire, forming a 
horizontal wire fence. Fig. 5 

710. Cheveaux de frise are obstacles of the form shown in Fig. 6. 
They are usually made in sections of manageable length chained to- 
gether at the ends. They are most useful in closing roads or other narrow 
passages, as they can be quickly opened for friendly troops. The lances 
may be of iron instead of wood and rectangular instead of round; the 
axial beam may be solid or composite. Figs. 8 and 9 show methods 
of constructing cheveaux de frise with dimension stuff. 

A formidable obstacle against cavalry consists of railroad ties 
planted at intervals of 10 feet with the tops 4% feet above the ground, 
and connected by a line of rails spiked securely to each, Fig. 7. The 
rail ends should be connected by fish plates and bolted, with the ends 
of the bolts riveted down on the ends. 

Figs. 10 and 11 show forms of heavy obstacles employed in 
Manchuria by the Russians and Japanese, respectively. The former is 
composed of timber trestles, made in rear and carried out at night. The 
latter appears to have been planted in place. 

711. A wire entanglement is composed of stakes driven in the 
ground and connected by wire, barbed is the best, passing horizontally or 
diagonally, or both. The stakes are roughly in rectangular or quincunx 
order, but slight irregularities, both of position and height should be 
introduced. 




Fig. 12 



Fig. 14 



1661] 



712-713 

In the high entanglement the stakes average 4 feet from the 
ground, and the wiring is horizontal and diagonal, Fig. 12. 

The low wire entanglement has stakes averaging 18 inches above 
the ground and the wire is horizontal only. This form is especially 
effective if concealed in high grass. In both kinds the wires should be 
wound around the stakes and stapled and passed loosely from one stake to 
the next. When two or more wires cross they should be tied together. 
Barbed wire is more difficult to string but better when done. The most 
practicable form results from the use of barbed wire for the horizontal 
strands and smooth wire for the rest. 

This is the most generally useful of all obstacles because of the 
rapidity of construction, the difficulty of removal, the comparatively 
slight injury from artillery fire, and its independence of local material 
supplies. 

Time and materials. — One man can make 10 sq. yds. of low and 
3 sq. yds. of high entanglement per hour. The low form requires 10 feet 
of wire per sq. yd. and the high 30 feet. No. 14 is a suitable size. The 
smooth wire runs 58.9 ft. to the lb. A 100-lb. coil will make 600 sq. yds. 
of low or 200 sq. yds. of high entanglement. If barbed wire is used, the 
weight will be about 21/2 times as much. 

712. Wire fence. — An ordinary barbed-wire fence is a considerable 
obstacle if well swept by fire. It becomes more formidable if a ditch is 
dug on one or both sides to obstruct the passage of wheels after the 
fence has been cut. The fence is much more difficult to get through if 
provided with an apron on one or both sides, inclined at an angle of 
about 45°, as indicated in Figs. 13 and 14. This form was much used 
in South Africa for connecting lines between blockhouses. When used 
in this way the lines of fence may be 300 to 600 yds. long, in plan like 
a worm fence, with the blockhouse at the reentrant angles. Fixed" 
rests for rifles, giving them the proper aim to enfilade the fence, were 
prepared at the blockhouses for use at night. 

Such a fence may be arranged in many ways to give an automatic 
alarm either mechanically or electrically. The mechanical f^rms mostly 
depend on one or more single wires which are smooth, and are tightly 
stretched through staples on the posts which hold them loosely, per- 
mitting them to slip when cut and drop a counterweight at the block- 
house, which in falling explodes a cap or pulls the trigger of a rifle. 

713. Military pits or trous de loup are excavations in the shape of 
an inverted cone or pyramid, with a pointed stake in the bottom. They 
should not be so deep as to afford cover to the skirmisher. Two and 
one-half feet or less is a suitable depth. Fig. 15 shows a plan and sec- 
tion of such pits. 



[6631 



714 









!|R;'' 


'X'' 


te? 


-■]s;i.. 


Hi 


^%. 


KX 


P 




Ipi: 


X"^" 


B 


X- 


Iji^'' 


\<,u.. 


^x 


m 



Fig. 16 



They are usually dug in 3 or 5 rows and the earth thrown to the 
front to form a glacis. The rear row is dug first and then the next in 
front, and so on, so that no earth is cast over the finished pits. 

An excellent arrangement is to dig the pits in a checkerboard 
plan, leaving alternate squares and placing a stake in each of them to 
form a wire entanglement, Fig. 16. One man can make 5 pits on a 2- 
hour relief. 

Miscellanous barricades. — Anything rigid in form and movable 
may be used to give cover from view and fire and to obstruct the advance 
of an assailant. Boxes, bales and sacks of goods, furniture, books, etc., 
have been so used. The principles above stated for other obstacles 
should be followed, so far as the character of the materials will permit. 
The rest ingenuity must supply. Such devices are usually called barricades 
and are useful in blocking the streets of towns and cities. 

714. Inundations. — Backing up the water of a stream so that it 
overflows a considerable area forms a good obstacle even though of ford- 
able depth. If shallow, the difficulty of fording may be increased by ir- 
regular holes or ditches dug before the water comes tip or by driving 
stakes or making entanglements. Fords have frequently been obstructed 
by ordinary harrows laid on the bottom with the teeth up. 

The unusual natural conditions necessary to a successful inunda- 
tion and the extent and character of the work required to construct 
the dams make this defense of exceptional use. It may be attempted 
with advantage when the drainage of a considerable flat area passes 
through a restricted opening, as a natural gorge, a culvert, or a bridge. 

Open cribs filled with stones, or tighter ones with gravel or earth 
may form the basis of the obstruction to the flow of water. The usual 
method of tightening cracks or spaces between cribs is by throwing in 
earth or alternate layers of straw, hay, grass, earth, or sacks of clay. 
Unless the flow is enough to allow considerable leakage, the operation 
will not be practicable with field resources. 

When the local conditions permit water to be run into the ditch 
of a parapet it should always be done. 

[663] 



715 

715. Obstacles in Front of Outguards should be low so they cannot 
be seen at night. A very simple and effective obstacle can be made by 
fastening a single strand of wire to the top of stout stakes about a foot 
high, and then placing another wire a little higher and parallel to, and 
about one yard in rear of, the first. The wires must be drawn tight, 
and securely fastened, and the stakes fairly close together, so that if 
the wire is cut between any two stakes the remainder will not be cut 
loose. Any one approaching the enemy will trip over the first wire, and 
before he can recover himself he will be brought down by the second. 
In the absence of wire, small sapplings may be used instead. Of course, 
they are not as good as wire, but it does not take much to trip up a man 
in the dark. 



[664] 



716-717 

CHAPTER XVIII 
FIELD FIRING* 

716. Definition. By *' Field firing'' (called ** Combat practice" in 
the Small-Arms Firing Manual) we mean collective firing at targets 
which simulate the appearance of an enemy under conditions approach- 
ing those found in war, and the appli(>ation of this class of fire to 
tactical exercises. 

717. Object. While it is important that soldiers should be good in- 
dividual shots, individual shooting is not everything. The maximum 
effect of fire can be gotten only by instructed and disciplined troops 
under a commander capable of directing their fire properly. The fire 
of the company may be likened to spraying water from a hose, and as 
the fireman can shift his stream of water from one point to the other 
with certainty, being able to direct and control it with promptness and 
accuracy, so should the company commander be able to switch the cone 
of fire of his company from one target to another, having it at all 
times under direction and control. In other words, as the pliable, man- 
ageable hose responds to ^he will of the fireman, so should the company 
be so trained and instructed that it will respond to the will of the 
company commander on the firing line, in the midst of the noise and 
confusion of battle. No one except a man who has been in battle can 
realize how great are the noise and confusion, and how necessary and 
important are cooperation, teamwork, discipline, and communication, 
in order for a company commander to control and direct the fire of the 
company — there must be absolute cooperation, teamwork, and communi- 
cation between all parts of the company — between the captain and the 
platoon leaders, the platoon leaders and the squad leaders, and the squad 
leaders and the members of their squads. Each and every man must 
know and do his part and endeavor all he can to keep in touch with 
and help the others. Now, the foundation of teamwork and cooperation, 
is communication — communication between the company commander and 
the men on the firing line — the means by which, the medium through which, 
he will make known his will to the men on the firing line. As stated 
before, because of the noise and confusion on the firing line this is no 
easy matter. The ideal way would be for the company commander to 
control the company by communicating direct with every man on the 
firing line, as graphically shown on the following page: 

•This chapter is based on the Infantry Drill Regulations and the musketry 
instruction bulletins issued in 1913 by the Headquarters, Fifth Brigade, Second 
Division, at Galveston, Texas. 



[6651 



718 



I I 11 1 I \ Hi I »n ill ti l in III I I Ml I N I Ml ill IN I I M I FI(21N"Ct LlNt 

■ CAPTAIK 

However, in the noise and confusion of battle it would be utterly 
impossible for all the men to hear the captain ^s voice. Experience shows 
thiit from 20 to 35 rifles are as many as one leader can control. The 
captain, must, therefore, control the company through the platoon com- 
manders — that is to say, he actually directs the fire and the platoon com- 
manders, assisted by the squad leaders, actually control it. In other 
words, the captain com.municates with the men on the firing line, he 
makes his will known to them, through his platoon commanders, as 
graphically shown in this diagram: 



a 



Mil M MM II I I 11 J I I I I I Im 11 M M I I I I I I MM II I I I I ni^lNG llNt 

^^i>#" '^^Uy^ "^^l^^^ 

0. D Q PLATOON LEADfR5 



''^*''CAmif( 

However, in order for our system of communication to be suc- 
cessful, each and every man, as stated above, must know and do his 
part and endeavor all he can to help the others. If this is done, then 
the different parts and elements of the company will dove-tail and fit 
into one another, resulting in a complete, homogeneous whole, in the 
form of an efficient, pliable, manageable instrument in the hands of the 
company commander. And this is the object, the result, sought by 
practice and instruction in field firing, and which will be obtained if the 
captain, the platoon leaders, the squad leaders, the file closers, the musi- 
cians, and the privates, will perform the following duties and functions: 
718. The Captain. (Fire Direction). 

The captain directs the fire of the company or of designated 
platoons. He designates the target, and, when practicable, allots a 
part of the target to each platoon. Before beginning the fire action he 
determines the range, announces the sight setting, and indicates the class 
of fire to be employed and the time to open fire. Thereafter, he observes 
the fire effect, corrects material errors in sight setting, prevents ex- 
haustion of the ammunition supply, and causes the distribution of such 
extra ammunition as may be received from the rear. (I. D. E. 249.) 

[6661 



719-720-721-722-723 

Having indicated clearly what lie desires the platoon leaders 'to 
do, the captain avoids interfering, except to correct serious errors or 
omissions. (I. D. E. 240). 

719. The Platoon Leaders. (Fire control). 

In combat the platoon is the fire unit. (I. D. R. 250). 

Each platoon leader puts into execution the commands or dir- 
rections of the captain, having first taken such precautions to insure cor- 
rect sight setting and clear description of the target or aiming point 
as the situation permits or requires; thereafter, he gives such additional 
commands or directions as are necessary to exact compliance with the 
captain's will. He corrects the sight setting when necessary. He 
designates an aiming point when the target cannot be seen with the 
naked eye. • 

In general, platoon leaders observe the target and the effect of 
their fire and are on the alert for the captain's commands or signals; 
they observe and regulate the rate of fire. (I. D. R. 252). 

720. The Guides watch the firing line and check every breach of fire 
discipline. 

721. l:he Squad Leaders transmit commands and signals when neces- 
sary, observe the conduct of their squads and abate excitement, assist in 
enforcing fire discipline and participate in the firing. 

Every squad leader should place himself just a little in advance 
of the rest of his squad and by occasionally glancing to the right and 
left, observe how the men of their squads are doing — whether they are 
firing at the proper objective, if the sights are apparently properly ad- 
justed, if they are firing too rapidly, etc. After each shot the squad 
leader should look toward his platoon leader, and then glance to his 
right and left to observe his men, and then load and fire again. 

722. The Musicians assist the captain by observing the enemy, the tar- 
get, and the fire effect, by transmitting commands or signals, and by 
watching for signals. (I.* D. R. 235). 

The Privates will take advantage of cover, exercise care in setting 
the sights and delivering fire; be on the constant lookout for orders from 
their leaders; always aim deliberately; observe the enemy carefully, in- 
creasing the fire when the target is favorable and ceasing firing when the 
enemy disappears; not neglect a target because it is indistinct; not waste 
ammunition, but be economical with it; if firing without a leader to 
retain their presence of mind and direct an efiicient fire upon the proper 
target. 

723. Finding the Eange. There are various methods of ascertaining 
the range, viz: 

1. By means of mechanical range finders. 

2. By means of ranging volleys, whenever the ground near the target 
is such that the strike of the bullets can be seen from the firing line. 
(I. n. R. 240). 



724-725-726 

3. By means of range finders, five or six officers or men selected 
from the most accurate estimators in the company, being designated as 
range finders (I. D. E. 240). This is the method most commonly used. 

724. Distribution of Fire. The distribution of fire over the entire 
target is of the greatest importance; for, a section of the target not 
covered by fire represents a number of the enemy permitted to fire 
coolly and effectively. So, remember that all parts of the target are 
equally important, and care must be taken that the men do not neglect 
its less visible parts. 

The captain allots a part of the target to each platoon, or each 
platoon leader takes as his target that part which corresponds to his 
position in the company. Every man is so instructed that he will fire 
on that part of the target which is directly opposite him. 

If the target cannot be seen with the naked eye, platoon leaders 
select an object in front of or behind it, designate this as the aiming 
point, and direct a sight setting which will carry the fire into the target. 
The men aim at the good aiming point or line, but with such an increased 
or decreased sightsetting, as the case may be, that the bullets will fall 
on the target instead of on the aiming point. 

Distribution of fire is assured by dividing the whole target as- 
signed the company into definite parts or sectors, and allotting these 
parts or sectors to the various platoons. And, of course, the whole of 
the target must be kept under fire while the company is advancing. 
This may be accomplished by one of two methods: 

725. Overlapping Method. In this method each sector (target) ir 
covered by more than one fire unit. For example, in a company of four 
platoons the entire company sector would be divided in two parts, the 
right part being covered by the first and second platoons and the left 
part by the third and fourth platoons. When the first platoon ceases 
fire to advance, the second platoon would replace the lost rifles by fir- 
ing faster. With three platoons the company sector would be divided 
into two parts, one being assigned to each .flank platoon and the whole 
company sector to the center platoon. When the first platoon advanced, 
the center platoon would cover its target, both the center and third 
platoons increasing their rate of fire. With two platoons, each would 
cover the whole company sector. 

726. Switch Method. The company is divided into a number of parts, 
one less than the number of platoons in the company. One platoon is 
designated as the ■ ■ switch ' ', and swings into fire automatically into that 
sector from which the fire of its assigned unit is withdrawn. For ex 
ample, with four platoons, and platoon rushes to start from the right, 
the company sector is divided into three parts assigned to the first, 
second and third platoons, the fourth being the ''switch''. When number 
1 ceases fire to advance. No. 4 fires at No. I's target; when No. 2 ceases 

[668] 



727 

to fire, No. 4 fires at No. 2's target then at No. 3's target, and, finally 
No. 4 advances. 

727. Designation of Target. It is very important that the command 
ers should be able to describe the objectives to be attacked and the 
sectors * to be defended, and that individual soldiers should be able to 
understand and transmit to other soldiers such descriptions. Within 
the squad, target designation implies ability on the part of the squad 
leader to understand and transmit to his squad the target designation 
received from his platoon leader, and also ability on his own part to 
designate a target irtelligently; within the platoon, target designation 
implies ability on the part of the platoon leader to understand the 
company commander's designation of the target and to transmit that 
designation to his platoon in such manner as to insure an equal distribu- 
tion of its fire within the sector assigned to it; within the company, 
target designation implies ability on the part of the company commander 
to designate the targets into which the company sector is divided in 
such manner that the platoon leaders will have no trouble in under 
standing him. It also implies ability on the part of the company com- 
mander to change the objectives or sectors of his platoons, and his ability 
to cover the whole target of the company during a forward movement of 
a part of the company, by the so-called ^^ switch'' or the ^'overlapping" 
method, or by any other method which is practicable and accomplishes 
the desired end. Targets should bo designated in a concise, prompt, un- 
mistakable manner, but, as we all know, it is not always an easy mattrr 
to describe the location of an object, especially if the object be not 
conspicuous or readily recognized. This is due to two reasons: First, 
the unit commander is likely to indulge in vague talk instead of ac- 
curate discription,rand, second, even if correct terms are used, it is more 
than likely that all members of the firing line will not be able to grasp 
the idea, because the commander will be using expressions which, 
although understood by himself (in some cases perhaps due to the fact 
that he is looking at the objective), they will not be clear to the men. 
The secret of prompt, accurate and concise designation of a target lies 
in the use of simple words and terms with which both the unit commander 
and the men on the firing line are thoroughly familiar. 

Of course, if the target be distinct and clearly defined, it can 
easily be designated by name, as for example, '^That battery on the 
hill just in front of us", *' Cavalry to our right front", etc. 

Generally the designation of a target, if not conspicuous nor 
ipadily recognized, will include: 

1. A stafempnt of what the target is, or its appppranr« (shape, ^'olor, 
size, etc.) 

2. Where the target is with reference to some easily recognized 
reference point. 



•In attick the target ii called "objective*'; in the defense, "sector." 



728-729 

3. How wide the company sector is. 

The following systems of target designation are used at the 
School of Musketry. Each has its limitations, defects and advantages, 
under various conditions of ground, etc. A wise selection of one or a 
combination of two or more, is a material factor in efficiency. 

728. Horizontal Clock Face System, (Used with visible, distinct tar- 
gets) 







System 




Example 


1. 


Announce 


direction. 




''At one o'clock''. 


2. 


Announce 


range. 




''Eange 1000". 


3. 


Announce 


objective, 




''A troop of cavalry dismounted''. 






^ 


1 


•••»• Taijget At 1 OaocK 
'A 






\ 
\ 


:ar 


/ 






^.- 


1 






T. 


^/ \ 


[ 


/ N 






>/^ 


1 
- 1 








/ 


1 
\ 1 


^ t > 




^ 1 


>^l- Jl.*- 


\ 1 / 



Horizontal Clock Face 5v5T£rjv\ 
Procedure ; 

1. Ail look along the line pointing toward one o'clock of a horizontal 
clock face whose center is at the firing point, and whose 12 o'clock 
mark is directly perpendicular to the front of the firing line. 

2. All look at a point about 1000 yards away on the one o'clock line, 
and 

3. At 1000 yards on the one o'clock line find the objective. 

729. Vertical Clock Face System, (Used with small or indistinct 
targets) 



System 

1. Announce the general direction 
of the reference point. 

2. Designate as a reference point 
the most prominent object in the 
zone indicated. 

3. Announce the position of the 
target with respect to the reference 
point. 

[6701 



Example 
''To our right front" (or ''At 
two o'clock"). 

"A stone house with two chim- 
neys ' '. 



"At three o'clock' 




7W (contd.) 







7. 




P 


%\ 




c? 


t> 




z 




^ 


5 




4. Announce the range. "Eange 1000''. 

5. Announce the objective. ' ' A hostile patrol of four men ' '. 

Procedure : 
1. All men look to their right front (or along the two o'clock line). 

[671] 



730 

2. The reference point (stone house) is found in the indicated direction. 

3. A clock face (vertical) is imagined centered on the reference point, 
and the men look along the line leading from the clock center through 
three o'clock, and 

4. 1000 yards from the firing point. 

5. Find the hostile patrol. 

730. Finger System. (Used with indistinct or invisible targets and 
to define sectors). 

(By one "Finger" we mean the amount of frontage that one finger, held 
vertically, will cover, the arm being extended horizontally to its full length, 
the average case this amount of frontage covered is about 1/20 of the range. 



In 
For 



instance, at a range of 1000 yards, one "Finger" will cover fifty yards of the sector. 
The same result will be obtained by using the rear-sight leaf in the position of aiming.) 



KEfERENCe POlNT^ 



R^>^_6t ^0_V^_^ - ^ — 



50YD37^^;n 






SVSTEM 

1. Announce direction to refer- 
ence point as in the vertical clock 
face system. 

2. Announce reference point. 

3. Announce angular distance and 
direction from the reference point 
to the target. 

4. Announce range. 

5. Announce objective. 



Example 
'^To our right front, at 1000 
yards ^ \ 

^'A stone house with two chim- 
neys ' \ 
^^Four o^clock, three fingers*'. 



^'Eange 1000 '\ 

''A sldrmish line alongside of the 
fence, length about two fingers, 
right at the dark bush/'. 

I 
2tt 



i<tKrt»nce pdiht' 



jyj-. 






Jiir 
I 




_-- — ^^N&^ 



_ ^ - -^ _ _ ->^frfi^ I 

. -^ TAIteET Ar4 0CLOet/ 



730 (contd.) 

jpHOCEDURE: 

The reference' point is found as explained, and the vertical 
'clock line upon which the taiget will be found. The soldiers who do 
not see the target will extend the arm to its full extent palm of the hand 
upward, finger held vertically with one side of the hand *' against'^ the 
reference point. The target will be found on the four o^clock line, and 
touching the third finger, at 1000 yards distance, its right flank at the 
bush and its left flank about 100 yards farther (o the right. 

The following case will illustrate more concretely the use of the 
'^Finger'' system: 

There is a red house about % mile to our front, and to the righl 
of this house and a hundred yards or so to its rear, there is a line of 
trenches that can be seen with the aid of field glasses, but the trenches 
are difficult to locate with the unaided eye. There is no prominent 
landmark in the direction of this line of trenches, or on either flank, 
except the red house mentioned. The company commander locates the 
flanks of the line of trenches through his field glasses; he then extends 
his arm forward horizontally its full length, palm up, raises the fingers 
of his hand and, sighting on the line of trenches, finds that the trench 
line has a length of four ''finger widths'^, and that the flank of tlie 
line nearest the red house is three *' finger widths'' from it. lie df'- 
cides to divide the line into two sections of two ''fingers'' each, and as- 
sign one section to each of his two platoons. He then calls his platoon 
leaders (and range finders, if necessary), and says, for instance: "Cen- 
ter of objective, five to the right of that red house. First Platoon, two 
fingers; Second Platoon, two fingers." The two platoon leaders 
then estimate the range and give the company commander their esti- 
mates independently. The company commander also estimates the 
range, and, taking the average, then announces the range, say 1300 
yards, after which the platoon leaders return to their platoons, and 
give, for instance, these instructions: "The target is a line of trenches 
four 'fingers' long, and about 1300 yards away; the center of the target 
is five 'fingers' to the right of that red house, at about 10 o'clock. 
We are to fire at the two fingers on the right of the center and the 
Second Platoon will look after the two fingers on the left of the center. ' ' 
(The leader of the Second Platoon gives similar instructions). 

Every man in the platoon figures out the platoon objective and 
endeavors to ^-s. it with respect to some features of the ground so that 
he will be able to pick it up promptly after his platoon starts to ad- 
vance. After fixing well in his mind the platoon objective, he figures 
out what part of it belongs to his squad, and then selects that portion 
of the squad objective corresponding to his position in the squad. If 
during the advance, his particular portion of the target should become 
hidden from view, he will fire on the nearest portion of the trench line, 
returning to his own part as soon as it becomes visible. 

[673] 



731 

731. Communication. After the company has been committed to the 
fire fight, verbal commands cannot be heard, and it is well nigh im- 
possible even to secure attention to signals. It is, therefore, most im- 
portant that we should train and practice the company as much as pos- 
sible during time of peace in the rapid and accurate transmission of 
orders and signals along the firing line. 

Matter upon which a commander would need to communicate 
with his subordinates, in addition to tactical orders, would generally 
be confined to: 

(a) Changes of elevation and deflection. 

(b) Changes in the apportionment of the target among the sub- 
divisions. 

(c) Changes within the limits of the sector, or objective. 
|d) Changes in the rate of fire. 

(e) And rarely change of target from one within to one without 
the limits of the objective or sector. 

The following arm signals covering matters upon which a com- 
pany commander might need to communicate with his subordinates, 
were gotten up by a board of officers appointed for the purpose at 
Texas City, Texas: 

1, Commence Firing, 
Move the arm extended its full length, hand palm down, several 
times through a horizontal arc in front of the body. 

To Fire Slower, 
Execute "Commence Firing'' slowly. 
To Fire Faster. 
Execute ''Commence Firing" rapidly. 

S. Ready, (Are you ready, or I am ready.) 
Eaise the hand, fingers extended and joined, palm toward the 
person addressed. 

S, What Range Are You Using? 

Extend the arms toward the person addressed, one hand open, 
palm to the front, resting on the other hand, fist closed. 

4' To Swing the Cone of Fire to the Right or Left, 
Extend the arm its full length to the front, palm to the right 
(left), swinging the arm to the right (left). 

The amount of change in deflection may be indicated by expos- 
ing a number of fingers on the hand used in the signal equ^l to the 
number of "fingers" separating the old and new target. 

Where the new objective is plainly visible, point toward it. 

C674] 



732-733 

5. Fix Bayonets, 

For units smaller than a regiment, the following arm signal may 
be used instead of the bugle signal authorized in paragraph 41, Infantry 
Drill Regulations: 

Simulate the movement ''Fix Bayonet. '^ 

It may be said that while a company commander could probably 
generally give his orders directly to the firing line with our present small 
companies, he should, it is thought, for purposes of practice and in- 
struction, give his orders through his platoon leaders. 

732. Fire Discipline. The importance of fire discipline cannot be 
overestimated. The principal things which fire discipline imply are 
enumerated in Par. 640. 

733. Procedure. The following is given merely as a concrete example 
of the procedure that might be followed in certain firing exercises — it 
will not, of course, apply to all cases; it is merely given as a concrete 
illustration of what might actually be done under certain conditions 

Company Commander, On receiving his instructions from the 
officer in charge of the exercise, the company commander returns to his 
company, keeping track of the changing aspect of his target as he does 
so. Arriving at the center of his company, he is met by his platoon 
leaders, and range finders, who have assembled in his absence. The 
company commander says: 

''The target is a line of skirmishers, visible in part. It may be 
seen between us and that long line of green bushes which begins one 
finger to the right of that red water tower at 11 o'clock and it extends 
well beyond ihe bushes both to the right and to the left.'' 

(At this point the range finders begin their estimation and the 
captain pauses until the senior range finder, or other designated per- 
son automatically announces the average estimate of the range, saying 
for example, "Eau^e 1100"). 

The captain then resumes, saying: 

"The sector assigned to this company is three fingers long and 
extends from that group one finger to the right of the water tower, to 
a point four fingers to the right of the tower. Each platoon will cover 
the entire company sector. Range ten-fifty and eleven-fifty. Fire at 
will at my signal. Posts. ' ' 

Platoon Leaders. The platoon leaders then hasten to the center 
of their platoons and "put into execution the commands and directions 
of the captain, having first taken such precautions to insure a correct 
sight setting and clear description of the aiming point as the situation 
permits or requires" (Par. 251 I. D. R.), by saying: 

Target: The target is a line of skirmishers about 1100 yards to 
our front, only parts of which are visible. 

[675] 



734 

Reference 'point: That long line of bushes about 1300 yards to 
our left front. The company sector is three fingers long and lies between 
us and that reference point, extending one-half finger beyond each 
end of the bushes. 

Aiming 'point: The bottom of the line of bushes. 

Range: 1050 and 1150. 

As soon as the range is announced each front rank man sets his 
sight at 1050 and each rear rank man at 1150. Squad leaders assure them- 
selves that sights are set and that the men of their squads understand 
the aiming point and sector and then raise their hand as a signal that 
all are ready. Similarly, the platoon leaders raise their hands to 
show that all of the squads are ready, and when the captain sees that 
all of his platoons are ready, he signals to begin firing. At the captain's 
signal, each platoon leader commands: '^Fire at WilV\ 

Firing then begins at a rate of about 3 shots per minute (Par. 
14, I. D. E.). 

734. Points To Be Borne in Mind, Bear in mind the following points 
in the solution of field firing problems: 

1. Combine sights should, as a rule, be used where the estimated 
range is 1000 yards or more, the two ranges being 50 yards on each side 
of the estimated range, the even numbers firing at one range, the odd 
numbers at the other. 

2. When aiming points are chosen they should be clearly described. 
Bushes, bunches of lines of grass, fence jDosts, etc., should not be desig- 
nated as aiming points when clear and more definite aiming points are 
available. The choice of the best of several possible aiming points is 
of great importance. 

3. Have some system of simple signals whereby you may know when 
all your men are ready to begin firing. Otherwise, you may begin the 
firing before some of your men have their sights set and before they 
understand the sector and point of aim. For example, let each squad 
leader raise his right hand when his squad is ready, and each platoon 
leader his right hand when his platoon is ready. 

4. Platoon leaders must always be sure to designate a definite aiming 
point. Remember that in the case of an indistinct target, the company 
commander describes the TARGET to the platoon leaders, and they in turn 
announce the AIMINGr POINT. Having seen and located the target, the 
platoon leader must examine the^ terrain at, in front of and behind the 
target, and choose the aiming point for his men. He must then deter- 
mine the proper sight setting for that particular aiming point. He 
then announces both aiming point and range. 

5. Instead of describing a sector as, for example, extending so many 
Yards (or so Dinny "^^ fingers ' ') north froin tho reference point, it is 

[676] 



734 (contd.) 

better to describe it as extending from the reference point northward 
for a definite distance, as '^To that tall red house '\ 

The last method is the best, because it leaves no room for guess- 
ing on the part of subordinates. So, remember it is always best, when 
possible, to define the limits of sectors physically, as, extending, for 
example, from ^^That house to that windmill '', etc. 

6. When acting as part of the battalion, always be sure to designate 
someone (usually one of the musicians) to watch for signals from the 
battalion commander, and don^t fail to repeat back all signals. 

7. In advancing by rushes, always allow sufficient time between 
rushes to recover the loss in fire caused by the cessation of fire. In 
other words, the next rear unit should not start forward until the one 
that has just advanced has resumed an effective fire. 

8. Eemember that in all field firing problems the distribution of 
hits has big weight. Consequently, it should be definitely understood 
before hand, that, in the absence of any target designation by the com- 
pany commander, each platoon leader will look after the sector corres- 
ponding to his front, and that each man will fire at the part of the 
sector corresponding to his front. Should the targets in a given sector 
disappear, then the platoon leader covering that sector will at once 
switch his firo to the adjoining sector until the reappearance of the 
tarorots ill his own sector. For example, let us suppose the company 

A B C P & 

\ I I / / 

\ 1 I / / ' 

\ I ' ' / 
\ 1 ' ( / 

\ 1 ■ I ; , 

\ 1 I ; / 

* I I / , 



'III/ 

ai'^ 1^ 3 6 '2, /p" ^ PLATOON LEADERS 
■1' CARTA !K 



735 

sector, A-B (the company being on the defense and not advancing) is 
divided into four parts A-B, B-C, C-D and D-E. Platoon No. 1 would look 
after everything that appeared in D-E; No. 2, after everything that 
appeared in C-D; No. 3, everything that appeared in B-C; and No. 4, 
after everything that appeared in A-B. 

Should the target suddenly disappear from D-E, then No. 1 would 
switch his fire over to C-D, and keep it there until the target reappeared 
in D-E, and if the targets disappeared from C-D, before reappearing in 
D-E, then both No. 1, and No. 2, would switch their fire cones to A-C. 
735. Exercises. The following exercises for the elementary training 
of individuals and squads were used with success by the troops mobil- 
ized on the Texas border: 

TAEGETS 

1. The target will be represented by individual soldiers. 

2. With reference to their visibility, the battlefield will present 
three classes of targets: 

(a) Those which are visible throughout. 

(b) Those which are visible in part. 

(c) Those which are invisible, but whose location might be 
described. 

Targets will be arranged to simulate one of the classes enumer- 
ated. Instruction will begin with simple exercises in which the target 
presented is plainly visible, and represents only the objective of Lhe 
unit undergoing instruction. It should progress to the more difficult 
exercises in which the target is invisible and the line of figures ia 
prolonged to include the objective of units on the right or left. 

3. The limits of indistinct targets may be shown to unit com- 
manders by the use of company flags. These flags, however, will be 
withdrawn from sight before a description of -the target or estimate 
of the range is attempted, and before any one but the commander of the 
unit undergoing instruction sees their location. 

4. At the conclusion of each exercise in which flags are used to 
mark the limits of the target or its subdivisions, they should be dis- 
played, in order that any existing errors may be readily pointed out. 

5. To determine proficiency in target designation, the instructor will 
provide a sufficient number of rifles, placed on sand bags or other suitable 
rests, and require those charged with fire direction and control to sight 
them at the limits of their objective. An inspection by the instructor 
will at once detect errors. Similarly, in those exercises in which all 
the members of the firing unit participate, the percentage of rifies aimed 
at the correct target may be determined. 

6. In these exercises no method of communication will be permitted 
that could not be used under the conditions assumed in the problem. 

[678] 



735 (contd.) 
EXEKCISE NO. 1— EANGING. 

Object: To train the individual to set Ms sight quickly and 
accurately for the announced range and windage; and to accustom lead- 
ers to the giving of windage data. 

Situation: The company is formed in single rank at the ready 
with the rear sight set at zero and the slide screw normally tight. 

Action: The range and windagie are announced, sights are set 
accurately in accordance therewith and as rapidly as may be, each man 
coming to port arms immediately upon completing the operation. 

Time: Time is taken from the last word of the command. 
' Standard: Sights should be correctly set within 15 seconds. 

Note: Of the two elements, time and accuracy, accuracy is the 
more important. 

Par. 411, I. D. E., implies complete use of the rear sight, that is, 
utilization of the wind gauge, and sight setting to the least reading of the 
rear sight leaf, i. e., 25 yards. Sight setting therefore in this exercise 
should include, more often than not, ''fractional ranges'' and windage 
data. 

EXERCISE NO. 2— RANGING 

Object: To familiarize officers and noncommissioned officers in 
the use of an auxiliary aiming point. 

Situation: Two men with the company flags are stationed to 
mark the enemy's invisible position. This position should be suitably 
located with reference to a practicable aiming point. 

Action: The markers are signalled to display their flags. An 
officer or noncommissioned officer is called up and the enemy's position is 
pointed out. The flags are then withdrawn and the officer or noncom- 
missioned officer selects an auxiliary aiming point and gives his com- 
mands for firing at that point. 

EXERCISE NO. 3— TARGET DESIGNATION 

Object: To train the individual soldier to locate a target, from 
a description solely. To do so quickly and accurately and fire thereon 
with effect, and to train officers and noncommissioned officers in concise, 
accurate and clear description of targets. 

Situation: The men are so placed as not to be able to see to the 
target. The instructor places himself so as to see the objective. 

Action: The instructor, to one man at a time, describes the ob- 
jective, and directs him to fire one simulated round. The man im- 
mediately moves so as to see the target, locates it, estimates the range 
and fires one simulated shot. 

Standard: For ranges within battle sight, time 20 seconds; be- 
yond battle sight, time 30 seconds. Not more than 15% error in the esti- 
mation of the range. Objective correctly located. 

[679] 



735 (contd.) 

Note: Arraiigonicnts iimdc so that the description of the target 
is heard by only" the man about to live. After firing the man will not 
mingle with those waiting to fire. 

EXEECISE NO. 4— TAEGET DESIGNATION 

Object: To train the squad leader id promptly bringing the 
fire of his squad to bear effectively upon the target presented. To train 
the individuals of a squad to fire effectively from orders of the squad 
leader and automatically to obtain effective dispersion. 

Situation: The squad is deployed, the squad leader being in the 
firing line. Position prone. A sighting rest is i)rovided for each rifie. 

Action: Upon the appearance of the target the squad leader 
gives the necessary orders for delivering an effective fire. The men 
under these orders sight their rifles and then rise. The instructor then 
examines the position and sighting of each rifle. 

Time: Time is taken from the appearance of the target until 
the last man has risen. 

Target: A squad of men to outline a partially concealed enemy 
emerges from cover, advances a short distance and lies down. 

Standard: 90% of the rifles should be sighted in conformity 
with the orders of the squad leader and should evenly cover the whole 
front of the objective. The squad leader's estimate of the range should 
not be in error over 15%. 

Note: The squad leader should not, in general, be allowed to 
divide the target into sectors but to obtain distribution by training the 
men to fire at that portion of the objective directly related to the posi- 
tion they occupy in their own line. The exercise should be repeated 
with the squad leader in rear of the squad and not firing. As to this, 
it is to be noted that Musketry School experiments prove that in small, 
groups the directed fire of say seven (7) rifles is more effective than the 
partially undirected fire of eight rifles obtained when the group leader 
is himself firing. 

EXEECISE NO. 5— COMMUNICATION 
Object: To teach prompt and accurate transmission of firing 
data without cessation of fire, and also to teach automatic readjustment 
of fire distribution. 

Situation: A squad deployed in the prone position and with 
sighting rests, is firing at a designated target. 

Action: A squad with sights set at zero is deployed and brought 
up at the double time into the intervals of the firing line and halted. 
The firing data is transmitted to them without cessation of fire. At 
the command Rise, given 20 seconds after the command Halt, the 
first squad rises and retires a short distance to the rear. At the same 
time, the supports cease fire and adjust their rifles in the rests so as 

[680] 



735 (contd.; 

to be aimed at the target as they understand it. They then rise and 
tlieir rifles are examined by the instructor for range and direction. 

Standard: 80% of the rifles should be sighted according to the 
transmitted data and aimed according to the principles of fire dis- 
tribution. 

Target: One target eqi5al to a squad front, which is increased to 
two squads prior to the arrival of the supports in the firing line. 

Note: This exercise should be repeated with the supporting 
squad reenforcing on a flank. To determine whether the original squad 
is able to keep its assigned sector during an advance, this exercise should 
be repeated, the supports being thrown in after a series of short ad- 
vances by the original squad. Care should be exercised to prevent the 
transmission of firing data in a manner under which service conditions 
would be impracticable. (Sec Exercise No. 6). 

EXERCISE NO. 6— COMMUNICATION 

Object: To train the squad leader in receiving and transmitting 
instructions by visual signals alone. 

Situation: A squad with its leader in the firing line is deployed 
in the prone position firing at will. 

Action: The instructor, without sound or other cautionary 
means, signals (visually) to the squad leader at various intervals to, 
First: Change elevation. 

swing the fire to the right or left, 
suspend the firing, 
etc., etc. 

The squad leader, upon receiving a signal, causes his squad to 
execute it without verbal command, or exposing himself. 

Time: No specified time limit. 

Standard: The squad leader should fire with his squad, but 
after each shot should look towards his platoon leader for any signal, 
then observe the fire and conduct of his men, then, after glancing again 
.'it his platoon leader, fire again. This the squad leader should do with- 
out exposing himself. By lying about a head^s length ahead of his men 
he can see his squad front. In transmitting orders he can accomplish 
it by nudging the men on his right and left and signaling to them with 
!iis hand. 

Note: This exercise is essential to prepare men for the deafen- 
ing noise of a heavy action when speech or sound signals are largely 
futile. 

EXERCISE NO. 7— FIRE DISCIPLINE. 

Object: To train men to carry out strictly the fire orders given 
tliom, and to refrain from starting, repeating or accepting any change 
tlierefrom without direct orders from a superior. 

[6811 



735 (contd.) 

Situation: A squad deployed in tlie prone position. 

Action: While the squad is firing at an indistinct but specified 
target, another and clearly visible target appears in the vicinity of 
the first target but not in the same sector. Upon the appearance of this 
second target, the instructor sees that the men continue firing at the 
assigned target. The corporal should check any breach of fire discipline. 

Note: Variations of this exercise should be given to test the 
fire discipline of the men in other phases, such as rate of fire (Par. 
147, I. D. K.), etc. 



[682] 



^ 736-737 

CHAPTER XIX 

CAMPING 

736. Castrametation. The art of laying out camps is called castrame- 
tation. 

737. Selection of Site. The following conditions must be considered 
in the selection of camp sites: 

1. Location. 

2. Water and wood. 

3. Sanitation, and in time of war, defense and safety. 
Camps should be on slightly sloping ground, easily drained and 

subject to sunny exposures. 

Closely cropped turf with sandy or gravelly subsoil is best; high 
banks of rivers are suitable, provided no marshes are near. 

In hot summer months, the ground selected should be high, free 
from underbrush, and shaded with trees if possible. 

In cold weather ground sloping to the south, with woods to break 
the north winds, is desirable. 

Old camp grounds and the vicinity of cemeteries are undesirable. 
Marshy ground and stagnant water are objectionable on account of the 
damp atmosphere and the annoyance and infection from mosquitoes. 
Ground near the foot of a hill range generally taa a damp subsoil and 
remains muddy for a long time. Thick forests, dense vegetation, made 
ground, alluvial soil, punch-bowl depressions, inclosed ravines, and dry 
beds of streams are unfavorable. 

Camp sites should be selected so that troops of one unit need not 
pass through the camp grounds of another. 

As a protection against epidemics, temporary camp sites in the 
theater of operations should be changed every two or three weeks. 

The ground should accommodate the command with as little crowd- 
ing as possible, be easily drained, and have no stagnant water within 
300 yards. 

The water supply should be sufficient, pure, and accessible. 

There should be good roads to the camp and good interior com- 
munication. 

Wood, grass, forage, and supplies must be at hand or obtainable. 

When camp is established for an indefinite period, drainage 
should be attended to at once. Each tent should have a shallow trench 
dug around it and the company and other streets ditched on both sides, 
all the trenches and ditches connecting with a ditch that carries the 
water from the camp. All surface drainage from higher ground should 
be intercepted and turned aside. 

[6831 



737 (contd.) 

In front of every camj^ of a permanent nature, there should be 
a parade ground for drills and ceremonies, and the sanitary conditions 
of the camp should be carefully considered. 

In camping for the night on a fordable stream that is to be 
crossed, always cross before going into camp; for a sudden rise, or the 
appearance of the enemy might prevent the crossing the next morning. 

Whenever windstorms are expected, the tent pegs should be se- 
cured and additional guy ropes attached to the tents. If the soil be loose 
or sandy, stones or other hard material should be placed under the tent 
poles to prevent their working into the soil, thus leaving the tent slack 
and unsteady. When the soil is so loose that the pegs will not hold at all, 
fasten the guy ropes to brush, wood or rocks buried in the ground. 

Tents may be prevented from blowing down by being made fast at 
the corners to posts firmly driven into the ground, or by passing ropes 
over the ridge poles and fastening them to pegs firmly driven into the 
ground. 

While trees add very much to the comfort of a camp, care should 
be exercised not to pitch tents near trees whose branches or trunks might 
fall. 

In a hostile country the capability of defense of a camp site 
should always be considered. 

Form and Dimensions of Camps. The forms of the camp should 
be such as to facilitate the prompt encampment of troops after a march 
and their prompt departure when cami) is broken. The form of camps 
will depend upon the tactical situation aud the amount and nature of 
ground available. In certain cases, particularly in one-night halts in 
the presence of the enemy, camps must of necessity bo contracted^ while 
in other cases, where a more extended bait is contemplated and where 
tactical reasons will permit, better camp sanitation may be secured, and 
a more comfortable arrangement made by the expansion of camp areas. 

The diagram on the opposite page gives the general form, dimen- 
sions, and interior arrangements of a camp for a regiment of infantry 
at v/ar strength. 



[684] 



738 (contd.) 

CAMP OF A REGIMENT OF INFANTRY, WAR STRENGTH 











(19.8 Acres) 










2 










280 YaLds___ 






Ui 


|"""B,r'"'""}«««rs 










'(Hkers'Uhitt','^; ;:; 










Messes and Offices 






; 1 






□U"" 


dD 


□ ]jHdqrs.M;sroQ" 




"Battn.MessQj-, "'" 




- -1- - -1 




DDD '■ 


w, 


Field Officer's Line 
DDD an DDD 






Adi.3"&|S»p. 


0. 


! I o 
Dh 1 










Company Officers' Line' 








no 


DD DD DD DD 


aa aa dd dd 


DO DD ni3 ^ DD 




, A B 


c 


D 


E F G 


H 


1 


K L? 


iwr- 


-20:- i 


Store D 


TentsD n 


D 


a 


D n Q 


n 


a 


D d' 


D 


D . 


• 
MessesLI 


Pits^n 'p 


• 


•□ 


* n *n * r~ 


• 


• 


* * r 


•Q 


44%D' 


D 


D 


D 


n n n 


D 


n- 


- D a 


D 


dJ 


D 


"^D n 


D 


D 


nan 


D 


D 


. a D 


n 


ni 


D 


D D 


D 


D 


DDD 


D 


D 


D a 


a 


Dl 


. □ 


D D 


D 


D 


DDD 


D 


D 


D D 


n 


Dl 


! D 


D n 


D 


D 


D D . D 


□ 


D 


n D 


D 


d; 


' D 


D D 


D 


D 


a D D 


D 


D 


n n 


D 


^i o 


' D 


n D 


n 


n 


D D n 


D 


D 


D n 


D 


n^g 


' a 


D a 


D 


D 


nan 


D 


D 


n D 


D 


n! 


n 


D □ 


D 


D 


DDD 


D 


a 


n D 


D 


°; 


. D 


D D 


D 


D 


DDD 


D 


D 


a D 


D 


D: 


1 □ 


D D 


D 


D 


n □ n 


D 


D 


n D 


D 


Dl 


1 n 


D D 


D 


D 


DDD 


D 


D 


n n 


D 


; 




D D 


D 


D 


DDD 


D 


D 


D n 


D 






D D 


D 


D 


DDD 


□ 


- D 


D D 


D 






D n 


D 


D 


DDD 


a 


D 


a n 


n 






D D 


D 


n 


nan 


n 


D 


D D 


a 






D n 


D 


D 


ODD 


D 


D 


n n 


D 






D D 


D 


D 


DDD 


a 


D 


□ D 


P 




; Hdqrs. 
















J 


Supply i-i 


; Co. and 
















' 


; and • 


• Sanitary 


1st. Battalion 




2d. Battalion 






3d. Battalion 


S 


'Machine; 


; Detach. 








Latrines 








; 


Gun Cos.; 


. t3 


j:^__C=3_ 


__C=i 


__^ 


L_C^__I^__ C=i_ 


_^i _ C=3 


_S^__S==L 


_S^x._^J _ 






1 












, ^tfi 


1 


Train Park 














1 




_ _ _ . _ J ; 




Slnrr 


(amp ' 


Mec- 








Stable g.S: 




...P.D.J 


Guard: 
5QP 


B 










GBardni S 


U _ . 


1 


Animak 




1 



738. Making Camp. The command should be preceded by the command- 
ing officer or a staff officer, who selects the camp site, and designates, by 
planting stakes, the lines of tents, the positions of the sinks, guard tent, 
kitchens, picket line, etc. 

[685] 



739 

After the companies are marched to their proper positions and 
arms are stacked, the details for guard and to bring wood, water, dig 
sinks, pitch tents, handle rations, etc., should be made before ranks are 
broken. 

Immediately upon reaching camp and before the men are allowed 
to go around, patrolling sentinels should be established to prevent men 
from polluting the camp site or adjoining ground before the sinks are 
constructed. 

Sentinels should be posted over the water supply without delay. 

As soon as the tents have been pitched and the sinks dug, the 
camp should be inspected and all unnecessary sentinels relieved. 

The tents should be pitched and the sinks dug simultaneously. 

If the weather is at all threatening or if it is intended to camp 
m^ore than one night, all tents should be ditched. 

Should the troops reach camp before the wagons, the companies 
may be divided into squads and set to work clearing the ground, gath- 
ering fire wood, collecting leaves, grass, etc., for beds, etc. 

The moment a command reaches camp its officers and men usually 
want to go here and there under all sorts of pretexts. No one should 
be allowed to leave camp until all necessary instructions have been given. 

Officers should not be allowed to leave camp without permission 
from the commanding officer, and enlisted men should not be permitted 
to leave camp without permission of their company commanders. 

Sick call should be held as soon as practicable after the tents 
have been pitched. 

Eetreat roll call should always be under arms, an officer being 
with each company and inspecting its arms. 

739. Construction of Latrines. The latrines must be dug immediately 
upon reaching camp — their construction must not be delayed until the 
cam^ps have been pitched and other duties performed. The exact loca- 
tion of the latrines should be determined by the commanding officer, or 
by some officer designated by him, the following considerations being 
observed: 

1. They should be so located as not to contaminate the water supply. 

2. They should not be placed where they call be flooded by rain 
water from higher ground, nor should they be so placed that they can 
pollute phe camp by overflow in case of heavy rains. 

3. They should be as far from the tents as is compatible with con- 
venience — ^if too near, they will be a source of annoyance; if too far, some 
men, especially at night, and particularly if affected with diarrhoea, will 
defecate before reaching the latrine. TJnder ordinary circumstances, a 
distance of about 75 yards is considered sufficient. 

[686] 



740 

Latrines for the men are always located on the opposite side of 
the camp from the kitchens, generally one for each company unit and one 
for the officers of a battalion or squadron. They are so placed that the 
drainage or overflow can not pollute the water supply or camp grounds. 

When the camp is for one night only, straddle trenches suffice. 
In camp of longer duration, and when it is not possible to provide latrine 
boxes, as for permanent camps, deeper trenches should be dug. These 
may be used as straddle trenches or a seat improvised. When open 
trenches are used the excrement must be kept covered at all times with a 
layer of earth. In more permanent camps the trenches are not over 
2 feet wide, 6 feet deep, and 12 feet long, and suitably screened. Seats 
with Hds are provided and covered to the ground to keep flies from reach- 
ing the deposits; urinal troughs discharging into the trenches are provided. 
Each day the latrine boxes are thoroughly cleaned, outside by scrubbing 
and inside by applying, when necessary, a coat of oil or whitewash. The 
pit is burned out daily with approximately 1 gallon oil and 15 pounds 
straw. When filled to within 2 feet of the surface, such latrines are 
discarded, filled with earth, and their position marked. All latrines and 
kitchen pits are filled in before the march is resumed. In permanent 
camps and cantonments, urine tubs may be placed in the company 
streets at night and emptied after reveille. 

All latrines must be filled before marching. The following illustra- 
tion shows a very simple and excellent latrine seat which can be made 
and kept in the company permanently for use in camps on the march: 



6r 



^ 



ROPE 5\)PP0R.r 



ROPE SUPPORT 



O 



^] 



♦-JVPRICtHT 



s 



roP 




740. Kitchens. Camp kettles can be hung on a 
support consisting of a green pole lying in the crotches 
of two upright posts of the same character. A narrow 
trench for the fire, about 1 foot deep, dug under the 
pole, not only protects the fire from the wind but saves 
fuel 





740 (cojitd.) 

A still greater economy of fuel can 
be effected by digging a similar trench in 
the direction of the wind and slightly nar- 
rower than the diameter of the kettles. The 
kettles are then placed on the trench and the 
space between the kettles filled in with stones, 
clay, etc., leaving the flue running beneath 
the kettles. The draft can be improved by 
building a chimney of stones, clay, etc., at 
the leeward end of the flue. 

Four such trenches radiating from 
a common central chimney will give one 
flue for use whatever may be the direction 
of the wind. 

A slight slope of the flue, from the 
chimney down, provides for drainage and 
improves the draft. 
-The lack of portable ovens can be met by ovens constructed of 
stone and covered with earth to better retain the heat. If no stone is 
available an empty barrel, with one head out, is laid on its side, covered 
with wet clay to a depth of 6 or more inches and then with a layer of 
dry earthy equally thick. A flue is constructed with the clay above the 
closed end of the barrel, which is then burned out with a hot fire. This 
leaves a baked clay covering for the oven. 

A recess can be similarly constructed with boards or even brush 
wood supported on a horizontal pole resting on upright posts, covered 
and burnt out as in the case of the barrel. 

When clay banks are available, an oven may be excavated there- 
in and used at once. 

To bake in such ovens, first heat them and then close flues and 
ends. 

Food must be protected from flies, dust, and sun. Facilities must 
be provided for cleaning and scalding the mess equipment of the men 
Kitchens and the ground around them must be kept scrupulously clean. 

..ohd refuse should be promptly burned, either in the kitchen 
nre or in an improvised crematory. 

In temporary camps, if the soil is porous, liquid refuse from the 
kitchens may be strained through gunny sacking into seepage pits dus 
near the kitchen. Flies must not have access to these pits. Boards or 
poles, covered with brush or grass and a layer of earth may be used 
for this purpose. The strainers should also be protected from flies. Pits 
of this kind, dug in clayey soil, will not operate successfully. All pits 
should be filled with earth before marching. 
Re Iftti '^^^ *^^^^ regarding kitchens, etc., is from the Infantry Drill 



741-742 

As a precautionary measure against setting the camp on fire, all 
dry grass, underbrush, etc., in the immediate vicinity of the kitchen 
should be cut down. 

In case gf a fire in camp, underbrush, spades, shovels, blankets, 
etc., are used to beat it out. 

Gunny sacks dipped in water are the best fire fighters. 

Burning away dried grass and underbrush around exterior of 
camp is a great protection against fire from outside. 

741. Kitchen Pits. Pits of convenient size should be constructed for 
the liquid refuse from the kitchens. Solid refuse should be burned 
either in the kitchen fire or at some designated place, depending upon 
whether the camp is of a temporary or permanent nature. Unless the 
camp be of a very temporary nature, the pits should be covered with 
boards ov other material in order to exclude the flies. 

All pits should be filled in with earth before breaking camp. 

742. Incinerators. The incineration pit shown in the following dia- 
gram, affords an excellent, simple and economical way of disposing of 
camp waste and offal, tin cans and dish-water included : 



[68>] 



742 (contd.) 






1 

1 



1 

I 






i^ 



%'m^f}i)^ih 



\2>-./- 



\ 



i 

I 
I 



■J 



.^7<^ 



ll ' 




Description: 

The pit is about 41/2 feet long, 1^^ feet wide and 2 feet deep at 
one end and 2 1/0 at the other. It is partially filled with stones, the 
larger ones on the bottom and the smaller on the top. At one end of 
the pit the stones extend a little above the surface, and slope gradually 
toward the other end until the fire pit is reached ten inches below the 

[690] 



743 

surface of the trench. Over the fire pit, about five inches above the 
ground, is placed a crab or a piece of boiler iron, on which is boiled 
all the water for washing dishes, etc. The fire pit is only about one- 
half of the stone surface, as the radiated heat keeps the rest of the 
stones hot, causing all dish and slop water to evaporate quickly. 

Any tin cans that may be thrown into the fire pit are removed 
after a short exposure to the heat and placed in a trench especially 
dug for the purpose. 

743. The company incinerator shown below was used with great 
success by some of our troops at Texas City, Texas. The rocks should 
not be too large. The men should be instructed to drop all liquid on 
the sides of the incinerator and throw all solid matter on the fire — the 
liquids will thus be evaporated and the solids burned. Until the men 
learn how to use the incinerator properly, a noncommissioned ofiicer 
should be detailed to supervise its use. 




SECT/ON THRO C-0 
l691] 



744-745-746-747 

744» Bunks. Place a number of small jioles about seven feet long 
close together^ the upper ends resting on a cross pole about six inches 
in diameter and the lower ends resting on the ground; or, the poles may 
be raised entirely off the ground by being placed on cross poles supported 
by fork«;d stakes at the corners; on the poles place grass, leaves, etc. 

745. Wood. The firewood should be collected, cut and piled near the 
kitchen. Dry wood is usually found under logs or roots of trees. 

If wagons are not heavily loaded it is sometimes a good plaii 
to bring a few sticks of dry wood from the preceding camp, or to 
pick up good wood en route. 

746. Water. Precautionary measures should always be taken to 
prevent the contamination of the water, and a guard from the first 
troops reaching camp should be placed over the water supply. Water 
used for drinking purposes should be gotten from above the camp, and 
places below this point should be designated for watering the animals, 
bathing and washing clothes. 

In the field it is sometimes necessary to sterilize or filter water. 
The easiest and surest way of sterilizing jwater is by boiling. Boiled 
water should be aerated by being poured from one receptacle to another 
or by being filtered through charcoal or clean gravel. Unless boiled 
water be thus aerated it is very unpalatable and it is with difficulty that 
troops can be made to drink it. 

Filtration merely clarifies — it does not purify. The following 
are simple methods of filtration: 

1. Dig a hole near the source of supply so that the water may 
percolate through the soil before being used. 

2. Sink a barrel or box into the ground, the water entering therein 
through a wooden trough packed with clean sand, gravel or charcoal. 

3. Place a box or barrel in another box or barrel of larger size, 
filling the space between with clean sand, gravel, moss or charcoal, and 
piercing holes near the bottom of the outer barrel and near the top of 
the innei. The filter thus constructed is partly submerged in the water 
to be filtered. 

4. Bore a small hole in the bottom of a barrel or other suitable 
receptacle, which is partly filled with layers of sand, gravel, and, if 
available, charcoal and moss. The water is poured in at the top and is 
collected as it emerges from the aperture below. 

The amount of water-used by troops is usually computed at the 
rate of five gallons for each man and ten gallons for each animal per day. 

747. Sanitation and Police. The rules of sanitation are enforced. 
Men should not lie on damp ground. In temporary camps and 

in bivouac they raise their beds if suitable material, such as straw, 
leaves, or boughs can be obtained, or use their ponchos or slickers. In 

[6921 



747 (contd.) 

cold weather and when fuel is plentiful the ground may be warmed by 
fires, the men making their beds after raking away the ashes. 

When troops are to remain in camp for sometime all underbrush 
is cleared away and the camp made as comfortable as possible. Water- 
ing troughs, shelter in cold weather, and shade in hot, are provided 
for the animals, if practicable. 

In camps of some duration guard and other routine duties follow 
closely the custom in garrison. The watering, feeding, and grooming of 
animals take place at regular hours and under the supervision of officers. 

The camp is policed daily after breakfast and all refuse matter 
burned. 

Tent walls are raised and the bedding and clothing aired daily, 
■ weather permitting. 

Arms and personal equipments are kept in the tents of the men. 
In the cavalry, horse equipments are also usually kept in the tents, 
but in camps of some duration they may be placed on racks outside and 
covered with slickers. In the artillery, horse equipments and harness 
are placed on the poles of the carriages and covered with paulins. 

The water supply is carefully guarded. When several com- 
mands are encamped along the same stream this matttBr is regulated by 
the senior officer. 

If the stream is small, the water supply may be increased by 
building dams. Small springs may be dug out and lined with stone, 
brick, or empty barrels. Surface drainage is kept off by a curb of clay. 

\Vhen sterilized water is not provided, or when there is doubt as 
to the purity of the water, it is boiled 20 minutes, then cooled and aerated. 
(The above regarding sanitation and police is from the Infantry 
Drill Regulations.) 



K-vv.n 



748 



CHAPTER XX 



INDIVIDUAL COOKING* 

748. For such individual cooking as may be necessary for the soldier 
when thrown upon his own resources, the following bills of fare have 
been prepared. Where the tin cup and spoon are mentioned, refer- 
ence is made to those issued with the field mess kit. 

Eemember that the best fire for cooking is a small, clear one, or 
better yet, a few brisk coals. 

Almost anything that can be cooked at all can be prepared in 
the mess kit, though the variety is necessarily small and quantities 
limited on account of few utensils of small capacity. 

Company commanders in estimating the amounts that will be re- 
quired for each meal may assume that one man will consume for one 
meal about — 

1 ounce of sugar. 

14 ounce of coffee, 1 ounce chocolate or cocoa, or 1/10 ounce 

of tea. 
4 ounces of dried vegetables. 
4 ounces of flour or 4 hardtacks. 
8 ounces of fresh vegetables. 

4 ounces of sliced bacon or 6 to 8 ounces of fresh meat. 
1/5 ounce of salt. 
1/50 ounce of pepper. 

Bills of fare 



Meats. 



Bacon 

Meat and vegetable stew. 
Broiled steak 



Vegetables. 



Boiled rice. 



Bacon 

Bacon 

Bacon 

Fried Steak. 



Etc.. 



Fried potatoes and on- 
ions. 

Stewed tomatoes 

Oatmeal 

Baked potatoes; rice.... 

Boiled potatoes; cold to- 
matoes. 

Etc 



Flapjack 

Flapjack 

Hard bread. . 



Bread, etc. 



Hoecake 

Hard bread. . . 

Flapjack 

Hard bread. . . 



Etc. 



Drink. 



Coffee. 
Coffee. 
Cocoa. 

Coffee. 
Tea. 

Chocolate. 
Coffee. 

Etc. 



Or^ Whei?^ Time is More Limited 



8 
9 
10 
11 
12 
13 
14 



Fried bacon 

Fried bacon 

Corned beef (cold) 

Fried fish and bacon 

Meat and vegetable stew. 

Broiled steak 

Boiled fish 

Etc 



Fried potatoes. 



Tomato stew . . . 
Baked potatoes. 



Baked potatoes. 
Fried potatoes.. 
Etc 



Hard bread. 
Flapjack. . . . 
Hard bread. 
Hard bread. 
Hoecake. . . . 
Hard bread. 
Hard bread. 
Etc 



Coffee. 

Coffee. 

Coffee. 

Coffee. 

Tea. 

Cocoa. 

Tea. 

Etc. 



* From "Manual for Army Cooks," prepared by the Subsistence Department. 

[694] 



748 (contd.) 
Suggestions For Handling Bill Of Fare No. 1. 

Take two-thirds of a cup of water and bring to a boil. Add 4 
spoonfuls of rice and boil until soft, i. e., until it can be masked by 
the fingers with but little resistance. This will require about fifteen 
minutes. Add 2 pinches of salt and, after stirring, pour off the water 
and empty the rice out on the lid of the m6ss pan. 

Meanwhile, fry 3 slices of bacon until slightly browned, in the 
mess pan over a brisk fire or hot coals, and lay them on top of the 
rice, leaving sufficient grease in the pan in which to fry the flap jack. 

Take 6 spoonfuls of flour and one-third spoonful of baking pow- 
der and mix thoroughly. Add sufficient cold water to make a batter 
that will drip freely from the spoon. Add a pinch of salt and 2 
pinches of sugar and pour the batter into the mess pan, which should 
contain the grease from the fried bacon. Place over medium hot coals 
and bake from five to seven minutes; see that it will slip easily in the 
pan and then, by the quick toss, turn it over and continue the baking 
from five to seven minutes longer or until, by examination, it is found 
to be done. 

While the batter is frying, wash out the tin cup; two-thirds fill 
with water and let come to a boil. Add 1 medium heaping spoonful of 
coffee and stir well, and, if desired, 1 spoonful of sugar and let boil for 
about five minutes. Let simmer for about ten minutes longer. Settle 
by a dash of cold water or let stand a few minutes. 

A hot meal is now ready to serve. Time about forty minutes. 
Recipes 
Drinks 
(For one meal for one man.) 



Article and 
amount. 


o 


1 

g 


1 




Remarks. 




i^ 


5 


z 




K. 




< 


< 


^ 


< 






Cup. 




Min, 


Sp'nful 




Coffee, 1 heaping 


2/3 


boils. 




1 


Stir grains well when add- 


spoonful. 




Water 
.>.do.. 


5 




ing. Let simmer ten min- 
utes after boiling. Settle 
with a dash of water or let 
stand a few minutes. 
Ready to serve. 
Stir when adding until dis- 


Cocoa, 1 heaping 


2/3 




5 


1^ 


spoonful. 










solved. Ready to serve 
when sufficiently cooled. 


Chocolate, 1 cubic 

inch. 
Tea, 1/2 level 


2/3 


..do.. 




1J4 


Do. 


2/3 


..do.. 


5 


1 


Let stand or "draw" eight 


spoonful. 











minutesw If allowed to 
stand longer, the tea will 
get bitter unless separated 
from the grains. 


: : -, 








_-_ 



[695] 



748 (contd.) 

Note. — Coffee made by above recipe is of medium strength and the same as when 
using 4 ounces to the gallon of water. It is within the limit of the ration if made but 
twice each day. 

Tea. — A little more than medium strength, the same as when using 3/5 ounce. to 
the gallon, and within the ration allowance if made three 'times per day. 

Chocolate and cocoa.— About 1 ounce per man per meal. If available, milk 
should be used in the place of water, and should be kept somewhat below the boil- 
ing point. Mix a 1-pound can of evaporated milk with 3J4 quarts of water to make 
1 gallon of milk of the proper consistency for use in making cocoa or chocolate. 

Dried Vegetables 







(For one meal 


for one 


man.) 




Article and amount. 


If 

< 




*o 


O y 


Wi 


Remarks. 




1 


I 


CO ^ 








Cup. 




Hours. 








Rice, 4 heaping 


2,1 


Water 


1/3 


2 


1 


Should be boiled until 


spoonfuls. 




boils. 








grains (while still nicely 
separated) may be crushed 
between the fingers with 
but little resistance. Then 
drain off the water. 


Cofnmeal, hominy, 


1/3 


..do.. 


1/3 


2 




All water should now be 


fine oatmeal, 4 












taken up by the corn- 


heaping spoonfuls. 












meal, hominy, or oat- 
meal, which forms a thick 
paste. 


Dried sweet corn, 


1/3 


. .do. . 


1/3 


2 


1 


4 heaping- spoon- 














fuls. 














Lima beans, 4 heap- 


2/3 


Water 


2 or 3 


1 




When done the beans 


ing spoonfuls. 




is put 
>n. 








should still be whole but 
soft. Add one small 
slice of bacon one-half 
hour before done. Add 
water as required. 


Chili beans and 


2/3 


..do.. 


3 or 4 


1 


Above remark applies. 


frijolas, 4 heaping 














spoonfuls. 














Beans, issue dried 


2/3 


. . do . . 


3 or 4 


1 




Not recommended on ac- 


green peas, homi- 












count of time required 


ny, coarse split 












for cooking. 


peas, 4 heaping 














spoonfuls. 















Note. — By a heaping spoonful is meant here all that can readily be taken up. 
A pinch of salt is the amount that can readily be taken up between the end of the 
thumb and forefinger. 

Meats 
Bacon. — Cut side of bacon in half lengthwise. Then cut slices 
about five to the inch, three of which should generally be sufficient for 
one man for one meal. Place in a mess pan with about one-half inch 
of cold water. Let come to a boil and then pour the water off. Fry 
over a brisk fire, turning tlic bneoii once and quickly browning it, Ro 

1696} 



748 (contd.) 

move the bacon to lid of mess pan, leaviug the grease for frying potatoes, 
onions, rice flapjacks, etc., according to recipe. 

Fresh meat — To fry. — To fry, a small amount of grease (1 to 2 
spoonfuls) is necessary. Put grease in mess pan and let come to a smok- 
ing temperature, then drop in the steak and, if about one-half inch 
thick, let fry for about one minute before turning — depending upon 
whether it is desired it shall be rare, medium, or well done. Then turn 
and fry briskly as before. Salt and pepper to taste. 

Applies to beef, veal, pork, mutton, venison, etc. 

Fresh meat — To broil. — Cut in slices about 1 inch thick, from 
half as large as the hand to four times that size. Sharpen a stick or 
branch of convenient length, say from 2 to 4 feet long, and weave 
the point of tlie stick through the steak several times so that it may 
be readily turned over a few brisk coals or on the windward side of a 
small fire. Allow to brown nicely, turning frequently. Salt and pepper 
to taste. Meat with considerable fat is preferred, though any meat 
m.ay be broiled in this manner. 

Fresh meat — To stew. — Cut into chunks from one-half inch to 
1-inch cubes. Fill cup about one-third full of meat and cover with 
about 1 inch of water. Let boil or simmer about one hour or until 
tender. Add such fibrous vegetables as carrots, turnips, or <?abbage, 
cut into small chunks, soon after the meat is put on to boil, and 
potatoes, onions, or other tender vegetables when the meat is about 
half done. Amount of vegetables to be added, about the same as 
meat, depending upon supply and taste. Salt and pepper to taste. 
Applies to all fresh meats and fowls. The proportion of meat and 
vegetables used varies with their abundance and fixed quantities can 
not be adhered to. Fresh fish can be handled as above, except that 
it is cooked much quicker, and potatoes, onions, and canned corn are the 
only vegetables generally used with it, thus making a chowder. A 
slice of bacon would greatly improve the flavor. May be conveniently 
cooked in mess pan or tin cup. 

Fresh Vegetables 

Potatoes, fried. — Take two medium-sized potatoes or one large 
one (about one-half pound), i)eel and cut into slices about one-fourth 
inch thick and scatter well in the mess pan in which the grease re 
mains after frying the bacon. Add sufficient water to half cover the 
potatoes, cover with the lid to keep the moisture in, and let come to a 
boil from fifteen to twenty minutes. Remove the cover and dry as 
desired. Salt and pepper to taste. During the cooking the bacon already 
prepared may be kept on the cover, which is most conveniently'' placed 
bottom side up over the cooking vogetablrs. 

Onions, fried. — Same as jx^iators. 

[697] 



748 (contd.) 

Potatoes, boiled. — Peel two medium-sized potatoes or one large 
one (about one-half pound), and cut in coarse chunks of about the 
same size — say 1%-inch cubes. Place in mess pan and three-fourths 
fill with water. Cover with lid and let boil or simmer for fifteen or 
twenty minutes. They are done when easily penetrated with a sharp 
stick. Pour off the water and let dry out for one or two minutes over 
hot ashes or light coals. 

Potatoes, baked. — Take two medium-sized potatoes or one large 
one cut in half (about one-half pound). Lay in a bed of light coals, 
cover with same and smother with ashes. Do not disturb for thirty or 
forty minutes, when they should be done. 

Canned Tomatoes. — One 2-pound can is generally sufficient for 
five men. 

Stem, Pour into the mess pan one man's allowance of tomatoes, 
add about two large hardtacks broken into small pieces, and let come 
to a boil. Add salt and pepper to taste, or add a pinch of salt and 
one-fourth spoonful of sugar. 

Or, having fried the bacon, pour the tomatoes into the mess pan, 
the grease remaining, and add, if desired, two broken hardtacks. Set 
over a brisk fire and let come to a boil. 

Or, heat the tomatoes just as they come from the can, adding 
two pinches of salt and one-half spoonful of sugar if desired. 

Or, especially in hot weather, eaten cold with hard bread they 
are very palatable. ' 

Hot Breads 

Flapjack. — Take 6 spoonfuls of flour and one-third spoonful of 

baking powder and mix thoroughly (or dry mix in a large pan before 
issue, at the rate of 25 pounds of flour and three half-pound cans of 
baking powder for 100 men). Add sufficient cold water to make a batter 
that will drip freely from the spoon, adding a pinch of salt. Pour 
into the mess pan, which should contain the grease from fried bacon, or 
a spoonful of butter or fat, and place over medium hot coals sufficient 
to bake so that in from five to seven minutes the flapjack may be turned 
over by a quick toss of the pan. Fry from five to seven minutes longer 
or until, by examination, it is found to be done. 

Hoecake. — Hoecake is made exactly the same as a flapjack by 
substituting corn meal for flour. 

Emergency Eation 

Emergency Rations. — Detailed instructions as to the manner of 
preparing the emergency ration are found on the label with each can. 
Eemember that even a very limited amount of bacon or hard bread, 

[698] 



748 (contd.) 

or both, taken with the emergency ration makes it far more palatable, 
and greatly extends the period during which it can be consumed with 
relish. For this reason it would be better to husband the supply of 
hard bread and bacon to use with the emergency ration when it becomes 
evident that the latter must be consumed, rather than to retain the 
emergency ration to the last extremity to be used exclusively for a 
longer period than two or three days. 



[6991 



Advertising Directory 



The firms whose names appear 
in this Directory are all first 
class, reliable concerns that 
the author recommends. 



A NEW PERIODICAL 

The International Military Digest 

The United States stands at the beginning of a new epoch in its inter- 
national and, military relations. The great war now waging in Europe brings 
home sharply the realization of the fact that, in a few of the fundamentals 
and many of the details of modern military science, we in America still bear 
the relation' toward Europe of pupil and teacher. 

Thf T "f rafiir*^ f ^^^ army officer can be expected to subscribe to more 
Militarv Science ^^^^" °^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^ °^ ^^^ journals of military 

a y oc c science published in this country; nor to the even more 

important and much more numerous journals published in Great Britain, France, 
Germany, Russia, etc. 

*"ru^ T«4-*»,.«^**««^i ^^^^' International Military Digest offers the officer a happy 
Militarv nf^eJt'^ solution of this particular problem. It essays a field of 

y y gest current bibliography now practically untouched, viz., 

material in military science in all languages and in every country, and does 
so not merely by indexing this material but by once summarizing it for "the 
reader and directing him to the latest periodical source for it. 

Q/^A^t^* '^A ■D-,t.r^/^c.«, Stated simply, the scope and purpose of the Digest is to 
bcope ana I'arpose ^.^^^^ .^^ ^^.^^^ abstract form all the contents of the seventy 
odd journals of military science, both American and foreign, which are of any 
professional importance. These abstracts are not critical, but concise, readable, 
impartial and informative summaries, varying in length from 100 to 50O words, 
according to the length and importance of the article abstracted. Citations are 
given in each case directing the inquirer to the source of the abstract where the 
full text of the article may be found. The Digest aims in no sense to supplant 
any existing military periodical, but to supplement and render more valuable 
all of them. 

r„«,„i.,*o^ TvT„,v,u^^c The arrangement of the material in each issue is alpha- 
Cumulated Numbers ^^^^j^^j ^^ cyclopedic, with copious cross-references in 
related topics. The m.aterlal of the monthly issues is "cumulated'' or consolid- 
ated quarterly into a single alphabet, making each quarterly issue one of 
approximately two hundred pages, facilitating in this way immediate ready refer- 
ence through the year. At the end of the year these quarterly issues are again 
"cumulated" into a single alphabet. Every issue of the Digest is, in effect, a 
"current cyclopedia" of military science, while the annual volume (of approxi- 
mately eight hundred closely printed pages) becomes automatically an invalu- 
able cyclopedia of the military progress of the year in every branch of the 
service and in every country. 

Frl'f r* 1 ^fafF ^^ ^^^ professional standing of the Digest we can only say 
ii.aitoriai atati ^-^^^ ^^^^ ^^^ editors are well known professionally, being pro- 
fessors at the United States Military Academy at West Point. 

Subscription, including' quarterly and 

annual cumulations 

$5 A YEAR 

The International Military Digest 

241 West 37th St., New York City 



OTHER BOOKS BY THE SAME AUTHOR 

OFFICERS' MANUAL . = ....... $2.50 

An invaluable guide in all matters concerning administration and paperwork, in- 
cluding model pay vouchers, model proceedings of boards, model forms of depositions, 
etc. Based upon the experience of a number of our most efficient and best known 
officers, the duties of compam^ officers, adjutants, quartermasters, exchange officers, 
ordnance officers, engineer officers, signal officers, range officers, surveying officers, 
aides de camp and the summary court, are fully covered. Treats of customs of 
the service, Army organization and the numerous other phases of Army life. A 
thousand and one practical suggestions and worth-knowing ideas are carefully 
boiled down, classified, arranged and indexed for instant reference — It is a sort of 
pigeon-hole adviser. It is the "What's What" of the Army. 

NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS' MANUAL $1.50 

The soul of this m.anual, so to speak, consists of the condensed experiences of 
over fifty experienced noncommissioned officers of the Regular Army. It t'eals of 
the importance and dignity of the office of noncommissioned officers ; the general 
principles of discipline ; obedience ; the duties of the noncommissioned officers of all 
the different grades and positions ; the treatment of privates by noncommissioned 
officers; military courtesy; map reading; map sketching; guard duty; the service of 
security and information; customs of the service affecting noncommissioned officers. 

FIELD SERVICE $1.25 

This book treats in a simple, practical, concrete manner the important subject 
of Field Service. It gives the result of the experiences of a number of officers and 
( lilisted men. 

CONTENTS: Equipment and Personal Effects of Officers; Equipment and 
Personal Effects of Enlisted Men; A company taking the Field. Things to be 
taken along; Loading Wagons; Transportation and Caring for Means of Transporta- 
tion ; General Rules for the Conduct of Marches — Advance Guards — Rear Guards — 
Flanking Parties ; Camping — Forms and Dimensions of Camp — Their Location — 
Construction of sinks — Kitchen, Kitchen Pits and Incineration Pits; Camp Ex- 
pedients; Individual Cooking; Field Cooking; Field Baking and Field Bakery 
Equipment ; Care of the health and First Aid to the Sick and Wounded ; Rifle 
Trenches ; Weights of Articles Usually taken into the Field ; Weights, Dimensions 
and Capacity of Tents ; Heating Tents ; Weights of Ration ; Capacities of Wagons 
and Pack Animals ; Dimensions and Capacities of -Railroad Cars ; Allowance of 
Water; Ration of Forage. 

APPLIED MINOR TACTICS 

(Including Map Problems and the War Game.) .^ ^ 

MAP READING. 

MAP SKETCHING. 

Simplified for beginners. The subjects of minor tactics, map problems, the war 
game, map reading and map sketching, are presented in a simple, interesting, con- 
versational, elementary way. Especially adapted to the instruction of subalterns, 
noncommissioned officers and privates in their duties in campaign. 

RIOT DUTY $0.50 

Treats the subject in a simple, practical, common-sense way. 

The Legal Side: When the Regular Army and when the Militia may be ordered 
out for Riot Duty; Civil control of troops — The seizure, use and destruction of 
private property — Firing on rioters — Arresting rioters in private houses — Disposition 
of persons arrested — Arrest of officers and enlisted men while on riot duty — Writ of 
Habeas Corpus, etc., etc. 

The Tactical Side: Assembling of Militia Organizations — Leaving the Armory — 
Marching to the scene of trouble — Dispersing or attacking a Mob — Attack and defense 
of houses and barricades — Defense of Railway stations— Freight Depots, RolHng 
stock and tracks, etc., etc. 



PRIVATES' MANUAL 

(Second Edition, Revised and Enlarged) 
(Profusely Illustrated) 
By CAPT. JAS. A. MOSS, 29th Inf. 
It reflects the spirit of the hour regarding method, system, simplicity, and inten- 
siveness in military training and instruction. 

CHAPTERS 
I. Object and Advantages of Military VII. Care of the Health. 

Training. ^ (This chapter and the two fol- 

(Object and purpose of drills, lowing, which are simplicity itself 

discipline and all other military in language and arrangement, are 

requirements fully explained to the result of several years' suc- 

the soldier.) cessful work with the enlisted men 

II. The Soldier's Equipment. ^ by one of the Army's best known 

(Description of entire equip- surgeons.) 

ment, showing how assembled, VIII. Camp Sanitation. 

,^, adjusted and used.) IX. First Aid to the Sick and Injured. 

III. Care and Preservation of Cloth- x. Field Expedients— Individual 
ing and Equipment. r ««!,;„ o- 

(Gives the best methods for ^^ Cooking, 

cleaning and preserving clothing ^^' Description and Management of 

and equipment.) *"® Rme. 

IV. Guard Duty. XII. Care and Preservation of the Rifle. 

(Everything the private should XIII. How to Shoot, 

know about guard duty is pre- (Tells in simple, profusely illus- 

sented in the form of questions trated way, how some of our best 

and answers.) company commanders train and 

V. Military Courtesy. instruct their men in shooting.) 

(Subject covered in exhaustive, xiV. The Soldier's Campaign Creed. 

VT M?^W^r^' ^^L^'r^fn\^^LTlL^.r ^Tells a soldier whit he should 

^«J.^.?rfi^^ T. * Mon.^^r^^ll" know and do on the march, in 

sTonlToffi'ce?s-F°orms''°ori^e^^^^ ^^3^ Ve^n r^b'^let^^ ^^^^^^'^^ 

-Delivery of Messages-How to ^,, ^^^ when m battle.) 
enter and leave a room in which XV. Extracts from Army Regulations, 
there is an Officer — How to be • Uniform Regulations, War Depart- 

paid — How to appear as a Witness ment Orders, etc., affecting en- 

before a Court-Martial. listed men.) 

What the MANUAL does: 

1. It gives the officer in one book what he must now go through many books to 
gather, compile, and prepare for presentation to the enlisted man. 

2. In convenient, attractive, illustrated, and understandable form, easily accessible 
at any time, it presents to the soldier the principal things that he should know, and 
enables his company commander to utilize to full advantage an important asset gen- 
erally neglected in the training and instruction of the enlisted man of today, viz., 
his ability to read. 

3. _ It enables the lieutenants and' the squad leaders and other company non- 
commissioned officers to assist the company commander in a manner otherwise im- 
possible, in the instruction of privates, and at the same time learning themselves. 

4. It enables the company cornmander to make more systematic, thorough and 
complete, the instruction of the enlisted men of the company. 

In short. Privates' Manual will enable the company commander to train and 
instruct his men more thoroughly than he otherwise could, and in much less time. 

A civilian attending a camp of instruction will find his work greatly simplified, 
if he has read PRIVATES* MANUAL. It will be invaluable to him both before 
and after reaching camp. 

PRICE $1, POSTPAID 

(A legitimate expenditure from company fund. Discount of 25% on 12 to 49 copies ^ 

and 33 1/3% on 50 copies or more.) 

If the Manual is not entirely satisfactory, return at our expense. 

ARMY CHANGES (Edited by Capt. Moss) | ^P^^f copy'''"^^''''' ^^1o 

Published quarterly. Every number gives all changes in the Army Regulations, 
the various Drill Regulations, the Manual of Guard Duty, the Field Service Regula- 
tions, the Courts-Martial Manual and all the other manuals from the dates of their 
issue to the date of the last number of ARMY CHANGES. Indispensable to any 
officer who would have the books named kept accurately posted to date. 

SALES AGENT 

GEORGE BANTA PUBLISHING COMPANY, 
Menasha, Wisconsin. 



SELF-HELPS FOR THE CITIZEN-SOLDIER 

(Profusely Illustrated) 

By CAPTS. JAS. A. MOSS and MERCH B. STEWART, U. S. Army $1.25 

(Introduction by Major General Leonard Wood, U. S. Army.) 
In simple, entertaining language it gives the civilian a good, practical idea of 
the broad, general principles underlying the use of military forces ; it shows the 
necessity for preparedness; outlines the salient features of our military policy; ex- 
plains how a fighting man is made; describes how a battle is actually fought; gives 
practical suggestions for self-preparation for war, etc. In short, the book prepares 
the mind of the citizen-soldier for the sowing of the military seed so that he may 
better understand the object and advantages of military training and instruction, and 
thereby approach his work in the proper spirit and get therefrom the greatest good. 

MILITIA FIELD MANUAL 

By LIEUTENANTS GEO. R. GUILD and FRED C. TEST, U. S. Army. Price 

$1.00, Postpaid. 

The Militia Field Manual is intended to be a field "instructor" for Militia troops 
(oflficers, noncommissioned officers, and privates) ; to enable these troops to acquire by 
study, and prior to going into the field, the many little points of a professional 
soldier's everyday life that are usually acquired only by experience. 

To this end the habitual daily field duties of every person, from the Colonel to the 
Private, are carefully detailed. These duties, though somewhat variable, are practically 
standard for all branches of the army when in the field, and, if studied, learned, and 
practiced by Militia troops, will undoubtedly advance these troops in their profession 
in the field. 

Probably the most difficult positions for militiamen to fill are those of "Captain" 
and "First Sergeant," and special emphasis has been laid on the duties of these 
individuals. 

Undoubtedly the most difficult thing for a militia company commander to do 
correctly is to feed his men. 

To remedy this and to start Militia Company commanders off on the correct 
method of rationing their men, means is provided whereby this rationing can be done 
as nearly automatically as possible; the idea being to get these troops started cor- 
rectly, then let them work the subject out for themselves. 

Blank forms (for the field) are described so clearly that a militiaman cannot go 
wrong on his forms if he will merely take the trouble to do as the text of his manual 
tells him to do. 

Camps, marches, etc., are clearly discussed — not in the usual "textbook" manner, 
but from a practical everyday-life point of view. 

The entire book is practical; it is the professional soldier's daily life in the field 
told in simple language and very much in detail. 

TECHNIQUE OF MODERN TACTICS 

SECOND EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGED 
By MAJORS BOND and McDONOUGH, U. S. Army. Price $2.65, Postpaid. 
Prepared especially to facilitate the study of tactics by the applicatory method. 
It contains in compact form a complete exposition of the principals of the Military 
Art and the Troop Leading Methods of forces of all sizes to include a division, 
giving the military student in a single volume the data that heretofore could be 
obtained only by search through a number of books. 

A WORKING KNOWLEDGE OF SPANISH 

SECOND EDITION 
By GARY I. CROCKETT, Lieutenant, U. S. Infantry. Price $.75, Postpaid. 
A Working Knowledge of Spanish originally prepared for the noncommissioned 
officer, is a concise simplified lingual system based on Lieutenant Cary I. Crockett's 
personal experience in the old Spanish-American Islands. Tt is an improvement on 
the usual language textbook for the author aims to make the student sufficiently 
familiar with the language for conversational use rather than for the purpose of 
reading. 

PUBLISHERS 

GEORGE BANTA PUBLISHING COMPANY 

Army and College Printers MENASHA. WISCONSIN 



MILITARY FIELD NOTEBOOK 

By LIEUTENANTS GEO. R. GUILD and ROBERT C. COTTON, 20th United 
States Infantry, Price 75 Cents. 

A handy, compact field notebook adopted for use of officers and enlisted men of 
the army. 

To those of the military profession whose duties require that they be in the field 
where reference books are not available, this little volume fits a need that requires the 
attention of all. The book, made up so it can be carried on one's person with ease, is 
a readv reference and a TIME SAVER when work must be accomplished with 
ACCURACY and SPEED. 

Special emphasis is laid on the fact that the book is made up of three distinct parts, 
namely, (a) The Owner's. Note Sheets, (b) Printed Field Notes, (c) The Detach- 
able Filler. There is a pencil holder attached on the back cover of the book. 

The Detachable Filler consists of two parts, (a) Message Pad, (b) Field Diary 
Sheets. The book can be used indefinitely, all that is required is the filling in of new 
pads as time goes on, which can be secured at a very small cost of 15c. Attention is 
also called to the WATER PROOF COVER which is another feature of the book, 
which can be obtained at an additional cost of 10c. 

Elements of Modern Field Artillery 

U. S. SERVICE 

By MAJOR H. G. BISHOP, 5th Field Artillery. Price $1.50, Postpaid. 

Elements of Modern Field Artillery is a compilation of the notes used in con- 
ference on the subject of Field Artillery at the Army Service Schools, covering 
only such matter as will be of value to officers of the other arms of the service in 
explanation of the powers and limitations of field artillery and matter, a knowledge 
of which will be of value to them when called upon to command mixed forces con- 
taining field artillery, or when required to inspect or umpire the work of field 
artillery commands. 

Elements of Modern Field Artillery is not a textbook for the field artillery man, 
but is intended solely as a reference for members of other branches of the service. 

The Field Artilery Drill Regulations of 1911 have been used as a basis in the 
preparation of the book and as far as practicable the text is made up of extracts 
from standard works on the subject. The views advanced are the views of those 
foremost in the profession and are in accordance with the Field Artillery Regulations. 



Field Sanitation 



By JAMES SPRIGGS WILSON, Major Medical Corps, United States Army. 
Price $1.00, Postpaid. 

The popularity and demand of Field Sanitation has caused us to put forth 
before the service a fourth edition which has just come from the press. 

Field Sanitation is intended particularly for the noncommissioned officers on 
whom so much depends for the success or failure of camp sanitation. 

For many years the armies of the world devoted themselves exclusively to_ a 
preparation for the infliction of the greatest possible punishment on a prospective 
enemy and unknowingly paid criminal disregard to the most elementary rules of 
health. 

It has only been within recent years that the problem of sanitation received 
serious consideration and Major James S. Wilson's Field Sanitation lends a guiding 
hand and leads one to a degree of knowledge, when observed, that will reduce 
serious sanitary conditions in camp to a minimum. 

publishers 
GEORGE BANTA PUBLISHING CO. 

Army and College Printers MENASHA, WISCONSIN 



The approved portable 
typewriter - for field use 

is the light, compact 

CoroNA 

This unique machine is used in the military or- 
ganizations of nearly every country in the world. 

It will handle all forms up to Sj/g ins. wide and 
down to a postage stamp. It will write in two colors, 
cut clean stencils and make excellent carbon copies. 

Its aluminum frame makes Corona practically in- 
des true table, and as a French olS&cer expressed it, ^^the 
machine has proved to us that it will withstand as 

much hardship as the 
toughest soldier.'^ 

Weight 6 lbs. 

With carr>dng case 9 lbs. 
^Case measures lOin. x ll^in. x ijin.) 




Price complete 

$50.00 



Corona Typewriter Co., 

Inc. 

Groton, N. Y. 



TROPHIES AND PRIZES 

For Military, Athletic and Sporting Events 

Of Quality as Designed and made for the U. S. Army 

and Navy, West Point Academy and 

U. S. Naval Academy 

Catalogues and Information upon Request 



BAILEY, BANKS & BIDDLE CO. 

Diamond Merchants, Jewelers, Silversmiths, Goldsmiths, Heralists 
PHIL AD ELP HI A 



Outdoor Equipage 

MEYER'S MILITARY SHOPS 

Riding Breeches 
and Habits 

TAILORS 

F Street, between 13th and 14th Sts. N. W. 
WASHINGTON, D. C. 

Complete Outdoor Equipage 

Ready to Wear 

For Men, Women and Children 

RIDING BREECHES, PUTTEE LEGGINS, NORFOLK JACKETS, 

HUNTING CLOTHES, BOOTS AND SHOES, MIDDY BLOUSE 

AND SKIRTS, TENTS AND SLEEPING BAGS, RIDING 

SKIRTS AND NORFOLK JACKETS, MOCCASINS 

Write for Catalogue 

Visit Our Camp Rooms When in Washington 





Established 1854 



For 

U. S. ARMY 

and 

NATIONAL GUARD 

Officers and Enlisted Men 

UNIFORMS 

Independent Military Organizations 

UNIFORMS 

Military Training Gamps 

UNIFORMS 

Boys Military and Society Clubs 

UNIFORMS 

Official National Outfitter 

Boy Scouts of America 

SIGMUND EISNER CO. 

Red Bank, N. J. 

Ne-.v York Office, 103 Fifth Avenue 



B. PASQUALE 
COMPANY 

115-117 Post St. 
SAN FRANCISCO, CAL. 

The Only 
Manufacturers 

Army and Navy 
Equipments 

and 

Uniforms 

on the 
Pacific Coast 



"Quality and Fit Guaranteed" 

(Write for Catalogue) 



RIDABOCK & COMPANY 

149-151 West 36th St., New York 



U, S. Army, National Guard Officers' Uniforms and 

Equipments 

Military School Uniforms and Equipments 

Military Training Camp Outfits 

Military Supplies, Military Textbooks 



Individual Departments and Workshops for the Respective 
Grades of Uniforms 



USED BY UNCLE SAM'S EXPERT RIFLEMEN 




Hoppe's 
Nitro Powder Solvent No. 9 

Trade Mark Registered 

For Cleaning High Power (Springfield) Rifies, 

Revolvers and Firearms of All Kinds 

A compound that will remove the residue of any 
high-power powder, including Black Powder. It will 
neutralize any residue and loosen metal fouling and 
leading that may be left in the barrel after cleaning, 
and prevent Pitting. No. 9 is the only Rifle-cleaning 
Solvent that will remove Rust, Metal Fouling and 
Leading. For cleaning the .22 cal. Rifles, Revolvers 
and Automatic Pistols it has no equal. Nitro Powder 
Solvent No. 9 is endorsed by the most prominent 
Riflemen in America. Used by U. S. Rifle Teams, 
and at Buenos Ayres, Argentine Matches. No Rifle- 
man or Quartermaster's Department should be with- 
out it. 

Sold by Sporting Goods Dealers and at Post Exchanges 



FRANK A. HOPPE, Sole Manufacturer, 



Station 0, Philadelphia, U. S. A. 



UII3 
19/ii 



:^i^ 



Uh3 









P— H 


1-^ — ~\ \—\ 1 — H -n 


•jnoL 


J3d S9|iuj iL/8 2-uiLu jad spjeA o8 
sdooJi pdx-w JO Aj|ueiU| 


^ 


? 
^ 






a. 


2: 




2 
JX 


So o 

-^ m > °- 




_i 


•^' -H ^ 1 § 


t\ 


3 7 






^ 1 


•^ ^ m ^ 






-n O) t- r\l 




c o 


■ Ro l\ 




-< 


ss- -;: 


k 


5. 
1 






2 


> 










^ 







cS- 








iiia>inoii 


■A 


J- 


Cavalry and FA -Walk 




110 


yards per min.- 3 3/4 miles per hour. 




1 1 1 1 1 1 


1 



I 



SP-IEA 0317 ujeJi jeqaioQ q^iM uojpenbs 



S|| 



u 
I", 
h: 
K 

B 

r- 



I^ 



lis.. 



I 



Field Battery with Combat Train 



320 Yards 



3- 



Co. Engr's. 
150 yards 




UI/3 

M6 

19/4 



ELElVTENTAFtY A4^AF» 




